Uno

Technical
Information
U NIVERSAL N ETWORK O PERATIONS (UNO)

UNO C ORE F EATURES U SER S G UIDE
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.3

CDMA 2000 1X
ENGLISH
MARCH 1, 2004
68P09257A19-A
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information
obtained herein. The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be
entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc.
reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products
(machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such
references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such
Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include,
or describe copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain
exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form,
distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola
material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be
copied, reproduced, distributed, merged, or modified in any manner without the express written
permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant
either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license
agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law.
No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior
written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or thirdparty products used in the product described herein are NOT faulttolerant
and are NOT designed, manufactured, or intended for use as online control equipment in the following
hazardous environments requiring failsafe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft
Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems
(High Risk Activities). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers
products or services profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
Copyright 2004 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
The body pages of this manual are printed on recycled paper.

Table of Contents
UNO Core Features
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi
Patent Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xl
Chapter 1: Monitoring the Cellular Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

The Cellular Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Management Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fault Management (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
FM Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
FM Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Performance Management (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
PM Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
PM Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Monitoring the State of the Cellular Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Command Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
CBSC Processor Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
CFC Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Monitoring Alarms in a Cellular Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Web Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Standards Used by UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
UNO Documentation Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
UNO Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Supported UNO Agents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Geographical Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Whats New in UNO 2.16.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
UNO Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features i

Table of Contents UNO 2.16.3
Invoking UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Invoking UNO from a Dedicated Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Logging into a Dedicated Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Invoking UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Invoking UNO from a Remote Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Log in from a Remote Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Invoking UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Applications on the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Applications Not on the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Application Launcher Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Invoking Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Invoking UNO Applications from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Setting Up Your Working Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Commands for Invoking UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Determining Your UNO Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Invoking UNO Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Invoking Online Help from the Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Invoking Online Help from a Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Invoking Online Help from a Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Invoking Online Help from a Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Common UNO Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Browse Destination Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Common UNO Menus and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Action Buttons in UNO Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Close Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Help Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Manipulating Tables in UNO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Determining Sort Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Sorting Fields in a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Changing Row and Column Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Changing Column (Field) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Changing Row (Record) Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Simultaneously Changing Column and Row Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Determining Field Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Selecting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Chapter 3: Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarm Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarm Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
ii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 Table of Contents
Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Invoking the Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Invoking from the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Invoking from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Opening an Alarm Manager from the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Invoking Alarm Manager from other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Launching an Additional Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Launching an Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Saving the Current Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Creating a New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Defining a Default Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Loading a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Deleting a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Printing Selected Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Printing the Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sorting the Alarm List from the View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sorting By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sorting by User Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Sorting by Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Invoking the Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Selecting a Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Displaying Cleared Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Displaying Selected Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Displaying All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Selecting Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Specifying Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Alarm List And Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Alarm Updates List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Alarm Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Searching by Attribute and Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Including Search by Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Ignoring Case or Regular Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Laying Out Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features iii

Actions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Deselect All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Clear Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Acknowledge Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Unacknowledge Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Enable Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Disable Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Query Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Displaying Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Alarm Details Report from the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Alarm Details Report by Double Mouse Click. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Showing Online Alarm Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Generating Alarm Documentation from the Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Sending an Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Alarm Notification from the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Alarm Notification by Right Mouse Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Displaying Correlation Input Alarms Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Correlation Input Alarm Report from the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Displaying Rule Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Rules Details Report from the Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Applications Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Configuring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Adding an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Modifying an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Invoking Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Command Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Alarm Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Download Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Device Alarm History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
BTS Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Agent Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Generating Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
CFC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Cisco Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
UNO Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Large Scale Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
iv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

PM Statistics Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Mouse Shortcuts SummaryAlarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Right Mouse Button Shortcuts: Search Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Central Alarm Acknowledge (Ack) Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Connecting Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Invoking Central Alarm Ack Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Launching from the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Invoking from Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Adding Remote-System Managers/Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Deleting Managers and Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Synchronizing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Printing Alarm Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
ShortcutsRight Mouse Button, Central ACK Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Chapter 4: Alarm Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Alarm Correlation in Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Alarm Correlation Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Information Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Default Correlation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
AMR Communications Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
ASUVoltage Regulator Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
ASU Communications Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
MCC 19 MHz Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
BBX 19 MHz Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Receive Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Reverse Noise Rise Very High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm: Sector 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Reverse Noise Rise Very High Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
CCD 19 MHz Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure (CSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
GPS Reference Source Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
HSO Reference Source Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
ELPA Module Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fan Low Speed Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Frame Power Supply Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
T1 Errors Reached Non Operational Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
PB Errors Reached Non Operational Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
LPAC: Low Fan Speed Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features v

LPAC: Controller Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

LPAC: Low Power Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure (MAWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Low 28V Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
DC-DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
MAWI: BBB Bus Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
PPP Session is Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
MLS Connection/Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Preselector Soft Failure Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Preselector Hard Failure Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SIF Fan Low Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SIF Multicoupler Communications Fault Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Shelf Power Supply Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Invoking Alarm Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Alarm Correlation Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Save Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Print Table and Print Rule Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Add and Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Actions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Right Mouse Button Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Set-Clear User Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Chapter 5: Large Scale Alarm Manager Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
System Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Connecting Multiple Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Invoking System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Adding Hosts to a System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Removing Hosts from a System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Copying a Large Scale System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Invoking User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Adding Hosts to a User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
vi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Removing Hosts from a User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Copying a Large Scale User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Automatic Connection Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Using Large Scale for Alarm Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Chapter 6: Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Alarm Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Alarm Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Alarm Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Starting the Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Running Multiple Alarm Browser Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Running the Alarm Browser from a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Display Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Launching an Additional Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Launching Alarm Manager from Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Saving the Current Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Creating a New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Defining a Default Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Loading a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Deleting a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Printing Selected Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Printing the Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Sorting the Alarm List from the View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Sorting By. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Sorting by Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Invoking the Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Selecting a Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Displaying Selected Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features vii

Displaying All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Selecting Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Specifying Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Searching by Attribute and Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Including Search by Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Ignoring Case or Regular Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Right Mouse Button Search Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Laying Out Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Actions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Deselect All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Displaying Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Alarm Details Report from the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Alarm Details Report by Mouse Clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Showing Online Alarm Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Generating Alarm Documentation from the Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Generating by Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Displaying Correlation Input Alarms Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Correlation Input Alarm Report from the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Displaying Rule Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Rules Details Report from the Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Applications Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Configuring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Adding an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Modifying an Application Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Invoking Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Command Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Alarm Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Download Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Device Alarm History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
BTS Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Agent Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Generating Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
CFC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Cisco Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
UNO Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
viii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

PM Statistics Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Large Scale Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Mouse Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Chapter 7: Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Invoking Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Invoking from Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Historical Alarm Reports Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Historical Alarm Reports Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Historical Alarms File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Generating Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Complete Device Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Complete Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Device Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Device Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8: Web Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Client and Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Structure and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Interaction with Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
User Predefined Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Display Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Introducing Web Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Invoking Web Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Management Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Display Options in Web Monitor Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Shortcuts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Monitoring Device State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
State Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Requesting Device State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Viewing Device Details from State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Device Details Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Viewing Alarms from Device Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Viewing Alarms from State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features ix

Monitoring Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Alarm Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Invoking the Alarm Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Viewing Alarm Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Requesting Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Using Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
State Management Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
State Monitor Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Device Details Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Alarm Management Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Filter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Alarm Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Device Scope Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Search Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Chapter 9: PM Measurements & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
PMT Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Monitored Data and Their Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
PMT Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Alarm Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Alarms Occurring in Successive Time Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
User-Defined Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Percentage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Threshold Definition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
PM Threshold Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Threshold Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Statistical Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Weighted Method of Calculating Historical Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Setting Threshold Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Historical Data Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Working with PM Measurements & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Invoking PM Measurements & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
PM Measurements & Alarms Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Function TabsOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Navigating and Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Table Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Standard Action Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Device Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
x UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Right Mouse Button Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Viewing Table Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Printing PM Measurements & Alarms Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
User Defined Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Measurement Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Defining UDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Viewing and Editing UDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Edit User Defined Measurement Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
View User Defined Measurement Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Deleting UDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Device-Independent Statistical Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Device Independent Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Defining Device-Independent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Editing Device-Independent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Edit Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Deleting Device-Independent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Viewing Device-Independent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Device-Dependent Statistical Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Device Dependent Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Defining Device-Dependent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Viewing Statistical Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Cloning Device-Dependent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Clone Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Defining Target Device for Cloned Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Editing Device-Dependent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Edit Device-Dependent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Deleting Device-Dependent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Viewing Device-Dependent Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Disabling Alarms on a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Disable Alarming Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Disabling Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Reversing Disable Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Viewing PM Statistics (For MM License No. 3 User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Invoking PM Statistics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Date/Time Setup for Thresholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Date/Time Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Defining Time Parameters for Thresholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Viewing Current Date/Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xi

Multiple Item Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75

Report Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Setting Up Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Viewing PM Measurements & Alarms Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
PMT Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
UNO Aggregation Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Associated Devices Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
PM Default Measurements Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
CFC Default Measurements Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
reload_thresh Threshold Monitoring Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Operators Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Operators Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
Removing PMT history_totals Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
PMT Monitoring Database and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
pmthresh Database Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Setup Parameters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Chapter 10: PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
User Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Report Status Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Invoking PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Invoking Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Invoking Locally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Getting Started in PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Setting Up Table Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Sorting Summary Tables By Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Changing Summary Table Sort Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Defining Summary Table Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Saving Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Other File Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Configuring Report Summary Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Table Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Setting Default Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Redefining Table Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Changing Column Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Setting Filters and Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
xii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Scheduling PM Reports in Single Reports Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Setting Up a Single Report Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Selecting a Report for Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Defining the Execution Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Report Parameters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Time Period Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Scheduling Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Output/Destination Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Report Outputs: Types and Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Working with Scheduled Single Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Changing Schedule Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Removing Reports from Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Viewing Schedule Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Stopping Report Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Retrying Report Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Using the Report Instances Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Viewing Report Instance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Report Instances Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Rerunning and Stopping Report Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Scheduling PM Reports in Group Reports Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Group Reports Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Group Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Defining Group Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Create Group Reports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Define Group Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Edit/View Group Reports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Working with Scheduled Group Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Deleting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Viewing Group Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Editing Group Report Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Adding, Editing and Deleting Reports in Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Monitoring PM Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Viewing PM Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Setting Up PM Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Collection Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Using the Reports Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Viewing Reports by Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Viewing Report Parameters from the Calendar Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Viewing Report Output from Reports Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Comparing Similar Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xiii

Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Chart View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Changing Data Source for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Changing the Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
SpreadSheet Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
Saving Graphs and Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Printing Graphs and Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
PM Reports Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Basic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
CFC/CDL Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Event Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Exception Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-122
Graphical Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-123
Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-125
Quality of Service Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-127
Chapter 11: Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Filter Builder Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Filter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Filter Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Filter Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Filter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Filter Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
DefaultFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Filter Builder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Launching the Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Invoking as an Independent Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Invoking from the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Invoking from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Invoking from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Filter Builder Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Printing Selected Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Printing All Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Saving Filter Builder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Applying a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Exiting from the Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
xiv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Adding or Modifying a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Agents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Alarm States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Problem Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Event and Event Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Complex Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Defining a Complex Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Expanding a Complex Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
Deleting a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Configuring Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Hiding and Showing Fields in the Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
Changing Label (Field) Positions in the Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Defining and Using User-Defined Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Using Default Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
View Menu: Refreshing the Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Action Menu: Invoking Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
OMCR Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Large Scale Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Setting Up a Large Scale User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Copying a Large Scale User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58
Large Scale Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
Defining a Large Scale Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
Modify/Delete Regular Filter on Remote Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
Expanding a Large Scale Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
Defining Filters for an Agent Connected to Two UNO Hosts . . . . . . . . . 11-62
Invoking the Large Scale Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Invoking the Large Scale Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Mouse Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
Chapter 12: OMCR Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
View Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Action Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Filter Settings and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
OMCR Relay Operational State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xv

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
OMCR Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Filter Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Alarm Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Restoring Connection to OMCR Relay Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Invoking OMCR Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
OMCR Relay Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Filter Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Actions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Filter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Filter Unset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Relay Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Relay Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Relay Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Relay Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Chapter 13: Element Manager Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Invoking the Element Manager Access Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Invoking Element Manager from the Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Invoking Element Manager from Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Setting Up Your Remote Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Installing MOSCAD MCP-S Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Server Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Using Element Manager Access Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Accessing an External Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Adding an External Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Deleting an External Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Connecting a Remote Host from UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Chapter 14: WAP for UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
WAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
UNO: Server and Client Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
xvi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Interaction with Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

WAP2UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Providing Secure Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Invoking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Display Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Handset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Navigation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Monitoring Device State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Summary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Alarms for Summary Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Detailed Devices for a Summary Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Alarms for Detailed Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
Monitoring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Alarm Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Alarm Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Summary Device Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
Detailed Device Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Glossary
Index
Master Index
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xvii

List of Figures
UNO Core Features
Figure No. Figure Title Page No.
1-1 Connectivity of UNO over the Cellular Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

2-1 Solaris Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2-2 Remote Solaris User Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2-3 Remote Solaris Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
2-4 UNO Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
2-5 UNO Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2-6 Browse Destination Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
2-7 Table Columns Before and After Resizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
2-8 Table Rows before and after Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
3-1 Alarm Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3-2 Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3-3 Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3-4 UNO Alarm Manager Save Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
3-5 Configuration Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
3-6 Properties: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3-7 Properties: Layout Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3-8 Alarm Manager Properties: Alarm List And Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3-9 Properties Alarm Updates List Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3-10 Alarm Correlations Tab Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
3-11 Properties, Alarm Browser Showing Relative Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
3-12 Properties Alarm Browser TabFixed Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
3-13 Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
3-14 View Layout Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
3-15 Alarm Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
3-16 Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
3-17 Configure Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
3-18 UNO Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
3-19 Right Mouse Button Search Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
3-20 UNO Configuration System Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
3-21 UNO Configuration Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xix

List of Figures UNO 2.16.3
3-22 UNO Configuration Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

3-23 Accept Flag Radio Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3-24 UNO Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3-25 Alarm Manager/Browser Main Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3-26 Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3-27 Central Ack Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3-28 Name/Address Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3-29 Non-Shared Agent(s) Error Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-30 ErrorCannot Delete Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3-31 Notice of a Non-Synchronized Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3-32 No Non-Synchronized AlarmsDialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-33 UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-34 Highlighted Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-35 UNO Central Ack Alarm Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-36 Configuration InformationSynchronization Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3-37 Right Mouse Button Shortcut Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
4-1 Alarm Correlation Information Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Alarm Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-3 UNO Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-4 UNO Alarm Import Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-5 Rule-Name Conflict Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-6 Alarm ID Conflict Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-7 View Rules Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-8 UNO Alarm Export Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-9 Alarm Correlation Exit Application Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-10 Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-11 Additional Conditions Definition FieldRule Element #1 . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-12 Additional Conditions Definition FieldAll Rule Elements Except #1 4-46
4-13 Add Rule Dialog BoxResulting Action Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-14 Added Additional Text Definition Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-15 Time Boundary Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-16 Overall Statistics Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-17 Rule Activity Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-18 Post-Reset Rule Statistics Rule Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-19 Typical Alarm Set-Clear Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
5-1 UNO Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2 Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3 Large Scale System Configuration Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4 Configuration Question Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-5 Copy Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
xx UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 List of Figures
5-6 Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-7 Large Scale User Configuration Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-8 Copy Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-9 Right Button Shortcuts in Setup Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
6-1 Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-2 Alarm Browser Save Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-3 Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-4 Search Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-5 Shortcuts Search Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-6 View Layout Components Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6-7 Alarm Details Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-8 Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-9 Configure Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-10 UNO Log Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
7-1 Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2 Reports List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-3 Agent-type Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-4 Agent-types List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-5 Agent-type Button and Agent Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-6 Use Fixed Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-7 Device Type Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-8 Error MessageComplete Device Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-9 Error MessageDevice Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-10 Alarm Id Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-11 UNO Historical Alarm ReportsComplete Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-12 Complete Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-13 Complete Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-14 Device Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-15 Device Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
8-1 State and Alarm Management Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 Web Monitor Structure and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-4 UNO Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-5 Enter Network Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-6 Web Monitor Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-7 Web Monitor Function Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-8 Web Monitor Shortcuts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-9 Web Monitor State Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-10 State Management - Summary Device Scope List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-11 Device Attributes: Parent Type and Value Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxi

8-12 State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

8-13 State Monitor and Requested Device Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-14 Device Details Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-15 Show Alarms Option and Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-16 State Monitor - Show Alarms Option Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8-17 Alarm Management Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8-18 Web Monitor Alarm Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-19 Maximum Rows Display Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-20 Alarm Monitor - Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8-21 Default Search Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8-22 Invoking Search from State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8-23 State Monitor Search Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8-24 Device Details Search Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8-25 Invoking Search from Filters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8-26 Filter Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8-27 Narrow Scope Alarm Search Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8-28 Wide Scope Alarm Search Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
9-1 Quality of Service Alarm for CDMA Carrier on CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-2 Quality of Service Alarm in UNO Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-3 Threshold Definition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9-4 Statistical Threshold Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-5 UNO PM Measurements & Alarms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-6 PM Measurements & Alarms Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9-7 PM Measurements & Alarms Functions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-8 Device Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9-9 Right Mouse Button Shortcuts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9-10 Definition Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9-11 Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9-12 Existing Entry Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9-13 User Defined Measurement Setup Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-14 Delete Selected Entries Confirm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9-15 Device Independent Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9-16 Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9-17 Exclusive Parameters Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9-18 Incorrect Value Error Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9-19 Overwrite Existing Entry Confirm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9-20 Edit Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9-21 Delete Selected Entries Confirm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
9-22 Device Dependent Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
9-23 Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
9-24 Moving Average/Standard Deviation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
xxii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

9-25 Clone Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

9-26 Invalid Target Device Error Message Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
9-27 Clone Threshold Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9-28 Edit Device-Dependent Threshold Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
9-29 Disable Alarming Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9-30 Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
9-31 Disable Alarming Tab with Added Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9-32 PM Statistics Display on Device Dependent Peg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
9-33 Date/Time Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
9-34 Date/Time Setup Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
9-35 Date/Time Setup Report Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
9-36 Report Setup Dialog Box - Default State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
9-37 Report Setup and Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
9-38 UNO Aggregation Level Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
10-1 Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10-2 UNO Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-3 Enter Network Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-4 Loading Status Message Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-5 PM R eports Main Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10-6 View Menu Sort By Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10-7 View Menu Sort Order Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10-8 Sort By: Agent Name and Sort Order - Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10-9 View Menu Layout Components Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10-10 PM Reports File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-11 Table Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10-12 Table Properties Report Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10-13 Table Properties Group Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10-14 Table Properties Group Reports Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10-15 Default Filters and Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10-16 PM Reports Actions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10-17 Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10-18 Schedule Report Execution - Report Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
10-19 Report Parameters Tab: Required Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10-20 Report Parameter Tooltip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10-21 Report Parameter Error Message: No Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10-22 Schedule Report Execution Time Period Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
10-23 Schedule Report Execution Scheduling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
10-24 Scheduling Tab - Immediate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
10-25 Scheduling Tab - Timed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10-26 Scheduling Tab - Daily Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10-27 Scheduling Tab - Weekly Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxiii

10-28 Scheduling Tab - Monthly Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

10-29 Schedule Report Execution Output/Destination Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
10-30 Completed Report: Output Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
10-31 Report Output: Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
10-32 Report Output: JChart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
10-33 Report Output: Spreadsheet and Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10-34 Modify Report Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
10-35 Deleted Report Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
10-36 View Report Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
10-37 Abort Execution Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
10-38 Report Instances Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10-39 Report Instances Window Retry Execution Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
10-40 Aborting a Report from Report Instances Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
10-41 Group Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
10-42 PM Reports Groups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
10-43 Create Group - Define Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
10-44 Incorrect Group Execution Time Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
10-45 Edit/View Group Reports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
10-46 Modify Group Definitions - Define Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
10-47 Modify Group Definition Edit/View Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
10-48 PM Reports Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
10-49 Collection Status Monitor Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
10-50 PM Data Transfer Display in Collection Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10-51 Reports Calendar at Invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
10-52 Reports Calendar - Viewing by Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
10-53 Report Parameters Window in Reports Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
10-54 Compared Reports List Dialog Box Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
10-55 Report Chart View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
10-56 Low-level Device Report: Local Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10-57 JClass Chart Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
10-58 Zooming in JClass Chart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10-59 Spreadsheet Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10-60 Save As (Graphical Output) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10-61 Print Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
10-62 Scheduled Reports Summary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
10-63 Report Execution Summary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
10-64 Group Summary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
10-65 Group Reports Summary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
10-66 Report Calendar Table Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
11-1 Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11-2 Add Filter Main Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
xxiv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

11-3 Agent Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18

11-4 Device Tab/Select Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11-5 Select by Device ID Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11-6 Select by Device ID Tab/Cell Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11-7 Select by Hierarchy Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11-8 Device Tab/Specify Cell Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
11-9 Device Type Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11-10 Telephony State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
11-11 Administrative State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
11-12 Operational State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
11-13 Usage State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
11-14 Standby Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11-15 Availability Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
11-16 Alarm State Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
11-17 Problem Description Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
11-18 Event Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11-19 Save Complex Filter Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
11-20 UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
11-21 Filter Builder Main Dialog Box Large Scale Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
11-22 UNO Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58
12-1 OMCR Relays Functionality Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12-2 Reconnect Question. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12-3 OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12-4 Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-5 Alarm Manager of OMCR-Relay Applied Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12-6 OMCR Relays Filter Specification Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-7 Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
13-1 Element Manager Access Main Window Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 Element Manager Access: Connect Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-3 EM Server Types Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-4 Environment Setting Information Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13-5 Telnet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13-6 Information Accessed from OMCR Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13-7 External Host Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13-8 External Host Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13-9 Confirming Connection is Valid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-10 Communication Connection - Failed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-11 Warning - Invalid Host Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-12 Invoking Element Manager from Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-13 Remote Access Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxv

14-1 WAP Connection Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14-2 WAP Server-Client Structure and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14-3 UNO/WAP Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14-4 State and Alarm Management Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14-5 WAP2UNO Security Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14-6 Logon Stages: User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14-7 Logon Stages: Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-8 Handset and Display Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-9 Online Help: Context, Browser Menu and Help Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14-10 WAP2UNO Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14-11 Exit or Change User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14-12 Main Menu: State Management Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-13 Request for All OMCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-14 Request for BTSs Scoped by OMCR ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14-15 Request for All BTSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14-16 Request for Summary Device Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14-17 Request for Summary Device Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
14-18 Main Menu: Alarm Management Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14-19 Alarms List Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
14-20 Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14-21 Alarm Details Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14-22 Main Menu: Preferences Option and Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
14-23 Alarm Filters - Saving Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
14-24 Crit.Severity List and Sum.Dev.Severity Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14-25 Summary Device Severity - Saving Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14-26 User Preferences: Detailed Device Severity Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-27 Detailed Device Severity - Saving Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
xxvi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

List of Tables
UNO Core Features
Table No. Table Title Page No.

2-1 UNO Documentation Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 UNO Feature Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-3 UNO 2.16.3 Supported Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-4 Geographical Map Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-5 New Features and Changes in UNO 2.16.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-6 Software Products in UNO 2.16.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-7 Applications Available on Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-8 UNO Applications Not Available on Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2-9 Solstice Enterprise Manager Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-10 Application Launcher Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-11 Specifying Shell and Display Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2-12 Commands for Invoking UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-13 UNO Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-14 UNO Print Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-15 Browse Destination Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2-16 Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2-17 Sort Order Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-18 Positioning Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
3-1 Alarm Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 Alarm Manager Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3 Main Dialog Box Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-4 Main Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-5 Configuration Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-6 Print Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-7 Basic Sort Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-8 Alarm Manager Sort Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-9 Display Attributes according to Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-10 Properties Positioning Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-11 Properties Positioning Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-12 Alarm Manager Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-13 Alarm Manager Date/Time Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxvii

List of Tables UNO 2.16.3
3-14 Properties: Alarm List And Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

3-15 Properties Alarm Updates List Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
3-16 Properties Alarm Correlation Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
3-17 Alarm Browser Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
3-18 Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
3-19 View Layout Components Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
3-20 Configure Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
3-21 UNO Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
3-22 Alarm Manager Right Mouse Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
3-23 UNO Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
3-24 Central Ack Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
3-25 UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97
4-1 Alarm Parameters for Default Correlation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
4-2 Alarm Correlation Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
4-3 Alarm Correlation Dialog Box Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
4-4 Alarm Correlation Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
4-5 UNO Alarm Import Dialog Box Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
4-6 UNO Alarm Export Dialog Box Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
4-7 Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
4-8 Additional Conditions Definition Field ElementsRule Element #1 . . . . . .4-44
4-9 Available ConditionsAll Rule Elements Except #1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
4-10 Resulting Action Definition Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
4-11 Additional Text Definition Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
4-12 Alarm Correlation Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
5-1 Large Scale Configuration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5-2 UNO Configuration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
5-3 Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
5-4 Large Scale System Configuration Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
5-5 Copy Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
5-6 Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5-7 Large Scale Configuration Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
6-1 Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
6-2 Alarm Browser Command Line Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6-3 Main Dialog Box Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
6-4 Main Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6-5 Configuration Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
6-6 Print Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
6-7 Basic Sort Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
6-8 Sort Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
xxviii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 List of Tables
6-9 Display Attributes according to Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29

6-10 Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
6-11 View Layout Component Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
6-12 Configure Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
6-13 UNO Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-60
6-14 Alarm Browser Right Mouse Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
7-1 Historical Alarm Reports Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
7-2 Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
7-3 Historical Alarms Report Main Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
7-4 Required Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
7-5 UNO Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
7-6 Complete Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
7-7 Complete Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7-8 Device Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7-9 Device Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
8-1 Web Monitor UNO Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
8-2 State Management Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
8-3 Common Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
8-4 State Monitor Menu and Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
8-5 Device Details Menu and Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
8-6 Alarm Management Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
8-7 Alarm Monitor Menu and Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
8-8 Search Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
8-9 Device Scope Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
8-10 Search By Parameters/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
9-1 Performance Management Alarm Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
9-2 Value-Type SQL Formula Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
9-3 PM Measurements & Alarms Command Line Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
9-4 PM Measurements & Alarms Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
9-5 PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
9-6 PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
9-7 Common Tab Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
9-8 Button Conventions - Standard Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
9-9 Right-Mouse Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
9-10 Definition Details Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
9-11 Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
9-12 Device Independent Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
9-13 Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
9-14 Device Dependent Tab Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxix

List of Tables UNO 2.16.3
9-15 Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

9-16 Clone Threshold Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
9-17 Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
9-18 Date/Time Setup Dialog Box Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
9-19 Report Setup Dialog Box Fields and Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76
9-20 Devices and Associated Statistical Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82
9-21 Default Measurements for PM Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-87
9-22 Default Measurements for CFC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88
9-23 pmthresh_Database Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-96
9-24 th_sys_config: Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-97
10-1 PM Reports Status Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
10-2 PM Reports Main Window Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
10-3 PM Reports Main Window Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
10-4 Table Properties Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23
10-5 Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
10-6 PM Reports Report Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32
10-7 Schedule Report Execution Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
10-8 Schedule Report Execution Time Period Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-38
10-9 Schedule Report Execution Scheduling Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-41
10-10 Schedule Report Execution Output Tab Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47
10-11 Report Instances Window Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-61
10-12 Create Group - Define Group Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-69
10-13 Edit/View Group Reports Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-72
10-14 Data Collection Monitor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-86
10-15 Data Collection Monitor Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-87
10-16 Reports Calendar Window Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-90
10-17 Compared Reports List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-96
10-18 Report Window Chart View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-98
10-19 Spreadsheet Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-103
10-20 Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-105
10-21 Print Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-106
10-22 PM Reports Right Mouse Button Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-110
10-23 CDMA - Basic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-112
10-24 CDMA - CFC/CDL Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120
10-25 Event Summary Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-121
10-26 CDMA Exception Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-122
10-27 CDMA - Graphical Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-123
10-28 CDMA - Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-125
10-29 CDMA - Quality Of Service Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-127
xxx UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 List of Tables
11-1 Filter Builder Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6

11-2 Filter Builder Main Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
11-3 Main Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
11-4 Add/Modify Filter Main Dialog Box Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
11-5 Filter Specification Tab Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
11-6 Agent Tab Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
11-7 Select Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20
11-8 Select by Device ID Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
11-9 Select by Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-24
11-10 Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-27
11-11 Specify Cell Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-29
11-12 Device Type Tab Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31
11-13 Telephony State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-33
11-14 ISO State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35
11-15 Alarm State Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-40
11-16 Problem Description Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-42
11-17 Event Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-44
11-18 Save Complex Filter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-46
11-19 UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-49
11-20 Filter Builder Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-64
12-1 OMCR Relays Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
12-2 OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
12-3 OMCR Relay Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
12-4 OMCR Relay Control Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
14-1 Handset Buttons for WAP2UNO Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
14-2 WAP2UNO Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
14-3 WAP2UNO Navigating Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxxi

Foreword
Universal Network Operations (UNO), based on Telecommunication
Management Network (TMN) standards, is a Motorola single, integrated, open-
network, telecommunications management system. UNO lets you manage an
entire cellular system, from your most up-to-date network elements to your
legacy systems.
The UNO software suite provides remote-management services over both
analog and digital cellular networks, which you can view from a single
workstation or multiple workstations. The large number of UNO applications
enables you to manage your cellular operations efficiently and economically.
With UNO you have the flexibility you need to manage your own network,
while providing cutting-edge customer services.
UNO Documentation Suite

Manual Part Number
Software Installation Guide 68P09257A18
UNO Core Features 68P09257A19
Command Center Suite 68P09257A20
Testing and Tuning Applications 68P09257A21
PM Enhanced Applications 68P09257A22
Administrative Guide 68P09257A23
Expert Users Guide 68P09257A24
Expert Installation Guide 68P09257A25
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxxiii

Standards Used by UNO UNO 2.16.3
Standards Used by UNO

The UNO network management system is a distributed application whose
framework is based on the TMN series of international standards produced by
the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) and included in
Recommendations M.3100.
The ITU defines standard management functions that are addressed by network
management systems (ITU X.730/7400) including configuration, fault,
security, accounting, and performance management.
Text Conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this guide to point out information
that must be read. This information may be set-off from the surrounding text,
but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters:
Note
Warning
Important
Caution
Note
Note: Presents additional, helpful, noncritical information.
Warning: Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous

situation that could cause personal injury.
Important
Important: Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation
or provides additional information to help you understand a topic
or concept.
Caution
Caution: Presents information to identify a condition in which equipment
damage could occur. The necessary information is provided to
avoid situations that could result in such damage.
xxxiv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 Foreword
Typographical Conventions
Typographical conventions for presenting different kinds of information are
described in this table:
Typographical Conventions
Text with this Format: Represents:
OMC-R Label captions, table text
The Report Section window appears: Table headings, titles, labels, caption
labels, window names, function names,
menu options
Press the <Return> key Function Keys
Press <Alt><F4> Function Keys used in sequence (press

and hold the first key while pressing the
second key)
Enter: install Code, that is a set of instructions given

to or given by the computer and com-
mands to be typed exactly as shown.
See Figure 1-1a Hypertext and cross-references
The Report Section window appears. Used after procedure steps to indicate
results or comments
Chapter/Appendix Title
Chapter 1: UNO
Heading 1
Heading 1
Heading 2 Heading 2
Heading 3 Heading 3
Heading 4 Heading 4
a.Cross-references, shown in blue, hyperlinked text, can only be seen in the electronic
format, not in the hard copy. You can click on these hyperlinks to jump to the relevant
text or graphic. This is an example of hyperlinked text: For more information see
Manual Changes on page xxxviii.
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxxv

General Safety UNO 2.16.3
General Safety
Remember!. . . safety depends on you!

General safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,
service and repair of the equipment described in this manual. Failure to comply
with these precautions, or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual,
violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the
equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability for the customers failure to
comply with these requirements. The safety precautions listed, represent
warnings of certain dangers of which we are aware. You, the product user,
should follow these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the
safe operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor AC power cable, the power cable must be either plugged into
an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a three-contact to
two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact adapter must have the
grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground)
at the power outlet. The power-cable, power-jack and matching plug must
meet International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere

Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes.
Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a
definite safety hazard.
xxxvi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 Foreword
Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must:
not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service Personnel
or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove equipment covers for
internal subassembly, component replacement or internal adjustment
not replace components when the power cable is connected. Under certain
conditions, a dangerous electric current may exist even with the power
cable removed
always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them
Do not service or adjust alone

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of
rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Use caution when handling a CRT

Breakage of a CathodeRay Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity scattering of
glass fragments (implosion). To prevent a CRT implosion, avoid rough
handling or jarring of the equipment. A CRT should be handled only by
qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety-mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure that
safety features are maintained.
24 Hour Support Service

If you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of your
equipment, please contact the Motorola Customer Network Resolution Center,
CNRC (formerly Motorola Cellular Support Center, MCSC) for immediate
assistance. The 24 hour telephone number for CNRC is:
Within U.S.A. and Canada 1 (800) 433-5202
Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1 (847) 632-5390
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxxvii

Manual Revisions UNO 2.16.3
Manual Revisions
Manual Changes
Manual Changes are changes that occur after the printing date and are
incorporated into your manual by a Cellular Manual Revision (CMR). The
information in this manual is updated, as required, by a CMR, when new
options and procedures become available for general use or when engineering
changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be
retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list of all
applicable CMRs contained in this manual.
Receiving Updates
Motorola Technical Information Products and Services maintains a customer
database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shipped since
the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identified in this
database, is a key individual (such as the Documentation Coordinator or
Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates from Technical
Information Products and Services as they are released.
To ensure that your facility receives updates for your manuals, it is important
that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date. Therefore, if you
have corrections or wish to make changes to the information in our database
(such as assigning a new key individual), please contact Technical
Information Products and Services at:
MOTOROLA, INC.
Technical Information Products and Services
1501 West Shure Drive
Suite 3223A
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
Within U.S.A. and Canada 1 (800) 872-8225
Outside of U.S.A.and Canada +1 (847) 632-4730
FAX: 1 (847) 632-4734
Reporting Manual Errors

If you find an error or omission in your manual, please write to us at the
Technical Information Products and Services contact address. Be sure to
include your name, address, the complete manual title and the product
identification number.
xxxviii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 Foreword
Patent Notification
This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the
following patents and other patents pending:
4128740 5047762 5220936 4775998 5170485 D347004
4661790 5047762 5268933 4945570 5235612 4636791
4860281 5128959 5311143 5073909 5278871 4829543
5036515 5212826 4369516 5157693 5329635 5021801
5119508 5261119 4742514 5224122 4573017 5105435
5204876 5305468 4896361 5276906 4811377 5187811
5247544 4302845 5060265 5321737 4984219 5241650
5301353 4709344 5144644 4517561 5081641 5291475
4193036 5048116 5222078 4775999 5170492 D349689
4667172 4881082 5271042 4956854 5235614 4644351
4866710 5130663 5311176 5073971 5280630 4833701
5036531 5214675 4369520 5159283 5339337 5022054
5121414 5263047 4751725 5226058 4581602 5111454
5204977 5307022 4910470 5276907 4811380 5193102
5251233 4312074 5065408 5323391 4984290 5241688
5301365 4710724 5146609 4519096 5083304 5295136
4237534 4885553 5222123 4797947 5182749 RE31814
4672657 5055800 5274844 4970475 5239294 4646038
4870686 5133010 5311571 5075651 5285447 4837800
5038399 5214774 4369522 5159593 D337328 5023900
5123014 5263052 4754450 5228029 4590473 5111478
5207491 5307512 4914696 5276911 4992753 5195108
5255292 4350958 5067139 5325394 4811404 5243653
5303240 4726050 5146610 4549311 5090051 5243653
4268722 4887050 5222141 4799253 5184349 5297161
4694484 5055802 5274845 4972355 5239675 4649543
4872204 5140286 5313489 5077532 5287544 4843633
5040127 5216692 4375622 5159608 D342249 5028885
5127040 5309443 4764737 5230007 4591851 5113400
5210771 4354248 4918732 5276913 4817157 5200655
5257398 5263055 5068625 5327575 4998289 5245611
5303289 4729531 5152007 4550426 5093632 5299228
4282493 4887265 5222251 4802236 5185739 4847869
4696027 5058136 5276685 4972432 5241545 5030793
4873683 5142551 5319712 5077741 5287556 5117441
5041699 5218630 4485486 5170392 D342250 5203010
5127100 5265122 4764849 5233633 4616314 5245629
5212815 5309503 4941203 5276915 4827507 5301056
5259021 4367443 5155448 5329547 5020076 4654867
5303407 4737978 5224121 4564821 5095500 4852090
4301531 4893327 5276707 4803726 5187809 5031193
4704734 5060227 5321705 4979207 5241548 5119040
4876740 5142696 4491972 5077757 5289505 5204874
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxxix

Revision History UNO 2.16.3
Revision History
Manual Number
68P09257A19-A
Manual Title
UNO Core Features
Version Information
The Revision History table lists the manual version, date of version, and
remarks about the version.
Revision History
Version Level Date Issue Remarks
1 April 15, 2003 Preliminary
2 August 30, 2003 FOA
A March 1, 2004 GA
xl UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Chapter 1: Monitoring the Cellular Network
The UNO cellular network management software provides powerful
applications that enable you to monitor the cellular network from a central
point:
Command Center, which monitors the state of the cellular system
Alarm Manager, which monitors the alarms generated by the devices in the
cellular system
CBSC Processor Utilization, which describes how to identify bottleneck
central processors and capacity insufficiencies within Centralized Base
Station Controllers (CBSC)
CFC Monitoring, which collects data about main Call Final Classes (CFC)
used for the initial threshold setup of Performance Management
Thresholding, and monitors the most important CFCs. CFC Monitoring
also identifies the counts that exceed tolerance limits
PM Reports, which sets up and executes Performance Management
(PM) reports
There are also applications that enable you to customize the way information is
displayed to effectively monitor the:
State of the cellular system
State of the alarm system
Two powerful network management functions utilize this functionality,
enabling you to effectively and efficiently monitor the network from a central
point:
Fault Management (FM)
Performance Management (PM)
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features 1-1

The Cellular Network UNO 2.16.3
The Cellular Network

UNO connects to the agent devices in the system. These agents continually
report the status of the devices to which they are connected and the alarms
generated by the devices.
Figure 1-1 shows the connectivity of UNO over the cellular network. This
connectivity enables UNO to perform monitoring tasks.
Protocols
UNO
CLI
OMCR
CMIP
SwitchMATE CAT
Applications Compaq
HLR
UNO Third Party MR
Data 3Com AAA

TCM
TCP/IP
SNMP -Traps only CEM

Databases Cisco
(Informix) PDSN
HA WAN
AAA Mgr
Tier2 Switch
Platform WAN Router Cisco
MWFM Works
SUN Solstice Management
Information Server
Zhone IMACS
MOSCAD MCP-S
SNMP - Full Support
3Com
IWU Circuit
TCM
IWU Packet
PDSN
CEM
HA/HACN
Figure 1-1: Connectivity of UNO over the Cellular Network
1-2 UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 1: Monitoring the Cellular Network
Management Tools

FM refers to the tracking and management of faults and failures of network
objects. During FM, the fault status (operating/not operating) of network
objects is monitored continually so that changes can be tracked. Status changes
can be tracked either over specified periods, or continually.
FM Tools
UNO provides these tools for tracking and managing faults and failures:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
Historical Alarm Reports
Database Access Application (Formula One)
Network Management Reports
FM Benefits
FM provides the following network-management benefits:
Analog/Digital FM
Immediate event identification and notification
Rapid problem solution
Minimal system down-time
Faster alarm management and control
Customized alarm management and viewing

Management Tools UNO 2.16.3

PM monitors the quality of service the cellular network provides. Alarms,
generated by a specific agent, alert you to a decline in the quality of the service
provided, as well as indicate the possible sources of the problem.
PM uses quality indicators to manage the performance of network objects. A
device that is correctly maintained, and working without any faults, may yield a
Fault Status of very good. However, it is possible that the same device can be
overloaded and unable to handle its workload, thereby yielding low
performance.
UNO maintains a detailed database containing system-performance
information over time-periods for every agent type installed by UNO Manager.
Using graphic reports generated by a database-access application (for example,
Formula One), you can monitor every aspect of system performance.
PM Tools
UNO provides these tools for monitoring quality of service:
Alarm Manager
Database-Access Application (Formula One)
PM Reports
CFC Monitoring
PM Benefits
PM provides the following network-management benefits:
Analog/Digital PM
Immediate event identification and notification
Rapid problem-solution
Minimal system down-time
Faster alarm management and control

Monitoring the State of the Cellular Network

These applications allow you to monitor the state of the cellular network:
Command Center
CBSC Processor Utilization
CFC Monitoring
PM Reports
Web Monitor
WAP2UNO
Command Center
With a graphical icon-based interface, the Command Center allows you to
monitor the state of a cellular system, including:
Configuration of both individual and grouped devices
Individual device states
Device-group states
The Command Center comprises a Summary Bar Area and Main Display Area.
The Summary Bar displays Summary Squares, each displaying information
about the state of a summary group of a specific device type, such as Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) or Operations and Maintenance Center-Radio
(OMC-R) devices.
By clicking on a Summary Square, you invoke a status screen that is displayed
in the Main Display Area. The status screens are arranged in a hierarchy. From
the first status screen, you can invoke a series of lower-level status screens,
each giving more specific information.
Thus, the Command Center provides information ranging from an overall view
of the state of the cellular network to specific information about individual
devices or cards.
For more information, see Command Center. Command Center Suite.

Monitoring the State of the Cellular Network UNO 2.16.3

CBSC Processor Utilization enables Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
users to identify bottleneck central-processors and capacity insufficiencies
within Centralized Base Station Controllers (CBSC, and assists in determining
call-processing events that cause excessive processor utilization.
The functionality of CBSC Processor Utilization includes:
Providing operators with CBSC processor utilization model
Support for cellular network operators to monitor Central Processing Unit
(CPU)
Locating processors with insufficient capacity
Rapid assessment of key processor utilization on CBSC
The SAR Monitor interface displays information about processor utilization.
The Historical Display interface has two tabs, the Chart tab and Spreadsheet
tab. The Chart tab displays a graphical summary of processor utilization for a
24 hour period; the Spreadsheet tab displays statistical data in numerical form
for 24 hours prior to the time of the most recent data Reload (refresh). The
spreadsheet data (Formula 1) displays the percentage of utilization in each,
consecutive ten-minute period during the 24 hour report period.
The Breakdown Display has two versions, Breakdown by CP and Breakdown
by BTS, each of which has two tabs, a Chart tab and Spreadsheet tab. The Chart
tab for Breakdown by CP displays the Communications Processor (CP) event
loads of selected devices at a specific time in a bar graph format; the
Spreadsheet tab numerically expresses total utilization and values for device
and CP event loads. The values displayed are for every device selected in the
System Tree.
The Chart tab, for the Breakdown by BTS, displays a bar graph of total
utilization of, and a breakdown by, the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) load
expressed in bar graph form. The Spreadsheet tab for Breakdown by BTS
numerically expresses the value of total utilization as well as a numerical
expression of values for a breakdown of the BTS load per selected BTS.
For more information, see CBSC Processor Utilization. PM Enhanced
Applications.

CFC Monitoring
CFC Monitoring alerts the user about performance problems that cannot easily
be identified using alarms. Users can monitor the most important Call Final
Class (CFC), and determine which counts exceed tolerance limits. Simple
drill-down actions allow the identification of problems within the system. CFC
Monitoring also enables you to determine, or narrow down the search for, the
exact device or subset of offending devices that causes a problem.
CFC monitoring enables you to collect data about main CFCs that are used for
the initial threshold setup of Performance Management Thresholding.
The functionality of CFC Monitoring includes:
Identification of high CFC counts
Finding low-level devices (Radio Frequency [RF] BTS, Sectors and
Carriers) that cause high CFC counts
Display of statistical data that can be saved and reused
Enabling of the initial threshold settings for the Performance Management
Threshold subsystem
Updates every 15 minutes
For more information, see CFC Monitoring. PM Enhanced Applications.
PM Reports
Performance Management measurements are used to evaluate and engineer
system configuration for optimal performance. Performance Management
measurements are broken down into these operations:
Meteringkeeping counts of events or conditions that occur in
the subsystem
Collectionthe OMC-R is responsible for gathering metering-information
from components of the subsystem, and transferring them to the OMC-R
Processor for loading into the PM database
Analysis and presentation (reports)the Application Processor prepares
reports that convey information in a useful format for traffic engineering
and other possible uses
Transfer of PM data to remote hoststhe OMC-R can transfer this data to
other UNIX hosts. This capability allows customized analysis and report
generation on a separate machine.
PM reports are generated from PM records and other information in the
Performance Management database.
For more information, see PM Reports. UNO Core Features.

Monitoring Alarms in a Cellular Network UNO 2.16.3
Monitoring Alarms in a Cellular Network

Alarm Management is a primary task in the network management system. The
UNO Alarm Manager provides a useful tool for managing system alarms.
Alarms typically go through a cycle from the time an alarm enters the system
until the alarm is cleared.
The main components in the alarm cycle are:
Alarm Manager, to monitor the system from a central location
Alarm Browser, to view current alarms
Web Monitor, to view current alarms by Netscape Browser
Historical Alarm Reports, to create reports on historical alarms
WAP2UNO, to monitor the remote network through a wireless connection
The Alarm Manager is a graphical and tabular tool that can combine alarms
from multiple agent-platforms, and allows you to monitor the entire system
from a central location. The Alarm Manager displays current alarms in tabular
form. In Large Scale mode, the Alarm Manager monitors alarms across
multiple UNO hosts.
The UNO Alarm Manager provides:
Dynamic updating to view all incoming alarms, according to your needs
Fast and easy access to many other UNO applications directly from the
Alarm Manager
Easy conversion of the Interface to an Alarm Browser to view historical alarms
The Alarm Manager can receive alarms from a large number of systems
simultaneously, and handles a high alarm-arrival rate.
The Alarm List shows all of the alarms reported in the system, as defined by
your selected filter. The alarms are color coded for easy identification of
severity level. Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning levels are shown.
Both the table and graphical display show the following alarm information:
Total (number of alarms), according to severity
Total number of unacknowledged alarms, according to severity
Total number of uncleared alarms, according to severity
For more information, see Alarm Manager. UNO Core Features.

Alarm Browser
Alarm Browser functionality is similar to that of the Alarm Manager, except
that the Alarm Manager views current alarms, whereas the Alarm Browser only
views historical alarms. The Alarm Browser shows the time and date range of
alarms displayed in the Alarm List.
For more information, see Alarm Browser. , UNO Core Features.
Web Monitor
The Web Monitor provides the UNO user with remote view-only access to
current limited FM and PM information. Web Monitor enables you to view two
types of information:
Alarm information
Device State information
Web Monitor also provides data-filtering search-and-sort options, as well as
refresh capability.
For more information, see Web Monitor. UNO Core Features.

Historical Alarm Reports is a Graphic User Interface (GUI) based application
that enables you to create reports on historical alarms.
You can create historical alarm reports for individual alarm records for all
analog and digital agents that are defined in your system, and you can review
summary information about the alarms. The reports contain information about
device types, devices, the severity of the alarms, the total number of alarms per
device, as well other statistical data.
Historical alarms are maintained in the historical database, but are not dynamic
in-as-much-as they represent alarms no longer flowing in your system. Unlike
dynamic alarms viewed in the Alarm Manager, alarms in the Alarm Database
cannot be changed.
For more information, see Historical Alarm Reports. 4UNO Core Features.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts

Universal Network Operations (UNO) is Motorolas open network
telecommunications management system. The UNO Manager consolidates the
management of analog and digital Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
operations, switching, and intelligent networks into a single centrally controlled
system. You can view the cellular network from a single workstation, or from
multiple workstations.
UNO provides the integrated management system that lets you control an entire
CDMA cellular network through an enhanced Graphical User Interface (GUI).
Standards Used by UNO

The UNO network management system is based on the Telecommunication
Management Network (TMN) series of international standards. These
International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standards are included in
Recommendations M.3100. TMN provides the architecture for achieving the
interconnection among various types of Operating Systems (OS) and
telecommunications equipment. The exchange of management information is
enabled by the use of open architecture with standardized interface, protocols
and messages. The UNO management functions are defined according to the
ITU standards (ITU X.730/7400):
Fault Management (FM) for monitoring and control of network devices
Performance Management (PM) for grade of service indication and
gathering and displaying statistics from managed devices

UNO Documentation Suite UNO 2.16.3
UNO Documentation Suite

The UNO documentation suite is comprised of a series of manuals, each
dealing with a specific area of UNO functionality. Table 2-1 provides a brief
overview of each manual and its contents.
Table 2-1: UNO Documentation Suite
UNO Core Features

Monitoring the Cellular Describes the tools that monitor the state of the cellular system and
Network alarms generated by devices.
UNO Basic Concepts Describes the UNO documentation suite, UNO licenses and agents,
UNO architecture and UNO hardware and software requirements.
Reviews UNO applications and explains how to invoke them. Provides
basic procedures for working with UNO application windows and their
common elements
Alarm Manager Describes how to monitor, manage and display system alarms.
Includes Central Alarm Acknowledge (Ack) Handling, which
describes how to perform manual synchronization of remote system
alarms, and how to view and refresh connection states.
Alarm Correlation Describes alarm correlation and how to define alarm correlation rules,
which reduce the number of alarms that an operator receives by
combining numerous alarms that may be generated as a result of a
single fault into a single, information-rich alarm with an identifiable
causal link to the fault.
Large Scale Alarm Describes the setup of the UNO Large Scale management
Manager Configuration configuration for the UNO alarm suite applications: Alarm Manager,
Alarm Browser and Filter Builder.
Alarm Browser Describes the tasks performed on historical alarms.
Historical Alarm Describes how to create reports on historical alarms.

Reports
Web Monitor Describes the Web application for remote FM and PM monitoring of
alarms and device states.
PM Measurements Describes how to define Performance Management measurements,

& Alarms how to read these measurements for trend analysis and how to define
thresholds for these measurements to produce PM alarms.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts
Table 2-1: UNO Documentation Suite (Cont.)
PM Reports Describes the Java-based Web application for remote performance

management. Explains how to schedule, run and view single and
grouped reports; how to view and compare historical reports, and how
to use graphical outputs. The list of all the currently available PM
reports, including descriptions and predefined parameters, is provided
with this chapter.
Filter Builder Describes how to define filters for viewing alarms.
OMCR Relays Describes how to program UNO Manager control over OMC-R relays,
such as applying alarm filters to relays.
Element Manager Describes how to invoke management applications on external agents

Access by connecting to a remote host, directly from Element Manager Access
and from other UNO applications, such as Alarm Manager and Alarm
Browser.
WAP for UNO Describes how to remotely monitor UNO Fault and Performance
Management data from a WAP-enabled cellular phone.
Acronyms and Lists the most commonly used acronyms and abbreviations.
Abbreviations
Glossary Lists terms and meanings.

Index Lists major UNO Core Features topics alphabetically.
Command Center Suite

Monitoring the Describes the tools that monitor the state of the cellular system and
Cellular Network alarms generated by devices.
common elements.
Command Center Describes how to monitor the state of the cellular network from
a central point.
GIS Describes the display and extraction of Command Center status screen
information that has been integrated with the ESRI ArcView GIS
application and displayed on a map, and how to use advanced ArcView
map functions.

NetPlan Describes the Motorola proprietary application - NetPlan, which is

external to UNO and used to design and maintain cellular networks.
NetPlan generates propagation images of coverage areas of site
elements, on top of a GIS map display.
Abbreviations
Glossary Lists UNO terms and meanings.
Index Lists major Command Center Suite topics alphabetically.
Testing and Tuning Applications

common elements.
RFDS Describes how to remote-test cellular equipment on both analog

(SwitchMATE) and digital (CDMA) platforms using the UNO Radio
Frequency Diagnostics Subsystems (RFDS) application.
RFDS Reports Describes how to set up RFDS reports; define report formats and title
positions; obtain reports organized by results; define data sampling
period for reports.
BTS Relays Describes how to view, define, modify and delete rules which govern
how UNO handles alarms that have been defined for BTS relays.
Software Download Describes how to track and control the software versions currently
Manager installed in the BTS devices on an individual basis, and schedule
automatic software downloads.
MCC Channel Enables remote configuration and activation of Multi-Channel CDMA

Certification (MCC) cards to provide more channels, and therefore more capacity
(Certificate Licensing for subscribers. Provides estimates of usage and capacity that assist
Manager) with forecasting when to order certificates for additional channels or
to order more cards.
Abbreviations


Index Lists major Testing and Tuning Applications topics alphabetically.
PM Enhanced Applications
common elements.
PM Statistics Graphs Describes the uses of the PM Statistics Display to view and compare
performance management statistics. Explains how to invoke the
display from other UNO applications. Provides setup procedures and
display configuration options.
Long Term PM Storage Enables users to assign PM pegs/measurements to a dedicated database

for up to 32 days. Extending the storage period of collected PM data
enables a more accurate statistical analysis of system behavior.
CBSC Processor Describes how to identify bottlenecks and capacity insufficiencies in

Utilization central processors within Centralized Base Station Controllers
(CBSC); and how to determine which call processing events cause
excessive utilization.
CFC Monitoring Describes how to collect data about main Call Final Classes (CFC) that
are used for the initial threshold setup of Performance Management
Thresholding; how to monitor the most important CFCs and determine
which counts exceed tolerance limits.
Abbreviations
Index Lists major PM Enhanced Applications topics alphabetically.

Administrative Guide
common elements.
Defining Users in UNO Describes how to add users to the UNO Manager, modify existing user
permissions and remove users after UNO installation.
Routine Describes how to perform routine UNO cellular network

Administration administration tasks such as designating hosts, user management,
backing up and restoring the UNO system and rebooting.
Setting Up Printers Describes how to connect and remove local and remote printers to and
from the UNO Manager, and how to set up an email system.
UNO Alarm Describes how to set up automatic alarm notification to designated

Notification personnel, to ensure that action is taken to resolve alarm conditions.
Localization Describes UNO Japanese and Spanish language capabilities.

Network Element Notes Describes the major network elements used in UNO.
SNMP Architecture Describes the SNMP architecture used within the UNO system.
UNO SNMP Traps Describes SNMP traps for UNO agents.

UNO Utilities Describes UNO utilities used for obtaining information and for
assisting in troubleshooting UNO operations.
Troubleshooting Describes potential problems that can be encountered while using

UNO, and procedures to solve these problems.
Abbreviations

Index Lists major Administrative Guide topics alphabetically.

Software Installation Guide

Describes UNO installation procedures.
Expert Users Guide

Describes main procedures in selected UNO applications.
Expert Installation Guide

Describes UNO installation procedures in brief.
UNO Licenses
These two major licenses comprise the UNO Manager:
Element Manager (EM)
Market Manager (MM)
The Element Manager includes the UNO base package and major UNO
management applications and features. Element Manager also provides SNMP
support for Interworking Unit (IWU) and Zhone Integrated Multiple Access
Communications Server (IMACS) agents. Element Manager supports one
OMC-R agent.
Additional features are provided through the Market Manager and licensed
optional packages.
The Market Manager expands the functionality of Element Manager by
providing advanced system support. Market Manager adds several applications
and additional agent support to the UNO basic package.

UNO Licenses UNO 2.16.3
Table 2-2 lists the UNO 2.16.3 licenses and included features.
Table 2-2: UNO Feature Licenses
License Type Supported Features
Element Manager (EM) Alarm Browser

License Alarm Manager
Command Center
Element Manager Access
Filter Builder
OMC-R Relay Control
SNMP Support
System Features
UDM Applications (PM Measurments & Alarms)
Web Monitor
Web Report Tool/PM Reports
UNO Market Manager Alarm Correlation

(MM) License Alarm Notification
BTS Relays
Relay Names
RFDS Control and Reports
UNO Option 2 Certificate Licensing Manager

Software Download Manager
UNO Option 3 PM Statistics Graphs

CFC Monitoring
UNO Option 4 Large Scale Alarm Manager
UNO Option 5 Long Term PM Storage
UNO Option 7 System Capacity Expansion
UNO Option 8 GIS Map
Note: For more information on licenses and contact information for vendors,
see UNO 2.16.3 Software Installation Guide, Chapter 4: Preliminary
Procedures.

Supported UNO Agents

The UNO Manager provides functionality for both digital and analog networks.
Network Elements communicate with the UNO Manager through agent
software using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and the
Common Management Interface Protocol (CMIP). Agents are supported by
one of these protocols.
SwitchMATE and OMC-R provide an interface to the UNO Manager to

report Network Element events and to respond to requests for information.
SwitchMATE performs non-switching functions that centralize and simplify
operations and maintenance of Analog Network Element in a Motorola Cellular
Network. OMC-R performs analogous functions for Digital Network Agents.
MOSCAD and IWU are both supported by the UNO Manager. UNO
supports SNMP based devices in two forms of integration:
Complete integration
Point of access integration
During complete integration, SNMP and CMIP devices are managed through
the same management applications. This enables you to use the same Alarm
Manager and Command Center to manage the alarms/traps of both the SNMP
and CMIP devices. During point of access integration, it is possible to launch
and execute independent vendor supplied SNMP management applications
from a common interface and Telnet directly into SNMP hosts.
The agents supported by the Software Release 2.16.3 UNO Manager are listed
in Table 2-3:
Table 2-3: UNO 2.16.3 Supported Agents
Product Release
Motorola SwitchMATE 2.16.1, 2.16.2
Motorola CDMA OMC-R R16.1, R16.3
3Com IWU Circuit Data 4.5, MIB ver. 6.6
3Com IWU High-Speed Packet Data 2.2, MIB ver. 6.6
Motorola MOSCAD 2.15
Zhone IMACS 600, 800, 900, Streamline version #3
Compaq Servernet Platform HLR, MR41 1.16.1, 1.16.3, 3.16.1, 3.16.3
3Com PDSN (including HA/HACN func- 3.5 MIB ver. 6.6

tions)

Geographical Maps UNO 2.16.3
Table 2-3: UNO 2.16.3 Supported Agents (Cont.)
Product Release
3Com (Funk Radius) AAA SPB-AWE 1.5
Cisco PDSN 1.2
Cisco Radius AAA 3.0
Cisco HA 12.2
Cisco WAN Router 7206 VXR
Cisco Tier2 Switch Catalyst 6509
Cisco Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator v 2.2.1
Note: See Network Element Notes. Administrative Guide for a description

of these agents.
Geographical Maps
Different types of geographical information about devices can be viewed in:
Command Center, see Geographical Display Mode in Command
Center. Command Center Suite. 3-25
GIS, see GIS Map Structure in GIS. Command Center Suite. 4-2
Table 2-4 shows the three types of maps that are available in UNO.
Table 2-4: Geographical Map Types
Map Type Description
Single Map The most basic map type, displays small coverage areas as well as
areas with dispersed BTS.
ArcView Map Provides unlimited zooming and panning. ArcView maps can
only be used on an NT Server System (external Intel/PC plat-
form).
Fixed Map Provides less flexibility than ArcView maps, with zooming capa-
bilities at predefined intervals. This map type is more economical
on system resources.
Note: For more information on geographical maps, see Chapter 3: Special

Installation Forms. and Chapter 10: Installing Geographic Maps.
UNO 2.16.3 Software Installation Manual.

Whats New in UNO 2.16.3

Table 2-5 describes what is new or different in UNO Software Release 2.16.3,
lists new features and describes their impact on UNO applications.
Table 2-5: New Features and Changes in UNO 2.16.3
UNO Feature Application Name Status and Description
VPU Support Multiple Applications New.

UNO now monitors Vocoder Processing Unit (VPU)
performance. VPU data can be viewed in UNO
applications, such as Command Center, Alarm
Manager and PM Statistics Graphs.
UNO Alarm Alarm Notification New.

Notification Replaces the Trouble Ticketing system. Provides
setup and control of automatic alarm notification.
Documentation: This feature is described in the
Administrative Guide.
Low Capacity Entry Software Download Enhancement.

Level SC (tm) 4812T Manager, Software Download Manager: SDU now supports
Lite BTS Command Center software download for non-redundant packet (pBTS)
(Non-Redundant and circuit (cBTS) BTSs.
Mode) Command Center: Non-redundancy indicator on BTS
summary device icon indicates a non-redundant BTS.
Trouble Ticketing Trouble Ticketing, Removed.

Applications Remedy, TelAlert UNO Trouble Ticketing applications (UNO Optional
License 1) included:
UNO Trouble Ticketing
Remedy User and Remedy Notifier (Action
Request System) by Peregrine (formerly Remedy)
TelAlert by Vytek (formerly Telamon)
These applications have been replaced by UNO
Alarm Notification, which is now included in UNO
Market Manager (MM)
Documentation: The Trouble Ticketing Applications
Users Guide has been removed from the UNO
documentation suite.
Web-Based UNO Health Reporting Tool New.

Reporting Tool (HRT) Incorporates various utilities and generates reports for
system health testing and fault analysis. This feature
is described in the Administrative Guide.

UNO Requirements UNO 2.16.3
UNO Requirements
Software and hardware system requirements described in this section, are valid
for both types of installation:
New installation performed on a newly purchased machine
Upgrade installation based on a machine with previous UNO
versions installed
Hardware Requirements
Hardware requirements are contained in the Equipment Planning Guide (EPG).
Refer to the relevant release of this document for all hardware details.
Software Requirements
Table 2-6 shows a comprehensive list of software products required for full
UNO Manager installation. This ensures complete functionality of all UNO
tools and capabilities.
Table 2-6: Software Products in UNO 2.16.3
Software Version Mfr Function License
Acrobat Reader 4.0 Adobe Systems Viewer for PDF files No
ArcView GIS 3.2 ESRI Map Server feature Yes
Common 1.2 Sun Microsystems Workstation environment No

Desktop
Environment
Informix 4GL 7.30.UC6 Informix Corporation Yes
Informix Connect 2.20.UC3 Informix Corporation Supplement to Informix Yes

database services for net-
work management
Informix OnLine 9.30.UC2 Informix Corporation Database services for net- Yes
Dynamic Server work management
JDK 1.3.1 Sun Microsystems Java development kit to No

compile, debug and run Java
applications

Table 2-6: Software Products in UNO 2.16.3 (Cont.)
Netscape 4.72 Netscape Internet Browser and e-mail No

Communicator facilities
Perl 5.004 Public Practical Extraction and No

Report Language
report generator tool
Solaris 8 2/02 Sun Microsystems Manager host operating No

system
Solaris Patch 8.1 Sun Microsystems Recommended Solaris No

Cluster updates
Recommended
Solstice 4.1 Sun Microsystems Network management sys- No

Enterprise tem
Manager
Sun Web Server 1.0 Sun Microsystems No
Swing 1.03 Sun Microsystems To create cross platform No

graphical user interfaces
with JDK or Java platforms
TibRV 6.0 Tibco Rendezvous Yes
Tool Command 7.5 Sun Microsystems Enterprise and Internet No

Language applications scripting
language
Tool Command 4.1 Sun Microsystems Enterprise and Internet No

Language applications scripting lan-
ToolKit guage
UNO Installation 2.16.3 Motorola Complete UNO installation Yes, for

optional fea-
tures
UNO Manager 2.16.3 Motorola Yes
UNO Sun 2.16.3 Motorola Sun Software patches and No

Patches updates

Invoking UNO UNO 2.16.3
Table 2-6: Software Products in UNO 2.16.3 (Cont.)
VisiBroker 4.5 Borland Software CORBA protocol support Yes

Corporation
Volume Manager 3.0.4 Sun (Veritas) To manage and configure Yes

StorEdge extended disk space when
options requiring extra
space are purchased
Invoking UNO
This section describes how to invoke UNO. You can invoke UNO from:
Dedicated terminal: the terminal on which UNO software is installed
(UNO Manager), see Invoking UNO from a Dedicated Terminal on
page 2-14
Remote terminal: a terminal physically located away from the UNO
Manager, see Invoking UNO from a Remote Terminal on page 2-16
Important: All the commands in these procedures are case sensitive unless
otherwise stated.
Invoking UNO from a Dedicated Terminal

This section describes how to invoke UNO from a dedicated terminal.
The invocation procedure consists of two stages:
Logging into a dedicated terminal
Invoking UNO, see Invoking UNO on page 2-15
Logging into a Dedicated Terminal

This section describes how to log in to a dedicated terminal.
Note: Administrator privileges are required for access to a dedicated
terminal.

To Log in to a Dedicated Terminal
1. Press any key

The Solaris Password dialog box appears. See Figure 2-1, on page 2-15.
Figure 2-1 shows the Solaris Password dialog box.
Figure 2-1: Solaris Password Dialog Box
2. In the password field, enter your administrator password (for example,

unoadmin) and press <Return>
The Solaris Common Desktop Environment appears.
Invoking UNO
This section describes how to invoke UNO once you have logged into your
dedicated terminal.
To Invoke UNO
1. Open a new terminal or console window

2. Enter uno& or uno & and press <Return>
The UNO Launcher (see Figure 2-4, on page 2-18) appears.

Invoking UNO UNO 2.16.3
Invoking UNO from a Remote Terminal

This section describes how to invoke UNO from a remote terminal. This
procedure consists of two stages:
Log in from a remote terminal, see Log in from a Remote Terminal on
page 2-16
Invoking UNO, see Invoking UNO on page 2-17
Log in from a Remote Terminal

This section describes how to log in from a remote terminal.
To Log in from a Remote Terminal
1. Press any key

The Solaris user name dialog box appears as in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2: Remote Solaris User Name Dialog Box
2. Enter your user name, and press <Return> or click Ok

The password dialog box appears as in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3: Remote Solaris Password Dialog Box
3. Enter your user name, and press <Return> or click Ok

Solaris loads and a terminal opens.
Invoking UNO
This section describes how to invoke UNO, once you have logged into your
remote terminal.
To Invoke UNO
1. Open a new terminal or console on the remote terminal; see Log in from
a Remote Terminal on page 2-16
2. Enter
rlogin {uno manager name} -l {administrator user name} and
press <Return>
For example: rlogin flugel -l unoadmin
3. Enter administrator password
4. Enter export DISPLAY={remote terminal IP address}:0.0 and
press <Return>
For example: export DISPLAY=123.123.123.123:0.0
5. Enter: uno& or uno & and press <Return>
The UNO Launcher (see Figure 2-4, on page 2-18) appears.

UNO Applications UNO 2.16.3
UNO Applications
Most UNO applications are invoked from the UNO Application Launcher.
Some applications are not available from the launcher but are invoked by other
means, for example by Command Line. This section describes applications
which are:
Invoked from Launcher; see Applications on the Application Launcher
on page 2-18
Not available on the Launcher; see Applications Not on the Application
Launcher on page 2-22
Applications on the Application Launcher

You can invoke most of the UNO applications from the Launcher, by clicking
on the button which has the required applications icon.
Figure 2-4 shows the Application Launcher with application icons and names.
Figure 2-4: UNO Application Launcher
Note: The application icon may be grayed out if a license is not available for
a particular application, or the application has not been installed.

Table 2-7 lists current applications and icons, each with a brief description of
application functionality.
Table 2-7: Applications Available on Application Launcher
Icon Application Function
Command Enables user to monitor the entire cellular network from a central point,
Center and view both graphical and logical representations of managed network
objects on hierarchically arranged status screens that provide information
as to the state and location of all system devices.
GIS Map and Enables user to invoke UNO GIS ArcView, which integrates UNO pro-
NetPlan cesses and databases with ESRI ArcView GIS application. UNO data is
exported from UNO to the database, which allows UNO data to display on
a GIS map in a customized Graphical User Interface (GUI) that integrates
UNO network management functions with ArcView map functions. This
enhances display and viewing abilities of geographic information relating
to the UNO cellular network while offering UNO management capability.
In addition, the NetPlan feature in GIS allows GIS users to display Net-
Plan-generated propagation images of coverage area of site elements on
top of a GIS map display.
Alarm Enables user to perform actions on reported alarms, including clear,

Manager acknowledge and unacknowledge, enable and disable devices, and to dis-
play alarm information. Displays information for all current (active)
alarms reported in UNO Manager. Features include Alarm Summary table
and bar chart, Alarm List, and Alarm Updates List. In Large Scale Man-
agement Configuration, the Alarm Manager views and handles alarms
across multiple UNO hosts.
Alarm Enables user to sort alarms, and to display alarm information for historical
Browser (inactive) alarms. Similar to the Alarm Manager. Features include Alarm
Summary table and Alarm List. In Large Scale Management Configura-
tion, Alarm Browser can view alarms across multiple UNO hosts.
Filter Builder Enables user to view, add, modify, delete, and apply alarm filters that user
configures according to network needs. Displays table of all filters for fil-
ter based applications with information on selected filters. In Large Scale
Management Configuration, user can create and apply filters across multi-
ple UNO hosts.
Historical Enables user to view individual alarm records and summary information
Alarm provided by Alarm Reset Module (ARM) reports, for all analog and digi-
Reports tal agents that are defined in the system. Reports contain information
about devices and alarms.

Table 2-7: Applications Available on Application Launcher (Cont.)
Alarm Enables efficient and effective fault management by facilitating fault rec-
Correlation ognition, isolation of primary causes of faults and fault correction.
Alarm Correlation combines numerous alarms that can result from a single
fault into a single alarm with an identifiable causal link to the fault.
BTS Relays Describes how to view, define, modify and delete rules that govern how
UNO will handle alarms that have been defined for BTS relays
OMC-R Enables user to view and perform actions, such as set, unset, and delete, on
Relays Operations and Maintenance Center-Radio (OMC-R) relays controlled by
the UNO Manager. Viewing functions are available to both users and
administrators. Action functions are administrator only.
UNO Enables user to set up large scale configurations for monitoring alarms and
Configuration for central acknowledgement of alarms over multiple UNO hosts
( seeLarge Scale Alarm Manager and Central Alarm Ack Handling in
Table 2-8)
Alarm Describes how to set up and distirbute alarm notifications,

Notification including setup of default escalation parameters and aalarm
notification rules..
PM Measure- Describes how to define Performance Management measurements,

ments & how to read these measurements for trend analysis and how to
Alarms define thresholds for these measurements to produce PM alarms
PM Reports Enables the user to view UNO performance management data from a
remote workstation. Provides tools to schedule, run and view performance
management reports from any or all currently available agents. Provides
tools for viewing and comparing of historical PM reports, and enables
monitoring the PM data transfer of PM data to UNO agents.
Note: This application is also available from a Web browser.
PM Statistics This visual tool assists the user in identifying device problems at a glance.
Graphs Can be used to monitor device behavior to determine if the observed prob-
lem persists, or to compare PM statistics for several cells/sectors or data
sampling periods.

Table 2-7: Applications Available on Application Launcher (Cont.)
CBSC Enables user to identify bottleneck central processors and capacity insuffi-
Utilization ciencies within Centralized Base Station Controllers (CBSC), and assists
in determining call processing events that cause processor over utilization.
CFC Enables user to locate performance problems or problem devices that can-
Monitoring not easily be identified using alarms, monitor the most important Call
Tool Final Class (CFC), and determine which counts exceed tolerance limits.
RFDS Enables user to remote-test cellular equipment on analog and digital plat-
forms. Provides defaults that enable use without changing installation
defaults.
RFDS Enables user to view Radio Frequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) test
Reports reports. Provides reports based on remote testing of cellular equipment on
analog and digital platforms. Allows user to determine report format,
obtain reports organized by results, and define time limits of reports.
Software Enables system administrators to download the latest software versions to

Download thousands of BTSs from a single workstation. Lets user schedule
Manager downloads to suit current priorities: speed or minimized service impact.
On-Line Help Enables user to open UNO On-Line Help. On-Line Help is divided into
three parts: application-specific help, alarm documentation and CDMA
reference manuals in Portable Document Format (PDF).
Element Enables user to access a remote host from within the application or from
Manager any other UNO application. Typically, an operator activates this applica-
Access tion to obtain information directly from agent managers.
MCC Channel Enables users to perform remote configuration and activation of

Licensing Multi-Channel CDMA (MCC) cards to provide more channels and greater
(Certificate capacity. Provides estimates of usage and capacity that enables accurate
Licensing forecasts for ordering new certificate files.
Manager)

Applications Not on the Application Launcher

Table 2-8 lists and briefly describes the UNO applications that are not directly
available from the Application Launcher. Invoking method for each
application is described in the relevant chaptersof the User Guides.
Table 2-8: UNO Applications Not Available on Launcher
Function/Menu Description
Central Alarm Ack GUI-based application that improves alarm acknowledgment and clearing for multi-
Handling ple UNO managers connected to the same agent. Enables user to display informa-
tion relating to alarm management, including alarm acknowledgement and cleared
alarms. Invoked from the Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser.
Large Scale Alarm Enables the configuration of multiple hosts so user can monitor/manage alarms
Manager from a central location using Alarm Manager or Alarm Browser. Defined filters can
also work across multiple hosts.
Long Term Invoked through PM Measurements & Alarms (see PM Measurements & Alarms
PM Storage in Table 2-7). Used to assign PM pegs/measurements to a dedicated database for up
to 32 days. This extended storage period of collected PM data enables you to obtain
statistics for a broader and more accurate view of system behavior.
WAP2UNO WAP2UNO enables the cell technician and the Operations Manager to monitor
UNO fault and performance management data on an internet-enabled cellular
phone.
Web Monitor Invoked through the UNO Website Homepage. Enables user to view a snapshot of
current alarm and device states and limited fault and PM Management information.

Table 2-9 lists applications available through the Solstice Enterprise Manager.
Table 2-9: Solstice Enterprise Manager Menus
Function/ Menu Description
File > Customize Opens the Customize window, which lets you add or change information
about applications activated from the UNO Application Launcher. All help
details are contained within the application.
File > Exit Closes down the launcher and exits UNO. All applications should be closed
down before exiting UNO. Closing UNO before all applications are closed
could cause ongoing processes to freeze.
Actions > Reconnect Reopens a connection with an UNO application that has lost connection.
Help > Using Help Opens a dialog box that provides links to various Help functions.
Help > Using SEM Opens a submenu that provides links to descriptions of various Solstice
Enterprise Manager functions.
Help > Contents Opens a dialog box that provides links to descriptions of SEM functions and
procedures.
Help > How To Opens a submenu that provides links to descriptions of Solstice Enterprise
Manager functions and procedures.
Help > Keyboard Opens a dialog box that provides links to descriptions of SEM keyboard
Commands commands.
Help > Glossary Opens the Solstice Enterprise Manager Help glossary.
Help > Index Opens the Solstice Enterprise Manager Help index.
Help > Support Opens the Solstice Enterprise Manager Help Support dialog box.
Help > Connect to Sun Opens dialog box which enables online connection to Sun.
Help > About SEM... Opens the About Solstice Enterprise Manager dialog box.

Application Launcher Menu Map UNO 2.16.3
Application Launcher Menu Map

The Application Launcher menu bar contains these dropdown menus:
File
Action
Help
The menu map is shown in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10: Application Launcher Menu Map
File Actions Help
Customize Reconnect Using Help
Exit Using SEM

Overview
Windows and Dialogs
Menus
Keyboard Commands
Related Publications
Contents
How To
Getting Started with EM
Starting Individual Tools
Adding and Removing Tools
Reconnecting to the MIS
Accessing Online Documentation
Keyboard Contents
Glossary
Index
Support
Connect to Sun
About SEM

Invoking Web Applications

UNO has three Web applications and a Web-based utility:
Online Help
PM Reports
Web Monitor
UNO Online Help and Web Monitor UNO Web applications are invoked
from icons on the UNO Home Page.
PM Reports UNO Web application is invoked from icons on the UNO Home
Page or directly from the CLI when logged into an UNO host.
Note: For detailed description of invoking an application, refer to the relevant
chapter in the UNO documentation suite.
Important: All commands in the following procedures are case sensitive.
To invoke UNO Home Page Web Applications from Browser
UNO Home Page applications include Online Help, PM Reports and

Web Monitor.
1. In the Address field of your browser, enter this URL:
http://[host IP address]/HOME
You are prompted to enter your UNO user name and password.
2. Enter your user name and password
The UNO Home Page opens.
3. In the UNO Home Page Invoke panel, click the icon of the Web
application you want to open
You are prompted to enter your UNO user name and password again.
4. Enter your user name and password
The application main dialog box opens.
To Invoke PM Reports from CLI
Enter this command from the CLI:

/opt/UNO/bin/uno_wrt.sh -host <host_name>
The PM Reports tool opens.

Invoking UNO Applications from the Command Line UNO 2.16.3
Invoking UNO Applications from the Command Line

You can invoke all UNO applications from the command line. A number of
arguments are available for each command line application invocation.
Opening UNO applications from the command line offers additional flexibility
not available when opening an application from the Application Launcher.
Before you run UNO applications from the command line, you need to set up
your working environment for each working session and terminal window.
This sequence sets environment variables necessary to run UNO applications.
When invoking from the command line, you can either go directly to the
specific directory to invoke the required UNO application or enter the entire
path on the command line.
Setting Up Your Working Environment

This section describes how to set up your working environment to enable you
to launch any UNO application from the command line.
Note: If you want to run UNO applications in background mode, add an
ampersand (&) after the command. For example: uno_tt&
To Set Up Your Working Environment
1. Login to UNO using your system login and password

You are now on the system command line.
2. According to the shell you use, type one of the command sequences in
Table 2-11 to define your environment variables
Table 2-11: Specifying Shell and Display Variables
Bourne Shell/Corn Shell (sh) C Shell/TC Shell (csh/tcsh)
1.../opt/UNO/config/UNO_env.sh source/opt/UNO/config/UNO_env.csh
2. export DISPLAY=(display address) setenv DISPLAY (display address)

For example: For example:
export DISPLAY=123.123.123.123:0.0 setenv Display=123.123.123.123:0.0
If you invoke PM Reports or PM Measurements & Alarms, use this sequence to set up your working environ-
ment: /opt/UNO/config/sc_UNO_env.sh

Commands for Invoking UNO Applications

Table 2-12 lists the command-line commands for invoking UNO applications.
For detailed explanations on how to invoke these applications from the
command line, refer to the specific chapter in the UNO documentation suite,
that describes the application.
Table 2-12: Commands for Invoking UNO Applications
Application Path Basic Command Comments

Alarm Browser /opt/UNO/bin uno_alarmmgr Enter uno_alarmmgr -browser
-browser -help to display command
line arguments.
Alarm /opt/UNO/bin uno_corr_gui Enter uno_uda -help to display
Correlation command line arguments.
Alarm Manager /opt/UNO/bin uno_alarmmgr Enter uno_alarmmgr -help to
display command line arguments.
Alarm /opt/UNO/bin uno_an_gui
Notification
BTS Relays /opt/UNO/bin uno_uda Enter uno_uda -help to display
command line arguments.
CBSC Utilization /opt/UNO/bin uno_cbscutil
CFC Monitoring /opt/UNO/bin uno_cfcmon host
Command /opt/UNO/SDT/bin uno_sdt
Center
Element /opt/UNO/bin uno_x_term
Manager Access
Filter Builder /opt/UNO/bin uno_fb Enter uno_fb -help to display
command line arguments.
GIS Map /opt/UNO/bin run_av
Historical /opt/UNO/bin uno_alarm_rep Enter uno_alarm_rep -help
Alarms Reports to display command line
arguments.
MCC Channel /opt/UNO/bin UNO_mlm
Certification
OMC-R Relays /opt/UNO/bin uno_relay_gui
PM Reports /opt/UNO/bin uno_wrt.sh
PM Statistics /opt/UNO/JAVA/ uno_pmgraph
Graphs pmgraph/

Determining Your UNO Version UNO 2.16.3
Table 2-12: Commands for Invoking UNO Applications (Cont.)
Application Path Basic Command Comments

RFDS /opt/UNO/bin uno_rfds_gui Enter uno_rfds_gui -help to
RFDS Reports /opt/UNO/bin uno_rfds_rep Enter uno_rfds_rep -help to
Software /opt/UNO/bin uno_dlm Enter uno_dlm -h
Download <host_name> to invoke from a
Manager remote host
PM Measure- /opt/UNO/bin uno_udm_gui Enter uno_udm -help to display
ments & Alarms command line arguments.
UNO /opt/UNO/bin uno_config_gui Enter uno_config_gui -help
Configuration to display command line arguments
Determining Your UNO Version

When contacting technical support, you should have information readily
available about the version of UNO that you are using. This information helps
the technical support personnel to answer your questions.
To Retrieve UNO Version Number
1. Login to your UNO system. See Logging into a Dedicated Terminal on

page 2-14.
2. On the command line, enter the Software Package Information command
sequence:
pkginfo | grep UNO
and press <Return>
After entering the command, information appears on screen as shown in
Table 2-13, on page 2-28.
Table 2-13: UNO Version Information
Information on Screen Meaning
application GIS2163 UNOGIS UNO 2.16.3 is the UNO GIS version

application UNO2163 UNO UNO 2.16.3 is the major UNO installation

Table 2-13: UNO Version Information (Cont.)
Information on Screen Meaning
application UNOPB2163 UNOPB UNO PM Backward Compatibility Installation

application UNOUT2163 UNOUTIL UNO Utilities
Invoking UNO Online Help

UNO Online Help system presents information about each UNO dialog box
and additional information about how to use UNO. The UNO Online Help is
invoked by clicking the Help button that appears in each dialog box, through
the Application Launcher from the UNO Web Access and Online Help icon, or
from the command line. You can invoke UNO Online Help in these ways:
Click the Online Help icon from the Launcher
Click the Help button from any UNO dialog box
Go to the Help menu from within any UNO window
Open from browser (see Invoking Web Applications on page 2-25)
Invoking Online Help from the Launcher

This section describes how to invoke Online Help from the Application Launcher.
To Invoke Online Help
1. From the Application Launcher, click the Online Help icon
UNO invokes the Netscape browser.
Invoking Online Help from a Dialog Box

This section describes how to invoke Online Help from any dialog box.
To Invoke Online Help from a Dialog Box
Click Help in any dialog box

UNO invokes a new Netscape browser in which the Online Help topic
appears for the specific dialog box.

Invoking UNO Online Help UNO 2.16.3
Invoking Online Help from a Menu Bar

This procedure describes how to invoke Online Help from the menu bar in any
application.
To Invoke Online Help from a Menu Bar
From a menu bar select:

Help
Help...
UNO invokes a new Netscape browser in which the Online Help topic
appears for the specific dialog box.
Invoking Online Help from a Browser

See Invoking Web Applications on page 2-25.

Common UNO Dialog Boxes
Print Dialog Box

Most UNO applications use the standard UNO Print Dialog box, as described
below. For applications that use a non-standard Print Dialog box, the dialog box
is described in the chapter.
To Invoke the Print Dialog Box
From the main menu bar, select:

File
Print
UNO Print dialog box appears, as in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 shows the Print dialog box.
Browse
Destination
Destination
Section
Printer
Selection
Format
Section
Print Command
Section
Print Save Close Help
Figure 2-5: UNO Print Dialog Box

Common UNO Dialog Boxes UNO 2.16.3
Table 2-14 describes Print Dialog box fields.

Table 2-14: UNO Print Dialog Box Fields
Button/Field Description
Destination Radio buttons allow you to choose a destination:
Section File: Specifies the information to be printed to a file. Enter file name in File Name
field or choose from Browse Destination dialog box.
File Name Field: For entering file name
Browse Destination: Invokes Browse Destination Dialog box to locate directory
path for print file name.
Printer Selection: Lets you select a printer. If several printers are available for
your system, you can select the printer from the Printer drop-down list. The default
printer (or last printer used) appears as a label on the printer select button.
Active radio buttons are depressed
Printer: Specifies the information is to be printed by a printer
Format Section Dynamic field that allows you to choose from available formats:
PostScript: Prints file in PostScript format. PostScript format is useful for creating
presentation or managerial reports
ASCII: Prints information in ASCII format, a plain text only format. Each line is
treated as a separate paragraph. You can insert ASCII files into most word
processors and text editors.
Available radio buttons are activated. Deactivated radio buttons are grayed out.
Selected radio buttons are red and depressed.
Print Command This section allows you to:
Section Enter print command in Print Command Entry Field: Lets you enter print
command if printer is not defined. For example, lpr -Pxx is the UNIX
command to print required text to a specific printer. To print to a printer named lw
enter: lpr -Plw
Save as Default: Saves print command as default for selected format when
checked
Action Buttons Print: Prints current job according to your specifications.
Save: Retains commands entered in Print Command cluster as default print options.
Close: Closes UNO Print dialog box
Help: Opens UNO Online Help topic

To Print
1. Click File radio button and go to Step 2

Destination field and Browse Destination button activate.
OR
Click Printer radio button and go to Step 3
Format Section and Print Command Section activate.
2. If you select File, manually enter file name in Destination field and go to
Step 7.
Print activates.
OR
Click Browse Destination button, choose file from list and go to Step 7,
see Browse Destination Dialog Box on page 2-34
Print activates.
3. If you select Printer, click the Printer Selection drop-down list and choose
a printer
Printer displays in field and Print activates.
4. Click PostScript radio button
In Print Command section, Save as Default field changes to Save as
Default for PostScript.
OR
Click ASCII radio button
In Print Command section, Save as Default field changes to Save as
Default for ASCII.
5. Enter print command in Print Command field
OR
Click Print Command list and choose print command
6. To save print command as default for selected format, click Save as
Default check button
7. Click Print

Common UNO Dialog Boxes UNO 2.16.3
Browse Destination Dialog Box

Browse Destination Dialog box lets you select a file for either printing, viewing,
exporting, or importing, depending upon the application in which the dialog box
was invoked.
To Invoke the Browse Destination Dialog Box
From the dialog box in which you are working, select:
The Browse Destination Dialog box appears as in Figure 2-6.
Filter
Field
Directories Files
List List
Selection
Field
Ok Filter Cancel Help
Figure 2-6: Browse Destination Dialog Box

Table 2-15 describes the Browse Destination Dialog box.

Table 2-15: Browse Destination Dialog Box
Button Description
Filter Field Manual entry field for the directory path to the import file. Displays filtered selections
from Directories and Files fields.
Directories/Files Use the mouse to select the directory and import file from the Directories and Files
Lists lists. Selections displayed in Filter field and Selection field.
Selection Field shows the name of the file which is being imported (when you click Ok).
Ok Imports the selected file. The dialog box closes after this button is clicked.
Filter Filters the Directory/File lists:
Displays selected directory path in Filter field and Selection field.
Updates Directory/File lists to show the subdirectories and files of selected directory.
Cancel Cancels operation. Dialog box closes.
Help Opens the Online Help topic related to this dialog box or action.
To Select a File in the Browse Destination Dialog Box
1. Enter the directory path in the Filter field by entering all or part of
directory path and/or using wild cards (*)
OR
Click a directory in the Directory list
2. Click Filter
Path appears in the Selection field and the Directory/File lists are updated
to show the subdirectories and files of a selected directory.
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 until you see the file you want in the File list
4. Select the file from the File list
Your selection is highlighted.
OR
In the Filter field, enter the file name at the end of the directory path
5. Click the Filter button
The selected file appears in the Selection field.
6. Click Ok
The selected file is saved. The Browse Destination dialog box closes.

Common UNO Menus and Buttons UNO 2.16.3
Common UNO Menus and Buttons

This section describes the action buttons and menus that are common to the
UNO applications.
Action Buttons in UNO Dialog Boxes

UNO uses standard action buttons. These buttons are described in Table 2-16.
Table 2-16: Action Buttons
Button Description
Application retains changes, modifications, and additions of

application properties. Dialog box remains open for further
use, enabling you to continue working in application or dia-
log box. In some applications, the Apply button appears grayed
out until a new action is performed.
Application retains changes, modifications, and additions of appli-

cation properties. Dialog box closes and you return to original dia-
log box or window. In some cases you are asked to save your new
configuration.
Note: In some applications, the Ok button appears grayed out
until a new action is performed.
Current dialog box or application closes. All modifications prior to
selecting the Close button are retained. Some message boxes use
the Close button to let you close the dialog box after reading a
message. In these cases, no changes are made to information con-
tained in the message.
Application cancels your changes, modifications and additions,

and reverts to the previous settings. In most cases, the dialog box
also closes.
Invokes the Print Dialog box, which allows you to set up the out-
put make printer selections, and to send the file to print.
Opens Online Help topic related to this dialog box.

Close Menu Selection

Certain applications use Close as a menu selection option, typically under the
File menu on the menu bar. When selected, the application closes.
For programs which allow modifications, a dialog box opens and queries if you
want to save changes. In many cases, save is not required, since the application
is a display feature only.
When you click the Cancel button, the application cancels changes,
modifications, and additions. In most cases, the dialog box also closes.
Help Menu Selection

In most application windows, a Help menu is available on the menu bar. To
open Online Help from this menu, see Invoking Online Help from a Menu
Bar on page 2-30.
Manipulating Tables in UNO

In most UNO dialog boxes that present information in a table format, it is
possible to adjust the tables according to your needs. You can:
Determine the sort order of rows
Sort columns
Change column and row sizes
Determining Sort Order

You can determine the sort order for a selected field by clicking on any field,
column header or arrow icon. UNO executes the sort command using the
ASCII sort standard, ascending or descending, according to these priorities:
Numbers (0, 1, 2 ..)
Uppercase letters (A, B, C ...)
Underscore (_)
Lowercase letters (a, b, c ...)

Manipulating Tables in UNO UNO 2.16.3
The arrow changes to indicate the sort order, as in Table 2-17.

Table 2-17: Sort Order Icons
Sort Order Icon Sort Order Description
Ascending ASCII sort from top to bottom of list (A-Z)
Descending ASCII sort from bottom to top of list (Z-A)
Sorting Fields in a Table

This section describes the procedure for sorting fields in a table according to a
single field. You can select any field as your primary sort choice. Determining
Sort Order on page 2-37 describes ascending and descending sort order.
To Select a Primary Sort Field
1. Double-click the column header or specify the sort field according to

instructions for the specific application
A sort arrow appears in the header indicating that this field has been
selected as the sort field.
2. Determine sort order by clicking on the arrow
The arrow changes direction to indicate sort order.

Changing Row and Column Size

You can change the column size and row height of any UNO table.
Changing Column (Field) Width

In this action, each column represents one field. To change the column width,
move the side of the column.You may want to adjust column width to view all
the contained information.
To Change Column (Field) Width
1. Place the cursor anywhere at the right edge of column border

Cursor changes to a solid vertical bar with an arrow
2. Click the bar
The bar changes into a dashed line that extends the height of selected
column border.
3. Drag the border to left or right, to adjust column width
4. The column to the left of the border is adjusted.
5. At required width, release the mouse button
The column remains at the new width.
Figure 2-7 shows an example of table columns before and after resizing.
Figure 2-7: Table Columns Before and After Resizing

Manipulating Tables in UNO UNO 2.16.3
Changing Row (Record) Height

In this action, each row represents one field. To adjust the row height, you
move the top of the row. You may want to change row size to better view the
record.
To Change Row Height
1. Place cursor anywhere over row border
The cursor changes to a solid horizontal bar with an arrow

2. Click the bar
The bar changes into a dashed line that extends the row of the selected row
border.
3. Drag border up or down, to adjust the row height
4. At required size, release the mouse button
The row remains at the new height.
Figure 2-8 shows an example of table rows before and after resizing.
Figure 2-8: Table Rows before and after Resizing

Simultaneously Changing Column and Row Size

In most UNO applications you can adjust both column width and row height in
a single operation.
Important: When modifying column and row sizes, observe these rules:
Do not hide a column by reducing its size to a minimum.
Instead, use the Properties dialog in each UNO application to
remove an unwanted field from the table display.
When you remove a field from the table display, the entire
column associated with the field is not shown in the table. If
later, you want to show the field and its column information,
enable the field in the relevant properties dialog box, for each
UNO application.
To Change Column Width and Row Size
1. Place the cursor over corner where a row border and column border meet
The cursor changes to a solid right angle bar with an arrow facing the
angle corner.
2. Click the bar
The right angle bar changes into a horizontal and vertical dashed line that
extends across the row and column of the selected column and row
borders.
3. Drag borders up or down diagonally to adjust the dimensions of the
selected column and row
4. At required size, release the mouse
5. The column and row remain at the new size
Note: When you use the diagonal drag method, you can still change only the
column width or row height. You do this by dragging the cursor along
with the row axis or column axis, and use the dashed line as a guide.

Selecting Items UNO 2.16.3
Determining Field Position

When defining table properties in UNO applications, you can change the
position of a row or a column by selecting the field in a table, and clicking the
Move Up or Move Down button.
Table 2-18 describes the positioning buttons.
Table 2-18: Positioning Buttons
Positioning Button Description

Row: moves selection up
Column: moves selection to the left
Row: moves selection down

Column: moves selection to the right
Selecting Items
In many lists and tables, you can select multiple items to perform actions on the
selections. The color of selections may vary with UNO applications.
To Select Single Items
Click a single item

The item is highlighted. You can proceed with application.
To Select Multiple Contiguous Items
1. Select the first item you want to select

2. Press <Shift>
3. While holding <Shift>, click the last item you want to select
All items between the first and the last item, are highlighted. You can
release the keyboard key and proceed with application.
To Select Multiple Non-contiguous Items
1. Select the first item

2. Press <Ctrl>
3. While holding <Ctrl>, click the next item in list that you want to select
4. Continue until all items are highlighted
All the selected items are highlighted. You can can release the keyboard
key and proceed.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 3: Alarm Manager

The Alarm Manager application enables the user to:
View incoming alarms in real time
Monitor the system from a central location
Display alarm attributes
Operate in fault management or performance management modes
Customize display fields and field labels
Print alarms in graphic or text format
Customize alarm display
Filter alarms
Clear and acknowledge alarms
Enable or disable devices
Display online alarm documentation
Interface with other Universal Network Operation (UNO) applications
Interface
The Alarm Manager displays information for Common Management
Information Protocol (CMIP) events and Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) alarm traps from CMIP and SNMP agents.
The Alarm Summary table and bar chart display tabular and graphical summary
information sorted by severity. The Alarm List displays individual alarm
information in tabular form. The Alarm Updates List displays recent Alarm
List changes. See Main Dialog Box on page 3-8.
Mouse shortcuts are provided for certain actions. See Mouse Shortcuts
SummaryAlarm Manager on page 3-84.

Alarms UNO 2.16.3
Alarms
There are two types of alarms in the UNO system:
Active Alarms: Incoming alarms
Historical Alarms: Old alarms stored for viewing alarm behavior over a
period of time.
An alarm is considered active from the time it arrives and is registered by the
Alarm Engine until the alarm is cleared. Once an alarm is acknowledged and
cleared, it is defined as an historical alarm in the alarm database.
Alarms in the UNO system are classified into five types:
Communications
Environmental
Equipment
Processing error
Quality of service
All alarms are identified by a color coded severity level. These are described in
the Command Center Suite. See Device State Default Colors in Command
Center. Command Center Suite. 3-33.
Alarm Engine
The Alarm Engine is an UNO daemon process which:
Receives alarms from the agents, parses the alarms, and stores them in the
Alarm Database
Transfers the alarms to the Alarm Manager and other applications
Transfers alarm information to and from the Alarm Database
If connection cannot be established to the Alarm Engine, a message appears
informing the user that connection to the Alarm Manager is lost.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 3: Alarm Manager
Alarm Life Cycle

UNO can monitor the entire system from a central location by combining
alarms from multiple platforms. Figure 3-1 shows how an alarm moves
through the system.
UNO
Alarm
Agents Correlation Alarm
Process Database
Alarms
Alarm Browser
Filter Mechanism
Alarm Manager
BTS Alarm
Relays Engine
Alarm Notification
OMCR Relays
Figure 3-1: Alarm Life Cycle
Table 3-1 explains the Alarm Life Cycle and shows how the alarm is handled in
UNO.
Table 3-1: Alarm Life Cycle
Step Description
Network Elements Managed Network Objects (devices) transmit a stream of events. These
Transmit Events events are monitored through an agent.
Through Agents
Alarm is Received An event is registered as an alarm.
BTS Relays Attributes of severity levels and additional text can be changed according to
user definitions.
Alarm Correlation Alarms can be deleted or several alarms can be combined to create a single
correlated alarm.

Alarms UNO 2.16.3
Table 3-1: Alarm Life Cycle (Cont.)
Step Description
Filter Mechanism Filters are applied to the alarm according to the user definitions created in the
Filter Builder
Alarm Up If the alarm passes the criteria defined in the active filter, the alarm attributes
display in the Alarm Manager.
Alarm Storage The alarm is stored in the alarm database.
Alarm Handling The UNO operator investigates the type of action required and initiates the
process to resolve the problem causing the alarm: (see Figure 3-2)
Enable/Disable Device - when available
Acknowledge/Unacknowledge Alarm - Acknowledge is optional
but recommended
Clear Alarm - when the the problem causing the alarm is resolved and the
situation no longer warrants an alarm
Alarm Database When the alarm is cleared, it is stored in the database as an historical alarm
which can be viewed in the Alarm Browser.
Manual Alarm Handling

Enable/
Disable
Acknowledge/
Alarm Unacknowledge
Alarm Manager
Engine Clear Alarm
Send Alarm
Notification
Alarm
Database
Figure 3-2: Alarm Handling

Operation Modes
The Alarm Manager operates in the performance management (PM) mode,
indicating that the quality of service is affected.
The Alarm Manager has two operation modes. The two management operation
modes are:
Performance Management (PM) where the quality of service is affected
Fault Management (FM) where there is a specific problem that might
interrupt service
You use Mode (see Selecting Modes on page 3-26) to have the Alarm
Manager display only those alarms suited to the current management mode.
Invoking the Alarm Manager

The Alarm Manger can be launched from the Application Launcher and from
the command line. You can run multiple Alarm Manager applications in
parallel, for example, to view certain types of alarms on one application and
other types on another. The multiple applications run independently of each
another. As well as invoking another Alarm Manager from the Application
Launcher and the Command line, you can open another Alarm Manager from
the Main Menu bar.
Invoking from the Application Launcher

Default parameter values are used when you launch the Alarm Manager from
the UNO Application Launcher.
To launch the Alarm Manager from the application launcher
Click the Alarm Manager icon in the Application Launcher

Figure 3-3, on page 3-8 shows the Alarm Manager main dialog box.
Invoking from the Command Line

When you run the Alarm Manager from the command line you can specify
application parameters.

Invoking the Alarm Manager UNO 2.16.3
Important: For a general explanation of how to invoke all UNO applications

from the command line, see Invoking Web Applications on
page 2-25.
To Invoke the Alarm Manager from the Command Line
1. Open a UNIX terminal window

2. If you have not already done so, set up your working environment as
described in Setting Up Your Working Environment on page 2-26
3. Enter the command:
Path /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_alarmmgr [command_line_argument]
Example /opt/UNO/bin/uno_alarmmgr -agent IMACS
Table 3-2 lists the Alarm Manager command line parameters.
Table 3-2: Alarm Manager Command Line Arguments
Option Description
-help, --help List command line arguments and explanations.

-agent <agent_name> Invoke application for specified agent.
-browser Invoke in Alarm Browser mode.
-config <cnfg_name> Use specific configuration by name.
-display <display_name> Opens application on target X server
-duration <hours> Time interval to display historical alarms (Alarm Browser)
-filter Invoke application by filter name and access.
<FilterName[:access]> Filter name could be FDN (Fully Distinguished Name)
for example: FDN pattern ('agent:BTS[1-10];GLI[2-3];*'),
Group ('(GROUP)group_name',
Device Type ('(TYPE)BTS')
-exclude_filter Excludes filter named and access
<FilterName[:access]>
-host <host_name> Connects to specified host to invoke application.

Table 3-2: Alarm Manager Command Line Arguments (Cont.)
Option Description
-iconic Invokes application in minimized form. Displays icon.

-info Displays current process information
-list Alarm list is not displayed.
-mode <mode> Execution mode [PM|FM|PMFM|none].
-show_clear_alarms Shows cleared alarms automatically.
-sum Summary not displayed.
-updates Alarm Update List not displayed.
xrm <resource-spec> Set a specific X resource.
Opening an Alarm Manager from the Menu Bar

You can open another Alarm Manager with default parameters from the Alarm
Manager Main Menu bar. For instructions, see Launching an Additional
Alarm Manager on page 3-11.
Invoking Alarm Manager from other Applications

You can invoke the Alarm Manager from these applications:
Command Center
Filter Builder
OMCR Relays
Alarm Browser

Main Dialog Box UNO 2.16.3
Main Dialog Box

This section describes the tables and menus on the Alarm Manager main dialog
box display shown in Figure 3-3.
Menu Bar
Filter(s) Alarm - No New/
Scroll to..
Alarm Alarm Summary

Summary Bar Chart
Alarm List
Alarm
Updates List
Activity
Alarm Status
Message
Figure 3-3: Main Dialog Box
The Main Dialog box tables and menus are described in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3: Main Dialog Box Components
Fields Description
Menu Bar Accesses all Alarm Manager functions.
Filter(s) Shows the filter that is currently active and lets you select a different filter
from a list of filters defined in your system.
Alarm - When clicked, the Alarm List scrolls to the latest incoming alarm. If there
no new/ Scroll to.. (Newest is no new alarm, No New Alarms appears in place of Scroll to Newest
Alarm) Alarm.
Note: To enable the scroll, You must activate the Scroll to Newest
Alarm On Request button in the General tab of the Properties
dialog box.
Alarm Summary Alarm Summary data in tabular form.
Alarm Summary Bar Chart Alarm Summary Table data in graphical format.

Table 3-3: Main Dialog Box Components (Cont.)
Fields Description
Alarm List List of alarm information as reported in the system.
Alarm Updates List List of changed alarm information.
Activity Message Briefly flashes information on user interactions.
Alarm Status Shows the total number of alarms and the total number of selected alarms.
Menu Bar
The Alarm Manager main menu bar is located at the top of the main display
(see Main Dialog Box on page 3-8). From the menu bar you can access all
the Alarm Manager options. The menu bar includes these drop-down menus:
File
View
Actions
Applications
Help
The Main Menu bar drop-down menu map is shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Main Menu Map
File View Actions Applications Help
Start New Sort By Select All Configure Tools

Alarm Manager Arrival
Alarm Browser Severity
Date
Device
Ack
User Options
Save Sort Order Deselect All Command Center
All Ascending
Configuration Descending
Column Headings
Configuration Filter Clear Download Manager

Management Filter Builder
Complex Filters
List of filters

Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3
Table 3-4: Main Menu Map (Cont.)
File View Actions Applications Help
Print Selected Display Cleared Acknowledge Alarm Correlation

Alarms Alarms
Print Alarm Display Selected Unacknowledge Device Alarm History
Summary Only
Exit Display All Enable Device BTS Relays
Mode Disable Device Element Manager

Fault Management
Performance
Management
Properties Query Device Agent Access
Status
Search Alarm Details Generate Alarm Reports
Complete Severity
Complete Device Type
Device Distribution
Layout Components Alarm Historical Alarm

Alarm Summary Documentation Reports
Alarm List
Alarm Updates List
Send Alarm RFDS
Notification Test
Report
Input Alarms CFC
Monitoring Tool
Summary Report
Rule Details Cisco Applications

Cisco Works 2000
Cisco View Util
Cisco WAN Manager
Telnet
http Session
UNO Log Summary

Central Alarm
Acknowledge Monitor
PM Statistics Graphs

File Menu
The Alarm Manager File menu contains these menu items:
Start New
Save
Configuration Management
Print Selected Alarms
Print Alarm Summary
Exit
Launching an Additional Alarm Manager

Start New lets you launch an additional Alarm Manager display independent
of the currently displayed Alarm Manager. The new Alarm Manager display
opens with the default configuration or any configuration redefined as default
by the user.
To Start a New Alarm Manager Display
From the Alarm Manager main menu bar select:
File
Start New
Alarm Manager

File Menu UNO 2.16.3
Launching an Alarm Browser

Start New lets you launch an Alarm Browser display.
To Start an Alarm Browser Display
File
Start New
Alarm Browser
The Alarm Browser application opens. See Alarm Browser on page 6-1.
Saving the Current Configuration

The Save option lets you save and name the current Alarm Manager
configuration parameters. You are prompted to name a new configuration for
saving All or Configuration. If not, the parameter values are saved to the
currently loaded configuration.
You can save:
All configuration parameters and column headings
Configuration parameters only
Alarm List and Alarms Update List column headings only
To Save Alarm Manager Configuration and Column Headings
1. From the Alarm Manager menu bar select:
File
Save
All
Note: When column headings are saved, column labels, column positions and
displayed or hidden field attributes are saved globally. The Alarm
Manager display will always use the saved configuration.

The UNO Alarm Manager Save Configuration Dialog box appears as in

Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: UNO Alarm Manager Save Configuration Dialog Box
2. Enter the new configuration name and click Ok to save or click Cancel
To Save Alarm Manager Configuration Only
File
Save
Configuration

Figure 3-4.
2. Enter the new configuration name and click Ok or click Cancel to return
to the main dialog box without saving
To Save Alarm Manager Column Headings Only
From the Alarm Manager menu bar select
File
Save
Column Heading
The new column headings are saved.

The Configuration Management dialog box lets you:
Create a new configuration
Define a default configuration (used at launch of the application)
Load a configuration
Delete a configuration
A named configuration can be used in future sessions and can be specified as
the Alarm Manager default configuration.
Creating a New Configuration

You can create a new configuration.
To Create a New Alarm Manager Configuration
File
The UNO Alarm Manager Configuration Management dialog box appears

as in Figure 3-5.
Default
Configuration
Current
Configuration
Delete
Available
Configuration
Save As
Save As
Default
Action Buttons
Figure 3-5: Configuration Management Dialog Box

Table 3-5 describes the Alarm Manager Configuration Management dialog box.
Table 3-5: Configuration Management Dialog Box
Field/Button Description
Default The configuration defined as default for invoking the Alarm

Configuration Manager. There can be only one default configuration. Clicking
Save As Default applies any configuration as default.
Current The current configuration for the session, invoked by selecting any
Configuration of the Available Configurations.
Available Displays the list of all currently available configurations including

Configuration default. A scroll bar appears when needed to scroll through the list.
Save As Default Saves the configuration as default.
Delete Deletes a configuration from the Available Configuration list.

Note: The default configuration can be modified but not deleted.
Save As ... Name a configuration.
Ok Applies and saves the configuration and closes the dialog box.
Apply Applies and saves the configuration. The dialog box remains open.
Close Closes the dialog box.
Help Opens Online Help.
2. Select any existing configuration from the Available Configurations list

3. Click Save As ...
Figure 3-4, on page 3-13.
The new configuration appears in the Available Configurations list.
Note: If you try to use a name that already exists, an error message
appears indicating the name already exists. Names are case
sensitive; default and Default are different configurations.

Defining a Default Configuration

You can redefine an existing configuration as the default configuration.
To Define an Existing Alarm Manager Configuration Default

File

as in Figure 3-5, on page 3-14.
2. In the Available Configurations list, click the name of the configuration
you want to define as the default
3. Click the Save As Default toggle button.
The name you selected now appears in the Default Configuration field.
4. Click Close to exit
Note: The Alarm Manager comes with a configuration already defined as the
default filter. When you save another configuration as the default, the
Alarm Manager will automatically open using the new default filter
configuration.
Loading a Configuration
You can load any existing configuration.
To Load an Alarm Manager Configuration

File
The Configuration Management dialog box appears as in Figure 3-5, on

page 3-14.
you want to load
3. Click Apply or OK
The name you selected now appears in the Current Configuration field.
The new configuration takes effect immediately.

Deleting a Configuration
You can delete a user configuration.
To Delete an Alarm Manager Configuration

File

2. In the Available Configurations list, select the name to delete
The configuration is highlighted.
Caution: There is no warning notice; there is no undo.
3. Click Delete
The selected name is removed from the list.
Note: The default configuration cannot be deleted.
If you want to delete the user defined default configuration, select another config-
uration as the default and then delete the former default configuration.
Printing Selected Alarms

You can print selected alarms from the Alarm List.
To Print Selected Alarms
1. Select the alarms you want to print from the Alarm List. To select
multiple alarms, see Selecting Items on page 2-42.
The Print Selected Alarms menu option is grayed out unless you have
selected at least one alarm from the Alarm List.


File
The UNO Print dialog box appears.

3. For printing procedures, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31
Printing the Alarm Summary

Selecting Print Alarm Summary prints current alarm summary information.
The print output includes the information in the Alarm Summary table.
You can print the Alarm Summary either as a text file or in PostScript format.
Table 3-6, on page 3-18 shows examples of the Alarm Summary print output.
Table 3-6: Print Output Formats
Format Description Example
Postscript Prints the Summary

information graphically.
Text Prints the Summary

information as text.
Alarm Summary, 05/31/2002 17:19:21
Severity Total Not Acked Not Cleared
--------- ------ ----------- -------------
critical 3061 3061 3061
major 1 1 1
minor 4 4 4

To Print the Alarm Summary

File
Alarm Summary
The UNO print dialog box appears.

2. For printing procedures, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.
Exiting
The Exit option closes the Alarm Manager.
To Exit the Alarm Manager

File
Exit
The Alarm Manager Exit Application Dialog box pops up.

2. Click Yes to exit
If you made no changes, the Alarm Manager application closes.
If you made changes in the current configuration, the UNO Alarm
Manager Unsaved Changes Dialog box pops up.
You are prompted: Save changes before exiting?
Continue with Step 3.
3. Click No to exit without saving the changes or
Click Cancel to cancel the exit and keep the Alarm Manager open or
Click Yes to save the changes
If you click Yes to save the changes, the UNO Alarm Manager Save
Configuration Dialog box pops up.
You are prompted: Save Configuration as
4. Enter a name for the configuration
5. Click on OK
The Alarm Manager application closes.

View Menu UNO 2.16.3
View Menu
The Alarm Manager View menu contains these menu items:
Sort By Display All
Sort Order Mode
Filter Properties
Display Cleared Alarms Search
Display Selected Only Layout Components
Sorting the Alarm List from the View Menu

You can rearrange the data on the Alarm List by sorting by alarm attribute and
in ascending or descending order, using these menu options:
Sort By
Sort Order
Sorting By
Sort By lets you sort the Alarm List by the default criteria as in Table 3-7.
Table 3-7: Basic Sort Criteria
When Sorted By: Primary Secondary
Arrival Arrival order into UNO None
Severity Severity Acknowledge Status

Date Date None
Device Device Agent
Ack (Acknowledged) Acknowledge Status Date
User Option Column(s) selected by Date

user, added to the list
Note: By double clicking on any of the column headings on the Alarm List,
the column heading sort option is added to the Sort By drop-down list
and is available as a sort option.

To Sort the Alarm List by Attribute Column
From the Alarm Manager menu bar select:
View
Sort By
Arrival
Severity
Date
Device
Ack
The Alarm List is sorted by the attribute selected. To select ascending or

descending see Sorting by Order on page 3-22.
Sorting by User Option

By double clicking on an Alarm List column heading, you can add an option to
the Sort By drop-down menu.
To Sort the Alarm List by User Options
1. Double click on the desired column heading on the Alarm List

The option is added to the Sort By drop-down list after the default options.
2. From the Alarm Manager menu bar select
View
Sort By
Option
The Alarm List is sorted by the desired option.

Sorting by Order
Sort Order lets you sort the Alarm List in either ascending or descending order
according to the sort criteria last specified in Sort By. Ascending and
descending order is described in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8: Alarm Manager Sort Order
Sorted By Ascending Descending
Arrival arrival order of alarm reverse arrival order into

into UNO (not by UNO
date/time)
Severity Warning Critical
Minor Major
Major Minor
Critical Warning
Date From earliest to latest time From latest to earliest time
and date and date
Device Alphabetical order Reverse alphabetical order
Acknowledge State Ack Unack

Unack Ack
To Sort the Alarm List in Ascending Order
View
Sort Order
Ascending
The Alarm List is sorted in ascending order.

To Sort the Alarm List in Descending Order

View
Sort Order
Descending
The Alarm List is sorted in descending order.

Note: You can also select the sort order by clicking on any Alarm List field
column. The direction of the arrow indicates whether the sort is
ascending or descending.
Filtering
Filter lets you:
Invoke the Filter Builder application
Select a filter defined in the Filter Builder
Changing the alarm filter alters the alarm display in the main dialog box.
Invoking the Filter Builder

You can invoke the Filter Builder application from the Alarm Manager menu.
To Invoke the Filter Builder

View
Filter
Filter Builder
The Filter Builder application appears. For information on using the Filter
Builder see Filter Builder on page 11-1.

Selecting a Filter
You can select a filter already defined in the Filter Builder.
To Change Alarm Filters

View
Filter
Filter Builder
Complex Filter List
Filter List
2. Select one of the filters to activate the corresponding alarm filter

You can select defined complex or single filters from the respective filter
lists. When you select a complex filter, a drop down list appears of the
filters included in the complex filter.
The selected Alarm Filter, whether complex or single, is activated and that
filter name appears in the Filter(s) box. The Alarm List is refreshed to
display the alarms according to the filter selected.
Note: You can select a filter in the same manner as above by clicking on the
Filter(s) button on the main dialog box display.
Displaying Cleared Alarms

Display Cleared Alarms is a toggle switch that displays or hides cleared
alarms in the Alarm List.
To Display or Hide Cleared Alarms
View
Display Cleared Alarms

If the button next to Display Cleared Alarms appears raised and gray,
cleared alarms are not displayed on the Alarm List. If the indicator is in
with a red dot, cleared alarms are displayed on the Alarm List.
2. Click the button to accordingly show or hide cleared alarms in the Alarm
List display.
Displaying Selected Only

Display Selected Only displays only the alarms selected in the Alarm List
provided that at least one alarm is selected.
To Display Selected Alarms Only on the Alarm List
1. In the Alarm List, select the alarms to display

View
Display Selected Only
Display Selected Only is grayed out if no alarms are selected.
Displaying All
Display All displays all alarms on the Alarm List. Use Display All to return to
the full list after using Display Selected Only.
To Display All Alarms on the Alarm List
View
Display All
The Alarm List refreshes to display all alarms.

Selecting Modes
Mode displays alarms on the Alarm List according to modes as listed in
Table 3-9.
Table 3-9: Display Attributes according to Mode
View These Event Alarm Manager

Mode Types Title Bar Select
FM equipmentAlarm Fault Mode Fault Management

communicationsAlarm
PM qualityofServiceAlarm Performance Mode Performance Management
Both PM and all event types, Performance and Fault Management

FM (default) for example: Fault Management Performance Management
communicationsAlarm Mode
environmentalAlarm
equipmentAlarm
processingErrorAlarm
qualityofServiceAlarm
Note: Only the alarms associated with the event type relating to the mode(s)
selected are displayed.
To Select the Alarm Mode
View
Mode
Fault Management
Performance Management
2. Select one or both of the modes, according to Table 3-9.

The Alarm List is refreshed according to the selected mode.
Note: Alarms displayed reflect the selected mode according to the current
filter definition.

Specifying Properties
The Alarm Manager Properties dialog box lets you define the display of the
Alarm Manager. Options include:
Component display layout
Column display and order selection
New alarm display position
Date and time configuration
Alarm details display configuration
Alarm Correlation Details display options
Alarm browser mode setup
The Properties dialog box has five tabs from which you can select various
aspects of the display:
General
Alarm List And Details
Alarm Updates List
Alarm Correlation Details
Alarm Browser/Alarm Manager
The buttons described in Table 3-10 are common in all the property tabs.
Table 3-10: Properties Positioning Buttons
Button Description
Move Up When clicked, the selected item will move upward in the respective list.
Move Down When clicked, the selected item will move downward, in the respective list.
The buttons described in Table 3-11 are common for all property dialog boxes.
Table 3-11: Properties Positioning Buttons
Button Description
Ok When clicked, you are prompted:

Do you want to save the changes? Click Yes or No.
The dialog box closes
Apply When clicked, modifications are saved and the dialog box remains open.
Cancel When clicked, the changes are cancelled and the dialog box closes.
Help When clicked, opens the online help.
For reference, see Action Buttons in UNO Dialog Boxes on page 2-36.

To Access the Alarm Manager Properties Dialog Box
View
Properties
The Alarm Manager Properties Dialog box appears as in Figure 3-6.
General Properties
In Properties, General you can specify:
To scroll to newest alarm on request (default)
Time and date format (Date and Time is default)
Which Alarm Manager layout components (default is all) to display of:
Alarm Summary
Alarm List
Alarm Updates List
Table column label set up using default or user-defined labels
The Alarm Manager General Properties Dialog box appears as in Figure 3-6.
New Alarm
Scroll
Date/Time
Format
Labels
Component
Selection
Positioning
Buttons
Action Buttons
Figure 3-6: Properties: General

Table 3-12 describes the General Properties dialog box.
Table 3-12: Alarm Manager Properties General Tab
Field Description
New Alarm Scroll When enabled (button red, depressed and checked), the new-
(Scroll to Newest est incoming alarm appears at the top of the Alarm List if the
Alarm on Request) Scroll to Newest Alarm on Request button is also enabled
on the main dialog box. When not enabled (button raised and
gray), clicking Scroll to Newest Alarm in the Alarm Man-
ager main dialog box has no effect.
Date/Time Format Lets you specify the type of date and time display, in:
(Display Time and Date and Time (default)
Date As) Time only
Date only
Component Lets you select which Alarm Manager components to show:
Selection (Layout Alarm Summary, Alarm List or Alarm Updates List. A check
Components) in the Show column will display in the Alarm Manager main
dialog box. With no check, the component will appear.
Positioning Lets you reposition a component area upward or downward.

Buttons
Use Default Lets you specify the field labels that will appear on:
Labels/User- Alarm List
Defined Labels Alarm Updates List
Alarm Detail report
User Defined Label names can be changed to your choice.
Scrolling to Newest Alarm on Request

Use the Scroll to Newest Alarm on Request button in the General
Properties tab to enable automatic scroll to the newest alarm in the Alarm List.
To Scroll to Newest Alarm on Request
1. In Properties, General tab, click Scroll to Newest Alarm On Request

When the button appears red, depressed and checked, the Alarm List is set
to scroll to the newest alarm.
2. Click Ok or Apply
The Alarm List scrolls to the newest alarm if New Alarm Indicator on the
Alarm Manager main dialog box is also clicked.

Setting the Time and Date Display

Use the Set Time and Date as button to set the time and date display.
To Set the Alarm Manager Date/Time Format
1. In Properties, General, click the required Date/Time option button in Set

Time and Date as
Date/Time information is displayed according to the format selected as in
Table 3-13.
Table 3-13: Alarm Manager Date/Time Formats
Format Description
Date and Time Displays both the date and time (default setting).
Time Only Displays only the time in hours:minutes:seconds.
Date Only Displays only the date in mm/dd/yyyy format.
Note: The date/time format is determined by the country code definition

during installation.
Displaying or Hiding a Component

Use the Layout Components to select the components and the order for display
in the Alarm Manager main dialog box. A check in the Show column selects
the component to show in the Alarm Manager Window. No check indicates
that the component will not appear.
Layout Components, as shown in Figure 3-7, lets you determine which
components are displayed in the Main Dialog box.
Figure 3-7: Properties: Layout Components

To Show/Hide an Alarm Manager Component

1. Click in the Show column next to the component (see Figure 3-7)
When there is a check in the cell, the component is set to appear in the
Alarm Manager Main Dialog box.
When the cell is blank, the component will not appear.
The component(s) having a check in the cell appear in the Alarm Manager
Main Dialog box.
Changing the Component Position
You can change the position of the Alarm Manager components.
To Change the Position of Alarm Manager Components
1. Select the component to move (see Figure 3-7)

2. Click Move Up or Move Down to move the selected item to the
desired position
The tables are displayed in the your selected order.
Defining Column Label Names
You can change the default column labels to suit your needs.
To Define Custom Alarm Manager Column Labels
1. Click Use Default Label (by default, red, depressed and checked)
The button should appear raised and gray.
2. Select the User-Defined Label column you want to change
3. In the User-Defined Label column, erase the existing label name
4. Type the label name you want to display
The tables are displayed with the new user-defined headings.
Note: When Use Default Labels is selected, ( button is red, depressed and
checked) the default labels in the left column are used in all table
headings, even if User-Defined Labels have been defined.


In the Properties Alarm List And Details dialog tab, shown in Figure 3-8, you
can define which fields to display and in what order to display them in Alarm
List and Alarm Details.
Alarm List Alarm Details

Separate, Active
and Cleared Use Single
Details Dialog
Field
Field Selection
Selection
Positioning
Buttons
Action
Buttons
Figure 3-8: Alarm Manager Properties: Alarm List And Details
Note: In the Alarm Details section, the column label appears as the Default
Label, as shown in Figure 3-8 when you chose Default Labels in the
General tab. If you chose User-Defined Labels, the header is your
User-Defined Label.

Table 3-14 describes Properties, Alarm List and Alarm Details.
Table 3-14: Properties: Alarm List And Details
Field Description
Alarm List All modifications apply to the Alarm List table in the main dialog box.
Separate Lets you either separate active alarms from cleared alarms or display active
Active and and cleared alarms in a mixed mode. When the button is red, depressed and
Cleared Alarms checked, (default) the list is sorted separately for active and cleared alarms.
Active alarms appear at the top of the list and cleared alarms appear after
active alarms. When the button is raised and gray, active and cleared alarms
are mixed and placed in the list according to current sort criteria.
Alarm List Lets you select which Alarm List columns to show. A check in the Show
Column column indicates the component is selected and appears in the Alarm List. A
Selection blank (no check) indicates that the component will not appear. You can also
select the order of the columns in the table.
Alarm Details All modifications apply to the Alarm Details report. see Displaying Alarm
Details on page 3-60
Use Single Lets you show a single alarm details window or open a new window for each
Details Dialog alarm selected.
When the Single Details Dialog button is red, depressed and checked,
(default) only one window opens.
When the button is raised and gray, each alarm detail view is shown in a
separate Alarm Details window. Use this feature to show and compare the
details of several different alarms. All displays remain open until you
click close on each display.
Alarm Details Lets you select which alarm attributes appear in the Alarm Details window.
Field Selection A check in the Show column indicates the component is selected and will
appear in the Alarm Details window. A blank (no check) indicates that the
component will not be shown in the Alarm Details. You can also select the
order of display of the attributes.

Displaying Cleared and Active Alarms

You can choose the manner to display cleared and active alarms
To Display Cleared and Active Alarms Separately/Together
1. Click the Separate Active and Cleared Alarms button (see Figure 3-8)
When the button is raised and gray, Active and Cleared Alarms are display
together in the Alarm List.
When the button appears depressed and red, Active and Cleared Alarms
appear separately, with the Active Alarms at the top of the Alarm List.
Displaying a Column in the Alarm List

You can choose the column items to display in the Alarm List.
To Show/Hide a Column in the Alarm List
1. Click in the Show in Table cell next to the column label you want to
show (see Figure 3-8)
When there is a check in the cell, the column is set to appear in the list.
Columns with a check in the cell appear in the Alarm List.
Columns without a check in the cell do not appear in the Alarm List.
Changing the Column Position
You can change the position of the Alarm List columns.
To Change the Order of the Alarm List Columns
1. In the Alarm List field selection table, select the column label whose order
you want to change (see Figure 3-8)
2. Click Move Up or Move Down to move the field to the desired position
Move up places the column further to the left.
Move down places the column further to the right.
The fields in the Alarm List are displayed in the order you have selected.

Using Single Details Dialog

Use the Use Single Details Dialog button to select the method of displaying
Alarm Details information.
To View Alarm Details in a Single/Separate Dialog Box

1. Click the Use Single Details Dialog button (see Figure 3-8)
When the button is raised and gray, each Alarm Details display is set to
appear in a separate dialog box.
When the button appears depressed, red and checked, successive Alarm
Details reports will display in the same dialog box; only the most recent
one appears. The box remains open until you click close.
2. Ok or Apply
Alarm Details reports are displayed as determined by your selection.
Displaying Alarm Details data

You can choose the list of attributes to display in the Alarm Details Dialog.
To Display an Attribute in the Alarm Details Dialog

1. Click in the Show in Table cell next to the attribute label you want to
display (see Figure 3-8)
When there is a check in the cell, the attribute data is set to appear in the
Alarm List.
The attributes with a check in the cell appear in the Alarm Details dialog.
The attributes without a check in the cell do not appear in the Alarm
Details dialog.
Changing the Position of Alarm Details Data

You can change the order of display of the Alarm attributes.
To Change the Alarm Details List and Dialog Box Display Order
1. In the Alarm Details Show in Table cell, (see Figure 3-8) select the label
of the Alarm Details attribute whose order you want to change
The attributes in the Alarm Details dialog are displayed in the order you
have selected.

Alarm Updates List

The Alarm Updates List dialog box lets you specify how the Alarm Updates
List displays information. You can specify:
The position of the new alarm in the table
For the list to scroll to the newest information
The number of updates stored
Which update type components to show or hide
To synchronize the Alarm Updates List with the Alarm List
The columns to show in the Alarms Update List
The column display order of the Alarms Update List
The Properties Dialog Alarm Updates List box is shown in Figure 3-9
Place New
Alarm Synchronize
with Alarm List
Scroll on New
Information
Number of Field
Updates Selection
to Store
Update Type
Components
Positioning
Buttons
Action Buttons
Figure 3-9: Properties Alarm Updates List Tab

The Properties Alarm Updates List tab is described in Table 3-15.
Table 3-15: Properties Alarm Updates List Tab
Field Description
Place New Alarm Place New Alarm lets you decide the position of incoming alarms. You can select
either the On the top or the On the bottom radio button.
On the top When selected, incoming alarms are shown at the top of the Alarm Updates List.
If there are more alarms than can be displayed, scroll starting at the top of the list.
On the bottom When selected, incoming alarms are always shown at the bottom of the Alarm
Updates List.
If you have more alarms than can be displayed, scroll starting at the bottom of the list.
Scroll On New When selected, (button red, depressed and checked) the table will scroll to the newest
Information information. This is either at the top or bottom of the list, depending on the radio but-
ton you have selected: top or bottom.
Number of Lets you define the number of alarm updates that are stored in the Alarm Updates List.
updates to store
Range: 11000
Default: 1000
Update Type Lets you select which update type components to display in the Alarm Updates List.
Components A component is shown in the Alarm Updates List if a check appears next to the com-
ponent name in the Show column. If a check does not appear, the update type com-
ponent is not displayed in the Alarm Updates List.
Synchronize with When this feature is selected ((button red, depressed and checked) the Alarm Updates
Alarm List List is automatically configured according the definition of the fields and actions of
the Alarm List.
When this option is selected, all changes are managed from the Alarm List table in the
Alarm List And Details dialog box. No changes can be made in the Alarm Updates
List table, which is grayed out.
Field Selection Lets you select which columns are displayed in the Alarm Updates List. A column is
shown in the table if a check appears next to the column label name in the Show in
Table column. If a check does not appear, the column is not displayed in the Alarm
Updates List. The position of the fields can be changed using the Move buttons.

Positioning New Alarms

You can decide in which position to place incoming alarms.
To Position a New Alarm
Click the button that corresponds to the display position you want: On the
top or On the bottom (see Figure 3-9)
The items in the Alarm Updates List are displayed in the order you have
selected.
To Scroll the Alarms Update List on New Information
1. Click the Scroll on New Information button (see Figure 3-9)

When the button appears depressed, red and checked, the Alarm Updates
List will scroll to the new information. When the button is raised and gray,
the Alarm Updates List will not scroll.
The items in the Alarm Updates List are displayed as selected.
Number of Updates to Store

Use Number of updates to store to define the number of alarm updates stored in
the Alarm Updates List.
To Change the Number of Alarms Stored
1. Enter the number in the Number of updates to store field or click the
up/down arrows until the number you want is displayed (see Figure 3-9)
The number of alarms stored in the Alarms Update List changes to
correspond with your entry.

Alarm Update List Contents

Use Contents to select the update type components to display in the Alarm
Updates List.
To Show/Hide an Update Type in the Alarm Updates List
1. Click in the Show cell next to the update type component you want to
show or hide (see Figure 3-9)
When there is a check in the cell, the update type component is set to
appear in the Alarm Updates List.
When the cell is blank, the update type component will not appear.
The update type component(s) having a check in the cell appear in the
Alarm Manager Main Dialog box.
Synchronizing with the Alarm List

Use the Synchronize with Alarm List button to automatically update and
configure the Alarm Updates List according to the definition of the Alarm List.
Note: When this feature is selected, you cannot make any changes in the
Alarm Updates List table. All changes are managed from the Alarm
List in the Alarm List And Detail dialog box. The update table will
appear grayed out.
To Synchronize the Alarm Updates List with the Alarm List
1. Click the Synchronize with Alarm List button (see Figure 3-9)
When the button appears depressed red and containing a check, the Alarm
Updates List will synchronize with the Alarm Updates List.
When the button is raised and gray, the Alarm Updates List is independent
of the Alarm List configuration.
The items in the Alarm Updates List are automatically updated and
configured according to the definition of the Alarm List if the button
appears depressed red and containing a check. See To Start a New
Alarm Manager Display on page 3-11.

Alarm Update List Columns

You can select the columns to display in the Alarm Updates List if you have not
synchronized the Alarm Updates List with the Alarm List.
To Show/Hide a Column in the Alarm Updates List
When there is a check in the cell, the column is set to appear in the Alarm
Updates List.
The columns with a check in the cell appear in the Alarm Updates List.
The columns without a check in the cell do not appear in the Alarm
Updates List.
To Change the Order of the Alarm Updates List Columns
1. In the Alarm Updates table, (see Figure 3-9) select the Default Label
column whose order you want to change
2. Click Move Up or Move Down to move the column to the desired
position
The Alarm Updates List fields are displayed in the order selected.
Alarm Correlation
The Alarm Correlation dialog box lets you specify how the Alarm Correlation
information is displayed. You can specify:
To use single dialog for the Input Alarms List
To use single dialog for the Correlation Rules Details
To synchronize with the Alarm List
The columns to show in the Alarm Correlation display if not synchronized
with the Alarm List
The column display order of the Alarms Correlation list if not
synchronized with the Alarm List

The Properties Dialog Alarm Correlations tab dialog box is shown in
View
Options Synchronize
with Alarm List
Use Single
Dialog
Field
Selection
Use Single
Dialog
Positioning
Buttons
Action Buttons
Figure 3-10: Alarm Correlations Tab Dialog Box
The Properties Alarm Correlation Details tab is described in Table 3-15.

Table 3-16: Properties Alarm Correlation Details Tab
Field Description
View Options: Lets you show a single display for Input Alarms/Correlation Rules displays or open a
Input Alarms/ new window for each.
Correlation Rules, When the Single Details Dialog button is red, depressed and checked, (default)
Use Single Dialog only one display opens.
When the button is raised and gray, each view is shown in a separate display. All dis-
plays remain open until you click close on each display.

Table 3-16: Properties Alarm Correlation Details Tab (Cont.)
Field Description
Synchronize with When this feature is selected ((button red, depressed and checked) the Input Alarms
Alarm List List is automatically configured according the definition of the fields and actions of
the Alarm List.
When this option is selected, all changes are managed from the Alarm List in the
Alarm List And Details dialog box. No changes can be made in the Input Alarms
list, which is grayed out.
Field Selection Lets you select which columns are displayed in the Input Alarms List. A column is
shown in the table if a check appears next to the column label name in the Show in
Table column. If a check does not appear, the column is not displayed in the Input
Alarms List. The position of the fields can be changed using the Move buttons.
Using Single Dialog

Use the Use Single Dialog button to select the method of displaying Alarm
Correlation information. This is applicable for both the Input Alarms List and
for Correlation Rules Details.
To View Alarm Details in a Single/Separate Dialog Box

1. Click the Use Single Details Dialog button(s) (see Figure 3-10)
When the button is raised and gray, each display is set to appear in a
separate dialog box.
When the button appears depressed red and checked, multiple reports will
appear in the same dialog box; only the most recent one is visible. The
box remains open until you click close.
2. Ok or Apply
Dialog windows are displayed as determined by your selection.
Synchronizing with the Alarm List

Use the Synchronize with Alarm List button to automatically update and
configure the Input Alarms List according to the Alarm List definition.
Note: When this feature is selected, you cannot make any changes in the
Input Alarms List table. All changes are managed from the Alarm List
in the Alarm List And Detail dialog box.

To Synchronize the Input Alarms List with the Alarm List
1. Click the Synchronize with Alarm List button (see Figure 3-10)
When the button appears depressed red and checked, the Input Alarms List
will synchronize with the Alarm List.
When the button is raised and gray, the Input Alarms List is independent of
the Alarm List configuration.
The items in the Input Alarms List are automatically updated and
configured according to the definition of the Alarm List if the button
appears depressed red and checked.
Input Alarms List Columns

You can select the columns to display in the Alarm Correlation List if you have
not synchronized with the Alarm List.
To Show/Hide a Column in the Input Alarms List
When there is a check in the cell, the column is set to appear in the Input
Alarms List.
The columns with a check in the cell appear in the Input Alarms List.
The columns without a check in the cell do not appear in the Input
Alarms List.
To Change the Order of the Input Alarms List Fields
1. In the Input Alarms List table, (see Figure 3-10) select the Input Alarms
List field whose order you want to change
The Input Alarms List fields are displayed in the order selected.

Alarm Browser
The Alarm Browser tab dialog box lets you choose run the Alarm Manager in
Alarm Browser mode. In Alarm Browser mode, you can specify how to
display the time range shown in the Alarm List. Figure 3-11 shows the Alarm
Browser tab dialog box, with the Relative Time selection open.
Run in Alarm
Browser Mode
Include Suppressed
Alarms
Use Fixed Time
Number of Alarms
Relative Time
Action Buttons
Figure 3-11: Properties, Alarm Browser Showing Relative Time

Figure 3-12 shows the Alarm Browser tab dialog box, with the Fixed Time
selection open.
Fixed Time Tab
Start
End
Action Buttons
Figure 3-12: Properties Alarm Browser TabFixed Time

Alarm Browser Properties is described in Table 3-17.

Table 3-17: Alarm Browser Properties
Field Description
Run in Alarm Changes the Alarm Manager to Alarm Browser mode.
Browser mode
Use fixed time To define exact date and time parameters for the alarms display.
Include Suppressed Displays alarms included in correlated alarms, which would otherwise not be
Alarms seen as separate alarms.
Number of Alarms To choose the number of alarms to display in the Alarm Browser.
Range: 199,999
Default: 10,000
Relative Time To specify for how many hours previous to the present time alarms are displayed
in the Alarm List.
Range: 199 hours

Default: last 24 hours
Fixed Time To set the exact date and time limits for which alarms are viewed.
Start Sets the exact starting date (mm/dd/yyyy) and time (hh:mm) for alarm display.
End Sets the exact ending date (mm/dd/yyyy) and time (hh:mm) for alarm display.
To Change the Alarm Manager to Alarm Browser Mode

1. Click Run Alarm Manager in Alarm Browser mode (see Figure 3-11
or Figure 3-12)
The button appears red and depressed with a check in the box.
The Alarm Browser main dialog box appears.
Note: To access Alarm Browser Properties when the Alarm Manager is
running in Alarm Browser mode, from the menu bar select:
View
Properties
The Alarm Browser Properties Dialog box opens. Notice that the
attributes in the Alarm Updates List are grayed out.
Note: To return to Alarm Manager mode, Click Run Alarm Manager in
Alarm Browser mode. The button appears raised and gray.

Alarm Browser Settings

The procedures that follow are for settings in the Alarm Browser.
To Set the Alarm Browser Time Mode
1. Set the Alarm Manager in Alarm Browser mode (See To Start an Alarm
Browser Display on page 3-12.)
2. Click Use fixed time
When the button appears depressed, red and checked, the Alarm Browser
Fixed Time tab is accessible.
When the button is raised and gray, the Alarm Browser Relative Time tab
is accessible.
3. Press Ok or Apply
The selected time tab appears.
To Set the Number of Alarms to Display in the Alarm Browser
1. Set the Alarm Manager in Alarm Browser mode (See To Start an Alarm
2. In the Number of Alarms to Show in Browser field, raise or lower the
amount with the arrows or select the field and enter the desired number
The Alarm Browser displays the set number of alarms in the Alarm List.
Relative Time Settings

The following procedure is for Relative Time settings.
To Set the Alarm Browser Relative Time in Hours
1. Set the Alarm Browser in Relative Time Mode (See To Start an Alarm
2. In the Show alarm for last hours field, raise or lower the amount with
the arrows or type the number hours
The Alarm Browser displays alarms in the Alarm List for the number of
hours previous to the current time.

Fixed Time Settings

The following procedure is for Fixed Time settings.
To Change the Alarm Browser Start and End Date and Time
1. Set the Alarm Browser in Fixed Time Mode (See To Set the Alarm
Browser Time Mode )
2. Click any start or end, date or time field. Raise or lower the amount with
the arrows or select the field and enter the desired number (see
Figure 3-12)
The Alarm Browser displays alarms in the Alarm List starting and ending
with the entered dates and times..
Searching
Search lets you define search criteria for finding an alarm in the Alarm List.
You can search for up to five alarm attributes simultaneously that possess
specific alarm attribute values. Only alarms that have the specified attribute
values are located, even if the alarm attributes are not currently shown in the
Alarm List.
You can search by:
Attribute and Value
Time and Date
You can define your search:
To ignore case or to search by regular expression
To select (highlight resulting) matches or to display matches only
To Access the Alarm Manager Search Dialog Box
View
Search

The Alarm Manager Search Dialog Box appears as in Figure 3-13.
Search By
Search By
Values
Attributes
Search By Time
Radio Button
Date Type
Search By
List
Time Setup
Additional Search Results

Search Options Options
Search Commands
Figure 3-13: Search Dialog Box

Table 3-18 describes the search options.
Table 3-18: Search Options
Search By Lets you set up a maximum of five attributes with specific values for each attribute.
Attributes Each of the attribute fields contains the entire attribute list. Once an attribute is
selected, it will appear on the button.
Range: All available attributes
Default: Severity, Device Type, Device, Additional Text, Alarm ID
Search by Time When Include Search by Time is selected, a dialog box opens. This lets you
Radio Button specify exact search time parameters based on Ack Date, Clear Date, and Date.
Note: The available Search parameters are determined by the Properties General
selections (see General Properties on page 3-28). If Date is selected in the
General Properties window, only a Date Search is enabled; if Time is selected,
only a Time Search; Date and Time, both.
Date Type List The Date drop-down list you select select the dates for:
Date/Timeof alarm event
Ack Datewhen operator acknowledges the alarm
Clear Datewhen the alarm is cleared
Range: Date, Ack Date, Clear Date
Default: Date
Additional Lets you define the conditions for the search. One, none or both can be selected.
Search Options When Ignore Case is selected, the type case (upper or lower) is ignored. When
Regular Expression is selected, the search is done by a regular expression or a
simple string. This is useful when searching for known expressions.
Default: Disabled for both options
Search Results Radio buttons that let you specify how the search results is presented. When View
Options Matches Only is selected, the Alarm List shows only the results of the search.
When Select Matches is selected, the Alarm List highlights the search result.
Note: One option must be selected.
Default: View Matches Only
Search by Time Use the Start and End buttons and the date/time fields to specify the date/time range
Setup for your selection from the date drop-down list.

Table 3-18: Search Options (Cont.)
Search by Changes to reflect the selected attribute. Values available for the selected search
Values attribute appear in the value list. You can type the value into the entry box. If Regular
Expression is selected as a search option, you can enter any value.
Range: Any value relevant for the selected attribute

Default: none
Search Search: Click to execute search request. Results will display in the Alarm List
Commands according to the Search Results options selected.
Clear: Click to remove all search criteria from the value fields. All search criteria
returns to default values.
Close: Click to close the Search dialog box.
Help: Click to open Online Help
Searching by Attribute and Value

Use the attribute buttons and value fields to set search criteria.
To Search Alarm Manager by Attribute and Value Only
1. In Search By, click one of the Attributes buttons (see Figure 3-13)
A drop-down list with all of the Alarm attributes displays.
2. Select the desired Attribute
The Attribute button displays the selected attribute.
3. In the Search By, click the arrow on the Value field next to the desired
Attribute button (see Figure 3-13)
A drop-down list displays when available.
4. Select or enter the desired value
The value displays in the Value field
Note: If required, you can clear all values by clicking Clear or individual
values by selecting and deleting.
5. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining attributes
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining values
7. In the Search Results cluster, select View Matches Only or
Select Matches
Note: This information is sufficient to execute a search.

8. Click Search to execute the search

If View Matches Only is selected, only the matching items display in the
Alarm List.
If Select Matches is selected, the matching items are highlighted.
9. To re-display all items in the Alarm List, from the Alarm Manager menu
bar select:
View
Display All
All the alarms display in the Alarm List.
Including Search by Time and Date

Search using the time and date variables.
To Search Alarm Manager by Time and Date
1. Set the Search Dialog Box to search by attribute and value. See To
Search Alarm Manager by Attribute and Value Only on page 3-51.
2. Click Include Search by Time if it appears raised and gray
(see Figure 3-13)
The button appears red, depressed and checked. The date, start, and end
fields appear.
3. Click the Date field to view drop-down list
4. Click to select Ack Date, Clear Date, or Date
5. Click Start and enter the starting date and time for the search by clicking
the arrows or highlighting the field and entering the date and time
6. Click End and enter the ending date and time for the search by clicking

Ignoring Case or Regular Expression

You can search by text, ignoring case (upper and lower) or by regular
expression using partial text and a wildcard (*) or any other regular expression.
To Specify Ignore Case or Regular Expression
1. Set the Search Dialog Box to search by attribute and value. See To
Search Alarm Manager by Attribute and Value Only on page 3-51.
2. In Search Options, click Ignore Case or Regular Expression, as
required, if the button appears raised and gray (see Figure 3-13)
The button appears red, and depressed checked.
Note: This information is sufficient to execute a search. Further
parameters can be specified.
Alarm List. If Select Matches is selected, the matching items are
highlighted
Laying Out Components

This section describes how to configure a new Alarm Manager layout. Using
the Layout Components option, you can choose which elements to display of:
the Alarm Summary, Alarm List, or Alarm Updates List. Any combination can
be displayed, but at least one item must be selected. Use the Layout
Components drop-down menu to hide or show Alarm Manager components.
Note: You can also define Layout Components using View, Properties. See
Displaying or Hiding a Component on page 3-30.
To Hide or Show an Alarm Manager Component

View
Layout Components

The Alarm Manager Layout Components drop-down menu appears as in

Figure 3-14..
Figure 3-14: View Layout Components
2. The Alarm Manager View Layout Components options are described in

Table 3-19. .View Layout Components
Table 3-19: View Layout Components Menu
Option Description
Alarm Summary Select to hide or show the Alarm Summary table and chart.
Alarm List Select to hide or show the Alarm List.
Alarm Update List Select to hide or show the Alarm Updates List.
3. Click on an item
When the button appears gray and raised, the item will no longer appear
in the Alarm Manager.
When the button appears red, depressed and checked, the item will appear
in the Alarm Manager.
4. To save the new configuration, see Saving the Current Configuration on
page 3-12.

Actions Menu
The Actions menu of the Alarm Manager contains these menu items:
Select All
Deselect All
Clear
Acknowledge
Unacknowledge
Enable Device
Disable Device
Query Device Status
Alarm Details
Alarm Documentation
Send Alarm Notification
Input Alarms
Rule Details
Select All
The Select All option selects all alarms that appear in the Alarm List. All the
alarms are then highlighted.
Note: If you have selected all alarms be careful about acknowledging or
clearing alarms as your action would affect all alarms in the Alarm List.
To Select all Alarms
From the Alarm Manager menu select:
Actions
Select All
All alarms in the Alarm List are selected and highlighted.

Actions Menu UNO 2.16.3
Deselect All
The Deselect All option deselects all alarms that are selected in the Alarm
List. The display shows no selected alarms.
To Deselect all Alarms
From the Alarm Manager menu select:
Actions
Deselect All
All alarms in the Alarm List are deselected and not highlighted.
Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm option changes the alarm status from open to cleared. When
cleared, the alarm no longer appears in the Alarm Manager Alarm List but does
appear in the Alarm Updates List. The Clear column is checked, the date
appears in the Clear Date column and the user name appears in the Clear Opr
column. A clear action is sent to the agent.
To Clear an Alarm
1. In the Alarm List, select one or more alarms you want to clear
2. From the Alarm Manager menu select:
Actions
Clear
The selected alarms in the Alarm List are cleared. The cleared alarms
appear at the bottom of the Alarm Updates List.

Acknowledge Alarm
The Acknowledge Alarm option indicates that the alarm has been noted.
To Acknowledge an Alarm
1. In the Alarm List, select the alarm(s) to acknowledge

Actions
Acknowledge
The selected alarms in the Alarm List are acknowledged. A check in the
Ack column, the date in the Ack Date column and the user name in the Ack
Opr column appear for each acknowledged alarm, now displayed in white
print. The acknowledged alarms appear in the Alarm Updates List.
Unacknowledge Alarm
The Unacknowledge Alarm option changes the status of a previously
acknowledged alarm to unacknowledged.
To Unacknowledge an Alarm
1. Select one or more alarms you want to unacknowledge on the Alarm List
Actions
Unacknowledge
The selected alarms in the Alarm List are unacknowledged. The

unacknowledged alarms appear in the original color in the Alarm List and
the Alarm Updates List. The Ack column is now blank.

Enable Device
The Enable Device option lets you enable the device referenced in the
selected alarm. If the enable status is specified for that alarm, the Enable
Device menu item is activated. Enable Device operates only for a single
selected alarm. Selecting multiple alarms deactivates this feature.
To Enable a Device
1. Select the alarm on the Alarm List with device you want to enable
Actions
Enable Device
An action is sent to the agent.
Disable Device
The Disable Device option lets you disable the device referenced in the
selected alarm. If the disable status is specified for that alarm, the Disable
Device menu item is activated. This operates only when a single alarm is
selected. Selecting multiple alarms deactivates this feature.
To Disable a Device
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List whose device you want to disable
Actions
Disable Device
The action is sent to the agent.

Query Device Status

The Query Device Status option lets you query the status of the referenced
device in a single alarm. The following are available status selections:
Status MMDevice status for devices under MM
Status NEDevice status for devices under XC (TransCoder)
Status PHYDevice status as received directly from the device
Status ADDAdditional device status as received directly from
the device
An unavailable status appears grayed out.
To Query a Device Status
1. Select the alarm on the Alarm List whose device you want to query
Actions
Query Device Status
Status MM
Status NE
Status PHY
Status ADD
3. Click the desired status selection

The requested device status is displayed.

Displaying Alarm Details

The Alarm Details option displays the attributes of the selected alarm in a
window. You can choose which information is displayed. For reference, see
To Show/Hide a Column in the Alarm List on page 3-34. You can produce
an alarm details report from the main menu or by double mouse click on
the alarm.
Alarm Details Report from the Main Menu

An alarm details report can be produced by selecting Alarm Details in the
Actions menu.
To Produce an Alarm Details Report

1. Select the alarm on the Alarm List for the Alarm Details report
Actions
Alarm Details
An alarm details report appears for the alarm selected in the Alarm List.
See Figure 3-15
Alarm Details Report by Double Mouse Click

An alarm details report can be produced by mouse click shortcut.
To Produce an Alarm Details Report by Mouse Shortcut

1. Select the alarm on the Alarm List for an Alarm Details report
2. Double click the alarm

The Alarm Details report appears as in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15: Alarm Details Report
Showing Online Alarm Documentation

The Alarm Documentation option lets you view online documentation for the
selected alarm if an Alarm ID, used to retrieve the relevant document, appears
in the Alarm ID field. Most online Alarm Documents contain the fields:
Alarm Agent Type and Alarm ID
Description
Examples
Background Information
Note: Some online alarm documents describe several alarms within a single
report when alarms are related or similar. In this case, specific details
for each alarm are presented in tabular form and common information
is presented in textual form.
You can produce an online alarm report from the main menu or by a right
mouse click on the alarm.

Generating Alarm Documentation from the Menu

You can generate online alarm reports from the Actions menu.
To Generate Alarm Documentation
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List for which you want to generate a report
Actions
Alarm Documentation
Online documentation appears for the alarm selected in the Alarm List.
Generating an Online Alarm Report by Right Mouse Click

You can generate online alarm report by mouse click shortcut.
To Generate Alarm Documentation by Right Mouse Button
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List for which you want to generate a report
2. Click the right mouse button and select Alarm Documentation

Sending an Alarm Notification

The Send Alarm Notification option enables you to send an e-mail
notification message regarding a selected alarm.
Alarm Notification from the Main Menu

You can select Send Alarm Notification from the Actions menu.
To send an Alarm Notification

1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List
Actions
Send Alarm Notification
The Alarm Manager Send Notification window opens.

3. Click on the Contact Group box
Contact groups are build in the Alarm Notification Application
application. For more information, see Setting Up Contact Groups in
UNO Alarm Notification. Administrative Guide. 6-33
4. Select a contact group from the list
5. Click Send
An alarm notification is sent by e-mail to all members of the selected
Contact Group. A sequential number appears in the UNO Alert ID field.
ACTIVE appears in the UNO Alert Status field in the Alarm List.
Alarm Notification by Right Mouse Click

You can send an alarm notification message by selecting Send Alarm
Notification on the right click shortcut menu.
To send an Alarm Notification by Right Mouse Click
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List

2. Click the right mouse button and select Send Alarm Notification
3. Continue as from step 3 above to select the contact group and to send an
e-mail message to the members of the selected group.

Displaying Correlation Input Alarms Details

The Input Alarms option displays the attributes of the correlated alarm in a
window. You can produce a detail report from the main menu or by double
Correlation Input Alarm Report from the Main Menu

An alarm correlation report can be produced by selecting Input Alarms in the
Actions menu.
To Produce a Report of Correlation Input Alarms

1. Select a correlated alarm on the Alarm List for the report
Actions
Input Alarms
A a report appears for the alarm selected.
Displaying an Input Alarms Report by Right Mouse Click

You can generate a correlation details report by mouse click shortcut.
To Generate Correlation Documentation by Right Mouse Button

2. Click the right mouse button and select Input Alarms
Documentation appears for the alarm selected.

Displaying Rule Details

The Rule Details option displays the rule details of the correlated alarm in a
window. You can produce a rules details report from the main menu or by
double mouse click on the alarm.
Rules Details Report from the Main Menu

A rule details report can be produced by selecting Rule Details in the Actions
menu.
To Produce a Correlation Details Report

Actions
Rule Details
A a rule details report appears for the alarm selected.
Displaying a Rule Details Report by Right Mouse Click

You can generate a rule details report by mouse click shortcut.
To Display Correlation Rule Details by Right Mouse Button

2. Click the right mouse button and select Rule Details
A rule details report appears for the alarm selected.

Applications Menu UNO 2.16.3
Applications Menu
From the Alarm Manager Application menu you can invoke other applications
directly from the Applications menu, shown in Figure 3-16. Options are:
Configure Tools
Command Center
Download Manager (with Optional License #2)
Alarm Correlation
Device Alarm History
BTS Relays
Element Manager (only if an element manager; CAT, or TCM connected to
the selected alarm)
Agent Access
Generate Alarm Reports
RFDS
CFC (if selected alarm is associated with a CFC device)
Cisco Applications (if selected alarm is associated with a Cisco device)
UNO Log Summary
Large Scale Configuration (with Optional License #4)
Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor
PM Statistics Graphs (with Optional License #3)
Figure 3-16: Applications Menu

Configuring Tools
Configure Tools lets you add applications to the Applications menu. You
can define or modify the parameters and the conditions for launching the
application. You can then launch the application from the menu bar
Applications selection list.
Use the Configure Tools Dialog box to add, delete, or modify an application.
Adding an Application
Use the Configure Tools Dialog box to add an application.
To Add to the Applications Menu
Applications
Configure Tools
The Configure Tools dialog box opens as in Figure 3-17.
Applications
Application Name
Browse
Path to Executable Destination
Arguments Keywords
Show in
Non-Accessibe Popup Menu
When:
Configure
Commands
Action Buttons
Figure 3-17: Configure Tools Dialog Box

The Configure Tools dialog box options are described in Table 3-20.
Table 3-20: Configure Tools Dialog Box
Display Item Description
Applications Lists all the applications are defined for your system by users. If you select an
application listed, information about the application is displayed in the relevant dia-
log boxes. You can select or deselect one item at a time. When you select an exist-
ing application, Modify and Delete are enabled. You can then either modify the
application conditions or delete the application from the list.
Range: User Added Applications

Default: Empty
Application Name A text field to name the application to include in the Applications\Tools list. Use
any alphanumeric characters to name the application. This is a required entry field.
TIP: Use a name that is indicative of the application you are adding to the list.
Range: 150 Alphanumeric Characters

Default: Empty
Path to A text field to enter the path (including the executable file name) where the applica-
Executable tion executable is located. This is a required entry field. If you enter an item that is
not an executable file, you will receive an error message indicating that the selected
file is not an application.
Range: 1255 Alphanumeric Characters, Symbols
Default: Empty
Browse Click the Browse Destination button (three dots) to open the Browse Destina-
Destination tion dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select the executable that will open
your application. It is recommended to use this method rather than manually enter-
ing the path in the Path to Executable field.
Arguments This field lets you manually add arguments to the executable. Check the application
manual for valid arguments. You can also use the Keywords list to add keywords to
the arguments.
Range: 1255 characters
Default: Empty

Table 3-20: Configure Tools Dialog Box (Cont.)
Keywords Clicking this button opens up an optional list of keywords that can be used to define
arguments that will apply to the application. Selecting a keyword will enter that
value in the arguments field. You can enter several keywords separated by commas,
such as TT_ID, ALARM_ID.
The keyword list includes these values:
ALARM_IDThe Alarm ID field of the selected alarm. Example: 1001
EM_MISThe UNO host machine name. This is the name of the machine that is
running the Alarm Engine with which the Alarm Manager is connected.
FILTER(S)This parameter passes a string containing all filter names currently
active in the alarm manager. This is identical to the filters in the Filter Select Box
on the Alarm Manager Main Dialog box.
LOG_IDThe Fully Distinguished Name (FDN) is part of the selected alarm Log
ID UNO attribute.
OBJ_FDNThis is the FDN of the Device attribute of the selected alarm.
Example: /networkId=NETWORK-145-9-239-52/managedElemen-
tId=OMCR_PLAT-9/functionId=XC_PLAT-1/equipmen-
tId=XCCAGE-1-1/equipmentId=GPROC-1-1-1
OBJ_NAMESThe last part of the FDN of the Device attribute of the selected
alarm.
Example: GPROC-1-1-1
OBJ_TYPEThe device type attribute of the selected alarm.
Example: GPROC
PM_FM_MODEDenotes the current mode.
Possible values: PM, FM, PMFM, none
RECORD_DNSSame as LOG_ID except that it includes the specific record in
the alarm record for the selected alarm.
Example:/systemId=baritone/logId=AlarmLog/logRecordId=106487
RECORD_IDSThe Id attribute (the record ID number) of the selected alarm.
Example: 106487
Range: Any Keyword from the list

Default: None (optional)

Non-Accessible Lets you decide when to restrict application launch conditions. Using any of these
When options will prevent the application from opening up if the condition is met:
No Alarms SelectedWhen no alarms are selected the application cannot be
launched. To open the application at least one alarm must be selected.
Multiple Alarms SelectedWhen multiple alarms are selected, the application
does not open.
You can select any combination of these application opening restrictions.
For example, if you select both the Multiple Alarms Selected and the No Alarms
Selected options, the application opens only when a single alarm is chosen.
Range: No Alarms Selected, Multiple Alarms Selected

Default: Both Off
Show in Popup When selected, the application will appear in the right mouse button shortcut menu
Menu under Tools. If not selected, the application will appear in the Applications
Menu under Tools.
Range: Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
Operations Add: When clicked, a newly defined application is added to the Applications List.
Modify: When clicked, you can modify any section from the Applications List.
Delete: When clicked, the application is deleted from the Applications List.
Action Buttons Ok: When clicked, the choices are applied and the application is added to the Tools
menu. The changes are made to the configuration file and the dialog box closes.
Apply: When clicked, the choices are applied and the application is added to the
Tools menu. The changes are made to the configuration file and the dialog box
remains open.
Close: When clicked, cancels the action and closes the dialog box.
Help: When clicked, opens the Online Help.
2. Enter a unique name for the application in the Applications field

3. Enter the path of application executable file in the Path to Executable
field or (recommended) click the Browse Destination button to locate
the file
The Browse Destination Dialog box opens. See Browse Destination
Dialog Box on page 2-34.
4. Enter the arguments to the executable in the Arguments field or click
Keywords
The Keywords drop-down list appears.

5. Click the desired keyword

The keyword appears in the Arguments field.
6. If required, click No Alarms Selected or Multiple Alarms Selected in
the Non-Accessible When cluster
The button appears red, depressed and checked.
7. If required, click Show in Popup Menu
The button appears red, depressed and checked. The application will
appear under Tools in the right click shortcut menu.
8. Click Add to add the newly defined application to the Application List.
Deleting an Application
Use the Configure Tools Dialog Box to delete an application.
To Delete from the Applications Menu

Applications
Configure Tools
The Configure Tools dialog box opens as in Figure 3-17, on page 3-67.
2. Select the application you want to delete from the Applications field
3. Click Delete to delete the selected application
The application is removed from the Applications field

Modifying an Application
Use the Configure Tools Dialog Box to modify and application.
To Modify an Application in the Applications Menu

Applications
Configure Tools
2. Select the application you want to modify from the Applications field
3. Enter any required changes; see To Add to the Applications Menu on
page 3-67
4. Click Modify to modify the selected application
Invoking Applications
Applications can be invoked from the Applications Menu.
Command Center
Selecting Command Center launches the Command Center application from
the Alarm Manager. When you select an alarm on the Alarm List, the
Command Center application shows the devices associated with the selected
alarm. After the Command Center is launched, you can continue working with
the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke the Command Center from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm from the Alarm List for which you want to view the
associated devices
Applications
Command Center
The Command Center application opens showing the devices associated

with the selected alarm. See Command Center. Command Center Suite.

Alarm Correlation
Selecting Alarm Correlation launches the Alarm Correlation application from
the Alarm Manager. After Alarm Correlation is launched, you can continue
working with the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke Alarm Correlation from Alarm Manager

Applications
Alarm Correlation
The Alarm correlation application opens. See Chapter 4: Alarm

Correlation.
Download Manager
Selecting Download Manager launches the UNO Software Download
Manager application from the Alarm Manager. When you select an alarm
associated with a specific device, you can open the Download Manager to
download new software to that device. This selection is accessible only when
there is a download available.
To Invoke the Software Download Manager from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm Manager that is associated with the device to
which you want to download new software
Applications
Download Manager
The Software Download Manager application opens and is set up to

download new software to the device indicated by the selected alarm.
See Software Download Manager. Testing and Tuning Applications.


Selecting Device Alarm History launches the Alarm Browser application
from the Alarm Manager. The Alarm Browser will display all alarms with the
same device that appears in the selected alarm. See Alarm Browser on
page 6-1.
To Invoke Device Alarm History from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm in the Alarm List.

Applications
The Alarm Browser application opens. See Alarm Browser on page 6-1.
BTS Relays
Selecting BTS Relays launches the UNO BTS Relays application from the
Alarm Manager.
To Invoke the BTS Relays Application from Alarm Manager
Applications
BTS Relays
The BTS Relays application opens. See BTS Relays. Testing and Tuning
Applications.

Element Manager
Selecting Element Manager launches the UNO Element Manager application
from the Alarm Manager. The Element Manager is only available if the
selected alarm has an element manager connected (CAT or TCM) or the alarm
is associated with any CFC device.
To Invoke the Element Manager from Alarm Manager

Applications
Element Manager
The Element Manager application opens. See Using Element Manager

Access Application on page 13-6.
Agent Access
Selecting Agent Access launches the UNO Telnet Agent Access application
from the Alarm Manager for the selected alarm.
To Invoke the Agent Access Application from Alarm Manager

Applications
Agent Access
The Telnet to Agent Access application opens.

Alarm Notification
Selecting Alarm Notification launches the UNO Alarm Notification
application from the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke Alarm Notification from Alarm Manager

Applications
Alarm Notification
The Alarm Notification application opens. See UNO Alarm

Notification. Administrative Guide.
Generating Alarm Reports

Selecting Generate Alarm Reports generates three types of historical alarm
analysis reports:
Complete SeverityDisplays all alarms for a specific device sorted by
Alarm ID and severity
Complete Device TypeDisplays all alarms for a specific device type
sorted by device, Alarm ID and severity
Device DistributionDisplays all alarms with the same Alarm ID (same
type of problem) sorted by device and severity.
Note: Depending on the alarm, some options may be disabled.

To Generate Alarm Reports

Applications
Complete Severity
Device Distribution
When you click Generate Alarm Reports, a drop-down list appears with
these options:
Complete Severity
Device Distribution
3. Select one of the options
The desired UNO Historical Alarm Report appears. The Generation Date
on the Historical Alarm Report is the exact time and date the report was
generated.

Selecting Historical Alarm Reports launches Historical Alarm Reports
application from the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke the Historical Alarm Reports Application
Applications
The Historical Alarm Reports application opens. See Historical Alarm

Reports on page 7-1.

RFDS
Selecting RFDS launches the UNO RFDS application from the Alarm
Manager.
To Invoke RFDS from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm where the device type is one of:

BTS
Sector
Carrier
Applications
RFDS
Test
Non-SALT
SALT
The RFDS application opens. See RFDS. Testing and Tuning

Applications.
To Invoke RFDS Reports from Alarm Manager

BTS
Sector
Carrier
Applications
RFDS
Reports
The RFDS Reports application opens. See RFDS Reports. Testing and
Tuning Applications.

CFC
Selecting CFC opens the CFC drop-down list:
Monitoring Tool
Summary Report
To Invoke CFC Monitoring Tool from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm in the Alarm List

The alarm is highlighted.
Applications
CFC
Monitoring Tool
The UNO CFC - Single CBSC History Monitor for the selected alarm
appears. All the normal CFC application functionalities are available.
See CFC Monitoring. PM Enhanced Applications.
To Run a CFC Report from Alarm Manager

Applications
CFC
CFC Summary Report
The CFC Summary Report for the selected alarm appears.

Cisco Applications
Selecting Cisco Applications opens a drop-down list of Cisco applications:
Cisco View Util: For LAN management. Opens the Cisco View Util
application on the monitoring OMC-IP in the context of
the selected alarm.
Cisco WAN Manager: Opens the Cisco WAN manager on the monitoring
OMC-IP in the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco Works 2000: For LAN management. Opens the Cisco Works 2000
application on the monitoring OMC-IP (Operations and
Management Center for IP devices) in the context of the
selected alarm.
Telnet: Opens a Telnet session to the selected device.
Http Session: Opens an http session to the selected device.
To Invoke Cisco Applications from Alarm Manager
1. Select an alarm elated to a Cisco device in the Alarm List

Applications
Cisco Applications
Application Selection
The selected external Cisco application appears.

Note: UNO provides access to this external application. However, operations
performed in the external application are not part of UNO functionality.
UNO Log Summary

Selecting UNO Log Summary displays summary information about alarms
stored in the Historical Alarm Log, including the earliest and latest record and
the total number of records.

To Invoke the UNO Log Summary from Alarm Manager

Applications
UNO Log Summary
The UNO Log Summary dialog box appears as in Figure 3-18.
Earliest
Record
Latest
Record
# of
Records
Figure 3-18: UNO Log Summary
Table 3-21 describes the UNO Log Summary.
Table 3-21: UNO Log Summary
Earliest Record Shows the date and time of the oldest record in the Historical
Alarm Log.
Range: Date: mm/dd/yyyy, Time: hh:mm:ss, 24 hour clock
Latest Record Shows the date and time of the newest record in the Historical
Alarm Log.
Range: Date: mm/dd/yyyy, Time: hh:mm:ss 24 hour clock
Number of Shows the total number of records stored in the Historical

Records Alarm Log.
Range: 0Current Number of Stored Alarms
Close Click to return to the Alarm Manager main dialog box.
Help Opens the Online Help.

Large Scale Configuration

Selecting Large Scale Configuration invokes the Large Scale User
Configuration dialog box from the Alarm Manager. This selection is available
only when Optional Licence 4 exists in the system. The Large Scale
Configuration lets you manage alarms and alarm filters using a common setup
or configuration across multiple UNO managers.
To Invoke the Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box
Applications
Large Scale User Configuration
Large Scale User Configuration dialog box opens. See To Invoke the
Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box on page 5-13.

Selecting Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor invokes the Central Ack
Configuration from the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke the Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box
Applications
Central Ack Configuration dialog box appears. See Figure 3-24, UNO
Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box, on page 3-89.

Selecting PM Statistics Graphs invokes the UNO PM Statistics Display
dialog box from the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke the UNO PM Statistics Display Dialog Box
Applications
The UNO PM Statistics Display dialog box appears. See PM Statistics

Display Main Dialog Box in PM Statistics Graphs. PM Enhanced
Applications. 3-4.
Note: If there is no data available, the graph display area will be blank.

Mouse Shortcuts SummaryAlarm Manager UNO 2.16.3
Mouse Shortcuts SummaryAlarm Manager

This section describes the right mouse button shortcuts for use in the
Alarm Manager.
To display shortcut menus, click the right mouse button in the display. Inactive
options are grayed out. Often, items should be selected before opening shortcut
menus. For instructions to make single and/or multiple selections, see
Selecting Items on page 2-42.
Alarm Manager right mouse button shortcuts aid in performing actions for
selected alarms in the Alarm List.
Table 3-22 lists shortcut menu options for the Alarm Manager.
Table 3-22: Alarm Manager Right Mouse Button Functions
Shortcut Sub-level Description
Select All Selects all alarms in the Alarm List.
Deselect All Deselects all selected alarms in the Alarm List.
Clear Changes alarm status of selected alarms to cleared.
Acknowledge Specifies that the selected alarms have been acknowledged.
Unacknowledge Takes the selected alarms out of acknowledged status.
Enable Device Enables the device referenced in the selected alarm. This is
only active for single alarms.
Disable Device Disables the device referenced in the selected alarm.
Query Device Displays the status for selected device according for:
Status Status MM
Status NE
Status PHY
Status ADD
Alarm Details Shows attributes for a single alarm in a screen.
Alarm Shows online documentation for the selected alarm (only if the
Documentation alarm has an Alarm ID).
Send Alarm Sends alarm notification to specified group.
Notification
PM Statistics Invokes the PM Statistics Graphs application.
Graphs

Table 3-22: Alarm Manager Right Mouse Button Functions (Cont.)
Shortcut Sub-level Description
Input Alarms Displays Correlation Input Alarm documentation
Rule Details Displays Correlation Rule Details documentation
CFC Monitoring Invokes the CFC Single CBSC History Screen for a selected
Tool alarm associated with a CFC device.
Summary Invokes a Summary Report for a selected alarm associated with
Report a CFC device
Cisco Applications Invokes the external Cisco applications
Cisco View Util* For LAN management. Opens the Cisco View Util application
on the monitoring OMC-IP in the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco WAN Opens the Cisco WAN manager on the monitoring OMC-IP in
Manager the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco Works For LAN management. Opens the Cisco Works 2000 applica-
2000 tion on the monitoring OMC-IP (Operations and Management
Center for IP devices) in the context of the selected alarm.
Telnet Opens a Telnet session.
Http Session Opens an http session.
Tools Show Related Opens a window which displays a list of BTSs related to the
CBTSs selected alarm.
Search by Searches for an alarm, or set of alarms according to any of the

attributes shown for the selected alarm, for example:
Ack Device
Additional Text Device Type
Additional Text Translation Event Type
Agent Id
Alarm ID Notification Identifier
Clear Probable Cause
Corr State Severity
Date
* UNO provides access to this external application. However, operations performed in the
external application are not part of UNO functionality.

Mouse Shortcuts SummaryAlarm Manager UNO 2.16.3
Right Mouse Button Shortcuts: Search Example

The following is a search example using right mouse button shortcuts.
To Search by Right Mouse Button Shortcuts
1. To execute a search with right mouse button shortcuts, select an alarm

from the Alarm List as in Figure 3-3, on page 3-8
2. Click the right mouse button and select Search By
A drop-down menu appears displaying the options shown in Figure 3-19.
3. Select your option
Figure 3-19: Right Mouse Button Search Drop-Down Menu
All alarms with the same option attribute as the selected alarm
are highlighted.

Central Alarm Acknowledge (Ack) Handling

Central Alarm Ack Handling allows you to perform manual handling and
synchronization of remote-system alarms for multiple UNO managers
connected to the same agent.
Central Alarm Ack Handling ensures that information relating to alarm
management, including alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearing, is
displayed consistently in connected UNO Alarm Managers. All managers
receive alarm updates for alarm-related functionality. Central Alarm Ack
Handling enables the central managing and sharing of information with other
UNO managers. When an alarm is acknowledged or cleared on a manager,
Central Alarm Ack Handling propagates the information to all connected
managers.
Central Alarm Ack Handling is launched from within Alarm Manager, Alarm
Browser or from UNO Configuration in the UNO Application Launcher.
Capabilities
Central Alarm Ack Handling enables a local UNO system to communicate with
remote-site UNO systems and to perform manual synchronization if
communication is lost, then reestablished. You can view and refresh
connection states and monitor acknowledged or cleared alarms for multiple
managers connected to the same agent. Figure 3-20 displays the configuration
tree.
UNO Configuration Menu
File
Large Scale
Central Ack
System Configuration
Accept Flags
Figure 3-20: UNO Configuration System Tree

Invoking Central Alarm Ack Handling UNO 2.16.3
Connecting Managers
To perform alarm acknowledgement and clearing in Central Alarm
Acknowledgement Handling, you need at least one remote and one local
manager connected to each other. This procedure requires root privileges.
The local site manager and the remote-site manager must be able to
communicate with each other. For instructions to connect managers, see
System Configuration Setup on page 5-4.
Invoking Central Alarm Ack Handling

By default, the UNO system will not accept a synchronization-connection
request from another UNO system. To enable the system to accept a
synchronization-connection request, you can enable the Accept Ack flag.
You can invoke Central Alarm Ack Handling from one of two areas:
Indirectly from the UNO Application Launcher
From another applicationAlarm Manager or Alarm Browser
Note: Central Alarm Ack Handling cannot be invoked from a command line.
Launching from the Application Launcher

Central Alarm Ack Handling must be launched indirectly from the application
launcher in-as-much-as the application is not an independently licensed feature.
Therefore, the application has no dedicated icon.
To Launch Central Ack Indirectly from the Application Launcher
1. From the UNO Application Launcher, click the UNO configuration icon
The UNO configuration Main Menu bar appears; (see Figure 3-21).
Figure 3-21: UNO Configuration Main Menu Bar

2. From the UNO Configuration Main Menu Bar, select Central Ack
A drop-down menu appears; (see Figure 3-22).
Figure 3-22: UNO Configuration Drop-Down Menu
3. Enable the Accept Flag radio button; (see Figure 3-23)

The Accept Flag radio button appears red.
Figure 3-23: Accept Flag Radio Button
4. Click System Configuration (see Figure 3-22)

The UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box appears as shown in
Figure 3-24.
Manager/Agent Release Connection
Heading Synchronized
Information
Field
Synchronize...
Add
Refresh
Delete
Close Help
Figure 3-24: UNO Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box

Invoking Central Alarm Ack Handling UNO 2.16.3
The elements of UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box are described in
Table 3-23.
Table 3-23: UNO Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box
Manager/Agent Displays the names of the local-system and remote-system

name managers and agents
Release Displays the release version of managers and agents
Connection Displays the connection status of managers and agents as Con-

nected or Disconnected
Synchronized Displays the status of alarms that are synchronized.
Synchronize... Opens the UNO Central ACk Synchronization Dialog box

enabling the synchronization of unsynchronized alarms
Refresh Refreshes the Information Field, which displays the most
up-to-date messages and information
Help Invokes the Help utility
Close Closes the Central Ack Configuration dialog box
Delete Removes remote-site manager/Agents from Information Field

The Delete button is enabled only for an UNO administrator
Add Opens the Central Ack Configuration Setup dialog box.
The Add button is enabled only for an UNO administrator
Information Field Is the area in which information is listed, in a tree, about the
managers, agents, release versions, connection status and syn-
chronization status
The tree includes all UNO servers that the UNO administrator
includes in the Central Ack monitoring; the local UNO server
and its agents always appear at the top of the tree
Heading Is the title area of the Information Field.
Invoking from Other UNO Applications

You can launch Central Alarm Ack Handling from these applications:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser

To Invoke Central Alarm Ack Monitor from Alarm Manager/Browser
1. Invoke Alarm Manager; see Invoking from the Application Launcher on

page 3-5; or invoke Alarm Browser; see Invoking from the Command
Line on page 6-5
The Alarm Manager or Alarm Browser Main Dialog Box appears.
2. From the Alarm Manager or Alarm Browser Main Menu Bar, (see
Figure 3-25)select Applications
Figure 3-25: Alarm Manager/Browser Main Menu Bar
A drop-down menu appears as shown in Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26: Drop-Down Menu
3. From the drop-down menu, select Central Alarm Acknowledge

Monitor
The UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box appears as in Figure 3-24,
on page 3-89.

Adding Remote-System Managers/Agents UNO 2.16.3
Adding Remote-System Managers/Agents

When you first invoke Central Alarm Ack Handling, the main dialog box
appears displaying the names of the manager and agents associated with the
local system. To enable the application to perform, you must add the names of
remote-system managers and agents to the Information Field.
To Add Remote-System Managers/Agents
1. From the UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box, click Add
Note: The Add button is enabled only for an UNO administrator.
Central Ack Configuration Setup appears as shown in Figure 3-27.
Name/Address
...
Connected
Agents
Release
Select
Name
Select
All
Deselect
All
Ok Apply Cancel Help
Figure 3-27: Central Ack Configuration Setup

The elements of the Central Ack Configuration dialog box are described in
Table 3-24.
Table 3-24: Central Ack Configuration Setup
... Populates the Connected Agent(s) field
Release Is the title of the field in which the release version of each man-
ager and agent is designated.
Help Invokes the help utility
Cancel Closes the Central Ack Configuration Setup dialog box
Apply Adds the remote-system manager and its agents to the Informa-
tion Field; the Central Ack Configuration Setup dialog box
remains open for further use
OK Adds the remote-system manager and its agents to the Informa-

tion Field and closes the Central Ack Configuration Setup dia-
log box
Deselect All Deselects all selected agents and removes all check marks.
Select All Selects all agents that can be added to the UNO Central Ack
Configuration dialog box; check marks designate the selected
agents
Name The name(s) of agents connected to the remote system appear

in the Name field
Select When the Select field is active, you can select the agents you
want to add to the UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box
Connected When a remote system is selected, the names of the agents con-
Agent(s) nected to that system appear in the Connected Agent(s)
field
Name/Address Is used to enter the name or address of a remote system

Field
2. In the Name/Address field, type the name or address of a remote system as

demonstrated in Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28: Name/Address Field

Deleting Managers and Agents UNO 2.16.3
3. Click
The Connected Agent(s) field is populated with agents.

4. In the Select field, select the agents that you want to add to the Central
Ack Configuration dialog box individually or click Select All
Check marks appear in the Select field. If you attempt to select non-shared
agent(s), an error notice appears as shown in Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29: Non-Shared Agent(s) Error Dialog
Note: To deselect the selected agents, click Deselect All.

All the agents are deselected.
The remote-system manager and agent(s) are added to the Information
Field in the Central Ack Configuration dialog box; (see Figure 3-24).
Deleting Managers and Agents

You can delete remote-system managers along with their associated agents
from the Information Field and you can delete remote-system agents.
Note: The Delete button is enabled only for an UNO administrator.
To Delete a Remote-System Manager
1. Select the remote-system manager you want to delete

Note: If you select a local-system manager, the Delete button appears grayed
out. You cannot delete a local-system manager.
2. Click Delete

To Delete a Remote-System Agent
1. Select the remote-system agent you want to delete

2. Click Delete
The agent is deleted.
Note: A minimum of one agent must be connected to a remote-site manager.
If you attempt to delete an agent that would leave a remote-site
manager with no agents connected, an error message appears as shown
in Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-30: ErrorCannot Delete Agent
Synchronizing Alarms
You can synchronize alarms from individual or multiple managers on
remote-site systems from the local UNO system. If alarms are not
synchronized, the text row(s) in the Central Ack Configuration dialog box
Information Field appear(s) yellow as shown in Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31: Notice of a Non-Synchronized Alarm
To Synchronize Alarms in Central Ack
1. From the UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box, click Synchronize
The UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog box appears; (see
Figure 3-33). If there are no non-synchronized alarms, the Configuration
Information Dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3-32.

Synchronizing Alarms UNO 2.16.3
Figure 3-32: No Non-Synchronized AlarmsDialog Box
Note: To synchronize all alarms, make sure that no managers are selected in
the UNO Central Ack Configuration dialog box. To synchronize one
specific alarm, select only the manager whose alarms you want to
synchronize.
Agent Problem Ack Manager Ack

Severity Device Date Clear Name Clear
Deselect All... Select All

Synchronize... Alarm Details... Close Help
Figure 3-33: UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog Box

The elements of the UNO Central Ack Synchronization dialog box are
described in Table 3-25.
Table 3-25: UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog Box
Severity The severity of the alarm is indicated in the Severity field
Agent The agent generating the alarm is displayed in the Agent field
Device The devices that have problems that cause alarms to be generated
are identified in the Device field
Date The dates on which the alarms are generated are in the Date field
Problem The problems that cause alarms to be generated are identified by

their numeric code in the Problem field
(Local System) The clear(ed) status of local system alarms is displayed in the
Clear Clear field under Local System; cleared alarms are indicated
with a check mark
(Local System) The acknowledge(d) status of local system alarms is displayed in

Ack the Ack field under Local System; Acked alarms are indicated
with a check mark
Manager Name The Manager Name of the remote manager is indicated.
(Remote The clear(ed) status of remote system alarms is displayed in the

System) Clear Clear field under Remote System; cleared alarms are indi-
cated with a check mark
(Remote The acknowledge(d) status of remote system alarms is displayed

System) Ack in the Ack field under Remote System; Acked alarms are
indicated by a check mark
Help Invokes the Help utility
Select All Selects all alarms for synchronization
Close Closes the UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog box
Alarm Details... Opens an Alarm Details Report for one alarm at a time; no more
than one alarm can be selected to open a report
Deselect All... Deselects all alarms that are selected for synchronization
Synchronize... Opens the UNO Central Ack Synchronization Dialog Box from
which synchronization can be effected

Synchronizing Alarms UNO 2.16.3
2. Select the alarm(s) you want to synchronize. The alarms appear

highlighted as shown in Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34: Highlighted Alarm
3. If you want to generate a report, click Alarm Details (otherwise go to

procedure number four) The UNO Central Ack Alarm Details report
appears as in Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35: UNO Central Ack Alarm Details Report
4. From the UNO Central Synchronization Dialog, click Synchronize

The alarms are synchronized and a Configuration Information message

appears as in Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36: Configuration InformationSynchronization Done
Note: When the connection between two UNO servers is first initiated, no
synchronization of active records is performed.
Printing Alarm Details

You can print the UNO Central Ack Alarms Details report.
To Print Alarm Details

1. Click Print

ShortcutsRight Mouse Button, Central ACK Handling UNO 2.16.3
ShortcutsRight Mouse Button, Central ACK Handling

You can use the right mouse button to perform several actions See also Mouse
Shortcuts SummaryAlarm Manager on page 3-84:
Add
Delete
Synchronize
Refresh
You can also use the right mouse button to invoke applications that enable you
to monitor and manage alarms on selected hosts:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
Filter Builder
To Activate Right Mouse Button Shortcuts
1. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the Information Field

The right mouse button shortcut menu appears as in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37: Right Mouse Button Shortcut Drop-Down Menu

Note: The functionality of the drop-down menu varies according to cursor
placement. All functions are active if you select a remote manager and
click the right mouse button.
2. Click the selection you want to invoke
The selected function or application is invoked.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 4: Alarm Correlation

Alarm Correlation significantly contributes to efficient and effective fault
management by facilitating the attainment of these fault-management
objectives:
Fault recognition
Isolation of the primary cause of the fault
Fault correction
Alarm Correlation accomplishes these objectives by combining numerous
alarms that may be generated as a result of a single fault into a single,
information-rich alarm with an identifiable causal link to the fault. In doing so,
Alarm Correlation provides these benefits:
Reduces alarm pressure, which is the quantity of alarms that arrive at an
interface per unit time
Provides supplemental fault diagnostics information
Enhances alarm quality, which refers to alarm informational content that
will suffice to perform proper fault analysis and fault recovery
Note: You can use the uno_alarm_doc.sh utility to document new
correlated alarms (see uno_alarm_doc.sh in UNO Utilities.
Administrative Guide. 11-47).
Overview
The significant increase in the size and complexity of CDMA networks has
resulted in a concomitant increase in the demand for effective and efficient
network management.
One important aspect of network management is fault management. Faults are
unavoidable in large networks, but quick fault detection and isolation of the
cause of these faults are central to efficient network management. Good fault
management thus results in increased system robustness and reliability.

General Concepts UNO 2.16.3
The central tasks of fault management, which must all be executed in a timely
and cost-effective manner, are:
Detect the fault
Isolate the primary cause of the fault
Correct the fault
Executing these tasks efficiently is difficult because a single fault of a large
network may result in a large number of alarms and notifications. This makes
it very difficult to isolate the true cause of the fault.
The Alarm Correlation mechanism filters the mass of incoming alarms. This
mechanism analyzes the stream of input alarms and combines alarms that
commonly result from one fault type into a correlated alarm. This correlated
alarm thus provides more specific and useful fault information that aids an
operator in executing the fault management tasks.
The following sections will describe how Alarm Correlation helps to execute
the central tasks of fault management by providing these functions:
Reducing alarm quantity
Providing specific and useful fault diagnostic information
Increasing alarm quality
General Concepts
Alarm Correlation in Fault Management

Alarm Correlation is an essential part of fault management because of the
masses of alarms. These alarms are generated independently of affected
devices without any indication of the true fault source. There is also no
indication of the causal relationship between a specific fault and a generated
alarm. In addition, the overwhelming number of alarms makes it difficult for
an operator, even when causal relationships between faults and alarms are
successfully deduced, to prioritize fault correction.
The mass of alarms also makes it difficult to differentiate between alarms with
meaningful information content and alarms with little information content.
Meaningful information content helps to isolate and correct the fault condition.
In other words, it is difficult to differentiate between alarms of high quality and
those of low quality.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 4: Alarm Correlation
Thus, the primary task of alarm correlation is to drastically reduce the number
of alarms that an operator receives. Alarm correlation accomplishes this by
recognizing that a definable set of specific alarms, occurring within a certain
time period, is statistically shown to be symptomatic of a single fault type.
Alarm correlation correlates all the alarms in the alarm set into a single alarm
that points directly to the fault source.
Alarm Correlation Capabilities

The capabilities of Alarm Correlation are:
A single alarm can participate in different correlation rules
simultaneously, where each rule generates a correlation alarm
A single alarm can participate only once in the generation of a correlation
alarm from the same correlation rule
The Alarm Manager supports correlation.
The Alarm Browser does not support correlation
The filters you define for alarm correlation are used exclusively for alarm
correlation and have no impact on other filters built with the UNO Filter
Builder application
You can channel correlated alarms from the Alarm Correlation into the
UNO Alarm Listener application
Information Flow
The flow diagram in Figure 4-1 describes the information flow in the Alarm
Correlation.
The Alarm Correlation process works externally of the UNO Alarm Engine.
After BTS Relays, all alarms flow into the Alarm Correlation process and from
there, back to the Alarm Engine and into the internal Alarm database and
Filter mechanism.
The Alarm Correlation process output is correlated alarms that are channeled
into the Alarm Manager (after passing through the UNO Filter mechanism).
The Alarm Correlation Alarm Manager now contains:
Correlated alarms
Unprocessed network element alarms that did not participate in any
correlation rules
Unprocessed network element alarms that participated in correlation rules,
but did not participate in generating a correlation alarm and were not
expelled by the correlation rule definition

General Concepts UNO 2.16.3
In addition to channeling alarms into the Alarm Correlation Alarm Manager,

you can channel alarms into the UNO Alarm Listener application. In this way,
you can view correlated alarms in ASCII format on a terminal screen.
In future implementation, the Alarm Correlation process is incorporated into
the UNO Alarm Engine. After BTS Relays, all incoming alarms flow into the
Alarm Correlation process. The output is then channeled into the Filter
mechanism, and then distributed to UNO applications. These distributed
alarms have all participated in the correlation process.
In future implementation, Alarm Correlation will also be applied to
Performance Management data and Topology data.
UNO
Alarm
Agents Correlation Alarm
Process Database
Alarms
Alarm Browser
Filter Mechanism
Alarm Manager
BTS Alarm
Relays Engine
Alarm Notification
OMCR Relays
Figure 4-1: Alarm Correlation Information Flow Diagram

Default Correlation Rules

Table 4-1 shows the alarm IDs and their parameters for which default
correlation rules have been defined. Table 4-1 also shows, for each alarm ID,
the default rule Time Threshold setting (see Time Threshold Setting in
Table 4-7) and default rule Administrative State (Activated or Deactivated, as
shown in Figure 4-2, Alarm Correlation Dialog Box, on page 4-25). The
table entries are listed in alphabetical order of the correlation rule names as they
appear in the Rules Table of the Alarm Correlation dialog box (Figure 4-2,
Alarm Correlation Dialog Box, on page 4-25).
All rules in Table 4-1 were created for alarms that are characteristically cleared
automatically a short time after they are issued. Many are characterized by
minimal service impact. The correlation rules for all the alarms are set up to
suppress the alarm when the alarm is cleared within the rule Time Threshold
setting, (see Alarm Handling Options in Table 4-10, No Alarm). This
significantly reduces the number of alarms logged in the Alarm Manager.
Important: When the alarms participating in the default correlation rules are
cleared within the rule Time Threshold setting, the alarms are not
not deleted, but suppressed and are forwarded to the alarm
database to be displayed in the Alarm Browser (see Alarm
Logging Options in Table 4-10).
Table 4-1: Alarm Parameters for Default Correlation Rules
Rule Time
Rule Name Threshold Administrative
Alarm ID Alarm Text Device Type (s) State
17541756 AMR_17541756 AMR, GLI 21 Activated

AMR Communications Fault
15201524 ASU_15201524 ASU 30 Activated

ASUVoltage Regulator Alarm
15701576 ASU_15701576 GLI, RGLI, ASU, 10 Activated

ASU Communications Fault TSU
80018002 BBX_80018002 BBX 5 Activated

MCC 19 MHz Clock Failure

BBX 19 MHz Clock Failure

Default Correlation Rules UNO 2.16.3
Table 4-1: Alarm Parameters for Default Correlation Rules (Cont.)
Rule Time

Receive Imbalance
91519156 BBX_91519156 BBX, MAWI 30 Activated

Reverse Noise Rise Very High
91719176 BBX_91719176 BBX, MAWI 30 Activated

Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm:
Sector 16
9150 CARRIER_9150 CARRIER 30 Activated

Reverse Noise Rise Very
High Alarm
9170 CARRIER_9170 CARRIER 30 Activated

Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm
1601016012 CCD_1601016012 CCD 25 Activated

CCD 19 MHz Failure
1000010001 CSM_1000010001 CSM 20 Activated

Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure
10040 CSM_10040 CSM, MAWI 55 Activated

GPS Reference Source Failure
10091 CSM_10091 CSM, MAWI 10 Activated

HSO Reference Source Failure
1310113148 ELPA Failure ELPA, LPA 20 Activated

1320113248 ELPA Module Failure
10301038 Fan_10301038 BTSFAN, AMR, 35 Activated

Fan Low Speed Alarm GLI
10501052 Frame 10501052 BTSFPS, AMR, 10 Activated

Frame Power Supply Alarm GLI
197 IWU_197 MCP 21 Activated

(IWU Trap) T1 Errors Reached Non
Operational Threshold
203 IWU_203 MCP 11 Activated

(IWU Trap) PB Errors Reached Non
Operational Threshold

Table 4-1: Alarm Parameters for Default Correlation Rules (Cont.)
Rule Time
39503954 LPAC_39503954 LPA, LPAC 25 Activated

LPAC: Low Fan Speed Alarm
39703974 LPAC_39703974 LPA, LPAC 25 Activated

LPAC: Controller Fault
39103914 LPA_39103914 LPA, LPAC 25 Activated

LPAC: Low Power Alarm
12000, 12010 MAWI_12000_12010 MAWI 20 Activated

Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure
12021 MAWI_12021 MAWI 5 Activated

Low 28V Bus

DC-DC Converter

MAWI: BBB Bus Failure #n
510 MCC_510 MCC 5 Activated

PPP Session is Down
2001420017 MLS_Failure MLS_PDSN_LINK 60 Activated

MLS Connection/Link Failure MLS_PDSN_CON
MLS_PSI_LINK
MLS_PSI_CON
10801082 Preselector_10801082 Preselector, AMR 10 Activated

Preselector Soft Failure Alarm
10901092 Preselector_10901092 Preselector, AMR 10 Activated

Preselector Hard Failure Alarm
1500 SIF_1500 GLI, RGLI 20 Activated

SIF Fan Low Speed
15801583 SIF_15801583 GLI, RGLI 21 Activated

SIF Multicoupler Communica-
tions Fault Alarm
10601063 Shelf_10601063 BTSCPS, GLI 30 Activated

Shelf Power Supply Alarm

AMR Communications Fault

Alarm ID 17541756
Alarm Description MGLI detected a time-out when communicating with

the AMR (Alarm Monitoring and Reporting card), the primary AMR, AMR #1,
or secondary AMR, AMR #2.
Alarm Cause AMR hardware failure or AMR was extracted for service.
Correlation Rule Name AMR_17541756
Correlation Rule This alarm will not be shown in the Alarm Manager if it is
cleared within 21 seconds. Within this time period, the alarm is often cleared
automatically. Since the required operator action is to check the AMR (reinsert
or replace), the correlation rule eliminates superfluous inspection trips.
ASUVoltage Regulator Alarm

Alarm ID 15201524
Alarm Description TGLI or RGLI received a voltage regulator

out-of-range alarm from an ASU card.
Alarm Cause Equipment alarm suggesting a hardware failure.
Correlation Rule Name ASU_15201524
automatically. Since the required operator action is to check the module
(reinsert or replace), the correlation rule eliminates superfluous inspection trips.
ASU Communications Fault

Alarm ID 15701576
Alarm Description The TGLI or RGLI detected bus faults when

communicating with one of the four ASU cards. The RGLI detected a time-out
when communicating with the TSU (Test Subscriber Unit).

Alarm Cause Equipment alarm suggesting a potential hardware failure, or

the TSU was extracted for service.
Correlation Rule Name ASU_15701576
automatically. Since the required operator action is to check the ASU module
(reinsert or replace) or restart RFDS tests (for RGLI-TSU communication
time-out), the correlation rule eliminates superfluous inspection trips and
prevents needless interruption of RFDS tests.
MCC 19 MHz Clock Failure

Alarm ID 80018002
Alarm Description An MCC detected a 19 MHz clock failure.

Note: Each alarm ID refers to a clock source side, A or B, but the alarms
are identical.
Alarm Cause The MCC reports the failure when the hardware detection
mechanism determines there is a failure and sets an interrupt. Indicates a 19
MHz clock problem at the reporting MCC.
System Impact None if the MCC can successfully swap to the redundant
CSM clock. If there is no backup CSM, calls associated with the MCC fail.
Correlation Rule Name BBX_80018002
Correlation Rule These alarms will be not be shown in the Alarm Manager
if they are cleared within 5 seconds.
BBX 19 MHz Clock Failure

Alarm ID 90019002
Alarm Description A BBX detected a 19MHz clock failure.

Note: Each alarm ID refers to a clock source side, A or B, but the alarms
are identical.

Alarm Cause The hardware detection mechanism determines there is a

failure and sets an interrupt. Indicates a 19MHz clock problem at the
reporting BBX.
System Impact None if the BBX can successfully swap to the redundant
CSM clock. If there is no backup CSM, calls associated with the BBX fail.
if they are cleared within 5 seconds.
Receive Imbalance
Alarm ID 9050
Alarm Description A BBX or MAWI device detected a receive imbalance

of the I & Q branches, which may result in a loss of up to half of the sector or
site capacity.
Alarm Cause The alarm indicates a possible hardware problem in the

reporting device.
System Impact Potentially significant due to loss of sector-carrier

capacity. However, the condition may be automatically rectified within a
short time (within five seconds), in which case a Clear is issued and the alarm
is expelled.
cleared within five seconds. Since the required operator action is to schedule
maintenance if the alarm is reported, the correlation rule potentially reduces
maintenance costs by preventing self-rectifying alarms from being issued.
Additional Suggestions Since the operator schedules maintenance when

the alarm is issued, you might not wish to see the alarm at all once maintenance
is scheduled. Create another rule that completely filters this alarm until
maintenance is completed.

Reverse Noise Rise Very High

Alarm ID 90519156
Alarm Description A Reverse Noise Rise measurement exceeds a Reverse

Noise Rise threshold level.
Note: Each alarm ID refers to a different sector, but the alarm is identical.
Alarm Cause The BBX or MAWI device monitors and processes the
Reverse Channel noise level and the result is compared to a Reverse Channel
threshold. When the noise level exceeds the threshold, a trouble notification is
sent to the MM by the BBX or MAWI. The MM then generates the alarm.
The BBX or MAWI continuously monitors the Reverse Channel to determine if
the alarm condition has been removed. A Clear is generated whenever the
Reverse Noise Rise measurement recedes below the Reverse Channel threshold
(minus a delta).
Correlation Rule These alarms will not be shown in the Alarm Manager if
they are cleared within 30 seconds. The alarm is usually cleared automatically
within this time period (noise level falls below threshold) so the correlation rule
significantly decreases the alarm volume.
Additional Suggestions In the event of a large number of alarms, the

operator disables the feature and checks the Reverse Channel threshold value.
Thus, you might want to create a rule that completely filters this alarm until the
inspection is completed.
Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm: Sector 16

Alarm ID 90719176

Note: Each alarm ID refers to a different sector, but the alarm is identical.

Alarm Cause The BBX or MAWI device monitors and processes the
Reverse Channel noise level and the result is compared to a Reverse Channel
threshold. When the noise level exceeds the threshold, a trouble notification is
sent to the MM by the BBX or MAWI. The MM then generates the alarm.
The BBX or MAWI continuously monitors the Reverse Channel to determine if
the alarm condition has been removed.
Additional Suggestions In the event of a large number of alarms, the

operator disables the feature and checks the Reverse Channel threshold value.
Thus, you might want to create a rule that completely filters this alarm until the
inspection is completed.
Reverse Noise Rise Very High Alarm

Alarm ID 9150

Alarm Cause The BBX monitors and processes the Reverse Channel noise
level and the result is compared to a Reverse Channel threshold. When the
noise level exceeds the threshold, the BBX generates the alarm.
System Impact May decrease effective cell radius.
Correlation Rule Name CARRIER_9150

Reverse Noise Rise High Alarm

Alarm ID 9170

Alarm Cause The BBX monitors and processes the Reverse Channel noise
level and the result is compared to a Reverse Channel threshold. When the
noise level exceeds the threshold, the BBX generates the alarm.
System Impact May decrease effective cell radius.
Correlation Rule Name CARRIER_9170
CCD 19 MHz Failure

Alarm ID 1601016012
Alarm Description The CCD failed to detect 19 MHz clock or all devices
in the cage failed to receive 19 MHz clock.
Alarm Cause Equipment alarm suggesting a major hardware failure of a

required piece of BTS equipment
System Impact Potential site outage.
Correlation Rule Name CCD_1601016012
if they are cleared within 25 seconds. Within this time threshold, the BTS may
succeed in recovery attempt to prevent any other equipment from being
removed from service. The correlation rule prevents costly and
time-consuming inspection of cabling or replacement of the CCD unit.

Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure (CSM)

Alarm ID 1000010001
Alarm Description The active CSM received a clock failure signal from
one or more of the four shelves and the mate CSM is in standby state. This
alarm is also generated when an out-of-service or standby CSM receives the
clock failure signal.
Alarm Cause The alarm indicates a 19MHz Clock problem at the MCC,
BBX, BDC, or CSM devices or in the backplane or cabling.
System Impact None if a standby CSM is available. Otherwise, the alarm

causes a base station call processing outage.
Correlation Rule Name CSM_1000010001
cleared within 20 seconds.
GPS Reference Source Failure

Alarm ID 10040
Alarm Description The CSM detected a failure (missing clock pulses or

associated device not ready) of its GPS reference source.
Alarm Cause Local conditions prevent proper GPS reception or when GPS
system is taken down for configuration.
System Impact Minimalno system impact for short periods of time and
significant only when Clear not received (the correlation rule issues an alarm
when Clear not received within threshold time). Note that the alarm is not even
issued if the GPS is lost for less than two minutes.

HSO Reference Source Failure

Alarm ID 10091
Alarm Description The CSM detected a failure (missing clock pulses) of

its HSO (High Stability Oscillator) reference source.
Alarm Cause If the HSO reference source repeatedly fails or does not
recover, a problem may exist in the reference source hardware.
System Impact None if an alternative reference source is available.
cleared within 10 seconds. The alarm is usually cleared automatically within
this time period so the correlation rule significantly decreases the
alarm volume.
ELPA Module Failure

Alarm ID 1310113148, 1320213248
Alarm Description An ELPA module equipment failure suggesting a

minor or major hardware failure. A major hardware failure is indicated by one
major fault or two minor faults.
Alarm Cause The alarm can be caused by module equipment warnings or

alarms, such as high temperature, input power problems, missing module, etc.
System Impact ELPA may be removed from service.
Correlation Rule Name ELPA Failure
if they are cleared within 20 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent costly
ELPA and RF cabling inspections and module replacements.

Fan Low Speed Alarm

Alarm ID 10301038
Alarm Description The AMR detected a fan (numbered 1-8) running

below its RPM threshold.
Correlation Rule Name Fan_10301038
if they are cleared within 35 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent
extraneous automatic trouble notifications and fan replacements.
Frame Power Supply Alarm

Alarm ID 10501052
Alarm Description The AMR has detected that a power supply in the
Power Distribution Cage or Shelf has failed.
System Impact Redundant power supply keeps the frame in service.

However, immediate repair is indicated to avoid consequences of failure of the
second power supply.
Correlation Rule Name Frame 10501052
extraneous automatic trouble notifications, inspections and
module replacements.

T1 Errors Reached Non Operational Threshold

Alarm ID IWU Alarm Trap #197
Alarm Description T1 errors reached non operational threshold.
Correlation Rule Name IWU_197
PB Errors Reached Non Operational Threshold

Alarm ID IWU Alarm Trap #203
Alarm Description PB errors reached non operational threshold.
Correlation Rule Name IWU_203
LPAC: Low Fan Speed Alarm

Alarm ID 39503954
Alarm Description Indicates fan speed of a PA unit fan has fallen below a
preset threshold.
System Impact For an FTM, the impact is distributed equally across all
carrier sectors, reducing the impact on one sector.
Correlation Rule Name LPAC_39503954
Correlation Rule These alarm will not be shown in the Alarm Manager if
they are cleared within 25 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent
extraneous inspections and module replacements.

LPAC: Controller Fault

Alarm ID 39703974
Alarm Description Generated when the MGLI is unable to communicate

with the controller on the PA unit.
Alarm Cause Equipment malfunction or, if the alarms is generated for all
LPAC units, indicative of an AMR bus failure.
System Impact Total output power for the sector is reduced. For an FTM,
the impact is distributed equally across all carrier sectors, reducing the impact
on one sector.
Correlation Rule Name LPAC_39703974
they are cleared within 25 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent
extraneous inspections and module replacements.
LPAC: Low Power Alarm

Alarm ID 39103914
Alarm Description Generated when the PA (Power Amplifier) output

detector detects little or no output power by the PA.
Note: Each alarm ID refers to a LPAC device subunit, A through D, but the
alarms are identical.
Alarm Cause No power input to the PA or, if there is input, an internal

failure is causing no power output. The output detector monitors the power
output and generates the alarm when the power falls below a threshold value.
System Impact None.
Correlation Rule Name LPA_39113914
within this time period so the correlation rule significantly decreases the
alarm volume.

Shelf 19 MHz Clock Failure (MAWI)

Alarm ID 12000, 12010
Alarm Description A MAWI or a standby MAWI reported a clock failure.
Alarm Cause Clock failure.
System Impact Calls associated with the reporting MAWI will most likely
drop as a result of the clock failure. A redundant MAWI may go active in place
of the failed MAWI.
Correlation Rule Name MAWI_12000_12010
cleared within 20 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent unnecessary
inspections and replacements.
Low 28V Bus

Alarm ID 12021
Alarm Description A master MAWI detected that the 28V common bus
voltage output is low.
Alarm Cause AC input is likely lost and battery backup is low.
System Impact Site shutdown may be imminent.
Correlation Rule Name MAWI_12021
DC-DC Converter
Alarm ID 1202212023
Alarm Description An INS_SBY (In Service, Standby) MAWI detected

an over-voltage condition or its power supply detected an under-voltage
condition on the DC-DC converter output in the power supply FRU.

Alarm Cause Over-voltage or under-voltage condition
needless disabling of the MAWI card or equipment replacement.
MAWI: BBB Bus Failure

Alarm ID 1203112034
Alarm Description A MAWI detected an error, loss of clock or bad parity,

for a particular BBB bus.
Alarm Cause Loss of clock or bad parity. Clock Lost indicates that the
reporting MAWI is unable to recover the 19MHz clock from the BBB bus,
which is specified in the alarm as N. Bad Parity indicates that the reporting
MAWI is detecting parity errors on the BBB bus which is specified in the alarm
as N.
cleared within 5 seconds. Correlation rule may prevent unnecessary BBB bus
inspections and MAWI device actions, such as reboot, swap and disable.
PPP Session is Down

Alarm ID 510
Alarm Description The PPP session between the MCC/MAWI and the
RPM is down.
Alarm Cause The IP communication path between the MCC/MAWI and

the RPM is not available.
System Impact This problem may be temporary, but the resources, such as
the Channel Elements, dedicated to be used along this communication path are
temporarily unavailable.

Correlation Rule Name MCC_510
MLS Connection/Link Failure

Alarm ID 2001420017
Alarm Description A link or connection between the MLS (Multi-Layer

Switch) of the AN (Access Node) and the PDSN (Packet Data Service Node) or
PSI (Packet Selector Interface) cards in XC devices is down.
Alarm Cause Loss of signal.
System Impact For links, none as long as at least one link between the
MLS and PDSN or PSI is operational. Due to this minimal impact the
correlation has a long rule Threshold Time of 60 seconds. For connections, the
PSI or PDSN is no longer available for service.
Correlation Rule Name MLS_Failure
cleared within 60 seconds. Since the required operator action is to schedule
link repair or endpoint port diagnostics if the alarm is reported, the correlation
rule potentially reduces maintenance costs by preventing self-rectifying alarms
from being issued.
Additional Suggestions Since the operator schedules maintenance when

the alarm is issued, you might not wish to see the alarm at all once maintenance
is scheduled. Create another rule that completely filters this alarm until
maintenance is completed.
Preselector Soft Failure Alarm

Alarm ID 10801082
Alarm Description The AMR detected that a Preselector in the Power

Distribution Cage or Shelf has a soft failure.
Alarm Cause MGLI internal threshold for this error was exceeded.

System Impact Sector outage.
Correlation Rule Name Preselector_10801082
cleared within 10 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent extraneous
automatic trouble notifications or replacement of the Preselector.
Preselector Hard Failure Alarm

Alarm ID 10901092
Alarm Description The AMR detected that a Preselector in the Power

Distribution Cage or Shelf has a hard failure.
System Impact Sector outage.
Correlation Rule Name Preselector_10901092
cleared within 10 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent extraneous
automatic trouble notifications or replacement of the Preselector.
SIF Fan Low Speed

Alarm ID 1500
Alarm Description The RF converter detected a fan running below its

RPM threshold (RFDS Fan).
System Impact No immediate impact, since the SIF fan is part of the
RFDS subsystem and does not impact current call processing capability.
Correlation Rule Name SIF_1500
cleared within 20 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent extraneous fan
replacement.

SIF Multicoupler Communications Fault Alarm

Alarm ID 15801583
Alarm Description The RGLI detected bus faults when communicating

with one of the three Multicoupler cards.
System Impact Possible sector outage.
Correlation Rule Name SIF_15801583
cleared within 21 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent extraneous site
inspections, module replacements and RFDS Receive Accuracy and
Linearity testing.
Shelf Power Supply Alarm

Alarm ID 10601063
Alarm Description The (M)GLI detected the 5V source from a power

supply in its shelf is bad.
System Impact If alarm seen, the MDM shelf is still in service utilizing
the redundant shelf power supply. If the second power supply fails, the alarm is
not seen because the MDM is completely out of service.
Correlation Rule Name Shelf_10601063
cleared within 30 seconds. The correlation rule may prevent extraneous site
inspections and module replacements.

Invoking Alarm Correlation UNO 2.16.3
Invoking Alarm Correlation

Invoke Alarm Correlation with one of these two methods:
From the UNO Application Launcher
From the command line
To Invoke Alarm Correlation from the Application Launcher
From the UNO Application Launcher, click
The Alarm Correlation dialog box appears as in Figure 4-2, on page 4-25.

page 2-25.
To Invoke Alarm Correlation from the Command Line
1. Open a UNIX Terminal window

3. Enter the invoking command
Path /opt/UNO/bin/
Command uno_corr_gui -[command line argument]
Example uno_corr_gui -host <host_name>

Table 4-2 lists the Alarm Correlation command arguments.
Table 4-2: Alarm Correlation Command Line Arguments
Option Description
-host <uno_manager_host> Invoke application from specified host.

-display <display_name> Invoke application on specific display.
The Alarm Correlation dialog box appears as in Figure 4-2.
Menu Bar
Rules Table
Rule Preview
Figure 4-2: Alarm Correlation Dialog Box
The elements of the Alarm Correlation dialog box are described in Table 4-3.

Invoking Alarm Correlation UNO 2.16.3
Table 4-3: Alarm Correlation Dialog Box Elements
Element Description
Menu Bar Contains all Alarm Correlation menus and their options
Rules Table Lists all defined rules by name, administrative state (activated or
deactivated), alarm ID and user-defined description
Rule Preview Displays rule-definition information of a rule selected from the
Rules Table
Can be printed by right-clicking inside the Rule Preview box and
selecting Print
Menu Bar The Menu Bar options are described in Alarm Correlation
Menu Bar on page 4-27.
Rules Table The Rules Table can be sorted by any column heading by
double-clicking on the heading. The sort order is indicated by up or down
arrows that appear in the column heading.
To Refresh the Rules Table
1. Right-click anywhere within the Rules Table

The Alarm Correlation right mouse button shortcuts are displayed.
2. Click Refresh
The Rules Table is refreshed
Rule Preview The Rule Preview displays rule-definition information and

can be printed.
To display rule-definition information for any rule in the Rules Table,
select the rule.
To print the Rule Preview, right-click anywhere inside the Rule Preview
box and select Print.

Alarm Correlation Menu Bar

The Alarm Correlation menus and options are shown in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4: Alarm Correlation Menu Map
File Edit Actions Help
Save Configuration Add Activate Help

Print Table Modify Deactivate
Print Rule Definition Delete Statistics
Overall Statistics Report
Rule Activity Report
Reset Rule Statistics
Import Delete
Export
Exit
The Alarm Correlation menu bar comprises these options:

File
Edit
Actions
Help (Future)
File Menu
The File menu comprises these items:
Save Configuration
Print Table
Print Rule Definition
Import
Export
Exit

Save Configuration
Save Configuration saves the current configuration of the Alarm Correlation
dialog box. For example, the current sort order of the Rules Table in the Alarm
Correlation dialog box (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25).
To Save Current Configuration
1. From the Menu Bar, select:

File
Save Configuration
The current configuration of the Alarm Correlation dialog box is saved.
Print Table and Print Rule Definition

Print Table lets you print the currently displayed Alarm Correlation Rules
Table (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25). You can print the entire Rules Table or
selected rules.
Print Rule Definition lets you print the rule definition of one or more rules
selected from the currently displayed Alarm Correlation Rules Table
(Figure 4-2, on page 4-25).
To Print the Rules Table
1. If you want to print the entire Rules Table, skip this step
If you want to print only selected rules, select the required rules
Use <Control> and <Shift> to select multiple rules.
Your selections are highlighted.
File
Print Table
All Rules; Selected Rules
The UNO Print dialog box appears as in Figure 4-3.

To Print Rule Definitions
1. Select the required rule or rules

Note: You can also print a single rule definition directly from the Rule
Preview box in the Alarm Correlation dialog box (see Rule
Preview in Table 4-3 on page 4-26).
File
Print Rule Definition
The UNO Print dialog box appears as in Figure 4-3.
Browse
Destination
Destination
Section
Printer
Selection
Format
Section
Print Command
Section
Print Save Close Help
Figure 4-3: UNO Print Dialog Box
The UNO Print dialog box is described in Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.

Import
Import allow you to import correlation rules into the Rules Table from a file
(see Export on page 4-34).
To Import Correlation Rules

File
Import
The UNO Alarm Correlation Import dialog box appears as in Figure 4-4.
File Browser Button

File Name Field
Select Rules Type
Set Administrative State
Figure 4-4: UNO Alarm Import Dialog Box

The elements of the UNO Alarm Import dialog box are described in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: UNO Alarm Import Dialog Box Elements
Field Description
File Browser Button Click this button to browse your file directories for the required file.
File Name Field Enter the file name.

Limited to alphanumeric characters and the underline (_) key
No spaces allowed
Select Rules Type Select rules type to be imported from the file:
All Rulesall rules in the file are imported into the Rules Table
Agent-Independent or Device-Independent Rulesonly these rule
types are imported into the Rules Table.
Set Administrative State Set the administrative state of the imported rules:
Preserve as isthe administrative state (Activated or Deactivated) of
the rules in the import file is retained
Activate Allall rules in the import file are activated when imported
into the Rules Table
Deactivate Allall rules in the import file are deactivated when
imported into the Rules Table
2. In the File Name field, enter the name of the file to be imported. If
desired, click the File Browser button to browse your directory tree
Limited to alphanumeric characters and the Underline (_) and Slash
(/) keys
No spaces allowed
3. Select the rules type to be imported from the file, All Rules or Agent- or
Device-Independent Rules only
4. Select the administrative state of the imported rules, Preserve as is,
Activate All or Deactivate All
5. Click OK
The rules in the import file are imported into the Rules Table according to
your specifications and the following confirmation message appears:.

However, if there are conflicts between rule names and/or alarm IDs of the
imported file with those of the current machine, warning messages appear, as
shown in Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6:
Figure 4-5: Rule-Name Conflict Error Message
Figure 4-6: Alarm ID Conflict Error Message
6. If you want to compare the imported rule with the existing rule, click
View Rules

The View Rules dialog box opens showing a side-by-side view of the
imported and local rule definitions for easy comparison.
Figure 4-7: View Rules Dialog Box
When you have finished comparing the rules, click Close

7. If you want to complete rule importation despite the conflicts, click Yes
The rules in the import file are imported into the Rules Table according to
your specifications and the following confirmation message appears:
If you do not want to complete rule importation, click No

The following confirmation appears:
Note: A similar confirmation message appears if you attempt to import a

rule file that contains rules dependent on a specific agent and that
agent does not exist in the target host.
Export
Export allows you to export correlation rules from the Rules Table to a file
(see also Import on page 4-30).
To Export Correlation Rules
1. If you want to export the entire Rules Table or Agent-Independent or

Device-Independent rules only, skip this step
If you want to export only selected rules, select the required rules
File
Export
The UNO Alarm Correlation Export dialog box appears as in Figure 4-8.

File Browser Button

File Name Field
Select Rules Type
Figure 4-8: UNO Alarm Export Dialog Box
The elements of the UNO Alarm Export dialog box are described in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6: UNO Alarm Export Dialog Box Elements
Field Description
File Browser Button Click this button to browse your file directories.
File Name Field Enter the file name (full path).
Select Rules Type Select rules type to be exported from the Rules Table to the file:
All Rulesall rules in the Rule Table are exported
Selected Ruleonly rules you select in the Rules Table are exported
Agent-Independent or Device-Independent Rulesonly these rule
types are exported
3. In the File Name field, enter the name of the export file. If desired, click
the File Browser button to browse your directory tree
Limited to alphanumeric characters and the Underline (_) and Slash
(/) keys
No spaces allowed
4. Select the rules type to be exported, All Rules, Selected Rules or
Agent- or Device-Independent Rules only
5. Click OK

The rules are exported from the Rules Table to a file according to
your specifications. A success message appears that includes the full path
to the saved file:
Exit
Exit lets you exit the Alarm Correlation application.
To Exit the Alarm Correlation Application

The Alarm Correlation Exit Application Dialog appears as in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9: Alarm Correlation Exit Application Dialog Box
2. Click Yes
The Alarm Correlation application closes.

Edit Menu
The Edit menu comprises these items:
Add
Modify
Delete
The Edit menu options are also available from a right mouse button shortcut
menu. You can use the shortcut menu anytime in place of the menu options.
To Invoke the Edit Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menu
Move the cursor anywhere inside the Rules Table (Figure 4-2, on
page 4-25) and click the right mouse button
The Edit menu options are displayed.
Add and Modify

Add lets you add Alarm Correlation rules (requires administrator permissions).
Modify lets you modify existing Alarm Correlation rules (requires
administrator permissions). The dialog boxes and procedures for Modify
Alarm Correlation rules are exactly the same as those for Add Alarm
Correlation rules, except that the procedures are executed for a specific rule
selected from the Rules Table (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25).
To Add/Modify an Alarm Correlation Rule
1. If you are Adding a new correlation rule, skip this step

If you are Modifying an existing Alarm Correlation rule, select the rule
from the Rules Table (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25)
2. From the Alarm Correlation dialog box menu bar, select:
Edit
Add/Modify
The Alarm Correlation Add/Modify Rule dialog box appears as in

Figure 4-10. The dialog boxes for Add and Modify are identical.

Edit Menu UNO 2.16.3
Figure 4-10 uses the Alarm Correlation Add Rule dialog box as
an example.
Rule Name
Entry Field
Rule Description Sequence Options
Entry Field Radio Buttons
Time Threshold
Rule Definition Tabs
Setting
Rule Element Tab
Alarm Number
Filter Builder Setting
Access Button Add Element
Button
Filter Information Advanced Options

Read-Only Field Radio Buttons
Window Sizer
Additional Conditions
Definition Field
Figure 4-10: Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box
The elements of the Alarm Correlation Add Rule dialog box are described in
Table 4-7.
Table 4-7: Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box Elements
Field Description
Rule Name Entry Field Enter rule name of up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Rule Description Enter a rule description (optional).

Entry Field
Rule Definition Tabs Click the required rule definition tab:
Rule Elements to define the alarm filter and Additional Conditions
Resulting Action to define the alarm that will be generated when the Rule
Element definition holds

Table 4-7: Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box Elements (Cont.)
Field Description
Rule Element Tab Click on the tab to select the rule element to define. In the initial Add Rule dia-
log box, there is only one tab for Rule Element #1, since no elements have yet
been defined.
A Rule Element Tab is generated for each rule element you define when you
click the Add Element button (see below). For example, if you define three
rule elements, there will be three Rule Element Tabs, Element #1, Element #2
and Element #3.
The active Rule Element Tab is on top.
Filter Builder Invokes the Add/Modify dialog box of the Filter Builder application to define
Access Button the alarm filter to be applied to the current Rule Element
Filter Information Provides filter information, such as User Comments and Filter Attributes, for
Read-Only Field the current Rule Element. The information displayed is similar to the Filter
Builder dialog box Preview field.
Additional Conditions Define additional conditions for alarm attributes (such as Severity, Device,
Definition Field etc.), beyond those of the alarm filter, that must be met for the Alarm Correla-
tion rule to hold.
Window Sizer Click and hold the cursor on the sizer and drag to expand or contract the win-
dow. Hides or displays the Filter Information Read-Only field (see above).
Advanced Options Check the Advanced Options check box to show Advanced Options. Remove
Radio Buttons the check mark to hide Advanced Options.
There are two sets of advanced options, Response to Clear and Forward
Input Alarms.
Response to Clear:
Retain Alarm when cleared, an alarm is retained in the correlation engine
and participates in alarm correlation
Expel Alarm when cleared, an alarm is expelled from the correlation
engine and does not participate in alarm correlation
Forward Input Alarms:
Default input alarms participate in correlation and are forwarded to the
Alarm Manager according to the standard process, when it no longer meets
the criteria of any correlation rule
Immediately input alarms are immediately forwarded to the Alarm
Manager upon arrival to the correlation engine and also participate
in correlation
When Time Threshold Expired meaningful only if an input alarm
participates in at least two correlation rules. The input alarm is forwarded to
the Alarm Manager when the Time Threshold setting (see below) of one
correlation rule has expired, even if it is still participating in another
correlation rule whose Time Threshold setting has not expired.

Table 4-7: Alarm Correlation Add Rule Dialog Box Elements (Cont.)
Field Description
Add Element Button Generates a Rule Element Tab to add a rule element. The button is activated
only when you have at least defined a filter for the previous rule element. You
can define up to five rule elements.
Once a Rule Element Tab is generated you can freely move from one tab to
another in defining the rule elements.
Alarm Number Setting Set the required number of alarms of the current Rule Element definition that
must be generated (within the Time Threshold setting) for the Alarm Correla-
tion rule to hold (100 maximum).
Time Threshold Set the maximum time allowed for alarms of all Rule Element definitions to be
Setting generated for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold.
Sequence Options Set the required sequence of rule elements for the Alarm Correlation rule to
Radio Buttons hold, Ordered or Random:
Orderedalarms conforming to the Rule Element definitions must be
generated in 1,2,3 order of rule elements. This means that the alarms of Rule
Element #1 must be generated first, those of Rule Element #2 second, those
of Rule Element #3 third, and so on. Otherwise, the Alarm Correlation rule
will not hold.
Randomalarms conforming to the Rule Element definitions may be
generated in any order of rule elements.
Note: In both Ordered and Random sequence, the alarms of all Rule Element
definitions must be generated within the Time Threshold setting (see
above) for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold.
Note: The procedures described below are identical for Add and Modify.
Differences between the two functions are noted as required:
Correlation rule definition is executed in three stages:
Define General rule parameters
Define Rule Element parameters
Define Resulting Action parameters

To Define General Rule Parameters
1. If you are Adding a rule, click in the Rule Name Entry Field and enter a
name for the rule
You can enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters with no spaces between
characters. When you enter the rule name, the fields in the Alarm
Correlation Add Rule dialog box are activated.
If you are Modifying a rule, skip this step
The Rule Name Entry Field is deactivated in the Modify function.
2. Click in the Rule Description Entry Field and enter a description for
the rule
This step is optional. You can enter a description of any length, but it is
recommended that you be concise.
3. Set the threshold time
Click in the Minutes and Seconds Spin Boxes of the Threshold Time
Setting and enter the required threshold time
OR
Click the up and down spin-box arrows to the right of each spin box until
you get the required threshold time
Maximum threshold time is 23 hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds. The
threshold time is the maximum time allowed for alarms of all Rule Element
definitions to be generated for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold.
4. Select the Sequence of Elements, Ordered or Random, by clicking the
applicable Sequence Option Radio Button
Orderedalarms conforming to the Rule Element definitions must be
generated in 1,2,3 order of rule elements. This means that the alarms of
Rule Element #1 must be generated first, those of Rule Element #2 second,
those of Rule Element #3 third, and so on. Otherwise, the Alarm
Correlation rule will not hold.
Randomalarms conforming to the Rule Element definitions may be
generated in any order of rule elements.
Note: In both Ordered and Random Sequence of Elements, the alarms of
all Rule Element definitions must be generated within the set
Threshold Time (see Step 3) for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold.

To Define Rule Element Parameters
1. Click the Rule Elements rule definition tab (if not already active)
The Rule Element Tabs appear. For a new rule, only the rule element tab
of Element #1 is present.
2. Click the Filter Builder Access Button (labeled Define Filter)
The Add/Modify dialog of the Filter Builder is invoked.
3. Define the alarm filter for Rule Element #1 in the Filter Builder
Add/Modify dialog box, as described in Chapter 11: Filter Builder
The filter you define is used exclusively for Alarm Correlation and has no
impact on any other UNO filter definitions.
When you have defined the filter, filter information similar to that of the
Preview field of the Filter Builder dialog box appears in the Filter
Information Read-Only Field.
4. Set the number of alarms (maximum 100)
Note: If you change the Alarm Number Setting in Rule Element #1 to a
value other than 1, you cannot define any additional rule elements.
Click in the Spin Box of the Alarm Number Setting (labeled Number
of Alarms and enter the number of alarms
OR
Click the up and down spin-box arrows to the right of the spin box until
you get the required number of alarms
The number of alarms is the required number of alarms of the current
Rule Element definition that must be generated (within the Time Threshold
setting) for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold.
5. If you do not want to set Advanced Options, skip to Step 9
If you are setting Advanced Options, continue to Step 6
All Advanced Options settings are optional.
6. If necessary, checkmark the Advanced Options check box
The Advanced Options are displayed.

7. If desired, set the Response to Clear option by clicking the required

radio button
Range: Retain Alarm, Expel Alarm
Default: Retain Alarm
Retain Alarm when cleared, an alarm is retained in the correlation
engine and participates in alarm correlation
Expel Alarm when cleared, an alarm is expelled from the correlation
engine and does not participate in alarm correlation
8. If desired, set the Forward Input Alarms option by clicking the required
radio button
Range: Default, Immediately, When Time Threshold Expired
Default input alarms are forwarded to the Alarm Manager only if
they did not participate in successful correlation
Immediately input alarms are immediately forwarded to the Alarm
Manager upon arrival to the correlation engine and also participate
in correlation
When Time Threshold Expired meaningful only if an input alarm
participates in at least two correlation rules. An input alarm is
forwarded to the Alarm Manager when the Time Threshold setting
(Figure 4-10, on page 4-38) of one correlation rule has expired, even if
it is still participating in another correlation rule whose Time Threshold
setting has not expired
9. If desired, set Additional Conditions for Rule Element #1 (optional)
Note: You must define the Rule Element alarm filter (see Step 2) before
you can define Additional Conditions.
Note: For Rule Element #1, Additional Conditions are available only
when the Alarm Number Setting (see Step 4) is greater than 1. In
this case, you cannot define any more rule elements.
For Additional Conditions, you select the alarm attribute and the
condition you want to apply to the selected alarm attribute. For Rule
Element #1, the Additional Conditions Definition Field appears as in
Figure 4-11 (only when the Alarm Number Setting is greater than 1).

Definition Field
Selected Attribute
Attribute Drop-Down List
Selected Condition Condition Drop-Down List

Figure 4-11: Additional Conditions Definition FieldRule Element #1
The elements of the Additional Conditions Definition Field for Rule Element
#1 are described in Table 4-8.
Table 4-8: Additional Conditions Definition Field ElementsRule Element #1
Field Description
Selected Attribute The alarm attribute, selected from the Attribute Drop-Down List, to which you
want to apply the Selected Condition
Attribute Lists all available alarm attributes

Drop-Down List
Selected Condition The condition selected from the Condition Drop-Down List
Condition Lists all available conditions that can be applied to the Selected Attribute.
Drop-Down List For Rule Element #1, the only condition available is Same Value. This means
that for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold, all alarms that pass through the Rule
Element filter after the first alarm must have the same value for the Selected
Attribute as the first alarm.
For example, if the Selected Attribute is Severity and the first alarm that passes
through the Rule Element filter has Major severity, all other alarms that pass
through the filter must also have Major severity.

a. Click the Attribute Drop-Down List and select the required attribute
Your selection appears in the Selected Attribute field.
b. Click the Condition Drop-Down List and select the condition you want
to apply to the Selected Attribute
For Rule Element #1, the only condition available is Same Value.
This means that for the Alarm Correlation rule to hold, all alarms that
pass through the Rule Element filter after the first alarm must have the
same value of the Selected Attribute as the first alarm.
For example, assume you set Threshold Time to 5 seconds, Alarm
Number Setting to 4, and (after defining the filter) the Additional
Conditions to Same Value for the Severity alarm attribute. Assume
that the first alarm that passes through the filter has Major severity.
Then the Alarm Correlation rule will hold only when all alarms
(including the first one) pass through the filter within five seconds and
all alarms following the first one (alarms 2 to 4) have Major severity.
If any alarm does not have Major severity, the Alarm Correlation rule
does not hold.
When you finish defining an Additional Condition, new Attribute and
Condition Drop-Down Lists appear enabling you to define more
Additional Conditions.
c. Repeat to define more Additional Conditions
You can define up to five Additional Conditions.
10. If you do not want to define another rule element, skip to Step 1 of To
Define Resulting Action Parameters on page 4-48
If you want to define another rule element, continue to Step 11
Note: The Alarm Number Setting (Figure 4-10, on page 4-38) in Rule
Element #1 must be 1 to add additional rule elements.
11. Click the Add Element button
The Rule Definition Tab for Rule Element #2 appears.
12. Click the Rule Definition Tab for Rule Element #2
The tab is activated.
13. Repeat Step 2 through Step 9 for Rule Element #2
All procedures are identical to those for defining Rule Element #1, except
for defining Additional Conditions (Step 9), where the available
conditions differ from those of Rule Element #1.

For defining Additional Conditions (Step 9) for all rule elements other
than Rule Element #1, the Additional Conditions Definition Field appears
as in Figure 4-12.
Definition Field
Selected Attribute
Attribute Drop-Down List
Condition
Selected Condition
Drop-Down List
Figure 4-12: Additional Conditions Definition FieldAll Rule Elements Except #1
The elements of Figure 4-12 are identical to those for the Additional
Conditions Definition Field for Rule Element #1 (Figure 4-11, on
page 4-44). The only difference is in the available conditions in the
Condition Drop-Down List. These additional conditions are described in
Table 4-9.

Table 4-9: Available ConditionsAll Rule Elements Except #1
Field Description
Same Value As An alarm that passes through the filter defined for the current rule element must
(Alarm of Element 1) have the same value for the Selected Attribute as the alarm of Rule
Element #1.
For example, assume you set the Selected Attribute to Severity. If an alarm gen-
erated as a result of Rule Element #1 has Major severity, then, for the Alarm
Correlation rule to hold, all alarms generated as a result of the current rule ele-
ment must also have Major severity.
Different Value From An alarm that passes through the filter defined for the current rule element must
(Alarm of Element 1) have a value for the Selected Attribute that is different from that of Rule
Element #1.
For example, assume you set the Selected Attribute to Severity. If an alarm gen-
erated as a result of Rule Element #1 has Major severity, then, for the Alarm
Correlation rule to hold, no alarms generated as a result of the current rule ele-
ment can have Major severity.
14. If you do not want to define another rule element, skip to Step 1 of To
Define Resulting Action Parameters on page 4-48
If you want to define another rule element, continue to Step 15
15. To add additional rule elements, repeat steps Step 11 through Step 13 for
each rule element
You can define up to five rule elements.

To Define Resulting Action Parameters
1. When you have finished defining all rule elements, click the Resulting
Action rule definition tab (Figure 4-10, on page 4-38)
The Resulting Action Definition fields appear in the Alarm Correlation
Add Rule dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Alarm Handling Options
Alarm Logging Options

Selected Attribute
Attribute
Drop-Down List
Selected Value
Same as Element n
Radio Button
Defined Attributes
Preview
Set Value Button Value Drop-Down List

Clear Value Button Rule Element
Drop-Down List
Selected Rule Element
Figure 4-13: Add Rule Dialog BoxResulting Action Fields
The Resulting Action Definition fields are described in Table 4-10.

Table 4-10: Resulting Action Definition Fields
Field Description
Alarm Handling Options Options for how alarms generated by the Alarm Correlation rule will be han-
dled by the system.
No Alarm the system will not produce a correlated alarm after all
correlation rule conditions are met
Generate New Alarm the system will generate a new alarm with
attribute values you designate (see below)
Utilize Alarm of Element n the system will use the alarm generated by
one of the rule elements you defined previously
Alarm Logging Options Yes (default) log alarms that participated in the correlation rule (input
alarms) in the UNO alarm table so they can be viewed in the
Alarm Browser.
Note: When defining new rule, Yes is always true for the Generate New
Alarm and Utilize Alarm of Element n Alarm Handling options
(see above).
No do not log input alarms so that after successful correlation, input
alarms are discarded
Note: No available only when No Alarm is the selected Alarm Handling
option (see above).
Selected Attribute The (correlated) alarm attribute selected from the Attribute Drop-Down List
Attribute Lists all alarm attributes that can be changed or set

Drop-Down List
Selected Value Displays the value of the Selected Attribute (see above). This value is
selected from the (Selected Attribute) Value Drop-Down List (see below) or
manually entered.
Same as Element n When activated, the value of the Selected Attribute is assigned the value of
Radio Button the same attribute of the Selected Rule Element (see below).
Note: This option is mandatory for the Device attribute.
Defined Attributes Displays the attributes and their assigned values (Read-only)
Preview
Set Value Button Set and retain the value (Selected Value or Same as Element n) you defined
for the current Selected Attribute (see above)
Clear Value Button Clear the value you defined for the current Selected Attribute (see above) in
order to modify this value
Selected Rule Element The rule element selected from the Rule Element Drop-Down List

Table 4-10: Resulting Action Definition Fields (Cont.)
Field Description
Rule Element Lists all defined rule elements (by number).

Drop-Down List
Value Lists all available values of the Selected Attribute (see above).
Drop-Down List
2. Select the required Alarm Handling Option, No Alarm, Generate New

Alarm or Utilize Alarm of Element n
If you choose No Alarm, the system will not produce a correlated alarm
after all correlation rule conditions are met.
If you choose Generate New Alarm, the system will generate a new
alarm with the attribute values you designate in Step 7.
If you choose Utilize Alarm of Element n, the system will use the alarm
generated by one of the rule elements you defined previously. You select
the rule element by number (n). If desired, you may redefine the alarm
attributes in Step 7 (optional).
3. If you chose No Alarm, continue to Step 4
If you chose Generate New Alarm, skip to Step 6
You must now define the alarm attributes of the new alarm.
If you chose Utilize Alarm of Element n and you wish to change alarm
attributes, skip to Step 6
You may now redefine the alarm attributes of the utilized alarm. Defining
new alarm attributes for the alarm generated by a rule element is optional.
If you chose Utilize Alarm of Element n and you do not wish to change
alarm attributes, skip to Step 13
You have completed defining the new Alarm Correlation rule.
4. Select the Alarm Logging option, Yes or No
If you choose Yes (default), all input alarms (alarms participating in
correlation) are logged into the UNO alarm table and can be viewed in the
Alarm Browser.
If you choose No, input alarms are not logged into the UNO alarm table
and are discarded.
5. Skip to Step 13
You have completed defining the Alarm Correlation rule.

6. Click the Attribute Drop-Down List and select the required attribute
Your selection appears in the Selected Attribute field.
7. Assign a value to the Selected Attribute
For Generate New Alarm, all attribute definitions are obligatory, except
Additional Text. The obligatory attributes are Severity, Probable
Cause, Alarm ID, Device and Event Type.
For Utilize Alarm of Element n, no attribute definitions are obligatory.
Set the value of any attribute that appears in the Attribute Drop-Down List
as desired. The value you choose replaces the attribute value of the alarm
generated by the selected rule element.
a. Click on the Value Drop-Down List and select the value from the list
OR
Click in the Selected Value field and enter the value manually
OR
Click and activate the Same as Element n radio button and select the
rule element number from the drop-down list
When you choose Same as Element n, the attribute is assigned the
attribute value of the alarm generated by the selected rule element.
Important: You must use the Same as Element n radio button to define the
Device attribute.
b. Click the Set Value button

The attribute value is set and the attribute and value are displayed in
the Defined Attributes Preview. You can move on to the next attribute.
c. If you want to change the attribute value, repeat Step a and Step b
d. If you want to clear the attribute value, click the Clear Value button
The value is cleared from the Selected Value field.
Note: For the Alarm ID attribute, if you enter an Alarm ID that is already
being used in another correlation rule, the following query appears
when you finish rule definition and click OK or Apply (Step 13):

8. If you chose Generate New Alarm, skip to Step 12

If you chose Utilize Alarm of Element n, and you do not want to add
Additional Text to the alarm, skip to Step 12
If you chose Utilize Alarm of Element n, and you want to add Additional
Text to the alarm, continue to Step 9
9. From the Attribute Drop-Down List, select Additional Text
A Selected Action field and Action Drop-Down List are added to the
Attribute Value section of the Resulting Action Definition fields, as shown
in Figure 4-14.
Selected Action
Action Drop-Down List
Figure 4-14: Added Additional Text Definition Fields
The added Additional Text definition fields (when you chose the Utilize
Alarm of Element n alarm handling option) are described in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11: Additional Text Definition Fields
Field Description
Selected Action The action selected from the Action Drop-Down List.
Action Lists all available actions on the Additional Text:

Drop-Down List Replace replaces existing additional text for the alarm of the
selected rule element
Add at the beginning adds additional text at the beginning of
existing additional text for the alarm of the selected rule element
Add at the end adds additional text at the end of existing
additional text for the alarm of the selected rule element
10. Click in the Selected Value Field (Figure 4-13, on page 4-48) and enter the
additional text
OR
Click and activate the Same as Element n radio button and select the
rule element number from the drop-down list
When you choose Same as Element n, the attribute is assigned the
additional text entered for the selected rule element.

11. Click the Action Drop-Down List and select the required action, Replace,
Add at the beginning or Add at the end
Your selection appears in the Selected Action field.
If you choose Replace, the system replaces existing additional text for the
alarm of the selected rule element.
If you choose Add at the beginning, the system adds additional text at
the beginning of existing additional text for the alarm of the selected
rule element.
If you choose Add at the end, the system adds additional text at the end
of existing additional text for the alarm of the selected rule element.
12. Repeat Step 6 and Step 7, and, if necessary, Step 9 through Step 11, until
you define all attributes
Remember that you must set a value for all attributes, except Additional
Text. Adding Additional Text is optional.
The Alarm Correlation rule definition is now complete. Before closing the
dialog box, you can edit your Rule Element and Resulting Action
definitions by toggling between the Rule Definition Tabs.
13. Click OK to create the new Alarm Correlation rule and exit the Alarm
Correlation Add Rule dialog box
OR
Click Apply to create the Alarm Correlation rule while leaving the Alarm
Correlation Add Rule dialog box open
The new Alarm Correlation rule is added to the Rules Table of the Alarm
Correlation dialog box (Figure 4-2, Alarm Correlation Dialog Box, on
page 4-25).
To confirm successful creation of the new Alarm Correlation Rule, this
notification message appears:
Note: A similar message appears for successful rule modification.

When an Alarm Correlation rule has been defined and activated (see Actions
Menu on page 4-55), the Alarm Correlation Process immediately begins to
process alarms.

Delete
Delete lets you delete an Alarm Correlation rule from the Rules Table
(Figure 4-2, on page 4-25). Delete requires administrator permissions.
To Delete an Alarm Correlation Rule
Caution: There is no Undo for the Delete action.
1. Select the required rule from the Rules Table

Edit
Delete
This confirmation message is displayed:
3. Click Yes
The selected Alarm Correlation rule is deleted.

Actions Menu
The Actions menu comprises these items:
Activate
Deactivate
Statistics
The Actions menu options are also available from a right-click shortcut menu.
You can use the shortcut menu anytime in place of the menu options.
To Invoke the Actions Right-Click Shortcut Menu
Move the cursor anywhere inside the Rules Table (Figure 4-2, on
page 4-25) and click the right mouse button
The Actions menu options are displayed.
Activate lets you activate an Alarm Correlation rule selected from the Rules
Table (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25).
Deactivate lets you deactivate an Alarm Correlation rule selected from the
Rules Table.
Note: You can activate or deactivate any number of rules at one time.
Statistics lets you:
Produce Overall and Rule Activity statistic reports
Reset the Rule Activity report

Activate/Deactivate
To Activate/Deactivate an Alarm Correlation Rule
1. Select the required rule or rules from the Rules Table

Actions
Activate/Deactivate
The Alarm Correlation rule(s) is activated/deactivated.

When activated, the word Activated appears in the Rules Table in the
Administrative State table cell of the Alarm Correlation rule.
When deactivated, the word Deactivated appears in the Rules Table in
the Administrative State table cell of the Alarm Correlation rule.
Statistics
Statistics lets you:
Produce Overall Statistics report
Produce Rule Activity report
Reset the Rule statistics report (administrators only)
Overall Statistics Report gives rule statistics summary for all correlation
rules, such as alarm totals and number of correlation rules.
Rule Activity Report gives rule statistics for a single, selected rule, such as
the number of successful correlations and alarm information.

To Produce an Overall Statistics Report

Actions
Statistics
Overall Statistics Report
The Time Boundary Definition dialog box appears, as in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15: Time Boundary Definition Dialog Box
2. Fill in the From: and To: Date and Time fields to set the time period that
the report covers
The default time period is set to one hour previous.
3. Click OK to generate the Overall statistics report and exit the Time
Boundary Definition dialog box
OR
Click Apply to generate the report while leaving the Time Boundary
Definition dialog box open
Note: Clicking Apply allows you to return to the Time Boundary
Definition dialog box and redefine the report time period to
generate additional reports for different time periods.
The Overall Statistics Report appears, as shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16: Overall Statistics Report
4. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to generate additional statistics reports for

different time periods
5. To print the report:
a. Click Print
The UNO Print dialog box appears as in Figure 4-3, on page 4-29.
b. Follow the Print procedure in Print Dialog Box on page 2-31

To Produce a Rule Activity Report
1. Select the required rule or rules from the Rules Table

Use <Control> and <Shift> with the left mouse button to select
multiple rules.
Actions
Statistics
Rule Activity Report
The Rule Activity Report appears, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17: Rule Activity Report
3. To print the report:

a. Click Print
The UNO Print dialog box appears as in Figure 4-3, on page 4-29.
b. Follow the Print procedure in Print Dialog Box on page 2-31

To Reset the Rule Activity Report
Note: This function is available to administrators only.

Actions
Statistics
Reset Rule Statistics
The Rule Activity Report is reset with all statistics set to zero (0). An
example is shown in Figure 4-18 (compare to Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-18: Post-Reset Rule Statistics Rule Activity Report

Right Mouse Button Shortcuts

Click the right mouse button anywhere in the Rules Table of the Alarm
Correlation dialog box (Figure 4-2, on page 4-25) to invoke Alarm Correlation
right mouse button shortcuts.
The Alarm Correlation right mouse button shortcuts include the Edit and
Action menu options (Table 4-4, on page 4-27) plus the Refresh function.
Table 4-12 lists the Alarm Correlation shortcut menu options and provides the
page reference of the detailed description of each option in this chapter.
Table 4-12: Alarm Correlation Shortcuts
Shortcut Description Ref.
Add Add Alarm Correlation rules (requires administrator permissions) Page 4-37
Modify Modify existing Alarm Correlation rules (requires Page 4-37

administrator permissions)
Delete Delete an Alarm Correlation rule from the Rules Table (requires Page 4-54
administrator permissions)
Refresh Refresh the Rules Table Page 4-26
Activate Activate Alarm Correlation rules selected from the Rules Table Page 4-56
Deactivate Deactivate Alarm Correlation rules selected from the Rules Table Page 4-56
Statistics Produce Overall Statistics and Rule Activity statistic reports Page 4-56
Reset the Rule Activity report (requires administrator permissions)

Set-Clear User Scenario UNO 2.16.3
Set-Clear User Scenario

Set-Clear is a typical scenario where an alarm is generated, but is automatically
cleared within seconds with no system impact. Without Alarm Correlation, all
these alarms appear in the Alarm Manager needlessly and when a meaningful
alarm does appear, it is difficult to isolate.
A typical Set-Clear scenario is illustrated by the CSM_10001 default
correlation rule supplied with the Alarm Correlation application. This rule
handles Shelf 19 MHz Clock FailureAlarm ID 10001. See Shelf 19 MHz
Clock Failure (CSM) on page 4-14 for a description of this alarm.
Typical alarm set/clear behavior is shown in Figure 4-19:
Alarm ID 10001 Alarm Clearing
100000
80000
60000
40000
20000
0
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
45
49
53
57
1
5
9
Seconds to Clearing
Figure 4-19: Typical Alarm Set-Clear Behavior
Most of the set-clear alarms are cleared within a short time when the failure
signal(s) is removed. For example, a redundant system may take active control,
thus minimizing service impact. Such alarms need not appear in the Alarm
Manager.

Designing the Correlation Rule In designing a Set-Clear rule definition,

the goal is to prevent the arrival (to the Alarm Manager) of alarms from a
specific device that have been set and cleared within a specific time interval.
At minimum, the design of such a rule would require these parameters:
Time threshold setting
Set alarm filter
Clear alarm filter
Additional Conditions for Clear Alarm Rule Element
Order of alarm detection
Time Threshold Setting Adjust the time threshold according to your needs
for the specific alarm. In our example, any alarm that has not been cleared
within 20 seconds is considered significant and indicative of a device state that
can lead to high service impact.
If you have an alarm that you rarely consider significant, increase the time
threshold. The result is that the alarm rarely appears in the Alarm Manager.
On the other hand, if you have an alarm that indicates a high impact condition
after just a few seconds, decrease the time threshold setting to, for example,
five seconds or below.
Set Alarm Filter This filter is defined for detecting the Set of a specific alarm
and retaining it in the alarm correlation engine. In our example:
Device Type = CSM
Clear State = unCleared
Alarm ID = 10001
Clear Alarm Filter This filter is defined for detecting the Clear of the same
alarm as that of the Set Alarm filter. In our example:
Device Type = CSM
Clear State = cleared
Alarm ID = 10001
Notice that this definition of the Clear Alarm filter is not enough to properly
design the rule, since the filter definition does not isolate a specific device to
make sure that the arriving Clear finds its corresponding Set alarm. Additional
conditions must be added to the filter definition.

Set-Clear User Scenario UNO 2.16.3
Additional Conditions for Clear Alarm Filter The Clear alarm must be:
From the same device as that for the Set alarm
Of the same Event Type (such as equipment Alarm, environmental Alarm,
etc.) as the Set alarm
Order of Alarm Detection The Set Alarm filter is defined in the first Rule
Element (Rule Element #1), while the Clear Alarm filter is defined in the
second Rule Element (Rule Element #2). The Rule Element conditions must
always be satisfied in order, first Rule Element #1 and then Rule Element #2,
for the correlation rule to hold.
The procedures for defining these rule parameters are described in
Add and Modify on page 4-37.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 5: Large Scale Alarm Manager

Configuration
UNO Core Features
Important: UNO large scale alarm management is a licensed feature. To set

up the configuration you need to install UNO Optional License 4.
Large scale capacity allows you to monitor alarms through multiple UNO hosts
and use filters set up by other users, on other hosts. This chapter describes the
procedures required to activate this capacity for the Alarm Manager, Alarm
Browser and for large scale filter building.
The UNO large scale alarm management configuration consists of:
system configuration (by system administrator only)
user configuration (by administrator and user)
Once the large scale configuration is completed, you can:
add new hosts and filters to the configuration
copy the configuration to other hosts
remove the configuration from hosts
Large scale functions can be used in these UNO applications:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
Filter Builder

General Description UNO 2.16.3
General Description
Large Scale Alarm Manager configuration enables access to alarm information
by monitoring alarms from multiple UNO hosts.
These are the setup and implementation stages of large scale alarm
management:
1. The UNO system administrator sets up permissions and connectivity for
multiple hosts to be available for the Large Scale Alarm Manager. This is
performed by manually adding UNO host information to specific files.
2. The administrator adds UNO hosts to the large scale system configuration.
This is set up in from the UNO application launcher, UNO Configuration
application, System Configuration option.
3. After the system configuration is completed, UNO users and permissions
can be defined for large scale alarm monitoring. This is done by both
administrator and user in the UNO Configuration application, Large Scale
User Configuration option.
4. The user then defines filters for multiple hosts in UNO Filter Builder large
scale mode. These filters are applied in the Alarm Manager and Alarm
Browser when in large scale mode.
Table 5-1 summarizes the Large Scale configuration procedures.
Table 5-1: Large Scale Configuration Procedures
Configuration Stage Consists Of Is Done By
system defining primary and other hosts administrator
user defining users administrator and user
adding user configuration user
copying user configuration user
deleting user configuration user
filter defining large scale filters user

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 5: Large Scale Alarm Manager Configuration
The UNO hosts that are set up as a Large Scale configuration to monitor alarms
from the same agent, receive identical alarm sets. Efficiency can be increased
by setting up multiple sets of alarm filters, one for each UNO host. One filter
set is defined to receive alarms from the agent through the first UNO host; the
second filter set is defined to receive alarms from the agent through the second
UNO host.
Large Scale can be set up as a unidirectional or bidirectional connection, for
example:
uno1 uno2 uno1 uno2 uno1 uno2
A working Large Scale Alarm Manager performs these functions:
Integrates current alarms for multiple UNO hosts in Alarm Manager
Integrates historic alarms across multiple UNO hosts in Alarm Browser
Defines filters at multiple UNO hosts in Filter Builder

Supports filters that work across multiple UNO hosts
Supports returning to the original configuration at

startup (persistent startup)
Supports automatic recovery of connection to UNO

hosts
The UNO hosts can include any UNO release from UNO 2.2. The upper
capacity of 10,000 alarms per host is unchanged. Large Scale configuration
supports all 2.16.x release agents.
Connection between hosts is restored automatically. If the

connection between one of the UNO hosts and an agent is lost, you
can transfer the filter set definition for the UNO host that lost the
connection, to the other UNO host.

System Configuration Setup UNO 2.16.3
System Configuration Setup

This section provides the procedure for the tasks described in stage no.1 in the
General Description, on page 5-2.
Important: Only the UNO system administrator can configure and maintain
the Large Scale System Configuration for alarm monitoring.
Connecting Multiple Hosts

Note: Before starting this procedure, you should contact your site administrator
to confirm that communication between the UNO hosts is set up. There
is a possibility of communication loss, for example due to a firewall or
system configuration.
If an UNO host does not appear in the Large Scale Alarm Manager, a
permission must be received before the host machine can be added from the
command line. This procedure is applicable for multiple UNO hosts, and the
default configuration manager is the local UNO host.
first_UNO_host (uno1) is the host on which the user is working.
second_UNO_host (uno2) is the host to which the user wants to connect.
Steps 1 through 4 are performed from the first UNO host (uno1).
Steps 5 through 7 are performed from the second UNO host (uno2).
These procedures are also necessary if you are operating Large Scale alarm
management from an UNO workstation. In this case, steps 1 through 3 are
performed for the workstation and steps 4 through 7 are performed for UNO
hosts connected to the workstation.
To Add a Second UNO Host
FROM UNO1:
1. Open a UNIX terminal window on the first UNO host

2. In the /etc/hosts file, add the second UNO host IP address and name:
<IP_address> <second_UNO_host_name>
For example: 222.222.222.22 uno2

The connectivity between hosts is established.

3. To add a second UNO host, you must first configure Informix:

To connect the second UNO host to Informix, in the
/usr/informix/etc/sqlhosts file add the second UNO host name and
connection by inserting this line:
<second_UNO_host_name> ontlitcp <second_UNO_host_name>
sqlexec
For example: uno2 ontlitcp uno2 sqlexec

Informix is configured.
FROM UNO2:
4. Open a UNIX terminal window on the second UNO host

5. In the /etc/hosts file, add the first UNO host IP address and name:
<IP_adress> <first_UNO_host_name>
For example: 111.111.111.11 uno1

The connectivity between hosts is established.
Note: Step 6 requires administrator login.
6. In the second UNO host machine administrator host directory:
/home1/unoadmin/.rhosts
add the first UNO host name and administrator login by inserting this line:
<first_UNO_host_name> unoadmin
For example: uno1 unoadmin

This adds the standard UNO user permissions to connect the first UNO
host to the second UNO host.
Note: Step 7 requires user login.
7. In the second UNO user host directory,
/home1/<your_user_name>/.rhosts, add the first UNO host and your user
name by inserting this line:
<first_UNO_host_name> <your_user_name>
For example: uno1 john

This adds the private user permissions to connect the first UNO host to the
second UNO host. You can now work in Alarm Manager on the first UNO
host and view the second UNO host.

Invoking System Configuration

The system administrator uses the Large Scale System Configuration
dialog box to set up the large scale alarm management. This is done through the
UNO Configuration application.
To Invoke UNO Configuration from Application Launcher
1. From the UNO application launcher, click the icon

The UNO Configuration application opens, as in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1: UNO Configuration Window
Table 5-2 describes the UNO Configuration menu options.
Table 5-2: UNO Configuration Menu Options
Menu Option Description
File Exit Closes the UNO Configuration tool.

You are prompted if you want to exit the
application.
Large Scale System Invokes the Large Scale System Configuration
Configuration dialog box.
User Invokes the Large Scale User Configuration
Configuration dialog box.
Central Ack N/A
Help Opens the UNO Online Help.

2. From the UNO Configuration menu, select
Large Scale
The UNO Large Scale System Configuration dialog box opens, as in

Figure . A default window shows all listed items deselected and
a disabled Delete button.
Release
Manager/
Connection
Agent name
Action
Buttons
Figure 5-2: Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box

Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box

Table 5-3 describes the UNO Large Scale System Configuration dialog box.
Table 5-3: Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box
Manager/Agent Includes all UNO managers and agents currently available to be

Name hosts for large scale configuration. The list items are
color-coded according to their connection status:
Green for connected
Red for disconnected
Yellow for managers or agents that are being
synchronized (following Refresh). This status is
short-lasting
Release Shows the releases for each listed host.
Connection Shows the current connectivity status for each listed host.
Add... Invokes the Large Scale System Configuration Setup dialog box,
see Figure 5-3.
Delete Removes a selected host from the available hosts list.
Copy... Invokes the Copy Large Scale System Configuration dialog box,
see Figure 5-8.
Refresh Refreshes the list to show recent changes.
The application can also be invoked using the command line.
To Invoke UNO Configuration Using Command Line
In the XTerm window, enter this path and command:
Path /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_config.gui

Adding Hosts to a System Configuration

When the hosts have been defined as available for a Large Scale alarm
management, they can be included in the Large Scale configuration.
To Add an UNO Host to a Large Scale System Configuration
1. To define a new UNO host for large scale monitoring, click Add in the
Large Scale System Configuration dialog box
Note: The UNO host must have been added from the command line.
See Connecting Multiple Hosts on page 5-4
The Large Scale System Configuration Setup dialog box opens,
as in Figure 5-3.
Hostname/
Address
Entry Field
Action Buttons
Figure 5-3: Large Scale System Configuration Setup Dialog Box
Table 5-4 describes the Large Scale System Configuration Setup dialog box.
Table 5-4: Large Scale System Configuration Setup Dialog Box
Hostname/Address Lets you enter the UNO host name or IP address.

Field
Action Buttons Standard UNO action buttons.
2. In the Hostname/Address field, enter the UNO host name or IP address.

Click Ok to confirm and continue or Apply to confirm and close the
dialog box
The new host is included in the Large Scale System Configuration and is
enabled for a user configuration.

Removing Hosts from a System Configuration

You can remove a host or hosts from the system configuration. This is done by
deleting the host from the current Large Scale System Configuration.
To Remove an UNO Host from System Configuration
1. From the UNO application launcher, click the icon

The UNO Configuration application opens, as in Figure 5-1, on page 5-6.
2. From the menu bar, select
Large Scale

Figure , on page 5-7.
3. To remove the UNO host from current configuration, select the host from
Manager/Agent list and click Delete
The Configuration Question opens, as in Figure 5-4, prompting you to
confirm the deleting action.
Figure 5-4: Configuration Question Dialog Box
4. Click Yes to delete the selected UNO host

The host no is longer included in the UNO Large Scale System
Configuration and is not available for a Large Scale User Configuration.
The same host can be restored by adding it to the configuration again.

Copying a Large Scale System Configuration

Using the UNO Configuration Application, the system administrator maintains
the UNO host list. This is a list of all UNO servers in the management network
that are available for Large Scale Monitoring.
Once the Large Scale system configuration is saved, it becomes the startup
configuration. This configuration must be copied to another UNO host to
ensure the persistent start up of the Large Scale alarm management
applications. You must copy the Large Scale system configuration from the
local host to another host when:
The second UNO host will be used as the configuration manager
Prior to copying a personal user configuration from the local UNO host to
the second UNO host (See Copying a Large Scale User Configuration on
page 5-17)
To Copy a Large Scale Management Configuration
1. In the UNO Large Scale System Configuration dialog box, as in Figure ,

click Copy...
The Copy Large Scale System Configuration dialog box opens, as in
Figure 5-5.
Available
managers list
Select/Deselect All
Action Buttons
Figure 5-5: Copy Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box

Table 5-5 describes the Copy Large Scale System Configuration dialog box.
Table 5-5: Copy Large Scale System Configuration Dialog Box
Available Managers Includes all UNO hosts and releases in the management
List network available for Large Scale Monitoring. Includes:
Select
Available managers
Release
Select All Selects all listed hosts.
Deselect All Deselects all listed hosts.
Action Buttons Standard UNO buttons.
2. To copy a Large Scale System Configuration to another UNO host, click in

the Select column next to the target host
The target host is selected.
3. Click Ok to copy and continue selecting other target hosts from list, or
click Apply to copy the configuration and close the dialog box
Your Large Scale User Configuration is copied to the selected host and
can be used when that host is your local host.
4. You may also click Select All or Deselect All to select or deselect all the
listed hosts
Note: If the new host does not display in the UNO Large Scale System
Configuration dialog box, click Refresh. If the host is not available,
an error message appears.

Invoking User Configuration

To implement large scale, you need to set up a personal Large Scale
Configuration using the UNO hosts defined by the system administrator.
1. From the From the UNO Configuration menu bar, as in Figure 5-1, select
Large Scale
User Configuration
The UNO Large Scale User Configuration dialog box opens, as in

Figure 5-6. The current Large Scale Configuration displays. A default
window shows all list items deselected and a disabled Delete button.
Release
Manager/ Connection
Agent name
Host
List
Action
Buttons
Figure 5-6: Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box

User Configuration Dialog Box

Table 5-6 describes the dialogs fields and specific action buttons.
Table 5-6: Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box
Manager/Agent Includes all UNO managers and agents available as hosts for large
Name scale, as defined in the LS system configuration.
Release Shows the releases for each listed host.
Connection Shows the current connectivity status for each listed host.
Add... Invokes the Large Scale User Configuration Setup dialog box, see
Figure 5-7.
Delete Removes a selected host from the available hosts list.
Copy... Invokes the Copy Large Scale User Configuration dialog box, see
Figure 5-8.
Refresh Refreshes the list to show recent changes.
Note: The Large Scale User Configuration dialog box is also invoked from:
Filter Builder
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
Adding Hosts to a User Configuration

You can add a new host or hosts to the user configuration that you defined.
Prior to this action, ensure that the host you want to add is included in the
system configuration.
Important: Adding a new host to the Large Scale User Configuration is

possible only if the host has already been added to the Large Scale
System Configuration.
Copying and adding user configurations are done in the same dialog box.
Note: The default configuration manager is the local UNO host.

To Add an UNO Host to a Large Scale User Configuration
1. From the UNO Configuration menu bar, select

Large Scale
User Configuration

2. To add a host, click Add...
The Copy Large Scale User Configuration dialog box opens, as in
Figure 5-7. The information here is the same as in the Copy Large Scale
System Configuration dialog box.
Note: The default shows all listed available managers deselected.
The Available managers list includes all UNO managers and hosts that are
available from the current Large Scale System Configuration.
Available
managers list
Select/Deselect All
Action Buttons
Figure 5-7: Large Scale User Configuration Setup Dialog Box
3. To add another UNO host, click in the Select column next to the host you
want to add

Note: You can also click Select All or Deselect All to select or deselect
all the listed hosts.
4. Click OK or Apply
When you click OK, the dialog box closes and you return to the Large
Scale User configuration where the host you added to your user
configuration is now included.
Note: If the new host does not appear in UNO Large Scale User
Configuration, click Refresh. If the host is not available, an error
message appears.
Removing Hosts from a User Configuration

You can remove a host or hosts from your user configuration. This is done by
deleting the hosts from the current Large Scale System Configuration.
Note: You can remove only one host at a time.
To Remove an UNO Host from User Configuration
Large Scale

Figure , on page 5-7.
2. To remove the UNO host from the current configuration, select the host
from Manager/Agent list and click Delete
The Configuration Question opens, as in Figure 5-4, on page 5-10,
prompting you to confirm the deleting action.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected UNO host
The host is no longer included in the UNO Large Scale User configuration
and is not available in the user Large Scale System configuration. The
same host can be restored by adding it to the configuration again.
Note: To restore the host, add it to your user configuration again.

Copying a Large Scale User Configuration
Important: Copying the Large Scale User configuration is possible only

if the Large Scale System configuration has already been copied
to the target host.
You can copy the Large Scale User configuration that you defined, from the
local UNO host to another UNO host. Prior to this action, ensure that the
system configuration is copied to the target host. Copying user configurations
is done in the same dialog box as adding.
To Copy a Large Scale User Configuration to Another UNO Host
Large Scale
User Configuration

Figure 5-6, on page 5-13, displaying a list of managers/hosts available in
the current system configuration.
2. Click Copy...
The Copy Large Scale User Configuration dialog box opens, as in
Figure 5-8, on page 5-18. The information here is the same as that in the
System Configuration Setup. See Table 5-5, on page 5-12 for description.
Note: The default shows all listed available managers deselected.
3. To copy a Large Scale User Configuration to another UNO host, click in
the Select column next to the target host
Note: You may also click Select All or Deselect All to select or deselect
all the listed hosts
4. Click Ok to copy and continue selecting other target hosts from list, or
click Apply to copy the configuration and close the dialog box

Automatic Connection Recovery UNO 2.16.3
Your Large Scale User configuration is copied to the selected host and can
be used when this host becomes your local host.
Figure 5-8: Copy Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box
Automatic Connection Recovery

If connection to the UNO host is lost, automatic re-connection is provided
without querying the user. The user is notified of the connection loss.
The remainder of the connected session will continue running and the lost UNO
host connection is automatically restored. Alarms from the disconnected
session are retained in the Alarm Manager.
Using Large Scale for Alarm Management

The Large Scale configuration is invoked and implemented in UNO alarm suite
applications. Typically, the UNO Large Scale User Configuration is invoked in
these applications using the main dialogs Applications menu option.
Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser

The Large Scale mode, lets you monitor alarms from multiple UNO hosts on
one Alarm Manager.
For description of the large scale use in Alarm Manager, see Large Scale
Configuration on page 3-82.
For description of the large scale use in Alarm Browser, see Large Scale
Alarm Browser on page 6-63.

Filter Builder
For description of the large scale filter setup, see Large Scale Filter Builder
on page 11-56.
Shortcut Menus
Both System and User Large Scale configuration dialogs have shortcut menus
that are applicable to managers and agents listed in the Manager/Agent name
column. Some shortcuts let you quickly select an action from the drop-down
menu rather than from the application action buttons. Additional options are
provided for invoking the UNO alarm suite applications.
Figure 5-9: Right Button Shortcuts in Setup Dialogs

Shortcut Menus UNO 2.16.3
Table 5-7 describes the right mouse button shortcuts in Large Scale System and
User Configuration.
Table 5-7: Large Scale Configuration Shortcuts
Field/Button Description System User

Configuration Configuration
Options corresponding to the application action buttons:
Add... Invokes the Large Scale User Configuration yes yes

Setup dialog box, see Figure 5-7.
Delete Invokes the Configuration Question, see yes

Figure 5-4.
Copy... Invokes the Copy Large Scale User yes yes

Configuration dialog box, see Figure 5-8.
Options to invoke the UNO alarm suite applications:
Alarm Manager Opens the Alarm Manager main window. yes
Alarm Browser Opens the Alarm Browser main window. yes
Filter Builder Opens the Filter Builder main window. yes
Refresh Refreshes the list to show recent changes. yes yes

, UNO Core Features
Chapter 6: Alarm Browser

UNO Core Features
The Alarm Browser application enables you to monitor and display historical
alarms, that is alarms that are no longer active. The Large Scale Alarm
Browser can perform these same tasks as the Alarm Browser:
Display historical alarm attributes
Operate in fault management or performance management modes
Customize display fields and field labels
Print alarms in graphic or text format
Customize alarm filtering
Find alarms using predefined search criteria
Display online alarm documentation
Interface with other Universal Network Operation (UNO) applications,
third-party external applications, and tools or add-on external applications
Description
The Alarm Browser lets you view alarms stored in the historical alarm
database. The Alarm Browser is similar to the Alarm Manager (see Alarm
Manager on page 3-1), but since the Alarm Browser displays only historical
alarms, certain options available in the Alarm Manager are not available in the
Alarm Browser.

Description UNO 2.16.3
Table 6-1 compares the options available in the Alarm Browser and
Alarm Manager. indicates availability.
Table 6-1: Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser Comparison
Alarm Alarm
Function Manager Browser
Display Cleared Alarms
Clear Alarm
Acknowledge Alarms
Unacknowledge Alarms
Enable Device
Disable Device
Query Device
Input Alarms
Rule Details
Alarm Summary and Graphical Display
Alarm List
Alarm Updates List
New Alarm Indicator
Alarm Display Range
Include Suppressed Alarms
Note: Menu options which are available in Alarm Manager but unavailable in
Alarm Browser are grayed out on the menu.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 6: Alarm Browser
Interface
The Alarm Browser displays inactive Common Management Information
Protocol (CMIP) events and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
alarm traps. You can configure the Alarm Browser to suit specific
requirements.
The Alarm Summary table and bar chart present tabular and graphical summary
information on the alarms reported in the system, sorted by severity. The
Alarm List presents individual alarm information in tabular form. See Main
The user interfaces with the Alarm Browser by mouse and keyboard to select
options and enter text. Mouse shortcuts are provided for certain actions. See
Mouse Shortcuts on page 6-64.
The interface displays in either Alarm Browser or Alarm Manager mode.
Alarms
There are two types of alarms in the UNO system:
Active AlarmsAlarms of current interest
Historical AlarmsAlarms stored for viewing alarm behavior over a
period of time.
An alarm is considered active from the time it arrives and is registered by the
Alarm Engine until the alarm is cleared, when it becomes an historical alarm.
Both types of alarms are stored in the Alarm Database. Only historical alarms
are displayed in the Alarm Browser.
Alarms in the UNO system are classified into five types:
Communications
Environmental
Equipment
Processing error
Quality of service
Each event type has its own set of alarm attributes. Alarm fields not relevant to
the event type are left blank.
All alarms are identified according to a color coded severity level. See Device
State Default Colors in Command Center. Command Center Suite. 3-33.

Alarms UNO 2.16.3
Alarm Engine
The Alarm Engine is the UNO process that receives, stores, and transfers
alarms. The Alarm Engine:
Receives alarms from agents, parses the alarms, and stores them in the
Alarm Database
Transfers the alarms to the Alarm Browser and other applications.
Transfers information to and from the Alarm Database, from where the
Alarm Browser accesses historical alarms.
Alarm Database
The Alarm Database contains alarms received and processed by the Alarm
Engine. Active and historical alarms are stored in this database.
Figure 3-2, Alarm Handling, on page 3-4 shows how the Alarm Browser
retrieves historical alarm data from the Alarm Database for display.
Alarm Life Cycle

UNO supports monitoring of the entire system from a central location by
combining alarms from multiple platforms. Alarm handling is shown in
Figure 3-1, Alarm Life Cycle, on page 3-3 and Table 3-1, Alarm Life
Cycle, on page 3-3.

Starting the Alarm Browser

The Alarm Browser can be launched from the Application Launcher, from the
command line or by running the Alarm Manager in Alarm Browser mode. You
can run multiple Alarm Browser applications, an Alarm Browser Alarm
Engine, and Alarm Database on separate host computers.

You can launch the Alarm Browser from the Application Launcher.
To Launch the Alarm Browser from the Application Launcher
Click the Alarm Browser icon in the Application Launcher

The Alarm Browser main dialog box appears as in Figure 6-1, on
page 6-9.

When you run the Alarm Browser from the command line you can specify
application parameters.
Default parameter values are used when you launch the Alarm Browser from
the Application Launcher.
To Invoke the Alarm Browser from the Command Line
The path and command for the Alarm Browser are:
Path /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_alarmmgr -[command line argument]

For example, uno_alarmgr -browser

Starting the Alarm Browser UNO 2.16.3
Table 6-2 lists the Alarm Browser command line arguments.
Table 6-2: Alarm Browser Command Line Arguments
Option Description
-help, --help List command line arguments and explanations.

-agent <agent_name> Invoke application for specified agent.
-browser Invoke in Alarm Browser mode.
-config <cnfg_name> Use specific configuration by name.
-display Opens application on target X server
<display_name>
-duration <hours> Time interval to display historical alarms.

-exclude_filter Excluded filter name and access
-filter Invoke application by filter name and access. Filter

<FilterName[:access]> name could be FDN (Fully Distinguished Name).
-host <host_name> Connects to specified host to invoke application.
-iconic Invokes application in minimized form. Displays icon.
-info Displays current process information
-list Alarm list is not displayed.
-mode <mode> Execution mode [PM|FM|PMFM|none].
-show_clear_alarms Shows cleared alarms automatically.
-sum Summary not displayed.
-updates Update (Alarm List) not displayed.
xrm <resource-spec> Set a specific X resource.

page 6-9.

Running Multiple Alarm Browser Applications

For some networks, you may find it convenient to have two or more Alarm
Browser applications running in parallel. For example, you might want to view
certain types of alarms on one application and other types on another. The
multiple Alarm Browser applications run totally independently of each another.
You can open an Alarm Browser from:
Application Launcher
Main Menu bar
Command line
Alarm Manager
To Open a Second Alarm Browser from the Application Launcher
Click the Alarm Browser icon on the Application Launcher

The Alarm Browser application appears as in Figure 6-1, on page 6-9.
To Open a Second Alarm Browser from the Main Menu Bar
From the Alarm Browser main menu bar select:

File
Start New
Alarm Browser
A second Alarm Browser application appears as in Figure 6-1, on

page 6-9.
To Open a Second Alarm Browser from the Command Line
1. At the command line, enter: cd /opt/UNO/bin and press <Return>

2. Enter: uno_alarmmgr -browser [command line parameters]
and press <Return>
Note: The command line parameters are listed in Table 6-2, Alarm
Browser Command Line Arguments.
page 6-9.

Display Modes UNO 2.16.3
To Open a Second Alarm Browser from the Alarm Manager
For complete instructions for running Alarm Manager in Alarm Browser

mode, see Alarm Browser on page 3-44.
Running the Alarm Browser from a Workstation

The Alarm Engine and the Alarm Browser are independent processes. An
Alarm Browser application running on one computer or workstation can access
an Alarm Engine and Alarm Database running on another host computer.
To Run Alarm Browser from a Workstation without an Alarm Engine
Start the Alarm Browser from the command line using the command
parameter -host <host_name> where <host_name> is the name of the
host on which the Alarm Engine is running
The Alarm Browser appears on the workstation as in Figure 6-1, on
page 6-9.
Display Modes
The two normal management operation modes are:
You use Mode (see Selecting Modes on page 6-29) to have the Alarm
Browser display only those alarms suited to the current management mode.

Main Dialog Box

This section describes the tables and menus on the Alarm Browser main dialog
box display as appears in Figure 6-1.
Menu Bar
Filter Select
Start Properties
Box
Summary
Table Alarm Summary
Bar Chart
Alarm
List
Status Display
The Alarm Browser main dialog box is described in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3: Main Dialog Box Components
Fields Description
Menu Bar Accesses all Alarm Browser functions.
Start Properties When clicked, opens the Alarm Browser Properties dialog box. The Alarm
Browser Properties dialog box is identical to the Alarm Manager Properties dia-
log box, see Specifying Properties on page 3-27.
Note: When the Alarm Browser Properties dialog box is set to Relative Time (see
Alarm Browser on page 3-44) and the filter is changed, the displayed
time will not change. The displayed time will remain the time the Alarm
Browser was invoked; not the time the filter was changed. The alarms
displayed in the Alarm List will reflect the time the filter was changed; not
the time the Alarm Browser was invoked.
Alarm Summary Bar Alarm Summary Table data in graphical format.
Chart
Status Display Shows display status statistics

Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3
Table 6-3: Main Dialog Box Components (Cont.)
Fields Description
Alarm List List of alarm information as reported in the system. Alarms are identified
according to severity level and severity color.
Summary Table Alarm Summary data in tabular form.
Filter Select Box Shows the filter that is currently active and lets you select a different filter from
a list of filters defined in your system.
Menu Bar
The Alarm Browser menu bar is located at the top of the main display. From
the menu bar you can access all the Alarm Browser options. The menu bar
includes these drop-down menus:
File
View
Actions
Applications
Help
The main menu bar drop-down menu map is shown in Table 6-4.
File View Actions Applications

Start New Sort By Select All Configure Tools
Alarm Manager Arrival
Alarm Browser Severity
Date
Device
Ack
User Options
Save Sort Order Deselect All Command Center
All Ascending
Configuration Descending
Column Headings
Configuration Filter Clear (disabled) Download Manager
Management Filter Builder
Complex Filter List
List of filters
Print Selected Display Cleared Acknowledge Alarm Correlation
Alarms Alarms (disabled) (disabled)


Print Alarm Display Selected Unacknowledge Device Alarm History
Summary Only (disabled)
Exit Display All Enable Device BTS Relays
(disabled)
Fault (disabled)
Management
Performance
Management
Status (disabled)
Search Alarm Details ARS
Layout Components Alarm Generate Alarm
Alarm List Complete Severity
Alarm Updates List Complete Device Type
(disabled) Device Distribution
Send Alarm Historical Alarm
Notification Reports
(disabled)
Input Alarms RFDS
Test
Report
Rule Details CFC
Monitoring Tool
Summary Report
Cisco Applications
Cisco Works 2000
Cisco View Util
Cisco WAN Manager
Telnet
http Session
UNO Log Summary
Large Scale
Configuration
Central Alarm
Acknowledge Monitor

Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3

Fault (disabled)
Management
Performance
Management
Status (disabled)
Search Alarm Details ARS
Layout Components Alarm Generate Alarm
Alarm List Complete Severity
Alarm Updates List Complete Device Type
(disabled) Device Distribution
Send Alarm Historical Alarm
Notification Reports
(disabled)
Input Alarms RFDS
Test
Report
Rule Details CFC
Monitoring Tool
Summary Report
Cisco Applications
Cisco Works 2000
Cisco View Util
Cisco WAN Manager
Telnet
http Session
UNO Log Summary
Large Scale
Configuration
Central Alarm
Acknowledge Monitor

File Menu
The Alarm Browser File menu contains these menu items:
Start New
Save
Print Alarm Summary
Exit
Launching an Additional Alarm Browser

You may want to display two or more different sets of alarms at the same time.
Start New lets you launch an additional Alarm Browser display independent of
the currently displayed Alarm Browser. The new Alarm Browser opens with
the default configuration or any configuration redefined as default by the user.
To Start a New Alarm Browser Display
From the Alarm Browser main menu bar select:

File
Start New
Alarm Browser
A second Alarm Browser application appears as in Figure 6-1, on

page 6-9.

Launching Alarm Manager from Alarm Browser

Start New lets you launch an Alarm Manager display independent of the
currently displayed Alarm Browser.
To Start a New Alarm Manager Display
File
Start New
Alarm Manager
The Alarm Manager application opens. See Alarm Manager on

page 3-1.
Saving the Current Configuration

The Save option lets you save the Alarm Browser current configuration
parameter values any time during the UNO session. If the current configuration
is the default, you will be prompted to name a new configuration. If not, the
parameter values are saved to the currently loaded configuration.
You can save one of these groups of parameters:
All; configuration parameters and column headings
Configuration parameters only
Column headings for Alarm List only
Note: If you save the column headings, this change is duplicated in the Alarm
Manager application column headings. Changes in the remaining
parameters do not affect the Alarm Manager. If you do not want to
affect the Alarm Manager, save only the configuration parameters.

To Save Alarm Browser Configuration and Column Headings
1. From the Alarm Browser menu bar select:
File
Save
All
The UNO Alarm Browser Save Configuration Dialog box appears as in

Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2: Alarm Browser Save Configuration Dialog Box
2. Enter the new configuration name and click Ok to save or click Cancel to
return to the main dialog box without saving
To Save Alarm Browser Configuration Only
File
Save
Configuration

2. Enter the new configuration name and click Ok to save or click Cancel to
return to the main dialog box without saving

To Save Alarm Browser Column Headings Only
From the Alarm Browser menu bar select
File
Save
Column Heading
The new column headings are saved.
The Configuration Management dialog box lets you:
Create a new configuration
Define a default configuration (used at launch of the application)
Load a configuration
Delete a configuration
When you specify a name for a configuration, this named configuration can
then be used in future sessions. A named configuration can also be specified as
the Alarm Browser default configuration.
Creating a New Configuration

You can create a new configuration.
To Create a New Alarm Browser Configuration
File
The UNO Alarm Browser Configuration Management dialog box appears as in


The UNO Alarm Browser Configuration dialog box appears as in

Figure 6-3.
Default
Configuration
Current
Configuration
Available Delete
Configurations
Save As
Save As
Default
Action Buttons
Figure 6-3: Configuration Dialog Box
The Alarm Browser Configuration Management dialog box is described in

2. Select any existing configuration from the Available Configurations list
3. Click Save As
The new configuration appears in the Available Configurations list.
Note: If you try to use a name that already exists, an error message
appears indicating the name already exists. Names are case
sensitive; default and Default are different configurations.

Table 6-5: Configuration Management Dialog Box
Default The default configuration, defined as default for invoking the Alarm Browser.
Configuration There can be only one default configuration. Clicking Save As Default applies
any configuration as default.
Current The current configuration for the session, invoked by selecting any of the Available
Configuration Configurations.
Available Displays the list of all currently available configurations including default. A scroll
Configurations bar appears when needed to scroll through the list.
Save As Default Saves the configuration as default.
Delete Deletes a configuration from the Available Configuration list.
Save As Name a configuration.
Ok Applies and saves the configuration and closes the dialog box.
Apply Applies and saves the configuration. The dialog box remains open.
Close Closes the dialog box.
Help Opens Online Help.
Defining a Default Configuration

You can redefine an existing configuration parameter as the default parameter.
To Define a Configuration Parameter Set as Default
File
The UNO Alarm Browser Configuration Management dialog box appears

you want to become the default
3. Click Save As Default toggle button
The name you selected now appears in the Default Configuration field.

Loading a Configuration
You can load any existing configuration.
To Load an Alarm Browser Configuration
File

you want to load
3. Click Apply or OK
The name you selected now appears in the Current Configuration field.
The new configuration takes effect immediately.
Deleting a Configuration
You can delete a user configuration.
To Delete an Alarm Browser Configuration
File

2. In the Available Configurations list, select the name of the
configuration you want to delete
The configuration is highlighted.

3. Click Delete
The selected name is removed from the list.
Note: The default configuration cannot be deleted.
If you want to delete the user defined default configuration, select another
configuration as the default and then delete the former default configuration.
Printing Selected Alarms

You can print selected alarms from the Alarm List.
To Print Selected Alarms
1. Select the alarms you want to print from the Alarm List. To select
multiple alarms, see Selecting Items on page 2-42.
The Print Selected Alarms menu option is grayed out unless you have
selected at least one alarm from the Alarm List.
File


Printing the Alarm Summary

Selecting Print Alarm Summary prints current alarms information. The print
output includes all information included in the Alarm Summary table.
You can print the Alarm Summary either as a text file or in PostScript format.
Examples of print outputs are shown Table 6-6.
Table 6-6: Print Output Formats
Format Description Example
Postscript Prints the Summary infor-

mation as a graphic dis-
play.
Text Prints the Summary infor-

mation as unformatted Alarm Summary, 05/31/2002 18:05:02
text. Severity Total Not Acked Not Cleared
--------- ------ ----------- ------------
critical 3 3 0
To Print the Alarm Summary
File
Print Alarm Summary
The UNO print dialog box appears.


Exiting
The Exit option closes the Alarm Browser.
To Exit the Alarm Browser
From the Alarm Browser menu bar select:
File
Exit
3. Click Yes to exit

If you made no changes, the Alarm Browser application closes.
If you made changes in the current configuration, the UNO Alarm Browser
Unsaved Changes Dialog box pops up.
You are prompted: Save changes before exiting?
Continue with Step 3.
4. Click No to exit without saving the changes or
Click Cancel to cancel the exit and keep the Alarm Browser open or
Click Yes to save the changes
If you click Yes to save the changes, the UNO Alarm Browser Save
Configuration Dialog box pops up.
You are prompted: Save Configuration as
5. Enter a name for the configuration
6. Click on OK
The Alarm Browser application closes.

View Menu
The Alarm Browser View menu contains these menu items: :
Sort By Display All
Sort Order Mode
Filter Properties
Display Cleared Alarms Search
Display Selected Only Layout Components
Sorting the Alarm List from the View Menu

You can rearrange the data on the Alarm List by sorting by alarm attribute and
order: ascending or descending, using the menu options:
Sort By
Sort Order
Sorting By
Sort By lets you sort the Alarm List according to the criteria in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7: Basic Sort Criteria
When Sorted By: Primary Secondary
Severity Severity Acknowledge Status
Date Date None
Device Agent Name Device
Ack (Acknowledge) Acknowledge Status Date
User Option(s) Column(s) selected by user, added Date

to the list
Note: By double-clicking on any of the column headings on the Alarm List,

the column heading sort option is added to the Sort By drop-down list
and is available as a sort option.

To Sort the Alarm List by Attribute Column

View
Sort By
Arrival
Severity
Date
Device
Ack
The Alarm List is sorted by the attribute selected. To select ascending or

descending, see Sorting by Order on page 6-25.
Sorting by User Options

By double-clicking on an Alarm List column heading, you can add an option to
the Sort By drop-down menu.
To Sort By User Options
1. Double-click on the desired column heading on the Alarm List

The option is added to the Sort By drop-down list after the default options.
2. From the Alarm Browser menu bar select
View
Sort By
Option
The Alarm List is sorted by the desired option. To select ascending or

descending, see Sorting by Order on page 6-25.

Sorting by Order
Sort Order lets you sort the Alarm List in either ascending or descending order
according to the sort criteria last specified by Sort By. Ascending and
descending order is described in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8: Sort Order
Sorted By Ascending Descending

Severity Warning Critical
Minor Major
Major Minor
Critical Warning
Date From earliest to latest time From latest to earliest time
and date and date
Device Alphabetical order Reverse alphabetical order
Acknowledge State Ack Unack

Unack Ack
Sorting in Ascending Order

You can sort the Alarm List in Ascending order.
To Sort the Alarm List in Ascending Order
View
Sort Order
Ascending
The Alarm List is sorted in ascending order.

Sorting in Descending Order

You can sort the Alarm List in descending order.
To Sort the Alarm List in Descending Order
View
Sort Order
Descending
The Alarm List is sorted in descending order.

Note: You can also select the sort order by clicking on any Alarm List field
column. The direction of the arrow indicates whether the sort is
ascending or descending.
Filtering
Filter lets you:
Invoke the Filter Builder applications
Select a filter defined in the Filter Builder
Changing the alarm filter alters the alarm display in the main dialog box.
Invoking the Filter Builder

You can invoke the Filter Builder application from the Alarm Browser menu.
To Invoke the Filter Builder

View
Filter
Filter Builder
The Filter Builder application appears. For information on how to use the Filter
Builder, See Filter Builder. UNO Core Features.

Selecting a Filter
You can select a filter already defined in the Filter Builder.
To Change Alarm Browser Filters
View
Filter
Filter Builder
Complex Filter List
Filter List
2. Select one of the filters to activate the corresponding alarm filter

You can select a complex filter from the complex filter list which appears
just below the Filter Builder selection box. A drop down list of complex
filters appears when this is selected.
The selected Alarm Filter, whether complex or single, is activated and that
filter name appears in the Filter(s) box. The Alarm List is refreshed to
display the alarms according to the filter selected.

Displaying Selected Only

Display Selected Only displays only those alarms selected in the Alarm List
provided that at least one alarm is selected.
To Display Selected Alarms Only on the Alarm List
1. In the Alarm List, select the alarms to display

View
Display Selected Only
Display Selected Only is grayed out if no alarms are selected.
Displaying All
Display All displays all alarms on the Alarm List. Use Display All to return to
the full list after using Display Selected Only.
To Display All Alarms on the Alarm List
View
Display All
The Alarm List refreshes to display all alarms.

Selecting Modes
Mode lets you display alarms on the Alarm List according to one of the modes
in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9: Display Attributes according to Mode
View These Event Alarm Browser

Mode Types Title Bar Select
FM equipmentAlarm Fault Mode Fault Management

communicationsAlarm
PM qualityofServiceAlarm Performance Mode Performance Management
Both PM and FM all event types, Performance and Fault Fault Management
for example: Management Mode Performance Management
communicationsAlarm
environmentalAlarm
equipmentAlarm
To Select the Mode
View
Mode
Fault Management
Performance Management
2. Select one or both of the modes, according to Table 6-9

The Alarm List is refreshed according to the selected mode.
Note: Alarms displayed reflect the selected mode according to the current
filter definition.

Specifying Properties
The Alarm Browser Properties dialog box lets you define the display of the
Alarm Browser. Options include:
General Tab
Alarm Correlation View Options
Alarm Browser/Alarm Manager
Note: The properties functions are similar to those in the Alarm Manager,
however, in Alarm Browser mode, some functions are disabled.
To Access the Alarm Browser Properties Dialog Box
View
Properties
The Alarm Browser Properties Dialog box appears. For dialog box
description and functions, see Specifying Properties on page 3-27.
Searching
Search lets you define search criteria for finding an alarm in the Alarm List.
You can search for up to five alarm attributes simultaneously that possess
specific alarm attribute values. Only alarms that have the specified attribute
values are located, even if the alarm attributes are not currently shown in the
Alarm List.
You can search by:
Attribute and Value
Time and Date
You can define your search:
To ignore case or to search by regular expression
To select (highlight resulting) matches or to display matches only

To Access the Alarm Browser Search Dialog Box
View
Search
The Alarm Browser Search Dialog box appears as in Figure 6-4.
Search By
Search By
Values
Attributes
Search By Time
Radio Button
Date Type
Search By
List
Time Setup
Additional Search Results

Search Options Options
Search Commands
Figure 6-4: Search Dialog Box

Table 6-10 describes the search options.
Table 6-10: Search Options
Search By Lets you set up a maximum of five attributes with specific values for each attribute.
Attributes Each of the Attribute select fields contains the entire attribute list. Once an attribute
is selected, it will appear on the button.
Range: All available attributes
Default: Severity, Device Type, Device, Additional Text, Alarm ID
Search by Time When Include Search by Time is selected, a dialog box opens. This lets you
Radio Button specify exact search time parameters based on Ack Date, Clear Date, and Date.
Note: The available Search parameters are determined by the Properties General
selections (see General Properties on page 3-28). If Date is selected in the
General Properties window, only a Date Search is enabled; if Time is
selected, only a Time Search; Date and Time, both.
Date Type List The Date drop-down list you select the dates for:
Date/Timeof alarm event
Ack Datewhen operator acknowledges the alarm
Clear Datewhen the alarm is cleared
Range: Date, Ack Date, Clear Date
Default: Date
Additional Lets you define the conditions for the search. One, none or both can be selected.
Search Options When Ignore Case is selected, the type case (upper or lower) is ignored. When
Regular Expression is selected, the search is done by a regular expression or a
simple string. This is useful when searching for known expressions.
Default: Disabled for both options
Search Results Radio buttons that let you specify how the search results is presented. When View
Options Matches Only is selected, the Alarm List shows only the results of the search.
When Select Matches is selected, the Alarm List highlights the search result.
Note: One option must be selected.
Default: View Matches Only
Search by Time Use the Start and End buttons and the date/time fields to specify the date/time range
Setup for your selection from the date drop-down list.

Table 6-10: Search Options (Cont.)
Search by Values Changes to reflect the selected attribute. Values available for the selected search
attribute appear in the value list. You can type the value into the entry box. If Regu-
lar Expression is selected as a search option, you can enter any value.
Range: Any value relevant for the selected attribute

Default: none
Search Search: Click to execute search request. Results will display in the Alarm List
Commands according to the Search Results options selected.
Clear: Click to remove all search criteria from the value fields. All search criteria
returns to default values.
Close: Click to close the Search dialog box.
Help: Click to open Online Help
Searching by Attribute and Value

Use the attribute buttons and value fields to set search criteria.
To Search Alarm Browser by Attribute and Value Only
1. In Search By, click one of the Attributes buttons (see Figure 6-4)
A drop-down list with all of the Alarm attributes displays.
2. Select the desired Attribute
The Attribute button changes its name to the selected attribute.
3. in Search By, click the arrow on the Value field next to the desired
Attribute button (see Figure 6-4)
A drop-down list displays when available.
4. Select or enter the desired value
The selected value displays in the Value field
Note: If required, you can clear all values by clicking Clear or individual
values by selecting and deleting.
5. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining attributes
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining values
7. In the Search Results cluster, select View Matches Only
or Select Matches
Note: This information is sufficient to execute a search.


highlighted.
9. To redisplay all items in the Alarm List, from the Alarm Browser menu
bar select:
View
Display All
All the alarms display in the Alarm List.
Including Search by Time and Date

Search using only the time and date variables.
To Search Alarm Browser by Time and Date
1. Set the Search Dialog box to search by attribute and value. See To
Search Alarm Browser by Attribute and Value Only on page 6-33.
2. Click Include Search by Time if it appears raised and gray
(see Figure 6-4)
The button appears red, depressed and checked and the date, start, and
end fields appear.
3. Click the Date field to view drop-down list
4. Click to select Ack Date, Clear Date, or Date
5. Click Start and enter the starting date and time for the search by clicking
6. Click End and enter the ending date and time for the search by clicking

Ignoring Case or Regular Expression

You can search by text, ignoring case (upper and lower) or by regular
expression using partial text and a wildcard (*) or any other regular expression.
To Specify Ignore Case or Regular Expression
1. Set the Search Dialog box to search by attribute and value. See To
Search Alarm Browser by Attribute and Value Only on page 6-33.
2. In Search Options, click Ignore Case or Regular Expression, as
required, if the button appears raised and gray (see Figure 6-4)
highlighted.

Right Mouse Button Search Shortcuts

When executing a search with right mouse button shortcuts, the drop-down
menu as in Figure 6-5 appears.
Figure 6-5: Shortcuts Search Drop-Down Menu
To Search Alarm Browser by Right Mouse Button Shortcuts

1. To execute a search with right mouse button shortcuts, select an alarm
from the Alarm List (Figure 6-1, on page 6-9)
2. Click the right mouse button and select Search By
A drop-down menu appears displaying the attributes shown in Figure 6-5.
3. Select the attribute you want to match
All alarms in the Alarm List with the selected attribute are highlighted.

Laying Out Components

This section describes how to configure a new Alarm Browser layout. Using
the Layout Components option, you can choose whether or not to display the
Alarm Summary or Alarm List. All, two, or one item can be displayed; one
item must be displayed. Use the Layout Components drop-down menu to hide
or show Alarm Manager components.
To Hide or Show an Alarm Browser Component
View
Layout Components
The Alarm Browser Layout Components drop-down menu appears as in

Figure 6-6..
Figure 6-6: View Layout Components Drop-Down Menu

The Alarm Browser View Layout Components menus are described in

Table 6-11.
Table 6-11: View Layout Component Menu
Option Description
Alarm Summary Select to hide or show the Alarm Summary table and bar chart.
Alarm List Select to hide or show the Alarm List.
2. Click on an item
When the button appears gray and raised, the item will no longer appear
in the Alarm Browser.
When the button appears red and depressed, the item will appear in the
Alarm Browser.
3. To save the new configuration, see To Save Alarm Browser
Configuration Only on page 6-15
Actions Menu
The Alarm Browser Actions menu contains these active items:
Select All
Deselect All
Alarm Details
Alarm Documentation
Input Alarms
Rule Details

Select All
The Select All option selects all alarms that appear in the Alarm List. All the
alarms then highlighted.
To Select all Alarms
From the Alarm Browser menu select:
Actions
Select All
All alarms in the Alarm List are selected and highlighted.
Deselect All
The Deselect All option deselects all alarms that are selected in the Alarm
List. The display shows no selected items.
To Deselect all Alarms
From the Alarm Browser menu select:
Actions
Deselect All
All alarms in the Alarm List are deselected and displayed.

Displaying Alarm Details

The Alarm Details option displays the attributes of the selected alarm in a
window. You can choose the information is displayed.
See To Show/Hide a Column in the Alarm List on page 3-34. You can
produce an alarm details report from the main menu or by double mouse click
on the alarm.
Alarm Details Report from the Main Menu

An alarm details report can be produced by selecting Alarm Details in the
Actions menu.
To Produce an Alarm Details Report
2. From the Alarm Browser menu select:
Actions
Alarm Details
Alarm Details Report by Mouse Clicks

An alarm details report can be produced by mouse click shortcut.
To Produce an Alarm Details Report by Mouse Shortcut
2. Double click the alarm
An alarm details report appears as in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7: Alarm Details Report
Showing Online Alarm Documentation

The Alarm Documentation option lets you view online documentation for the
selected alarm if an Alarm ID, used to retrieve the relevant document, appears
in the Alarm ID field. Most online Alarm Documents contain the fields:
Alarm Agent Type and Alarm ID
Description
Examples
Background Information
Note: Some online alarm documents describe several alarms within a single
alarm document when alarms are related or similar. In this case,
specific details for each alarm are presented in tablular form and
common information is presented in textual form.
You can produce online alarm documentation from the main menu or by
a right mouse click on the alarm.

Generating Alarm Documentation from the Menu

You can generate online alarm documentation from the Actions menu.
To Generate Online Alarm Documentation
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List for which you want to generate alarm
documentation
Actions
Alarm Documentation
Generating by Mouse
You can generate online alarm documentation by mouse click shortcut.
To Generate Alarm Documentation by Right Mouse Button
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm List for which you want to generate alarm
documentation
2. Click the right mouse button and select Alarm Documentation

Displaying Correlation Input Alarms Details

The Input Alarms option displays the attributes of the correlated alarm in a
window. You can produce a detail report from the main menu or by double
Correlation Input Alarm Report from the Main Menu

An alarm correlation report can be produced by selecting Input Alarms in the
Actions menu.
To Produce a Report of Correlation Input Alarms

Actions
Input Alarms
A a report appears for the alarm selected.
Displaying an Input Alarms Report by Right Mouse Click

You can generate a correlation details report by mouse click shortcut.
To Generate Documentation by Right Mouse Button

2. Click the right mouse button and select Input Alarms
Documentation appears for the alarm selected.

Displaying Rule Details

The Rule Details option displays the rule details of the correlated alarm in a
window. You can produce a rules details report from the main menu or by
double mouse click on the alarm.
Rules Details Report from the Main Menu

A rule details report can be produced by selecting Rule Details in the Actions
menu.
To Produce a Correlation Details Report

Actions
Rule Details
A a rule details report appears for the alarm selected.
Displaying a Rule Details Report by Right Mouse Click

You can generate a rule details report by mouse click shortcut.
To Display Rule Details by Right Mouse Button

2. Click the right mouse button and select Rule Details
A rule details report appears for the alarm selected.

Applications Menu
The Alarm Browser Application menu, shown in Figure 6-8, has these possible
options:
Configure Tools
Command Center
Alarm Correlation
Download Manager (with Optional License #2)
BTS Relays
Element Manager (only if an element manager; CAT, or TCM connected to
the selected alarm)
Agent Access
RFDS
CFC (if selected alarm is associated with a CFC device)
Cisco Applications (if selected alarm is associated with a Cisco device)
UNO Log Summary
Large Scale Configuration (with Optional License #4)
PM Statistics Graphs (with Optional License #3)
Figure 6-8: Applications Menu

Configuring Tools
Configure Tools lets you add applications to the Applications menu. You
can define or modify the parameters and the conditions for launching the
application. You can then launch the application from the menu bar
Applications selection list.
Use the Configure Tools Dialog box to add, delete, or modify an application.
Adding an Application
Use the Configure Tools Dialog Box to add an application.
To Add to the Application Menu
Applications
Configure Tools
The Configure Tools dialog box appears as in Figure 6-9.
Applications
Application Name
Browse
Path to Executable Destination
Arguments Keywords
Show in
Non-Accessibe Popup Menu
When:
Configure
Commands
Action Buttons
Figure 6-9: Configure Tools Dialog Box

The Configure Tools dialog box options are described in Table 6-12.
Table 6-12: Configure Tools Dialog Box
Applications Lists all the applications are defined for your system by users. If you select an
application listed, information about the application is displayed in the relevant dia-
log boxes. You can select or deselect one item at a time. When you select an exist-
ing application, Modify and Delete are enabled. You can then either modify the
application conditions or delete the application from the list.
Range: User Added Applications

Default: Empty
Application Name A text field to name the application to include in the Applications\Tools list. Use
any alphanumeric characters to name the application. This is a required entry field.
TIP: Use a name that is indicative of the application you are adding to the list.
Range: 150 Alphanumeric Characters

Default: Empty
Path to A text field to enter the path (including the executable file name) where the applica-
Executable tion executable is located. This is a required entry field. If you enter an item that is
not an executable file, you will receive an error message indicating that the selected
file is not an application.
Range: 1255 Alphanumeric Characters, Symbols
Default: Empty
Browse Click the Browse Destination button (three dots) to open the Browse Destina-
Destination tion dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select the executable that will open
your application. It is recommended to use this method rather than manually enter-
ing the path in the Path to Executable field.
Arguments This field lets you manually add arguments to the executable. Check the application
manual for valid arguments. You can also use the Keywords list to add keywords to
the arguments.
Range: 1255 characters
Default: Empty

Keywords Clicking this button opens up an optional list of keywords that can be used to define
arguments that will apply to the application. Selecting a keyword will enter that
value in the arguments field. You can enter several keywords separated by commas,
such as TT_ID, ALARM_ID.
The keyword list includes these values:
ALARM_IDThe Alarm ID field of the selected alarm. Example: 1001
EM_MISThe UNO host machine name. This is the name of the machine that is
running the Alarm Engine with which the Alarm Manager is connected.
FILTER(S)This parameter passes a string containing all filter names currently
active in the alarm manager. This is identical to the filters in the Filter Select Box
on the Alarm Manager Main Dialog box. You could use this parameter to apply the
Alarm Manager filters to the alarm listener as follows: uno_alarm_listener
-filter FILTER(S)
LOG_IDThe Fully Distinguished Name (FDN) is part of the selected alarm Log
ID UNO attribute.
OBJ_FDNThis is the FDN of the Device attribute of the selected alarm.
Example: /networkId=NETWORK-145-9-239-52/managedElemen-
tId=OMCR_PLAT-9/functionId=XC_PLAT-1/equipmen-
tId=XCCAGE-1-1/equipmentId=GPROC-1-1-1
OBJ_NAMESThe last part of the FDN of the Device attribute of the selected
alarm.
Example: GPROC-1-1-1
OBJ_TYPEThe device type attribute of the selected alarm.
Example: GPROC
PM_FM_MODEDenotes the current mode.
Possible values: PM, FM, PMFM, none
RECORD_DNSSame as LOG_ID except that it includes the specific record in
the alarm record for the selected alarm.
Example:/systemId=baritone/logId=AlarmLog/logRecordId=106487
RECORD_IDSThe Id attribute (the record ID number) of the selected alarm.
Example: 106487
Range: Any Keyword from the list
Default: None (optional)

Non-Accessible Lets you decide when to restrict application launch conditions. Using any of these
When options will prevent the application from opening up if the condition is met:
No Alarms SelectedWhen no alarms are selected the application cannot be
launched. To open the application at least one alarm must be selected.
Multiple Alarms SelectedWhen multiple alarms are selected, the application
does not open.
You can select any combination of these application opening restrictions.
For example, if you select both the Multiple Alarms Selected and the No Alarms
Selected options, the application opens only when a single alarm is chosen.
Range: No Alarms Selected, Multiple Alarms Selected

Default: Both Off
Show in Popup When selected, the application will appear in the right mouse button shortcut menu
Menu under Tools. If not selected, the application will appear in the Applications
Menu under Tools.
Range: Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
Operations Add: When clicked, a newly defined application is added to the Applications List.
Modify: When clicked, you can modify any section from the Applications List.
Delete: When clicked, the application is deleted from the Applications List.
Action Buttons Ok: When clicked, the choices are applied and the application is added to the Tools
menu. The changes are made to the configuration file and the dialog box closes.
Apply: When clicked, the choices are applied and the application is added to the
Tools menu. The changes are made to the configuration file and the dialog box
remains open.
Close: When clicked, cancels the action and closes the dialog box.
Help: When clicked, opens the Online Help.
2. Enter a unique name for the application in the Applications field

3. Enter the path of application executable file in the Path to Executable
field or (recommended) click the Browse Destination button to locate
the file
The Browse Destination Dialog Box opens. See Browse Destination
4. Enter the arguments to the executable in the Arguments field or
click Keywords
The Keywords drop-down list appears.

5. Click the desired keyword

The keyword appears in the Arguments field.
6. If required, click No Alarms Selected or Multiple Alarms Selected in
the Non-Accessible When cluster
7. If required, click Show in Popup Menu
The button appears red, depressed and checked. The application will
appear in a separate drop-down list.
8. Click Add to add the newly defined application to the Application List.
Deleting an Application
Use the Configure Tools Dialog Box to delete an application.
To Delete from the Application Menu
Applications
Configure Tools
2. Select the application you want to delete from the Applications field
3. Click Delete to delete the selected application
The application is removed from the Applications field

Modifying an Application Configuration

Use the Configure Tools Dialog Box to modify and application.
To Modify an Application on the Application Menu

Applications
Configure Tools
2. Select the application you want to modify from the Applications field
3. Enter any required changes; see To Add to the Application Menu on
page 6-46
4. Click Modify to modify the selected application
Invoking Applications
Applications can be invoked from the Applications Menu.
Command Center
Selecting Command Center launches the Command Center application from
the Alarm Browser. When you select an alarm on the Alarm List, the
Command Center application shows the devices associated with the selected
alarm. After the Command Center is launched, you can continue working with
the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the Command Center from Alarm Browser

1. Select an alarm from the Alarm List for which you want to view the
associated devices
Applications
Command Center
The Command Center application opens showing the devices associated

with the selected alarm. See Command Center. Command Center Suite.

Alarm Correlation
Selecting Alarm Correlation launches the Alarm Correlation application from
the Alarm Manager. After Alarm Correlation is launched, you can continue
working with the Alarm Manager.
To Invoke Alarm Correlation from Alarm Browser
Applications
Alarm Correlation
The Alarm correlation application opens. See Chapter 4: Alarm

Correlation.
Download Manager
Selecting Download Manager launches the UNO Software Download
Manager application from the Alarm Browser. When you select an alarm
associated with a specific device, you can open the Download Manager to
download new software to that device. This selection is accessible only when
there is a download available.
To Invoke the Software Download Manager from Alarm Browser
1. Select an alarm on the Alarm Browser that is associated with the device to
which you want to download new software
Applications
Download Manager
The Software Download Manager application opens and is set up to

download new software to the device indicated by the selected alarm. See
Software Download Manager. Testing and Tuning Applications.


Selecting Device Alarm History launches another Alarm Browser
application. The second Alarm Browser will display all alarms with the same
device that appears in the selected alarm.
To Invoke Device Alarm History from Alarm Browser

Applications
A second Alarm Browser application opens displaying all alarms using

the same device as the selected alarm.
BTS Relays
Selecting BTS Relays launches the UNO BTS Relays application from the
Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the BTS Relays Application from Alarm Browser

Applications
BTS Relays
The BTS Relays application opens. See BTS Relays. Testing and Tuning
Applications.

Element Manager
Selecting Element Manager launches the UNO Element Manager application
from the Alarm Browser. The Element Manager is only available if the
selected alarm has an element manager hooked up (CAT or TCM) or the alarm
is associated with any CFC device.
To Invoke the Element Manager from Alarm Browser

Applications
Element Manager
The Element Manager application opens. See Element Manager Access

on page 13-1.
Agent Access
Selecting Agent Access launches the UNO Telnet Agent Access application
from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the Agent Access Application from Alarm Browser

Applications
Agent Access
The Telnet to Agent Access application opens.

Alarm Notification
(For future release)
Selecting Alarm Notification launches the UNO Alarm Notification
application from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke Alarm Notification from Alarm Browser

Applications
Alarm Notification
The Alarm Notification application opens. See UNO Alarm

Notification. Administrative Guide.
Generating Alarm Reports

Selecting Generate Alarm Reports generates three types of historical alarm
analysis reports:
Complete SeverityDisplays all alarms for a specific device sorted
by Alarm ID and severity
Complete Device TypeDisplays all alarms for a specific device
type sorted by device, Alarm ID and severity
Device DistributionDisplays all alarms with the same Alarm ID
(same type of problem) sorted by device and severity.
Note: Depending on the alarm, some options may be disabled.

To Generate Alarm Reports

Applications
Complete Severity
Device Distribution
When you click Generate Alarm Reports, a drop-down menu appears

with these options:
Complete Severity
Device Distribution
3. Select one of the options
The desired UNO Historical Alarm Report appears. The Generation Date
on the Historical Alarm Report is the exact time and date the report was
generated.

Selecting Historical Alarm Reports launches the Historical Alarm Reports
application from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the Historical Alarm Reports Application
Applications
The Historical Alarm Reports application opens. See Historical Alarm

Reports on page 7-1.

RFDS
Selecting RFDS launches the UNO RFDS application from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke RFDS from Alarm Browser

BTS
Sector
Carrier
Applications
RFDS
Test
Non-SALT
SALT
The RFDS application opens. See RFDS. Testing and Tuning

Applications.
To Invoke RFDS Reports from Alarm Browser
Applications
RFDS
Reports
The RFDS Reports application opens. See RFDS Reports. Testing and
Tuning Applications.

CFC
Selecting CFC opens the CFC drop-down list:
Monitoring Tool
Summary Report
To Invoke CFC Monitoring Tool from Alarm Browser

Applications
CFC
Monitoring Tool
The UNO CFC - single CBSC History Monitor for the selected alarm
appears. All the normal CFC application functionalities are available.
See CFC Monitoring. PM Enhanced Applications.
To Run a CFC Report from Alarm Browser

Applications
CFC
CFC Summary Report
The CFC Summary Report for the selected alarm appears.

Cisco Applications
Selecting Cisco Applications opens a drop-down list of Cisco applications:
Cisco View Util: For LAN management. Opens the Cisco View Util
application on the monitoring OMC-IP in the context of
the selected alarm.
Cisco WAN Manager: Opens the Cisco WAN manager on the monitoring
OMC-IP in the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco Works 2000: For LAN management. Opens the Cisco Works 2000
application on the monitoring OMC-IP (Operations and
Management Center for IP devices) in the context of the
selected alarm.
Telnet: Opens a Telnet session to the selected device.
Http Session: Opens an http session to the selected device.
To Invoke Cisco Applications from Alarm Browser
1. Select a Cisco-related alarm in the Alarm List

Applications
Cisco Applications
Application Selection
The selected external Cisco application appears.

UNO provides access to this external application. However, operations
performed in the external application are not part of UNO functionality.
UNO Log Summary

Selecting UNO Log Summary displays summary information about alarms
stored in the Historical Alarm Log, including the earliest and latest record and
the total number of records.

To Invoke the UNO Log Summary from Alarm Browser
Applications
UNO Log Summary
The UNO Log Summary dialog box appears as in Figure 6-10.
Earliest
Record
Latest
Record
# of
Records
Figure 6-10: UNO Log Summary

Table 6-13 describes the UNO Log Summary.
Table 6-13: UNO Log Summary
Earliest Record Shows the date and time of the oldest record in the Historical
Alarm Log.
Range: Date: mm/dd/yyyy, Time: hh:mm:ss, 24 hour clock
Latest Record Shows the date and time of the newest record in the Historical
Alarm Log.
Range: Date: mm/dd/yyyy, Time: hh:mm:ss 24 hour clock
Number of Shows the total number of records stored in the Historical

Records Alarm Log.
Range: 0Current Number of Stored Alarms
Close Click to return to the Alarm Browser main dialog box.

Help Opens the Online Help.


Configuration dialog box from the Alarm Browser.
Applications

Selecting Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor invokes the Central Ack
Configuration from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box
Applications
Central Ack Configuration dialog box appears. See Figure 3-24, UNO
Central Ack Configuration Dialog Box, on page 3-89.

Selecting PM Statistics Graphs invokes the UNO PM Statistics Display
dialog box from the Alarm Browser.
To Invoke the UNO PM Statistics Display Dialog Box

The alarm is highlighted
Applications
The UNO PM Statistics Display dialog box appears. See PM Statistics

Display Main Dialog Box in PM Statistics Graphs. PM Enhanced
Applications. 3-4.
Note: If there is no data available, the graph display area will be blank.

Large Scale Alarm Browser

The Large Scale Alarm Browser enables you to view historical alarms from
multiple UNO hosts on one Alarm Browser. To change the Alarm Browser to
large Scale Alarm Browser, a large scale configuration must be defined by the
system administrator and a large scale filter applied. See System
Configuration Setup on page 5-4. You can set up a large scale user
configuration, copy this configuration to another UNO host, and view alarms
on multiple UNO hosts. See Copying a Large Scale System Configuration
on page 5-11.

Configuration dialog box from the Alarm Manager. This selection is available
only when Optional Licence 4 exists in the system.
Applications

Mouse Shortcuts UNO 2.16.3
Mouse Shortcuts
This section describes the right mouse button shortcuts for use in the Alarm
Browser application.
Table 6-14 lists shortcut menu options for the Alarm Browser.
Table 6-14: Alarm Browser Right Mouse Button Functions
Shortcut Options Description
Select All Selects all alarms in the Alarm List.
Deselect All Deselects all selected alarms in the Alarm List.
Clear Changes alarm status of selected alarms to cleared.
Acknowledge Specifies that the alarm has been acknowledged.
Unacknowledge Takes the selected alarms out of acknowledged status.

disabled
Enable Device Enables the device reference in the selected alarm. This is
only active for single alarms.
Disable Device Disables the device reference for a single alarm.
Query Device Status Displays the status for the selected device for Status MM,
Status NE, Status PHY, or Status ADD
Alarm Details Shows attributes for a single alarm in a screen.
Alarm Shows online documentation for the selected alarm (only if

Documentation the alarm has an Alarm ID).
PM Statistics Graphs Invokes the PM Statistics Graphs application.
Input Alarms Opens the Input Alarm List Dialog box
Rule Details Opens the Correlation Rule Dialog box
CFC Monitoring Tool Invokes the CFC Monitor - Single CBSC History Screen
Summary Invokes a Summary Report for a selected alarm associated
Report with a CFC device.

Table 6-14: Alarm Browser Right Mouse Button Functions (Cont.)
Shortcut Options Description
Cisco Applications Invokes the external Cisco applications
Cisco Works For LAN management. Opens the Cisco View Util applica-
2000* tion on the monitoring OMCIP (Operations and Management
Center for IP devices) in the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco WAN Opens the Cisco WAN manager on the monitoring OMCIP in
Manager* the context of the selected alarm.
Cisco View Util* For LAN management. Opens the Cisco Works 2000 appli-
cation on the monitoring OMCIP in the context of the
selected alarm.
Telnet* Opens a Telnet session to the selected alarm.
http Session* Opens an http session to the selected alarm.
Search by Searches for an alarm, or set of alarms according to any of the

attributes shown for the selected alarm, for example:
Ack
Additional Text
Additional Text Translation
Agent
Alarm ID
Clear
Clear Date
Clear Opr
Corr State
Date
Device
Device Type
Event Type
Id
Manager
Notification Identifier
Probable Cause
Severity
* UNO provides access to this external application. However, operations performed in the
external application are not part of UNO functionality.

4UNO Core Features
Chapter 7: Historical Alarm Reports

UNO Core Features
Historical Alarm Reports is an application for creating reports on

historical alarms.
You can create historical alarm reports for all alarms and you can review alarm
summaries. The reports contain information about devices, device types, alarm
severity, the total number of alarms per device and other data.
Historical alarms are maintained in the historical database. The alarms in this
database are alarms which longer flow in your system. Unlike active alarms
viewed in the Alarm Manager, alarms in the Historical Alarm Database cannot
be acknowledged or cleared.
Invoking Historical Alarm Reports

You can invoke Historical Alarm Reports from:
The UNO Application Launcher
Other applications Alarm Manager or Alarm Browser
A command line
Command Center, from where you can run severity reports; see Complete
Severity Report in Table 3-279 on page 3-294 in Command Center.
Command Center Suite

Invoking Historical Alarm Reports UNO 2.16.3
To Invoke Historical Alarm Reports from the Launcher
From the UNO Application Launcher, click the Historical Alarm Reports
icon:
The Historical Alarm Reports Main Dialog Box opens; (see Figure 7-1).
Invoking from Other UNO Applications

You can invoke Historical Alarm Reports from these applications:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser

You can invoke all UNO applications from a command line. A number of
options are available for each command-line application invocation. For
details, see Table 7-1, on page 7-3. Opening UNO applications from the
command line, furnishes more flexibility than the Launcher provides.
To Invoke Historical Alarm Reports from the Command Line
Open a terminal dialog box

From the command line, the path and command are:
Path /opt/UNO/bin/
Command uno_alarm_rep
Example /opt/UNO/bin/uno_alarm_rep

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 7: Historical Alarm Reports
Table 7-1 lists the Historical Alarm Reports command line options.
Table 7-1: Historical Alarm Reports Command Line Options
Option Description
-help Print out this message

-agent <agent_name> Agent name or ALL for all agents.
-agent_type <agent_type> Agent type
-alarm_id <id> Alarm Id
-config <config_name> Use specific configuration
-display <dpy> Use different X server
-end_date <date> End date in MM/DD/YYYY format
-end_time <time> Start time in HH:MM format
-filter Invoke application according to specified filter
-generate Show result dialog only

-help Print out this message
-host <host_name> Host name to contact
-iconic Invoke application in minimized form,
displays icon
-interval <hours> Interval in hours prior to current time or
DEFAULT(24h)
-moc <class_label> Object class label
-nogui Run without GUI
-o <out_report_name> File name for report output*
-start_date <date> Start date in MM/DD/YYYY format
-start_time <time> Start time in HH:MM format
-type <report_type> Report type name
-xrm <resource-spec> Set a specific X resource
* For example: uno_alarm_rep -o ~/june_alarm_rep.out

Historical Alarm Reports Main Dialog Box UNO 2.16.3
Historical Alarm Reports Main Dialog Box

This section describes the menus, tables, and buttons on the Historical Alarm
Reports Main Dialog Box (see Figure 7-1). There are two tabs, Relative Time
and Fixed Time. The default is the Relative Time tab.
Menu
Bar Agent Type
Reports Agent list
Use Fixed Time
Alarm Id
Relative Time Tab
Device
Type Fixed Time Tab
Spin Buttons
The elements of Main Dialog Box are described in Table 7-2
Table 7-2: Main Dialog Box
Fields Description
Agent Type Opens a drop-down menu that displays agent-types; when an

agent-type is selected, configured and activated agents associated
with that agent-type are displayed in the agent field; if none has
been configured and activated, none appears
Agent list Displays the agent(s) that is/are associated with the agent-type
Use Fixed time Allows you to toggle between the fixed time and relative time tabs
Relative Time Tab Displays time fields and spin buttons that allow you to define the
number of hours prior to the present; you can view reports gener-
ated within the time period you define; the default time displayed
in the time field is set at: show alarms for last 24 hours; the range is
1-99 hours

Table 7-2: Main Dialog Box (Cont.)
Fields Description
Fixed Time Tab Displays a time field and spin buttons that allow you to define the
parameters of the time frame from which you can run reports
Spin Buttons Are used to define the values in time fields
Device Type Is a type of device associated with an alarm; to select a device,

click in the device-type select field - a checkmark appears; to
deselect a selected device, click on a checkmark - the checkmark
disappears
Alarm Id Is an alarm identifier number; the alarm id field allows you to
specify an alarm or multiple alarms about which you can create a
report; you can enter multiple alarm ids
Reports Displays a list of reports you can run
Menu Bar Accesses the historical alarm reports functions, run and exit
Historical Alarm Reports Main Menu Bar

The Historical Alarm Reports main menu bar enables you to run reports on
historical alarms.
The Historical Alarm Reports main menu bar is located at the top of the main
dialog box. The menu bar includes these drop-down menus:
File
Help
Table 7-3 shows the main menu bar drop-down menu map.
Table 7-3: Historical Alarms Report Main Menu Map
File Help
Run Help
Exit

Historical Alarm Reports Main Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3
Historical Alarms File Menu

The Historical Alarms File menu contains the following menu options:
Run - to generate historical alarm reports based on the selections you
make on the Main Dialog Box
Exit - to exit the application
Generating Historical Alarm Reports
To Generate Historical Alarm Reports
1. From the Reports list of the Main Dialog Box, select the type of report you
want to run as in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2: Reports List
Note: Not all reports require fields to be filled. When the time is not defined,
the default is used. The required fields and their related tables are listed
in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4: Required Fields
Report Type Required Fields
Complete Device Type Device TypeSelect Field
Complete Severity None
Device Alarm Summary None
Device Distribution Alarm IdNumber Field
2. Click the agent-type button as in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3: Agent-type Button

A drop-down list of agent-types appears as in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4: Agent-types List
3. From the list of agent-types, select an agent-type that is associated with the
agents for which you want to generate a report
Note: You can run reports without selecting an agent-type
The name of the agent-type you select appears on the agent-type button;
agent name, if any is associated with the agent-type, appears in the Agent
field as shown in Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5: Agent-type Button and Agent Field
4. Click the Use fixed time button (see Figure 7-6) to toggle between the
Fixed Time tab and the Relative Time tab
.
Figure 7-6: Use Fixed Time Button

Historical Alarm Reports Main Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3
5. To select a device or devices for which to generate a report, click in the

Device Type table Select column, opposite the device in the Available
Value column as shown in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7: Device Type Table
Note: The list in the Available Value column is dynamic, and changes to
reflect the agent-type you select. The check marks in the Select column
are cleared each time you select a different agent-type.
6. From the Historical Alarm Reports menu bar, select:

File
Run
Note: If you are prompted by an error message for Complete Device Type
reports as in Figure 7-8, select a device or devices in the Device Type
table (see Figure 7-7)and click Run.
Figure 7-8: Error MessageComplete Device Type
Note: If an error message for Device Distribution reports indicates that the
Alarm Id option is missing, (see Figure 7-10) type: a value, a range of
values, multiple values each separated by a comma, or any combination
and click Run. For a range of values, separate the low and high values
with a hyphen.

Figure 7-9: Error MessageDevice Distribution
Figure 7-10: Alarm Id Field
A report is generated (see Figure 7-11).
Alarm Reports
The reports you generate vary according to the selections you make on the
Main Dialog Box. This section explains the reports, buttons on the reports and
report variations. You can generate four different types of reports:
Complete Severity
Device Alarm Summary
Device Distribution

Alarm Reports UNO 2.16.3
Figure 7-11 shows the Historical Alarm Reports for Complete Severity.
Header
Column
Headings
Action Buttons
Figure 7-11: UNO Historical Alarm ReportsComplete Severity
The elements of UNO Historical Alarm ReportsComplete Severity are

described in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5: UNO Historical Alarm Reports
Header Displays information specific to the report:

The name of the report
Agents
Alarm IDs
Device types
The date/time range that the report covers
The date and time the report is generated
Column Headings Describe the type of data listed in each column; the column
headings and data vary according to the type of report you run
Action Buttons See Action Buttons in UNO Dialog Boxes on page 2-36.


The Complete Device Type column headings are shown as in Figure 7-12.
Device Alarm ID Severity Total
Figure 7-12: Complete Device Type
The Complete Device Type column headings are described in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6: Complete Device Type
Column Heading Description
Device Displays specific devices for which a report has been

generated
Alarm Id Displays the alarm identification number associated with
each device; one ID number can be associated with more
than one device
Severity Displays the severity level of each alarm. The categories

are:
Warning
Minor
Major
Critical
Total Displays the number of alarms generated for each device.
Complete Severity
The Complete Severity column headings are shown as in Figure 7-13.
Device Type Device Alarm ID Severity Total
Figure 7-13: Complete Severity

Alarm Reports UNO 2.16.3
The Complete Severity column headings are described in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7: Complete Severity
Device Type Displays the device types for which a report was generated.
Device Displays specific devices for which a report was generated.
Alarm Id Displays the alarm identification number associated with each

device. An Id number can be associated with more than one
device.
Severity Displays the severity level of each alarm. The categories are:
Warning
Minor
Major
Critical.
Total Displays the number of alarms generated for each device.
Device Alarm Summary

The Device Alarm Summary is shown as in Figure 7-14.
Device Critical Major Minor Warning Indeterminate % of Total
Type Alarms Alarm Alarm Alarms Alarms Total Alarms
Figure 7-14: Device Alarm Summary
Note: The heading columns are described in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8: Device Alarm Summary
Device Type Displays the device types
Critical Alarms Displays the number of critical alarms for each device type
Major Alarms Displays the number of major alarms for each device type
Minor Alarms Displays the number of minor alarms for each device type
Warning Alarms Displays the number of warning alarms for each device type

Table 7-8: Device Alarm Summary (Cont.)
Indeterminate Displays the number of indeterminate alarms for each device

Alarms type
Total Displays the total number of alarms for each device type
% of Total Alarms Displays the percentage of the total of all alarms for each
device type
Device Distribution
The Device Distribution column headings are shown as in Figure 7-15.
Device Type Device Total
Figure 7-15: Device Distribution
The Device Distribution column headings are described in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9: Device Distribution
Report Field Description
Device Type Displays the device types for which a report has been generated
Device Displays specific devices for which a report has been generated
Total Displays the number of alarms generated for each device
Print
The Print button opens the UNO Historical Alarms Print Dialog box which is
the same for all UNO applications. For complete details, see Print Dialog
Box on page 2-31.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 8: Web Monitor

UNO Core Features
UNO Web Monitor provides the UNO user with remote view-only access to
limited FM (Fault Management) and PM (Performance Management)
information that is current on the cellular network. At present, Web Monitor
enables viewing of alarm information and device state information.
The application also provides data-filtering search-and-sort options, as well as
refresh capability on demand.
Web Monitor enables you to:
View a snapshot of current state of devices
View a snapshot of current alarm filters and alarms
Navigate between Alarm and State monitors
Sort the monitored data according to specific parameters
View data while generating new monitor screens in the background
This chapter describes how to:
Invoke the Web Monitor application
Monitor the state of summary devices and view device details
Configure device scope for monitoring
Monitor alarms and view alarm details
Search for additional information
At the end of the chapter, additional reference information is provided about
configuration options that appear in the Web Monitor GUI.

General Description
UNO Web Monitor is an interactive client-server functionality. The client is a
Web-based application. Each client request is sent to the server and the
response results are displayed at the client GUI (Web Monitor). The server
prepares data in ASCII format for each client request and the client accepts and
represents the data to the UNO user by the means of http. The client provides
remote access to data by the means of:
State Monitor
Alarm Monitor
Client and Server Functions

This section lists the functions of the two main Web Monitor components.
Server
The Web Monitor server performs these functions:
Lists all current filters resident in UNO Alarm Manager
Supports a filtered snapshot of the active alarm log and provides a scoped
list of alarms, based on data as organized in the UNO Alarm Manager
Provides alarm details
Provides a list of summary devices in the sequence in which they are
currently displayed in the summary device display (which is a Command
Center feature)
Lists the low-level devices for the specified summary devices

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 8: Web Monitor
Client
The Web Monitor client performs these functions:
Enables viewing of current performance of high and low-level devices
Enables viewing of current alarms corresponding to specified devices or
available public and private (user-defined) filters
Navigates between Alarm and State displays
Displays user-defined table display options, such as item attributes or
column width, according to the specifications that were user-defined in the
UNO Alarm Manager
Performs searches
Supports sorting, multiple disjoint selection of list items, resizing and
hiding of columns
Supports simultaneous viewing and generating data in the background
Client Requests to Server

To display the information on the monitor, the client can request for these types
of data to be provided by the server:
Summary (high-level) devices of specified scope
Low-level devices (device details) corresponding to specified summary
devices
Current alarm filters
Current alarms, corresponding to specified filters and devices
Alarm details for specified alarms
Figure 8-1 shows how the two main Web Monitor functions interact.
State Management Alarm Management

Device Scope
Filters List
Menu
Summary Device Alarms List

List
Device Details
Alarm Details
List
Figure 8-1: State and Alarm Management Interaction

Structure and Components

Figure 8-2 further illustrates the structure and components of Web Monitor.
The figure shows how the back-end UNO Manager server interacts with the
front-end Web Client functionality, providing the data to be displayed in Web
Monitor.
UNO Manager network Web Client
HTTP Server Web Browser
UNO Web Monitor Server UNO Web Monitor GUI

State Management
State Monitor State Monitor
Device Details Data Device Details
By
Device
Alarm Management
Filter Data Filter List

By
Filter
Alarm Data Alarm List
Alarm Details Data Alarm Details
Figure 8-2: Web Monitor Structure and Components
Interaction with Other UNO Applications

To set up and display snapshot information, Web Monitor uses data and
definitions from other alarm-related UNO applications such as Alarm Manager,
Filter Builder and Command Center.

Table 8-1 lists source information types that cannot be modified (system-wide)
and the information types that can be user-defined.
Table 8-1: Web Monitor UNO Interactions
Information Used UNO Source Can Be User

in Web Monitor Applications Defined
Screen and table display properties Alarm Manager Yes
Color coding and definition changes Command Center Yes

Device attributes No
Default Filter Alarm Manager Yes

Alarm attributes No
Public and private filters Filter Builder Yes
User Predefined Filter

When you open Web Monitor, the default filter or any other predefined user
(private) filter is always highlighted in the Filters table. You can build your
private filter in UNO Filter Builder and then define it as your default filter in
the UNO Alarm Manager. For example, you could do this to view only a
specific type of alarm.
For more information about defining filters, see Chapter 11: Filter Builder.
Color Definitions
Color definitions in Web Monitor (as in color coding of device state and alarm
severity) are consistent with other UNO applications. Status colors are defined
in the UNO Command Center. Web Monitor displays any color definition
changes that were done on the UNO host. The new colors display in Web
monitor tables after data is reloaded (Refresh).
Display Limit
Web Monitor can display up to a 1000 rows/items.

Introducing Web Monitor UNO 2.16.3
Introducing Web Monitor

Web Monitor is invoked and viewed remotely by means of a Web browser
(most commonly - Netscape). If you are an authorized UNO Web user, you can
log into an UNO host from any PC or UNIX station. No administrative
privileges are needed to work with this application.
Recommended browsers are:
Netscape Communicator version 4.5 and higher
or
Internet Explorer version 5.0 and higher
Invoking Web Monitor
To Invoke Web Monitor from Web Browser
1. Open the browser of your choice

2. In the browser window, enter the following address:
http://<host_IP_address>/HOME
for example:
http://123.123.123.123/HOME
If proxy is used, add the UNO IP address in the browser.
For setting up your proxy, contact your system administrator.
The network password dialog box opens, as in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3: Password Dialog Box
3. Enter your User Name and Password

The UNO Home Page for the selected host opens.

Figure 8-4 shows the UNO Home Page and the Invoke panel.
Figure 8-4: UNO Home Page
4. In the UNO Home Page Invoke panel, click the Web Monitor icon
The Web Monitor introductory window opens. If Java plug-in is not

installed on your workstation, your browser asks you to download the
plug-in, using the Home page Invoke panel download icon/button.
5. In the Invoke panel, click the Download icon (see Figure 8-4)
6. Choose Windows or Solaris platform, as required
7. Click Ok
The Java plug-in is downloaded. The application begins loading and the
second UNO password dialog box opens.

Figure 8-5 shows the Enter Network Password dialog box.
Figure 8-5: Enter Network Password Dialog Box
8. Enter your User Name and Password, and click Ok

The Web Monitor main window opens, as in Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6: Web Monitor Main Window

Management Tabs
The Web Monitor main window tabs correspond to the operating modes:
State Management - for monitoring the state of devices
Alarm Management - for monitoring alarms
The default tab is State Management.
Figure 8-7: Web Monitor Function Tabs
Display Options in Web Monitor Tables

You can perform these changes on any Web Monitor table display:
Hide or show columns
Select and deselect table rows
Select multiple table rows
Sort table columns in ascending or descending order
Change column width
For further information regarding display options, refer to Manipulating
Tables in UNO in Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts.
Limitations that apply to these actions, are:
Not all table columns are sortable
You can sort a table only when loading of data from the server is
completed
You can adjust the width only when data is present in a table column
You cannot adjust the column order in Web Monitor tables
The table sorting buttons are:
Sorting Button Function
sortable column
descending order
ascending order

Shortcuts Menu
You can perform these actions on any Web Monitor table, using the right mouse
button shortcuts, as in Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8: Web Monitor Shortcuts Menu
Action Menu Option
To select all rows in the current table, click Select All
To deselect all rows in the current table, click Deselect All
To hide a column in the current table, place the Hide Column

cursor on the column you want to hide, and click
To show all columns, click Show All Columns
To invoke the search dialog box, click Search...

Monitoring Device State

When you are notified of a device malfunction, you can view device state
information to find the source of the problem. This section describes the use of
device monitoring as provided in the State Management mode.
Important: The summary devices supported by UNO may change with each
UNO release. For example, device scope can be expanded by new
devices. It is recommended to follow the changes.
State Management Tab

At the beginning of each Web Monitor session, the State Management tab
shows a default configuration:
Device Scope is set at the OMCR, All
data entry fields are grayed out
Figure 8-9 shows the State Management tab.
State
Management
Tab
Device
Scope List
Parent Device
Scope
Device Scope
Device ID / Name
Entry Fields
Action Buttons
Figure 8-9: Web Monitor State Management Tab

Monitoring Device State UNO 2.16.3
Table 8-2 describes the State Management tab fields and buttons.
Table 8-2: State Management Tab Fields
State Management Lets you perform device monitoring actions and define the
Tab scope of monitoring.
Device Scope List Lists all the summary devices which are currently displayed
in the UNO Command Center.
Range: OMCR, CBSC, MM, XC, BTS, MSCSPAN,
ICTRKGRP, FEP, IWU, MOSCAD, EMX,
TRKGRP, SPAN, CELL, OMCIP, AN, MLS,
AGNODE, LWRTR, EDGERTR, PDSN, SDU,
VPU
Default: OMCR
Device Scope These lists let you select the attributes (parent type and its
Attributes value range) that are required to view the selected device
Parent Type scope.
Value Range
Note: For a complete list of all the predefined device
attributes valid for each device scope, see Table 8-9,
on page 8-38.
Range: All, ID, Name
Default: All
Apply Applies the specified parameters to open the State Monitor

and to load the requested data.
Table 8-3 describes the action buttons that are common to both Web Monitor
tabs. These buttons are not described again in further sections.
Table 8-3: Common Action Buttons
Button Description
Close Closes the current window or dialog box without saving changes.
Help Invokes the Web Monitor Online Help.

Requesting Device State Data

To start monitoring, you need to define which high-level (summary) devices
you want to view and what will be the scope of data collection.
To Define the Scope of Data Collection for Monitoring
1. In the State Management tab, click the Device Scope button

The Device Scope list of available summary devices opens, as in
Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10: State Management - Summary Device Scope List
2. From the Device Scope list, click on the name of the summary device
you want to view
The selected device name is highlighted. Device scope attributes fields
appear, as in Figure 8-11, on page 8-14. Additional options are enabled
according to selected device level. You can select the required values from
lists or enter manually.

If you select All in the Parent Type list:

the manual entry field remains grayed out
in the Value Range list, only the All option is available
the Apply button is enabled
If you select ID or Name, you must manually enter the required value
range to enable the Apply button.
3. From the Parent Type list, select All
or
type either the ID or the Name of the parent device type
The Value Ranges vary according to your selection of Parent Type.
4. From the list of Value Ranges for the chosen Device Scope and Parent
Type, select All or ID.
The Apply button is enabled. You have completed the input of parameters
that are required to view the state of Summary Devices.
5. Click Apply
Requested data is loaded from the Web Monitor server.
Figure 8-11 shows an example of the device definition and attributes fields.
Device Scope
Value Range
Parent Type
Figure 8-11: Device Attributes: Parent Type and Value Range

State Monitor
The State Monitor opens; data loading may take a few moments. The list of
summary devices you requested opens.
Figure 8-12 shows the State Monitor window elements.
Menu
Bar
Column
Scope
Lables
List
Sorting
Buttons
Summary
Devices
Table
Status
Bar
Figure 8-12: State Monitor
The Scope field shows the data collection scope, expressed by the device
scope, parent type and value range that you selected.
Summary devices information listed in the table is color-coded according
to severity status. The table columns are labeled according to the attributes
predefined in the UNO Command Center, and cannot be changed.
Status bar shows the number of found items as the number of table rows.

Table 8-4 describes the State Monitor menu options and fields.
Table 8-4: State Monitor Menu and Fields
Field/Menu Option Description
Menu Bar Provides action and display options for this window.
File Close Closes the State Monitor.
View Font Changes the font size of column labels and other table text.
Range: 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30

Default: Last used
Note: Pixel is used as the font size unit.
Action Refresh Updates data from the server.
Cancel Refresh When the refresh (reloading data) is in progress, you can select
this option to cancel the process.
Show Details Invokes the Device Details (low-level device data) for the
summary devices you selected from the State Monitor table. See
Viewing Device Details from State Monitor on page 8-17.
Show Alarms Invokes Alarms data for the low-level devices you selected from
the State Monitor table. See Viewing Alarms from State
Monitor on page 8-21.
Help Opens the Web Monitor Online Help topic.
Scope Field Displays the device scope information you requested in the State
Management tab.
Format example: [device scope]:[parent type]:[value range]
See Figure 8-11.
Summary Devices Shows state data according to predefined columns.

Table For table display options, see page 8-9.
Column Labels Represent the attributes of summary devices as defined in the

UNO Command Center.
Note: All columns in this table are sortable.
Range: Agent, Device, Cell, Group, PM Severity, FM Severity,

PM Nak Ind, FM Nak Ind
Default: All

Table 8-4: State Monitor Menu and Fields (Cont.)
Sorting Buttons Ascending, Change the order of items in a table column. See also in
Descending Manipulating Tables in UNO in Chapter 2: UNO Basic
Concepts.
Scroll Bars Display in the table when the table rows or columns exceed the
viewing area.
Status Bar Displays the number of Summary Device data rows that show in
the current State Monitor.
Range: 0-1000 rows
Viewing Device Details from State Monitor

When you want to view information on one or more summary devices, you can
request Device Details. In the Device Details monitor, you can view ISO, FM
and PM state information for all low-level devices of the selected high-level
device.
To View Device Details on a Summary Device
1. In the State Monitor, select the device or devices you want to view in
detail
The selected rows are highlighted in black.
2. From the State Monitor Action menu, select
Action
Show Details...
The Device Details window opens, as in Figure 8-13, on page 8-18,

showing low-level device information.

Figure 8-13 shows the State Monitor and the Device Details window.
Action Menu
Selected
Summary
Device
Requested
Device Name
Requested
Device Details
Result:Rows
Figure 8-13: State Monitor and Requested Device Details
Figure 8-14 shows the Device Details window.
(Summary)
Device Name
Column Labels
Device Details
Table
Status Bar
Figure 8-14: Device Details Window
A new Device Details window opens for each Show Details request.
You can request new details on a different device while the previously
requested data is still loading.

Device Details Window

Table 8-5 describes the Device Details window menu and fields.
Table 8-5: Device Details Menu and Fields
Menu Bar Provides action and display options for this window.
File Close Closes the Device Details window.

Range: 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30
Default: Last used
Note: Font size unit is pixel.
Action Refresh Starts data reload from the server.
Show Alarms Invokes the Alarms data for the low-level device you selected
from the Device Details table.
(Summary) Displays the name of the requested Summary Device.

Device Field
Device Details Shows low-level device data according to predefined columns.
Table For table display options, see page 8-9.
Column Labels Represent the attributes of low-level devices.
Range: Agent, Device, ISO state, FM Severity, PM Severity, PM
Nak Ind, FM Nak Ind
Default: All
Sorting Buttons Ascending, Change the order of items in a table column. For sorting options,
Descending see page 8-9.
Scroll Bars Display in the table when rows or columns exceed the viewing
area.
Status Bar Displays the number of items or rows that appear in the current
Device Details table.
Range: 0-1000 rows

Viewing Alarms from Device Details

You can view alarm data on a low-level device from the Device Details display.
This option uses the Web Monitor ability to navigate between State and Alarm
data, as illustrated in the state and alarm management interaction diagram, see
page 8-3. The results of your request show in a new Alarm Monitor. For
description of the Alarm Monitor window, see page 8-26.
To View Alarm Data on a Low-level Device
1. In the Device Details table, click the device on which you want to view
alarms
The selected row is highlighted. In the Action menu, the Show Alarms
option is enabled, as in Figure 8-15.
2. From the Device Details Action menu, select
Action
Show Alarms...
A new Alarm Monitor opens and data is loaded from the server. When
done, the request result is displayed, as in Figure 8-15.
Show Alarms
Option
Detailed
Device
Alarm Data for

Requested
Device
Figure 8-15: Show Alarms Option and Result

Viewing Alarms from State Monitor

You can view alarm data on a summary device directly from the State Monitor.
This option also uses the Web Monitor ability to navigate between State and
Alarm data.
To View Alarm Data on a Summary Device
1. In the State Monitor, click the device on which you want to view alarms
The selected row is highlighted. In the Action menu, the Show Alarms
option is enabled.
2. From the State Monitor Action menu, select
Action
Show Alarms...
An Alarm Monitor opens and data is loaded from the server. When done,
the request result is displayed, as in Figure 8-16.
The Device field shows the name of the device that you requested in the State
Monitor. Status bar shows number of found alarms (rows).
Show Alarms
Option
Summary
Device
Alarm Data for

Requested
Device
Figure 8-16: State Monitor - Show Alarms Option Result

Monitoring Alarms UNO 2.16.3
Monitoring Alarms
Alarm Management is the second of two Web Monitor modes. The purpose of
alarm monitoring is to find out the type and severity of a known-scope problem
that is detected on the cellular network. This section describes the use of alarm
monitoring as provided in the Alarm Management mode.
To start the mode, you need to open the Alarm Management tab.
To Start Alarm Management Mode
In the Web Monitor main dialog box, click the Alarm Management tab
The Alarm Management tab opens, as in Figure 8-17.
Alarm Management Tab
Sorting
Buttons
Column Labels
Filters Table
Refresh (Filter Setup)

Button Apply Button
Action
Buttons
Figure 8-17: Alarm Management Tab

Alarm Management Tab

The Alarm Management Tab displays the list of valid filters for user selection.
The list consists of all public and private (user-defined) filters that were
configured in the UNO Alarm Manager. The predefined filter is the last saved
in the user configuration.
Table 8-6 describes the Alarm Management tab fields and setup buttons.
Common action buttons are described on page 8-12.
Table 8-6: Alarm Management Tab Fields
Alarm Management Starts the Alarm Management mode.

Tab
Filters Table Displays all current public and private filters. Includes the default filter that you
defined in UNO Filter Builder and configured as the predefined filter in UNO
Alarm Manager.
For table display options, refer to Manipulating Tables in UNO in Chapter 2:
UNO Basic Concepts.
Column Labels Represent filter attributes.
Range: Filter Name, Scope, Description

Default: All
Sorting Buttons Change the sorting order of the current column. For sorting options, refer to
Manipulating Tables in UNO in Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts.
Range: Ascending, Descending
Default: Descending
Scroll Bars Display in the table when the table rows or columns exceed the viewing area.
Refresh (Cancel Updates the current filters list and the button changes to Cancel Refresh. While new
Refresh) data is loading, you can use this button also to cancel the process.
When done, the default filter is highlighted and the button shows Refresh again.
(Filter Setup) Apply Starts loading of requested alarm information from the server.
Button
Note: In the Filters table, you can apply the selection, table sorting and shortcut
options, as described on page 8-9 and on page 8-10. Only the table
columns which contain information, are sortable.

Invoking the Alarm Monitor

You can invoke the Alarm Monitor in these ways:
Using devices from the Device Details window in State see page 8-20
Management
from the State Monitor see page 8-21

Using filters from the Alarm Management filters list see page 8-24
Viewing Alarm Data

This section describes how to invoke the Alarm Monitor from the Alarm
Management tab and to request alarm data.
To View Alarms
1. From the filter list in the Alarm Management tab, select a filter
The selected filter is highlighted in black.
Note: You can select one or more filters.
2. Click the Apply button
The Alarm Monitor opens and alarm data loads from the server. The
Status bar indicates progress and completion of loading. With Refresh
finished, current alarms appear in the Alarm Monitor table.
Note: In some cases, loading can take several minutes.
A new Alarm Monitor opens for each viewing request. You can ask for
new data, while the previously requested data is still being loaded.

Figure 8-18 is an example of an Alarm Monitor showing all current alarms for
the selected filter.
Alarm
Management
Tab
Selected Filter
Alarms for
Requested
Filter
Status Bar
Figure 8-18: Web Monitor Alarm Monitor
Because of the large alarm-handling capacity of UNO, the number of

displaying alarms can easily reach thousands. When an alarm monitor reaches
the display limit, that is the maximum number of rows, a message appears, as in
Figure 8-19. In this case, you may need to define a more limiting private filter
or view specific alarms using state management, from device tables. Another
possibility for limiting the scope of monitoring, is an alarm search using a
specific set of parameters. Alarm searches are described in Alarm
Management Search section.
Figure 8-19: Maximum Rows Display Message

Table 8-7 describes the Alarm Monitor menu and fields.
Table 8-7: Alarm Monitor Menu and Fields
Main Menu Provides action and display options for this window.
File Close Closes the Alarm Monitor.
Range: 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30

Default: Last used
Note: Font size unit is pixel.
Action Refresh Updates data from the server.
Cancel Refresh When the refresh (loading data) is in progress you can select
this option to cancel the process.
Show Details Invokes the Alarm Details display for the alarm or alarms you
selected from the Alarm Monitor table.
Alarms Table The main display area, shows alarms data for the filters you
selected in the Alarm Management filters table.
Column Labels Represent alarm attributes as defined in the UNO Alarm
Manager.
Range: Severity, Probable Cause, Alarm ID, Agent, Device

Type, Device, Event Type, Date, ID, Ack, Ack Date,
Ack Opr, Clear, Clear Date, Clear Opr, Additional
Information, Additional text, Corr State
Default: All
For table display options, refer to Manipulating Tables in

UNO in Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts.
Sorting Buttons Ascending, Change the sorting order of the current column.
Descending For sorting options, refer to Manipulating Tables in UNO in
Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts.
Status Bar Displays the number of alarm data rows that are showing in
the current Alarm Monitor.
Scroll Bars Display in the table when the table rows or columns exceed
the viewing area.

Alarm Monitor Table Sorting Options

You can sort several columns in the Alarm Monitor. Sorting options are:
Sorting Option Parameter
by Date Cell Name, Agent
by Severity Clear State, Severity, Ack State, Date
by Device Agent, Object Instance, Date
by Ack State Ack State, Date
Requesting Alarm Details

You can request detailed information on one or more alarms. Alarm Details
shows the expanded sets of viewable alarm attributes. These expanded alarm
attributes are configured in UNO Alarm Manager.
To View Alarm Details
1. In the Alarm Monitor, select the alarm which you want to view in detail
The selected rows are highlighted in black.
2. From the Alarm Monitor Action menu, select
Action
Show Details...
The Alarm Details dialog box opens, as in Figure 8-20, showing the
expanded set of alarm attributes for the requested alarm.

Figure 8-20 shows the Alarm Details window.
Action Menu
Selected
Alarm
Requested
Alarm Details
Status Bar
Figure 8-20: Alarm Monitor - Alarm Details
The Alarm Details window has the same fields as Alarm Monitor but the
requested information appears as lines of plain text, not as a table
The total number of text lines appears in the status bar; in the example in
Figure 8-20, both horizontal and vertical scroll bars are present indicating
that the text exceeds the display area.
Note: In the Alarm Details window, information is not shown in the same
order as in the Alarm Monitor table columns.
Alarm Details Menu Options

Alarm Details menu options are:
File > Close View > Font Action > Refresh Help

Using Search Options

In any Web Monitor table you can search for items according to specific
parameters. The search is done using the Search dialog box. Each Search dialog
box displays those parameters that correspond to the columns of the monitor
table it was invoked from. The name of this dialog box also changes according
to its context.
These Search types are available in Web Monitor:
in State Management in Alarm Management
State Monitor search Filter search
Device Details search Alarm search (narrow and wide scope)
Important: Search... option does not appear in the monitor menu. The
Search dialog box is invoked only from the shortcuts menu.
Search Dialog Box

Figure 8-21 shows the default Search dialog box. State Monitor Search is used
as an example.
Search By: Search By:

Parameters Entry Fields
Ignore Case
Check Button Search Action Buttons
Status Bar: Found
Figure 8-21: Default Search Dialog Box

Using Search Options UNO 2.16.3
Table 8-8 describes the fields and buttons for all Search dialog boxes.
Table 8-8: Search Dialog Box Fields
Search By: Buttons containing lists of the search parameters. These parameters
Parameters correspond to the column labels of the currently searched table and
represent either device or alarm attributes as defined in the UNO
Command Center and Alarm Manager.
Search By: Entry fields for additional specification of the parameter.

Parameter Depending on the parameter, these fields can present a cursor for
Entry Fields manual entry or another button to click on and select an option
from a list.
Ignore Case When entries have been made manually, enables a search,
irrespective of name case. A checked option is the default.
Search Enabled when at least one parameter is defined. When clicked,

starts a search for data.
Stop Interrupts the current search while retaining current parameters.
Clear Removes all currently defined parameters and resets to defaults.

If you do not clear current settings, the next search in this monitor
will retain the last-used search parameters.
Found Displays the search result as number of found items.
Note: For the full list of parameter ranges and defaults for each type of Web
Monitor search, see Table 8-10, on page 8-40.

State Management Search

This section describes an example of State Management search. Typical
purpose of this action is to find devices on a specified agent according to their
ISO, FM or PM status.
State Monitor Search
To Invoke State Monitor Search
In the State Monitor table, right-click to open the shortcuts menu, and
select Search...
The shortcuts menu displays the Search option, as in Figure 8-22. The
State Monitor Search dialog box opens.
Right Mouse
Button Menu
Search...
Option
Figure 8-22: Invoking Search from State Monitor

To Search for Devices from State Monitor
1. In the Search dialog box, enter the parameters of your search and click the
Search button
Search starts. The Stop button is enabled. When the search is completed,
the status bar shows the result and found items are highlighted in the State
Monitor, as in Figure 8-23, on page 8-32.
Note: If not cleared, the last used parameters will appear the next time you
open the Search dialog box in this monitor.
2. To perform another search using new parameters, click the Clear button
The data entry fields are cleared. Default parameters appear.
3. When done, click Close to exit the State Monitor search
The State Monitor Search dialog box closes.
Figure 8-23 shows the State Monitor search and result.
Found
Devices
Search
Parameters
Found:
Number of
Items
Figure 8-23: State Monitor Search Result

Device Details Search

Using the Device Details monitor, you can perform a search for specific
low-level devices.
To Search for Low-Level Devices
1. In the State Monitor, select the device which you want to view in detail
The selected rows are highlighted.
2. From the State Monitor Action menu, select Show Details
The Device Details monitor opens.
3. Right-click anywhere in device details table to open the shortcuts menu,
and select Search...
Device Details Search dialog box opens.
4. Enter required parameters and click the Search button
When the search is completed, the status bar shows the result and found
low-level device information is highlighted in the Device Details table.
Figure 8-24 shows an example of a device details search.
Device Details
For Requested
Device
Shortcut
Menu: Search
Option
Search Result
Configured
Device Details
Search
Figure 8-24: Device Details Search Example

Alarm Management Search

This section describes examples of Alarm Management search types.
Typical purpose of these searches is to find certain filters or certain categories
of alarms.
Filter Search
Unlike the State Management tab, the Alarm Management tab contains a table,
so you can search from the Filters table, not just from the Alarm Monitor.
To Invoke Filter Search from Filters Table
In the Filters table, right-click to open the shortcuts menu, and select
Search..., as in Figure 8-25
The Filter Search dialog box opens.
Figure 8-25: Invoking Search from Filters Table
Of the six (Search By) parameter entry fields, three fields are active,
corresponding to the Filters table columns:
Filter Name
Scope
Description

To Search for Filters from Alarm Management Tab
1. In the Filter Search dialog box Search By fields, enter the parameters,
and click the Search button
The search result displays in the Status Bar, as in Figure 8-26. Found items
are highlighted in the Filters table.
Found Filters
Search
Parameters
Found:
Number of
Items
Figure 8-26: Filter Search Dialog Box

Alarm Search
You can search for information on specific alarms in the Alarm Monitor.
Narrow Scope Alarm Search

For example, to look for a certain event type and the same probable cause on
alarms of a known severity, you can perform a precise or narrow scope search,
leaving all other criteria unchanged.
To Make Narrow Scope Search for Alarms
1. In the Alarm Monitor table, right-click to open the shortcuts menu and
select Search...
The Alarm Monitor Search opens.
2. In the Search By fields, enter only the required search parameters
3. Click Search
Number of found items shows in the status bar of the Alarm Monitor
search dialog box. Found alarms are highlighted in the Alarm Monitor
table, as in Figure 8-27 example.
Found Alarms
Search
Parameters
Found:
Number of
Items
Figure 8-27: Narrow Scope Alarm Search Example
4. Click Clear to start a new search

Wide Scope Alarm Search

Using the same procedure, you can perform a wide scope search, to check a
broad category of alarms. In this case, you can leave the rest of the parameters
undefined, and search for the category that interests you, such as a certain
severity level, as in the Figure 8-28 example. The result in the Found field of
the search dialog box can show a large number of items for the category you
defined.
Found alarms are highlighted in the Alarm Monitor table.
Found Alarms
Search
Parameters
Found:
Number
of Items
Figure 8-28: Wide Scope Alarm Search Example

Reference Tables UNO 2.16.3
Reference Tables
Device Scope Attributes

Table 8-9 lists the Summary Device scope and attributes. You can specify these
attributes in the State Management tab, as explained on page 8-11.
(High-Level) Device Scope
Parent Type (Specific To)
Value Range
Table 8-9: Device Scope Attributes
(High-Level) Parent Type Value Range

Device Scope (Specific To)
OMCR OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
CBSC OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
CBSC CBSC ID, All
MM OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
MM MM ID, All
XC OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
XC XC ID, All
BTS OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
BTS BTS ID, BTS Name, All
MSCSPAN OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
CBSC CBSC ID, All
MSCSPAN MSCSPAN ID, All
ICTRKGRP OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
CBSC CBSC ID, All
ICTRKGRP ICTRKGRP ID, All
FEP OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
CBSC CBSC ID, All
FEP FEP ID, All
IWU IWU IWU Name, All

Table 8-9: Device Scope Attributes (Cont.)
(High-Level) Parent Type Value Range

Device Scope (Specific To)
MOSCAD MOSCAD MOSCAD Name, All
EMX EMX EMX ID, SwitchMate Agent Name, All
TRKGRP EMX EMX ID, SwitchMate Agent Name, All
TRKGRP TRKGRP ID, All
SPAN EMX EMX ID, SwitchMate Agent Name, All
SPAN SPAN ID, All
CELL EMX EMX ID, SwitchMate Agent Name, All
CELL CELL ID, CELL Name, All
OMCIP OMCIP OMCIP ID, ALL
AN OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
AN AN ID, All
MLS OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
AN AN ID, All
MLS MLS ID, All
AGNODE OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
AGNODE AGNODE ID, All
LWRTR OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, ALL
AN AN ID, All
LWRTR LWRTR ID, All
EDGERTR OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
AN AN ID, All
EDGERTR EDGERTR ID, All
PDSN OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
PDSN PDSN ID, PDSN Cluster ID, All
SDU OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
SDU SDU ID, SDU Name, All
VPU OMCR OMCR ID, OMCR Agent Name, All
VPU VPU ID, VPU Name, All

Reference Tables UNO 2.16.3
Search Parameters
Table 8-10 lists device and alarm parameters used in Web Monitor searches.
Table 8-10: Search By Parameters/Attributes
Search type Search Parameters Range Default
State Agent
Device
Cell
Group
PM Severity critical, major, minor, ins, oos, critical

warning, indeterminate, cleared,
N/A
FM Severity critical, major, minor, ins, oos, critical

N/A
PM Nak Ind unAcked, acked unAcked
FM Nak Ind unAcked, acked unAcked
Device Details Agent
Device
cell_name
ISO State N/A, iso_shutting, N/A

Down_enabled,
iso_locked_disabled,
iso_unlocked_disabled,
iso_unlocked_enabled,
iso_disabled, iso_enabled,
iso_unknown
PM Severity critical, major, minor, ins, oos, critical

N/A
FM Severity critical, major, minor, ins, oos, critical

N/A
PM Nak Ind unAcked, acked unAcked

Table 8-10: Search By Parameters/Attributes (Cont.)
Search type Search Parameters Range Default
FM Nak Ind unAcked, acked unAcked
Filter Filter
Scope private, public private
Definition
Alarm Severity critical, major, minor, ins, oos, critical

N/A
Alarm ID
Agent
Device Type
Device
Event Type communicationsAlarm, communicationsAlarm

environmentalAlarm,
equipmentAlarm,
QualityofServiceAlarm
Date
ID
Ack unAcked, Acked unAcked
Ack Date
Ack Opr
Clear
Clear Date
Clear Opr
Additional Information
Additional Text
Correlation State nonCorrelated, nemCorrelated, nonCorrelated

unoCorrelated

UNO Core Features
Chapter 9: PM Measurements & Alarms

UNO Core Features
This chapter describes the Performance Management measurements and alarm

thresholding (Performance Management Thresholding or PMT) functionality
supplied by the UNO system. The information in this chapter is provided for
Motorola Cellular Network O&M specialists who intend to use UNO for
Network Management and are familiar with:
PM functionality on Motorolas OMC-R hosts
Informix database SQL features
This chapter includes these major topics:

PM Measurements & Alarms features
PMT basic concepts
An overview of PM Measurements & Alarms application functions
Setup of user-defined PM measurements and alarm thresholds
Disabling alarming on devices
Viewing PM statistics in a graphical display
Defining parameters for and generating setup reports
Default PM measurements, utilities and reference setup information for the
administrative user

Features UNO 2.16.3
Features
PM Measurements & Alarms expands and improves the usability of the UNO
performance management thresholding functionality. PM Measurements &
Alarms is used to:
Define PM measurements for system performance monitoring
Set up and edit alarm threshold definitions on defined PM measurements
Device-independent threshold definitions
Device-dependent threshold definitions
In addition to the main PM Measurements & Alarms functions of defining
measurements and thresholds, the application also provides direct access to the
PM Statistics Graphs application to view PM statistics for a device in a
graphical display. The graphical display facilitates comparison of statistics on
several measurements. For a full description, see PM Statistics Graphs. PM
Enhanced Applications.
PMT Basic Concepts

This section provides theoretical background on PMT. These concepts
are explained:
Monitored data and their domains
PMT alarms
User-defined measurement types
Threshold definition parameters
Statistical calculations
Historical data repository
Monitored Data and Their Domains

PMT is the ability to generate PMT alarms based on a comparison between PM
data (monitored values) and PM thresholds (threshold definitions).
PM Measurements & Alarms functionality allows you to stay informed of
exceptional occurrences on key PMT measurements. When the monitored
value of a specific PMT measurement crosses a defined threshold, an alarm
is generated.
The two domains of monitored PM data are:
PM Statistical data (record types from 01 to 89)
CFC (CDL)-derived data (record type 98)

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 9: PM Measurements & Alarms
Data of both domains reside in the UNO Manager, in the omcpm_<agent_id>

Informix database. The data are organized in the pmC_<record_type>_hr
table.
The PMT functionality is activated at UNO initialization and performs these
tasks automatically:
Monitors PM data every half hour
Monitors CFC (CDL) data every fifteen minutes
Runs unattended, using threshold definitions that are defined in the
PM Measurements & Alarms GUI
PMT Alarms
When crossing a predefined threshold is detected on a monitored value, the
UNO PMT functionality issues an alarm (referred to as the PMT Alarm). This
alarm specifies the parameters and time of occurrence of the detected deviation.
Alarm Attributes
The PMT functionality generates alarms by submitting messages (in
proprietary format) to the OMC-R platform. A CMIP Agent is responsible for
resending standard Quality of Service Alarms from the OMC-R platform back
to the UNO Manager. The main attributes of a PMT alarm are:
counter_id The PMT measurement that crosses the threshold.

device The specific device to which the PMT measurement relates.
instance
collection The start of the interval for which a PMT measurement was
interval collected for PM Statistical data or CFC (CDL) data. The
collection interval is identified by the hour:minute
(hh:mm) format.
For the same combination of PMT measurement and device instance, the PMT
functionality generates:
For PM Statistical data: a maximum of one alarm per 30-minute interval
For CFC (CDL)-derived data: a maximum of one alarm per
15-minute interval

PMT Basic Concepts UNO 2.16.3
Figure 9-1 shows a typical Quality of Service alarm generated by PMT for a
CDMA Carrier, as displayed in the OMC-R CLI.
CARRIER-4-1-1 99-07-26 22:06:26 sgi3 OMCR A000000.00000

002454/002454
** ALARM:14-6415PM Threshold Monitor: Measurement 15
DESCRIPTION=CARRIER Percent Access Overflows
SOURCE_CBSC=CBSC-1 BASE_VALUE=10.000000
COLLECTION_INTERVAL=21:00 MAX_DEVIATION=10.000000
CURRENT_VALUE=0.000000 ERROR_DIRECTION=0
Figure 9-1: Quality of Service Alarm for CDMA Carrier on CLI

Figure 9-2 shows a typical Quality of Service alarm generated by PMT for a
CDMA Carrier, as displayed in the UNO Alarm Manager.
Generation Date 7/27/1999
agentName: sgi3
Object class: CARRIER [ scCarrierFunction ]

Instance CARRIER-4-1-1
"NETWORK-145-9-239-53"
"OMCR_PLAT-3"
"CBSC-1"
"BTS-4"
"SECTOR-4-1"
"CARRIER-4-1-1"
/networkId="NETWORK-145-9-239-53"
/managedElementId="OMCR_PLAT-3" /functionId=CBCS-1"/
functonId=BTS-4"/functionId="SECTOR-4-1"/
functionId"CARRIER-4-1-1"
Probable Cause: equipmentMalfunction
Problem: {6415}
Severity: major
Event Type: qualityofServiceAlarm
Date: 07/26/1999 22:06:26
Id: 13244
Ack: unAcked
Clear: unCleared
Additional Information Additional Data
Sequence Number: 2454
Dialog Session Id: 0
Additional Text: CARRIER Percent Access Overflows
CBCS_ID="1"TIME=20:00ERROR_DIR=LESS
BASE_VAL=1000.00 MAX_DEV=1000.00
Corr: nonCorrelated
correlatedNotifications {}
notificationIdentifier: 403
Figure 9-2: Quality of Service Alarm in UNO Alarm Manager
For more information about PMT Alarms on the OMC-R, see the relevant
OMC-R CLI user guide.

Table 9-1 describes important alarm attributes of the alarm examples shown in
Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2, above.
Table 9-1: Performance Management Alarm Attributes
Interface
Alarm Attributes CDMA Carrier on CLI UNO Alarm Manager
Device Instance CARRIER-4-1-1 flagged with an alarm
Event Type 14 Quality of Service Alarm (compli-

in PMT Monitor Alarm ant to CMIP)
14-6415
counter_id 6415 specificProblem attribute
of PMT Measurement in PM Alarm code 14-6415 value=6415 corresponds to
flagged with an alarm counter_id=15
6415 is generated as 6400 + counter_id
Additional Text Specifies details of: parent CBSC,

data collection interval, current
measurement, exceeded threshold
values, error direction.
Note: counter_id identifies the PMT measurement that is flagged with an

alarm within the data collection interval on a monitored device.
Alarms Occurring in Successive Time Periods

If a PMT measurement crosses a threshold value in successive time periods on
the same device, the PMT functionality resends the same PMT alarm with an
updated collection-interval value for each period. Two fields in the
th_sys_config table are used to define the parameters of successive alarms:
realarm_countdefines the condition for increasing the severity level,
in case the alarm persists
Definition: Number of successive periods flagged with an alarm resulting
in severity level increment
Example: if the realarm_count is set at 5, and alarms of Minor severity
occur for 5 consecutive periods on the same device, then the 5th alarm will
have Major severity.

resend_severdefines the condition for resending a persistent alarm

Definition: Minimal severity level required for a persistent alarm (occurs
in more than one period) to be resent in every successive period
Example: Assume that Major alarm severity on a device is coded as the
value 3, and Minor severity is coded as the value 2. If the resend_sever
value for that device is 4, the alarm is not resent, since the minimal severity
level has not been reached (4>2 and 4>3).
User-Defined Measurement Types

PM Measurements & Alarms allows you to define thresholds for any single,
collected peg. In addition, it can be useful to monitor system performance
based on a user-defined measurement calculated from a raw set of pegs. It is
these user-defined measurements that are compared with thresholds.
Using the PM Measurements & Alarms GUI, you specify the SQL SELECT
statement needed to calculate the threshold measurement from the raw pegs.
The definition is stored in the th_formulae_db table.
Two types of user-defined measurements can be defined:
Value
Percentage
Value
The Value-type user-defined measurement (that is being regularly compared
with the thresholds), is calculated according to an SQL formula as defined in
the PM Measurements & Alarms setup.
Table 9-2 shows the format of the Value-type SQL formula.

Table 9-2: Value-Type SQL Formula Format
RateMonitoredValue : GroupFunction( Numerator / Denomina-

= tor )
Numerator : SQLexpression
=
Denominator : SQLexpression
=
GroupBy : Group by clause for an SQL statement

=
SQLexpression : < Arithmetic SQL Expression > |

=
< Aggregated SQL Expression >
StatisticalDevice : < Particular instance of

= StatisticalDeviceType >
StatisticalDevType : ( CBSC | BTS | ICTRKGRP | SECTOR |

= CARRIER | ACH | MDM | MCCCE | IWU )
Note: Each monitored value is associated with a device. This means that
when a monitored value reaches the alarm condition (by crossing a
threshold), the PM alarm is generated for the associated device.
Percentage
The Percentage-type user-defined measurement is calculated as:
PercentageMonitoredValue := RateMonitoredValue x 100
This is an example of Percentage-type measurement information.

Access
Table: pmC_98_hr
Device associated with CARRIER

table data:
Device used while CARRIER
submitting alarm:
Measurement Name: access
Numerator: sum (peg_count_5+peg_count_6+peg_count_9)
Denominator: sum (peg_count_99)
Grouping: mm_id, subj_id_1, subj_id_2, subj_id_3
Note: part of the set supplied with installation

Access on BTS Level
Table: pmC_98_hr
Device associated CARRIER

with table data:
Device used while BTS
submitting alarm:
Measurement Name: access_on_BTS_level
Numerator: sum(peg_count_5+peg_count_6+peg_count_9)
Denominator: sum(peg_count_99)
Grouping: mm_id, subj_id_1
Note: not part of the supplied set
Threshold Definition Parameters

Thresholds are used for comparisons performed on PM/CFC data that are
monitored on a regular basis. The parameters by which threshold values are
defined are:
PM threshold type
Threshold scope
Figure 9-3 illustrates the parameters used in defining thresholds for a
PMT Alarm.
Monitored Data
Threshold Type
Threshold Scope
MinMax PM Measurements &
Alarms Device
(PMT Functionality) Independent
Statistical
Base Value Device
Average Based Dependent
PMT Alarm
Figure 9-3: Threshold Definition Parameters

PM Threshold Types
The types of PM thresholds are:
MinMax Thresholdan absolute threshold in which the alarm condition
is met if the monitored value is greater than the maximum, or less than the
minimum value. Either the maximum or the minimum threshold may be
left undefined, but not both
Base Value Thresholda statistical threshold (see Statistical
Thresholds on page 9-11) in which the alarm condition is met if the
deviation of the currently monitored value from the given Base Value is
greater than the estimated maximal probable deviation. Estimating is done
on the basis of historical data for the measurement, using a Maximal
Standard Deviation parameter
Average-Based Value Thresholda statistical threshold (see
Statistical Thresholds on page 9-11) in which the alarm condition is met
if the monitored values deviation from an internally kept average value is
greater than the estimated maximal probable deviation. Historical data for
a measurement are used for estimating both maximal deviation and
Average-Based value
Threshold Scope
Threshold scope can be defined as:
Device-independent
Device-dependent
Any given threshold is always associated with a particular monitored PM
measurement or value. In other words, the monitored values are compared with
the associated threshold definition to detect deviations from desired behavior.
Device-Independent Thresholding All monitored measurements,

regardless of the device instance, are compared with the associated
threshold definition.
Device-Dependent Thresholding Only the monitored measurements

emanating from a specific device instance are compared with the associated
threshold definition.
When both device-independent and device-dependent thresholds exist for the
same measurement, the device-dependent thresholds always override the
device-independent thresholds.

Also, while multiple thresholds can be defined per measurement within the
device-dependent scope, only one threshold can be defined per measurement
within the device-independent scope.
Statistical Thresholds
When either Base Value or Average-Based Value (statistical) thresholds are
defined, PMT uses historical data that are kept for the monitored value (see
Historical Data Repository on page 9-13). All historically kept data are
represented as Average Value and Standard Deviation.
Average Value Average Value is an estimated, simple mean value (the

expected value) of the set of monitored measurements that are under PM
thresholding surveillance.
Standard Deviation Standard Deviation is an estimated value of the degree

of dispersion (second central moment) of the normal distribution of monitored
measurement values.
Both values are stored with all measurements on all device instances, as
separate 48 estimations corresponding to 48 half-hourly periods.
Example: Using this statistical model, the monitored value from the period
starting today at 6.00 p.m. is being added cumulatively (totalized) to data that
have been collected for the same interval from yesterday, two days ago, one
week ago and so on.
Weighted Method of Calculating Historical Value

The weighted method is used in statistical comparisons where both historical
and recent values are taken into account for the purpose of creating statistical
parameters. Either recent or historical value can be promoted, using this
approach. The formula for calculating Historical Value is:
HistoricalValue = CurrentValue * W + HistoricalValue * (1 - W)
where W represents the relative weight of current value in the newly calculated
Historical Value:
W=1 / ( 1 + N_days )
If number_of_days < NUMBER_OF_IMPORTANT_DAYS
then N_days=number_of_days
otherwise N_days=NUMBER_OF_IMPORTANT_DAYS
number_of_days is the number of samples for the specific time interval.

PMT uses two weighing parameters: one parameter for totalizing averages and
the second for totalizing standard deviations. For this purpose different values
of NUMBER_OF_IMPORTANT_DAYS for average and standard deviation are used.
These defaults are:
10in Average calculation (n_zero in the th_sys_config table);
15in Standard Deviation calculation (n_one in the th_sys_config table).
Setting Threshold Limits

Both the Base Value and Average-Based Value threshold types define limits
that are not an absolute value of the monitored measurement X (as in the
MinMax threshold type), but that represent the probability of getting a
particular value x.
PMT calculates Xmin and Xmax, that is, the absolute limits, using the preset
Error Rate, ex. At the minimum ex = 0.01, the range of X (Xmin to Xmax) will
be the widest possible. By increasing ex, you are tightening the tolerance limits
imposed on the monitored measurements. Consequently, more alarms will be
generated by the system.
This is the difference between Base Value and Average-Based Value
thresholding:
Base Value User supplies the Base for the calculation of Xmin and Xmax
Average-Based The historically kept Average is used
You can compare a monitored measurement to be compared to only Xmin, only

Xmax or to both. In other words, you can set alarm activation when a
monitored measurement falls below Xmin only (regardless of the upper limit),
exceeds Xmax only (regardless of the lower limit) or activate an alarm when
the measurement either falls below Xmin or exceeds Xmax. This determines
whether monitored values that are smaller or greater than the Base or
Average-Based value will activate an alarm.
Note: Specifying alarm activation does not influence the values of Xmin and
Xmax. These values are estimated using only the historically-kept
Standard Deviation and ex.

Figure 9-4 illustrates statistical threshold calculations:
Gaussian with Mean z and Stan- Average

dard Deviation s
The probability
of Xmin < x < Xmax
zs z+s
F( c )
User defined 1.0

Error Rate e x 0.5
0 X
Xmin Xmax
Figure 9-4: Statistical Threshold Calculations
Historical Data Repository

To support the required calculations with statistical (Base Value and
Average-Based Value) methods, PMT stores Average, Standard Deviation and a
number of processed samples for 48 periods for each relevant counter_id and
device_id. These samples are stored in the history_totals table of
pmthresh Informix database.
Required Size of Data Repository

PMT creates two historical entries for each measurement on each device
instance, one for a workday and one for a non-work day.
The total number of records in the pmthresh:history_totals table must not
exceed the physical limit imposed by the disk space that is available on your
system.

Working with PM Measurements & Alarms UNO 2.16.3
To estimate the required size of the data repository, use the following equation:
2x
S ( n devices m counters ) all devices Limit
where:
N devices - is the total number of all instances of a certain device type
M counters - is the number of measurements on this device type
for example:
2 x (NcarrMcarr_counters + NcbscMcbsc_counters + )<= Limit
Working with PM Measurements & Alarms

The PM Measurements & Alarms user interface enables you to set up and edit
threshold monitoring definitions. You can:
Define thresholds to be used for alarming
Define, edit, view and delete PMT measurements to be used for
monitoring
Request and view graphical display of PM statistics for a chosen record, by
launching the PM Statistics Graphs application
Specify and output threshold setup reports
This part of the chapter explains how to invoke and use each of the PM
Measurements & Alarms dialog boxes and tables.
Important: Only an unoadmin user is authorized to add, remove or change

any PM Measurements & Alarms PM definitions, both
measurements and thresholds.
PM Measurements & Alarms uses dynamic dialog boxes. In this type of

user interface, data input in one field guides you to the next setup step by
enabling or disabling the next relevant data entry field or action button.
At the bottom of each dialog box, you will find the standard UNO action
buttons, as well as unique buttons specific to the dialog box that is being
described. The standard buttons are described only once.

Invoking PM Measurements & Alarms

This section describes how to invoke PM Measurements & Alarms.
To Invoke from the Application Launcher
From the UNO application launcher, click
The PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box appears, as in Figure 9-5, on

page 9-16.
To Invoke from the Command Line.

Path /opt/UNO/bin/
Command uno_udm_gui -[command line argument]
Example uno_udm_gui -host <host_name> or

uno_udm_gui -h <host_name>
Table 9-3 lists PM Measurements & Alarms command line arguments.
Table 9-3: PM Measurements & Alarms Command Line Arguments
Option Description
-host <host_name> Invoke application from the specified host.

The PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box appears, as in Figure 9-5.
Menu Bar
Function Tabs
Sort Arrow
Measurements
Table
Status Bar
Figure 9-5: UNO PM Measurements & Alarms Dialog Box
PM Measurements & Alarms Window

When first invoked, the PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box shows three
function tabs:
Measurement
Threshold Alarm
Long Term Storage
When the application opens, the PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box by
default displays the Measurement tab.

Table 9-4 describes PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box fields.
Table 9-4: PM Measurements & Alarms Dialog Box Fields
Field/Button Option/Tab Description
Menu Bar For the menu map, see Table 9-5. For a short description of each
option, see Table 9-6, on page 9-18.
Main Function For a general description of these function tabs, see Function
Tabs TabsOverview on page 9-20.
Measurement When clicked, shows the table of all currently defined measure-
ments, including current predefined and user defined mea-
surements. The maximum number of rows (table items) is
198, 99 rows for CDL items and 99 rows of PM statistics.
The table columns represent these measurement parameters:
Aggregationaggregation level for a measurement
Statistical Recordname of statistical record
Measurementmeasurement name
IDID number for a measurement
Descriptionalarm text for a measurement
Note: You can adjust the width of each column in the
measurement table, but you cannot delete columns or
change their order.
Note: Menu options not available for this tab are: Actions:
Clone, Long Term Calculator.
Threshold When clicked, opens the secondary tabs:
Alarm Device Independent
Device Dependent
Disable Alarming
Long Term Not applicable to PM Measurements & Alarms functionality.
Storage For a full description, see Long Term PM Storage. PM
A detailed description and setup procedures that you can perform in each of the
PM Measurements & Alarms function tabs are provided in later sections.

PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Bar

Table 9-5 shows the menu map of the PM Measurements & Alarms dialog box
menu bar.
Table 9-5: PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Map
File Edit View Actions Applications Help
Print Selected Select All* Refresh Clone PM Statistics

Graphs*
Print All Deselect All* Show Details* Long Term Date/Time
Calculator Setup
Exit Add* Report Setup
Edit/View*
Delete*
* Available from right mouse button shortcuts menu. See Right Mouse Button Shortcuts on
page 9-26

Available only in Long Term Storage
PM Measurements & Alarms menu options are selectively activated, according

to the currently open tab and the item that you choose from a tab table.
Table 9-6 briefly describes the PM Measurements & Alarms menu options
applicable to thresholding functionality.
Table 9-6: PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Options
File Print Selected Opens the Print Dialog box where you can request a printout of
selected table item(s).
Print All Opens the Print Dialog box where you can request a printout of
all table items at once.
Exit Closes all open dialog boxes, without applying changes and
exits the application.

Table 9-6: PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Options (Cont.)
Edit Select All* Enables you to select and highlights all table items in the cur-
rently active table.
Deselect All* Deselects any highlighted items in the currently active table.
Add* Opens the Add dialog box where you can specify a new defini-
tion for a measurement or a threshold. Depends on the context
(function tab) that is currently active.
For example: while working in the Measurement tab, the Add
dialog you invoke will be the Add User Defined Measurement
dialog. If you are working in the Device Dependent tab, the Add
dialog that you invoke is the Add Device Dependent Threshold
dialog.
Edit/View* Opens the Edit dialog box where you can enter changes in the
current definition. Like the Add dialog box, depends on the con-
text (function tab) that is currently active.
Note: For a non-administrative user, only the View option is
enabled.
Delete* Lets you remove selected (highlighted) item(s) from the cur-
rently active table.
View Refresh Starts the reloading of new data. Any new measurements are
added and display in the tables.
Show Details* Opens the Definition Details window. See Viewing Table Item
Details on page 9-26.
Actions Clone Opens the Clone Threshold dialog, where you can assign the
same device dependent threshold to additional device or
devices, using a definition that you had previously created and
selected from the (Device Dependent) measurements table. See
Cloning Device-Dependent Thresholds on page 9-54.

Table 9-6: PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Options (Cont.)
Applications PM Statistics Invokes the PM Statistics Graphs application where you can
Graphs* view a graphical display of the statistical record(s) that you
selected. See Viewing PM Statistics (For MM License No. 3
User) on page 9-66.
Date/Time Setup Opens the Date Setup dialog box, where you can define the
time-related parameters for your threshold definitions. See
Date/Time Setup for Thresholding on page 9-69.
Report Setup Opens the Report setup dialog box, where you can define the
parameters for a report. See Multiple Item Reports on
page 9-75.
Help Invokes the Online Help topic.

*
Available from right mouse button shortcuts menu. See Right Mouse Button Shortcuts on
page 9-26
Function TabsOverview
This section briefly introduces and describes the purpose of each PM
Measurements & Alarms function tab. In later sections, the functions and
procedures that are available in each tab, are described in depth.
Figure 9-6 shows all the PM Measurements & Alarms tabs.
Measurement Threshold Alarm Long Term Storage
Device Device Disable Alarming

Independent Dependent
Figure 9-6: PM Measurements & Alarms Tabs

Measurement The Measurement tab table shows a list of all

currently defined measurements. Some of these are
predefined (system-defined) measurements, as
opposed to user-defined measurements, and as such,
cannot be edited, although they can be deleted from
the list. For detailed description, see User Defined
Measurements on page 9-29.
Threshold Alarm A parent tab, the Threshold Alarm tab opens the
threshold setup functions: Device Independent,
Device Dependent and Disable Alarming.
As a default, Device Independent is the active tab, as in
Figure 9-6.
Long Term Storage Not applicable to thresholding functionality. For a
full description, see Long Term PM Storage. PM
Device Independent In the Device Independent tab you can set up, view,
edit, delete and output device-independent statistical
alarm thresholds. See Device-Independent
Statistical Thresholds on page 9-35.
Device Dependent In the Device Dependent tab you can set up, view,
edit, delete and output device-dependent statistical
alarm thresholds. You can also clone thresholds for
use on additional devices. See Device-Dependent
Statistical Thresholds on page 9-46.
Disable Alarming In the Disable Alarming tab you can temporarily
disable active alarming on any of the user-defined
thresholds, without deleting the threshold. See
Disabling Alarms on a Device on page 9-60.

Figure 9-7 shows an overview of PM Measurements & Alarms main functions.
Measurement
Long Term Storage Threshold Disable Alarming
Device Device
Independent Dependent Clone Threshold
Threshold Definition
Figure 9-7: PM Measurements & Alarms Functions Overview
Navigating and Common Features

This section describes the common features that you work with in the PM
Measurements & Alarms application and ways of adjusting the displays.
Table Display Features

This section describes display and navigation features that are common to PM
Measurements & Alarms dialogs and tables.
Table 9-7 describes the display features that are common to all PM
Measurements & Alarms tabs and will not be included in further descriptions.

Table 9-7: Common Tab Display Features
Display Feature Description
Sort Arrow Allows alphabetical sorting of any table column, in ascending or descending order.
Button As a default, the sort arrow button is visible in the first table column label only, but
will show on any table column label when you double-click the column name.
Range: Ascending; Descending
Default: Ascending
Scroll Bars The horizontal and vertical scroll bars enable viewing information that extends
beyond the available viewing area.
Status Bar A dynamic, context-sensitive text display, informs about the current or last action.
You can adjust any table columns to sort and view information as required.
To Sort Data in Table Columns
To sort data in ascending or descending order in any table column, double

click the column label you want to sort
Note: When no data are present in the selected column, you cannot sort
the column.
You can adjust the width of each column in any PM Measurements & Alarms
table, but you cannot delete columns or change their order.
To Adjust Table Column Width
Place the cursor on the right column border and drag the border to the left
or to the right, to adjust the column width.
Note: When no rows of data are present, you cannot adjust the column width.
To Select More than One Row in a Table
To select contiguous rows, shift-click the rows

To select multiple non-contiguous rows, control-click the rows
To select or deselect all rows in the table, choose Edit > Select All or
Edit > Deselect All from the PM Measurements & Alarms menu or from
the right-mouse menu (see Figure 9-9, on page 9-26)

Standard Action Buttons

Table 9-8 lists the standard action buttons that will not be included in further
descriptions.
Table 9-8: Button Conventions - Standard Buttons
Button Description
Ok Saves changes and exits the dialog box.
Apply Saves changes without exiting the dialog box.
Close Closes the currently open dialog box without saving changes.
Cancel Exits the dialog box without saving changes.
Reset Resets user defined settings to predefined default.
Run Displays a report on screen or outputs to a printer.
Print Sends the selected display to printer/output device
Help Invokes the PM Measurements & Alarms Online Help topic.
Device Selection Dialog Box

The PM Measurements & Alarms Device Selection dialog box is the same as
the standard UNO device selection dialog box. The action buttons in this dialog
box are also standard UNO action buttons. Typically, this dialog box opens:
The collapsed System Tree for all agents available on your host
or
The agent that you selected from a separate drop-down Agent list
Depending on the context, you can choose one or more devices. Figure 9-8
shows an example of device selection using the Device Selection dialog box.

Figure 9-8: Device Selection Dialog Box
To Drill Down the System Tree
1. Click on the device name to highlight it and then click on the checkbox
next to the folder icon.
Contents of the selected lower level device appear.
2. Drill down in the same manner, until you find the required device and
click the device name
3. Click Ok
The Device Selection Box closes. The name of the device you chose
appears in the Device entry field.
Note: To enable drilling down the device hierarchy, you must highlight a
device. Folders that contain a large number of devices may take a
few moments to open.

Right Mouse Button Shortcuts

For fast use, PM Measurements & Alarms provides context-sensitive shortcuts
for the Edit, View and Applications menus that can be accessed by clicking the
right mouse button. Figure 9-9 shows these right-mouse menu options.
Figure 9-9: Right Mouse Button Shortcuts Menu
Table 9-9: Right-Mouse Menu Options
Option Description
Select all
Deselect all
Add
For descriptions of these options, see Table 9-6,
Edit/View PM Measurements & Alarms Menu Options,
on page 9-18.
Delete
Show Details
Clone*
* Device-dependent tab only
Viewing Table Item Details

You can request to view the details of any of the PM Measurements & Alarms
table item or items. This section provides an example of viewing details
procedure in the measurements table and describes the Definition Details
dialog box.

To View Details of Selected Table Rows
1. Select the measurements you want to view

Note: You need to select a table item or items to enable the Show Details
menu option.
2. From the PM Measurements & Alarms View menu, select
View
Show Details
or
Right-mouse click to open the right-mouse drop-down menu, as in
Figure 9-9 and select Show Details
or
Double-click a single table item
The Definition Details dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-10.
Definition Details
Display Area
(View) Previous (View) Next

Button Button
Action Buttons
Figure 9-10: Definition Details Dialog Box
Table 9-10 describes the Definition Details dialog box fields and buttons.

Table 9-10: Definition Details Dialog Box Fields
Definition Details Displays definition details for the selected items in plain text format.
Display Area
(View) Previous When clicked, this button enables viewing the previous page.
(View) Next When clicked, this button enables viewing the next page.
Note: For full description of common action buttons, see Table 9-8, on
page 9-24.
The measurement definition details displayed in the Definition Details dialog
box contain these additional details that are not present in the measurement
table:
Typemeasurement type (value or percentage)
NumeratorSQL expression for numerator
DenominatorSQL expression for denominator
Group Bygrouping list
3. To view more measurement details, click Next or scroll down
4. To view earlier details, click Previous or scroll up
5. To output Definition Details information, click Print
The Print dialog box opens.
For Print procedure description, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.
6. To exit the dialog box, click Close
The Definition Details dialog box closes.
Printing PM Measurements & Alarms Information

You can print PM Measurements & Alarms information using the standard
UNO Print dialog box.
That option is available from the PM Measurements & Alarms File menu,
where you can choose to:
Print all to print all entries in the currently active table
Print selected to print the selected table item(s) from the currently
active table
For Print procedure description, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.

User Defined Measurements

This section describes the procedures for defining user-defined measurements
(UDM) that you can perform while working in the Measurement tab.
Measurement tab function is described on page 9-21.
Measurement Tab
When working in the Measurement tab, you can view details of the current
measurements, and you can delete items from the Measurement table. If no
items are present in this table or if new measurements are required, you can add
new user defined measurements. For this purpose the Add User Defined
Measurement dialog box is provided.
To Open the Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box

1. To open a default dialog box that is clear of setup data, deselect all entries
in the tab table by selecting Deselect All from the PM Measurements &
Alarms Edit menu or from right mouse shortcuts
2. From the PM Measurements & Alarms Edit menu, select
Edit
Add
The Add User Defined Measurement dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-11.
Aggregation
(Level)
Statistical Record
(Measurement)
Type
(Measurement)
Name
Measurement
Parameters
Figure 9-11: Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box

User Defined Measurements UNO 2.16.3
Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box

When this dialog box opens, the entry fields where you specify the new
measurement parameters are empty, and the Ok and Apply buttons are
disabled. Table 9-11 describes the Add User Defined Measurement dialog box
fields.
Table 9-11: Add User Defined Measurement Dialog Box Fields
Aggregation (Level) When clicked, opens a drop-down list of the device aggregation levels (see
Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
Range: ACH, BTS, CARRIER, CBSC, CSM, ICTRKGRP, IWU, MCC,
MCCCE, MDM, SDU, SECTOR, VPU, XC
Statistical Record Lists the names of all the records available for the defined aggregation level
(see Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
(Measurement) Type When clicked, opens the drop-down list of value calculation methods to be
used, according to the specified Measurement Type.
Valuecalculates the measurement value as a ratio.
Percentagecalculates the measurement value as a ratio of the SQL
expressions that have been specified in the numerator and denominator
fields, multiplied by 100%.
Range: Value, Percentage

Default: None
(Measurement) Name Entry field to enter the name of the measurement to be monitored.
Measurement The entry fields in this cluster are the measurement parameters you need to
Parameters specify, according to the measurement type.
Numerator Required valid arithmetic SQL expressions.
Denominator Optional valid arithmetic SQL expressions.
Group By Names specific parameters of database table fields that are associated with an
aggregation level. This optional clause is included in the SQL statement. See
Description Text entered into this field appears in the Additional Text field as an attribute
of the generated alarm, when this measurement threshold is exceeded.
Note: For the description of common action buttons, see page 9-24.

Defining UDMs
Note: You must have administrator privileges to define UDMs.
To Define a New UDM
1. From the Aggregation drop-down list, choose the required aggregation

level
2. From the Statistical Record drop-down list, select a record
3. From the Measurement Type drop-down list, select the required type
4. In the Measurement Name field, enter the measurement name
5. In the Numerator field, enter the SQL arithmetic expression
6. In the Denominator field, enter the SQL arithmetic expression
At this stage, the Ok and Apply buttons are enabled.
7. In the Group By field, enter the list of fields (for definition, see
Table 9-11)
8. In the Description field, enter the required text
9. Click the Apply button to save changes or click OK to save and close the
dialog
If you have set up a measurement with parameters that are identical to a
Measurement table item that already exists, an error message appears, as
in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12: Existing Entry Error Message

The setup is completed. The new measurement is added to the
measurement table. The dialog box closes and you return to the
Measurement tab.

Figure 9-13 shows an example of the completed UDM definition.
Figure 9-13: User Defined Measurement Setup Example
Viewing and Editing UDMs

You can invoke the threshold setup dialog box for the purpose of viewing
and/or editing the threshold parameters.
To Open the Edit User Defined Measurement Dialog Box
1. From the Measurement tab table, select an item you want to edit
The selected item is highlighted.
Note: You can choose only one item for this menu option.
Edit
Edit/View
The Edit User Defined Measurement dialog box opens.

Edit User Defined Measurement Dialog Box

This dialog box is identical to the Add User Defined Measurement dialog box,
as in Figure 9-13, on page 9-32. These fields and buttons are disabled:
Aggregation
Statistical Record
Ok
Apply
You can only change the Measurement Type name and the four
measurement parameters.
To Edit UDM
3. From the Measurement Type drop-down list, choose a new option

The Ok and Apply buttons are enabled.
4. In the Measurement Name field, enter the name
5. In any parameter entry field, enter your changes as required
6. Click Ok to apply the edit
The item you edited is updated in the Measurement list. The dialog box
closes and you return to the Measurement tab.
View User Defined Measurement Dialog Box

You cannot edit a predefined PM measurement. When you select a predefined
measurement from the measurements list, and choose the Edit > Edit/View
menu option, the View UDM dialog box opens.
This dialog box is identical to the Add User Defined Measurement dialog box,
as in Figure 9-13, on page 9-32, but all entry fields and the Ok and Apply
buttons are disabled. Consequently, you can only view the measurement setup.
To close the View UDM dialog box, click Cancel.

Deleting UDMs
You can delete one or more items from the Measurement table.
To Delete UDM
1. From the Measurement table, select an item or items you want to delete
The selected item/s is/are highlighted.
Note: Shift-click to select contiguous items or control-click to select
non-contiguous items.
Edit
Delete
A confirm message appears, as in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-14: Delete Selected Entries Confirm Message
3. Click Yes to delete the items.

The table in the Measurement tab is updated. The item/s you deleted, is/are
removed from the table.
Caution: There is no second warning about this action and you cannot
reverse it. Therefore ensure that you are deleting only the
intended items.
Note: Menu options not available for this tab are: Actions: Clone, Long
Term Calculator.

Device-Independent Statistical Thresholds

This section describes the procedures you can perform while working in the
PM Measurements & Alarms Device Independent tab.
Device Independent Tab

In the Device Independent tab you can specify new device-independent
thresholds to be used for alarming. You can also view, edit and delete currently
defined thresholds. For the definition of device-independent statistical
thresholding, see Device-Independent Thresholding on page 9-10.
To Open Device-Independent Thresholding
From the PM Measurements & Alarms tabs in the main dialog box, select
Threshold Alarm
Device Independent
The Device Independent tab opens, as in Figure 9-15. The status bar reads
Device Independent Thresholding.
Threshold Alarm
(Parent) Tab
Active Tab
Thresholding
Tabs
Sort Button
Column Labels
Status Bar
Figure 9-15: Device Independent Tab

Device-Independent Statistical Thresholds UNO 2.16.3
In the example shown in Figure 9-15, the tab table contains the currently
defined device-independent threshold measurements. If the table shows no
rows of data, no thresholds have been defined.
Note: When no rows of data are present, you cannot adjust the column width.
Table 9-12 describes the Device Independent tab fields.
Table 9-12: Device Independent Tab Fields
Device This tab opens a dialog box for device-independent thresholding setup.
Independent Tab
Table Area Displays all current user-defined device-independent thresholds.
Column Labels Indicate the measurement parameters:
Aggregationname of a high level device that represents the required

aggregation level for the measurement (see Table 9-20, on page 9-82)
Statistical Recordname of a statistical record (see Table 9-20, on
page 9-82)
Measurementmeasurement name
IDID number for a measurement
Alarmingthe alarm state for the measurement: enabled (ON) or
disabled (OFF)
Descriptiondefinition of the thresholded alarm
Note: Menu options not available for this tab are: Actions: Clone, Long
Term Calculator.

Defining Device-Independent Thresholds

This section describes the device-independent thresholding procedure.
To Open Add Device-Independent Threshold Dialog Box
1. To open a default dialog box that is clear of setup data, deselect all entries
in the tab table by selecting Deselect All from the PM Measurements &
Alarms Edit menu or from the right mouse button shortcuts
Edit
Add
The Add Device Independent Threshold dialog box opens, as in

Figure 9-16.
Statistical Record Peg/Measurement
Aggregation
Alarm Text
Alarming On
Setup Data
Action Buttons Severity
Figure 9-16: Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box
All the entry fields are empty, disabled or show the default (All) if all the items
in the Device Independent tab are deselected, or if no thresholds have been
defined and the Device Independent table is empty.

Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box

Table 9-13 describes the Add Device Independent Threshold dialog box fields
and buttons.
Table 9-13: Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box Fields
Aggregation When clicked, a drop-down list opens listing the device aggregation levels (see
Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
Range: ACH, BTS, CARRIER, CBSC, CSM, ICTRKGRP, IWU, MCC, MCCCE,
MDM, SDU, SECTOR, VPU, XC
Statistical Record When clicked, a drop-down list opens listing all the records available for the
defined Aggregation level (see Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
Peg/Measurement Drop-down list of the defined measurements corresponding to the selected Statisti-
cal Record.
Alarm Text Entry field to specify the alarm text.
Alarming On When checked, enables alarms to be generated for the specified measurement.
Setup Data Data entries in the Time Period and threshold value types fields define additional
threshold parameters.
Error Rate Combined with Device Direction and User Defined Base Value, the Mean Error
Rate specifies thresholds based on the deviation of counters value from either a
defined Base Value or from the system calculated Average.
Range: 0.01 to 0.50 (1% to 50%)
Default: None
Base Value Combined with Device Direction and Error Rate, this value specifies a threshold
based on deviation of a counters value from a Base Value. The Base Value defines
the Base Value for the measurement of counter values deviation.
Note: Base Value is optional. If no Base Value is specified, the counters
history-based Average is used as the Base Value.
Deviation Direction Specifies the direction in which deviation from the defined base value is measured
for a threshold.

Table 9-13: Add Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
More:
If the measurement value is greater than the Base Value plus the permissible
deviation, an alarm is generated.
If the value is smaller than the Base Value minus the permissible deviation, no
alarm is generated.
Less:
If the measurement value is smaller than the Base Value minus the permissible
deviation, an alarm is generated.
If the value is greater than the Base Value, no alarm is generated.
Both:
If the measurement value is smaller than the Base Value minus the permissible
deviation, or greater than the defined Base Value plus the permissible deviation,
an alarm is generated.
Range: More, Less, Both
Default: Both
Minimum Value Defines the minimum allowable value for the measurement. If the measurements
value drops below the Minimum Value, an alarm is generated.
Maximum Value Defines the maximum allowable value for the measurement. If the measurements
value rises above the Maximum Value, an alarm is generated.
Severity When checked, defines Minor or Major alarm Severity level.
Range: Minor, Major

Default: Minor
Note: For the description of action buttons, see Table 9-8, on page 9-24.
To Add a New Device-Independent Threshold
1. From the Aggregation drop-down list, choose the aggregation level

The Statistical Record list is enabled.
2. From the Statistical Record drop-down list, choose the required
statistical record
The defined measurements corresponding to the selected statistical record
show in the Peg/Measurement list.

3. From the Peg/Measurement drop-down list, choose the

required measurement
The alarm text appears in the Alarm Text field and the Alarming ON check
button is enabled.
Note: If no measurements are available for the statistical record you

selected from the Peg/Measurement drop-down list, you cannot
proceed with defining the threshold. You must then get the
measurement definition, see Defining UDMs on page 9-31.
4. To enable alarming, check the Alarming On check button
Threshold definition fields are enabled.
Note: If the Alarming On button is not checked, you cannot define

any thresholds.
5. In at least one of the following fields:
Error Rate/Base Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
enter a value for each of the three time periods: Work Day, Non-Work Day
and Night.
Important: MinMax values and Error Rate/Base values are mutually

exclusive. If you define both, an error message shows. This is
because MinMax values are absolute, and the Error Rate/Base
values are relative (statistical) values (see page 9-10).
6. If you defined an Error Rate value for each Time Period, you can
optionally enter a Base Value for each of the same time periods: Work
Day, Non-Work Day and Night.

Note: The current valid Work and Non-Work Day and Night time periods
are those which are defined in the Date/Time Setup (see
Date/Time Setup for Thresholding on page 9-69). If you have
not set these up, default time definitions will be used: Saturday and
Sunday for Non-Work Days; hours 23:00 to 06:00 for Night.
When you enter a value in the Base Value fields, you must also enter a
value in the Error Rate field.
7. If you entered an Error Rate value, select a Deviation Direction for
each of the three time periods. From the drop-down menu, select one of
these options:
More
Less
Both
Note: Deviation Direction defines the direction of the deviation from the
user defined Base Value that generates the alarms. In other words,
if the value of the counter deviates from the user defined Base
Value in the specified direction, an alarm is generated.
Only when you enter the Error Rate values, the Apply button is enabled.
8. From the Severity field, click Minor or Major button to select the required
alarm severity
The generated alarm will have the severity level that you define. Your
setup is now completed.
9. Click Apply to add the new threshold definition to the Device

Independent table, while remaining in the current dialog box
You can continue to add more new thresholds.
10. When done, click Ok to exit the dialog box
The Add Threshold dialog box closes. The new threshold is added to the
Device Independent table.

Error and Confirm Messages

If you have not defined the threshold parameters correctly, an error message
appears, as in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17: Exclusive Parameters Error Message
If you have defined incorrect (out of range) values, the error message appears,
as in Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-18: Incorrect Value Error Message
If you have set up a threshold for a measurement that has an identical definition
to a threshold already existing on the same measurement, a confirm message
appears, as in Figure 9-19. The reason is that you cannot define more than one
device independent threshold for the same measurement.
Figure 9-19: Overwrite Existing Entry Confirm Message
For all of the above messages, click Ok or Yes, as required, perform the
required action and click Ok, to exit the Add Device Independent Threshold
dialog box.

Editing Device-Independent Thresholds

This section describes the actions you can perform after you have set
up thresholds.
You can invoke the Edit Device Independent Threshold dialog box for the
purpose of viewing and/or editing the threshold setup. In this dialog box
you can:
Switch the alarming on or off
Enter different setup data
Change the severity level for alarming
To Open the Edit Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box
1. From the Device Independent tab table (Figure 9-15), select an item you
want to edit
The item you selected is highlighted.
Edit
Edit/View
The Edit Device Independent Threshold dialog box appears.
Edit Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box

When the Edit Device Independent Threshold dialog box opens, as in
Figure 9-20, on page 9-44, typically only the setup data panel is enabled for
modifying the threshold parameters. You cannot change the measurement
definition. If the Alarming is off, the setup panel is disabled as well and you can
only view the threshold information, but you cannot edit it.
Important: If you uncheck the Alarming On button, the setup panel is

disabled. If you then apply this change, the Alarming column text
in the Device Independent thresholds table changes from ON to
OFF. To modify the threshold again, activate the alarming again
by checking the Alarming On button.

Figure 9-20 shows the Edit Device Independent Threshold dialog box for the
selected Device Independent table item.
Threshold
Definition Data
(Disabled)
Alarming and
Setup Data
(Enabled)
Apply Buttons
(Disabled)
Figure 9-20: Edit Device Independent Threshold Dialog Box
This procedure describes how to edit threshold definitions when the Alarming
is on, and when it is off.
To Edit Device-Independent Threshold Definition
1. Make sure the Alarming On check button is enabled

The setup data panel and the Ok and Apply buttons are enabled. You can
proceed with modifying the setup as required.
2. In the setup data panel, change any or all parameters as required
When you enter the first setup change, the Ok and Apply buttons are
enabled.
3. If required, change the Severity level, by clicking Minor or Major
4. Click Ok to apply changes.
The dialog box closes and the edited threshold appears in the updated
Device Independent tab.

Deleting Device-Independent Thresholds

You can delete one or more items from the thresholds table.
To Delete Device-Independent Thresholds
1. In the Device Independent tab table (Figure 9-15), select the item(s) you
want to delete
The selected item/s is/are highlighted.
Note: Shift-click to select contiguous items or control-click to select
multiple non-contiguous items.
Edit
Delete
A confirm message appears, as in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21: Delete Selected Entries Confirm Message
3. Click Yes
The thresholds table in the Device Independent tab is updated. The deleted
items are removed from the table.
Viewing Device-Independent Thresholds

You can view the thresholds from the Device Independent tab table, using the
Edit Device Independent Threshold dialog box (see page 9-43).

Device-Dependent Statistical Thresholds UNO 2.16.3
Device-Dependent Statistical Thresholds

PM Measurements & Alarms Device Dependent tab.
Device Dependent Tab

In the Device Dependent tab you can specify new device-dependent thresholds
to be used for alarming. You can also view, edit, clone and delete currently
defined thresholds. For the definition of device-dependent statistical
thresholding, see Device-Dependent Thresholding on page 9-10.
To Open Device-Dependent Thresholding
From the PM Measurements & Alarms tabs, select
Threshold Alarm
Device Dependent
The Device Dependent tab appears, as in Figure 9-22. The status bar reads
Device Dependent Thresholding
Device
Dependent Tab
Column Labels
Table Area
Figure 9-22: Device Dependent Tab
Note: Menu options not available for this tab are: Actions: Long
Term Calculator.

Table 9-14 describes the Device Dependent tab fields.
Table 9-14: Device Dependent Tab Fields
Device This tab opens a dialog box for device dependent thresholding setup.
Dependent Tab
Table Area Displays current user-defined device dependent thresholds.
Column Labels Indicate the measurement parameters: Agent, Device, Aggregation, Statistical Record,
Measurement, ID, Alarming, Description. Of these, only the Agent and Device col-
umns are new, the other columns appear as in the Device Independent tab, see Table
9-12, on page 9-36
Agentname of the agent that contains the thresholded device
Devicename of the thresholded device
Defining Device-Dependent Thresholds
To Open Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box
1. In the Device Dependent tab (Figure 9-22), deselect all items in the table
Edit
Add
The Add Device Dependent Threshold dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-23, on
page 9-48.
The Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box resembles the Add Device
Independent Threshold. Two fields have been added to provide the
device-related information: Agent and Device.
The Average button that is unique to this dialog box, is added to the common
action buttons. See Table 9-15.

Figure 9-23 shows the Add Device Dependent Threshold dialog box.
Agent
Drop-Down
List
Device Name
Entry Field
Device Browse
Button
Average
Action Button
Figure 9-23: Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box
Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box

Table 9-15 describes the fields and buttons specific to the Add Device
Dependent Threshold dialog box.
Table 9-15: Add Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box Fields
Agent This drop-down list defines the scope of your choice of devices for the procedure.
The list lets you choose to view devices on all the agents currently available on your
UNO host (all) or to view devices on a specific agent.
Range: All, agent name
Default: All
Device (Name) When the device is selected in the Device Selection dialog box, the field shows the
selected device name.
Device Browse When clicked, this browse button opens the Device Selection dialog box, where you
Button (Unlabeled) can search for the required device. See Figure 9-8, on page 9-25.
Average This special action button opens the Moving Average/Standard Deviation display
window which shows a report of these statistical values for the device and the mea-
surement you defined. See Figure 9-24, on page 9-53.

To Add a New Device-Dependent Threshold
1. From the Agent drop-down list, select an agent

2. In the Device field, click on the Browse button to choose a device
The Device Selection dialog box opens. Typically, this dialog box shows
the collapsed System Tree for the agent that you selected.
3. In the Device Selection dialog box choose the required device from the
devices directory on the agent you defined
Note: This is a standard UNO device selection dialog box. To drill down
the System Tree, click on the device name to highlight it and then
click on the checkbox next to the folder icon.
The device name appears in the Device field of the Add Device Dependent
Threshold dialog box. Depending on the device that you select, the
required aggregation level appears in the Aggregation drop-down list.
The drop-down statistical record list is enabled.

5. From the Statistical Record drop-down list, choose the required
statistical record
The corresponding measurements show in the Peg/Measurement list.
6. From the Peg/Measurement drop-down list, choose the required
measurement
The alarm text for the chosen measurement automatically appears in the
Alarm Text field and the Alarming ON check button is enabled.

7. To enable alarming, check the Alarming On check button

When the Alarming ON button is checked, threshold definition fields are
enabled. If the Alarming On button is unchecked, you cannot define any
thresholds.
Note: If the Alarming On button is unchecked, you cannot define any

thresholds.
8. In at least one of the following fields:
Error Rate/Base Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
enter a value for each of the three time periods: Work Day, Non-Work Day
and Night.
Important: MinMax values and Error Rate/Base values are mutually

exclusive. If you define both, an error message shows. This is
because MinMax values are absolute, and the Error Rate/Base
values are relative (statistical) values(see page 9-10).
9. If you defined an Error Rate value for each Time Period, you can
optionally enter a Base Value for each of the same time periods: Work
Day, Non-Work Day and Night.
Note: The current valid Work and Non-Work Day and Night time periods
are those which are defined in the Date/Time Setup, see
Date/Time Setup for Thresholding on page 9-69. If you have not
set these up, default time definitions will be used: Saturday and
Sunday for Non-Work Days; hours 23:00 to 06:00 for Night Time.
When you enter a value in the Base Value fields, you must also enter a
value in the Error Rate field.

10. If you entered a Error Rate value, select a Deviation Direction for each
of the three time periods. From the drop-down menu, select one of these
options:
More
Less
Both
Note: Deviation Direction defines the direction of the deviation from the
user defined Base Value that generates the alarms. In other words,
if the value of the counter deviates from the user defined Base
Value in the specified direction, an alarm is generated.
Only when you enter the Error Rate values, the Apply button is enabled.
11. From the Severity field, click Minor or Major button to select the required
alarm severity
The generated alarm will have the severity level that you define. Your
setup is now completed.
12. Click Apply to add the new threshold definition to the Device Dependent
table, while remaining in the current dialog box
You can continue to add more new thresholds.
13. When done, click Ok to exit the dialog box
The Add Threshold dialog box closes The new threshold is added to the
Device Dependent tab table.
Error messages appear:
If your threshold definition is not complete or incorrect, or
If your threshold definition is identical to another threshold, or
If no data is available for the measurement
See Error and Confirm Messages on page 9-42.

Viewing Statistical Values

This section describes how you can view statistics for the newly
defined threshold.
To View Statistical Values Report
In the Add Device Dependent Threshold, click the Average button

The Moving Average/Standard Deviation Display appears, showing the
values for the new threshold that you defined, as in Figure 9-24, on
page 9-53
Moving Average/Standard Deviation Display

The display presents a table of Average and Standard Deviation values for each
half-hourly data collection period for both for work and non-work days, in
separate columns.
This window is in the standard Definition Details/Report format, as described
in Figure 9-10, on page 9-27. You can also print out this report. For printing
procedure, see Printing PM Measurements & Alarms Information on
page 9-28.
Note: If no Average statistics are available on this threshold, an error message
appears.
Figure 9-24 shows the statistics report for the current threshold definition.

Add Device Dependent Moving Average/Standard

Threshold Dialog Box Deviation Display
Average Button
Data Work Day Non-Work Day
Collection
Periods
Figure 9-24: Moving Average/Standard Deviation Display

Cloning Device-Dependent Thresholds

Viewing/Editing, deleting and viewing definition details, setting date/time,
invoking PM Statistics Graphs and setting report outputs are the same for
device dependent thresholds as for all other PM Measurements & Alarms tab
tables. However, unlike other items, the device dependent thresholds can be
cloned.
The PM Measurements & Alarms cloning function allows the threshold setup
to be created only once and then to be applied to a large set of instances. This
way you can quickly generate a set of identical thresholds to work on several
devices, without having to manually enter the same data for each device
dependent threshold.
To Open Clone Threshold Dialog Box
1. From the Device Dependent tab table (Figure 9-22), select an item you
want to clone
Note: You can select only one item at a time.
2. From the PM Measurements & Alarms Actions menu, select
Actions
Clone
The Clone Threshold dialog box appears, as in Figure 9-25, on page 9-55.
Clone Threshold Dialog Box

The upper part of the Clone Threshold dialog box is identical to the upper part
of the Add Device Dependent Threshold dialog box. In the Target Device panel
you can define the destination of the new threshold.
The Source Device/Measurement panel, which contains the definition of the
threshold you selected for cloning, is disabled (grayed out). This is because you
want to retain exactly the same definition for the new, cloned threshold.
Figure 9-25, on page 9-55 shows the Clone Threshold dialog box as it opens,
with the source device/measurement which you have selected from the Device
Dependent tab table.

Source Device/
Measurement
Panel
Target Device
Panel
Action Buttons
Figure 9-25: Clone Threshold Dialog Box
Table 9-16 describes the Clone Threshold dialog box fields.
Table 9-16: Clone Threshold Dialog Box Fields
Source This panel contains the threshold definition parameters of the threshold you
Device/Measurement selected for cloning.
Agent
Device
Device Browse Button

For field descriptions, see Table 9-15, on page 9-48.
Aggregation
Statistical Record
Peg/Measurement
Alarm Text
Target Device This panel contains the destination and alarm state parameters for the cloned
threshold.

Table 9-16: Clone Threshold Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
Agent When clicked, opens a drop-down list where you can select the target
agent(s) for the cloned threshold.
Default: All
Device (Name) When the device is selected in the Device Selection dialog box, the field
shows the selected device name. A valid target device must be either:
of the same device class, or
a device class that contains the source device (the device dependent
threshold was defined for)
For example: If the original device dependent threshold was defined for a
MDM device, then the target device must be either an CARRIER device or
higher (that is: BTS or CBSC, in ascending order).
Device Browse Button When clicked, this browse button opens the Device Selection dialog box,
where you can search for the required target device. See Figure 9-8, on
page 9-25.
Alarm State When the Alarming On button is checked, alarms can be generated on the
cloned threshold.
Note: For the description of action buttons, see Table 9-8, on page 9-24.
Defining Target Device for Cloned Threshold
To Clone Device Dependent Thresholds
1. In the Target Device panel Agent drop-down list, select the agent
2. In the Device field, click on the Device Browse Button to search for the
target device
Device Selection Box dialog opens, displaying a collapsed device
directory, with only the agent you defined showing.
3. Click the agent directory contents button (the plus box) to open the next
device level.
4. Continue until you find the target device you require, as described the
device selection procedure on page 9-24.
The selected device is highlighted.

5. Click Ok to apply your selection

The Device Selection Box dialog box closes. The Clone Threshold dialog
box Device field now displays the target device for the cloned threshold.
The Ok and Apply action buttons in the Clone Threshold dialog box
are enabled.
6. In the Alarm State field, check or uncheck the Alarming On button to set
the alarming on or off as required
7. Click Apply to update the table while remaining in the dialog, and
continue defining new threshold clones
or
8. Click Ok to exit the dialog
The Clone Device Dependent Threshold dialog box closes. The new
threshold appears in the Device Dependent table and in the
Measurement table.
Invalid Target Error Message

If you have defined an invalid target device: when you click Apply or Ok, an
error message appears, as in the Figure 9-26 example.
Figure 9-26: Invalid Target Device Error Message Example
You need to redefine the target device in the Device field. See To Clone
Device Dependent Thresholds on page 9-56, steps 2-4.
Figure 9-27 shows an example Clone Device Dependent Threshold setup.

Figure 9-27: Clone Threshold Setup Example
The Source Device field shows CBSC-3; the Target Device field shows
CBSC-1. The threshold has been cloned for use on CBSC-1.
Editing Device-Dependent Thresholds

You can invoke a dialog box for viewing or editing threshold definitions. To
edit a threshold, you need to open the Edit Device Dependent dialog box.
To Open the Edit Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box
1. From the Device Dependent tab thresholds table (Figure 9-22), select an
item you want to edit
Edit
Edit/View
The Edit Device Dependent Threshold dialog box appears, as in

Figure 9-28.

Edit Device-Dependent Threshold Dialog Box

When the Edit Device Dependent Threshold dialog box opens:
The setup data panel is enabled for modifying the threshold parameters
Ok and Apply action buttons are disabled until you enter a change in the setup.
Figure 9-28: Edit Device-Dependent Threshold Dialog Box
This dialogs fields and buttons are identical to the Add Device Dependent
Threshold dialog box. For description, see Table 9-15, on page 9-48.
To Edit the Device-Dependent Threshold Setup
1. In the Edit Device Dependent Threshold dialog box, change the setup
values as required
The Ok and Apply buttons are enabled.
2. Uncheck the Alarming On button
The setup data panel is disabled.
Note: If you then apply this change, the Alarming column text in the
Dependent Thresholds table changes from ON to OFF.
3. When required, modify the threshold again or activate alarming again by
checking the Alarming On button.
4. Click Apply
The threshold definition is updated in the Device Dependent tab.

Disabling Alarms on a Device UNO 2.16.3
Deleting Device-Dependent Thresholds

To delete one or several thresholds from the Device Dependent table, see the
procedure described in Deleting Device-Independent Thresholds on
page 9-45.
Viewing Device-Dependent Thresholds

You can view device-dependent threshold definitions from:
Device Dependent tab
Measurement tab
When viewing device-dependent thresholds in the Measurement tab, you can
only view, but you cannot edit the setup.
Disabling Alarms on a Device

Disable Alarming tab.
Unchecking the Alarming On button in the Add/Edit Device Independent
Threshold dialog disables alarming for all devices of a type you selected for a
threshold. Some devices may require a different alarm definition or may
require to have the alarming off, because they are non-standard. For this
purpose, PM Measurements & Alarms provides you with an option to turn off
the alarming on a specific device.
To perform this action you need to open the Disable Alarming tab, which is the
third tab found under the Threshold Alarm parent tab.

To Open Disable Alarming Tab
From the PM Measurements & Alarms tabs in the main

dialog, select
Threshold Alarm
Disable Alarming
The tab opens. The status bar reads Disable Statistical Alarming for
Devices. If no measurements have been defined for disabled alarming,
the table is empty.
Figure 9-29 shows an example of the Disable Alarming tab with a table of
items on which the alarming has been disabled.
Figure 9-29: Disable Alarming Tab
Disable Alarming Tab

The columns of the Disable Alarming tab are the same as the Device
Dependent tab, except there is no Alarming column in the table. See Device
Dependent Tab Fields on page 9-47.
Note: Menu options not available for this tab are: Edit: Edit/View and
Actions: Clone, Long Term Calculator.

Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box

This section describes the add disable alarm setup procedure.
To Open Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box
1. In the Disable Alarming tab, click on a table item

Note: You can choose only one measurement.
Edit
Add
The Add Disable Alarm Definition dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-30.
Agent Device Entry Field Browse Button
Aggregation
Statistical Record
Action Buttons
Peg/Measurement
Figure 9-30: Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box
Note: If you remove selection from all the items in the Disable Alarm tab
table before selecting Add:
The Add Disable Alarming Definition dialog box opens when all of
its fields are empty
The Agent drop-down list button shows the default option - All

Table 9-17 describes the Add Disable Alarm Definition dialog box fields
and buttons.
Table 9-17: Add Disable Alarm Definition Dialog Box Fields
Agent This drop-down list defines the scope of your choice of

devices for the procedure. The list lets you choose to view
devices on all the agents currently available on your UNO
host (all) or to view devices on a specific agent.
Default: All
Device When the device is selected in the Device Selection dialog

box, the field shows the selected device name.
Device Browse When clicked, this browse button opens the Device Selec-
Button tion dialog box, where you can search for the required
device. See Figure 9-8, on page 9-25.
Aggregation This button displays the required measurement aggrega-

tion level for the selected device (see Table 9-20, on
page 9-82).
Statistical Record This drop-down list contains all the statistical records cur-
rent for the aggregation level that you selected (see Table
9-20, on page 9-82).
Peg/Measurement This drop-down list contains all the measurements for the
aggregation level and the statistical record you selected.
When you choose a measurement, the Ok and Apply but-
tons are enabled so you can implement your setup.
Note: Only when there is a measurement for the record,
you can proceed with the setup.
Note: For the common action buttons description, see Standard Action
Buttons on page 9-24.

Disabling Alarming
This section provides a procedure for adding a disable alarm definition.
To Define Disabling Alarming on a Device

2. In the Device field, click the Device Browse Button
The Device Selection Box opens, displaying the collapsed System Tree for
the agent you selected.
3. In the Device Selection Box, choose the required device
4. When done, click Ok
The Device Selection Box closes. The selected device name appears in the
Device entry field. The Aggregation button is disabled and the
aggregation level name appears on the button face.
5. From the Statistical Record drop-down list, select the required record
6. From the Peg/Measurement drop-down list, select the required peg
The Ok and Apply action buttons are enabled.
Note: If no measurements are defined for the statistical record and the
aggregation level you chose, the Peg/measurement list is empty
and the Ok and Apply buttons remain disabled (grayed out). This
means that you cannot proceed with the current definition. Choose
another statistical record.
7. Click Apply to continue defining disabling alarming on another device
and measurements
8. When done, click Ok to exit the dialog
The Add Disable Alarm Definition dialog box closes and the new
definition is added to the Disable Alarming tab table, as in Figure 9-31, on
page 9-65.
Important: The Disable Alarming definition overrides any device-

independent threshold definition for the measurement.
Consequently, even when the alarming is enabled for the
measurement in the Device Independent tab, the alarming will
stay disabled for the device.

Figure 9-31 shows the updated Disable Alarming tab.
New Disable
Alarm
Definition
Figure 9-31: Disable Alarming Tab with Added Definition
Reversing Disable Alarming

You may have no need for a definition or require to change it, for example
re-enable alarming for the selected measurement on the same device. Since the
Disable Alarming tab does not permit reversal of current definitions, you have
to delete the item from the table. This is the only way to re-enable Alarming.
To Delete a Disable Alarming Definition
1. From the Disable Alarming table, select an item or items to delete

2. In the PM Measurements & Alarms Edit menu, select
Edit
Delete
The selected item is deleted from the Disable Alarming table.

Consequently, alarming is enabled again for this measurement.
The Measurement tab table is updated.

Viewing PM Statistics (For MM License No. 3 User) UNO 2.16.3
Viewing PM Statistics (For MM License No. 3 User)

Important: To use the PM Statistics Graphs, you need to have the UNO
Market Manager Optional Licence No. 3. If you only have the
UNO Element Manager (the basic) configuration installed, the
PM Statistics Graphs option in the PM Measurements &
Alarms Manager Applications menu as well as the PM Statistics
Graphs application icon in the UNO application launcher, appear
grayed out/are disabled.
Purposes
You can request to view PM measurements in the form of a graph. A quick
visual reference can be helpful because it reduces the time you need to identify
and analyze problems occurring in devices.
Whenever you observe a PM measurement malfunction, the PM Statistics
Graphs application can be used to:
Determine if the observed problem persists over a period of time
Compare PM statistics for different cells/sectors or sampling periods
The PM Statistics Graphs application uses two kinds of PM Measurements &
Alarms sources:
Device dependent PM measurements
Measurements you defined for long term storage (see PM Statistics
Graphs in Long Term PM Storage. PM Enhanced Applications. 4-23)
Invoking PM Statistics Display

Although it is possible to open the PM Statistics Graphs from the UNO
application launcher, you can invoke this application directly from PM
Measurements & Alarms and you can request to view specific measurement(s).
You can select multiple items to view. There are two ways to invoke the graphs:
From PM Measurements & Alarms Applications menu
From the right mouse button shortcuts menu

To Invoke PM Statistics Graphs
1. From the PM Measurements & Alarms Device Dependent tab table

(Figure 9-22), select the measurement(s) you want to view as a PM
Statistics graphical display
The selected item(s) is(are) highlighted.
2. From the PM Measurements & Alarms Applications menu, select
Applications
or
in the Device Dependent tab, right-mouse click on the selected item(s) and
choose PM Statistics Graphs
The PM Statistics Display dialog box appears, showing the graph that
represents the statistics for the measurement(s) you selected, as in
Note: Loading of the requested data may take a few minutes. If no data
is available for statistics on the selected measurement(s), the graph
display area is empty. A message may appear to inform you why
no graph appears.
Figure 9-32 shows the PM Measurements & Alarms Device Dependent tab
where the requested measurement is highlighted, and the invoked PM
statistics display.
When the PM Statistics Display window is active, you can use the View menu
options to display the types of statistical values that are relevant to your
analysis. This example shows:
Measurement behavior over 24 hours (marked as green lines)
Moving Average values (marked as gray diamonds on a green line)

Viewing PM Statistics (For MM License No. 3 User) UNO 2.16.3
Requested
Measurement
Source Type Selected Selected Display Area Graph Legend

for Graph Data Measurement Device
Figure 9-32: PM Statistics Display on Device Dependent Peg
For detailed information on PM Statistics Display use and options, see PM

Statistics Graphs. PM Enhanced Applications.

Date/Time Setup for Thresholding

In the Date/Time Setup dialog box you configure the time parameters that
determine when the device dependent and device independent thresholds are to
be activated.
When you enter Time Period values in the Data Setup panel, in the Add
Threshold dialog box, (whether device dependent or independent), as in
Figure 9-16, on page 9-37, you are using the Date/Time definitions that are
current in the Date/Time Setup dialog.
Once set up, the same Date/Time setup is valid for both device dependent and
device independent thresholds.
To Open Date/Time Setup
From the PM Measurements & Alarms Applications menu, select
Applications
Date/Time Setup
The Date/Time Setup dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-33. The last setup
appears as the current default. In this example, the Date/Time setup has
not been defined. The default for month and year is the current month.
Non-Work Days
(Month and Year
Browse Arrows)
Non-Work
Weekdays Non-Work Days
(Calendar)
Non-Work
Date/Time
Setup
Reset Report
Figure 9-33: Date/Time Setup Dialog Box

Date/Time Setup for Thresholding UNO 2.16.3
Date/Time Setup Dialog Box

Table 9-18 describes the Date/Time dialog box fields and buttons.
Table 9-18: Date/Time Setup Dialog Box Fields
Non-Work This panel lets you define the non-work days of the week. Typically these are days
Weekdays that are repeatedly defined for the same day of the week every week (weekend days),
as opposed to specific dates that may fall on varying days of the week.
A checked day of the week is a defined Non-Work Weekday.
In the Calendar, the defined Non-Work Weekday is highlighted in red.
The definition applies to Non-Work Weekdays for all months and years preceding and
following the currently displaying month and year, until the setup is changed (see the
description of the Reset button). You can browse the calendar to verify that.
Range: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
Default: Saturday and Sunday or last used
Non-Work Days This panel lets you:

View the days setup in a calendar format
Browse the month and year fields
Define unique non-work days by date
Month You can use the left-right browse arrows to view any month in the calendar. While
you browse the Month, the Year field does not change.
Range: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Current month or last used
Year You can use the left-right browse arrows to view any year in the calendar. While you
browse the Year, the Month field does not change.
Range: Any (Non negative number)
Default: Current year or last used

Table 9-18: Date/Time Setup Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
Calendar Shows the current month (as defined in the Month and Year fields) in a calendar for-
mat. Non-work weekdays that you defined in the Non-Work Weekdays panel are
highlighted in red. The calendar allows you to define the Non-Work Days by date.
Typically, these days are specific, unique dates (for example holidays that fall on a
day that is usually defined as a workday).
A Non-Work Day is selected by clicking on the required date. The selected date is
highlighted in red. You can deselect the date by clicking again.
Note: A Non-Work Day definition applies to the selected date only.
Non-Work Lets you define the time of night to be considered as non-work time for the work days
Date/Night Time of the week. You can enter the time values manually or by scrolling the up-down
Setup arrows next to the fields.
Note: Hours and minutes are defined separately. Scrolling will affect only the field
where your cursor is currently placed.
Begin Night at Lets you define the beginning of non-work night period for the work weekdays that
you defined.
Range: 00:00-24:59
Default: 23:00, last used
End Night at Lets you define the end of non-work night period for the work weekdays that you
defined.
Range: 00:00-24:59
Default: 06:00, last used
Reset When clicked, this special action button changes to the last used setup or to the
default setup.
Report When clicked, this special action button lets you view the current Date/Time setup in
the standard report window format.

Defining Time Parameters for Thresholding

This section describes the Date/Time setup procedure.
To Define Time Parameters for Thresholding
1. In the Non-Work Weekdays panel, click the checkbox for the day(s) you
want to define as a non-working day(s)
A check mark appears in the checkbox. In the calendar, the days you
defined are highlighted in red.
2. In the Non-Work Days panel Month field, browse the left-right arrows to
display the month you want to set up
3. In the Non-Work Days panel Year field, browse the left-right arrows to
display the year you want to set up
The Calendar part of the panel shows the month and year you selected.
Note: The panel may be already showing the required month and year.
The default is last setup or the month/year when the Date/Time
setup dialog box is invoked.
4. In the Non-Work Days panel display for the current month (the
Calendar), click on the date(s) you want to define as a non-work day
The selected date/s is/are highlighted in red.
If additional non-work days for other months need to be defined, click
the month field arrow to display the required month and then select the
required date(s).
Note: You can deselect a non-work day by clicking on the date again. The
deselected date shows in black and is defined as a workday.
5. In the Non-Work Date/Night Time Setup panel, place your cursor in the
Begin Night at hour field and click to activate the field
6. Scroll the up-down arrow to define or manually enter the required hour
7. Place your cursor in the Begin Night at minutes field and click. Define
the minutes setup in the same way as you did with hours.
8. Repeat the same action in the End Night at hour and minutes fields.
9. Click Apply and Report to view the present setup
or click Ok to apply the setup and exit the dialog

Figure 9-34 shows an example of a completed Date/Time setup.
Non-Work
Weekday Dates for
Current Month
Non-Work
Weekdays
Non-Work Day
Night Period
Definition
Report Button
Figure 9-34: Date/Time Setup Example
Non-Work Weekdays that are defined in this example are two typical
weekend days. The definition applies to all the weekends that precede
and follow the current week, until the setup is reset.
Non-Work Weekday dates for the current month are displayed in the
calendar.
The Non-Work day that is defined is Monday, the 25th of December
2000. As this is a holiday date for Christmas Day 2000, the definition
applies for this date only.
The night period is defined as beginning at 23:00 hours and ending at
06:00 hours. This definition applies to all the night periods that follow,
until the setup is reset.

Viewing Current Date/Time Setup

You can view and output the setup information, using the Report button.
To View a Date/Time Setup Report
1. In the Date/Time Setup dialog box, click the Report button

The Date/Time Setup Report dialog box opens, as in Figure 9-35, showing
the three parameters that you defined. For reference, see Figure 9-34, on
page 9-73.
Non-Work
Weekdays
Non-Work Days
Non-Work
Date/Night Time
Figure 9-35: Date/Time Setup Report Example
2. To output the report, click the Print button

The Print dialog box opens. For printing information, see Print Dialog
Box on page 2-31.
3. To exit the Report dialog, click Close
Note: For description of the Report type dialog box, see Figure 9-10, on
page 9-27.

Multiple Item Reports

PM Measurements & Alarms enables you to request and output detailed lists of
every kind of threshold or measurement, according to parameters that you
define for the output. A report enables you to quickly scroll through long lists
and view a full set of parameters that were configured for each item, without
entering the View/Edit or Show Details dialogs for each measurement.
This section describes how to configure a report output using the Report Setup
dialog box.
To Open the Report Setup Dialog Box
From the PM Measurements & Alarms Applications menu, select
Applications
Report Setup
The Report Setup dialog box opens.

Figure 9-36 shows the Report Setup dialog box as it opens.
Report Sources List Agent Device Device Browse
Button
Sort By
Aggregation
Statistical
Record
Peg/Measurement
Figure 9-36: Report Setup Dialog Box - Default State
Note: Button faces that open drop-down lists, show the default: All.

Multiple Item Reports UNO 2.16.3
Report Setup Dialog Box

Table 9-19 describes the Report Setup dialog box fields and buttons.
Table 9-19: Report Setup Dialog Box Fields and Buttons
Report Sources Lists the source categories that are available for setting up a report:
List All
User Measurement Definition
Device Independent Thresholding
Device Dependent Thresholding
Disable Statistical Alarming For Devices
Long Term Storage Definition
These source categories are the names of the PM Measurements & Alarms function
tabs. Other report setup parameters in the dialog box are enabled or disabled
according to this basic parameter.
Agent Lets you select the agent from which you choose the device(s) for the report.
Range: All, name of agent

Default: All
Device When the device is selected in the Device Selection dialog box, the field shows the
selected device name.
Device Browse When clicked, this browse button opens the Device Selection dialog box, where
Button you can search for the required device on an agent you selected from the Agent list.
Sort By You can sort the report data by:

Measurement
Device
Aggregation Lets you define the aggregation level (see Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
Range: ACH, BTS, CARRIER, CBSC, CSM, ICTRKGRP, IWU, MCC, MCCCE,
MDM, SDU, SECTOR, VPU, XC
Default: All

Table 9-19: Report Setup Dialog Box Fields and Buttons (Cont.)
Statistical Record This drop-down list contains the statistical records current for the aggregation level
that you selected (see Table 9-20, on page 9-82).
Range: All, name of record

Default: All
Peg/Measurement This drop-down list contains all the measurements for the aggregation level and the
statistical record you selected. When you choose a measurement, the Ok and Apply
buttons are enabled so you can implement your setup.
Range: All, name of measurement

Default: All
Note: You do not have to select a measurement to proceed with the setup.
Note: For the description of common action buttons in this dialog, see
Standard Action Buttons on page 9-24.
Setting Up Reports
The report setup procedure is the same for all report types, but for each type of
source some dialog box fields may be disabled. Fields are enabled or disabled,
depending on:
Which source category you select
Whether you select All or another option
Whether the type of source allows sorting by device

These are the fields that are disabled in the Report Setup dialog box, depending
on the source you use.
Report Source Disabled Fields/Options
All None
User Measurement Definition Device, Agent, Sort By Device
Device Independent Thresholding Device, Agent, Sort By Device
Device Dependent Thresholding None
Disable Statistical Alarming For Devices None
This is an example procedure for All sources.
To Set Up a Report for Source:All
1. In the Source panel, click the required category - All

If you click All and click the Browse button, the Device Selection dialog
displays all agents currently available on your host.
If you select an agent and click the Browse button, the Device Selection
dialog displays your selection only.
The Aggregation field is enabled. Depending on your choice, the
Aggregation button shows either All or the aggregation level for the
device you selected.
The Sort By: buttons are enabled.
3. In the Sort By: field check the By Device or By Measurement button
If you choose By Device, the Report will display records sorted by
device
If you choose By Measurement, the Report will display records sorted
by measurement

4. From the Statistical Record drop-down list, select the record you want to
view
If you choose All, the Report will display all statistical records on the
selected device for the selected aggregation level
If you choose a record from the list, the Report will display the selected
statistical record on the selected device for the selected aggregation level
Figure 9-37 shows an example of Report Setup and output for the User
Measurement Definition source category.
Previous/Next Buttons Print Close Help
Figure 9-37: Report Setup and Report Example

5. From the Peg/Measurement drop-down list, choose a measurement

If you choose All, the Report will display all measurements on the
selected statistical record
If you choose a measurement, the Report will display the selected
peg/measurement on the selected statistical record
Note: If there are no records, the button face shows All, and the
drop-down list is empty.
6. Click the Apply button
The Report window opens, displaying the information on the pegs you
requested. If there is no information, a message appears informing you
that no records were found.
Note: Once you have clicked Apply, the present setup is saved. When
you exit the dialog and reopen it, the last setup is visible.
7. Click Ok to close the dialog
Viewing PM Measurements & Alarms Reports

In the PM Measurements & Alarms Report dialog box, you can:
Scroll to view more items on the page
If the report is more than one page long, the Previous and Next buttons
are enabled to allow you to view all pages (Figure 9-37, on page 9-79).
Click Print to open the Print dialog, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31
Click Close to exit the Report
Note: Every time you request a report, a new window opens.
Click Ok or Cancel to close the Report Setup dialog box
The Report Setup dialog box closes and you return to the PM
Measurements & Alarms window.

PMT Measurements
This section provides information on the measurement definitions for the two
PMT measurement domains:
Counters defined for PM Statistical data (record type 01-89)
Counters defined for CFC data (record type 98)
UNO Aggregation Levels

UNO aggregation levels are organized in a hierarchy, as shown in Figure 9-38.
CBSC SDU VPU
ICTRKGRP IWU XC BTS
MCCCE MDM MCC SECTOR
CSM CARRIER
ACH
Figure 9-38: UNO Aggregation Level Hierarchy
When you are defining UDMs and thresholds (see Figure 9-13, User Defined
Measurement Setup Example, on page 9-32, Figure 9-16, Add Device
Independent Threshold Dialog Box, on page 9-37, and Figure 9-23, Add
Device Dependent Threshold Dialog Box, on page 9-48), you first select the
aggregation level and then select the statistical record from the drop-down list
of statistical records. This drop-down list contains:
Statistical records of the aggregation level you selected

PMT Measurements UNO 2.16.3
Statistical records of all aggregation levels found below the selected

aggregation level and connected to it Features in PM Measurements &
Alarms. UNO Core Features.
For example (see Figure 9-38):
CBSCthe statistical record drop-down list contains all CBSC statistical
records plus all statistical records of all other aggregation levels,
except SDU and VPU
BTSthe drop-down list contains all BTS statistical records plus the
statistical records for all aggregation levels below BTS and connected to it
(SECTOR + CARRIER + ACH; MCC + CSM; MDM; MCC)
SDU/VPUthe drop-down list contains only SDU/VPU statistical records
Associated Devices Table

Table 9-20 lists all aggregation levels (Devices) and their statistical records in
the hierarchical order shown in Figure 9-38, on page 9-81.
Important: The Group By expression in Table 9-20 represents the required

device aggregation. Where needed, this text must be entered in
the Group By field of the User Defined Measurements dialog,
according to the semantics of the collected statistical data.
Table 9-20: Devices and Associated Statistical Records
Device Table Description Group By
SDU
101 SDU_PCF Call Setup Timing
102 SDU Packet DataSession Burst Count
103 SDU Packet DataSession Bytes
104 SDU Packet DataSession Activations
105 SDU Packet DataSession Durations
106 SDU PDSN Packet DataPacket Size
107 SDU Packet DataFwd Burst Size
108 SDU Packet DataRvs Burst Size
109 SDU Packet DataFwd Burst Duration

Table 9-20: Devices and Associated Statistical Records (Cont.)
SDU
110 SDU Packet DataRvs Burst Duration
111 SDU Packet DataBurst Data Rate

112 SDU Packet DataInter-Arrival Time
113 SDU PCF-RAMM Record
114 SDU PCF-RA Record
115 SDU SDF-RA Record
VPU
140 V:PU VPFRA Record
141 V:PU VPF Subfunctions Record
CBSC
50 MM Call Setup Timing
51 MM Service Option mm_id
52 MM Activity Record
56 MM Soft HO
58 CDMA MM Hard HO-Src
70 MM Location Area mm_id

71 XC Channel Group mm_id
72 Soft HO Detection mm_id
80 CDMA Physical Mapping Config mm_id
ICTRKGRP
53 ICBSC Trunk Group Usage
54 ICBSC Subrate Channel Usage mm_id, subj_id_1
55 ICBSC Trunk Group Soft HO

57 CDMA TN Based ICBSC and PAC HO
73 Soft HO DetectionIC Trunk mm_id, subj_id_1

IWU
74 IWU Resource Group Record

XC
04 XC Call Setup Timing
05 Packet DataSession Burst Count
06 Packet DataSession Bytes
07 Packet DataSession Activations
08 Packet DataSession Durations
09 PDSN Packet DataPacket Size
11 Packet DataFwd Burst Size
12 Packet DataRvs Burst Size
13 Packet DataFwd Burst Duration
14 Packet DataRvs Burst Duration
15 Packet DataBurst Data Rate
16 Packet DataInter-Arrival Time
17 XC PSI-CE Resource Group
18 XC PCF-RA Record
BTS
45 BTS per Data Rate
75 BTS Record
81 BTS Config
84 1X Config
88 CDMA BTS Soft/Softer HO-Tgt
89 ICBSC SHO and Data HO BTS
120 Packet Backhaul Link Utilization
MCCCE
01 MCC Channel Element Usage cBTS

MDM
61 MCCce/Site Group Usage cBTS mm_id,
subj_id_1,
subj_id_2
82 MCCce GroupCarrier Config cBTS
118 MCCce/Site Group Usage pBTS
122 MCCce GroupCarrier Config pBTS
MCC
01 MCC Channel Element Usage cBTS
02 BTS MCC Record
76 BTS MCC1X Usage
77 BTS SCH Group Usage
83 SCH Group Config
CSM
116 MCC Channel Element Usage pBTS
SECTOR
62 MCCce/Sector Group Usage cBTS
63 Cell Identity Activity Record
119 MCCce/Sector Group Usage pBTS

CARRIER
20 Carrier/Sector Group Usage cBTS
25 Carrier/Sector Active Call
26 Carrier/Sector Inter-CBSC HO
27 Carrier/Sector Hard HO-Src
29 MM Complex Soft HO-Detection
40 Carrier/Sector Nway Soft/Softer HO-Src
41 Carrier/Sector Soft HO-Tgt

CARRIER
42 ICBSC Nway Carrier/Sector Soft HO-Anchor
43 ICBSC Nway Carrier/Sector Soft HO-Tgt
44 BTS Carrier Sector Record
46 Carrier Sector PAC Channel HO-Activity
47 BTS Carrier Sector Paging Channel Usage
64 BBX Activity Record
98 CFC Counts
117 Carrier/Sector Group Usage pBTS
ACH
10 ACH Activity cBTS
121 ACH Activity pBTS
PM Default Measurements Description Table

Table 9-21 describes individual counters. For a more detailed description of
pegs, see the Performance Analysis Guide (68P09251A43).
Note: The counter_id for PM Statistical data domain, range from 1 to 99.

Table 9-21: Default Measurements for PM Statistics
Counter Record Measurement

ID Type Name Type Description
6401 20 peg_count_2 Value CARRIER Walsh Code Usage
6402 25 peg_count_4 Value CARRIER 1-way Handoff RF Loss -

Sector
6403 25 peg_count_5 Value CARRIER 2-way Handoff RF Loss -
Sector
6404 25 peg_count_6 Value CARRIER 3-way Plus Handoff RF

Loss - Sector
6405 26 peg_count_2 Value CARRIER CDMA to AMPS Exter-
nal HandFrom Failures - Sector
6406 26 peg_count_5 Value CARRIER CDMA to CDMA Exter-
nal HandFrom Failures
6407 26 peg_count_7 Value CARRIER External HandTo Failures

- Sector
6408 52 peg_count_1 Value CBSC System Slotted Pages
6409 52 peg_count_2 Value CBSC System Non-Slotted Pages
6410 61 peg_count_2 Value Traffic MCC Channel Element

Usage
6411 61 peg_count_3 Value Traffic MCC Channel Element Out
Of Service Time
6412 61 peg_count_4 Value All Traffic MCC Channel Element

Busy Time
6413 10 pct_term_completes Value CARRIER Percent Termination
Completes
6414 10 pct_orig_completes Per- CARRIER Percent Origination Com-
cent. pletes
6415 20 pct_access_overflows Per- CARRIER Percent Access Over-

cent. flows
6416 20 traffic_erlangs Value CARRIER Traffic Erlangs
6417 61 traffic_erlangs_mm_level Value Traffic Erlangs at MM Level
6418 10 sleeping_cells Value Alarm about sleeping cell

Default: Alarm ON

CFC Default Measurements Description Table

Table 9-22 shows the default (predefined) PMT measurements for CFC pegs.
The UNO default measurements are on the CBSC level.
Note: The counter_id for PM CFC Data domain, range from 101 to 199.
Table 9-22: Default Measurements for CFC Data
ID Measurement Name Type Description
101 5Nines_pct_cfc_1 Percent CFC-1: Normal Network-Initiated Call
102 5Nines_pct_cfc_2 Percent CFC-2: TCH Disabled
103 5Nines_pct_cfc_3 Percent CFC-3: RF Layer 2 Failure
104 5Nines_pct_cfc_4 Percent CFC-4: RF Loss
105 5Nines_pct_cfc_5 Percent CFC-5: No TCH Preamble Detected
106 5Nines_pct_cfc_6 Percent CFC-6: No STRAU Synchronization
107 5Nines_pct_cfc_7 Percent CFC-7: CP Timeout Awaiting MS Acquisition
108 5Nines_pct_cfc_8 Percent CFC-8: MS Did Not Arrive On HHO Target
109 5Nines_pct_cfc_9 Percent CFC-9: No Valid Speech Detected from MS
110 5Nines_pct_cfc_13 Percent CFC-13: CP Timeout Awaiting Service Option
111 5Nines_pct_cfc_14 Percent CFC-14: Not Enough Mobile Status Information

Received
112 5Nines_pct_cfc_15 Percent CFC-15: Negotiation Failure
113 5Nines_pct_cfc_18 Percent CFC-18: No XCDR Circuit
114 5Nines_pct_cfc_19 Percent CFC-19: No Data Resource Available
115 5Nines_pct_cfc_20 Percent CFC-20: No Radio Resource Available
116 5Nines_pct_cfc_21 Percent CFC-21: Requested Terrestrial Resource

Unavailable
117 5Nines_pct_cfc_22 Percent CFC-22: Terrestrial Circuit Already Allocated
118 5Nines_pct_cfc_23 Percent CFC-23: Radio Interface Failure
119 5Nines_pct_cfc_27 Percent CFC-27: MSC Disconnect due to SCCP Connec-

tion Refused
120 5Nines_pct_cfc_28 Percent CFC-28: MSC Disconnect with SCCP Released

Table 9-22: Default Measurements for CFC Data (Cont.)
ID Measurement Name Type Description
121 5Nines_pct_cfc_29 Percent CFC-29: Handoff Procedure Timeout
122 5Nines_pct_cfc_53 Percent CFC-53: Equipment Failure at MSC
123 5Nines_pct_cfc_60 Percent CFC-60: Protocol Error Between BSC and MSC
124 5Nines_pct_cfc_61 Percent CFC-61: Protocol Error Between MM and XC
125 5Nines_pct_cfc_62 Percent CFC-62: XC Detected Error
126 5Nines_pct_cfc_80 Percent CFC-80: MM Internal Error
127 5Nines_pct_cfc_81 Percent CFC-81: MM Database Error
128 5Nines_pct_cfc_132 Percent CFC-132: Equipment Failure at Target BSC
129 5Nines_pct_cfc_133 Percent CFC-133: Internal Target MM Failure
130 5Nines_pct_cfc_255 Percent CFC-255: Unknown
131 access Percent CFC Group Access
132 block Percent CFC Group Block
133 call_attempts Value Total Call Attempts
134 call_attempts_mm_level Value Call Attempt at MM Level
135 call_completion_ratio_mm Value Call Completion Ratio at MM Level
136 equipment_failures Percent CFC Group Equipment Failures
137 hard_ho_fail Percent Hard HandOff Failure

138 pct_for_call_qlty Percent Forward Call Quality
139 pct_rev_call_qlty Percent Reverse Call Quality
140 pct_fr_fade_cnt Percent RF Fade Count
141 rf_loss Percent CFC Group RF Loss

reload_thresh Threshold Monitoring Utility UNO 2.16.3
reload_thresh Threshold Monitoring Utility

This section briefly describes the reload_thresh PM Threshold Monitoring
Utility that resides in the /opt/UNO/install directory.
Note: The access to the reload_thresh utility is through the Command Line
only; it cannot be accessed through the PM Measurements & Alarms
user interface.
The reload_thresh utility enables the transfer of PM Thresholding definitions
from one UNO machine to another to ensure the backup of data.
Important: This procedure can be performed by an administrative user only.
Step 1
To Export PMT Definitions on Primary UNO Machine
1. Login as root on the primary (source) UNO machine

2. Execute the reload_thresh.sh script:
# /opt/UNO/install/reload_thresh.sh
3. Press <Return>
A window appears with options prompt:
Please select one of the following options:

Export (E)
Import (I)
Quit (Q)
4. To select the Export option, type E

A prompt appears:
Please enter the name of your archive directory
5. Enter your archive directory name, for example:

/opt/UNO/archive
6. Press <Return>

A message informs you that the archiving process has started:
Device independent thresholds are being

archived, please wait
When the archiving is completed, the archive directory contains five new
files:
stat_alarm_values. <timestamp>
stat_ctr. <timestamp>
th_alarm_text. <timestamp>
th_formulae_db. <timestamp>
th_sys_config. <timestamp>
Step 2
To Transfer PMT Definitions from Primary to Secondary Machine
Note: Ensure that the network is working.

1. Copy the five files (listed above) to an archive directory on the secondary
UNO machine using the appropriate method, for example the ftp protocol.
2. On the secondary UNO machine, save the current PMT definitions in a
directory, using the Step 1 procedure
Note: Create a new directory with a different name, for example:
opt/UNO/PM_secondary
To Import PMT Definitions on the Secondary UNO Machine
1. Login as root on the secondary (destination) UNO machine

2. Execute the reload_thresh.sh script:
# /opt/UNO/install/reload_thresh.sh
3. Press <Return>

reload_thresh Threshold Monitoring Utility UNO 2.16.3
A window appears with options prompt:
Please select one of the following options:

Export (E)
Import (I)
Quit (Q)
4. To select the Import option, type I

A prompt appears:
Please enter the name of your archive directory
5. Enter the name of the archive directory that you have transferred from the
primary UNO machine, for example /opt/UNO/archive.
If this directory contains more than one set of the archives, you are
prompted to choose the archive for importing.
1) 01-03-19:10:30:12
2) 10-03-19:10:32:37
There is more than one archive, please type your

choice (1..$num):
6. Type the number of the archive required for importing

A prompt appears asking you to confirm your choice:
Do you want to reload 01-03-19:10:32:37 archive?

(Y/N) [N]
7. Type Y to confirm the import/reload of PM Thresholding definitions from

the selected archive
8. Press <Return>
A message informs you that the reloading process has started:
01-03-19:10:32:37 archive is being archived, please

wait

When the reload is completed, a message appears
The threshold data has been reloaded.

It may take up to 15 min. for the system to get
into a steady state.
The Import procedure is completed. The UNO system uses the imported
PM Thresholding definitions to generate alarms.
Operators Guidelines
Important: To ensure that PMT is functional, perform the complete check as
described in Operators Check List.
Operators Check List

Ensure that these resident processes are running on the UNO Manager:
Process Process Name
PMT Engine uno_pmt_engine
PMT Agent Link uno_pmt_aglink
PMT Data Reader uno_pmt_reader
Note: You should have at least one instance of PMT Data Reader for each
OMC-R agent. This process runs with a single numeric parameter;
the Agent ID. Running more than four instances of PMT Data
Readers for the same agent, could cause some problems.
Ensure that fresh data is written into the pmthresh:history_totals
table at least every thirty minutes.
Ensure that there is no data overflow and sufficient storage space is
available in the pmthresh:history_totals table.
Check that there are alarm records in the pmthresh:th_alarm_log table,
to ensure that alarm generating is functional.

Operators Guidelines UNO 2.16.3
Verifications
This section provides some PMT MOL scripts and other useful SQL queries, to
use when needed. Use dbaccess utility for entering these queries.
To Check Counters/Device With Alarming On
Enter: /opt/UNO/mol/pmt_counter -t y
To Check Counters on a Device Type (X)
Enter: /opt/UNO/mol/pmt_counter -d <device_type
To Check Counters Not Covered By history_totals
Enter: echo unique counter_id from stat_alarm_values where

counter_id not in (select unique counter_id from
history_totals) and alarming type !=3|dbaccess pmthresh
To Check Devices Not Covered by history_totals
Enter: echo select unique device_id from stat_alarm_values

where device_id not in (select unique device_id from
history_totals)|dbaccess pmthresh
To Check Possible Overflow in history_totals
Check the UNO Alarm Manager for PMT Monitor Alarm.
Removing PMT history_totals Overflow

If the PMT functionality detects an overflow condition in the pmthresh table,
the PMT engine submits an alarm. When data overflow is detected in
history_totals, follow this procedure to remove the condition:
To Remove the history_totals Overflow Condition

1. Recalculate the amount of historical information driven for PMT
measurements that exist in the system, on the basis of instances for all
statistical devices
2. In order to suppress driving new historical data:

Remove all statistical measurements of secondary importance from the

stat_alarm_values table or use MinMax thresholding
Set stat_ctr.history_flag to zero
3. Stop the UNO system
4. Perform a history_totals purge by removing records related to the
counters which you deactivated in step 2
5. Restart the UNO system
PMT Monitoring Database and Setup

This section describes the database and setup for PM Measurements & Alarms
threshold monitoring. The pmthresh Informix database, located on the UNO
Manager, is used by the PM Measurements & Alarms components and during
the PM Measurements & Alarms user interface sessions. Tables residing in the
pmthresh database contain:
Static Setup Information
Dynamic Processed Data
Caution: Do not edit or in any way directly change the contents of the
pmthresh database. Doing so could destroy the information
stored in this database. Use only the PM Measurements & Alarms
GUI to change setup or parameters. Any change of contents of
the pmthresh database requires restarting the UNO system.

PMT Monitoring Database and Setup UNO 2.16.3
pmthresh Database Description

Table 9-23 briefly describes the contents of the component tables residing in
the pmthresh database.
Table 9-23: pmthresh_Database Tables
Table Name Description
stat_ctr PMT Measurements definitions
th_formulae_db Extension of the stat_ctr table, for stat_ctr for-

mulae
th_alarm_text Extension of the stat_ctr table, for PMT Alarms
stat_alarm_values Threshold values
th_sys_config System-wide parameters
stat_record_type Read-only information on omcpm databases
stat_device Statistical Device Exclusions definitions (devices with

disabled alarms)
device_table Information on Statistical Device instances
history_totals Information on distribution of monitored values
th_alarm_log Details of generated PMT alarms
bh_calendar Setup for non-recurring working and non-working days
device_setup Definitions of the fields that constitute the device name,

relating to the relationship between device_type and
stat_record_type.
device_type Definitions of device types (aggregation levels) supported

by the PMT functionality

Setup Parameters Table
Important: To take effect, any changes made in the th_sys_config table

require restarting the UNO system.
Table 9-24 describes the th_sys_config setup parameters table fields that
contain user defined thresholding setup parameters.
Table 9-24: th_sys_config: Setup Parameters
Field Valid
Name Description Input Default
start_day Start of the Day Time period hh:00 or hh:30 06:00
start_night Start of the Night Time period hh:00 or hh:30 23:00
realarm_count* Number of successive periods flagged with an alarm Positive number 5

resulting in severity level increment (change)
resend_sever* Minimal severity level of an alarm that is to be sent Non-negative 0

for every period, when the alarm persists for more number
than one period
recur_holiday Weekday holidays considered as nonworking days values from 0 to 65

127 where: (Sat,
Sun=1, Sun)
Mon=2,
Sat=64
* See Alarms Occurring in Successive Time Periods on page 9-6

]UNO Core Features
UNO Core Features
Chapter 10: PM Reports

The purpose of Performance Management (PM) Reports is to gather and
present comprehensive information about the many aspects of the cellular
network performance. The reports are classified in categories based on
measurable performance standards, for example: network availability,
congestion, call completion, dropped call rate. You can schedule, run, view and
compare a variety of reports, based on current or historical data.
The first part of this chapter describes the PM Reports application for
UNOSoftware Release 2.16.3. You will learn how to perform these tasks:
Invoke PM Reports locally and from a remote workstation
Organize the display of report information to suit your task
Schedule, modify and view single and grouped reports
Work with different kinds of report output
Monitor data collection from the cellular network to UNO
View and compare reports by date
Use JClass charts to compare report statistics
The second part of this chapter provides brief descriptions of all currently
available PM Reports. For quick access to the description tables for each report
category, see PM Reports Descriptions on page 10-111.

General Description
The PM Reports application enables the UNO user to:
Work in PM Reports from remote workstations using the Intranet
Apply user and agent-limiting filters to shorten the report execution time
and to reduce incoming reports of the same type
Order, sort and configure report summaries according to task
Specify report parameters or summary types, and flexibly schedule single
or grouped reports to run daily, weekly, monthly or at a specific time/date
View report instances on a specific agent, stop running reports and retry
failed reports
Save report outputs in HTML format, to enable viewing reports that were set
up by another user
View graphical outputs in a chart or a spreadsheet format
View and compare historical reports by date
View the (PM/ESR/CDL/SAR) file transfer process to UNO

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 10: PM Reports
Requirements
These are the software requirements for the remote PM Reports user:
Browser Netscape, version 4.5 or above

Internet Explorer, version 5 or above
Operating System Windows
UNIX (use with the Java plug-in version 1.3.1)
Dual hosts Two IP addresses
Primary/local host setup in DNS
Important: If you intend to use PM Reports on dual hosts, ensure that the
network administrator defines two IP addresses and the
primary/local host in DNS.
User Permissions
Administrator Users with administrative privileges can both view and
change parameters of reports owned by any user
Non-Administrator Non-administrative users can change the schedule

parameters of the reports they own, and view both the
schedule parameters and execution results of reports
owned by other users

Report Status Color Coding

All reports displaying in the PM Reports summaries are color-coded to provide
a fast way to identify the current status or processing stage. The color code is
standard for all reports.
Colors shown in Table 10-1 are system default colors. These colors cannot be
changed, as they are hard-coded into the system and are common to other UNO
applications, for example Alarm Manager, Software Download Manager and
Command Center. Table 10-1 lists eight colors which represent the stages of
report processing.
Table 10-1: PM Reports Status Color Coding
Report Status Color Name Color Sample Description
Completed - Single Green Report that has executed on a single agent,

is completed.
Completed - Multiple Cyan Report that has executed on several agents,

is completed.
Running - Single White Report is now executing on a single agent.
Running - Multiple Yellow Report is now executing on several agents.
Aborted Magenta A running report has been stopped.
Failed - Single Red Report that has run on a single agent, failed
to complete execution.
Failed - Multiple Orange Report that has run on several agents,

failed to complete execution.
Running Retry Blue Failed report is being rerun.
Note: Colors shown in this table may not be identical to the colors that you see
on your system, since color display depends on:
How colors are defined in your system
The computer resources that are available for display purposes
The kind of monitor that your system uses and its Gamma settings

Invoking PM Reports
You can invoke the PM Reports application in these ways:
Remotely from:
Web browser
Command line
Locally from:
Application launcher
Command line
Invoking Remotely
To Invoke PM Reports Remotely Using a Web Browser
1. Open the browser of your choice

2. In the browser window, enter the following address:
http://<host_IP_address>/HOME
for example:
http://123.123.123.123/HOME
If proxy is used, add the UNO IP address in the browser.
For setting up your proxy, contact your system administrator.
The network password dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1: Password Dialog Box

The UNO Home Page for the selected host opens.

Invoking PM Reports UNO 2.16.3
Figure 10-2 shows the UNO Home Page and the Invoke panel.
Figure 10-2: UNO Home Page
4. In the UNO Home Page Invoke panel, click the PM Reports icon
The PM Reports introductory window opens. If Java plug-in is not

installed on your workstation, your browser asks you to download the
plug-in, using the Home page Invoke panel download icon/button.
5. In the Invoke panel, click the Download icon (see Figure 10-2)
6. Choose Windows or Solaris platform, as required
7. Click Ok
The Java plug-in is downloaded. The application begins loading and the
second UNO password dialog box opens.
Figure 10-3: Enter Network Password Dialog Box


The application loads. Several status messages appear in quick
succession. When ready, the UNO PM Reports main window opens, as in
Figure 10-4 shows an example of a Loading Status message.
Figure 10-4: Loading Status Message Example
To Invoke PM Reports Remotely Using Command Line
In the XTerm window, enter this path, command and argument:
Path /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_wrt.sh
Argument -host <UNO_HOST>

for example: uno_wrt.sh -host aleph

Invoking PM Reports UNO 2.16.3
Invoking Locally
You can invoke locally, directly from the application launcher or the command
line. Whether you are working on a UNIX station or on a PC-based UNIX
simulator, you can use the UNO application launcher.
To Invoke PM Reports Locally from UNO Application Launcher
From the UNO application launcher, click the PM Reports icon
To Invoke PM Reports Locally Using Command Line
In the XTerm window, enter this path, command and argument:
Path /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_wrt.sh
Argument -host <UNO_HOST>

for example: uno_wrt.sh -host aleph

Getting Started in PM Reports

This section introduces you to the applications main window and describes the
display configuration options that are available from the File and View menus.
Main Window
The main window consists of three user-defined areas:
Filters and Mode
Scheduled Reports Summary
Report Execution Summary
Note: For general description of the main window, see Table 10-2, on page 10-10.
You can configure this window to show either or both summary tables.
Figure 10-5 shows several reports showing in each summary table.
Menu Bar
Filters and
Mode
Scheduled
Reports
Summary
Report
Execution
Summary
Status Bar
Figure 10-5: PM R eports Main Window

Getting Started in PM Reports UNO 2.16.3
Table 10-2 describes the PM Reports main window fields.
Table 10-2: PM Reports Main Window Fields
Panel/Area Field Description
Menu Bar The menu bar provides the PM Reports user options. For summary,
see Table 10-3, on page 10-11.
Filters and Lets you limit the number of PM reports according to report mode and
Mode two user-defined filters: agent and user name.
Agent Lets you select from a list of agents currently available on your UNO
host. The list varies with type and number of agents.
Range: All CDMA Agents, CDMA [agent name]

Default: All Agents or last used
User ID Lets you select from the list of the user IDs currently available on
your UNO host. The list varies with the users.
Note: Users are defined in the UNO User Configuration Tool.
Range: All Users, [user name]

Default: All Users
Mode Lets you select one of the PM Reports scheduling modes.
Range: Single Reports, Group Reports

Default: Single Reports
Scheduled Scheduled This table lists all currently scheduled reports according to the
Reports Reports user-defined sort order and columns. The table is empty when there
Summary are no scheduled reports.
Report Report This table lists all completed report executions according to the
Execution Execution user-defined sort order and columns. The table is empty when there
Summary are no completed reports.
Status Bar Context-sensitive textual display that informs about the progress or
status of the last user action.

Main Menu
This section briefly introduces the PM Reports main window menu. Later
sections of this chapter provide detailed descriptions of these options, dialog
boxes and actions you can perform.
Table 10-3 describes the main menu options.
Table 10-3: PM Reports Main Window Menu Options
Menu Options Description
File This menu provides options for restarting and exiting the application and for saving display
settings for the next session.
Save Lets you save one or more summary table display options and filters,
Sort Options see Saving Display Settings on page 10-18.
Filter Settings
Layout
All
Restart Restarts the application and updates the client state.

Exit Closes the application.
View This menu provides options for display and sorting of summary table columns.
Sort By This option lets you sort summary table columns according to the
Agent Name selected label/attribute. See Sorting Summary Tables By
Agent Type Attributes on page 10-14
User ID To save the Sort configuration, see page 10-18.
Report Name
Schedule Mode
Schedule Date/Time
Agent Count
Report Category
Sort Order Sorts the Summary tables reports according to ascending or

Ascending descending order, see Changing Summary Table Sort Order on
Descending page 10-15.
Range: Ascending, Descending

Default: Ascending
Refresh Refreshes the screen and displays any newly completed report
executions. Only reports that have executed in the last 6 hours are
displayed.

Table 10-3: PM Reports Main Window Menu Options (Cont.)
Table Properties... Opens the Table Properties dialog box where you can configure
summary table display, see Configuring Report Summary Tables
on page 10-21.
Layout Components Lets you view or hide a PM Reports summary table.
Scheduled Reports See Defining Summary Table Layout on page 10-17.
Summary To save the layout components setup, see page 10-19.
Report Execution
Summary Range: Scheduled Reports Summary, Report Execution Summary
Default: Both
Actions This menu provides options work in the Single Reports mode, according to the current filters.
Schedule Report Opens the main scheduling dialog box, where you can schedule a
report execution, see Setting Up a Single Report Execution on
page 10-29.
Modify Schedule Opens the Modify Report Parameters dialog box where you can
enter scheduling changes for the report you selected from the
Scheduled Reports Summary table, see Changing Schedule
Parameters on page 10-53.
Unschedule Removes the scheduled report from the Scheduled Reports
Summary table, see Removing Reports from Schedule on
page 10-55.
View Report Opens the View Report Parameters dialog box, where you can view
Parameters the scheduling setup for the report you selected from Scheduled
Reports Summary table, see Viewing Schedule Information on
page 10-56.
Abort Execution Immediately stops the report execution of a selected running report,
see Stopping Report Execution on page 10-58.
Retry Execution Lets you execute a rerun of a selected failed report, see Retrying
Report Execution on page 10-59.
View Report Output... When a report is selected from the Execution Summary table, opens
the Report Output window where you can view report details, see
Report Output Formats on page 10-50.
View Graphical When a report is selected from the Execution Summary table, opens
Output... the Report Output window where you can view report details, see
To View Graphical Output for Completed Reports on page 10-51.

Table 10-3: PM Reports Main Window Menu Options (Cont.)
Report Instance Data... Opens the Report Instances Window where you can view report
information by agent, and perform execution rerun and abort, see
Report Instances Window on page 10-61.
Groups This menu provides options to work in the Group Reports mode, according to the current filters.
Create Group Opens the Create Group Reports dialog box where you can define a
new group and set up group reports, see Create Group Reports
Note: This is the only Groups menu option that is available in the
Single Reports mode.
Edit Group When a group is selected from the Group Summary table, opens the
Modify Group Definitions dialog box where you can change the
scheduling for a group and edit parameters for individual reports in
the group, see Editing Group Report Definitions on page 10-77.
Note: This option is active only in the Group Reports mode.
Delete Group Lets you delete a group from the Group Summary table, see
Deleting Groups on page 10-75.
Note: This option is active only in the Group Reports mode.
Tools This menu provides additional tools to monitor reports.
Collection Status Lets you view the transfer of PM data from the agents to UNO, see
Monitor Monitoring PM Reports on page 10-83.
Reports Calendar Opens the Reports Calendar dialog box where you can request to
view a report summary for a specific date. Lets you view reports that
were defined by other users and to view historical information, see
Using the Reports Calendar on page 10-89.
Help This menu provides the Online Help option.
General Help Opens the UNO Online Help.

Setting Up Table Display

Planning in advance how to view the report summaries will help you manage
the incoming information and to optimize the speed and efficiency of reporting
and monitoring. Therefore it is recommended to set up the required PM Reports
display before you begin a work session.
This section describes the display options that you can set up and change to suit
your performance management tasks.
The PM Reports View options enable you to define and refresh the window
layout and summary tables display. Using these options, you can define:
Sort By: report attributes to sort by the summary tables

Sort Order: table column sorting order
Table Properties: labels to include in summary tables and label order default
Layout summary tables to include in the window layout

Components:
Note: Setting the Table Properties is described in a separate section.

See Configuring Report Summary Tables on page 10-21.
A selected View menu sorting option:
appears in the Sort Index and Order above each summary table
applies to report execution summaries in both Single and Group report
modes (except for Group Summary)
can be saved for future sessions, see page 10-18.
Sorting Summary Tables By Attributes

You can sort columns in the PM Reports summary tables according to these
labels (report attributes): Agent Name; Agent Type; User ID; Report Name;
Scheduled Mode; Scheduled Date/Time; Agent Count; Report Category.
Note: Agent Count and Report Category are valid for Report Execution
Summary tables only.

The labels appear under the View > Sort By option, as in Figure 10-6.
Figure 10-6: View Menu Sort By Options
To Sort Summary Table Columns by Attribute
Note: This procedure uses Agent Name as an example.

From the PM Reports main window View menu, select
View
Sort By
Agent Name
The Summary tables are now sorted by Agent Name. The Sort Index text
above the summary table is updated, as in Figure 10-8.
Changing Summary Table Sort Order

You can also sort the table columns in ascending or descending order for all
table columns or for each table column.
Figure 10-7 shows the PM Reports View menu Sort Order options.
Figure 10-7: View Menu Sort Order Options

To Define the Sort Order for a Summary Table
From the PM Reports main window View menu, select
View
Sort Order
Ascending
All columns in the currently displayed tables are sorted alphabetically in

ascending order.
To Sort a Table by a Selected Column
Double-click on the column you want to sort

The column rows of the column rearrange. Entries rearrange accordingly
across all columns. The Sort Order and Sort Index information above the
selected table confirms the change.
Figure 10-8 shows the Sort Index and Sort Order text in the current Sort
information.
Sort
Index:Agent Sort
Name Order
Figure 10-8: Sort By: Agent Name and Sort Order - Example

Defining Summary Table Layout

You can choose which summary tables will show in the PM Reports window,
according to your tasks. For example, if you are interested only in executed
reports which have already run, but not in listings of reports that are scheduled
for later dates or for periodical execution, then you can configure the window
to show only the Report Execution Summary.
Figure 10-9 shows the View menu options.
Figure 10-9: View Menu Layout Components Options
To Define PM Reports Window Layout
1. From the View menu, select

View
Layout Components
A list opens showing these layout options:

Scheduled Reports Summary
Report Execution Summary
2. Check either or both layout options
The selected summary table opens in the PM Reports window.
The next section describes the File > Save options which enable you to save
the display settings you defined using View options.

Saving Display Settings

Using the PM Reports File > Save options, you can save these settings:
Sort Options
Filter Settings
Layout
All
Figure 10-10 shows the PM Reports File menu options.
Figure 10-10: PM Reports File Menu
Important: All the settings remain valid through your PM Reports sessions,
until you change them and save the new settings. The settings
apply to all PM Reports windows and summary tables.
To Save Sort Options
From PM Reports main window File menu, select
File
Save
Sort Options
The current Sort By and Sort Order definitions are saved.

To Save Filter Settings
File
Save
Filter Settings
The current Agent and User ID definitions are saved.
To Save Layout Components Settings
File
Save
Layout
The current layout definitions are saved.
To Save All View Settings
File
Save
All
All current display definitions you set up using the View options, are
saved.

Other File Menu Options

This option lets you quickly exit and re-enter the application. When you do
this, all the current table display and other settings are retained. Restarting PM
Reports also updates the client state.
To Restart PM Reports
File
Restart
All PM Reports dialogs and windows are closed except for the main
window. The status bar shows Updating state of the client, please
wait....
To Exit PM Reports
File
Exit
PM Reports closes.

Configuring Report Summary Tables

The way summaries are organized affects how you find and read the report
information. Configuring the report summary tables allows you to include or
exclude information, as required by the task at hand.
Using the Table Properties dialog box, you can define which report attributes to
display in the table columns and in what order. This preliminary action ensures
that you find the information that is relevant to your task quickly and easily, in
each summary table. By configuring table properties in advance, you can also
avoid frequent sorting of columns, as described on page 10-14.
To Open Table Properties Dialog Box
From the main PM Reports window View menu, select
View
Table Properties
Table Properties dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-11.
Summary
Tables Tabs User
Defined
Use Defaults Columns
Button List
Visible
Column
Check Button
Default
Columns List
Column
Order
Buttons
Action
Buttons
Figure 10-11: Table Properties Dialog Box

Configuring Report Summary Tables UNO 2.16.3
When the Table properties dialog box first opens:

By default, the Scheduled Status or last used tab is open
Only the Close and Help action buttons are enabled
By default, all properties are defined as Visible in all tabs
Table Properties Dialog Box

In the Table Properties dialog box, you can specify which columns are to
display in a report summary table and in what order. In other words you can
select the report attributes to view and arrange their hierarchy.
Each row in the Table Properties dialog box represents a report attribute or a
scheduling parameter and corresponds to a column in a report summary table.
There are four tabs for setting up properties for these types of summary tables:
Set Properties in this Tab: For this Summary Table:
Scheduled Status Scheduled Reports

Report Status Report Execution
Report Calendar
Group Status Group Summary
Group Reports Status Group Reports
Typically, table properties are set according to the type of report that is to be
scheduled or according to your viewing priorities.
- The same fields (Use Defaults, Visible, Default and User Defined) display
in all tabs but the lists of columns are different, since the
parameters/columns vary for each tab/table.
- You cannot add to or subtract from the table properties columns listed in
the Table Properties dialog box.
- You can include the required columns by making them visible or exclude
them by making invisible.
- In the User Defined list, you can change the column name.

Table 10-4 describes the Table Properties dialog box fields.
Table 10-4: Table Properties Dialog Box Fields
Scheduled Displays the column labels for the Scheduled Reports Summary table.
Status
Range: User ID, Agent Name, Agent Type, Report Name, Scheduled Mode,
Scheduled Date/Time
Default: All (visible/checked)
Report Status Displays the column labels for the Report Execution Summary table and for the Report
Calendar table.
Range: User ID, Report Name, Report Category, Agent Count, Agent Name, Agent
Type, Report Name, Scheduled Mode, Scheduled Date/Time, Time Period,
Status, Error Mode, Error Desc(ription)
Group Status Displays the column labels for the Group Summary table.
Range: User ID, Group Name, Scheduled Mode, Scheduled Date/Time

Group Reports Displays the column labels for the Group Reports Summary table.
Status
Range: User ID, Report Name, Report Category, Agent Type, Output Type,
File/Printer Name, Command String
Use Defaults When clicked (becomes dark gray), this button activates the default table properties.
Visible This column shows check boxes for each report summary table column name. When
checked, the selected column is included in the summary table. When unchecked, the
selected column is excluded from the table, but is retained as a property, so you can
make the column visible/include it again.
Range: Visible (checked), Hidden (unchecked)
Default: Visible (checked)
Default Lists all the column labels that are available as defaults. Non-editable.
User Defined Lists all default column labels and lets you edit the column label name.

Table 10-4: Table Properties Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
Move Up When clicked, moves the selected column to the left in the Summary table that
corresponds to the currently open tab.
Move Down When clicked, moves the selected column to the right in the Summary table that
corresponds to the currently open tab.
Note: Table Properties dialog box action buttons are common UNO buttons.
For description, see Table 2-16, Action Buttons, on page 2-36.
These are the other three Table Properties tabs:
Figure 10-12 shows the Report Status tab representing the Report Execution
Summary and Report Calendar table columns.
Figure 10-12: Table Properties Report Status Tab

Figure 10-13 shows the Group Status tab representing the Group Summary table
columns.
Figure 10-13: Table Properties Group Status Tab
Figure 10-14 shows the Group Reports Status tab representing the Group
Reports Summary table columns.
Figure 10-14: Table Properties Group Reports Status Tab

Setting Default Table Properties

This section provides the procedures that you can perform in any tab of the
Table Properties dialog box.
Note: The Scheduled Status tab is used as an example.
To Set Table Properties at Default Values
1. In the Table Properties dialog box Scheduled Status tab, click the Use
Defaults button
The Use Defaults button turns gray. The OK and Apply action buttons are
enabled.
2. To save Table Properties settings for the current tab, click Apply
The reports you will be scheduling in Single Reports mode, will use the
predefined default table properties.
3. Repeat the same action in each of the mode tabs, or as required and click
Apply at every step
4. When done, click Ok
If you have not saved all the changes, the Apply & Save Changes prompt
opens.
5. Click Apply, then Apply & Save
The Table Properties dialog box closes. Summary tables display according
to the specified defaults.
Redefining Table Properties Display

You can define which columns in a table are to be hidden from view.
To Redefine Labels in a Summary Table
Note: Ensure that Use Defaults is not selected

1. From the list, select the row/column label that you want to rename
The row representing the required column is highlighted.
2. Click once in the corresponding check button in the Visible column
When clicked once, the square is highlighted in gray.

3. Click the check button again

The check appears. All checked columns will appear in the summary table.
4. If you do not want a label to appear in the table, click twice on the square
check button that has a check mark
The check disappears. All unchecked columns will not appear in the
summary tables.
5. Click Apply to save your Table Properties settings
Changing Column Order

You can define the table column order that is effective for your purposes.
To Change the Column Order in a Summary Table
Note: Ensure that User Defaults is not selected.

1. From the properties list, select the column label that you want to change
The row representing the required properties column is highlighted.
2. Click Move Up or Move Down to change the label position in the table
Click Move Up to move the selection towards the top of the list
In the summary table, the selected column will move to the left.
or
Click Move Down to move the selection towards the lists end
In the summary table, the selected column will move to the right.
3. Click Apply to save your Table Properties settings
Having completed the setup of Summary Reports display, you can now
schedule your reports.
4. Click Ok to exit the dialog box
The dialog box closes. The Report Summary tables that you modified now
display the redefined columns.

Setting Filters and Mode UNO 2.16.3
Setting Filters and Mode

The first action you perform in the main window, is to define the required scope
of report scheduling and execution in the filter fields. This ensures that you
only get the reports that you are interested in, and get them faster. Filters and
mode are set independently of each other. Group Reports and Single Reports
are exclusive modes.
Figure 10-15 shows the PM Reports filters and mode set at default options.
Agent Mode User ID
Figure 10-15: Default Filters and Mode
To Define the Agent, Mode and User ID for the Reports
In the main PM Reports window:

1. From the Agent drop-down menu, select the required agent or select All
The field shows the name of the agent on which to run reports.
2. From the Mode drop-down menu, select the required mode
The Scheduled Reports table shows reports that are currently scheduled in
the mode you selected.
3. From the User ID drop-down menu, select the required user
The Scheduled Reports table shows reports that are currently scheduled by
the user you selected.
Note: Filters and mode you have defined will revert to defaults in the next
session, unless you save these settings. See To Save Filter Settings
on page 10-19.

Scheduling PM Reports in Single Reports Mode

This section describes the PM Reports functions as used in the Single Reports
mode. You can perform all the single report tasks using the options provided in
the PM Reports main window Actions menu. Scheduling of single reports is
done in the Schedule Report Execution dialog box.
Figure 10-16 shows the PM Reports Actions menu. Of these, the Abort
Execution option is usually disabled, except for special circumstances. For
details on this option, see on page 10-58.
Figure 10-16: PM Reports Actions Menu
Important: All UNO users can schedule, modify, view and delete reports that
they themselves have set up, but only an administrative user can
modify or delete the reports which were set up by others.
Setting Up a Single Report Execution

The main scheduling dialog box, Schedule Report Execution, lets you define:
Agents and agent types from which to collect PM data for reporting
Report and report category you want to schedule
Parameters required for each type of PM report
Execution timing mode
Report execution time
Output destination and format for the report

Scheduling PM Reports in Single Reports Mode UNO 2.16.3
To Open Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box
From the PM Reports main window Actions menu, select
Actions
Schedule Report
The Schedule Report Execution dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-17.
Agent
Type
Agent(s)
Report
Category
Report
Names
Report
Type
Setup Tabs
Setup
Panel
Action
Buttons
Figure 10-17: Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box

Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box

In this dynamic dialog box, a very large amount of information can be
interactively defined to schedule a report.
The five lists in the upper part of the dialog box enable you to define which
type of report to run. The five lists are:
Agent Type Report Names
Agent(s) Report Type
Report Category
The four tabs in the lower part of the dialog enable you to define how to
execute the report:
Report Parameters Scheduling (Mode)
Time Period Output Destination
Table 10-5 briefly introduces the Schedule Report Execution dialog box.
A detailed description and procedures follow in the next sections.
Table 10-5: Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box Fields
Field Description
Agent Type Lists the agent types that are currently available on your UNO host.
Range: Varies with available agents

Default: Last used
Agent(s) Lists the available agents for the agent type that you have selected from the
Agent Type list.
Report Category Lists the report categories.
Range: (in descending order) Basic Reports, Exception Reports, Event

Summary Reports, Graphical Reports, CFC/CDL Reports, Utilization
Reports, Quality of Service Reports
Default: Basic Reports, or last used
Report Names Lists the PM reports for the selected agent type, agent and report category. For
full description by category, of all currently available reports, see PM Reports
Descriptions on page 10-111.

Table 10-5: Schedule Report Execution Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
Field Description
Report Type Lists the report types for each report. Report types define how data is gathered
for the report. Within each report category there may be reports for which a
certain report type is inapplicable. See Table 10-6.
Setup Tabs These tabs contain fields to enter the necessary report execution setup data.
Report Parameters Lets you select the device level and location of data to be reported, according to
predefined parameters that are individual for each report.
Time Period Lets you set up the data sampling time scope for the report you are scheduling.
Scheduling Lets you select a schedule mode for the report; whether the report is to run
immediately or to be scheduled according to any of the provided criteria.
Output Destination Lets you set up the output format and destination for the report you are
scheduling.
Table 10-6 lists the report types for each of the report categories.
Table 10-6: PM Reports Report Types
Report Category Report Types For The Category Default Report Type
PM Basic Reports Half Hourly Half Hourly
PM Exception Reports N/A

Event Summary Hourly Summary, Daily Summary. Weekly Hourly Summary
Reports Summary
PM Graphical Reports Half Hourly Half Hourly
CFC/CDL Reports N/A
Utilization Reports N/A

Quality of Service N/A
Reports
Note: Reports for Analog type agents are no longer issued.

Schedule Report Execution Action Buttons

Table 10-7 provides a brief description of action buttons. These buttons are
common to the three scheduling dialog boxes that are opened from the PM
Reports main window Actions menu, and will not be included in the further
dialog box descriptions.
Table 10-7: Schedule Report Execution Action Buttons
Button Description
Schedule & Close Applies changes and closes the dialog box.
Schedule Applies changes and leaves the dialog box open.
Reset Returns the current setup to default values.
Cancel Closes the dialog box, without applying any changes.
Help Opens the PM Reports Online Help topic.
Selecting a Report for Scheduling

You need to define the exact PM report that you need scheduled. This is done in
the Schedule Report Execution dialog box upper panel, in the fields that appear
above the four setup tabs.
To Define the Report to be Scheduled
1. From the Agent Type list, select the required type of agent
2. From the Agent(s) list, click on the required agent
Note: If no data is available from the selected agent, an error message
appears. Choose a different agent.
3. From the Report Category list, select the required report category
List of reports for the selected category appears in Report Names box.
4. From the Report Names list, select the report to be scheduled
Default Report Type and Parameters are displayed for the selected report.
5. From the Report Type list, select the required report summary type
If there is more than one report type, the default Time Period is adjusted,
see Time Period Tab on page 10-37.

Example: Figure 10-18 shows a report setup for the Device Summary Report
weekly summary. This report belongs to the Event Summary Reports category.
Data is to be collected on the sgi14 CDMA agent. In the Time Period tab, the
Last Week mode is automatically enabled when you choose Weekly Summary
from the Report Type list. The tooltip explaining the Last Week option appears
when you place the cursor on the button name.
Report
Setup
Report
Type:
Weekly
Last Week mode Option Tooltip

.
Figure 10-18: Schedule Report Execution - Report Setup Fields
Defining the Execution Schedule

This section explains in detail how to schedule single reports using the setup
tabs in the Schedule Report Execution dialog box:
Report Parameters
Time Period
Scheduling
Output/Destination
The tabs fields are specific to the report and report type that you have selected
in the upper panel of the dialog box.

Report Parameters Tab

In the Schedule Report Execution dialogs Report Parameters tab, you define
the scope of PM data collection required for the report. This can include the
device level, ID, location of data to be collected, or any other parameter,
according to the predefined report parameters.
Note: The predefined report parameters for all UNO 2.16.3 PM reports are
listed in PM Reports Descriptions on page 10-111.
To Open Report Parameters Setup Tab
In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box lower panel, click the
Report Parameters tab, if it is not already open
The tab shows the entry fields and lists for defining the required report
parameters. Default or last-used values are used.
Figure 10-19 shows the maximum configuration of required parameters.
Report
Parameters Tab
Report
Parameters
Setup Fields
Figure 10-19: Report Parameters Tab: Required Parameters
To Define Report Parameters
1. Click in the entry fields and enter required parameter values

or click the buttons and choose the required options from the lists
2. To find out what is the correct value or range for the field, place your
cursor over the field name, as shown in Figure 10-20.

A Tooltip appears with the information to help you enter the required
values. If you enter invalid information, a Range Validation Error message
appears, listing the correct options.
Manual Entry Field

Drop-down
List Report Parameter
Tooltip
Figure 10-20: Report Parameter Tooltip
A typical tooltip for a report parameter lets you know if the value is required,
and lists the value type (for example: numerical) and range that is valid for this
instance. While values and its types are preset, the ranges vary with UNO PM
configuration.
Important: If the Range: null appears in the tooltip, as in Figure 10-21, no

PM data is available for this parameter. An error message opens.
Valid Range:
Null
Error
Message
Figure 10-21: Report Parameter Error Message: No Data
If at this stage you click Schedule & Close, the Schedule Report Execution
dialog box closes and the report is scheduled or run according to defaults or the
last setup. The Schedule option lets you quickly set up several reports that
share one or more scheduling parameters, without closing the dialog box.
3. To continue scheduling, click the next setup tab

Time Period Tab

In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box Time Period tab, you define the
period of time that data will be gathered for the report. You can use one of these
two methods to define Time Period:
Choosing one of the four Last...(hours, days, weeks, month) options
or
Defining the exact time period, using the User Defined data entry fields
Note: Last and User Defined modes are mutually exclusive.
These options provide you with maximum flexibility when scheduling.
To limit the report running time and to ensure that you get relevant results,
remember to correlate the values you define in this tab with the Report Type
you have defined.
For example: If you have selected a Half Hourly report type for a report, then
if your data collection time period is a month, the report may be too detailed
and will run for a long time.
Figure 10-22 shows an example of a default Time Period tab.
Time Period Tab
Last...
Mode Panel
Enable User
Defined Mode
User Defined
Time Period
Setup Panel
Figure 10-22: Schedule Report Execution Time Period Tab

Table 10-8 describes the Time Period tab fields.
Table 10-8: Schedule Report Execution Time Period Tab
Panel/Button Option/Entry Description

Field
Last... Mode Lets you set the time period using the Last... options. When any
Panel of these options is selected, the User Defined Time Period setup
fields are disabled (grayed out).
Last n Hours When this option is selected, the report will include only the data
covering the specified number of hours, going back a maximum of
24 hours from the current time. This is the default option.
Range: Range: 1-24 Hours
Default: 24 Hours
Last n Days When this option is selected, the report will include only the data
covering the specified number of days, going back for any number
of days up to a month, from the current date.
Range: Range: 1 -31 Days

Default: 1 Day
Last Week When this option is selected, the report will include only the data
covering the last seven days, from the current date and time.
Last Month When this option is selected, the report will include only the data
covering the last month, from the current date and time.
Enable User Enables a flexible setup, so you can schedule in a way that cannot
Defined Mode be defined by the Last... options.
Button
User Defined When data is entered in all User Defined Time Period fields, the
Time Period report will include information covering the specified period.
Setup Panel
Note: When defining time period for the first time in session, you
must enter both From and To time values, and both Date and
Time. Time fields are enabled only for the half-hourly and
hourly report type.
From Format:
Date: mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year
Time: hh(hour)=00-23; mm(minutes)=00-59
To Format
Date: mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year
Time: hh(hour)=00-23; mm(minutes)=00-59

To Define the Time Period for Report Execution
1. Select the required Last option by clicking the options button and go to
Step 4
The User Defined Time Period fields remain disabled (grayed out).
or if you want to define a different data collection period for the report,
click the User Defined button and go to Step 2
The User Defined Time Period setup fields are enabled.
2. Click in each field and enter the values in the From and To fields of the
time and date sections
The time period setup is completed.
Note: You can enter the values manually or by scrolling the up-down
arrows to find the required value. The values you define in this tab
should be correlated with and relevant to the Report Type you have
defined. For example: If you have selected a Half Hourly report
type for a report, then if your data collection time period is a month,
the report may be too detailed and will run for a long time.
3. Click Schedule & Close
The Schedule Report Execution dialog box closes and the report is
scheduled or run according to defaults or data that has been last entered
in the setup tabs.
or click Schedule
Parameters are saved and you can continue setting up the schedule for the
specific report and/or schedule new reports.
4. To continue scheduling, click the next setup tab
The Scheduling tab opens.

Scheduling Tab
In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box Scheduling tab, you define the
exact time and frequency of report execution. Several scheduling modes are
available for this purpose. Timing Information is applicable to the selected
schedule mode.
Figure 10-23 shows the default Scheduling tab.
Scheduling Tab Schedule Modes LIst
Schedule
Mode Panel
Timing
Information
Panel
Figure 10-23: Schedule Report Execution Scheduling Tab

Table 10-9 describes the available Schedule Mode options and the
corresponding Timing Information fields.
Table 10-9: Schedule Report Execution Scheduling Tab Fields
Schedule Mode Description Timing Information

Options
Immediate Schedules the report for immediate N/A (disabled)

execution. In this mode, the report is
executed only once.
Timed Schedules the report to run once at Date, Time
the specified date and time, within
the period that you defined in the Range: mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year
Time Period tab. Default: Current date, last used
Range: hh(hour)=00-23,mm(minutes)=00-59
Default: Current time, last used
Daily Schedules the report to run Time

repeatedly on a daily basis, on
specified days and time, within the Range: hh(hour)=00-23,mm(minutes)=00-59
period that you defined in the Time Default: Current time, last used
Period tab.
Daily Schedules the report to run once a

day, starting at the current date.
Every n Days Schedules the report to run once

every number of days, starting at the
current date.
Range: 1 - 31 Days
Default: Every 2 Days
Weekly Schedules the report to run Day of Week, Time

repeatedly on a weekly basis, at a
specified day of the week and time, Range: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
for a series of weeks, within the Default: Sun, Current Day
period that you defined in the Time
Period tab. Range: hh(hour)=00-23,mm(minutes)=00-59
Default: Current Time, last used
Weekly Schedules the report to run once

every week, on a specified day of
the week and at the specified time.

Table 10-9: Schedule Report Execution Scheduling Tab Fields (Cont.)
Schedule Mode Description Timing Information

Options
Every n Weeks Schedules the report to run once

every number of weeks, on a
specified day of the week and at the
specified time.
Range: 1 - 4 Weeks;
Default: 1 Week
Monthly The report is scheduled to run on a Day, Time

monthly basis, at a specified day and
time, within the period that you Range: Day (1-31)
defined in the Time Period tab. Default: Day 1
Range: hh(hour)=00-23,mm(minutes)=00-59
Default: Current Time
Monthly Schedules the report to run once

every month, on a specified day of
the month and at the specified time.
Every n Months Schedules the report to run once

every number of months, on a
specified day of the month and at
the specified time.
Range: 1 -12 Months

Default: 1 Month
Note: Any scheduling information that you specify in this tab, relates to the
Time Period information.

To Define Scheduling Mode and Timing for Report Execution
1. In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box upper panel, define the
agent, agent type, report category and select the report you want to
schedule from the Report Names list. See Figure 10-17, on page 10-30.
Once the report name is defined, you can schedule the report.
2. In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box lower panel, click the
Scheduling tab
The Scheduling tab opens, showing two main panels:
Schedule Mode
Timing Information
Note: If no report has been scheduled in the current session, only the
Schedule Mode panel is enabled and the drop-down mode list
displays the default Immediate mode.
3. From the Schedule Mode list, select the mode:
If you choose the Immediate mode, Timing Information remains
disabled, as it is not required for this mode, as in Figure 10-24.
For example: If you choose the Immediate mode the report will run
once, immediately after you click Schedule or Schedule & Close button.
Figure 10-24: Scheduling Tab - Immediate Mode
If you choose the Timed mode, the Timing Information setup fields that
are applicable to the chosen mode, are displayed, as in Figure 10-25.
There is no additional information to set up in the Schedule Mode panel.

For example: Typically, you will choose the Timed option when you
require the report to run once at a specific date and time in the future.
Figure 10-25: Scheduling Tab - Timed Mode
If you choose a schedule mode other than the Immediate or Timed

modes, additional option opens in the Schedule Mode panel, as in
Figure 10-26.
For example: If you choose Every 4 Days, the report will execute once
every 4 days at a time that you enter in the Timing Information, and will
run the same way for the total time period that you defined in the Time
Period tab.
Figure 10-26: Scheduling Tab - Daily Mode

Figure 10-27 shows the Weekly schedule mode.
Figure 10-27: Scheduling Tab - Weekly Mode
Figure 10-28 shows the Monthly schedule mode.
Figure 10-28: Scheduling Tab - Monthly Mode
For example: If you choose Every 2 Months, the report will execute once
every second month, on the day and time that you enter in the Timing
Information fields.
4. In the Every n (days, weeks or months) field next to the Schedule Mode,
scroll the up-down arrows to choose the required option or click the field
and enter the required values manually
The Schedule Mode is now set up.

5. In the Timing Information setup fields, scroll the up-down arrows to

choose the required option or click the field and enter the required values
manually
The report is scheduled to run in the mode at the times you specified,
within the Time Period defined for the report, and on the devices and
report parameters you defined in Report Parameters tab.
6. Click Schedule & Close
The Schedule Report Execution dialog box closes and the report is
scheduled and run according to defaults or according to current setup.
or click Schedule
Parameters are saved and you can continue setting up the schedule for the
specific report or schedule new reports.
7. To define the report output type and destination, click the
Output/Destination tab
The Output/Destination tab opens as in Figure 10-29.
Output/Destination Tab
Output Panel
Destination
Panel
Save File To
Options
Figure 10-29: Schedule Report Execution Output/Destination Tab

Output/Destination Tab
In Schedule Report Execution dialog box Output/Destination tab, you define
the destination and type of output for PM reports.
Table 10-10 describes the Output Destination tab options and fields.
Table 10-10: Schedule Report Execution Output Tab Options
Field/Panel Option/Button Description
Output Width Lets you define the maximum number of characters allowable in
a line of report text.
Range: 80, 132
Default: 80
Format Lets you define the file format for the report output from list of
the file formats that are valid for the currently scheduled report.
Range: Text, Spreadsheet, HTML

Default: Text
Destination Browser Lets you choose to view the output in the currently open or a new
output window.
Range: New, last used
Default: New
Printer Sends the report output to any local printer that you select from
the printers list.
E-mail Sends the report output as an E-mail to the address that you enter.
Filename Automatically displays the file name of the report you are
currently scheduling.
Note: You can edit the file name.
Save File To Global Directory Lets you save the selected report file to an UNO global directory.
Home Directory Lets you save the selected PM report file to a home directory.
Some output options for reports are not applicable and appear disabled (grayed
out). For example, Graphical reports are applicable only in the HTML format
and the Save File To option is enabled only for reports scheduled in the
Immediate mode.
For description of output formats, see on page 10-50.

To Define Output and Destination for the Report
1. Click on Format list in the Output panel and select the file format
Note: Usually, it is not necessary to change the default file format.
The report output file will have the format you defined.
2. If the selected format is text, from the Output Width list select the
required width of report text
3. From the Destination Browser list, select the required browser
File name appears in the Destination Filename entry field.
4. From the Destination Printer list, select the destination printer for the
output
or the E-Mail check button
5. If necessary, change the output file name, in the Filename field
6. In the Save File To panel, check either Home Directory or Global
Directory
Note: This option is enabled only for the reports that are scheduled in the
Immediate mode, and automatically display an output in the
browser window when completed. Other reports get automatically
saved to a default directory.
The scheduling procedure for the new report is complete.
To Execute the Scheduled Report
In the Schedule Report Execution dialog box, click Schedule or

Schedule & Close
- If the report is not scheduled to run in the Immediate mode, it is listed in
the Scheduled Reports Summary table to run at the specified time.
- If the report is scheduled to run in the Immediate mode, it starts running
at once. Report appears in the Report Execution Summary table and the
Status column informs you that the report is running. When done, status
changes to Completed (green) or Failed (red) and the report output
window opens.

Report Outputs: Types and Formats

If a report has executed in the Immediate scheduling mode, a report output
opens automatically when the report execution is over, but you can request to
view it at any time. Additional ways of invoking an output are:
PM Reports main window menu option or shortcut, see page 10-50
Report Instances window, see page 10-64
Reports Calendar, see page 10-94
Completed Report Output

When the report execution is completed successfully and data is available, a
Report Output opens in the browser window displaying summary data. A report
output presents the details of the report, according to the parameters and data
sample period you selected in the Report Parameters tab and Time Period tab of
the Schedule Report Execution dialog box.
Figure 10-30 shows an example of output for a completed report.
Figure 10-30: Completed Report: Output Example
Failed Report Output

When a report execution fails, a Report Output opens in the browser window
displaying the reason for failure. Typically, report output for a failed report
informs you that no data is available on specified agents or devices.

Report Outputs: Types and Formats UNO 2.16.3
Report Output Formats

The output file formats are: text (ASCII), HTML and spreadsheet.
Whether single or group, each PM report has a default file format which can be
viewed in the Schedule Report Execution Output/Destination tab. Therefore,
the output file format can be either:
a default format predefined for the report
a format you specified in the Schedule Report Execution
Output/Destination tab (if applicable)
To Request Report Output for Completed Reports
1. From PM Reports main window Report Execution Summary table,

select a report for viewing
The selected report is highlighted.
2. From the PM Reports main window Actions menu, select
Actions
View Report Output...
or right-click the selected Report Execution Summary table item and

choose View Report Output... from the shortcuts menu
Report output opens.
Figure 10-31 shows a text format output for a completed report.
Item
Requested
for Output
Text Format
Report Output
Figure 10-31: Report Output: Text

To View Graphical Output for Completed Reports
1. From PM Reports main window Report Execution Summary table,

select a report for viewing
Actions
View Graphical Output
or right-click the selected Report Execution Summary table item and

choose View Graphical Output... from the shortcuts menu
If the selected report can be represented as a graphical output, the
output opens.
Figure 10-32 shows an HTML format report output for the item that is
highlighted in the Report Execution Summary table. The JChart tab is open,
showing the report data in a graphical display.
JChart Tab
Formula One
Tab
Item
Requested
for Output
HTML Output
Figure 10-32: Report Output: JChart
Important: To be able to open Graphical Report outputs that were sent by

e-mail, ensure that you are using the (Netscape) browser on
UNIX. If you are not, contact your system administrator.

Report Outputs: Types and Formats UNO 2.16.3
Figure 10-33 shows the same report, in a spreadsheet format which displays
when the Formula One tab is open. The spreadsheet can be edited with the help
of a Formula One Wizard. The example shows an invoked editing tool.
Figure 10-33: Report Output: Spreadsheet and Wizard
For detailed information about viewing graphical and spreadsheet data, see
Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output on page 10-97.

Working with Scheduled Single Reports

This section describes procedures that you can perform in the Single Reports
mode after having scheduled or run some reports. When needed, you can:
Change schedule parameters
Remove a scheduled report from the Scheduled Reports list
Stop or retry a report execution
View report instance data and output
These options are provided in the Actions menu in the PM Reports main
window. Descriptions in this section follow the order of these options.
Changing Schedule Parameters

At any point you may decide to change the scheduling for a report or to run the
report on a different device, or to change the report type. This section describes
how to modify schedule parameters for a report when working in Single
Reports mode.
Note: For this procedure, only one report can be selected at a time.
To Open the Modify Report Parameters Dialog Box
1. In the PM Reports main window Scheduled Reports Summary table,

select a report you want to reschedule or modify
Actions
Modify Schedule
The Confirm Modifying Report Parameters dialog box opens.

3. Click Yes to continue

Working with Scheduled Single Reports UNO 2.16.3
The Modify Report Parameters dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-34.
Agent Type,
Report Category,
Agent(s), Report
Names (Disabled)
Selected Report
Report Type
(Enabled)
SetupTabs
(Enabled)
Reset Button
(Disabled)
Figure 10-34: Modify Report Parameters Dialog Box
Information appearing in the Modify Report Parameters is the same as that of

Schedule Report Execution dialog box.
The scheduled report which you have selected from the Scheduled Reports
in the main PM Reports window, is highlighted in the Report Names list
Only the Report Type list and the Scheduling tab are enabled for changes
The Reset button is disabled until a change is entered

To Change the Report Execution Schedule

1. If required, select another Report Type from the list
Last... mode default in the Time Period tab changes according to the
selected report type.
2. If required, using the setup tabs, change the scheduling for the report
3. When done, click Schedule & Close to apply changes and to exit
The dialog box closes.
Removing Reports from Schedule

You can delete items from the scheduled reports list.
Note: For this procedure, only one item can be selected at a time.
To Remove a Report from the Scheduled Reports List
1. In the PM Reports main window Scheduled Reports Summary table,

select a report you want to remove
Actions
Unschedule
The Confirm Unscheduling dialog box opens.

A warning message opens as in Figure 10-35.
Figure 10-35: Deleted Report Warning
The report is removed from the Scheduled Reports Summary table.
Caution: You cannot reverse the Unschedule action.

Viewing Schedule Information

You can view the setup parameters for a scheduled report.
Note: For this procedure, only one report can be selected at a time.
To Open View Report Parameters Dialog Box
1. From the Scheduled Reports Summary table in the PM Reports main

window, select a report
Actions
View Report Parameters...
The Confirm View Report Parameters prompt opens.

The View Report Parameters dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-36, on
page 10-57.
4. Click on any of the four setup tabs, to view the report schedule setup
5. When done, click Cancel to exit

View Report Parameters Dialog Box

This view-only dialog box displays the same information as other Actions
menu scheduling dialogs. The report you requested to view is highlighted in the
Report Name list.
Note: You cannot modify any parameters in this dialog box. All data entry
fields and lists are disabled (grayed out).
Figure 10-36 shows the View Report Parameters dialog box.
Selected Report
Agent Type,
Report Category,
Agent(s),
Report Names
(Disabled)
Report Type
(Disabled)
Setup Tabs
(Enabled for
Viewing only)
Action Buttons
(Disabled)
Cancel Button
Figure 10-36: View Report Parameters Dialog Box

Stopping Report Execution

You may decide to stop a running report execution. Typically, you will do this
when the report is no longer relevant to your task, or when the report execution
is taking much longer than expected, given the parameters that you configured.
That means you might have to reschedule this report later, using the Modify
Schedule Parameters dialog box.
To Stop a Running Report
1. In the PM Reports main window, select a running report from the Report
Execution Summary table
Note: You can identify the running report by the Status column
information and by the color code - white.
Actions
Abort Execution
or right-click the selected report and choose the option from the shortcuts
menu
The Confirm Abort Execution dialog box opens.
The status bar informs you that the report execution is being aborted.
When done, the report status and color code changes to Aborted
(purple).
Figure 10-37 shows the right mouse menu shortcut.
Report Status: Running

Running
Report Shortcut
Option
Figure 10-37: Abort Execution Shortcut

Retrying Report Execution

You can rerun any report that is listed as failed or aborted in the Report
Execution Summary Status column.
To Retry Report Execution from the PM Reports Actions Menu
1. In the PM Reports main window, select a failed report from the Report
Execution Summary table
Actions
Retry Execution
right-click the selected report and choose the option from the shortcuts
menu
The Confirm Retry Execution dialog box opens.
- The status bar informs of the current action.
- The report status in the Status column of the Execution Summary Table,
changes to Running (white).
- When the execution is over, the report status changes to Completed
(green) or Failed (red).
Report output window opens. See on page 10-50.
4. To exit the Report Output window, click File > Close
The output window closes.
For the description of the available report output types, see Report Output
Formats on page 10-50.
You can also rerun a report from the Report Instances window. This window is
described in the next section.

Using the Report Instances Window

Report instance information refers to the report execution on a specific agent. If
a report has run on several agents, this dialog box allows you to view and act on
the individual report instances.
You can use the Report Instances Window to perform these actions:
View report parameters and agent information for each of the agents that
are a part of report execution
Rerun any or all failed or aborted report instances
Stop a running report instance
Invoke report output
Viewing Report Instance Information
To View Report Instance Data
1. From the Report Execution Summary table in the PM Reports main

window, select a report
Note: You can select only one report at a time.
Actions
Report Instance Data...
or right-click the selected report and choose the option from the shortcuts
menu
or double-click the item (the fastest way)
The Report Instances Window opens, as in Figure 10-38, on page 10-61.
Instance information for the requested report appears in the window.
3. When done, click the Close button
The Report Instances window closes.

Figure 10-39 shows the Report Instances Window for a completed execution.
Only the Close and Help buttons are enabled for this instance.
Report
Parameters
Agent
Specific Data
Table
Action
Buttons
Figure 10-38: Report Instances Window
Report Instances Window

Table 10-11 describes the Report Instances Window.
Table 10-11: Report Instances Window Fields
Report Displays a row of report schedule parameters that you defined in the Schedule Report
Parameters Execution dialog box.
Agent Specific This table displays the report instance information, that is the part of the report execution
Data that was performed on a specific agent. Table columns are:
- Agent Name name of the agent for this report instance
- Status current status (Failed, Completed, Running, Aborted)
- Error Code code for the error that caused the report execution to fail
- Error Desc(ription) details of execution failure cause
Note: The columns are not sortable, but you can adjust their width.
Retry When the report status in the Agent Specific Data table reads Failed, this button is
activated to enable a rerun of the report execution on the agent that you select from the
Agent Specific Data table.
Retry all When the report status in the Agent Specific Data table reads Failed and there is more
Failures than one report instance, this button is activated to enable a rerun of all current report
instances that failed.

Table 10-11: Report Instances Window Fields (Cont.)
Abort When the Retry button has been pressed and a report is being rerun, this button
lets you stop the running report instance.
Close Closes the Report Instances Window.
View Report Invokes the Report Output for the completed report on the agent that you select
Output from the Agent Specific Data table.
Help Invokes the PM Reports Online Help topic.
Rerunning and Stopping Report Instances
To Rerun a Report Execution Instance
1. Click the Retry button

The Confirm Retry Entry dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-39, on
page 10-63.

Reporting starts on the selected instance. The report status changes to
Running. When done, report output window opens
You can also rerun all failed execution instances for the report.
To Rerun All Failed Report Instances
1. Click the Retry All Failures button

The Confirm Retry Selected Entry dialog box opens.
Reporting starts on all currently displaying failed report instances on the
agent (the same as appears in the Agent Specific Data table). The report
status changes to Running. When done, report output window opens.
While the report is running, the Abort button is enabled

Figure 10-39 illustrates the retry report execution procedure.
Report
Parameters
Report Data
Retry
Execution
Confirm ation
Retry Buttons
Figure 10-39: Report Instances Window Retry Execution Confirm
To Stop Report Instance Execution
1. While the report is running, click the Abort button

The Confirm dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-40, on page 10-64.
The report execution is stopped immediately. The status bar in the PM
Reports main window informs you that the report execution is being
stopped. When done, the report status changes to Aborted (purple) in
the Report Execution Summary.

Figure 10-40 shows the Report Instances Window when Abort Execution is
requested.
Running Report
Confirm Abort
Entry
Abort Button
(Enabled)
Figure 10-40: Aborting a Report from Report Instances Window
You can view the report output of the completed report.
To View Output for a Report Instance
Click the View Report Output button

Report output opens in default format or in the format that you defined in
the Output/Destination tab of the Schedule Execution dialog box.
Note: For information on report output formats, see on page 10-50.
While the Report Instances window remains open, you can also view data on
reports other than the present item that is currently showing in the Report
Parameters field. See on page 10-60.
This concludes the description of procedures and options available in the PM
Reports Single Reports mode and main window Actions menu.

Scheduling PM Reports in Group Reports Mode

This section describes the PM Reports Group Reports mode and main window
Groups menu options that enable you to define and run groups of reports.
In this mode, several reports are grouped under one name and share the same
execution schedule although the parameters for each group member report are
set up individually, just as single reports. In addition to saving time by
scheduling once for several reports, the Group Reports mode provides an
effective configuration method to receive related data for comparison. The user
who sets up the group is the group owner. The number of group reports that a
single user can set up, is limited.
Group Reports Mode

To work with group reports, you must first switch to the Group Reports mode.
To Start the Group Reports Mode
In the PM Reports main window Filter fields:

From Mode, select Group Reports
Group Summary table replaces the Scheduled Reports Summary and
displays the group reports that are currently scheduled. All the Groups
menu options are enabled.
Figure 10-41 example shows the activated Group Reports mode.
Group Reports
Mode Enabled
Table Name
Group
Summary
Table
Figure 10-41: Group Summary Table

Scheduling PM Reports in Group Reports Mode UNO 2.16.3
Group Summary Table

Group Summary table shows:
Scheduled groups of reports, filtered according to the current Agent and
User ID, see Figure 10-15, on page 10-28
Table columns (group parameters) that you defined as visible in the Table
Properties dialog box Group Status tab, and sorted using the Move Up or
Move Down buttons, see Figure 10-13, on page 10-25. The default Group
Summary columns are:
User ID (creator/owner of group)
Group Name
Scheduled Mode
Scheduled Date/Time
Defining Group Reports

Scheduling options for group reports are provided in the PM Reports Groups
menu, as in Figure 10-42.
Figure 10-42: PM Reports Groups Menu
To set up a new group report, you need to open the Create Group dialog box.
To Open the Create Group Dialog Box
From the PM Reports main window Groups menu, select

Groups
Create Group
or right-click in the Group Summary table and choose this option from the
shortcuts menu
The Create Group Reports dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-43, on
page 10-67.

Figure 10-43 shows the Create Group dialog box.
Define Group
Tab (Active)
Group Name
Field
Group Name
Panel
Schedule Mode
Panel
Mode
Frequency
Timing
Information
Panel
Time
Group Action
Buttons
Figure 10-43: Create Group - Define Group Tab

Create Group Reports Dialog Box

You can schedule a new group of reports when working in Single Reports
mode. This is the only Groups menu option that is enabled when not in Group
Reports mode. To view the scheduled group, you do need to switch the mode.
The new group appears in the Group Summary table.
Figure 10-43, on page 10-67 shows a default Create Group Reports dialog box.
Two tabs are showing:
Define Group (visible tab) - to define the group name and scheduling
(common parameters)
Edit/View Group Report - to select member reports and define specific
parameters
Define Group Tab

This tab lets you define the common report group parameters, as opposed to
information related to the specific reports. Group scheduling is similar to the
scheduling of single reports, in the Schedule Report Execution dialog box
Scheduling tab, see on page 10-40. The same parameters apply.
The Define Group tab displays three panels:
Group Name to define the name of the new group, typically relating to
a common characteristic or to user name
Schedule Mode to define how often the report is to be generated
Timing Information to define when the report is to run
Figure 10-43 shows a default Define Group tab:
Group Name field is empty
Schedule Mode and Frequency fields show: Daily, Every 1 Days
Timing Information field shows the current time
All action buttons are enabled

Table 10-12 describes the Create Group dialog box Define Group tab.
Table 10-12: Create Group - Define Group Tab Fields
Panel Field/Button Description
Group Name Group Name Lets you define the name of the group. The reports you add to the
group will be represented by this name in the Group Summary
table.
The group name you enter in this field can represent a common
criterion, for example a report category, or type of scheduling.
For example: If you are scheduling several CDL reports to run
at a certain time every two weeks, you can name the group:
cdl_2weekly. You can also give your groups a name that
identifies the owner, that is the UNO user who created the group.
Schedule Mode Lets you define how often the report is to be generated. For setup
description, see Schedule Report Execution dialog box
Scheduling tab, on page 10-40.
Mode
Range: Timed, Daily, Weekly, Monthly
Default: Daily, or last used
Note: The Immediate mode is not available for group reports.
Frequency Varies for each schedule mode.
Range: Every n Days, Every n Weeks, Every n Months

Default: Every 1 Day, or last used
Timing Varies with each schedule mode. Lets you define the day of the
Information day of the week and the time when the group is to execute. For
setup description, see Schedule Report Execution dialog box
Time Period tab, on page 10-37.
Group Action Add to Group & Adds the new group to the Group Summary table and closes the
Buttons Close dialog box.
Add to Group Adds the new group to the Group Summary table, leaving the
dialog box open.
Note: For description of common action buttons, see on page 10-33.

To Define a New Group Report
1. Enter the group name of your choice in the Group Name field
2. In the Schedule Mode panel, define the required schedule mode and
frequency of report execution
Note: If you choose the Timed scheduling mode, the group will execute
only once.
3. In the Timing Information panel, define the required time for report
execution
Note: Allow at least a few minutes between the current time and the
execution time, to enable the scheduling to be registered. If this
interval is too short, the execution time will be missed. If the group
report is scheduled in the Timed mode (runs once), and has not
executed, the group will continue to feature in the Group Summary
table. You can reschedule the group.
If you have set the execution time that is too close to the current time, a
message opens, as in Figure 10-44.
Figure 10-44: Incorrect Group Execution Time Error Message
4. Click Ok and correct the timing information

5. Click Add to Group
- The Add to Group action button color changes to dark gray until the
group is added and the dialog box is disabled for the update duration.
- The new group is added to the Group Summary table in the PM Reports
main window.
- The Edit/View Group Reports tab is enabled.
- The name of the dialog box changes to Modify Group Definitions.
Note: Adding a new group to the Group Summary table may take a few
moments.
You can now define and schedule the reports which will be included in the new
group. This is done in the Edit/View Group Reports tab.

To Open Edit/View Group Reports Tab
Click the Edit/View Group Reports tab

The tab opens.
Edit/View Group Reports Tab

This tab allows you to select and schedule the individual reports for the group.
Figure 10-43 shows the dialog box with the Edit/View Group Reports tab at
default state.
Dialog Box Name Edit/View Group Reports Tab

(Changed)
Group Reports
Summary Table
Add New Report

to Group (Report
Definition Panel)
Reports
Parameters Tab
Time Period Tab
Output/
Destination Tab
Default Report
Parameter
Figure 10-45: Edit/View Group Reports Tab

When you open this tab:

- The dialog box name changes to Modify Group Definitions
- There are no items in the Group Reports Summary table
- Agent Type and Agent fields show the selected filters
- The Report Category does not show Exception Reports which are not
applicable in the Group Reports mode
- Add New Report to Group panel name includes the new group name
- No reports are highlighted in the report names list
- Report Parameters tab is enabled
Table 10-13 describes the Create Group Reports dialog box Edit/View Group
Reports tab fields.
Table 10-13: Edit/View Group Reports Tab Fields
Panel Field/Option Description
Group Reports Group Reports Lists the scheduled reports that you define for the group in
Summary Summary Table the Add New Report to Group fields. Lets you edit group
items. The default columns for this table are:
User ID, Report Name, Report Category, Agent Type,
Output Type, File/Printer Name, Command String
These columns are adjustable and sortable. They display
the table properties settings defined for this table.
Add New Report Agent Type In these fields you define which reports will be added to the
to Group Agent(s) current group. Report setup is the same as in the Single
(Report Report Category Reports mode, see page 10-33.
Definition Panel) Report Name
Report Type
Scheduling Tabs Report Parameters See Report Parameters Tab on page 10-35
Time Period See Time Period Tab on page 10-37
Output/Destination See Output/Destination Tab on page 10-47
Note: For the complete report parameters list for all UNO 2.16.3 PM reports,
see PM Reports Descriptions on page 10-111.

To Define Report for Group
In the Add New Report To Group panel:

1. From the Agent Type list, select the Agent Type
2. In the Agent(s) list, select the agent
3. From the Report Category list, select the category
Note: You cannot include any Exception Reports in a group.
4. From the Report Name list, select the report
5. From the Report Type list, select the report type for the report
6. When done, click Add to Group
The new report group appears in the Group Summary table.
You have completed selecting the new report for the current group. Now you
can schedule the report in the setup tabs, as you did while working in the Single
Reports mode. For additional setup information, see Defining the Execution
Schedule on page 10-34.
To Schedule Report for Group
1. In the Report Parameters tab, set parameter values for the report
2. In Time Period tab, define the data sampling period for the report
3. In the Output/Destination tab, set up the output file format and
destination
The report is added to Group Reports Summary table and the dialog box
remains open. You can:
Add more reports to the group
Define and schedule another group
Reset the scheduling tabs information to defaults and reschedule
Exit the dialog box
5. If you have completed scheduling reports for the current group, click Add
to Group & Close
The Create Group Reports dialog box closes. The new group report shows
in the PM Reports main window Group Summary table.

To Add More Reports to the Current Group
1. Repeat the procedure in the Add New Report To Group panel, as on

page 10-73, to select the new report
2. Select or enter the required scheduling information in the tabs

The report is added to Group Reports Summary table.
While you are working in the Create Group dialog box, you can define and
schedule additional groups.
To Define and Schedule a New Group
1. Click the Define Group tab

The tab opens.
2. Repeat the procedure, as on page 10-70.
The new group is added to the Group Summary table in the main window.
4. To add reports to the new group, click the Edit/View Group Reports tab
and repeat the procedure, as on page 10-73
The report is added to Group Reports Summary table.
5. When done, click Add to Group & Close
When the reports belonging to the group execute, they appear in the Report
Execution Summary table and can be viewed for around 6 hours following
completion. Scheduled groups however, remain listed in the Group Summary.
Note: If needed, you can stop a running report, see on page 10-58.

Working with Scheduled Group Reports

This section describes the options available from the PM Reports main window
Groups menu.
Deleting Groups
You can delete a group report from the Group Summary table.
Important: Only an administrative user can delete a group that was set up by
another user.
To Delete a Group Report
1. From the PM Reports main window Group Summary table, select an

item you want to remove from the table
2. From the PM Reports main window Groups menu, select
Groups
Delete Group
or right-click to choose this option from the shortcuts menu

The Delete Selected Group confirmation dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes
The group is removed from the Group Summary table.
Caution: You cannot reverse the Delete action.

Working with Scheduled Group Reports UNO 2.16.3
Viewing Group Report Information

You can examine the reports that have been defined for a group by using the
Edit Group option.
Important: Any user can view group report definitions for a group that was
set up by another user.
To View Reports in a Group
Note: For this task, you can select only one item.
1. From the Group Summary table, select an item you want to view
From the PM Reports main window Groups menu, select
Groups
Edit Group

The Modify Group Definitions dialog box opens.
2. Click the Edit/View Group tab
The tab opens. In the Group Reports Summary table you can view the
reports that have been defined for the current group.
Note: You can use the horizontal scroll to examine the attributes of the
report that are hidden from view.
3. To exit the Modify Group Definitions, click Cancel

Editing Group Report Definitions

You can edit information for any group that you have set up.
Important: Only an administrative user can change group report definitions

for a group that was set up by another user.
To Open Modify Group Definitions Dialog Box
1. From the Group Summary table in the PM Reports main window, select
the group you want to edit
Note: You can select only one group.
2. From the Groups menu, select
Groups
Edit Group

The Modify Group Definitions dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-46, on
page 10-78, showing the Define Group tab.
The same information appears as that in the Create Group Reports dialog box.
The Group Name field shows the name of the group you selected for editing
from the Group Summary table. All fields are enabled for modifying.
To Change the Group Name
1. In the Group Name field, edit the group name

The current group name is changed. Group Action Buttons change to
Save Changes & Close and Save Changes
2. Click Save Changes to apply the changes and continue editing or click
Save Changes & Close to apply changes and exit
The button remains depressed (dark gray) for the duration of update.
When done, the button changes back to light gray. The new name appears
in the Group Name column of the Group Summary, in the main window.

Figure 10-46 shows the Modify Group Definition dialog box Define Group tab
after the change was entered (action buttons changed).
Selected
Group Name
Save Changes
Action Buttons
Figure 10-46: Modify Group Definitions - Define Group Tab
To Change Group Scheduling
1. In the Schedule Mode panel, select a new report schedule mode from the
list and enter new frequency values (every n... days, weeks or months), if
required
For example: If you want the report to run once at a specific time instead
of on a daily basis, the scheduled mode needs to be replaced by the timed
mode.
Timing Information panel changes according to the selected schedule
mode.

2. In the Timing Information panel, enter the required information

The reports belonging to the group will execute according to the new
schedule.
3. Click Save Changes to apply the changes and continue editing or click
Save Changes & Close to apply changes and exit
Group scheduling is updated and shows in the Scheduled Mode column of
the Group Summary table in the main window.
Adding, Editing and Deleting Reports in Group

You can modify parameters for individual reports in the group as well as add
new reports to group. You may want to add a report or reports to group to get
additional related information (typically in the same report category), or to get
data on the basis of a different report type, or on the basis of a different time
period. To work with individual reports in the group, you need to open the
Edit/View Group Reports tab.
To Add a New Report to Group
Note: For this procedure, you can choose only one item.
1. Click the Edit/View Group Reports tab
The tab opens.
2. With your cursor in the Group Reports Summary table, right-click to
open the shortcuts menu and choose Add New Report to Group
The report definition panel name changes to Add New Report to Group
(group name). The Report Names list becomes active.
3. To make further changes, from the report definition panel, select the
Agent Type, Agent and Report Category
4. From the Report Names list, select the report you want added to the
current group
5. Select the Report Type
6. In the setup tabs, set up the report parameters, time period and output
options for the report you are adding to group
The report is added to the Group Reports Summary table.

Figure 10-47 shows the tab and Group Reports Summary shortcuts menu.
Group
Reports
Summary
Shortcuts
Menu
Figure 10-47: Modify Group Definition Edit/View Group Tab
You can edit any or all setups for:

Report Type
Report Parameters, for example choose another device
Time Period, for example for data to be collected over a longer/shorter
period, change the Last... option
Output/Destination, for example if the default format is HTML, you can
change it to text format and send to an E-mail address

To Edit a Report in the Group
1. From the Group Reports Summary table, select an item

The item is highlighted.
2. With your cursor on the item, right-click to open Group Reports Summary
table options and select Edit Selected Report
The Report Definition panel name changes to Edit Selected Report From
Group (group name) and the report definition fields are disabled. In the
Report Names list, the report you selected is highlighted.
3. From the Report Type list, select the new report type
Note: Report type you choose should be relevant to the current schedule
mode. The change also affects the Time Period Last... options.
The Time Period Last... mode changes according to the new report type.
4. Click the Report Parameters tab and enter new parameter values
The report will execute according to the new parameters.
5. Click the Time Period tab and define new data collection period
Report data will be collected using the new time period.
6. Click the Output/Destination tab and enter or select required format and
destination
7. Click the Save Changes button to apply the change and continue editing
other reports in the group
The button remains depressed (dark gray) for the duration of update.
When done, the button changes back to light gray. Report definition fields
are enabled again.
8. When done, click Save Changes and Close to exit
The Modify Group Definitions dialog box closes. The group information is
updated. The reports for the edited group will execute according to the
new setup.

To Delete a Group Item
1. From the Group Reports Summary table, select an item

2. With your cursor on the item, right-click to open Group Reports Summary
table shortcuts and select Delete Report from Group
The Delete Selected Report from Group confirmation dialog box opens.
Caution: You cannot reverse the Delete action, therefore ensure that you
are removing only the required reports.

The report is removed from the Group Reports Summary table.
4. Click the Save Changes and Close action button
The Modify Group Definitions dialog box closes.
This concludes the description of procedures and options available in the Group
Reports mode and main window Groups menu.

Monitoring PM Reports
This section describes the report monitoring means that are provided in the PM
Reports main window Tools menu, as in Figure 10-48.
Figure 10-48: PM Reports Tools Menu
Collection Status Monitor

This tool lets you view the transfer of PM data from the agents to the UNO
Manager to test if data is being transferred consistently. This way, when
planning reports, you can ensure there is raw data at your disposal.
You can set up a time frame for monitoring and view both failed (not
generated) and completed reports. For description, see on page 10-84.
Reports Calendar
This tool lets you investigate historical report information, for monitoring and
diagnostic purposes. In addition it links you to a graphical display of report
comparison statistics, further enhancing report analysis and through this,
enhancing network performance management.
In the Reports Calendar table, you can view reports according to execution
date. This way you can quickly check which reports were completed and which
executions failed on the selected day. You can also check if reports that were
scheduled to run periodically, executed on time. For description, see on
page 10-91.
In the Calendar, you can investigate historical reports further, using these
additional options:
view report execution parameters, see on page 10-93
view report outputs and graphical outputs, where applicable, see on
page 10-94
compare similar reports and invoke a graphical display of comparison
statistics, see on page 10-100

Monitoring PM Reports UNO 2.16.3
Viewing PM Data Transfer

To define the required data collection period for monitoring, you need to open
Monitor Setup.
To Invoke the Collection Status Monitor
From the PM Reports main window Tools menu, select

Tools
The Collection Status Monitor Setup dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-49.
Agent(s) List
Last n Hours User

Time Period Defined
Button and Field Time
Period
Button
Time Period
Setup
Action Buttons
Figure 10-49: Collection Status Monitor Setup Dialog Box
This dialog box presents information which you are already familiar with:
- Agent(s); the list of agents available to your host
- Last n Hours and User Defined buttons to set up the Time Period mode
- Time Period fields to define the data collection start and end time and date
- Ok, Apply, Cancel and Help standard Action buttons
Note: For Time Period setup procedure, see Time Period Tab on page 10-37.

Setting Up PM Data Collection
To Define Data Collection Setup for Monitoring
1. From the Agent(s) list, select an agent

2. Click Last N Hours or User Defined
If you choose Last N Hours, click the field and enter the hours.
If you choose User Defined, the Time Period setup panel is enabled.
Click in the fields to enter required values manually or choose the
values using the up-down arrows.
Note: You have to enter values for From..., To..., Time and Date.
3. Click Apply at any stage to continue setup
The Collection Status Monitor opens, as in Figure 10-50.
4. When done, click Ok to close the dialog box

When you apply your setup, the monitor window opens and tables begin
loading. You are notified about the progress and when all data for the time
period you defined has loaded and the tables are complete, you can scroll up
and down to view the reports.
When the window first opens, the default is PM Records.
You can select any combination of records to view in the window. Figure 10-50
shows the Collection Status Monitor with data in all four tables.

Figure 10-50 shows the Collection Status Monitor with data in all four tables.
Menu Bar
PM
Records
CDL
Records
ESR
Records
SAR
Records
Figure 10-50: PM Data Transfer Display in Collection Status

Monitor
Table 10-14 describes the Data Collection Monitor fields.
Table 10-14: Data Collection Monitor Fields
Field Description
Menu Bar Provides menu options for the window.
Records Tables Shows the PM records tables in the layout that you specify. Above the table, the current
Sort Index and Sort Order information is provided. As with other PM Reports tables,
you can sort and order the monitor table columns to search and read items faster. For
information on sorting, see on page 10-14. The sort settings can be saved. Data
Collection Status Monitor table columns are:
Agent, Agent Name, Database Name, Type, Time, Loading Status.
Table 10-15 shows the menu options available from this window.

Table 10-15: Data Collection Monitor Menu Options
File Setup Invokes the monitor setup dialog box.

Close Exits the monitor.
Sort By Agent Name Lets you sort the tables according to one or more columns.
By Agent Type Sorts all currently displaying tables. You can view the current
By Database Name sort index of each table.
By Record Type
By Time
By Status
Custom Sort
Agent:Name:Status:Time
Status:Time
View PM Allows you to configure the monitor layout components by

CDL checking any or all record tables.
ESR Default: PM or the last saved setup
SAR
Help Opens the Online Help topic.

To Define Collection Status Monitor Layout Components
1. In the monitors View menu, click next to the name of table you want
displayed
The selected (checked) table opens in the monitor.
2. To hide the display, uncheck the table
To View Data for Another Agent or Time Period
1. From the Collection Status Monitor File menu, select Setup

The Collection Status Monitor Setup dialog box reappears.
2. From Agent(s) list, select an agent
3. Configure a new data collection Time Period, as described on page 10-85
4. Click Apply
The Collection Status Monitor reappears and new data is loading.
To Close the Collection Status Monitor
1. From the File menu, select Exit

The Close Monitor Window prompt opens.
2. Click Yes
The monitor window closes.

Using the Reports Calendar

The main advantage of the Reports Calendar is the ability to display historical
reports by date. You can choose single or multiple dates.
To Invoke Reports Calendar
From the PM Reports main window Tools menu, select
Tools
Reports Calendar
The Reports Calendar dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-51.
Month Year Show Reports By Date
Menu Bar
Monthly
Calendar
Current
(Default) Date
Report
Calendar Table
Status Bar
Figure 10-51: Reports Calendar at Invocation
Note: When invoked, the default Calendar shows report executions for the
default date regardless of the current filters (agents and user ID). If no
reports have run on the date, the Report Calendar table is empty.

Table 10-16 describes the Reports Calendar fields and buttons.
Table 10-16: Reports Calendar Window Fields
Menu Bar Reports Calendar self-explanatory menu options are:

File > Close to exit the Calendar
Help > Help... to open the Reports Calendar Online Help topic
Month of the Year Shows the twelve months of the year in descending order.
Range: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Current month (for the defined year), or last used
Year Shows current and previous year.
Range: 2004, 2003

Default: Current year (2004), or last used
Monthly Calendar Shows the calendar for the month and the year that are currently defined in the
Month and Year fields.
Default: Current month, with the current date highlighted in red.
Selected Date The selected days of the monthly calendar are highlighted in red. Reports appear
(Highlighted) when you request to show reports by date.
Show Reports By Updates the Report Calendar table according to the selected date or dates, year and
Date month.
Report Calendar This summary table displays the reports that were requested for viewing. Above the
Table table, the current Sort Index and Sort Order information is provided. As with other
PM Reports tables, you can sort and order the Report Calendar table columns to
search and read items faster.
For shortcut options for this table, see Table 10-22, on page 10-110.
Table properties for this table correspond to the current Report Execution Summary
table setup, see Table 10-4, on page 10-23. To change the properties, that is to
configure table columns, see on page 10-26.
Status Bar Informs you of the progress/completion of the current/last action.
For shortcut menu options for the Reports Calendar, see Shortcut Menus on
page 10-108

Viewing Reports by Date

Viewing historical reports by date lets you check at one glance which reports
were completed and which executions failed, on the selected days. You can also
find out if the reports that were scheduled to run periodically did in fact execute
on time.
To View Reports by Date
1. If needed, from the Year field, click on the arrow and scroll to select the
required year
2. From the Month field, click on the arrow and scroll to select the required
month
The Monthly Calendar changes to display the month that you selected.
3. From the Monthly Calendar, click on the date or dates for which you
want to view reports
Note: Control-click to select several dates.
The dates are picked out in red.
4. Press the Show Reports by Date button
Reports that have executed on the Requested date appear in the Report
Calendar table.
5. Repeat steps 1 through step 4 to view reports on other dates or proceed to
additional Reports Calendar options:
view report parameters
view report output
compare similar reports
6. When done, select
File
Close
The Exit Reports Calendar confirmation dialog box opens.

7. Click Yes to exit the Reports Calendar
You return to the PM Reports main window.

Figure 10-52 shows an example of the Show Reports By Date result.
Show Reports by Date
Requested
Month and
Year
Requested
Date
Summary
of Reports
for Date
Status Bar
Scheduled
Date/Time Column
Figure 10-52: Reports Calendar - Viewing by Date
Report Calendar Table displays the report execution summary according to

the current sort index and sort order, as indicated in the table header
The date in Schedule Date/Time column shows the requested date
Status Bar informs about the completed task
Using data in the Reports Calendar table, you can compare the executed
reports, their status (shown in color-code) and execution information.

Viewing Report Parameters from the Calendar Table

You can view the setup information for each report listed in the Reports
Calendar table to check the parameters that were defined for this reports
execution. This is the only way to view the schedule setup on a historical
report. You can scroll across the window to view report parameters, scheduling,
output and destination, as in Figure 10-53.
Note: The Report Parameters window is identical with the Report Parameters
panel in the Report Instances Window, see on page 10-61.
Figure 10-53 shows a parameters window invoked from the calendar.
Report Parameters Window
Report
Parameters
Information
Figure 10-53: Report Parameters Window in Reports Calendar
To View Report Parameters
Note: You can only select one item at a time.

1. From the Reports Calendar table, select an item

2. Right-click the item to open the shortcuts menu, and choose Report
Parameters...
The Report Parameters Window opens, as in Figure 10-53.
3. Scroll across to view the information
4. To exit, click Close
The Report Parameters Window closes.
Viewing Report Output from Reports Calendar

From Reports Calendar, you can view the report output for any report. Two
options are provided for this purpose:
View Report Output
View Graphical Output
The same procedure applies for both options, but some reports will not show as
graphical outputs.
To View Report Output
Note: You can only select one item at a time.

1. Select the date on which the report was scheduled to be executed
The list of executed reports for the specific date appears in the Report
Calendar table.
2. From the Report Calendar table, select an item
3. Right-click the item to open the shortcuts menu, and choose View Report
Output... or View Graphical Output...
If you request View Report Output, the output for the report opens in the
default format for the report or in a format that was defined in the
Output/Destination setup tab, see page 10-47.
If you request View Graphical Output, the report output opens in a graph
format, where applicable.
If you request an output of a failed execution, the output displays failure
information.
For more information on report outputs, see on page 10-50.

Comparing Similar Reports

You can request a comparison chart for similar reports listed in the Reports
Calendar table that were completed at different times and dates. For example,
you can compare the results of several report executions for the same report
that was run at various times or scheduled in various ways (for example on a
daily or weekly basis, or at different hours).
Comparisons are valid for Single Reports that share these attributes:
Agent Type
Report Category
Report Name
Report Parameters
Note that the Report Type is not a shared attribute - it may vary with each
execution schedule. Thus you can compare data for a half hourly, hourly, busy
hour or any other Report Type that is valid for the report. You can also compare
data from several data collection intervals.
For full description of a single report execution setup, see Scheduling PM
Reports in Single Reports Mode on page 10-29.
To Select Reports for Comparison
1. From the Report Calendar table, select a completed report that you want
to compare with other reports
2. Right-click on the selected report and choose Compare with Same
Reports... from the shortcuts menu
The Compared Reports List opens, as in Figure 10-54, on page 10-96,
showing the list all reports that share the required attributes and that have
run on the selected date. The dialogs name is identical to the name of the
report under comparison.
If you want to get a different list of similar reports, press the Cancel
button.
If there are no reports to compare, a message opens. Click OK to close
the dialog box and make a new and different request.
3. Select one or more reports. Shift-click for multiple selection.
The selections are highlighted. The selected reports will be included in the
comparison. To deselect, click on a highlighted report.

4. Press the Show Selected Reports button

or press Cancel to return to the Reports Calendar and request another
comparison
The JChart window opens with the Chart View tab open, as in Figure 10-55,
on page 10-97. The legend provides a color-coded list of reports (names and
execution dates) under comparison.
Note: If you are working over the Web, the chart opens in a browser
window.
You can keep this output open while making a new comparison request in the
PM Reports Calendar. Figure 10-54 shows and example of the compared reports
list.
Report Name
Compared
Reports List
by Interval
Show
Reports
Button
Figure 10-54: Compared Reports List Dialog Box Example

.
Table 10-17 describes the Compared Reports List dialog box.
Table 10-17: Compared Reports List Dialog Box
Report List Lists reports in the database that share required

attributes with the reports you selected from the
Report Calendar table.
Show Selected Reports Invokes the comparison charts for the selected
reports.
Cancel Closes the list and returns to Reports Calendar.
For the description of graphical output use and types of report comparisons, see
Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output .

Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output

JClass Chart capability in PM Reports lets you view graphical outputs in a
chart or a spreadsheet format. The typical uses of JChart are:
Viewing graphical report outputs - from the PM Reports main window
Report Execution summary and from the Reports Calendar, as described on
page 10-51
Viewing graphical report outputs and comparing report statistics - from the
Reports Calendar, as described on page 10-94
This section describes the JClass Chart display use. This versatile visual tool
provides options that help you identify network performance malfunctions and
to anticipate potential problems on the basis of the analysis.
Chart View Tab

Figure 10-55 shows an example of the Chart View tab, showing a comparison of
reports similar to SDU PCF-RA-MM (pmC record type 113), that were
executed on June 27th 2002. Data was collected on eight half-hourly intervals.
Figure 10-55: Report Chart View Tab

Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output UNO 2.16.3
Table 10-18 describes the Chart View tab fields and buttons.
.
Table 10-18: Report Window Chart View Tab
Group of Reports This list lets you select the device level to view, for example an OMCR or a
CBSC summary level. You can also view reports from a specific OMCR
List of Devices Contains all devices relevant to the report. As a default, the comparison source
is all the devices contained in the summary device. You can select any or all
devices from the list and request a new chart.
Select All Devices Selects all items in the List of Devices.
Unselect All Devices Deselects all items in the List of Devices.
Parameters List Lists all the reports that are the chart parameters.
Select All Params Selects all items in the Parameters List.
Unselect All Params Deselects all items in the Parameters List.
Show Chart Invokes a new display.

Note: At least one parameter on one device has to be selected as source to enable
the Show Chart button.
Display Area Shows graph of report output or report comparison. Contains these elements:
header - displays information about the graph
y- axis - represents peg values
x- axis represents devices summarized in the current view
tooltip - shows peg values at cursor point
Legend Lists the report or reports included in the graph. Depending on the list length,
the legend can appear either as part of the display area, or as a separate window.
Low-level device information only (valid only for reports on low-level devices and appears when there is
more than one option):
Group by List Select from the list to regroup the bar representations in the graphic display
according to specific device types.
Radio Buttons Allow sorting the report comparisons according to: Device, Device/Day or
Day/Device
Local display only (not valid for Web/remote use):
Save Image Lets you save the graph, see on page 10-104.
Print image Lets you print the graph, see on page 10-106.

When the Chart View first opens, all the data sources, that is the devices and
parameters, are highlighted in the lists on the left side of the display area.
Figure 10-56 shows an example of the Chart View tab, showing an output of a
1X MCCce Resource Group Sector report (pmC record type 62/119), that was
executed on June 30th 2002. Data was collected on 48 half-hourly intervals.
This output shows the Group By option (valid for low-level device reports)
and the Save Image and Print Image options that appear in any graphical
output that is not invoked over the Web.
Figure 10-56: Low-level Device Report: Local Output
In the JClass Chart Graphical display, you can:

Change the data sources for the display, see page 10-100
Change the display properties, see page 10-100
Zoom in to view details, see page 10-101
Save and print the current view, see page 10-104
Invoke a spreadsheet, see page 10-103

Changing Data Source for Display

The current data display is determined by the various types of source
information. You can sort these sources:
Group of Reports
Devices
Parameters
Information based on day and/or device
To Change the Sources for Display
1. From the Group of Reports list, select the group that you want to view
2. From the List of Devices, select the device or devices to view:
The selected items are highlighted.
Note: To select or deselect all devices, click the relevant Device Selection
Button. You must select at least one device to invoke the new graph.
Shift-click to select multiple items.
3. From the Parameters List, select the parameter or parameters that you
want to view
4. Click the Show Chart button
Source data is refreshed according to the selections you made. The new
graph and its legend appear.
Changing the Display Properties

The default graph type is a bar chart with standard measurements, colors, labels
and layout. You can change the graph type and appearance. The graph display
elements you can configure are:
Titles Margin size Color use
Axis labels and Footer text Legend parameters
structure
Graph types that are available for viewing are:
Plot Bar chart Hilo

Candle Area
These display changes are made in the JClass Chart Properties dialog box.

To Change Display Properties
1. In the JClass Chart View tab, right-click anywhere in the display area
The JClass Chart Properties dialog box opens. Click on the tab
representing the display element which you want to configure. Save and
load new data, as required.
Figure 10-57: JClass Chart Properties Dialog Box
Detailed description of JClass Chart properties and configuration tools is

outside the scope of this manual. For more information, refer to the Java
Workbook user manual.
Zooming
In the display area, you can zoom in and out to view details. This is especially
useful when viewing a complex display, or when you want to enlarge a
particular area to view exact peg values using the Tooltip, as in Figure 10-58, on
page 10-102.

Figure 10-58 illustrates the zooming advantage.
Figure 10-58: Zooming in JClass Chart View
To Zoom in and Out in the Chart
1. To zoom into a graph area, press the Shift key

2. Left-click and drag the cursor over the area you want to view, then release
the Shift key and mouse button
The selected area increases to the size of the graphical view area.
3. Place the tooltip where you want to read peg values, and refer to the
Legend to see which report is represented by the bar you are checking.
4. To return the graph to its previous position, select r or press the Show
Chart button
The graph returns to the former scale.
If you zoomed in several times, press the Show Chart button for fastest
return to the original view.

SpreadSheet Tab
You can view the chart information in spreadsheet format. The spreadsheet
layout resembles the text format report output. To invoke the spreadsheet view
of the JClass Chart, click the SpreadSheet tab.
Figure 10-59 shows a spreadsheet example.
Title
Start Wizard
Print
SpreadSheet Summary
Types List
Save
SpreadSheet
Figure 10-59: Spreadsheet Tab
Table 10-19 describes the SpreadSheet tab fields and buttons.
Table 10-19: Spreadsheet Tab
Title Lists report, record type, execution time period, report generation date and type
of summary (by device level).
Save Spreadsheet Invokes the Save dialog box. See on page 10-104
Print Spreadsheet Invokes the Print dialog box. See on page 10-106
Start Wizard Invokes Formula One for Java Workbook Designer.
Summary Types List Lets you select a different spreadsheet view, or summary, according to device
levels. Corresponds to the Group By list in the Chart View tab.

In this tab, you can:

Change the source data type, see page 10-104
Save spreadsheet, see page 10-104
Print spreadsheet, see page 10-106
Invoke the Java Workbook Designer, see page 10-108
To Change Source Data Type in Spreadsheet Tab
From the Group by Reports list at the bottom of the window, select the
device level that you want to view
Data is updated and new information appears in the Spreadsheet.
Saving Graphs and Spreadsheets

You can save the current display from each tab in the Report window:
Charts from the Chart View tab
Spreadsheet data from the SpreadSheet tab
To Save the Current View
1. In the Chart View tab, click the Save Image button

or in the SpreadSheet tab, click the Save Spreadsheet button
The Save As... dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-60.
Figure 10-60 shows a Save As dialog box example.
Path/Folder
Field
Enter Filter Files List

Folders List
Enter File
Name Action Buttons
Figure 10-60: Save As (Graphical Output) Dialog Box

Table 10-20 describes the Save As dialog box fields.
Table 10-20: Save As Dialog Box
Field/Button Option Description
Path/Folder Field Field to enter the address where to save the selected output file.
Filter Field Filters the Directory/File lists. Displays selected directory path
in Filter field and updates the Directory/File lists to show the
subdirectories and files of selected directory.
Folders List Lists all folders available from the selected directory.
Files List Lists all files included in the specified path or folder.
File Name Field Manual or automatic entry field for the directory path for the
save file. Displays name of file based on selection from Files
List or enter manually name of file.
Action Buttons Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving changes.
Update Updates box fields and lists.
Ok Saves the input and closes the dialog box.
2. In the Save As dialog box, enter the directory path in the Filter field
or double-click on a path in the Folders list
The path is updated in the Path/Folders field.
3. Select a file from the File list that you would like to replace
or in the File Name field, enter the file name for the chart or spreadsheet
4. Click Ok
The selected file is saved. The dialog box closes.

Printing Graphs and Spreadsheets

The instructions for printing are based on the Print dialog box that opens when
you use PM Reports from a local UNO workstation. If you are using PM
Reports remotely through a browser, the default print dialog that opens is the
print dialog of the browser. In this case, follow the instructions of the browser.
To Open the Print Dialog Box
1. In the Chart View tab, click the Print Image button

or in the SpreadSheet tab, click the Print Spreadsheet button
The Print Dialog box opens, as in Figure 10-61.
Figure 10-61 shows a Print dialog box example.
Figure 10-61: Print Dialog Box
Table 10-21 describes the Print dialog box fields and buttons.
Table 10-21: Print Dialog Box
Print: Entry field for the name of the file to be printed.
Copies: Entry field for the number of copies to be printed.
Print to: Select the required option and enter the destination (printer name or file name).
Banner Page Title: Enter the page title for the output.

Table 10-21: Print Dialog Box (Cont.)
Print Command Lets you enter a print command if printer is not defined.
Options: For example: To print to a printer named xx, enter: lpr -Pxx.
Paper Size: Lets you choose the required paper size for the output.
Range: Letter, Legal, Executive, A4
Default: Letter
Orientation: Lets you choose the page orientation for the output.
Range: Portrait, Landscape
Default: Portrait
Print Sends the file to the selected output device.
Cancel Closes the Print dialog box without printing the file.
To Print a Graphical Output File
1. In the Copies field, enter the number of copies you want to print
2. In the Printer field, enter the target printer name and continue to step
step 3
or in the File field, enter the file destination and continue to step step 7
The remainder of the dialog box is activated
3. If you want, change the title in the Banner Page Title field
4. Enter specific commands in the Print Command Options field
5. From the Paper Size options, select the paper size for output
6. From the Orientation options, select an print page orientation
7. Click Print

Shortcut Menus
This section lists all right mouse button shortcuts available in each of the PM
Reports summary tables.
Important: Shortcut options are enabled for the unouser only for the table
items representing the reports that this unouser has defined
(owns); whereas for the unoadmin, the shortcuts are enabled for
all table items and report summaries, unless logically disabled.
Figure 10-62 shows the shortcut options for the Scheduled Reports Summary.
Figure 10-62: Scheduled Reports Summary Shortcuts
Figure 10-63 shows the right mouse button shortcut options for the Report
Execution Summary for both executed and failed reports.
Figure 10-63: Report Execution Summary Shortcuts
Note: Report Execution Summary shortcuts are the same for both Single and
Group mode.

Figure 10-64 shows the shortcut options for the Group Summary.
Figure 10-64: Group Summary Shortcuts
Figure 10-65 shows the shortcut options for the Group Reports Summary, that is
for scheduled reports in a group.
Figure 10-65: Group Reports Summary Shortcuts
Note: These Group Reports Summary shortcuts are unique in that they do not
correspond to any Groups menu options; the listed actions are done only
this menu. For descriptions, see on page 10-79.
Figure 10-66 shows the Report Calendar table shortcut options for both executed
and failed reports.
Figure 10-66: Report Calendar Table Shortcuts

Table 10-22 summarizes the PM Reports shortcut menu options.
Table 10-22: PM Reports Right Mouse Button Shortcuts
Valid Valid for this Right Mouse Button Valid for this Available
for Summary Table Shortcuts Report Status as Menu
Mode Options
OK Failed from this
Menu
Single Scheduled Reports Unschedule N/A N/A Actions

Summary Modify Schedule...
as in Figure 10-62 View Report
Parameters...
Report Execution Abort Execution No No Actions

Summary (enabled only for
as in Figure 10-63 reports that are
running at the time) No Yes
Retry Execution Yes Yes
View Report Output... Yes Yes
Report Instance Data... Yes No
View Graphical
Output...
Group Group Summary Create Group N/A N/A Groups

as in Figure 10-64 Edit/View Group
Delete Group
Group Reports Add New Report to N/A N/A None

Summary Group
as in Figure 10-65 Edit Selected Report
Delete Report from
Group
Both Reports Calendar (View) Report Yes No Actions

as in Figure 10-66 Parameters...
View Report Output...
View Graphical Output.
Compare with Same
Reports...
For detailed information about these options, see the relevant sections of
this chapter.

PM Reports Descriptions
All UNO PM Reports for Software Release 2.16.3 are listed and briefly
described in this section. The columns of the report description tables represent
this information:
Report Name Name of the PM report as listed under each report category.
The reports are updated to reflect the expanding set of
network elements and functionalities that UNO manages.
Description Description of report scope and the type of performance
management data that is collected.
Parameters Predefined parameters which are necessary for scheduling a
report execution, and have to be defined according to the
required values and ranges. Parameters may change with
UNO versions.
The report descriptions are grouped by category and are listed in alphabetical
order according to the report name. In the UNO PM Reports application, the
order of reports within a category may be organized in a different way.
CDMA Report Categories

Although the UNO 2.16.3 system still supports both CDMA and Analog agent
types, the Analog PM reports are no longer issued in this release. The current
report categories and description tables are listed below:
Basic Reports see Table 10-23, on page 10-112
CFC/CDL Reports see Table 10-24, on page 10-120
Event Summary Reports see Table 10-25, on page 10-121
Exception Reports see Table 10-26, on page 10-122
Graphical Reports see Table 10-27, on page 10-123
Utilization Reports see Table 10-28, on page 10-125
Quality of Service Reports see Table 10-29, on page 10-127
Note: For complete descriptions of the CDMA reports that are included in the
UNO Software Release 2.16.3, please refer to the Motorola CDMA
Performance Analysis Manual.

PM Reports Descriptions UNO 2.16.3
Basic Reports
Table 10-23 lists the CDMA Basic Reports.
Table 10-23: CDMA - Basic Reports
Report Name Description Parameters
Application Data Information on the data delivery service activity that CBSC
Delivery Service deals with the exchange of short application-specific
data messages between the mobile station and the
message center.
Authentication on Measurements of the performance and activity of the CBSC, BTSSigType
PAC - MM MM for authentication procedures on PAC, from CBSC
perspective.
Authentication on Measurements associated with the performance and CBSC

TCH - MM activity of an MM for authentication procedures on a
Termination Channel (TCH), from CBSC perspective.
BTS Carrier-Sector Measurements associated with page queue overflows at CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Page Loading the MCCCEs. Used in conjunction with the MM Page Sector, Carrier
report and the MM Location Area report as well as the
cell identity activity - sector report.
BTS Carrier-Sector Measurements associated with carrier-sector based CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
SCH Allocation Supplemental Channel (SCH) allocation activity. Sector, Carrier
BTS Carrier-Sector Measurements associated with Paging Channel CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Paging Channel activities at the carrier-sector. Sector, Carrier, Paging
Usage Channel
BTS per Data Rate Represents statistics for forward and reverse SCH CBSC, BTS, Site Type
SCH Allocation resource allocation procedures from carrier-sector BTS
per data rate perspective.
BTS SCH Allocation Lists failures associated with the forward and reverse CBSC, BTS, Site Type
Failures Supplemental Channel allocation process.
Call Setup Event Displays information based on call setup on CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Summary - Carrier- carrier-sector level, in half-hourly summaries. Sector, Carrier,
Sector BTSSigType
Call Setup Timing - Measurements associated with CDMA call setup CBSC
MM* procedures from the perspective of the MM.
Carrier-Sector Group Measurements on the usage of the carrier-sector group. CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
The carrier sector group is the set of traffic Walsh codes Sector, Carrier,
fixed to a carrier of a sector. BTSSigType

Table 10-23: CDMA - Basic Reports (Cont.)
Carrier Power Measurements associated with carrier power limiting CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Limiting - Carrier and LPA overload protection from a carrier per sector Sector, Carrier,
Sector perspective. The measurements of carrier attempts, BTSSigType
overflows and carrier power limiting duration, help
gauge the carrier overflow/blocking when carrier power
limiting is in effect.
Carrier-Sector Hard Measurements associated with hard handoffs from a CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Handoff - Source carrier per source perspective. Displays information on Sector, Carrier
CDMA to CDMA, CDMA to analog, ICBSC SHO
carrier seam, ICBSC SHO CDMA to analog, and
ICBSC SHO external CBSC hard handoffs.
Carrier-Sector Measurements associated with inter-CBSC (external) CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Inter-CBSC Hard hard handoffs from a carrier per target-sector Sector, Carrier
Handoff - Target perspective.
Carrier-Sector Measurements associated with the performance and CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Registration utilization of a carrier-sector during registration Sector, Carrier
procedures from a carrier per sector perspective.
Carrier-Sector Soft Soft and softer handoff measurements from a carrier per CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Handoff - Target target sector perspective. Sector, Carrier
CDMA to CDMA Information on the use frequency of vocoding CBSC

M -> M Vocoder procedures for CDMA to CDMA mobile to mobile
Bypass calls, from the MM perspective.
CASHO Measurements associated with the Channel Assignment CBSC, BTS, Sector,
into Soft Handoff feature from a MM Carrier
(for cBTS) and pBTS perspective.
Cell Identity Activity Measurements associated with sector based activity CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
- Sector from a sector perspective. Sector, BTSSigType
Congestion Control - Measurements associated with congestion control CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Sector effectiveness, from a sector perspective. Sector, BTSSigType
Hard Handoff Target Measurements associated with hard handoffs from a CBSC
target CBSC perspective.
Hard Handoff - Measurements associated with hard handoffs from a CBSC
Source source CBSC perspective. Provides information on
total handoffs, CDMA to CDMA and CDMA to analog
handoffs.

HSPD Handoff MM Measurements associated with intra-CBSC high speed CBSC

packet data handoff procedures, from the MM
perspective. Also provides information on effectiveness
of Supplemental Channel add procedures during call
setup of high speed packet data calls.
ICBSC Pkt Data Measurements associated with inter-CBSC packet data CBSC
Handoff - Target MM handoff procedures from the target MM perspective.
ICBSC SHO Hard Measurements to determine the effectiveness of ICBSC CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Handoff - Anchor SHO CDMA to CDMA hard handoff, ICBSC SHO Group
Trunk Group CDMA to analog hard handoff, ICBSC SHO anchor
hard handoff and ICBSC SHO external CBSC hard
handoff, from the IC trunk group perspective.
ICBSC SHO Hard Measurements to determine the effectiveness of ICBSC CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Handoff - PAC HO SHO CDMA to CDMA hard handoff, ICBSC SHO Group
Trunk Group CDMA to analog hard handoff, ICBSC SHO anchor
hard handoff and ICBSC SHO external CBSC hard
handoff from the perspective of an IC trunk group.
ICBSC Subrate Measurements associated with the Inter-CBSC soft CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Channel Usage handoff features from a CBSC perspective. Group, ICBSC Span,
DS0 Group, Subrate
Channel
ICBSC SHO and Data Information regarding effectiveness of ICBSC SHO CBSC, BTS
HO - BTS and Data HO allocations and usage.
ICBSC TN Packet Measurements associated with Inter-CBSC TN-based CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Data Handoff - packet data handoffs from a trunk group perspective. Group
Anchor Trunk Group
ICBSC TN SHO Hard Measurements to determine the effectiveness of ICBSC CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Handoff - Anchor TN-based SHO CDMA to CDMA hard handoff, ICBSC Group
Trunk Group TN-based SHO CDMA to analog hard handoff, ICBSC
TN-based SHO anchor hard handoff and ICBSC
TN-based SHO external CBSC hard handoff from the
IC trunk group perspective.
ICBSC TN SHO Soft Measurements associated with Inter-CBSC (external) CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Handoff - Anchor TN-based soft handoffs from a trunk group perspective, Group
Trunk Group representing Nway (one-way and multi-way) handoff
procedures.

Inter CBSC HSPD HO Measurements associated with Inter-CBSC high speed CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
- Anchor packet data handoffs from a trunk group perspective. Group
ICBSC TN SHO Soft Measurements associated with Inter-CBSC (external) CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Handoff PAC HO TN based soft handoffs from a trunk group perspective. Group
Anchor Trunk Group These measurements represent Nway (1 way and
multi-way) handoff procedures.
ICBSC Trunk Group Measurements associated with Inter-CBSC soft CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Soft Handoff Anchor handoffs from a trunk group perspective, representing Group
Nway (1way and multi-way) handoff procedures.
ICBSC Trunk Group Measurements associated with the Inter-CBSC soft CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Usage handoff features from a CBSC perspective. Group
Interference Measurements associated with interference cancellation CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Cancellation - BBX from a BBX perspective. Sector, Carrier, BBXID
IWU Resource Group Information concerning IWU group utilization. CBSC, IWUID
- MM
MCCce 1X Resource Provides measurements on the usage of the 1X MCC CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Group Sector Usage Channel Element Sector Resource Group. The 1X Sector, MCCce Group,
MCC Channel Element Sector Resource group is the set BTSSigType
of 1X MCC timeslots fixed to an MCCce group of a
sector.
MCCce 1X Resource Provides measurements on the usage of the 1X MCC CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Group Site Usage Channel Element Site Resource Group. The 1X MCC MCCce Group,
Channel Element Site Resource group is the set of 1X BTSSigType
MCC timeslots fixed to an MCCce group of a site.
MCC1X SCH Statistics for the SCH group resource allocation CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Allocation procedure for MCC1Xs. MCC
MCC1X SCH Information regarding effectiveness of SCH group CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Utilization allocations and usage for MCC1Xs. MCC
MCCce Resource Measurements on the usage of the MCC channel CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Group Sector Usage element sector resource group which is the set of MCC Sector, MCCce Group,
timeslots fixed to a MCCce group of a sector. BTSSigType
MCCce Resource Measurements on the usage of the MCC channel CBSC, BTS, Site Type
Group Site Usage element site resource group which is the set of MCC MCCce Group,
timeslots fixed to an MCCce group of a site. BTSSigType

Message Service Measurements associated with SMS message service CBSC

feature from a CBSC perspective.
MM Carrier Sector Measurements associated with paging and access CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Paging and Access handoff activity at the Carrier-Sector. Sector, Carrier
Handoff Activity
MM Location Area Information on the effectiveness of paging and CBSC, Location Area
Activity authentication in individual location areas.
MM Page Information on the effectiveness of mobile station CBSC
paging.
MM Page Summary Information on the effectiveness of location area CBSC

paging.
Nway Carrier-Sector Measurements concerning the performance and CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Active Call utilization of a carrier-sector for active calls in a sector, Sector, Carrier,
with respect to Nway soft handoff. BTSsigType
Nway ICBSC Soft Measurements associated with Nway Inter-CBSC CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Handoff Anchor (external) soft and softer handoffs from a carrier per Sector, Carrier
Carrier-Sector source sector perspective.
Nway ICBSC Soft Measurements associated with Nway Inter-CBSC CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Handoff Target (external) soft and softer handoffs from a carrier per Sector, Carrier
Carrier-Sector target sector perspective.
Nway MCC Channel Measurements concerning the use of MCC Channel CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Element Usage Element with respect to Nway soft handoff. MCC, CE, CMEMAXX,
BTSsigType
Nway Soft Handoff Measurements associated with soft handoff detection CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Detection per effectiveness from a carrier per sector perspective. Sector, Carrier
Carrier-Sector
Nway Soft Handoff Measurements representing soft handoff detection CBSC, HOCONSTR
Detection per effectiveness associated with the MM soft handoff
Constraint Table detection constraint tables.
Nway Soft Handoff Measurements associated with soft handoff detection CBSC, ICBSC Trunk
Detection per ICBSC effectiveness of MM soft handoff constraints associated Group
Trunk Group with an IC Trunk Group.
Packet Backhaul Information on the utilization and loading of the packet CBSC, BTS, Router
Link Utilization backhaul links and router loading. Pair

Packet Data Activity Measurements associated with packet data activity from CBSC
- MM the perspective of the MM, including the 1X PCF-RA
Resource Overflow measurements.
Packet Data Statistics Measurements associated with CDMA packet data CBSC
Activations - XC* characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Rate - XC* characteristics between the XC and MS.
Durations - XC* characteristics between the XC and MS.
Forward Burst characteristics between the XC and MS.
Duration - XC*
Forward Burst Size - characteristics between the XC and MS.
XC*
Inter-Arrival - XC* characteristics between the XC and MS.
Packet Size - XC* characteristics between the PDSN and XC.
Reverse Burst characteristics between the XC and MS.
Duration - XC*
Reverse Burst Size - characteristics between the XC and MS.
XC*
Session Bytes - XC* characteristics between the XC and MS.
Session Burst Count - characteristics between the XC and MS.
XC*
Resource Allocation Measurements of the service and carrier selection CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
- Sector procedure overflows. It can be used to optimize the Sector, BTSSigType
carrier selection procedure parameters and to engineer
the system for appropriate 1X versus IS-95A/B usage.

SCH Group Statistics for the SCH group resource allocation CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Allocation procedure. Allocation attempts and failures represent MCC
number of times that an allocation of an SCH group was
attempted for each time slice available for the resource
request, for all resource requests. If there are members
of the group type available, the allocation will result in
a resource reservation for the time slice.
Note: This report includes only MCC1Xs.
SCH Group Information regarding effectiveness of SCH group CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Utilization allocations and usage. MCC
SDU PCF CDMA Call Measurements associated with SDU PCF CDMA call SDU
Setup Timing - SDU setup procedures from the MM perspective.
PCF
SDU PCF-RA Information on SDU Packet Control Function resource SDU
allocation management on a single SDU.
SDU PCF-RA - MM Information on SDU Packet Control Function resource CBSC
allocation management on the MM level.
SDU SDF-RA Information on SDF (Selection Distribution Function) SDU
Resource Allocation (RA) management. The MM
always have to request a SDF resource from SDF-RA to
service any type of call.
Sector Call Setup Measurements related to a sectors ability to service CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
sector origination and termination service requests. Sector, BTSSigType
Service Option Measurements associated with the Service Option CBSC, Service Option
features from a CBSC perspective.
Service Option Service option group usage information from CBSC, BTS, Site Type,
Group Usage - carrier-sector perspective. Sector, Carrier,
Carrier Sector BTSSigType
Soft Handoff - MM Information on the effectiveness of soft handoff from CBSC

the perspective of the Mobility Manager.
Transcoder Channel Information on the effectiveness of the terrestrial circuit CBSC, XC Channel
Group switching feature and transcoder channel group Group
utilization.
XC PCF-RA* Provides information on XC resource allocator CBSC/XC,
management. XCPCFRAID

XC PSI-CE Resource Provides information on PSI-CE resource group CBSC/XC,

Group management. XCPSICERGID
VPU VPF-RA Provides information on Vocoder Processing Units VPU ID

Function Resource Allocation management. The MM
is responsible for requesting VPF resources from the
VPF-RA to service a call. The MM can request
resources from multiple VPUs and the VPU can serve
multiple MMs.
VPU VPF Provides information on the VPU VPF Subfunction CBSC, VPU ID
Subfunctions management. VPF subfunctions are vocoding, circuit
interworking, and ISLP framing, and are measured in
terms of requests, successes, failures, and usage time.
* The same report is available also for Selection and Distribution Unit (SDU).

CFC/CDL Reports
Table 10-24 lists the CDMA CFC/CDL Reports.
Table 10-24: CDMA - CFC/CDL Reports
Call Duration Graph Plots the distribution of each specified CFC and/or CBSC, BTS, Sector,
CFC group against the call duration time. Call duration CFC Groups
time is the calculated difference between the access and
the release times. The graph also displays the average
OMCR call duration time for the specified report
interval.
CFC Distribution Based on data extracted from CDL log files. Displays Target ID, Device Type,
data for each device equipped at user specified Report Device ID1 to Device
Level (Target). Display also includes Group Total ID10
percentage of calls total and subtotals.
Example: If the user specified the CBSC-ID as target,
the report will display one row for every BTS equipped
with the user-defined CBSC.
CFC Summary Displays data for each device equipped at user Target ID, Device Type,
specified Report Level (Target). CFC ID1 to CFC ID10
Example: If the user specified CBSC-ID as target, the
report will display one row for every BTS equipped
with the user-defined CBSC.
Forward Call Quality Plots the average value of forward call quality (for each CBSC, BTS, Sector,
Graph time data point) for each specified CFC and/or CFC CFC Groups, Number
group across time. Each CFC's average forward call Time Intervals
quality is plotted at each time-segment data point.
Reverse Call Quality Plots the average value of reverse call quality (for each CBSC, BTS, Sector,
Graph time data point) for each specified CFC and/or CFC CFC Groups, Number
group. Each CFC's average reverse call quality is Time Intervals
plotted at each time-segment data point.

Event Summary Reports

Table 10-25 lists the CDMA Event Summary Reports.
Table 10-25: Event Summary Reports
Device Summary Outputs device type with ID, event and event count, Sub Total, Event Type,
based on the specified input parameters. Event Code, Alarm ID,
Platform, Platform ID,
Device Type, Device
ID1 to Device ID5
Event Summary Outputs event type, event code, alarm ID and event Sub Total, Event Type,
count, based on the specified input parameters. Event Code, Alarm ID,
Platform, Platform ID,
Device Type, Device
ID1 to Device ID5

Exception Reports
Table 10-26 lists the CDMA Exception Reports.
Table 10-26: CDMA Exception Reports
All Exception Enables creating all Exception Reports. Rows to Display

Reports
MCC RF Losses Number of calls that were dropped due to RF loss on a Rows to Display,
Termination Channel (TCH). Ranking (HI or LO)
Percent Access Information about access attempts that could not be Rows to Display,
Overflow serviced. The report information is for the carrier level. Ranking (HI or LO)
Percent MCC24/8 Displays the devices associated with abnormally high Rows to Display,
MCCce Busy Time or low percentage of time interval, during which all Ranking (HI or LO))
MCCce in the channel group were simultaneously busy.
Percent MCC24/8 Information about potential service time that was Rows to Display,
MCCce Out of unavailable during the measurement period. The report Ranking (HI or LO)
Service Time information is for the carrier level.
Percent Origination - Percentage of origination attempts that succeeded, on Rows to Display,
Ackd Complete - carrier-sector levels. Ranking (HI or LO)
Initial Access
Carrier-Sector
Percent Termination Summary of the slotted/non-slotted termination Rows to Display,
- Ackd Complete - attempts, as well as the percentage of termination Ranking (HI or LO)
Initial Access attempts that succeed.
Carrier-Sector

Graphical Reports
Graphical Reports display various types of PM data on a graph, highlighting
the behavior of a single device during a specified period of time, assisting you
with performance analysis. Table 10-27 lists the CDMA Graphical Reports.
Table 10-27: CDMA - Graphical Reports
Packet Data Measurements associated with CDMA packet data CBSC

Statistics characteristics between the XC and MS.
Activations - XC
Statistics Burst Rate characteristics between the XC and MS.
- XC
Statistics Durations - characteristics between the XC and MS.
XC
Statistics Forward characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Duration - XC
Statistics Forward characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Size - XC
Statistics characteristics between the XC and MS.
Inter-Arrival - XC
Statistics Packet characteristics between the PDSN and XC.
Size - XC
Statistics Reverse characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Duration - XC
Statistics Reverse characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Size - XC
Statistics Session characteristics between the XC and MS.
Bytes - XC

Table 10-27: CDMA - Graphical Reports (Cont.)

Statistics Sessions characteristics between the XC and MS.
Burst Count - XC
Percent Access Percentage of access attempts that could not be serviced CBSC, BTS, Sector,
Overflow in the selected sector. Carrier
Percent MCC24/8 Percentage of time interval specified in which all CBSC, BTS, MCCce
Busy Time MCCce in the channel group were simultaneously busy. Group
Percent MCC24/8 Percentage of potential service time that was CBSC, BTS, MCCce
Out Of Service Time unavailable during the measurement period. Group
Percent Origination - Percentage of origination attempts that succeeded, on CBSC, BTS, Sector,
Ackd Complete - carrier-sector levels. Carrier
Initial Access
Carrier-Sector
Percent Termination Summary of the slotted/non-slotted termination CBSC, BTS, Sector,
- Ackd Complete - attempts, as well as the percentage of termination Carrier
Initial Access attempts that succeed.
Carrier-Sector

Utilization Reports
Utilization Reports inform you how the traffic density affects device utilization
to help you establish whether there is enough capacity or if a network element
has already reached its limit. Table 10-28 lists the CDMA Utilization Reports.
Table 10-28: CDMA - Utilization Reports
Access Channel Calculates the total utilization of the Access Channel (ACC) CBSC(s), Num of
Utilization and utilization percentages, on a per sector basis, for the call ACCs
model terms for messaging.
AP Downlink Calculates AP downlink utilization percentages for the call CBSC, Num AP
Utilization model terms for messaging on the AP downlink, and the Links, AP Mode
total utilization of the AP downlink. The output specifies the
utilization of each AP link in the MSC to MM direction.
AP Uplink Calculates AP uplink utilization percentage for the call CBSC(s), Num AP
Utilization model terms for messaging on the AP uplink, and the total Links, AP Mode
utilization of the AP uplink. The output specifies the
utilization of each AP link in the MM to MSC direction.
Call Admission Calculates call model terms and the call admission threshold CBSC(s), MAX Util
Threshold for originations and page acknowledgements for given (%), MM Type, AP
OMCR, MM, dates and time intervals. Mode
LAPD BTS Calculates the total utilization of the LAPD BTS downlink, CBSC, BTS num(s)
Downlink Utilization and utilization percentages for the call model terms for
messaging on the LAPD BTS downlink. The output
specifies the utilization of the LAPD BTS link in the CBSC
to BTS direction, for the specified BTSs.
LAPD BTS Uplink Calculates the total utilization of LAPD BTS uplink, and CBSC(s), BTS
Utilization utilization percentages for the call model terms for num(s)
messaging on the LAPD BTS uplink. The output specifies
the utilization of the LAPD BTS link in the BTS to CBSC
direction, for the specified BTS.
OrigWeight_ Calculates call model terms, and the number of milliseconds CBSC(s), MM Type,
Period of CPU time taken by originations (OrigWeight), for a given AP Mode
OMCR, MM, dates and time intervals.
PageAckWeight_ Calculates call model terms and the number of milliseconds CBSC(s), MM Type,
Period of CPU time taken by page acknowledgements AP Mode, Paging
(PageAckWeight), for a given OMCR, MM, date and time mode
intervals.

Table 10-28: CDMA - Utilization Reports (Cont.)
Paging Channel Calculates the total utilization of a Paging Channel (PCH), CBSC(s), Baud,
Utilization and provides utilization percentages on a carrier per sector Carrier List
basis for the call model terms, for messaging on the paging
channel.
Additional Utilization scripts available through the PM Reports GUI:
BTS_FEP_UTIL_PERIOD, CBSC_CALL_MODEL, CPP_FEP_UTIL_PERIOD,
CPP_UTIL_PERIOD, FEP_BTS_UTIL_PERIOD, GLI_UTIL_PERIOD,
IC_FEP_UTIL_PERIOD, IC_LINK_UTIL_PERIOD, MCC_UTIL_PERIOD,
MM_BTS_UTIL_PERIOD, MM_UTIL_PERIOD, PER_BTS_CALL_MODEL,
PSI_FEP_UTIL_PERIOD, PSI_PCF_UTIL_PERIOD, PSI_SIG_UTIL_PERIOD,
SHO_SSHO_FACTORS, PBH_DN_UTIL, PBH_UP_UTIL, SDU_PCF_UTIL_PERIOD,
SDU_SPROC_UTIL_PERIOD, VPU_SPROC_UTIL_PERIOD

Quality of Service Reports

Table 10-29 lists the CDMA Quality of Service Reports.
Table 10-29: CDMA - Quality Of Service Reports
BTSs Availability Lists the BTSs which have in-service availability that is Availability
lower than the availability threshold defined for this report. threshold
CBSCs Availability Lists the CBSCs which have in-service availability that is Availability
lower than the availability threshold defined for this report. threshold
Channels Utilization Information on total resources utilization and total Traffic Sort according to
Threshold 1X Channel (TCH) utilization of a MCC 1X card on MDM (expansion
Exception level. Includes the inventory of certificates for the card. potential),
Resources
Utilization
threshold, TCH
Utilization threshold
System Wide 1X Automatically generated twice-a-week report that presents Sort according to
Channels Inventory the channel usage of all MCC1Xs set for the specified time (expansion
period. potential)
Total Downtime Total downtime (OOS) for all BTSs and CBSCs that were
OOS during a specified time period.
Worst Downtime Longest downtime (OOS) for all BTSs and CBSCs that
were OOS during a specified time period.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 11: Filter Builder

UNO Core Features
The Filter Builder allows you to specify alarm filters for filter-based
applications. When the Filter Builder is configured as a Large Scale Filter
Builder, (Optional License 4), filters can be applied over multiple UNO hosts.
The Filter Builder allows you to:
Define a new filter
Modify an existing filter
Delete a filter
Create a complex filter from regular filters on the same host
Create a large scale filter from regular filters on different hosts
Apply a filter to and access other filter based applications
Modify the main dialog box for ease and efficiency of use
Print a hard copy of the filter attributes
Filter Builder Interface

The Filter Builder Graphical User Interface (GUI) displays a filter table for
filter based applications. This Filter List includes the following attributes:
Application, Scope, Filter Name, User Comment and seven columns,
representing all filter clauses, combined into logical groups for filtering. The
Application and Scope fields define which filters will be displayed.
The basic controls and indicators are located at the top of the Filter Builder
window. These controls and indicators display information on the selected
filters and allow the user to configure the Filter Builder, add, modify, and delete
filters, and access filter based applications such as the Alarm Manager, Alarm
Browser, OMCR Relays, Alarm Notification and Historical Alarm Reports.

Filters UNO 2.16.3
The title bar displays the application name and other information depending on
the method used to invoke the Filter Builder (see Launching the Filter
Builder on page 11-5). When invoked from the Application Launcher, the
title bar will display: UNO Filter Builder [userlevel@hostname], for example:
UNO Filter Builder [unoadmin@baritone]. When invoked from another filter
based application or from the command line using the -a switch, the title bar
will display: user privilege level, host, and application from where the Filter
Builder was invoked, for example: UNO Filter Builder [unoadmin@baritone]
<OMCR Relay>.
The user interface with the Filter Builder is by mouse and keyboard to enter
information, select options, and open dialog boxes for more specific actions.
Mouse shortcuts are also provided for certain actions, see Mouse Shortcuts
on page 11-64.
Filters
Alarms can arrive at the UNO system at the rate of 20,000 alarms per hour. As
this rate is too high to allow you to concentrate effectively on a specific
management task, an alarm filter lets you reduce that rate by admitting only
those alarms that you determine are relevant to your current needs.
An alarm filter is a collection of pass/fail values for individual alarm attributes.
When an alarm is filtered, each alarm attribute is scanned and its attribute value
is compared with the filter criterion for that attribute. If the alarm passes all the
attribute values, the alarm passes the filter.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 11: Filter Builder
Filter Properties
Each filter has a basic group of properties that characterize the filter:
Name
Scope
Application
Filter Name
Each filter has a unique name, normally indicative of the filter function,
assigned by the operator.
Filter Scope
These two types of filter scopes refer to the level of user who can use the filter:
Publicall users
PrivateAvailable only to current user.
Only unoadmin can define both Public and a Private filters. Other users can
define only a Private filter.
Filter Applications
Filters are built for use in:
Alarm Manager and Large Scale Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser and Large Scale Alarm Browser
BTS Relays
OMCR Relays
Central Alarm Acknowledge Handling
Alarm Notification
Alarm Correlation
UNO uses filters specific to these applications:
CommonA filter built for use in the Alarm Manager, Alarm Browser,
and BTS Relays applications
OMCR RelaysA filter built for use in the OMCR Relays application
Alarm NotificationA filter built for Alarm Notification
Alarm CorrelationA filter built for Alarm Correlation

Filters UNO 2.16.3
Filter Type
There are three supported filter types:
Regular filter
Complex filterA filter built from several regular filters on the same
manager. A user can save previously defined complex filters.
Large scale filterA filter built from regular filters on different UNO
hosts, only available in Large Scale Filter Builder if licensed.
Note: It is recommended that there be no more than three large scale filters.
DefaultFilter
The DefaultFilter is the system defined default filter. If no other filter is
defined and used in your system, this is the filter that will operate on incoming
alarms. The default filter (DefaultFilter) passes all alarm information for all
agents and devices/cells.
Filter Builder Modes

The Filter Builder operates in two modes:
Regular Modefilters from the local UNO host only
Large Scale Modefilters from all UNO hosts defined in the Large
Scale Configuration

Launching the Filter Builder

You can start the Filter Builder:
from the Application Launcher
from the command line using the options for preselected conditions
from a filter based application
Invoking as an Independent Application

When the Filter Builder is started as an independent application, the Actions
menu will list all the currently available filter based applications. The list
depends upon the license options installed in your system.
When the application you select has a filter that can be applied to the
application, the application will open with the selected filter. Where the filter
cannot be applied, the application will appear disabled (grayed out).

The Filter Builder can be launched from the Application Launcher.
To Invoke the Filter Builder from the Application Launcher
Click the Filter Builder icon in the Application Launcher

The Filter Builder main dialog box appears.

When you run the Filter Builder from the command line you can specify
parameters for flexibility in configuring the application.
To Invoke the Filter Builder from the Command Line
From the command line, the path and command are:
Path cd /opt/UNO/bin
Command uno_fb

Launching the Filter Builder UNO 2.16.3
Table 11-1 lists the Filter Builder command line options.
Table 11-1: Filter Builder Command Line Arguments
Option* Description
-help Display arguments and explanations.

-a <application> Invoke the Filter Builder with preselected application.
-agent <agent> Invoke application for specified agent.
-config <config_name> Use specific configuration.
-display <dpy> Use different server.
-f <filter_name> Invoke the Filter Builder with preselected filter.
-fdn <object_instance> Start Add Dialog with given fdn.
-host <host_name> Invoke application from specified host.
iconic Open application in minimized form. Displays icon.
-m With -f option, start Modify Dialog with filter attributes.
xrm <resource-spec> Set a specific resource.
* For example: uno_fb -f unoserv_critical
The Filter Builder main dialog box appears.
Invoking from Other Applications

You can invoke the Filter Builder from these applications:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
OMCR Relays
Alarm Notification, for Alarm Notification filters only
Alarm Correlation, for Alarm Correlation filters only
When the Filter Builder is invoked from one of these filter based applications
or started with the -a <application> option from the command line, the
Filter Builder main dialog box displays the filters relevant for the selected
application. The Application selection list and Actions menu are grayed out.
The dialog box title bar contains the name of the application that started the
Filter Builder, for example, UNO Filter Builder <OMCR Relay>. Only those
tabs and forms included in a filter for the given application are active.
The filter that is currently in use in the application is selected in the filter list.

Filter Builder Main Dialog Box

This section describes the tables and menus on the Filter Builder main dialog
box display. The main dialog box appears as in Figure 11-1.
Main Menu
Bar
Scope
Application Menu
List
Mode
Tabs
Filter List
Preview
Field
Filter
Status
Note: Alarm Notification filters can be viewed in the Filter Builder Main
Dialog box. When you access the Filter Builder from the Alarm
Notification application, you will see only Alarm Notification filters.

Filter Builder Main Dialog Box UNO 2.16.3
The Filter Builder main dialog box is described in Table 11-2.
Table 11-2: Filter Builder Main Dialog Box
Application List The Application List shows the names of the UNO applications for which
you can build a filter.
Range: Common, OMCR Relays, Common and OMCR Relays, Alarm
Notification
Default: None
Filter List (unlabeled) The Filter List shows all filters defined in the Filter Builder including the
DefaultFilter. Each row shows one filter, by name; the columns show the fil-
ter attributes used in the filter definition. Clicking on the sort order arrow in
the column heading changes the column order from alphabetical to reverse
alphabetical. A check in the column indicates the attribute is present in the
filter. The attributes include:
Application
Scope
User Comment
Agent
Device
Device Type
Device Status
Alarm Status
Problem Description
Event
Preview Field The Preview field displays the selected filter attributes defining the filter and
the current status of the definition.
Mode Tabs The mode tabs allow selection of Filter Builder or Large Scale Filter Builder.
Click on Large Scale Mode to change the Filter Builder to the Large Scale
Filter Builder if it is licensed on your system.
Filter Status Display The Filter Status Display shows the total number of filters displayed and the
number of filters currently selected in the Filter List.
Scope Menu The Scope Menu lets you select the scope of the filters displayed on the Filter
List. The scope can be:
PublicOnly public filters are displayed
PrivateOnly private filters are displayed
BothBoth public and private filters are displayed
Range: Both, Public, Private
Default: Both

Main Menu Bar

The Filter Builder main menu bar is located at the top of the main display (see
Filter Builder Main Dialog Box on page 11-7). From the menu bar you can
access all the Filter Builder options. The menu bar includes these drop-down
menus:
File
Edit
View
Actions
Help
The main menu bar drop-down menu map is shown in Table 11-3.
File Edit View Actions Help
Print Selected Add Refresh Alarm Manager

Print All Modify Alarm Browser
Save Properties Delete OMCR Relay
Apply Filter Complex BTS Relays
Filter
Exit Properties Historical Alarm
Reports
Large Scale
Configuration
Note: All procedures in this section are also applicable to the Large Scale
Filter Builder. To use the Filter Builder in Large Scale Mode, click the
Large Scale Mode tab. To use the Filter Builder in Regular Mode, click
the Regular Mode tab.

File Menu
The Filter Builder File menu contains these menu items:
Print Selected
Print All
Save Properties
Apply Filter
Exit
Printing Selected Filters

The Print Selected option lets you print the filter attributes of the filter(s) you
have selected from the Filter List. When you activate this option, the UNO
print dialog box opens.
Note: This procedure is available in Regular and Large Scale modes.
To Print Selected Filters
1. Select the filters you want to print from the Filter List
Print Selected is grayed out unless you have selected at least one filter
from the Filter List.
2. From the Filter Builder main menu bar select:
File
Print Selected

Printing All Filters

Print All lets you print the filter attributes of all filters in the Filter List. When
you activate this option, the UNO print dialog box opens.
This procedure is available in Regular and Large Scale Modes.
To Print All Filters
1. From the Filter Manager main menu bar select:
File
Print All
Saving Filter Builder Properties

Save Properties lets you save the current Filter Builder configuration values.
If you have not saved the configuration, you will be prompted to do so when
exiting the Filter Builder.
Note: This command does not save any layout changes you have made
outside of the Edit > Properties command.
To Save the Filter Builder Properties
Note: This procedure is available in Regular and Large Scale Modes.

From the Filter Builder main menu bar select:
File
Save Properties
All properties are saved.

Applying a Filter
Apply Filter is active when you have invoked the Filter Builder from another
application: the Alarm Manager, Alarm Browser, Alarm Notification or
OMCR Relays
Click Apply Filter to apply the filter you have built or modified before you
return to the originating application.
To Apply the Filter to the Application
File
Apply Filter
The filter is applied to the application.
Exiting from the Filter Builder

Exit closes the Filter Builder application.
If you opened the Filter Builder from another application and changed a filter,
you will be prompted to apply the filter if you have not already done so.
See Applying a Filter on page 11-12.
To Exit the Filter Builder

File
Exit
The application closes.

Edit Menu
The Filter Builder Edit Menu contains these menu items:
Add
Modify
Delete
Complex Filter
Properties
Add and Modify use the same dialog boxes and are discussed together.
Adding or Modifying a Filter

Add lets you define and add new filters. Modify lets you change existing
filters. Both actions use the same dialog box; the Title Bar displaying the
current operation. The Add Filter main dialog box is shown in Figure 11-2, on
page 11-14. When adding or modifying a filter, use these tabs to enter
information and select values:
Agent
Device
Device Type
Device State
Alarm State
Problem Description
Event
You can also add a filter based on the properties of an existing filter. The new
or modified filter is added to the filter database and appears in the Filter List.
Note: This procedure is available in Regular and Large Scale Modes. In Large
Scale Mode, the procedure is only available on the UNO host from which
the Large Scale application is managed.
To Add or Modify a Filter
Note: If you want to modify a filter or to base a new filter on an existing filter,
select the existing filter on the Filter List. To simply add a filter, no
filters should be selected on the Filter List.
1. Click the Regular Mode tab

The Filter Builder appears in Regular Mode. Adding or modifying a filter

is only performed in Regular Mode.
2. From the Filter Builder menu bar select:
File
Add
The Add Filter dialog box appears as in Figure 11-2, on page 11-14.
.
Title Bar
Application
Filter Name
Selection
Scope
Specification
Tabs
Values Radio Agent Type

Buttons Select
User Comment
Preview
Preview Sizing Sash
Action Buttons
Figure 11-2: Add Filter Main Dialog Box

The Add/Modify Filter Main dialog box is described in Table 11-4, on

page 11-15.
Note: When you open the Filter Builder from Alarm Notification, Alarm
Notification appears in the Application Selection field.
Table 11-4: Add/Modify Filter Main Dialog Box Fields
Item Description
Title Bar (unlabeled) Indicates the Filter Builder mode you are currently in: add or modify.
Filter Name Lets you create a name for the filter.
Note: You must enter a filter name before continuing with the filter definition.
Range: 120 alphanumeric characters, no spaces
Default: None
Application Lets you select the application to which the filter will apply. Multiple applications
Selection can be selected. The options are:
Commonused for all applications except OMCR Relays
OMCR Relaysused only for the OMCR Relays application
Alarm Notificationused only for the Alarm Notification application
Note: You must designate the filter application(s) before continuing with the filter
definition.
Range: Common, OMCR Relay, Common and OMCR Relay or Alarm Notification
Default: None
Scope Lets you specify the user level of the filter. There are three options:
PublicChoosing the filters common to all users, located in the
/opt/UNO/config/filters directory
PrivateChoosing the user owned filters from the filter files located in the user
home directory under the .uno_filters subdirectory
Range: Public, Private
Default: Public
Range: for user: Private

Default: Private

Table 11-4: Add/Modify Filter Main Dialog Box Fields (Cont.)
Item Description
Specification Tabs Lets you specify all filter details. These are the tabs:
(unlabeled) Agent
Device
Device Type
Device State
Alarm State
Problem Description
Event
User Comment Lets you add or modify comments about the alarm filter.
Preview Sizing Lets you change the size of the preview area. Click on the box and raise and lower
Sash (unlabeled) the mouse to increase or decrease the size of the Preview field.
Preview This box displays the filter definition, dynamically updated as you change filter
values. When a new filter is opened, the field will display the message: No
attribute in this filter. The attributes you define replace the message.
The buttons described in Table 11-5 are common to the Add Filter and Modify
Filter dialog boxes and all the filter specification tabs.
Table 11-5: Filter Specification Tab Buttons
Button Description
Ok Modifications are saved and the dialog box closes. You are prompted to save the changes.
Apply Modifications are saved and the dialog box remains open.
Cancel Modifications are removed and the dialog box closes.
Help Opens the online help.
Values There are three possibilities to determine how the filter interprets the values selected:
All ValuesAll the available events or devices (depending on selected tab) are included
in the filter. No further selection is possible.
Only ValuesOnly selected values will be included in the filter.
All Values ExceptEvent types selected will not be included in the filter.
Note: If you select All Values, no further selection is possible.
Range: All Values, Only Values, All Values Except
Default: All Values
Note: Ok, Apply, Cancel, and Help buttons do not appear in the tab figures.
These figures only show the tabs.

3. If you are modifying a filter, from the Filter builder menu bar select:
File
Modify
The Modify Filter dialog box opens as in Figure 11-2, on page 11-14.
4. Enter the Filter Name (when adding a filter, only)
Note: You must enter the Filter Name before continuing with the filter
definition.
5. Select the Filter Scope
6. Select the Filter Application
Note: You must enter the Filter Application before continuing with the
filter definition.
7. Enter filter attribute values into the filter attribute tabs as described in the
following sections
When adding or modifying a filter it is recommended to establish a work-

ing order for entering the required data. Work from left to right, starting
with the Agent tab and ending with the Event tab.
8. If required, enter a comment in the User Comment field
9. Click Ok or Apply to complete the filter
The filter is applied and appears on the Filter List.
Agents
The Agent tab lets you specify the agent or agents on which the filter operates.
Only agents connected and activated for your system are listed. You can select the
values to include in, or exclude from the filter.
To Specify Agent Values in Filter Builder
1. In the Add Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Agent tab
The Agent tab is now in front.

The Agent tab appears as in Figure 11-3.
Agent
Values
Available
Values
Figure 11-3: Agent Tab
The elements of the Agent Tab are described in Table 11-6. The selections
and selection methods for Available Value(s) apply for the Agent and
the Agent Type.
Table 11-6: Agent Tab Fields
Fields Description
Available The right column in each table shows all possible values for the
Values attribute. The left column lets you select an attribute value. When
clicked, a check appears. To deselect a value, click on the check.
2. Click on the required agent value

The choices are All Values, Only Values, and All Values Except (see
Values in Table 11-5). The button appears red and depressed.
3. Click in the Select column to select or unselect agents
A check denoting selection appears in the column next to the selected
agent or type. Clicking where there is already a check deselects the item.
If you want to define more filter values, continue with the next tab
4. If you have finished the filter definition, click Ok or Apply

Devices
Use the Device tab to select one or more devices as values for the filter. You
can specify devices according to one of these two values:
Devices (Select Device tab)
Cells (Specify Cell tab)
Selecting Devices by Device Name and Hierarchy

Using the Select Device tab you can add or delete a device. You can specify
devices two ways:
Device name
Device hierarchy
Adding Devices by Device Name

You can use the Device tab Select Device tab to add a device by agent and
device name.
To Add a Device in Filter Builder
1. In the Add Filter or Modify Filter dialog box (Figure 11-2, on page 11-14),
click the Device tab
The Device tab appears.
2. Click the Select Device tab
The Select Device tab appears as in Figure 11-4, on page 11-20.

Device Tab
Device
Values
Device
List
Add Delete
Figure 11-4: Device Tab/Select Device Tab
The Select Device tab fields and buttons are described in Table 11-7.
Table 11-7: Select Device Tab
Display Description
Device List (unlabeled) List of all devices available.
Add Opens the UNO Filter Builder Device Specification dialog

box allowing the user the add a device to the Device List.
Delete Allows the user to delete a device from the device list.
3. Click on the required device value

4. Click on the required device
The device is highlighted.
6. Click Add

The UNO Filter Builder Device Specification dialog box/Select by Device

ID tab appears as in Figure 11-5.
Agent Agent Type
Range
Device Include
Type Sub-Tree
Action Buttons
Figure 11-5: Select by Device ID Tab
The Select by Device ID tab is described in Table 11-8.
Table 11-8: Select by Device ID Tab
Agent Drop-down list with the names of the available agents.
Agent Type When you choose an agent from the Agent Menu, the type of agent is dis-
played in the Agent Type window.
Device Type: After selecting an agent, the Device Type appears. The drop-down list pre-
sents a list of the devices connected to the selected agent. The first Device
Type is the highest level device.
Range After selecting a Device Type, the Range field appears. You enter the range
corresponding to the numbers of the required devices. The range may
include digits, commas (,), and hyphens (-). Spaces are ignored. Multiple
ranges are permitted. Each correct range opens a new Device Type menu.

Table 11-8: Select by Device ID Tab
Include Sub-Tree If the button is gray and raised, a lower level drop-down list will appear. If
the button is red and depressed with a check, all devices below this level are
automatically selected and no lower level drop-down list will display.
Device Type, Range, Device menus will appear until the Include Sub-Tree button is clicked in or
Include Sub-Tree the lowest level in the topology tree has been reached.
(unlabeled)
Ok Click Ok to enter the selection in the Device List in the Add Filter dialog
box and exit the window.
Apply Click Apply to enter the selection in the Device List in the Add Filter dialog
box and remain in the window to perform additional device selections.
7. In the UNO Filter Builder Device Specification dialog box (Figure 11-5,
on page 11-21) click on the Agent button
The Agent drop-down list appears.
8. Click on the required agent
The Agent Type automatically displays.
9. Click on the Device Type button
A drop-down list appears with a list of devices.
10. Click on the required device
11. Enter the range in the Range field or click the Include Sub-Tree button
If a range is entered, a new Device Type button and Range field will
appear. When information is entered, new buttons and fields will display
until the lowest level in the topology tree has been reached. If the Include
Sub-Tree button is pushed in, all lower level devices are selected.
When a cell device type such as BTS is selected in the Device Type
drop-down menu, a cell list appears instead of further Device Type
buttons. After a specific cell is selected, Device Type buttons appear after
this Cell List.

Figure 11-6 shows the Select by Device ID tab with a Cell List.
Agent
Agent List Type
Device Type
Cell List
Show
Selected
Show
Search by All
Action Buttons
Figure 11-6: Select by Device ID Tab/Cell Specification

Table 11-9 describes a Select by Device ID tab with a cell specification.
Table 11-9: Select by Device ID
Cell List The Cell List shows all cells and cell groups connected to the selected agent.
You can click on a cell or cells when you want to add to the filter or select
using Search by.
Search by You use the Search by to specify these search requirements for a cell:
Cell GroupEnter the name of a cell group. When Cell Group appears
on the Search by drop down list, clicking the arrow to the right of the
Search by entry field displays a list of the groups defined in the filter
database.
Cell IDEnter the Cell ID of the required cell
Cell NameEnter the Cell Name of the required cell.
Note: To activate the search, you must press <Return> after you
have entered the information in the entry field.
Show Selected Cells Click Show Selected to display the results of the search.
Show All Cells Click Show All to display the entire Cell List
Device Type These are the lower level devices contained in the cell according to their hier-
archy (topology tree) and are specified in the filter values.
12. You can scroll through the cell list and select one or more cells by clicking
on the cell
The cell is highlighted.
13. In Search by, select:
Cell Group
Cell ID
Cell Name
14. Enter the search parameter and press < Enter>
The cell that matches that parameter is highlighted.
Note: A new Device Type button and Range field will appear for the
selected cell. When information is entered, new buttons and fields
will display until the lowest level in the topology tree has been
reached, usually six or seven levels. If the Include Sub-Tree button
is pushed in, all lower level devices are selected.

15. Click Show Selected to display the selected items

Only the selected devices display and the device cell ID numbers appear in
the Range field.
16. Click Show All to redisplay the entire cell list
All the devices reappear and all the device cell ID numbers appear in the
Range field.
Note: Clicking the right-mouse button in the Cell List opens a menu with
these items:
Select All
Deselect All
Show Selected
Show All
17. If you have finished the filter definition, click Ok or Apply
Adding Devices by Hierarchy

You can add a device by selecting the device from the device tree (hierarchy).
To Add a Device in Filter Builder Using Device Hierarchy
2. Click the Select Device tab
The Select Device tab appears as in Figure 11-4
4. Click on Add
The UNO Filter Builder Device Specification dialog box (Figure 11-5, on
page 11-21) appears.
5. Click the Select by Hierarchy tab

The Select by Hierarchy tab appears as in Figure 11-7.
Include
Sub-Tree
Hierarchy
Display
Selected
Device
Action Buttons
Figure 11-7: Select by Hierarchy Tab
The Select by Hierarchy tab is described in Table 11-10, on page 11-27.

Table 11-10: Hierarchy
Include Sub-tree Button If the button is clicked, (red and depressed with a check) all devices levels
below the selected device level are automatically selected and no lower level
drop-down lists will display.
Hierarchy Display The Hierarchy Display shows all devices in the system hierarchy below the
(unlabeled) highest level device. Open and close by clicking on + and -.
Selected Device When you click on a device, the device is highlighted.
(unlabeled)
6. Click on the Agent button

The Agent drop-down list appears.
7. Click on the required agent
The Agent Type automatically displays and a file folder with the agent
name appears in the Hierarchy Display.
Note: If All is selected, there will be more than one agent file folder
8. Click on an agent file folder to select
The folder is highlighted and the Include Sub-tree button is active.
9. Either click on the Include Sub-tree button to include the entire hierarchy
The button appears red and depressed with a check.
10. Or double-click on the folder to display lower level devices
The folder opens and lower level device folders appear in a hierarchical
tree.
11. Either click on a device, click on a lower level folder to select,
double-click on the folder or + to display lower level devices, or click the
Include Sub-tree button to include the entire hierarchy
12. When you have finished defining the filter, click Ok or Apply to complete the
filter, entering the selection to the Device List in Add Filter dialog box.

Deleting a Device
You can delete a device displayed in the Select Device tab Device List.
To Delete a Device in Filter Builder
2. Select one or more devices
The selected device is highlighted.
3. Click Delete
The selected device disappears from the Device List.
Specifying Devices by Cell

You use the Specify Cell tab to specify all devices under a cell.
To Select a Device in Filter Builder by Cells
The Device tab appears as in Figure 11-4, on page 11-20.
2. Click the Specify Cell tab

The Specify Cell tab appears as in Figure 11-8.
Cell List
Show
Selected
Search by Show All
Figure 11-8: Device Tab/Specify Cell Tab
The Specify Cell tab is described in Table 11-11.
Table 11-11: Specify Cell Tab
Cell List The Cell List shows all cells and cell groups defined in the database. You can
click on a cell or cells when you want to add to the filter or select using
Search by.
Search by You use the Search by drop-down list and entry field to specify search require-
ments for a required cell:
Cell GroupEnter the name of a cell group
Agent TypeEnter the type of the agent
Agent NameEnter the name of the agent
Cell IDEnter the Cell ID of the cell
Cell NameEnter the Cell Name of the cell
When Cell Group, Agent Type, or Agent Name is displayed on the Search By
drop-down list, you can click the arrow to the right of the Search By entry field
to display a list of the values for that item as defined in the filter database.
Click to enter the value into the entry field.
Note: To activate the search, you must press <Return> after your have
entered the information in the entry field.
Show Selected Cells Click Show Selected to display the results of the search.
Show All Cells Click Show All to display the entire Cell List

3. Select the cell or Click on Search by

The Search by drop-down list appears displaying these search options:
Cell Group
Agent Type
Agent Name
Cell ID
Cell Name
4. Click on the required option and enter the necessary information in the
field (see Table 11-11)
5. Press <Return> to activate the search
The matching devices are highlighted in the cell list.
6. To display only the selected devices, click on Show Selected
7. To redisplay the entire list, click on Show All
If you want to define more filter values, continue with the next tab.
8. If you have finished the filter definition, click Ok or Apply to complete
Device Type
The Device Type tab lets you specify the device type that the filter will operate
upon. The type of devices available depend upon the agents that you are using
and the actual devices defined for your network.
To Select Device Type in Filter Builder
click the Device Type tab

The Device Type tab appears as Figure 11-9.
Device Type
Values
Available
Values
Figure 11-9: Device Type Tab
The Device Type tab fields are described in Table 11-12.
Table 11-12: Device Type Tab Fields
Available Values The right column shows all possible values for the tab
attribute. The left column lets you select an attribute value.
When clicked, a check appears. To deselect a value, click on
the check.
2. Click on the required device type value

3. Click in the Select column to select or unselect a device type
A check appears in the column next to the device type.
4. If you have finished filter definition, click Ok or Apply to complete

Device State
The Device State tab lets you add a device state to the filter. This tab has
two subtabs:
Telephony State
ISO state
Telephony State
The Telephony State tab lets you select the telephony states for the filter.
To Select the Telephony State in Filter Builder
click the Telephony State tab.
The Telephony State tab appears as in Figure 11-10.
Telephony
State Tab
Changed only
New State
Values
Old State
Values
Available
Values
Available
Values
Figure 11-10: Telephony State Tab

The Telephony State tab is described in Table 11-13.
Table 11-13: Telephony State Tab
Changed only Button When clicked, includes only changed ISO state values. When selected, all
other fields are disabled.
Old State / New State This lets you select All Values (with no further selection), Only Values, or
Values All Values Except for Old State or New State.
Available Values not-equipped ins-idle
precut ins-busy
oos-manual ins-camp-on
oos-automatic oos
oos-parent ins
oos-faulted equipped
ins-active none
ins-standby max-state
The right column shows all possible values for the tab attribute. The left col-
umn lets you select an attribute value. When clicked, a check appears. To
deselect a value, click on the check.
2. Click Include Changed only to include only changed ISO State values
Note: When selected all other fields are disabled.
3. Click on the required Old State and New State values
4. Click in the Old State and/or New State Available Values Select column to
select or unselect a device type (see Table 11-13)
A check appears in the column next to the device type selected or
disappears when unselected.
Note: You can independently exclude or include Telephony State from
Old State or New State conditions.

ISO State
An International Standards Organization (ISO) state is a description of a
managed object at a point in time relative to a request. At any given moment, a
managed object request is either in a request-defined state or is in transition
between states. You can specify ISO states by clicking on these tabs:
Administrative State
Operational State
Usage State
Standby Status
Availability
To Select the ISO State in Filter Builder
click the Device State tab.
The Device State tab appears as in Figure 11-10, on page 11-32.
2. Click on the ISO state tab
The ISO state tab appears.
3. Click on the Administrative State tab
The Administrative State tab is now in front.
The Administrative State tab appears as in Figure 11-11.
Administrative
State Tab
Changed only
New State
Old State Values
Values
Available Available
Values Values
Figure 11-11: Administrative State Tab

Available values for ISO State: Administrative State are:

locked
unlocked
shutting-down
All tabs have the items described in Table 11-14 in common.
Table 11-14: ISO State Tab
Changed only Button When clicked, includes only changed ISO state values.
When selected, all other fields are disabled.
Old State: Available This lets you select Old State values to be used in the fil-
Values ter values. These values are different for each tab. The
right column shows all possible values for the tab
attribute. The left column lets you select an attribute
value. When clicked, a check appears. To deselect a
value, click on the check.
New State: Available This lets you select New State values to be used in the fil-
Values ter values. These values are different for each tab. The
right column shows all possible values for the tab
attribute. The left column lets you select an attribute
value. When clicked, a check appears. To deselect a
value, click on the check.
4. Click Include Changed only to include only changed ISO State values
Note: When selected all other fields are disabled.
5. Click on the required Old State and New State values
6. Click in the Old State and New State Available Values Select column to
select or unselect a device type
A check appears in the column next to the device type selected or
Note: You can exclude or include values from Old State or New State
conditions independently.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each tab required

The Operational State tab dialog box is shown as in Figure 11-12.

Operational
State Tab
Changed only New State

Old State Values
Values
Available Available
Values Values
Figure 11-12: Operational State Tab
Available values for ISO State: Operational State are:

enabled
disabled
none
The Usage State tab dialog box is shown as in Figure 11-13.
Usage
State Tab
Changed only
New State
Old State Values
Values
Available Available
Values Values
Figure 11-13: Usage State Tab

Available values for ISO State: Usage State are:

busy
active
idle
none
The Standby Status tab dialog box is shown as in Figure 11-14.
Standby
Status Tab
Changed only
New State
Old State Values
Values
Available Available
Values Values
Figure 11-14: Standby Status Tab
Available values for ISO State: Standby Status are:

providing-service
hot-standby
cold-standby
none

The Availability tab dialog box is shown as in Figure 11-15.
Availability
State Tab
Changed only New State

Old State Values
Values
Available
Available
Values
Values
Figure 11-15: Availability Tab
Available values for ISO State: Availability are:

in-test
tested
power-off
off-line
off-duty
dependency
degraded
not-installed
log-full
none
8. If you want to define more filter values, continue with the next tab
the filter

Alarm States
The Alarm State tab lets you specify the alarm state that the filter returns
To Select Alarm States in Filter Builder
1. In the Add Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Alarm State tab
The Alarm State tab appears as in Figure 11-16.
Alarm
State Tab
Alarm Acknowledge
Severity State
Values
Alarm
State Tab
Clear State
Available
Values
Correlated
State
Figure 11-16: Alarm State Tab

The Alarm State tab is described in Table 11-15.
Table 11-15: Alarm State Tab
Acknowledge State Lets you select one of these alarm acknowledge states:
unAckedUnacknowledged
ackedacknowledged
Clear State Lets you select these alarm clear states:

uncleared
cleared
Correlated State Lets you select these correlated alarm states:
non correlated
nem correlated (network element manager)
uno correlated
Available Values Lets you select these values to be used in the filter values:
critical
major
minor
warning
indeterminate
normal
unknown
The right column shows all possible values for the tab attribute. The
left column lets you select an attribute value. When clicked, a check
appears. To deselect a value, click on the check.
2. Click on the required Alarm Severity value

3. Click in the Available Values Select column to select or unselect
alarm severity
A check appears in the column next to the Alarm Severity Available Value
when selected or disappears when unselected.
4. Click in the Acknowledge State Select column to select or unselect an
acknowledge state
A check appears in the column next to Acknowledge State Available Value

5. Click in the Clear State Select column to select or unselect an

acknowledge state
6. A check appears in the column next to the Clear State Available Value
7. Click in the Correlated State Select column to select or unselect a
correlated state
A check appears in the column next to the Correlated State Available Value
9. If you have finished the filter definition, click Ok or Apply to complete filter
Problem Descriptions
The Problem Description tab lets you define the probable cause and specific
problems for a filter.
To Select Problem Description in Filter Builder
1. In the Add Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Problem
Description tab
The Problem Description tab appears as in Figure 11-17.
Problem
Description Tab
Probable Alarm ID
Cause Values Values
Alarm ID
List
Available
New
Values
Value
Add Delete
Figure 11-17: Problem Description Tab

The Problem Description tab is described in Table 11-16.
Table 11-16: Problem Description Tab
Alarm ID List The Alarm ID List shows the Alarm ID values currently
defined in the filter values. You can edit the set of values in
the Alarm ID List using Add and Delete. The list is enabled
only when Only Values or All Values Except is selected.
New Value Field Lets you enter values for Alarm ID to be used in the filter val-
ues. The range may include digits, commas (,), and hyphens
(-). Spaces are ignored. Multiple ranges are permitted.
Add Click Add to add the Alarm ID currently in the New Value
field to the filter values and Alarm List.
Delete Click Delete to delete an Alarm ID selected in the Alarm List

from the Alarm List and from the filter values.
Available Values Lets you select values to be used in the filter values. The right
column shows all possible values for the tab attribute. The left
column lets you select an attribute value. When clicked, a
check appears. To deselect a value, click on the check.
2. Click on the required Probable Cause value

Note: If you select All Values, no further selection is possible.
3. Click in the Available Values Select column to select or unselect an alarm
state
A check appears in the column next to the alarm state when selected or
4. Click on the required Alarm ID value
5. Enter included or excluded Alarm ID values in the New Value Field

6. Click Add to add the entered value

The value appears in Alarm ID field.
7. To delete a value, highlight the value in the Alarm ID field and click
Delete
The value disappears from the Alarm ID field.
the filter
Event and Event Date

The Event tab lets you specify the type of event and event date for the filter.
To Specify Event Values in Filter Builder
1. In the Add Filter or Modify Filter dialog box, click the Event tab
The Event tab appears as in Figure 11-18.
Event Tab
Event Date
Event Type Range
Values
Date/Time
Available Range
Values
Figure 11-18: Event Tab

The Event tab is described in Table 11-17.
Table 11-17: Event Tab
Event Date Range Lets you select how date values are used in the filter. Date options are:
IgnoreDate and time are not used as filter criteria
FromThe filter works on alarms starting at the date specified in the From
Date/Time field and up to the current date/time, dynamically updated.
Before Before operates from the specified time backward and includes
all dates/times in the Alarm Manager, including the specified Before time.
BetweenThe filter works on alarms starting at the date specified in the
From Date/Time field and ending with the date specified in To Date/Time
field. From and To are both available for Date/Time definitions.
Range: Ignore, From, Before, Between
Default: Ignore
Date/Time Range Lets you specify the date and time for including alarms. The Date and Time
Range operate in the same way for From and To.
Range: mm=month (0112), dd=day (0131), yyyy=year (19019999),

HH=hours (0023), MM=minutes (0059)
Default: Current time and date
Available Values Lets you select these values to be used in the filter:
communicationsAlarm
environmentalAlarm
equipmentAlarm
processsingErrorAlarm
The right column shows all possible values. The left column lets you select a
value. When clicked, a check appears. To deselect a value, click on the check.
2. Click on the required event type value

3. Click in the Select column to select or unselect an event type
A check appears in the column next to the event type when selected or
4. Click on the required Event Date button
The choices are Ignore, From, Before, and Between.

Note: If you leave the default Ignore, no further selection is possible.

5. Enter the date and time by clicking the arrows or highlighting the field and
entering the date and time
6. If you want to change any previously defined filter values, click the
required tab and enter the information
the filter
Complex Filters
A complex filter consists of more than one regular filter. A complex filter can
be created, edited, or deleted (see Deleting a Filter on page 11-48).
Note: Complex filters are only available in Regular Mode.
Defining a Complex Filter

Creating a complex filter consists of selecting existing regular filters and
combining these filters into a complex filter.
To Define a Complex Filter
1. In the Filter Builder main dialog box Filter List, Figure 11-1, on
page 11-7, select the filters you want to use in a complex filter
The filters appear highlighted.
2. From the Filter Builder main dialog box Main Menu bar select:
Edit
Complex Filter
Save as Complex

The Save Complex Filter dialog box appears as in Figure 11-19.
Filter
Name Scope
User
Comment
Preview Field
Action Buttons
Figure 11-19: Save Complex Filter Dialog Box
The Save Complex Filter dialog box is described in Table 11-18
Table 11-18: Save Complex Filter Dialog Box
Scope Displays filter scope:

Public
Private
If one of the filter components has a Private scope, the complex
filter scope is Private.
Action Buttons See Action Buttons in UNO Dialog Boxes on page 2-36.
Preview Field Displays the components of the complex filter

User Comment Field Enter any relevant comments.
Filter Name Lets you create a name for the filter.

Range: 120 alphanumeric characters, no spaces
Default: None
3. Enter the Filter Name and any User Comments and click Ok or Apply to
complete the filter
The new filter appears in the Filter List.

Note: When you modify a regular filter definition (see Adding or Modifying
a Filter on page 11-13), and this filter is part of a complex filter, you
must Refresh (see View Menu: Refreshing the Filter List on
page 11-53) to update the complex filter. Otherwise, the complex filter
is not up to date.
Expanding a Complex Filter

Expanding a complex filter allows the user to easily view the components of
the filter and change these components.
To Expand a Complex Filter
1. In the Filter Builder main dialog box Filter List, Figure 11-1, on
page 11-7, select the complex filter whose components you want to view
or change
Edit
Complex Filter
Expand
The filters included in the selected complex filter appear in the Filter List
highlighted.
3. If you want to change the complex filter components click, or <Control>
click to add or remove filters, then follow the procedures in To Define a
Complex Filter on page 11-45

Deleting a Filter
Lets you delete a filter from the Filter Builder filter list. Once a filter is deleted
you cannot retrieve that filter. It is recommended not to delete a filter if that
filter is currently in use. Before deleting a filter verify if the filter is currently
in use and if in use, disable the filter (see To Change Alarm Filters on
page 3-24). You can then delete the filter.
Note: This procedure, available in Regular and Large Scale Modes, is
applicable for all filter types.
To Delete a Filter
1. In the Filter Builder main dialog box Filter List (Figure 11-1, on
page 11-7), select the filter you want to delete
The filter appears highlighted.
Edit
Delete
The selected filter is deleted from the Filter List.
Configuring Properties
The UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog box, lets you perform these Filter
Builder main dialog box Filter List configurations:
Hide or show fields
Specify field order
Define and use user-defined labels
Use default labels
Note: Configuration procedures are available in Regular and Large
Scale Modes.

Hiding and Showing Fields in the Filter List

The Show in Table field lets you select which labels display in the Filter List.
A check in the box next to an item indicates that the item is currently displayed
on the Filter List; no check indicates that the item is currently hidden.
To Configuring Filter List Fields in the Filter List
1. From the Filter Builder main menu bar, select:
Edit
Properties
The UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog box appears as in

The Properties Dialog box is described in Table 11-19.
Table 11-19: UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog Box
Default Label/User-Defined Label Lets you specify the field labels that will appear in the Filter List.
Use Default Label When clicked, only the default labels appear in the Filter List.
Show in Table A check indicates the item column appears in the Filter List. No
check indicates the item column does not appear in the Filter List.
Move Up When clicked, the selected item will move towards the top of the
list. In the Filter List, the item column will move to the left.
Move Down When clicked, the selected item will move towards the bottom of
the list. In the Filter List, the item column will move to the right.

Figure 11-20 shows the Filter Builder Properties dialog box.
Use Default
Labels
Show in
Tables
Move Move
Down Up
Action Buttons
Figure 11-20: UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog Box
2. If no check appears in a cell, click in the Show column next to the

component you want to show
A check appears in the cell.
The field will be shown in the Filter List. If you select Ok, the Filter
Builder Question Dialog box prompts: Do you want to save the changes?
4. Click Yes to save the changes and close the UNO Filter Builder Properties
Dialog box or No to close the UNO Filter Builder Properties Dialog box
without saving the changes

To Hide Fields in the Filter List

Edit
Properties

2. If a check appears in a cell, click in the Show column next to the
component you want to hide
The cell appears blank.
The field will not be shown in the Filter List. If you select Ok, the Filter
Builder Question Dialog box prompts, Do you want to save the changes?
4. Click Yes to save the changes and close the Filter Builder Properties
Dialog box or No to close the Filter Builder Properties Dialog box without
saving the changes
Changing Label (Field) Positions in the Filter List

You can change the position of the labels by using the Move Up and Move
down buttons.
To Change the Position of the Labels in the Filter List
Edit
Properties

2. Click on the item you want to move
The item appears highlighted.
3. Click Move Up to move the item towards the top of the list
The item will move to the left in the Filter List.

4. Click Move Down to move the item towards the bottom of the list
The item will move to the right in the Filter List.
The fields will be shown in the Filter List in the selected order. If you
select Ok, the Filter Builder Question Dialog box prompts: Do you want
to save the changes?
Defining and Using User-Defined Labels

You can customize your labels so that they better reflect your working conditions.
To Define and Use User-Defined Labels in Filter Builder
Edit
Properties

2. Select the entry in the User-Defined Label column that you want to change
The cell will appear gray.
3. Edit the entry as required
You can use the Delete and back space keys to erase characters.
4. Verify the Use Defined Labels button is raised and gray

The labels will be shown in the Filter List. If you select Ok The Filter
Builder Question Dialog box prompts: Do you want to save the changes?

Using Default Labels

Even if you have defined customized labels (see Defining and Using
User-Defined Labels on page 11-52), you can use the system default labels.
To Use Default Labels in Filter Builder
Edit
Properties

2. Verify the Use Defined Labels button is red and depressed with a check
The default labels will be shown in the Filter List. If you select Ok The
Filter Builder Question Dialog box prompts Do you want to save the
changes?
View Menu: Refreshing the Filter List

The View menu consists of Refresh. When selected, the filter list is refreshed
to reflect all new filter information.
To Refresh the Filter List
From the Filter Builder menu bar select:.
View
Refresh
The Filter list is refreshed to show all current filters.

Action Menu: Invoking Other UNO Applications UNO 2.16.3
Action Menu: Invoking Other UNO Applications

From the Filter Builder Actions Menu it is possible to invoke these
applications:
Alarm Manager
Alarm Browser
OMCR Relays
Large Scale Configuration, available only in Large Scale Mode
Alarm Manager
Selecting Alarm Manager invokes the Alarm Manager application. Filters are
applied to the Alarm Manager as follows:
If no filter is selected, the Alarm Manager starts with the default filter
If one filter is selected, the Alarm Manager starts with the selected filter
If multiple filters are selected, the Alarm Manager starts with all the
selected filters; the set of filters is applied as a multiple filter (combined
using OR logic)
To Invoke the Alarm Manager from Filter Builder
Actions
Alarm Manager
The Alarm Manager application opens with the selected filters applied.
See Chapter 3: Alarm Manager.

Alarm Browser
Selecting Alarm Browser invokes the Alarm Browser application. Filters are
applied to the Alarm Browser as follows:
If no filter is selected, the Alarm Browser is started with the default filter
If one filter is selected, the Alarm Browser is started with this filter
If more than one filter is selected, the Alarm Browser is started with all the
selected filters; the set of filters is applied as a multiple filter (combined
using OR logic)
To Invoke the Alarm Browser from Filter Builder
From the Filter Builder menu bar select:
Actions
Alarm Browser
The Alarm Browser application opens with the selected filters applied.
See Chapter 6: Alarm Browser.
OMCR Relays
Selecting OMCR Relay invokes the OMCR Relays application.
To Invoke the OMCR Relays
Actions
OMCR Relays
The UNO OMCR Relay application opens with the selected filters applied.
See Chapter 12: OMCR Relays.

Large Scale Filter Builder UNO 2.16.3

Selecting Historical Alarm Reports invokes the Historical Alarm Reports
application.
To Invoke Historical alarm Reports from Filter Builder
Actions
The UNO BTS Relays application opens with the selected filters applied.
See Historical Alarm Reports on page 7-1.
Large Scale Filter Builder

The Filter Builder can only be changed to Large Scale Mode if a Large Scale
Configuration has been defined by the system administrator. See System
Configuration Setup on page 5-4. Large Scale Mode allows the user to:
Set up a large scale user configuration
Copy this configuration to another UNO host
Define filters for an agent connected to multiple UNO hosts
Define a Large Scale Filter
Expand a Large Scale Filter
Invoke the Large Scale Alarm Manager
Setting Up a Large Scale User Configuration

The user can set up a personal Large Scale Configuration using the UNO hosts
defined by the System Administrator.
To Set Up a User Large Scale Configuration from Filter Builder
1. In the Filter Builder main dialog box (Figure 11-1, on page 11-7) click the
Large Scale Mode tab
The dialog box appears as in Figure 11-21.

Large Scale
Mode Tab
Figure 11-21: Filter Builder Main Dialog Box Large Scale Mode
2. From the main menu bar select
Actions

The UNO Large Scale User Configuration dialog box appears as in

Figure 11-22.
UNO Host
List
Add Delete Copy Refresh

Close Help
Figure 11-22: UNO Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box
The current Large Scale Configuration displays. If you want to add or
delete a host, continue with the procedure in Invoking User
Configuration on page 5-13.
Copying a Large Scale User Configuration

The user can copy a personal user configuration from the local UNO host to
another UNO host. The system Large Scale Configuration must already have
been copied from the local UNO host to the other UNO host.
To Copy a User Large Scale Configuration to another UNO Host

The dialog box appears as in Figure 11-21, on page 11-57.

Actions

3. To copy the current configuration to another host see Copying a Large
Scale User Configuration on page 5-17.
Large Scale Filters

A large scale filter consists of more than one regular filter. A large scale filter
can be created, viewed, edited, or deleted.
Note: These items are applicable to Large Scale Mode filters:
Large scale filters are only available in Large Scale Mode
Filters on other UNO hosts cannot be modified or deleted
Defining a Large Scale Filter

Creating a large scale filter consists of selecting existing filters on more than
one UNO host and combining these filters into a large scale filter.
To Define a Large Scale Filter

1. In the Filter Builder main dialog box, Figure 11-1, on page 11-7, click the
The Filter Builder changes to Large Scale Mode as in Figure 11-21.
2. In the Filter Builder main dialog box Filter List, select the filters you want
to use in a large scale filter
Note: The filters must be from more than one UNO host.
Edit
Complex Filter
Save as Complex

The Save Complex Filter dialog box appears as in Figure 11-19, on

page 11-46.
4. Enter the Filter Name and any User Comments and click Ok or Apply to
complete the filter
After refreshing (see View Menu: Refreshing the Filter List on
page 11-53), the new filter will appear in the Filter List. When applied,
this filter will view alarms over more than one UNO host.
Modify/Delete Regular Filter on Remote Host

The Modify/Delete menu is not available for a regular filter defined on a
remote host but that is part of a large scale filter configuration. To modify or
delete this filter, you must access the filter builder of the remote host.
To Modify/Delete a Filter on a Remote Host
Actions

3. Select the remote host that contains the filter you want to modify
4. Right-click on the selected remote host and select Filter Builder from the
Shortcut menu
The Filter Builder for the selected remote host appears.
5. Modify the required filter as described in Adding or Modifying a Filter
on page 11-13
OR
Delete the required filter as described in Deleting a Filter on page 11-48

Expanding a Large Scale Filter

Expanding a large scale filter allows the user to easily view the components of
the filter and change these components.
To Expand a Large Scale Filter
2. In the Filter Builder main dialog box Filter List, Figure 11-21, select the
large scale filter whose components you want to view or change
Edit
Complex Filter
Expand
The filters included in the selected large scale filter in the Filter List are
highlighted.
4. If you want to change the large scale filter components click, or
<Control> click to add or remove filters, then follow the procedures in
To Define a Large Scale Filter on page 11-59

Defining Filters for an Agent Connected to Two UNO Hosts

Having filters for the same agent connected to more than one UNO host is a
safeguard against possible loss of connection to an agent. If connection to
one of the agents is lost, you can still view alarms from that agent from the
other host.
To Work with an Agent Connected to Two UNO Hosts
2. Check that the same agent is connected to the UNO hosts
3. From the main menu bar select:
Actions

Figure 11-22, on page 11-58 displaying the current user configuration.
4. Check that the same agent is connected to the UNO hosts
5. Define two filters, one filter to receive alarms from the agent in the user
UNO host and one filter to receive alarms from the other UNO host see
Defining a Large Scale Filter on page 11-59
6. In the Filter List, select one of the filters
The filter is highlighted in reversed video.
Actions
Alarm Manager
The Large Scale Alarm Manager appears with the selected filter applied.
See Chapter 3: Alarm Manager If connection to this agent is lost, the
user can select the other filter and continue to monitor alarms.

Invoking the Large Scale Alarm Manager

When you select a large scale filter and invoke the Alarm Manager, the Alarm
Manager application starts with the large scale filter and is then an Large Scale
Alarm Manager, see Alarm Manager on page 11-54.
Invoking the Large Scale Alarm Browser

When you select a large scale filter and invoke the Alarm Browser, the Alarm
Browser application starts with the large scale filter and is then a Large Scale
Alarm Browser, see Alarm Browser on page 11-55.

Mouse Shortcuts UNO 2.16.3
Mouse Shortcuts
This section describes the right mouse button shortcuts for use in the
Filter Builder.
Filter Builder right mouse button shortcuts aid in performing actions for
selected alarms. Table 11-20 lists shortcut menu options for the Filter Builder.
Table 11-20: Filter Builder Shortcuts
Shortcut Description
Add Creates and defines new filters.
Modify Changes already existing filters.
Delete Removes existing filters.
Refresh Refreshes the main screen to reflect all new filter

information.
Complex Filter Offers two options:

Expand when a complex filter is selected, to
highlight the component filters.
Save as Complex when multiple filters are
selected, opens the Save Complex Filter dialog
box.
Alarm Manager Invokes the Alarm Manager application.
Alarm Browser Invokes the Alarm Browser application.
OMCR Relay Invokes the OMCR Relays application.
Buzzer Box Invokes the Buzzer Box application (Japanese

version only).
Historical Alarm Reports Invokes the Historical Alarm Reports application.
Large Scale Configuration Invokes the Large Scale Configuration dialog box.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 12: OMCR Relays

UNO Core Features
OMCR Relays is used to View and perform Actions on OMCR relays

controlled by the UNO Manager. Viewing functions are available to both users
and administrators. Action functions are open to administrators only.
OMCR Relays lets you to perform these tasks:
View information about all OMCR relays controlled by the UNO Manager,
including the OMCR agent, the relay on the OMCR agent, the applied
filter, number of alarms and OMCR relay operational state
View the filter specification of a filter applied to an OMCR relay
View alarms that have passed through the filter applied to an OMCR relay
by directly invoking the Alarm Manager
Set (apply) a filter to an OMCR relay (using the Filter Builder to create a
filter or select or modify an existing filter)
Unset (remove) a filter that has been applied to an OMCR relay
Manually control the OMCR-relay current operational state, including
turning the relay Off, Disabling the relay and Enabling the relay
Delete a relay that is no longer controlled by the UNO Manager

Overview UNO 2.16.3
Overview
OMCR Relays functionality is summarized in the Functionality Flowchart of
Figure 12-1.
UNO Manager Filtered A larm Inform ation

M anaged Network
Elem ents
Sub scrib e to F ilter

Alarm Engine
ti o n
rm a Filter Database
In fo
A la rm
Alarm Manager
OMCR Agent Subscribe to Filter
Filtered A larm Inform ation
A dd/M odify Filter Filter Builder
O M CR R elay
qu es t Engine
S ta te Re
R el ay
Ch an ge
n ow led ge d Table C hang e N otification
OMCR Relay e A ck
ha ng
St ate C
R el ay
Relay Filter
Setting
Select Existin g R elays U pd ates Relay State
D ev ic M an ual Setting
e In fo
rm at io n Device
Information
Database
OMCR Relay
Database Da ta OM CR Relay GUI
K ey R ea d
D a ta F lo w :
U s er C o ntro lled F low :
Figure 12-1: OMCR Relays Functionality Flowchart
View Functions
The OMCR GUI interfaces directly with the Filter Builder and Alarm Manager
to execute all View functions of OMCR Relays.
Action Functions
All Actions on OMCR relays are performed through the OMCR Relay Engine,
which interfaces between the OMCR Relays GUI and the OMCR relays in the
OMCR agent. In the OMCR agent-to-OMCR Relays GUI direction, the
OMCR Relay Engine reads OMCR relay device information and updates the
OMCR Relays GUI. In the OMCR Relays GUI-to-OMCR agent direction,
the OMCR Relay Engine controls OMCR relay according to UNO Manager
Alarm and Filter data set with the OMCR Relays GUI.

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 12: OMCR Relays
Startup
At UNO Manager startup, the OMCR Relay Engine reads device information
from the Device Information Database, which contains all information on
OMCR relays controlled by the UNO Manager. The OMCR Relay Engine
selects these relays and updates the OMCR Relay Database accordingly. The
OMCR Relays GUI reads and displays the device information from the
OMCR Relay Database.
At UNO Manager startup, the OMCR Relay Engine also resets the alarm count
to zero and sets the operational state to OFF for all OMCR relays (except those
that have previously been disabled). The OMCR Relay Engine updates the
OMCR Relays GUI display accordingly.
Filter Settings and Alarms

Filter settings are sent from the OMCR Relays GUI to the OMCR Relay
Engine. The OMCR Relay Engine updates the OMCR Relay
Database accordingly.
Alarms received by the UNO Manager from the OMCR agent that pass through
the applied filter are sent to the OMCR Relay Engine. The OMCR Relay
Engine turns the OMCR relay ON when the number of alarms increments to a
value greater or equal to one (1). The OMCR Relay Engine turns the OMCR
relay OFF when the number of alarms decrements to zero (0). The OMCR
Relay Engine also updates the OMCR Relays GUI.
OMCR Relay Operational State

You can manually change the OMCR-relay operational state by performing
actions on the OMCR-relay operational state with the OMCR Relays GUI.
These manual actions are sent to the OMCR Relay Engine. The OMCR Relay
Engine sets the OMCR-relay operation accordingly. The OMCR Relay Engine
receives an acknowledgment from the OMCR relay and updates the OMCR
Relays GUI.
The OMCR-relay operational state is also changed automatically by the OMCR
Relay Engine when alarms are cleared and uncleared. When an alarm is
cleared, the OMCR Relay Engine automatically turns the OMCR relay OFF.
When an alarm is uncleared, the OMCR Relay Engine turns the OMCR
relay ON.

Overview UNO 2.16.3
Limitations
This section provides the conditions and limitations for OMCR-relay setup.
OMCR Agent Configuration

For OMCR relays to be controlled by OMCR Relays, their OMCR agents must
be configured to have the relays under UNO Manager control. An OMCR
relay whose OMCR agent has not been so configured will not be listed in the
OMCR Relay Control dialog box (Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay Control Dialog
Box, on page 12-8).
You can verify the OMCR-agent relay configuration only at the OMCR agent.
To verify the relay configuration, check the Relay_Mode variable on the
OMCR agent. The Relay_Mode variable defines if the OMCR relay is
controlled by the UNO Manager or by SC-UNO.
Note: If no OMCR agents have been configured to have their relays
controlled by the UNO Manager, a message appears to this effect when
OMCR Relays is invoked.
Filter Definition
For alarms to be counted in OMCR Relays, the Alarm State parameters of the
filters must have these settings:
Clear State set to unCleared
OR
Acknowledge State set to unAcked
OR
Both of the above
The Alarm State parameters of the filters are set with the Filter Builder. See
Alarm States on page 11-39.

Operation
This section describes the OMCR Relay Engine operations.
Refresh
The OMCR Relay Engine (see Figure 12-1, on page 12-2) constantly checks
the contents of the Device Information Database and updates the OMCR Relay
Database and OMCR Relay GUI accordingly.
During ongoing operations, the contents of the Device Information Database
may undergo these changes:
An OMCR relay may be removed from the Device Information Database
when the UNO Manager no longer communicates with the OMCR agent
with the relay
An OMCR relay may be added to the Device Information Database
When an OMCR relay is removed from the Device Information Database, the
OMCR Relay Engine performs these actions:
Sets the Current State of the OMCR relay to NOT ALIVE (see Table 12-3,
OMCR Relay Parameters, on page 12-9)
Sets the Alarms Count to Zero (0)
When an OMCR relay is added to the Device Information Database, the
OMCR Relay Engine performs these actions:
Adds the OMCR relay to the OMCR Relay Parameter Table (see
Table 12-2, OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box Elements, on page 12-8)
Sets the Current State of the OMCR relay to OFF
Sets the Alarms Count to Zero (0)
Note: Filters must be applied manually (see Filter Setting on page 12-16).

Overview UNO 2.16.3
Alarm Counter
The OMCR Relays alarm counter works only when the Alarm State parameters
of the applied filter are set as described in Filter Definition on page 12-4.
Increasing Alarm Counter

The alarm counter value increases by one under these conditions:
A new alarm has passed through the applied filter
An acknowledged alarm that has passed through the filter has
become unacknowledged
Decreasing Alarm Counter

The alarm counter value decreases by one under these conditions:
An alarm that has passed through the filter is cleared
An alarm that has passed through the filter is acknowledged
Restoring Connection to OMCR Relay Engine

If the OMCR Relays application loses its connection to the Relay Engine, a
Question asking if you want to restore the connection appears as in Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2: Reconnect Question
To Restore the Connection to the OMCR Relay Engine
From the Reconnect Question, click Yes

The connection between the OMCR Relays GUI and the OMCR Relay
Engine is restored. The OMCR Relay Engine performs as in Startup (see
Startup on page 12-3).

Invoking OMCR Relays

Invoke OMCR Relays with one of these two methods:
From the UNO Application Launcher
From the command line
Note: You can also invoke OMCR Relays from the Filter Builder in context.
To Invoke OMCR Relays from the Application Launcher
From the UNO Applications Launcher, click
The OMCR Relay Control dialog box appears as in Figure 12-3, on

page 12-8.
To Invoke OMCR Relays from the Command Line

Path: /opt/uno/bin/
Command uno_relay_gui -[command line argument]
Example uno_relay_gui -host <host_name>

Invoking OMCR Relays UNO 2.16.3
Table 12-1 lists OMCR Relays command line arguments.
Table 12-1: OMCR Relays Command Line Arguments
Option Description
-host <host_name> Invoke application from the specified host.
The OMCR Relay Control dialog box appears as in Figure 12-3.
Menu Bar
OMCR Relay
Parameter Table
Figure 12-3: OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box
The elements of the OMCR Relay Control dialog box are described in
Table 12-2.
Table 12-2: OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box Elements
Item Description
Menu Bar Contains the OMCR Relay menu options.
OMCR Relay Provides the parameters of all OMCR relays connected to and
Parameter Table under the control of the UNO Manager. See Table 12-3.
The OMCR Relay parameters are described in Table 12-3.

Table 12-3: OMCR Relay Parameters
Parameter Description
Agent The name of the OMCR agent.
Relay Number The relay number on the Agent.
Filter Name The alarm filter that is currently filtering the OMCR Relay alarms. The OMCR
Relay alarm filters, designed specifically for OMCR relays, are built with the Filter
Builder.
The Filter Name parameter can have these values:
Emptyno filter has been applied to the OMCR relay so no value appears in
the Filter Name field
Filter_Namethe name of the filter that is applied to the OMCR relay
IS BADthe applied filter is corrupted or does not exist. You should
investigate the reason for this state.
Range: Empty, Filter_Name, IS BAD
Default: Empty
Alarms Count The total number of current OMCR Relay alarms that meet the filter criteria.
Current State The current operational state of the OMCR relay.

The Current State parameter can have these values:
ON the OMCR relay is on (operating).
ON IN PROGRESSthe OMCR relay is in the process of being turned ON.
The ON command has been sent to the OMCR agent, but has not yet been
acknowledged.
OFF the OMCR relay state is off.
OFF IN PROGRESSthe OMCR relay is in the process of being turned
OFF. The OFF command has been sent to the OMCR agent, but has not yet
been acknowledged.
DISABLEDthe OMCR relay has been placed in a Persistent Off state in
which additional counter changes will not affect the relay.
DISABLED IN PROGRESSthe OMCR relay is in the process of being
DISABLED. The DISABLE command has been sent to the OMCR agent, but
has not yet been acknowledged.
NOT ALIVEthe OMCR agent is not communicating with the UNO Manager.

OMCR Relay Menu Bar UNO 2.16.3
OMCR Relay Menu Bar

The OMCR Relay Control Menu Bar is shown in Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay
Control Dialog Box, on page 12-8. It contains all OMCR Relay Control
menus and options.
The OMCR Relay Control menus and options are shown in Table 12-4.
Table 12-4: OMCR Relay Control Menu Bar
File View Actions Help
Print Alarms Filter Setting Help

Exit Filter Specification Filter Unset
Relay Off
Relay Enable
Relay Disable
Relay Delete
The OMCR Relay Control menu bar comprises these options:

File
View
Actions
Help

File Menu
The File menu comprises these items:
Print
Exit
Print
Print lets you print the OMCR Relay Parameter Table in the OMCR Relay
Control dialog box (see Figure 12-3).
To Print the OMCR Relay Parameter Table
1. From the OMCR Dialog box menu bar select:
File
Print
The Print Dialog dialog box appears, as in Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-4: Print Dialog Box
For printing procedures, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.

2. Perform the Print procedures described in Print Dialog Box on
page 2-31.

Exit
Exit lets you to exit the OMCR Relays application.
To Exit the OMCR Relays Application
1. From the OMCR Relays Control dialog box, select:
File
Exit
This confirmation message appears:
2. Click Yes
Any unsaved changes are saved and the OMCR Relays application
is exited.

View Menu
The View menu lets you view current alarms that have passed through the
OMCR Relay filter applied to a selected OMCR relay and view the
specifications of the applied filter.
The View Menu provides these menu options:
Alarms
Filter Specification
Alarms
Alarms invokes the Alarm Manager to let you view current alarms that have
passed through the OMCR Relay filter applied to a selected OMCR relay.
Note: The same filter can be applied to more than one OMCR relay.
To View Alarms for a Selected OMCR Relay
1. From the OMCR Relay Parameter Table in the OMCR Relay Control
dialog box (see Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box, on
page 12-8), click in the table row with the OMCR relay for which you
want to view alarms
The Alarms option is available only when the Alarms Count parameter in
the OMCR Relay Parameter table (see Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay
Control Dialog Box, on page 12-8) has a positive value (>1).
View
Alarms
The Alarm Manager dialog box for the filter applied to the selected
OMCR relay appears as in Figure 12-5. See Chapter 3: Alarm
Manager.

Figure 12-5: Alarm Manager of OMCR-Relay Applied Filter
Note: The Alarm Manager dialog box may show more alarms than the
number of alarms shown in the OMCR Relay Parameter Table for the
selected OMCR relay. The additional alarms are cmipAgent alarms,
which will always appear in the Alarm Manager regardless of the
applied filter. You can differentiate between the OMCR relay alarms
and the cmipAgent alarms in that with cmipAgent alarms, the
Alarm-List Agent column is empty.
Filter Specification lets you view (only) the specification of the filter applied
to a selected OMCR relay and to check the specification against your needs.
To View the Filter Specification of a Selected OMCR Relay
want to view the filter specification
The Filter Specification option is available only when the Filter Name
parameter in the OMCR Relay Parameter table (see Figure 12-3, OMCR
Relay Control Dialog Box, on page 12-8) has an entry.

2. From the OMCR Relay Control dialog box menu bar select:
View
The OMCR Relay Filter Specification Dialog appears as in Figure 12-6

displaying the properties of the filter applied to the selected OMCR relay.
Figure 12-6: OMCR Relays Filter Specification Dialog
3. If you wish to print the OMCR Relay Filter Specification Dialog,

click Print
The Print Dialog dialog box appears, as in Figure 12-4, on page 12-11.
For printing procedures, see Print Dialog Box on page 2-31.

Actions Menu
The Actions menu options let an administrator control the filter applied to an
OMCR relay and control OMCR relay operation.
Note: Actions that are performed on the OMCR relay at the OMCR agent are
not recognized by the UNO Manager. For example, if the relay is ON
in the OMCR Relay Control dialog box, but has been manually turned
OFF at the OMCR agent, the UNO Manager still reads the relay as ON.
The OMCR Menu contains these options:
Filter Setting
Filter Unset
Relay Off
Relay Enable
Relay Disable
Relay Delete
Filter Setting
Filter Setting lets an administrator invoke the Filter Builder application to
select or modify an existing filter or build a new filter for the selected OMCR
relay and apply it to the OMCR Relay.
Filters are not assigned to OMCR relays automatically. Filter Setting must be
used to apply a filter to an OMCR relay for alarms to be generated that activate
the relay. If a filter is not applied to an OMCR relay, no alarms will be
generated.
To Set a Filter for an OMCR Relay
want to set a filter

Actions
Filter Setting
The Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> dialog box appears, as in Figure 12-7.
If you have selected an OMCR relay that already has an applied filter, the
Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> dialog box shows the filter already
highlighted. If no filter has been assigned, the Filter Builder <OMCR
Relay> dialog box appears with no filter highlighted.
Figure 12-7: Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> Dialog Box
3. From the Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> dialog box, select, modify or add
a filter as described in Chapter 11: Filter Builder
4. From the Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> dialog box, select:
File
Apply Filter
The Filter Builder <OMCR Relay> dialog box closes and the OMCR
Relay Control dialog box appears with the filter you applied in the Filter
Name table cell of the selected OMCR relay. The filter is now applied and
alarms meeting filter criteria are counted and activate the OMCR relay
(change the Current State to ON).

Filter Unset
Filter Unset lets you unset (remove from the Filter Name table cell) a filter
that has been applied to a selected OMCR Relay. When the filter is unset,
alarms will no longer be counted and the OMCR relay cannot be activated.
To Unset a Filter
want to unset a filter
Your selection is highlighted. Filter Unset is available only when a filter
has been applied to the OMCR relay. The Filter Name table cell in the
OMCR Relay Parameter Table (see Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay Control
Dialog Box, on page 12-8) must have an entry.
Actions
Filter Unset
The filter applied to the selected OMCR relay is unset. The filter name is
removed from the Filter Name table cell of the OMCR Relay Parameter
Table. Alarms are no longer counted and the OMCR relay cannot be
activated.

Relay Off
Relay Off lets you set an OMCR relay that is ON to OFF, thus deactivating the
OMCR relay. The OFF state will remain in effect until the next alarm is
counted. When the next alarm is counted, the OMCR relay reverts to ON.
To Turn OMCR Relay Off
page 12-8), click in the table row with the OMCR relay that you want to
turn OFF
Your selection is highlighted. Relay Off is available only when the
Current State (see Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box, on
page 12-8) of the OMCR relay is ON.
Actions
Relay OFF
The OMCR relay is turned OFF, as indicated in the Current State table
cell of the OMCR Relay Parameter Table. The Current State will remain
OFF until the next alarm is counted. When the next alarm is counted, the
Current State will revert to ON.
To Undo OMCR Relay Off
Note: This action is useful only if you want to undo the Relay Off action you
have just executed on an OMCR relay.
page 12-8), make sure the OMCR relay that you have just turned OFF is
still selected (highlighted)
2. Execute Relay Disable (see Relay Disable on page 12-21)
3. Execute Relay Enable (see Relay Enable on page 12-20)
The OMCR relay Current State reverts to ON.

Relay Enable
Relay Enable lets you enable an OMCR relay that has been disabled (see
Relay Disable on page 12-21).
To Enable a Disabled OMCR Relay
page 12-8), click in the table row with the disabled OMCR relay that you
want to enable
Your selection is highlighted. Relay Enable is available only when the
Current State (see Figure 12-3, OMCR Relay Control Dialog Box, on
page 12-8) of the OMCR relay is DISABLED.
Actions
Relay Enable
The OMCR relay is enabled. If the Alarms Count table cell of the OMCR
Relay Parameter Table value is zero (0), the Current State will revert to
OFF. If the Alarms Count table cell has a positive value (>1), the Current
State will revert to ON.

Relay Disable
Relay Disable lets you disable an OMCR relay. In the Disabled state, alarms
are still counted, but the OMCR relay is not activated in response to these
alarms. The Current State remains OFF, even if the Alarms Count has a
positive value (>1).
Note: To execute Relay Disable, the OMCR relay Current State can be OFF
or ON, indicating that the OMCR relay is communicating with the
UNO Manager.
To Disable an OMCR Relay
disable
Your selection is highlighted. Relay Disable is unavailable when the
Current State is NOT ALIVE, which indicates that there is no
communication between the OMCR agent and the UNO Manager.
Actions
Relay Disable
The OMCR relay is disabled, as indicated in the Current State table cell of
the OMCR Relay Parameter Table. In this state, the OMCR relay is not
activated, even if the Alarms Count table cell has a positive value (>1).

Help Menu UNO 2.16.3
Relay Delete
Important: You cannot undo the Relay Delete action.
Relay Delete lets you delete an OMCR relay from the OMCR Relay
Parameter Table of the OMCR Relay Control dialog box, if the OMCR relay
Current State is NOT ALIVE.
To Delete an OMCR Relay from the OMCR Relay Parameter Table
delete
Your selection is highlighted. Relay Delete is available only if the
Current State is NOT ALIVE, which indicates that there is no
communication between the OMCR agent and the UNO Manager.
Actions
Relay Delete
The selected OMCR relay is removed from the OMCR Relay

Parameter Table.
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the Help menu option, which invokes Online Help.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 13: Element Manager Access

UNO Core Features
The Element Manager Access application enables you to access external

applications from within UNO Manager. Typically, an operator would activate
this application in order to obtain information directly from the managers of the
agents. This application provides the operator with enhanced functionality,
thus improving the smooth operation of the UNO cellular network.
The operator can access the application managers of the following agents:
SwitchMate CAT (Command Application Terminal)
IWU TCM (Total Control Manager)
3COM PDSN TCM (3COM Packet Data Serving Node TCM)
CWM (Cisco WAN Manager)
CW2000 (Cisco Works 2000 for LAN)
CV (Cisco View Utility for LAN)
Cisco Telnet Access
Cisco Http Access
SC UNO Access
SwitchMate Access
OMCR Access
MCP-S Toolbox
Important: UNO provides access to the external applications listed above.

However, operations performed in these external applications are
not part of UNO functionality.
The Element Manager Access application allows you to:

Access a remote host from the Element Manager Access application
Access a remote host from within an UNO application, such as the
Command Center, Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser

Invoking the Element Manager Access Application UNO 2.16.3
Invoking the Element Manager Access Application

This procedure explains how to access the Element Manager Access
Application from the Application Launcher.
Invoking Element Manager from the Launcher
To Invoke Element Manager Access from the Launcher
From the UNO Applications Launcher, double click the Element Manager
Access icon
The Element Manager Access Main Window display appears, as in
Figure 13-1.
Invoking Element Manager from Command Line

When you run the Element Manager Access application from the command
line, you can specify parameters to give you additional flexibility in
configuring the application.
For the command line parameters, the default parameter values are the ones
used when you launch the Element Manager Access application from the UNO
Application Launcher.
To Invoke Element Manager Access from the Command Line

page 2-25.


UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 13: Element Manager Access
Path /opt/UNO/bin/
Command uno_x_term (no command line arguments)
The Element Manager Access Main Window display appears, as shown in

Figure 13-1.
Server
Type/Agents
Host
Name/Address
Connect Button
Disabled
Figure 13-1: Element Manager Access Main Window Display
Figure 13-1 presents one example of how the Element Manager Access
application presents information.
In this example, the Element Manager Access screen displays OMCR Access
as the selected Server Type and sgi9 as the agent associated with this server
type. The Host Name and IP Address of agent sgi9 appear in the respective
fields in the table in Figure 13-1.
When agent sgi9 is selected, the Connect button ceases to be grayed out and
becomes enabled, as shown in Figure 13-2, on page 13-4.
You can now connect to the OMCR Access manager application.

Setting Up Your Remote Environment UNO 2.16.3
Host Name/Address
Entered
Connect Button
Activated
Figure 13-2: Element Manager Access: Connect Enabled
Setting Up Your Remote Environment

To create a connection to an agent, you must first define your working
environment. After you have defined your remote environment, you can
connect to the agent residing on a remote host.
To Define Your Working Environment
1. Manually Login to your remote host, as explained in Accessing an

External Host on page 13-6
Verify that you are in this directory: /home1/unoadmin
2. Use the pwd command to verify if you are in the correct directory
If you are not in this directory type cd ~unoadmin
(or cd ./home1/unoadmin)
3. Check if the file .rhosts (Remote Hosts) is present
4. If .rhosts is present, check if your required remote host name is
contained in the file
5. If your required host is not present, add the host name to the file
Note: You can use any editor, such as VI, to add the required line to
.rhosts file.

Installing MOSCAD MCP-S Toolbox

This is one example of the pre-requisites for accessing an agent from UNO.
To Install MOSCAD MCO-S Toolbox
1. To access the MOSCAD MCP-S Toolbox application from UNO, first

install:
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server
Citrix MetaFrame 1.0
NCD Wincenter for MetaFrame 1.0 (NTWCMF-10-S) on your
Windows PC
2. To get the activation keys for MetaFrame and WinCenter, go to
http://www.citrix.com/activate on the web.
3. To login automatically to your specified host, define your remote host
environment through the./roosts file.
Server Types
The Administrator must first set up the configuration of the servers and the
agents before you can access a remote host. Connection and activation of
agents is explained in Agent Connectivity. UNO Software Installation Guide.
This is a list of servers that have already been setup in your system. The Host
Name/Host Address list will change to include any Host added.
The Server Type drop down list displays a list of the servers through which the
operator can access the required agents. See Figure 13-3.
Figure 13-3: EM Server Types Options

Using Element Manager Access Application UNO 2.16.3
Using Element Manager Access Application

UNO connects to the UNO agents. These agents are managed by their
application managers. During setup, the Administrator installs the agents and
defines both the agents and their IP addresses to assure transparent connectivity
between them and the UNO system.
The Element Manager Access Application, when invoked, creates the
connection between the UNO operator and the agent application managers.
Accessing an External Host

The operator invokes the Element Manager Access application for a wide range
of reasons, such as to access information relating to the agents, to make
modifications in the set up, to verify data and so forth.
The Element Manager Access application creates a connection between UNO
and the agents application manager, enabling the operator to perform the
required tasks without exiting UNO.
The following section describes the procedures for creating a connection to the
relevant external application and obtaining the required information.
To Connect to a Remote Application
1. Invoke the Element Manager Access application

The Element Manager Access application screen opens, displaying the
available agents/hosts.
2. Select a Host
The Hostname/address appears in the Host Name/Address field and the
Connect button is enabled.
3. Click Connect
If the settings do not allow the invocation of remote applications, a
message box appears, as shown in Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-4: Environment Setting Information Message Box

4. Click OK
The Telnet dialog box opens, as appears in Figure 13-5.
5. Enter Login and Password
Figure 13-5: Telnet Dialog Box
6. Enter your query

The Telnet screen will display the information required, if available.
Figure 13-6 shows an example of the type of information that may be accessed
through the user of the Element Manager Access application.
Figure 13-6: Information Accessed from OMCR Manager
In the example displayed in Figure 13-6, the operator accessed the OMCR
Manager application through the Element Manager Access application.

Adding an External Host

This section describes how you can connect to other agent manager
applications by adding hosts.
To Add an External Host
1. From the Element Manager Access screen, click Setup

The External Host Configuration dialog box opens, as shown in
Figure 13-7. The External Host Configuration displays the Hosts that
have been added, and enables the operator to add new external hosts.
Figure 13-7: External Host Configuration Dialog Box
2. To add a new external Hosts, Click Add

The Add Hosts Configuration dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 13-8.
Figure 13-8: External Host Configuration Dialog Box

3. Select server type, as appropriate

4. Enter the Host Name or Host (IP) address of the agent
The Check Communication button becomes activated.
5. Click Check Communication
6. The Check Communication dialog box opens.
If the Host Address is valid, the message will confirm that the
connection is Ok, as shown in Figure 13-9.
Figure 13-9: Confirming Connection is Valid
If the Host Address is invalid, the message will inform you that the
connection is invalid, as can be seen in Figure 13-10.
Figure 13-10: Communication Connection - Failed
7. Click Apply if you want to add more external Hosts or Ok if you want to
close the dialog box
If communication fails, check the host name or IP address and retest the correct
host name/IP address.
If the Host Name/IP Address is valid, the agent will appear in the Host
Configuration Table. If it is not valid, a message will appear, as shown in
Figure 13-11.

Figure 13-11: Warning - Invalid Host Address
8. Click Confirm
The Host is be added to the Host Configuration Table, but its Host Name
appears as undefined.
9. When done, click Apply to add your host to the host list if you want to add
more External Hosts
The dialog box remains open and you can add additional hosts; or
10. Click Ok to add your host to the host list and close the dialog box
Deleting an External Host

This section describes how to delete an existing external Host from the Element
Manager Access application.
To Delete an Existing External Host
1. From the External Host Configuration Screen, select the Host that you
want to delete
2. Click the left mouse button on the host
You can delete only a single host at a time.
3. Click the Delete button
The selected host is removed from the list. The host is removed only from
the list, but not deleted from the system.
Note: You can add a + (plus sign) to a new line in the .rhosts file to include
all defined remote hosts. It is, however, recommended to individually
specify each remote host that you want to connect to the
Element Manager.

Connecting a Remote Host from UNO Applications

The Alarm Manager, Alarm Browser and Command Center applications enable
you to access remote hosts while working in these applications. The procedure
is not the same as accessing the remote host directly from the
Element Manager.
When accessing the remote host from Element Manager Access, the user is
asked to enter the IP address of the remote host in order to create a connection
to this remote host. After the IP address has been entered, a connection is
created. See Setting Up Your Remote Environment on page 13-4. and
Accessing an External Host on page 13-6.
In contrast, accessing a remote host from a UNO application is a two step
process. This section will explain how to create a connection to an IWU TCM
remote host using the Alarm Manager as an example.
Figure 13-12 shows how to invoke the Element Manager from the
Alarm Manager.
Element
Manager
Figure 13-12: Invoking Element Manager from Alarm Manager
Before the connection can be created, the user must ascertain that the
configuration of the agents and the SNMP setup have been completed, as
required. Agent Connectivity. UNO Software Installation Guide explains
how to connect and activate agents to enable communication with the
UNO Manager.

Connecting a Remote Host from UNO Applications UNO 2.16.3
When accessing the remote host from a UNO application, there is no

pre-defined IP address as exists when accessing the host from the Element
Manager Access application. The required agent, such as IWU Total Control
Manager (TCM) in our example, can be running on any one of a number
of machines.
The TCM manager application is connected to each one of these IWU TCM
agents and can create the connection between the operator using the UNO
Alarm Manager and the IWU TCM agent.
To create such a connection, the user is requested to enter two IP addresses:
The IP address of the IWU TCM machine on which the agent manager
is running
The IP address that connects the agent manager application and the IWU
TCM agent
A connection can then be created between the Alarm Manager and IWU
TCM agent.
To Access the TCM from UNO Applications
Perform the following steps on a TCM machine:

1. For each UNO user who needs this access to the TCM, create a user on the
TCM machine with the same login as on the UNO machine
2. For each such user on the TCM machine, add the following line to that
user .rhosts file
<user_name> hosho
replacing <user_name> by the current user's login name
Note: For the same users on the TCM machine, make sure that the .profile file
defines the TCMHOME variable, and also defines the PATH variable
to include the path where the 'xtcmvfpd' command is run from.
To Invoke Element Manager Access
From the Alarm Manager menu bar, select
Applications
Element Manager
When selected, the Telnet dialog box opens, as in Figure 13-5.

The prerequisites for connecting to a remote host are:

You have already created the SNMP agent whose Element Manager you
want to setup
You must login as root to invoke the script
The following script sets up the SNMP agents to enable you to access their
Element Managers through the Command Center (after selecting an SNMP
device) or through the Alarm Manager/Browser (after selecting an SNMP
alarm):
When the command is entered, a dialog box opens and the following
interaction will take place with the user:
Enter agent name: iwu1
Enter the IP address of the default TCM machine to access iwu1:
123.124.12.28
You entered: 123.124.12.28. Is that correct? (yn): y
iwu1 is known to this UNO Manager as: 145.9.239.3
Does the TCM you selected also know iwu1 through this IP? (yn):
n
Please enter the iwu1 IP as known to the TCM you selected:
111.222.100.110
You entered: 111.222.100.110. Is that correct? (yn): y
SNMP Element Manager setup completed successfully.
At the end of the procedure, the Remote Access Window opens as in

Figure 13-13.
Figure 13-13: Remote Access Window
The user can now interact with the selected agent.

Note: This procedure is applicable to SwitchMate and MCP-S
Toolbox applications.

UNO Core Features
Chapter 14: WAP for UNO

UNO Core Features
This chapter describes the WAP2UNO (Wireless Application Protocol to UNO)

feature that enables remote network monitoring by means of a wireless
connection between UNO and an internet-enabled cellular phone.
This feature provides the UNO user with view-only access to limited FM (Fault
Management) and PM (Performance Management) information that is current
on the cellular network.
The introductory section of this chapter describes:
UNO and WAP components
System requirements
The practical section of this chapter describes how to:
Set up secure data transfer
Invoke the application
Use the WAP2UNO interface
Monitor device state
Monitor alarms
Set up preferences

General Description
This section provides a short description of the WAP, UNO and WAP2UNO
functionalities that are involved in this feature.
WAP
The Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) is the cellular industry standard
interface for working over the Web from an internet-enabled cellular phone. To
receive data, a WAP-enabled mobile phone needs to establish a connection with
the WAP gateway. The gateway translates data from the HTTP protocol to the
WAP protocol and may optionally use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Wireless
Transport Security Layer (WTSL) for data encryption.
Figure 14-1 illustrates the WAP connection.
WAP BROWSER WAP WEB SERVER

ENABLED GATEWAY
HANDSET
INTERNET
WIRELESS
NETWORK
WAP HTTP
Figure 14-1: WAP Connection Schema
UNO: Server and Client Functions

This section lists the server and client functions of this Web-based application:
The Server provides these functions:

Lists all filters (public and private) that are currently defined in UNO
Manager
Supports a filtered snapshot of the active alarm log and provides a scoped
list of alarms
Provides alarm details
Provides a list of summary devices in the sequence in which they are
currently displayed in the UNO Command Center summary device display
Lists the low-level devices for the specified summary devices

UNO 2.16.3 Chapter 14: WAP for UNO
The Client provides these functions:

Lets you view current PM and FM state of high and low-level devices
Lets you view current alarms for the specified devices or for the available
public and private (user-defined) filters
Lets you navigate between Alarm and State displays
Client Requests to Server In order to display information, the client can

request for these types of data to be provided by the server:
Summary (high-level) devices of specified scope
Low-level devices (device details) corresponding to specified Summary
devices
Current alarm filters
Current alarms, corresponding to specified filters and devices
Alarm details for specified alarms
Figure 14-2 shows how the back-end UNO Manager server interacts with the
front-end WAP Client to provide user-requested data for display. The arrows
represent data flow directions.
UNO Manager network WAP Client
HTTP Server WAP Browser
UNO Server WAP2UNO Display
State Management
Summary Device Data Summary Devices
Detailed Device Data Detailed Devices
By
Device
Alarm Management
Filter Data Filter List

By
Filter
Alarm Data Alarm List
Alarm Details Data Alarm Details
Figure 14-2: WAP Server-Client Structure and Components

Interaction with Other UNO Applications

WAP2UNO uses filter definitions from UNO Filter Builder. For detailed
information, see Adding or Modifying a Filter in Filter Builder. UNO Core
Features.
Figure 14-3 shows the flow of data between elements of the UNO Manager and
the WAP enabled cellular phone.
UNO Manager
Other UNO functionalities
UNOWAP
static WML,
WMLS files
Wireless network
uno_wm_server WAP
daemon data WMLC
request WTSL
internet
HTTP
WML/SSL
UNOWAP
uno: CGI HTTP
wap_prefs scripts server
db table
WAP
Gateway
WAPCACHE
WML response
data files
Figure 14-3: UNO/WAP Data Flow

WAP2UNO
WAP2UNO lets the cell technician and the operations manager get UNO Fault
and Performance Management information on a internet-enabled cellular
phone. On WAP2UNO, the UNO user can view alarms and device state
information while in remote locations.
Like Web Monitor, WAP2UNO provides a view-only access to management
information. The UNO user can perform these tasks:
View a subset of alarms based on a user selected alarm filter
Request alarm detail information on any alarm
Query the states of one or more summary (high-level) or detailed
(low-level) devices and then to request details of the alarms that are active
on these devices
Because the user interface is restricted to a few lines with only a few characters
per line, WAP2UNO is less general in nature than the Web Monitor and is
intended to answer specific user questions.
Figure 14-4 illustrates the interactions between the two monitoring functions.
State Management Alarm Management

Device Scope
Filters List
Menu
Summary Device Alarms List

List
Device Details
Alarm Details
List
Figure 14-4: State and Alarm Management Interaction

System Requirements UNO 2.16.3
System Requirements
This section describes WAP2UNO system requirements.
User
These requirements enable the WAP2UNO user:
PM data have to be available.
Administrative permission and user ID must be issued for use of UNO
Manager databases. Names of users who have permission to use WAP are
defined using the wap_user UNO utility and are saved in the UNO
Database wap_prefs table.
Alarm filters enabling a very limited (narrow scope) search must be
preconfigured in UNO Filter Builder.
Encrypted transport of company sensitive information has to be ensured.
Installation
WAP2UNO installation includes:
WAP equipment (software and hardware), see Environment
Data encryption, see Security
Security certificates, see Providing Secure Data Transfer
Environment
These requirements are necessary for correct WAP2UNO installation and
functioning:
WAP Gateway recognition of all language tags of the WAPFORUM WML
1.1 standard (For example: Motorola WAP Gateway).
WAP Gateway access to the Web UNO Home Page in UNO Manager.
For example: The Gateway should be situated under the same firewall or
it should have network access through a firewall to Hypertext Transfer
Protocol (HTTP) port 80 at UNO Manager host.
Internet-enabled phone with WAP Browser UP Browser version 4.0 and
beyond. Only this type of browser recognizes the full set of WAPFORUM
WML 1.1 standard tags and provides adequate visual language
interpretation.

Security
To ensure that company sensitive information is safe for use over the Web, the
UNO administrator must enable encryption on the UNO Manager HTTP server.
Two encryption protocols are used:
WTSL between the WAP gateway and the WAP phone
SSL between the WAP gateway and the Web server
Figure 14-5 shows the WAP2UNO security model.
WAP BROWSER WAP WEB SERVER

ENABLED GATEWAY
HANDSET
INTERNET
WIRELESS
NETWORK
WTSL SLL
Figure 14-5: WAP2UNO Security Model
Providing Secure Data Transfer

The SSL protocol provides privacy and reliability between two applications,
enabling the UNO administrator to secure the data transfer for WAP2UNO
users.
The first stage is the creation and installation of SSL certificates on the UNO
host, which enables the HTTP server to work in SSL mode. This is done only
once, following the installation of the UNO Manager. This stage consists of
three procedures:
Creating SSL Certificates
Installing SSL Certificates
Restarting the HTTP Server
The second stage is Turning the SSL mode on or off. This is done for the WAP2
UNO feature itself.

Providing Secure Data Transfer UNO 2.16.3
Creating SSL Certificates

To perform this step, you need to know the domain name of your server. The
domain name is the IP address of the host in domain form, beginning at the
second token.
For example: In myhost.motorola.com, the domain name is motorola.com.
To Create SSL Certificates
1. To log in as a root user, type:

su - root
2. To change the directory, type:

cd /usr/http/bin/
Note: If you do not know the domain name, type the UNIX commands:
#HOST=`uname -n`
#nslookup $HOST | grep $HOST | cut -d'.' -f2-
The domain name appears. Use this name whenever you are prompted.
3. When your domain name is defined, type:
./installSSLforUNOSWS
You are prompted to supply a password.

Note: Choose one password to use for all password prompts.
4. Type the valid server domain name when prompted (IP address in domain
form, beginning at the second token)
Installing SSL Certificates

To perform this step, you need to know:
the name of the certificate directory
IP address of your host
To Install SSL Certificates
1. Define the certificate directory and IP address by typing the UNIX

commands:
#HOME_DIR=`cat /etc/passwd | grep $USER_NAME | cut -f6 -d:`
#CERT_DIR=$HOME_DIR/certs
#IP_ADDRESS=`ypcat hosts | grep $HOST awk '{print $1}'`

2. Install the server site certificates by typing the commands:

./install_certs -p $CERT_DIR -i $IP_ADDRESS
Restarting the HTTP Server

At this point, you must restart the HTTP server.
To Restart the HTTP Server
1. Stop the HTTP server by typing the command:

#/etc/rc2.d/S95http stop
2. Start the HTTP server by typing the command:

/etc/rc2.d/S95http start
Note: In some cases, the crontab daemon will restart the HTTP server
automatically.
Turning the SSL Only Mode On or Off

You can turn the SSL Only mode on or off. This action is specific for
WAP2UNO setup.
To Turn the SSL Only Mode On
Type the command:

#/opt/UNO/bin/wap_ssl on
To Turn the SSL Only Mode Off
Type the command:

#/opt/UNO/bin/wap_ssl off

Invoking UNO 2.16.3
Invoking
Once you have obtained user permission from your UNO administrator, you
can invoke WAP2UNO.
To Connect to UNO Host
Using the handsets standard menu option for connecting over the Web,
enter the URL for the UNO host you want to connect to:
http://[UNO host IP address]/wap.wml
When UNO host successfully connected, the first logon page opens, as in
Figure 14-6a.
Note: For description of the Alpha softkey, see on page 14-15.
If the gateway supports bookmarks, then a connection to UNO host by

bookmark is possible. This makes it unnecessary to enter the UNO host
name every time; you can just create the bookmark, using the option:
Menu > Browser Menu > Mark Site. Browser menus vary in various
handsets. Not all gateways support bookmarks.
To Open WAP2UNO
1. In the first logon page, enter your User ID, using the handset buttons
The OK button appears, as in Figure 14-6b.
a. b.
Figure 14-6: Logon Stages: User ID
2. Press OK

The second logon page opens, requesting your password, as in

Figure 14-7a.
a. b.
Figure 14-7: Logon Stages: Password
3. In the second logon page, enter your password, using the handset buttons
The Logon button appears, as in Figure 14-7b.
4. Press Logon
5. WAP2UNO Main Menu opens, see Figure 14-10, on page 14-18.

Getting Started UNO 2.16.3
Getting Started
This section describes the WAP2UNO display elements and interface usage.
The display for WAP2UNO was developed according to standard user interface
design guidelines for WAP applications, to ensure ease and flexibility of use in
a variety of handsets.
Figure 14-8 shows the Main Menu display on an internet-enabled handset.
Header
Selection
Arrow WAP Browser
Body Display
Elements
Action Buttons
First Softkey Second Softkey
Navigation Left/Right and

Button Up/Down Scroll
Menu Arrows
Back Handset
Input Buttons Buttons
CLR
Figure 14-8: Handset and Display Example
For descriptions of handset buttons, see Table 14-1, on page 14-14.

For descriptions of WAP2UNO action buttons, see Table 14-2, on page 14-15.
Note: The Send and End buttons are not a part of the interface.

Display Overview
WAP2UNO pages consist of these display elements:
Header Page title that indicates a list name, an action name, or

instruction/command name. In any list, includes the
current page number and the total of list pages, in brackets,
for example: 1of 11
Body Current action result, a statement, a message, a list of items
(menu, options, data) or an entry field for user input.
Number of visible body text rows varies according to the
size of the handset display.
Action Buttons Confirm an input/option choice and/or invoke other pages.
A line separates the page body from action buttons. A
maximum of two buttons can appear on a page.
Selection Arrow In all lists, this movable arrow lets you select an item. You
can select only one item. As a default, the arrow is placed
at the first item.
Context
WAP2UNO can display a topic that contains a single page (up to 10 items/rows
of body text) or a series of pages, for example, a list that is much longer than a
single page display. A series of scrollable pages appearing under the same
name, or a single multi-page procedure, is referred to as a context.
Data Refresh
Once requested, any data that you view in WAP2UNO remains the same for the
duration of your work in any given context. Fresh data will arrive from UNO
only when you leave the context for more than 5 minutes (the Sending
message will appear to indicate this). If you return to the same context within
less than 5 minutes, the same, un-updated data will display.
Data Display Limit

For any data request, WAP2UNO can display up to a hundred items. If this
limit is reached, a warning message opens before the data is displayed. When
that happens, it is recommended to set the user preferences for a narrower
scope search.

Navigating
This section describes the WAP2UNO buttons and navigation options.
Handset Buttons
Table 14-1 describes how standard handset buttons are used in WAP2UNO.
Table 14-1: Handset Buttons for WAP2UNO Use
Button Description
First Softkey Activates the WAP2UNO action button that is displaying directly above it. Typically
relates to a primary or forward moving (next most likely) action or command, for
example: OK, Find, Menu.
Second Softkey Also activates the WAP2UNO action button that is displaying directly above it.
Typically relates to a secondary or alternative action or command, for example:
Back, Cancel, Exit.
Note: Naming of the softkeys here takes into account the fact that the button layout
varies with different handset models.
Navigation Button When any of the four scrolling arrows is pressed, let you scroll:
up or down a list of items
left or right to view a row of information that is longer than the page width
Note: Pressing the arrow once moves the selection arrow up or down one item/line
of text in the WAP display.
MENU Opens the browser menu where you can choose the WAP2UNO Help, or open a
website, or bookmark a site, for example the UNO host you use. See Using Help
on page 14-17.
BACK Lets you return to previous page or context.
CLR Lets you clear unwanted text, acts as backspace.
Input Buttons Enable you to type required information into entry fields, for example: your user ID
and password, name of device, a device parameter.
Can be used as hot keys to select numbered menu options or numbered list items.

Action Buttons
Table 14-2 describes all the WAP2UNO action buttons.
Table 14-2: WAP2UNO Action Buttons
First Softkey Second Softkey
Button Description Button Description
Action Opens an options menu. Alpha Used to switch from text to symbols
or numbers during user input.
Alarms Opens a page displaying a list of BACK Returns to previous page or context.
alarms for a selected device.
Details Opens a page displaying the list of Cancel Cancels the current choice or action.
details for the selected item (device Returns to the previous page or the
or alarm). main menu.
Find Starts a WAP request for data from Done When you have finished viewing a
UNO, or searches for parameters or list of items, this action returns the
other data for the selected item. previous data context.
Logon After user authentication, connects Exit Lets you exit the application.
the WAP to requested UNO host.
Menu When more than one action is Pick Selects or deselects an item. Appears
available from a certain context, only in contexts which enable
opens a menu page, that is a list of selection of multiple list items.
actions associated only with this Selection symbols vary in different
softkey. handsets.
OK Confirms an action or selection.
Retry Repeats the last action, typically a
data search.
Save Saves entered data or preferences.

Stop Stops an action, typically a data
request to server.

Navigation Conventions
Although the display possibilities may vary with the handset equipment,
WAP2UNO provides a set of simple conventions for navigating functions, that
use the standard handset buttons.
Table 14-3 describes the navigation conventions.
Table 14-3: WAP2UNO Navigating Conventions
To perform Do what By means of
To select a list item that move the selection arrow by pressing once the top
is above or below the up or down arrow or the bottom arrow on
presently selected item the Navigation button
To read text that scroll across the page to by pressing once the right or
exceeds page width the right or to the left the left arrow on the
(back) Navigation button
Note: In some contexts there is no need to scroll across the

page. Selected list item jumps automatically to the
end of a text row and back.
To open next page or to activate the action button by pressing the Softkey
confirm an action on the displaying page handset button that is directly
below the WAP action button
To enter information when the text cursor shows by using the handset buttons
on a page, type the input (in the usual mobile user
input mode)
To view a list of items move the selection arrow by pressing the bottom arrow
that is longer than the down (More... prompt) on the Navigation button
page
To open a help topic open the help page by pressing the handsets
relating to current page Menu button which opens the
browser menu page and
choosing Help from the
menu
See also on page 14-17.

Using Help
Context-sensitive help can assist you with navigation and procedures. A Help
topic can be opened at any stage, from any page, and it refers to the current
page only. In addition to the How To information, the WAP2UNO online
help provides listings of data table columns and parameters.
To Open a Help Topic for Current Page
Note: This procedure gives an example of context-sensitive help for the

Alarms list in the Alarm Management as in Figure 14-9a.
1. Press the Menu handset button
The Browser Menu page opens, as in Figure 14-9b. Help is the first item
on the menu, and it is picked by the selection arrow.
2. Press OK
The Help topic page opens, as in Figure 14-9c.
3. To return to the context page, press BACK
a. b. c.
Figure 14-9: Online Help: Context, Browser Menu and Help Page
This Help topic:

Lists the Alarms list fields
Directs you to the Details option
Tells you how to navigate up and down the alarms list and back to the
related context page
4. To view all the topics text, press the bottom arrow on the Navigation
button
5. To exit Help and return to the current page (here: the alarms list), press OK

Main Menu UNO 2.16.3
Main Menu
The WAP2UNO Main Menu lists the three basic (parent) options,
representing the main functions of the application.
1 State Management to monitor devices see page 14-20

2 Alarm Management to monitor alarms see page 14-29
3 User Preferences to define preferences for the see page 14-32
incoming device state and
alarm information
Figure 14-10: WAP2UNO Main Menu
To Choose a Main Menu Option
1. To select the required main menu option, press the up or down arrows on
the Navigation button
The arrow marks the selected option.
2. Press OK (first Softkey)
The selected Main Menu option page opens.

To Exit WAP2UNO
1. Press Exit (second Softkey)

WAP2UNO page opens, as in Figure 14-11a, where you can choose from
these menu options:
1 Exit to exit the application

2 Change User to logon as another UNO user
2. To exit the application, select Exit and press OK

The WAP2UNO exiting page opens, as in Figure 14-11b.
3. Press OK
WAP2UNO closes. To invoke the application again, you need to perform a
new logon, as described on page 14-10.
a. b.
Figure 14-11: Exit or Change User
4. To logon as another user, select Change user and press OK

The User ID logon page opens. See procedure on page 14-10.
5. To cancel exiting, press Cancel
The WAP2UNO Main Menu page opens.

Monitoring Device State

When you are notified about a device malfunction, you need to view device
state information, in order to find the source of the problem.
Figure 14-12: Main Menu: State Management Option
In State Management you can view:

Summary devices see page 14-20
Alarms on a summary device see page 14-25

Detailed devices on a summary device see page 14-27
Alarms on a detailed device see page 14-28
For reference on device and alarm data interaction, see Figure 14-4, on
page 14-5.
Summary Devices
This section explains how you can configure a request for summary device
data. Only main types of configurations are represented in the example
procedures, because of a large number of possible parameter combinations.
A reference table listing the device scope attributes for all currently
supported types of summary devices is provided in Chapter 8: Web
Monitor , Table 8-9, Device Scope Attributes, on page 8-38.

To View All OMCRs
1. From the WAP2UNO Main Menu, select State Management and press
OK
The Device Scope list of device levels opens, as in Figure 14-13a.
The current release supports summary (high-level) devices. The summary
devices are:
OMCR, CBSC, MM, XC, BTS, MSCSPAN, ICTRKGRP, FEP, IWU,
MOSCAD, EMX, TRKGRP, SPAN, CELL, OMCIP, AN, MLS,
AGNODE, LWRTR, EDGERTR, PDSN, SDU, VPU
Important: In addition to the devices, the Critical Severity List is included as

the last item in the Device Scope list. This option lets you request
any type of summary device of a severity that you set up as your
Summary Device Severity user preference. See on page 14-35.
2. To scroll down the page, press the bottom arrow on the Navigation button
3. When the More... prompt appears, press Find
4. To go back to the first Device Scope page, press BACK
5. From the first Device Scope page, select OMCR and press Find (or press
Cancel to return to the main menu)
The OMCR page opens, as in Figure 14-13b, with the menu of required
value ranges for the selected device scope.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-13: Request for All OMCRs

You can choose to view state data on a according to these (exclusive)

value range types:
ID
Name
All
Note: A different value range applies for each summary device.
6. From the OMCR value ranges menu, select All, and press OK
The second Device Scope page opens, as in Figure 14-13c on page 14-21,
displaying the device scope: OMCR [All] and value range [All] for the
summary device you selected.
7. To start WAP2UNO request, press Find
Phone sends the request for data. When data is loaded from UNO, a list of
summary devices opens.
Note: If no data is found, press OK to return to the Main Menu or press
BACK to define the parameters for another device you want to view.
The Device Scope page opens with the request and a Sending message in
place of an action button. When data is loaded from UNO, the list of
requested devices opens.
8. To see which parameters are displayed for the summary devices, press
Menu > Help
The Help topic for the current page opens, showing the summary device
parameters: Agent name; Device ID; FM severity; PM severity.
9. To view more specific information about the summary device items, press
Action, see Detailed Devices for a Summary Device on page -27.
10. To go back to the Main Menu, press Done
To View Scoped BTSs
1. From the first Device Scope list, select a device scope (for example BTS)
and press Find
2. From the OMCR page menu, select ID and press OK
The OMCR[ID] page opens, where you can enter the OMCR ID.

3. Using the handset input buttons, enter the OMCR ID and press OK
(or press BACK to cancel and return to the first device scope page, the list
of high-level devices)
The second Device Scope page opens, showing the menu for the BTS value
range: ID, Name or All.
If you choose ID:
In the next page that opens, enter the BTS ID, press OK and view the third
Device Scope page displaying data you requested for OMCR [ID] and
BTS [ID], as in Figure 14-14a
If you choose Name:
In the next page that opens, enter the BTS Name, press OK and view the
third Device Scope page displaying data you requested for OMCR [ID]
and BTS [Name], as in Figure 14-14b
If you choose All:
The third Device Scope page opens presenting the scope you defined for
OMCR [ID] and BTS [All], as in Figure 14-14c.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-14: Request for BTSs Scoped by OMCR ID
4. To start WAP2UNO request, press Find (or press Cancel to return to the
Main Menu)
summary devices opens, as in Figure 14-15c.
BACK to define the parameters for another device to view.
5. If needed, perform either of the steps 6, 7 or 8, as in To View All
OMCRs .

To View BTSs for OMCR Specified by Name
and press Find
2. From the OMCR page menu, select Name and press OK
The OMCR [Name] page opens, where you can enter the OMCR name.
3. Using the handset input buttons, enter the OMCR Name and press OK
(or press BACK to cancel and return to the first device scope page, the list
of high-level devices)
The second Device Scope page opens, showing the menu for the BTS value
range: ID, Name or All.
4. Select the required option from this menu and enter data if required, as in
step 3 in To View Scoped BTSs on page 14-22.
summary devices opens.
OMCRs
To View All BTSs
and press Find
2. From the OMCR page menu, select All and press OK
The second Device Scope page opens, presenting the scope you defined for
OMCR [All] and BTS [All], as in Figure 14-15b.
summary devices opens as in Figure 14-15c.
OMCRs

Figure 14-15c shows the found BTSs.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-15: Request for All BTSs
Alarms for Summary Device

You can request a list of alarms that are current on a selected summary device.
To View Alarms for a Device
1. Using the Navigation button scrolling arrows, place the selection arrow
next to the required Summary Devices list item
A summary device is selected, as in Figure 14-16a.
2. Press Action
A menu opens, as in Figure 14-16b, where you can choose to view Alarms
or device Details, that is the lower level devices that comprise the
summary device.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-16: Request for Summary Device Alarms

3. Select Alarms
Phone sends a request for data. When data is loaded from UNO, the list of
alarms opens, as in Figure 14-16c on page 14-25. If no alarms are found
for the device, a message appears.
Note: Depending on the device scope you defined, the loading of alarm
data may take up to a few minutes.
4. To view list items on the page, use the top and bottom arrows on the
Navigation button
5. To view the next page, press the More... prompt
6. To view the previous page, press BACK
7. To go back to the Sum.Devices page, press Done
8. To request data on another item, press OK in the menu page to return to
the list of summary devices - the Sum.Devices page.
9. To view alarm details, see on page 14-30
10. To see which parameters are displayed for low-level device alarms, press
Menu > Help
The Help topic for the current page opens, showing the alarm parameters:
Severity: Agent name; Device ID; Alarm ID.

Detailed Devices for a Summary Device

WAP2UNO lets you view state data on any Summary device.
Important: Summary device details are displayed according to the severity

you set up as your User Preference, see page 14-36.
To View Detailed Devices
1. Using the Navigation button arrow, scroll down the list and place the
selection arrow next to the Summary Devices list item that you want to
view, as in Figure 14-17a
A summary device is selected.
2. Press Action
A menu opens, as in Figure 14-17b, where you can choose to view either
Alarms or device Details.
3. Select Details
Phone sends a request for data. When data is loaded from UNO, the list of
details opens, as in Figure 14-17c. The Det.Devices page lists the
low-level devices that are contained in the Summary device.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-17: Request for Summary Device Details
4. To view list items on the page, use the Navigation button down and
up-pointing arrows
5. To view the next page, press the More... prompt
6. To view the previous page, press BACK

7. To go back to the Sum.Devices page, press Done

8. To see which parameters are displayed for a low-level device, press
Menu > Help
The Help topic for the current page opens, showing the parameters:
Agent Name; Device ID; ISO State; FM Severity; PM Severity.
9. To view alarms that are current for the selected low-level device, press
Alarms
Alarms for Detailed Device

While in the Detailed Devices page, you can request alarm data on a selected
low-level device. This option uses the ability to navigate between State and
Alarm data.
To View Alarms for Detailed Device
1. In the Dev.Details page, press Alarms

A list of alarms for the selected low-level device opens. This Alarms page
looks as in Figure 14-16c on page 14-25.
2. Navigate up and down the list to view all items
3. To return to the Sum.Devices page, press Done
These are all the functions of WAP2UNO State Management. Next section
describes Alarm Management functions.

Monitoring Alarms
To find out the type and severity of a known scope problem that has been
detected on the network, you need to view alarm information.
Figure 14-18: Main Menu: Alarm Management Option
In Alarm Management you can view:

Alarms by preferred filters see page 14-29
Alarm details see page 14-30
Important: Alarm Management information is displayed according to the

alarm filter you set up as preference. This topic is described in
Alarm Filters on page 14-33.
Alarm Data
To View Alarms by Preferred Filters
1. From the WAP2UNO Main Menu, select Alarm Management and press
OK
Phone sends the request for data to your UNO host. When done, a list of
alarms opens as in Figure 14-19, on page 14-30.
In this example an 11-page long list of critical severity alarms shows as in
Figure 14-19a. When you move the selection arrow from item to item, the
display alternates between states shown in Figure 14-19a and
Figure 14-19b to show the whole length of row/all the data for the item.

Figure 14-19c shows the More... prompt indicating the lists continuation.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-19: Alarms List Elements
2. To see which parameters are displayed for the alarms, press

Menu > Help
The Help topic for the current page opens, showing the alarm parameters:
Severity: Agent Name; Device ID; Alarm ID.
3. Navigate up and down the list to view all items
4. To return to the Main Menu page, press Done or BACK
5. To request details, see Alarm Details
Alarm Details
You can request details on a selected alarm.
To View Alarm Details
1. Using the Navigation button arrow, scroll down the list and place the
selection arrow next to the Alarm list item that you want to view
2. Press Details
Alarm Details appear, as in Figure 14-20.
3. To see which alarm details parameters can be displayed for alarms, press
Menu > Help
The Help topic for the current page opens, showing the alarm details.
Note: Alarm detail parameters vary according to the type of alarm.

4. Press OK or BACK to return to the Alarms page
a. b.
Figure 14-20: Alarm Details
Figure 14-21 shows an example of full alarm details.
Generation Date
Agent Name: sgi7

Device ID: CARRIER-206-4-3-4
Severity: major
Event Time: 05/06/2001 20:25:27
Alarm ID: 6531
Additional Information Additional Data
Sequence Number: 1242120
Dialog Session ID: 0
Additional Text: CARRIER Percent CFC Group
Access CBCS_ID="2"
TIME=14:45
CURRENT_VAL=0.00
ERROR_DIR=LESS
Additional Data: sequence number:1242120
Dialog Session ID: 0
Alarm Type: nonCorrelated
Figure 14-21: Alarm Details Example
These are all the functions of WAP2UNO Alarm Management. Next section
describes setting up of user preferences.

Setting Preferences UNO 2.16.3
Setting Preferences
Although User Preferences is the last item on the WAP2UNO Main Menu, you
can use it before opening the Management options to configure your data.
Setting up preferences delimits the incoming network information, makes it
load quicker and generally makes your work with WAP2UNO more effective.
You can request information according to these preferences:
1 Alarm Filters see page 14-33

2 Summary Device Severity see page 14-35
3 Detailed Device Severity see page 14-36
The preferences are saved as defaults for the next WAP session or until you
change them.
To Open User Preferences
1. Scroll down the Main Menu list to place the selection arrow next to
User Preferences, as in Figure 14-22a
2. Press OK
The Preferences menu opens, as in Figure 14-22b. The selection arrow is
on the first item. You now can set up your Alarm Filters Preferences.
a. b.
Figure 14-22: Main Menu: Preferences Option and Menu

Alarm Filters
The Alarm Filters user preference option lets you select a set of active alarm
filters that will apply to any requested list of alarms.
To Set Alarm Filter Preferences
1. From Preferences, select Alarm Filters

2. Press OK
The Filters list opens, as in Figure 14-23. Filter scope and name are
displayed. Currently defined preferred filters are marked/selected.
Two kinds of filter are represented:
Public filters (Pub)
Private filters (Pri)
a. b. c.
Figure 14-23: Alarm Filters - Saving Preference
3. Scroll the selection arrow to the required filter name

If the list is longer than one page, a More prompt appears. The required
filter is selected.
4. To select/deselect several filters, press Pick, move the selection arrow to
the next list item that you want to select and press Pick again
5. Press Menu
Menu opens, as in Figure 14-23b.
6. To view the previous page, select Prev and press OK
7. To view the next page, select More and press OK
8. To deselect all filters, select Reset and press OK

9. To save the selected filters, select Save and press OK

A prompt asks you to confirm the preference, as in Figure 14-23c.
10. Press Save (or press Cancel to return to the Filters page)
A confirmation message opens, as in Figure 14-23d. The alarms you
request for monitoring will be filtered accordingly, until you change this
preference.
d.
Figure 14-23: Alarm Filters - Saving Preference (cont)
11. Press OK to return to the Preferences menu, see Figure 14-22b on

page 14-32.

Summary Device Severity

You can limit the incoming summary device data according to a preferred
severity, by defining the Critical Severity List, as in Figure 14-24a (the last
item in the Device Scope list in State Management, see on page 14-20).
Accordingly, the incoming state data will be accepted only if they are of a
severity no lower than the one you define as your preference.
To Set Sum.Dev.Severity Preferences
1. From Preferences, select Sum.Dev.Severity, as in Figure 14-24b
a. b.
Figure 14-24: Crit.Severity List and Sum.Dev.Severity Option
2. Press OK
The Sum.Dev.Severity menu opens, as in Figure 14-25a. Currently
selected severity is indicated in brackets.
Two summary device severities are represented:
critical
major
a. b. c.
Figure 14-25: Summary Device Severity - Saving Preference

3. Move the selection arrow to the preferred severity and press Save
A prompt asks you to confirm the preference, as in Figure 14-25b.
4. Press Save (or press Cancel to return to the Sum.Dev.Severity page)
A confirmation message opens, as in Figure 14-25c. All summary device
data for Critical Severity List, will be of the selected severity (and higher)
until you change this preference.
page 14-32.
Detailed Device Severity

You can limit the incoming state data according to the detailed (low-level)
device severity.
To Set Detailed Device Severity Preferences
1. From Preferences, select Det.Dev.Severity, as in Figure 14-26.
Figure 14-26: User Preferences: Detailed Device Severity Option
2. Press OK
The Det.Device Severity menu opens, as in Figure 14-27a.
Three low-level device severities are represented:
critical
major
minor
3. Move the selection arrow to the preferred severity and press Save
A prompt asks you to confirm the preference, as in Figure 14-27b.

4. Press Save (or press Cancel to return to the Det.Dev.Severity page)

A confirmation message appears, as in Figure 14-27c. All state data for
low-level devices you will view in the WAP display, will be of the selected
severity until you change this preference.
page 14-32.
a. b. c.
Figure 14-27: Detailed Device Severity - Saving Preference
To Return to the Main Menu
In the Preferences (menu) page, press Back

WAP2UNO Main Menu page opens.
You can now begin to monitor device state and alarms according to the current
preferences.
For device state monitoring, see on page 14-20.
For alarm monitoring, see on page 14-29.

Acronyms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation Full Name
A
A AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
A ACK Acknowledgement
A ADPCM Adaptive Digital Pulse Code Modulation
A AGNODE Aggregation Node
A AM Alarm Manager
A AMPS Advanced Mobile Phone Service, Automatic Message Processing Sys-
tem
A AN Access Node
A AP Applications Processor
A ARS Action Request System
A ACH Access Channel
A ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
B BACK Back interface card
B BRI Basic Rate Interface
B BS Base Station, Base Site
B BSS Base Station System
B BTS RF Base Transceiver Station
C
C CAT Cellular Application Terminal
C CBSC Centralized Base Station Controller
C CC Command Center
C CCITT Comit Consultatif Internationale Tlegraphique et Tlphonique
(International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee)
C CCS Common Channel Service Unit
C CDL Call Detail Log
C CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
C CFC Call Final Class
C CGM Cell Group Manager
C CLI Command Line Interface
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features Acr & Abbr-1

Acronyms and Abbreviations C-I

C CMIP Common Management Information Protocol
C CNRC Customer Network Resolution Center
C CON Connection
C CSU Channel Service Unit
D
D DBM Database Manager
D DDS Digital Data Service
D DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service
E
E EDGERTR Edge Router
C EFD Event Forwarding Discriminators
C EID Electronic Identification Number of an MCC Card
E EM Element Manager
E EMS Event Management Service
E EMX 2500 Electronic Mobile Exchange 2500 by Motorola
F, G
F FDN Fully Distinguished Name
F FM Fault Management
F FRAD Frame Relay Access Device
F FRSM Frame Relay Service Module
G GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects
G GIS Geographical Information Service
G GPS Network Time Protocol
H
H HDSL High Bit-Rate Digital Line
H HLR Home Location Register
H HMP Host Message Processor
I
I IMACS Integrated Multiple Access Communications Server
I IP Internet Protocol
I ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
I ITU International Telecommunications Union
Acr & Abbr-2 UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

I-N Acronyms and Abbreviations

I ITU-T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunication Stan-
dardization Sector
I IWF Interworking Function, technical designation for IWU
I IWU Interworking Unit (in CDMA systems), same as IWF (Interworking
Function)
L
L LAN Local Area Network
L LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
L LSM Large Scale Monitor
L LWRTR LAN/WAN Router
M
M MAN Metropolitan Area Network
M MAWI Motorola Advance Wideband Interface
M MCC Maintenance Control Circuit, Multi-channel CDMA Card
M MF Mediation Function
M MIB Management Information Base
M MIS Management Information Service, Management Information System
M MLS Multi-Layer Switch
M MM Market Manager, Mobility Manager
M MOC Managed Object Class
M MOI Managed Object Instance
M MOSCAD MOtorola-SCADa
M MR Message Register
M MSC Mobile Switching Center
M MWFM Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator
N
N NAK Non-Acknowledge
N NAMPS Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service
N NE Network Element
N NEF Network Element Function
N NEM Network Element Manager
N NOC Network Operations Center
N NTP Network Time Protocol

Acronyms and Abbreviations O-R
O
O O&M Operations and Maintenance Network
O OCT Object Configuration Tool
O OMC-IP Operations and Maintenance Center for IP devices, also OMCIP
O OMC-R Operations and Maintenance Center-Radio, also OMCR
O OMC-S Operations and Maintenance Center-Switch, also OMCS
O OOS Out of Service, Operational Operating System
O OSF Operations Systems Functions
O OSI Open System Interconnection
P
P PCH Paging Channel
P PDC Personal Digital Cellular, Personal Digital Communication
P PDSN Packet Data Service Node
P PKTIF Packet Interworking Function
P PKTPCF Packet Control Function
P PKTPIPE Packet Pipe
P PKTSEL Packet Selection Function
P PM Performance Management
P PMI Portable Management Interface
P PMT Performance Management Threshold
P PMU Processor Multifunction Unit
P POTS Plain Old Telephone Services
P PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
P PRI Primary Rate Interface
P PS Power Supply
P PSI Packet Substrate Interface
P PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
P PVC Permanent Virtual Connection
P PXM Processor Switch Module
Q, R
Q QAF Q Adapter Function
Q QPCH Quick Paging Channel
Q QoS Quality of Service
R RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service

R-U Acronyms and Abbreviations

R RAFT Reverse and Forward Test Type
R RAN Radio Access Network
R RDBMS Relational Database Management System
R RFDS Radio Frequency Diagnostics Subsystem
R RGPS Remote Global Position Satellite/System
S
S SALT System Audio Loopback Test Type
S SAR Specific Absorption Rate
S SAS Stand-Alone Analog Super-Cell
S SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
S SCAN Scanning Channel Element
S SCSI Small Computer System Interface
S SC-UNO SuperCell UNO
S SDM Software Download Manager
S SDU Selector Distribution Unit
S SIG Signaling Channel Element
S SLIP Serial Line Interconnect Protocol
S SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
S SQL Structured Query Language
S SRM Service Resource Module
S SCH Supplemental Channel, Synchronization Channel
S SSL Secure Socket Layer
S SVC (1) Supervisory Controller, (2) Switched Virtual Circuit
T
T TCH Traffic Channel, Termination Channel
T TCM Total Control Manager
T TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
T TED Topo Engine Daemon
T TMN Telecommunications Management Network
U
U UnAcked Unacknowledged Alarm
U UNO Universal Network Operations
U UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Acronyms and Abbreviations U-X
V, W
U VPU Vocoder Processing Unit
U VPF Vocoder Processing Function
W WAN Wide Area Network
W WAP Wireless Application Protocol
W WML Wireless Markup Language
W WSF Workstation Function
W WTSL Wireless Transfer Secure Layer
X
X XCoder, XC Transcoder
X XCVR Transceiver

Glossary
Term Definition
A
AAcknowledged Alarm The operator has acknowledged that the alarm condition is present,
but the condition itself is not yet resolved. The alarm message (for
this alarm) is turned off. However, the alarm status remains on until
the alarm condition is resolved. The alarm message will turn on if
there are other posted unacknowledged alarms.
AAuthentication, (AAA) performs authentication of subscriber profile information,

AAuthorization, authorization of data services and processing of billing information.
Accounting The AAA Server incorporates the necessary functionality needed to
interact with other network elements in the wireless network and
with AAA servers from other networks to provide packet data
services to the mobile client.
AAdvanced Mobile Phone (AMPS) A Bell System acronym and registered service mark for
Service their Advanced Mobile Phone Service.
AAgent Also called Network Management Agent. A module residing in a

managed resource on a network, capable of reporting the status of
the resource and /or responding to inquiries about the resource. In a
general sense, software running on a managed object that responds
to and reports to the Network manager with current information
about the object. Agent is described in standard documents X.701|
ISO/IEC 10040.
AArchitecture Any ordered arrangement parts of the system.
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features Glossary-1

Glossary B-C
Term Definition
B
BBase Site The combination of base station and base station (site) controller,
which together comprise one cell in a cellular telephone system.
BBase Station In cellular systems, the base station is made up of RF transmitters

and receivers which communicate with cellular subscriber (mobile
or portable) equipment. It provides the means to relay data and
voice communications between subscriber equipment and base site
controllers.
BBase Station System (BSS) Consists of one CBSC and associated BTSs; represents the
fixed end of the radio interface for an SC 9600 cellular system.
Provides control and radio coverage functions.
BBase Transceiver Station (BTS) RF Base Transceiver Station, representing a single cell. Part
of the BSS. Comprised of the SIF, RF Modem, and LPA cabinets.
Provides the standard radio transceiver functions for the air
interface. The BTS site is the location of a particular BTS.
C
CCell The RF coverage area in radiotelephone systems resulting from the
operation of a single multi-channel set of base station equipment.
This term can also be used to describe the base site equipment
servicing this area.
CCell Group Manager (CGM) The processor that supports the cellular subsystem software.
Redundant-pair CGMs reside on the MCM bus and control up to 26
BSLKs. It handles all signaling between the switch and the cell sites
to coordinate the use of trunk circuits to the cell site radio
equipment. A maximum of six CGM pairs are supported.
CCell Site The location of a BTS.
CCellular Application (CAT) This is a PC based platform providing the graphical user
Terminal interface (GUI) into the SwitchMATE platform and is used to
manage the E MX and analog cells. The CAT can be used with or
without UNO and is not required for UNO.
Glossary-2 UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

C-E Glossary
Term Definition
CCellular Mobile A mobile communications system that uses a combination of radio

transmission and conventional telephone switching to permit
telephone communication to and from mobile users within a
specified area. Note: In cellular mobile systems, large geographical
areas are segmented into many smaller areas, that is cells, each of
which has its own radio transmitters and receivers and a single
controller interconnected with the public switched telephone
network.
CCentralized Base Station (CBSC) Part of the BSS. Consists of the Mobility Manager and
Controller Transcoder. Provides BTS cluster control, switching, traffic
concentration, and transcoding functions.
CCode Division Multiple (CDMA) A technique for spread-spectrum multiple-access digit

Access communications that creates channels through the use of unique
code sequences.
CCommon Management (CMIP) A protocol used by an application process to exchange

Information Protocol information and commands for the purpose of managing remote
computer and communications resources.
CCoordinated Universal (UTC) This is the time scale that is used worldwide to coordinate
Time technical and scientific activities. UTC is a compromise between the
highly stable atomic time and the irregular earth rotation.
D, E, F
DDatagram In packet switching, a self-contained packet, independent of other
packets, that contains information sufficient for routing from the
originating data terminal equipment (DTE) to the destination DTE
without relying on prior exchanges between the equipment and the
network. When datagrams are sent there is no call establishment nor
call clearing procedures. Accordingly, the network may not be able
to provide protection against loss, duplication, or misdelivery.
EElement Manager (EM) The UNO Element Manager includes the UNO base package
and includes the major UNO management applications and features.
The Element Manager also provides SNMP support for IWU and
Premysis IMACS agents. The Element Manager supports a only a
single OMCR agent. More advanced features are provided through
the Market Manager and special optional packages. (See also
Market Manager.)

Glossary F-I
Term Definition
FF Interface Standard TMN interface used to connect to workstations for human

interaction.
FFault Management (FM) The software function responsible for detecting and analyzing
EMX hardware and software failures, including the process designed
to reconfigure the system to restore normal operation.
G
GGuidelines for the GDMO is a managed object definition language that helps managed
Definition of Managed object specifiers to write correct, complete and consistent
Objects specifications for controlling network elements and functions. It
does this by defining a number of templates. Because of the
unlimited variety of possible real causes and real effects, the
templates allow plain language behavior definitions to be included.
GDMO is an ISO document (ISO/IEC 10165-4).
GGlobal Positioning (GPS) Is a network of satellites that continuously transmit coded

System information, which makes it possible to precisely identify locations
on earth by measuring distance from satellites.
I
IInstance For managed objects a specific case or example of a managed object.
For example, routers might be taken as an object class; one particular
router would be an instance of that class.
IInternet Protocol (IP) A DOD standard protocol designed for use in interconnected
systems of packet-switched computer communication networks.
The internet protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams for sources to destinations, where sources and
destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length address. The
internet protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet
networks.
IInterworking Unit (IWU) The Data System that permits the Motorola CBSC to process
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) data and fax calls,
according to TIA/EIA IS-99 standard, Data Services Option
Standard for Wideband Spread Spectrum Digital Cellular Systems.
IWU is technically known as Interworking Function (IWF).

M-M Glossary
Term Definition
M
MMarket Manager (MM) The UNO MM expands the functionality of the UNO Element
Manager, by providing advanced system support. The MM adds
RFDS Control and Reports and Network Management Reports to the
UNO base package. In addition, the MM provides the facilities for
supporting SwitchMate and SNMP MOSCAD and managing
multiple OMCR agents. The UNO Market Manager must be used in
conjunction with the UNO Element Manager. Additional optional
packages require both the Element Manager and Market Manager.
(See Also Element Manager.)
MMobile Switching Center (MSC) A cellular telephone switching system manufactured by a

vendor other than Motorola.
MMobility Manager (MM) The CBSC MM provides radio management for the SC 9600
RF equipment. Control functions include configuration manage-
ment, fault management, event management, performance manage-
ment, security management, call handling, handover processing and
radio channel control (call setup, supervision, handover and tear-
down). The MM coordinates with the OMC-R, but operates indepen-
dently from it. The MM comprises a processor and I/O cage.
MMOSCAD MOSCAD is the Motorola SCADA product line, which provides

network fault management. The MOSCAD Network Fault Manager
(NFM) gateway for SNMP provides the UNO Network Manager
application with access to the Network Elements (NE) through the
MOSCAD NFM Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). MOSCAD provides
operators, with the status of the network elements, events and alarms
streaming through the system. MOSCAD manages devices, such as:
Base Stations Channel Banks

Receivers Auxiliary Equipment
Transmitters Security Equipment
Microwave Equipment Electrical Power Equipment: for
example: Generator, UPSs
Multiplexers
MMulti-Channel CDMA (MCC)

Card

Glossary N-N
Term Definition
N
NNarrowband Advanced (NAMPS) NAMPS provides additional cellular voice channels
Mobile Phone Service within the North American cellular frequencies by decreasing the
size of each channel from 30 Khz to 10 KHz. In addition an extended
air interface protocol has been defined. This protocol allows pages to
be transported to NAMPS subscriber units.
NNetwork Element Physical devices with software included that perform network
functions, monitor and control other systems and devices, send alerts
and reports to operators, provide conectivity to analog and digital
sensors, provide relay to control devices, perform maintenance
duties and enable planning from the growh of attached systems.
NNetwork Element Network element managers manage network elements, either

Manager directly with an agent associated with the manager, or in conjuction
with UNO, in which case the agent is associated with the network
element. SwitchMATE and OMC-R, both CMIPs, are network
element managers.
NNetwork Time Protocol (NTP) The Network Time Protocol is used to synchronize the time
of a computer client or server to another server or reference time
source, such as a radio or satellite receiver or modem. NTP provides
accuracies typically within a millisecond on LANs and up to a few
tens of milliseconds on WANs relative to Coordinated Universal
Time through, for example, a Global Positioning System receiver.
Typical NTP configurations utilize multiple redundant servers and
diverse network paths to achieve high accuracy and reliability.
Some configurations include cryptographic authentication to prevent
accidental or malicious protocol attacks and some provide automatic
server discovery using IP multicast.

O-P Glossary
Term Definition
O
OOperations and (OMC-R, OMCR ) Located at the MSC or CBSC; part of the O&M
Maintenance Center - Network. Operates as the user interface to the SC 9600 system,
Radio supporting the day-to-day management of the cellular network.
Provides a database for long-term network engineering and planning
tools. Manages subsystem events and alarms, performance,
configuration, and security. Interfaces with the SVC and SC 9600
CBSCs. Runs on two computer platforms, one for the OMC-R
hardware and another (MMI processor) for the user interface.
OOperations and (OMC-IP, OMCIP) Part of the O&M Network that allows operators
Maintenance Center - to execute IP type applications from an UNO terminal. OMC-IP
Internet Protocol plays an important role in data transfer.
OOperations and (OMC-S, OMCS) Part of the O&M Network that interfaces the SVC
Maintenance Center - with MSCs.
Switch
OOperations and (O&M) Cellular network comprised of a SVC connected to

Maintenance Network management centers for MSC switches (OMC-S) and SC 9600 radio
equipment (OMC-R), plus lower level SC 9600 CBSCs.
OOut of Service (OOS) 1. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state indicates that the
physical device is out of service. This state is reserved for physical
communication links.
2. Identifies a telephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS
device software to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service.
P
PPacket Data Service (PDSN) is a network element that provides the gateway between
Node landline Internet Protocol (IP) Packet Data Network and the cellular
system.
PPerformance (PM) Provides ability to monitor application and node statistics.

Management

Glossary P-S
Term Definition
PPortable Management (PMI) Within the Solstice Enterprise Manager MIS, the set of widely
Interface used classes and functions that provide fundamental services and
communicates with applications and agents. On the user level PMI
supports the access and maintenance of objects and object
definitions in the MIS.
PPerformance (PMT) Provides the ability to specify the demarcation value beyond
Management Threshold which events are considered alarms.
PPseudo Real-Time A process of data retrieval in CFC Monitoring in which the data
polled is the most up-to-date available, but is not viewable in real-
time. Therefore, it is called pseudo real-time data.
Approximately every minute, a polling mechanism polls a database,
and retrieves data generated during the 15 minute period that occurs
just prior to the time the polling takes place. This data is loaded into
another database, which itself is polled. The data is then sent to a
server which, in turn, transfers the data to a client. Polling and
loading can take from about 15 minutes to about two hours.
Q
QQ Interface Standard TMN interface used to communicate with non-TMN
compatible devices and objects.
R
RRadio Frequency (RFDS) Enables users to perform RFDS testing on both analog and
Diagnostics Subsystem CDMA equipment.
RRequest The series of activities through which the request facilities in the
system manager poll attributes or receive notification from agents of
managed objects.
S
SScanning Channel (SCAN) The procedure by which a mobile station examines the
Element signal strength of each forward control channel and selects the
channel with the strongest signal.

S-S Glossary
Term Definition
SSchema A term used in Action Request System (ARS) for the definition of
data fields in a database. Each ARS schema represents a different
AR System database.
SSeverity Describes the state of importance that you attach to the each state or
request. Severity has three parameters: name, number and color. The
severity color cooresponds to the color of the icon representing the
managed object, as displayed in UNO GUI.
SSimple Network (SNMP) A standard network management communication protocol

Management Protocol used between the components of the management network. SNMP
is the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TOP/IP)
standard protocol that:
Manages and control IP gateways and the networks to which they
are attached.
Uses IP directly, bypassing the masking effects of TOP error
correction.
Has direct access control to IP datagrams on a network that may
be operating abnormally, and therefore requires management.
Defines a set of variables that the gateway must store.
Specifies that all control operations on the gateway are a side-
effect of fetching and storing those data variables - operations that
are analogous to writing commands and reading status.
SSoftware Download (SDM) The Software Download Manager provides simplified

Manager control and management over software resources in the cellular
network. Some of the supported features are:
Management View of Software Components
Initiation of Software Installation and Upgrade on the managed
network
Control over software installation on the managed network
SSpecific Absorption Rate (SAR) A measure of the amount of radio frequency power that the
human body absorbs when close to transmitting sources such as
cellular phones.
SState A description of a managed object in a point in time with respect to a

request. At any given moment, a request, reflecting the target
managed object, is in some state defined in that request or is
undergoing a transition between states.

Glossary C-U
Term Definition
CSummary Icon In the Command Center an icon that can contain other icons, or more
precisely a summary icon represents a managed object that can
contain other managed objects.
SSwitchMATE An advanced Motorola network management system for monitoring

and controlling analog wireless intelligent networks.
T
TTopo Engine Daemon (TED) Is a daemon that constantly checks and updates these
information types:
Device Types
Added Devices
Deleted Devices
Relationship between devices and agents
TED undergoes an overall refresh, once a night, to update all new
information. TED works with all CMIP agents and only fully-
supported SNMP agents.
TTotal Control Manager (TCM) A software package, by U.S. Robotics, that remotely
manages SNMP IWU devices installed on the network.
TTelecommunications (TMN) Provides an organized architecture to achieve the

Management Network interconnection between various types of Operating Systems (OS)
and/or telecommunications equipment for the exchange of
management information, using an agreed architecture with
standardized interface including protocols and messages.
TMN is an International Telecommunications Union standard.
U
UUnacknowledged Alarm Only one alarm per log type and alarm class may be in the ON state
at a time. An unacknowledged alarm is an alarm which has not yet
been resolved or acknowledged and which has been followed by
another ON alarm.
UUniversal Network (UNOTM) An advanced Motorola network management system for

Operations monitoring digital and analog wireless intelligent networks. UNO is
TMN compatible and supports a wide variety of network elements
and network element managers.

X-X Glossary
Term Definition
X
XX Interface Standard TMN interface used to connect between two TMNs or to
interconnect a TMN with another management network that
accommodates a TMN-like interface.

Index
Numerics Alarm Correlation, 4-14-64

19 MHz clock, 4-54-7, 4-9, 4-134-14, 4-19, Alarm Counter, 12-6
4-62 Alarm Engine, 3-2, 4-34-4, 6-4
3COM, 13-1 Alarm Handling options, 4-494-50, 4-52
Alarm ID, Default correlation rules, 4-54-7
Alarm Listener, 4-34-4
A Alarm Logging options, 4-494-50
Access Node. See AN Alarm Manager, 3-13-86, 4-34-5, 4-84-23,
ACH, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-82, 9-86 4-39, 4-43, 9-59-6, 9-94, 12-112-2,
Acknowledged alarm, OMCR Relay, 12-6 12-1312-14, 13-1, 13-1113-13
Activate, 4-31, 4-55, 4-61 Alarm Browser display, 3-12
Additional Conditions, 4-384-39, 4-434-46 Alarm List, 3-1, 3-9
Additional text, 4-514-53 Display modes, 3-26
Administrative state, 4-5, 4-26, 4-31, 4-56 Sorting alarms, 3-203-23
Administrator, 4-37, 4-54, 4-56, 4-604-61, Alarm Notification, 3-63
9-14, 9-31, 12-16 Configuration management. See Layout, Alarm
Advanced Options, 4-39, 4-42 Manager
Agent-Independent rules, 4-31, 4-344-35 External applications, integrating, 3-673-72,
Agents supported by UNO 6-466-51
General, 2-9 Filter selection, 3-24
Agents supported by UNO 2.16.3 Interface, 3-1
List of, 2-9 Invoking. See Invoking, Alarm Manager
Aggregation, 9-17, 9-299-31, 9-33, Layout. See Layout, Alarm Manager
9-369-39, 9-47, 9-49, 9-55, 9-629-64, Main Dialog Box, 3-8
9-759-79, 9-819-82, 9-96 Modes, 3-26
Alarm Browser, 4-3, 4-5, 4-494-50, 6-16-65, Fault Management, 3-26
13-1, 13-11, 13-13 Performance Management, 3-26
Alarm List, 6-3 New Display, 3-11, 6-14
Display modes, 6-29 Operation modes, 3-5
Displaying alarms, 6-28 Printing. See Printing, Alarm Manager
Sorting alarms, 6-236-26 Saving, 3-12
Alarm Manager Comparison, 6-2 Summary Table, 3-1, 3-8
Alarms. See Alarms, Alarm Browser Updates List, 3-1, 3-9
Configuration management. See Layout, Alarm Alarm Manager. See also Large Scale Alarm Man-
Browser ager, UNO Core Features
Historical Alarm Log, 6-59 Alarm Monitor. See Web Monitor, Alarm Manage-
Integrating external applications, 6-466-51 ment Tab
Interface, 6-3 Alarm pressure, 4-1
New Display, 6-13 Alarm quality, 4-14-2
Running from Alarm Manager, 3-44 Alarm quantity, 4-2
Saving, 6-14 Alarm State parameters, 12-4, 12-6
March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features Index-1

Index B-C
Alarm text, Default correlation rules, 4-54-7 BBX, 4-54-6, 4-94-14, 9-86
Alarms BSC, 9-89
Acknowledge, 3-57 BTS, 9-9, 9-30, 9-38, 9-56, 9-76, 9-82,
Alarm Browser 9-849-86
Display, 6-286-38 BTSCPS, 4-7
Selecting, 6-39 BTSFAN, 4-6
Alarm Documentation, 3-61 BTSFPS, 4-6
Alarm filters, 11-2
Attributes
C
Reports, 3-60, 3-64, 6-40, 6-43
Calendar, 9-699-73, 9-96
Search, 3-483-53, 6-306-36
Carrier, 4-6, 4-10, 4-174-18, 9-49-6, 9-30,
Clear, 3-56
9-38, 9-56, 9-76, 9-82, 9-859-87
Correlation Input Alarms Details, 3-64, 6-43
CAT, 13-1
Databases, 6-4
CBSC, 9-6, 9-30, 9-38, 9-56, 9-58, 9-76,
Devices, 3-583-59
9-829-83, 9-85, 9-879-88
Displaying alarms in the Alarm List, 6-28
cBTS, 9-849-86
Displaying in Alarm List, 3-243-26
CCD, 4-6, 4-13
Historical Alarm Log, 3-80, 6-59
CDL, 9-29-3, 9-17
ID, 3-61, 6-41
Cellular System
Life cycle, 3-3, 6-4
Modes. See Management Modes
Performance Management, 9-4, 9-6
Monitoring
Rules Details, 3-65, 6-44
Alarms, 1-8
Select, 3-55
State, 1-5
Sending Notification, 3-63
Central Alarm Ack Handling
Successive Period, 9-6
Capabilities
Types, 3-2, 6-3
Communicating with Remote UNO Systems,
Unacknowledge, 3-57
3-87
AMR, 4-54-8, 4-16, 4-18, 4-214-22
Synchronizing Alarms, 3-87
AN, 4-21
Invoking. See Invoking, Central Alarm Ack Han-
Analysis, fault, 4-1
dling
Application Launcher, menus, 2-24
CFC, 9-29-3, 9-9, 9-81, 9-86, 9-889-89
Application Launcher, UNO, 2-18
Channel Elements, 4-20
Application Launcher. See also Invoking UNO ap-
Cisco View Utility for LAN. See CV
plications, 2-18
Cisco WAN Manager. See CWM
ASCII, 4-4
Cisco Works 2000 for LAN. See CW2000
ASU, 4-5, 4-84-9
Clone, 9-179-19, 9-21, 9-26, 9-34, 9-36,
Attribute, 4-39, 4-434-45, 4-47, 4-494-53
9-46, 9-549-58, 9-61
Average Value, 9-11
Collection interval, 9-3, 9-6
Average-Based Value, 9-99-13
Colors, PM status. See Performance Management
(PM) Reports
B Status colors
Backhaul, 9-84 Command Application Terminal. See CAT
Base Value, 9-99-13, 9-389-41, 9-509-51 Command Center, 13-1, 13-11, 13-13
Index-2 UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

D-F Index
Common UNO dialog boxes D

Browse Destination dialog box Data Resource, 9-88
Description, 2-35 Database, 4-3, 4-5, 9-1, 9-3, 9-13, 9-30,
Invoking, 2-34 9-959-96, 12-3, 12-5
Selecting file, 2-35 Date/Time setup, 9-69, 9-72, 9-74
Print dialog box, 2-31 Deactivate, 4-31, 4-55, 4-61
Description, 2-32 Default correlation rules
Invoking, 2-31 Alarm ID, 4-54-7
Printing, 2-33 Alarm text, 4-54-7
Common UNO Features Device type, 4-54-7
Selecting items Rule name, 4-54-7
Contiguous, 2-42 Denominator, 9-89-9, 9-28, 9-309-31
Non-contiguous, 2-42 Deviation Direction, 9-41, 9-51
Single, 2-42 Device Information Database, 12-3, 12-5
Tables Device instance, 9-3, 9-10, 9-13
Adjusting columns and rows, 2-41 Device types, 9-96
Adjusting field order, 2-42 Device-dependent thresholds, 9-10, 9-469-60
Adjusting rows, 2-40 Device-independent rules, 4-31, 4-344-35
Changing columns, 2-39 Device-independent thresholds, 9-10, 9-359-45
Sorting fields, 2-38 Devices
Sorting order, 2-37 High Level (Summary) Device. See Web Moni-
Common UNO Menus and Buttons tor, State Monitor
Action buttons, list of, 2-36 Low Level Device. See Web Monitor, Cli-
Close, 2-37 ent/Server Functions, Device Details
Communication, 12-5, 12-9, 12-2112-22 Devices, integration See SNMP based devices, in-
Compare tegration, 2-9
Historical and recent values for weighting, 9-11 Diagnosis, 4-2, 4-21
Monitored values and thresholds, 9-2, 9-7, Disable alarm, 9-17, 9-209-21, 9-609-65
9-99-10, 9-12 Documentation Suite, UNO. See UNO Documen-
PM Statistics, 9-2, 9-66 tation Suite
Compare rules, 4-324-33
Concepts, Performance Management Threshold-
ing, 9-29-14 E
Conditions, 4-444-47 Element Manager, 13-113-13
Conflicts, Alarm ID, 4-32 Invoking. See Invoking, Element Manager
Conflicts, Rule name, 4-32 Element Manager (EM). See Licenses
Correlated alarms, 4-1, 4-34-4 ELPA, 4-6, 4-15
Correlation filters, 4-24-4, 4-104-12, 4-21, Error Rate, 9-129-13, 9-38, 9-409-41,
4-384-40, 4-424-45, 4-47, 4-634-64 9-509-51
counter_id, 9-3, 9-6, 9-13, 9-86, 9-88, 9-94 Export rules, 4-344-35
CP, 9-88
CSM, 4-6, 4-94-10, 4-144-15, 4-63, 9-30, F
9-38, 9-76, 9-82, 9-85 Fan, 4-64-7, 4-164-17, 4-22
CV, 13-1 Fault analysis, 4-1
CW2000, 13-1 Fault Management
CWM, 13-1 Alarm Browser, 6-29
Alarm Manager, 3-5

Index G-I
Fault management, 4-14-2 G

Fault recovery, 4-1 GLI, 4-54-9, 4-18, 4-21, 4-23
Fault source, 4-24-3 Group By, 9-8, 9-28, 9-309-31, 9-82
Filter Builder, 4-3, 4-39, 4-42, 11-111-63, Group Reports. See Performance Management
12-112-2, 12-4, 12-7, 12-9, 12-1612-17 (PM) Reports, Group mode
Applying a filter, 11-12
Filter List, 11-1
Description, 11-8 H
Refreshing, 11-53 Handoff, 9-87, 9-89
Filters HHO, 9-88
Adding, 11-1311-45 Historical Alarm Reports
Complex Filter, 11-45 Agent Types, 7-4
Default filter, 11-4 Alarms
Deleting, 11-48 IDs, 7-5
Filter applications, 11-3 Severity Description, 7-12
Large scale filter. See Large Scale Filter Build- Defaults
er Relative Time Tab, 7-4
Modifying. See Adding Spin Button Field, 7-4
Name, 11-3 Error Messages, 7-8
Properties, 11-3 Invoking. See Invoking, Historical Alarm Re-
Type, 11-4 ports
Invoking. See Invoking, Filter Builder Main Dialog Box, 7-4
Large Scale Mode. See Large Scale Filter Build- Historical alarms
er Alarm Documentation, 6-41
Layout, 11-4811-53 Attributes, 6-40
Labels, 11-5111-53 ID, 6-41
Showing fields, 11-49 Searching, 6-306-36
Main dialog box, 11-7 Historical data, 9-11
Saving, 11-11 Historical Value, 9-11
Filter Builder configuration. See Filter Builder, HO Detection, 9-83
Layout HO-Anchor, 9-86
Filter Selection, 3-24 HO-Detection, 9-85
Filter, OMCR Relay, 12-1, 12-1312-18 HO-Src, 9-83, 9-85
Filters HO-Tgt, 9-849-86
Adding Http, 13-1, 13-5
Agents, 11-17
Alarm states, 11-3911-41 I
Device types, 11-3011-31 IC Trunk, 9-83
Devices, 11-1911-30 ICBSC, 9-839-84, 9-86
Event and event date, 11-4311-45 ICTRKGRP, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-83
Problem descriptions, 11-4111-43 Import rules, 4-304-31
Correlation, 4-24-4, 4-104-12, 4-21, Conflicts, 4-324-34
4-384-40, 4-424-45, 4-47, 4-634-64 Integrated Multiple Access Communications Serv-
Description, 11-2 er (IMACS), 2-7
Functionality, 12-2 International Telecommunication Union (ITU).
See also Standards, TMN, 2-1

I-I Index
Interval, data collection. See Performance Man- Applications

agement (PM) Reports, 10-95 From Application Launcher, 2-18
Invoking From command line, 2-26
Alarm Browser Central Alarm Ack Handling
Application Launcher, 6-5 Alarm Manager/Browser, 3-90
BTS Relays, 6-53, 6-59 Application Launcher, 3-88
Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor, 6-61 Element Manager
CFC, 6-58 Application Launcher, 13-2
Command Center, 6-51 Command Line, 13-2
Command Line, 6-5 Filter Builder
Device alarm History, 6-53 Alarm Browser, 11-55
Element Manager, 6-54 Alarm Manager, 11-54
Filter Builder, 6-26 Application Launcher, 11-5
Historical Alarm Reports, 6-56 Command Line, 11-5
Large Scale Configuration, 6-61 Historical Alarm Reports, 11-56
Multiple Alarm Browser Applications, 6-7, Large Scale Alarm Browser, 11-63
6-53 Large Scale Alarm Manager, 11-63
PM Statistics Graphs, 6-62 OMCR Relays, 11-55
RFDS, 6-57 Other applications, 11-6
Software Download Manager, 6-52 Historical Alarm Reports
Workstation, 6-8 Application Launcher, 7-2
Alarm Correlation, 4-24 Large ScaleAlarm Manager
Alarm Manager Application Launcher, 5-7
Alarm Browser, 3-74 OMCR Relays
Alarm Notification, 3-76, 6-55 Application Launcher, 12-7
Application Launcher, 3-5 Command Line, 12-7
BTS Relays, 3-74 Online Help
Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor, 3-82 From Application Launcher, 2-29
CFC, 3-79 From browser, 2-30
Cisco Applications, 3-80 From dialog box, 2-29
Command Center, 3-723-73, 6-52 From menu bar, 2-30
Command Line, 3-5 PM Measurements & Alarms
Element Manager, 3-75 Application Launcher, 9-15
Filter Builder, 3-23 Command Line, 9-15
from other applications, 3-7 UNO
Historical Alarm Log, 3-80 From a dedicated terminal, 2-14
Historical Alarm Reports, 3-77 From a remote terminal, 2-16
Large Scale Configuration, 3-82, 6-63 Web-based applications, 2-25
Multiple Alarm Manager Applications, 3-5, IP addresses, 13-3, 13-6, 13-9, 13-1113-13
3-11 IP communication path, 4-20
Other applications, 3-7 ISO State
PM Statistics Graphs, 3-83 Administrative State, 11-35
RFDS, 3-78 Availability, 11-38
Software Download Manager, 3-73 Operational State, 11-36
Telnet Agent Access, 3-75 Standby Status, 11-37
Usage State, 11-37

Index L-M
IWU, 2-7, 2-9, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-83, 13-1, Licenses, UNO
13-1113-12 Description, 2-7
IWU Total Control Manager (TCM), 13-12 List of licensed features, 2-8
Element Manager
L Market Manager
Large Scale Alarm Browser, 6-63 Option 2
Large Scale Alarm Manager Option 3
Alarm suite use, 5-15-3 Option 4
Configuration Option 5
General description, 5-2 Option 7
Stages, 5-2 Option 8
Connection recovery, 5-18 LPA, 4-64-7
Functions, 5-3 LPAC, 4-7, 4-174-18
Shortcut menus, 5-19
System configuration
Adding hosts, 5-9 M
Administrators setup, 5-2 Main Menu Bar, 6-10
Connecting hosts, 5-4 Management Modes
Copying, 5-11 Alarm Browser, 6-8, 6-29
Dialog box, 5-8 Alarm Manager, 3-5
Invoking, 5-6 Market Manager (MM). See Licenses
Removing hosts, 5-10 MAWI, 4-64-7, 4-104-12, 4-194-20
User configuration Maximum Value, 9-399-40, 9-50
Adding hosts, 5-14 MCC, 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-14, 4-20, 9-30, 9-38,
Copying, 5-17 9-76, 9-82, 9-849-85, 9-87
Dialog box, 5-14 MCCCE, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-849-85
Invoking, 5-13 MCP, 4-6
Large Scale Filter Builder, 11-5611-63 MCP-S Toolbox, 13-1, 13-5, 13-13
Copying, 11-58 MDM, 4-23, 9-30, 9-38, 9-56, 9-76, 9-82, 9-85
Large scale filters, 11-5911-62 Mean Error Rate, 9-38
Setting up, 11-56 Measurement types, 9-2, 9-7
Large ScaleAlarm Manager Minimum Value, 9-10, 9-399-40, 9-50
System configuration MinMax, 9-99-10
Setup, 5-4 MLS, 4-7, 4-21
Launching, UNO applications, 2-25 MLS_PDSN_LINK, 4-7
Layout MLS_PSI_LINK, 4-7
Alarm Browser. See also Layout, Alarm Manag- MM, 9-83, 9-85, 9-87, 9-89
er Mobile Status Information, 9-88
Components, general, 6-37 Monitored values, Compare with thresholds, 9-2,
Configuration, 6-186-19 9-7, 9-99-10, 9-12
Properties, 6-30 Monitoring
Alarm Manager, 3-14, 3-273-48 Remote. See WAP for UNO, Chapter 13, Core
Alarm Browser, 3-443-48 Features
Alarm List, 3-323-35 Remote. See Web Monitor, Chapter 7, Core Fea-
Components, general, 3-533-54 tures
Configuration, 3-143-17 MOSCAD, 2-9
Properties, 3-283-31 Mouse Shortcuts, 11-64
Updates List, 3-363-43 Moving Average, 9-48, 9-529-53, 9-67

N-P Index
MS, 9-88 Performance Management

MSC, 9-889-89 Alarm Browser, 6-29
Multicoupler, 4-7, 4-23 Alarm Manager, 3-5
Multi-Layer Switch. See MLS Performance Management (PM) Reports
Access requirements, 10-3
Categories, 10-111
N Collection Status Monitor
Numerator, 9-89-9, 9-28, 9-309-31
Change setup, 10-88
Description, 10-85
O Layout, define, 10-88
OMC, 2-9 Description tables, 10-11110-127
OMC-R, 2-9 Basic Reports, 10-112
OMCR Relay CFC/CDL Reports, 10-120
Acknowledged alarm, 12-6 Event Summary Reports, 10-121
Filter, 12-1, 12-1312-18 Exception Reports, 10-122
Off, Undo, 12-19 Graphical Reports, 10-123
Operational state, 12-5, 12-9, 12-17, Quality of Service Reports, 10-127
12-1912-22 Utilization Reports, 10-125
Parameters, 12-812-9 Descriptions and parameters, 10-11110-127
Unacknowledged alarm, 12-6 Categories list, 10-111
OMCR Relay Engine, 12-212-3, 12-512-6 Introduction, 10-111
OMCR Relays, 12-112-22 Filters and mode, setting, 10-28
Online Help Group mode, 10-6510-82
Invoking. See Invoking, Online Help Group mode, setting, 10-65
Operational state, OMCR Relay, 12-5, 12-9, Group reports
12-17, 12-1912-22 Adding to group, 10-74
Ordered sequence, 4-404-41 Defining, reports in group, 10-73
Overall Statistics Report, 4-27, 4-554-58, 4-61 Deleting groups, 10-75
Overflow, 9-87, 9-939-94 Group items, deleting, 10-82
Group items, editing, 10-71
Group name, editing, 10-77
P Schedule parameters, editing, 10-81
PAC HO, 9-83 Schedule, editing, 10-78
Packet Data, 9-829-84 Scheduling, 10-73
Packet Data Service Node. See PDSN Viewing, 10-71, 10-76
Packet Selector Interface. See PSI Historical reports, viewing. See Monitoring, His-
Parameters, 4-5, 4-404-42, 4-48 torical reports, 10-91
Alarm State, 12-4, 12-6 Interval, data collection, 10-95
OMCR Relay, 12-812-9 Invoking, local
Parity, 4-20 Application Launcher, 10-8
pBTS, 9-859-86 Command Line, 10-8
PDSN, 4-7, 4-21, 9-82, 9-84, 13-1 Invoking, remote
Peg, 9-7, 9-379-40, 9-49, 9-55, 9-629-64, Command Line, 10-7
9-68, 9-75, 9-77, 9-80, 9-86, 9-88 Web Browser, 10-5
peg_count, 9-89-9, 9-87 JClass Chart output
Percentage measurement type, 9-79-8, 9-28, Chart View, 10-97
9-30, 9-879-89 Printing, 10-106

Index Q-R
Properties, 10-101 Schedule mode, 10-40

Saving, 10-104 Selecting report, 10-33
Spreadsheet, 10-103 Time period, 10-39
Zooming, 10-102 Status colors, 10-4
Main window, description, 10-910-13 Summary tables
Monitoring, 10-8310-94 Default properties, setup, 10-26
Data transfer, 10-84 Defining properties, 10-2110-27
Historical reports, 10-8910-94 Table properties dialog, description, 10-21
Setting up monitors, 10-84 Performance Management alarms, 9-4, 9-6
Output, 10-4910-52 Performance Management Thresholding concepts,
Default format, 10-50 9-29-14
Defining, 10-47 PM Measurements & Alarms, 9-19-97
File formats, 10-50 Invoking PM Statistics Graphs from, 9-67
Graphical. See JClass Chart, 10-51 Invoking. See Invoking, PM Measurements &
Viewing, 10-51 Alarms
Viewing, methods, 10-49 PM Statistics Graphs, 9-2, 9-14, 9-18, 9-20,
Viewing, procedure, 10-50 9-26, 9-54, 9-669-67
Removing reports from schedule, 10-55 Power Distribution Cage, 4-16, 4-214-22
Report Instances Power Distribution Shelf, 4-16, 4-214-22
Dialog, description, 10-61 PPP, 4-7, 4-20
Retrying all failed, 10-62 Preselector, 4-7, 4-214-22
Retrying execution by instance, 10-62 Pressure, alarm, 4-1
Viewing output, 10-64 Print, 4-264-29, 4-584-59
Report instances, 10-6010-64 Printing
Report parameters, 10-12, 10-3110-32, Alarm Browser
10-35, 10-53, 10-56, 10-61, 10-64, Alarm Summary, 6-21
10-7210-73, 10-91, 10-93, 10-95, 10-111 Selected alarms, 6-20
Reports Calendar Alarm Manager
Comparing reports, 10-9510-96 Alarm Details, 3-99
Invoking, 10-89 Alarm Summary, 3-18
Viewing by date, 10-91 Selected alarms, 3-17
Viewing output, 10-94 Filter Builder
Viewing report parameters, 10-93 All Filters, 11-11
Window, description, 10-89 Selected filters, 11-10
Shortcut menus, 10-10810-110 Historical Alarm Reports, 7-13
Single mode, setting, 10-28 OMCR Relays, 12-11
Single reports PSI, 4-7, 4-21
Executing, 10-48
Retrying, 10-59
Q
Schedule Report Execution dialog box,
Quality of Service, 9-39-6
10-3010-33
Quality, alarm, 4-14-2
Stopping, 10-58
Quantity, alarm, 4-2
Viewing schedule setup, 10-56
Single reports mode, 10-2910-64
Single reports, scheduling, 10-34 R
Output/destination, 10-47 RA, 9-839-84
Report parameters, 10-35 Radio Interface, 9-88

S-S Index
Radio Resource, 9-88 Rule statistics, reset, 4-27, 4-56

Random sequence, 4-404-41 Rules Table, 4-5, 4-26, 4-28, 4-304-31,
Record types, 9-2, 9-81 4-334-37, 4-534-56, 4-59, 4-61
Recovery, fault, 4-1 Configuration, 4-28
Refresh, 4-26, 4-61 Delete rule, 4-54
Relay_Mode variable, 12-4 Export from, 4-344-35
Remote host, 13-1, 13-413-5, 13-1013-13 Import to, 4-304-31, 4-33
Report sources, 9-759-79 Print, 4-28
Report types, 9-77 Refresh, 4-26
Reports, 4-554-57, 4-594-61, 9-759-80 Shortcuts, 4-37, 4-55, 4-61
Alarm Browser Rules type, 4-31, 4-35
Alarm Details report, 6-40 Rules, Alarm ID of default correlation, 4-54-7
Alarm Reports, 6-55 Rules, Alarm text of default correlation, 4-54-7
Alarm Manager Rules, Device type of default correlation, 4-54-7
Alarm Details, 3-60, 3-643-65, 6-436-44 Rules, Rule name of default correlation, 4-54-7
Alarms, 3-76
Output. See Performance Management (PM) Re-
ports, output
S
SC, 13-1
Requirements
SCCP, 9-88
Hardware, 2-12
SDU, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-829-83
Software, 2-12
Sector, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-82, 9-859-87
Reset rule statistics, 4-27, 4-56
Severity, 4-39, 4-444-45, 4-47, 4-51,
Resulting action, 4-38, 4-40, 4-48, 4-524-53
RF, 4-15, 4-22, 9-879-89
9-59-7, 9-37, 9-39, 9-41, 9-439-44, 9-51,
9-97
RFDS, 4-9, 4-224-23
Shortcuts, 6-646-65
Linearity testing, 4-23
Alarm Browser, 6-36, 6-42
Receive Accuracy, 4-23
Alarm Manager, 3-62, 3-643-65, 3-843-85,
Sorting Test Schedules, 3-87
6-436-44
RGLI, 4-5, 4-74-9, 4-23
Filter Builder, 11-64
RPM, 4-16, 4-20, 4-22
SIF, 4-7, 4-224-23
Rule Activity Report, 4-27, 4-554-56,
Sleeping cell, 9-87
4-594-61
SNMP, 13-11, 13-13
Rule definition, 4-3, 4-274-29, 4-33, 4-38,
SNMP based devices, integration, 2-9
4-40, 4-42, 4-45, 4-48, 4-51, 4-53
Source, fault, 4-24-3
Rule element, 4-384-53
SQL, 9-1, 9-79-8, 9-28, 9-309-31, 9-94
Add element, 4-45
Standard Deviation, 9-109-13, 9-48,
Additional conditions, 4-43
9-529-53
Advanced options, 4-42
Standards, TMN, 2-1
Alarm number, 4-42
State Monitor. See Web Monitor, State Manage-
Define filter, 4-42
ment Tab
Forward alarms, 4-43
State, OMCR Relay, 12-1, 12-3, 12-9, 12-17,
Response to "Clear", 4-43
12-1912-22
Sequence, 4-404-41
Statistical Record, 9-17, 9-20, 9-299-31, 9-33,
Rule name, Default correlation rules, 4-54-7
Rule parameters, 4-404-41
9-369-40, 9-47, 9-49, 9-55, 9-629-64,
9-75, 9-77, 9-799-82
Rule Preview, 4-26, 4-29
Statistical value types, 9-67
Print, 4-26, 4-29
Statistics, 4-27, 4-554-61

Index T-W
STRAU, 9-88 UNO Applications

SwitchMate, 2-9, 13-1, 13-13 Applications not on Launcher, 2-22
Applications on Launcher, 2-182-21
Applications on Solstice Enterprise Manager,
T 2-23
TCH, 9-88
Invoking from Command Line, commands,
TCM, 13-1, 13-1113-13
2-272-28
TCM, IWU, 13-12
UNO Documentation Suite, description, 2-22-7
Telecommunication Management Network
UNO Licenses. See Licenses, UNO
(TMN). See also Standards, TMN
UNO Manager, 12-112-5, 12-812-9, 12-16,
Telnet, 13-1, 13-7, 13-12
12-2112-22
Terrestrial Circuit, 9-88
Utilities, 4-1, 9-909-93
Terrestrial Resource, 9-88
Test Subscriber Unit. See TSU
Threshold scope, 9-99-10 V
Threshold types, 9-10, 9-12, 9-38 Value measurement type, 9-79-8, 9-28, 9-30,
Thresholds, 4-54-6, 4-114-14, 4-164-18, 9-87, 9-89
4-214-22, 4-394-43, 4-45, 9-19-2, 9-7, Version, UNO
9-99-12, 9-14, 9-18, 9-21, 9-359-38, Retrieving information, 2-28
9-409-41, 9-43, 9-459-47, 9-509-51, View rules, 4-324-33
9-54, 9-56, 9-589-60, 9-69, 9-72, 9-76, VPF, 9-83
9-78, 9-81, 9-909-93, 9-95, 9-97 VPU, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-829-83
Average-Based Value, 9-12
Base Value, 9-12
W
Compare with Monitored values, 9-2
WAP2UNO, 14-2
Compare with monitored values, 9-7,
Alarms, monitoring, 14-2914-31
9-99-10, 9-12
Alarm data, 14-29
Time Threshold, 4-394-40, 4-424-43
Alarm details, 14-30
Timeout, 9-889-89
Devices, monitoring
Toolbox, 13-1, 13-5, 13-13
Detailed device alarms, 14-28
Total Control Manager. See TCM
Detailed devices, 14-27
Trunk Group, 9-83
Summary device alarms, 14-25
TSU, 4-5, 4-84-9
Summary devices, 14-20
Types
Display
Device, 9-96
Action buttons, functions, 14-15
Measurement, 9-2, 9-7, 9-28
Context, 14-13
Record, 9-2, 9-81
Data display limit, 14-13
Report, 9-77
Data refresh, 14-13
Statistical values, 9-67
Handset buttons, functions, 14-14
Threshold, 9-99-10, 9-12, 9-38
Navigating, 14-14
Exiting, 14-19
U General description, 14-214-5
Unacknowledged alarm, OMCR Relay, 12-6 Help
Undo OMCR Relay Off, 12-19 Access, use, 14-17
UNO Agents, 2-9 Invoking, 14-10
UNO Application Launcher, menu, 2-24 Main Menu, 14-18
Navigating, 14-16

X-X Index
Preferences, setting, 14-3214-37 Dialog, description, 8-29

Alarm filters, 14-33 Filter, 8-34
Detailed device severity, 14-36 Parameters, reference table, 8-40
Summary device severity, 14-35 Types, 8-29
Security Use in alarm management, 8-348-37
Procedures. See SSL Certificate Use in state management, 8-31
Protocols, 14-7 State
SSL Certificate Management tab, description, 8-12
Activating SSL mode, 14-9 Management, defining scope of data, 8-12
Creating and installing, 14-8 Monitor, menu, 8-16
Restarting server, 14-9 Monitor, viewing alarms, 8-21
State and Alarm Management interaction, 14-5 Monitor, viewing device details, 8-17
System Requirements State and Alarm Management interaction, 8-3,
Environment, 14-6 8-20
Security, 14-7 Table display shortcuts, 8-10
User, 14-7 Weighting, Compare historical and recent values,
Web applications, invoking, 2-25 9-11
From browser, 2-25 Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). See
Web Monitor WAP2UNO
Alarm Workday, 9-13, 9-409-41, 9-50, 9-529-53,
Details window, description, 8-28 9-699-74, 9-969-97
Management tab, description, 8-23
Monitor, invoking methods, 8-24
X
Monitor, menu, 8-26
XC, 4-21, 9-30, 9-38, 9-76, 9-839-84, 9-89
Monitor, table sorting options, 8-27
XCDR, 9-88
Monitor, viewing alarm details, 8-27
Monitor, viewing alarms, 8-24
Client-server
Client, 8-3
Client to server, requests, 8-3
Server, 8-2
Colors
Status colors, definitions, 8-5
Data sources, 8-4
Device, 8-28-3, 8-13
Details, 8-28-3, 8-17
Details, viewing alarms from, 8-20
Details, window description, 8-18
Scope attributes, reference table, 8-38
Display limit, 8-5
Filter, Default. See also Search Filter, 8-5
Invoking. See Invoking, Web Monitor
Main function tabs. See state management,
alarm management, 8-9
Search
Alarm, narrow scope, 8-36
Alarm, wide scope, 8-37

This Master Index combines all UNO Users Guides indices. Entry location is denoted by the
source Users Guide and page. The source Users Guide is denoted by these abbreviations:
Core = UNO Core Features TT = Test and Tune Applications Admin = Administrative Guide
CC = Command Center Suite PM = PM Enhanced Applications
For example:
The entry location Admin 8-16 means Administrative Guide, page 8-16
The entry location Core 4-5Core 4-7 means UNO Core Features, pages 4-5 to 4-7
Master Index
Numerics Sort, TT 6-13, TT 6-17, TT 6-20, TT 6-22, TT

19 MHz clock, Core 4-5Core 4-7, Core 4-9, 6-39TT 6-40
Core 4-13Core 4-14, Core 4-19, Core 4-62 Administrative state, Core 4-5, Core 4-26, Core
1X, PM 4-31 4-31, Core 4-56
3COM, Core 13-1, CC 3-265CC 3-266, CC Administrator, Core 4-37, Core 4-54, Core
3-268CC 3-270 4-56, Core 4-60Core 4-61, Core 9-14,
Core 9-31, Core 12-16, TT 5-1, TT 5-8, TT
5-10, TT 5-25, TT 5-27, TT 5-38, TT 6-1, TT
A 6-67, TT 6-75, PM 4-1
AAA, Admin 8-14, Admin 8-16 Advanced Options, Core 4-39, Core 4-42
Access Node. See AN Agent, TT 6-5, TT 6-7, TT 6-13TT 6-15, TT
ACH, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76, Core 6-29, TT 6-32TT 6-33, TT 6-38TT 6-39,
9-82, Core 9-86, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM 4-15, TT 6-44TT 6-45, TT 6-79TT 6-80
PM 4-26, PM 4-29, PM 4-33 Agent Identification, CC 3-44
Acknowledged alarm, OMCR Relay, Core 12-6 agent_del_fix, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20
Activate, Core 4-31, Core 4-55, Core 4-61, TT agent_info, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-6
5-7, TT 5-24TT 5-26, TT 5-37 Agent-Independent rules, Core 4-31, Core
Activate Long Term Storage, PM 4-14PM 4-15 4-34Core 4-35
Activating download phase, TT 6-10 Agents
Actual Start Time, TT 6-9, TT 6-24, TT 6-26TT Cisco
6-27, TT 6-35 Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator, Admin 8-21
Additional Conditions, Core 4-38Core 4-39, PDSN and AAA, Admin 8-16
Core 4-43Core 4-46 Tier2 Switch, Admin 8-20
Additional Text, TT 5-1TT 5-2, TT 5-29TT WAN Router, Admin 8-18
5-31, TT 5-33, TT 5-35TT 5-37 Compaq HLR-41/MR, Admin 8-11
Additional text, Core 4-51Core 4-53 IMACS, Admin 8-9
Administration Table, TT 6-5 IP Address Change on UNO, Admin 12-20
Colors, TT 6-11TT 6-12, TT 6-67 IWU, Admin 8-6
Display Selected Rows, TT 6-30 MOSCAD, Admin 8-4
Layout, TT 6-18TT 6-19, TT 6-54 OMCR, Admin 8-3
Properties, TT 6-14, TT 6-17TT 6-18, TT Refreshing and polling, Admin 9-3
6-20, TT 6-55 SwitchMATE, Admin 8-3
Trap mapper, Admin 9-4
March 1, 2004 Master Index Master Index-1

Master Index A-A
Troubleshooting. See Troubleshooting, Agents Integrating external applications, Core

Agents supported by UNO 6-46Core 6-51
General, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, Interface, Core 6-3
Admin 2-9 Invoking from Command Center, CC 3-293,
Agents supported by UNO 2.16.3 CC 3-303
List of, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, New Display, Core 6-13
Admin 2-9 Running from Alarm Manager, Core 3-44
Aggregate Node. See AGNODE Saving, Core 6-14
Aggregation, Core 9-17, Core 9-29Core 9-31, Alarm Correlation, Core 4-1Core 4-64
Core 9-33, Core 9-36Core 9-39, Core Alarm Counter, Core 12-6
9-47, Core 9-49, Core 9-55, Core Alarm Engine, Core 3-2, Core 4-3Core 4-4,
9-62Core 9-64, Core 9-75Core 9-79, Core 6-4, TT 5-2, TT 5-5
Core 9-81Core 9-82, Core 9-96, PM Alarm Handling options, Core 4-49Core 4-50,
4-2PM 4-4, PM 4-14PM 4-16, PM 4-19, Core 4-52
PM 4-21, PM 4-25PM 4-26, PM 4-28PM Alarm ID, Default correlation rules, Core
4-29 4-5Core 4-7
AGNODE, CC 3-136CC 3-139, CC 3-221, Alarm Listener, Core 4-3Core 4-4
CC 3-225CC 3-227, CC 3-237CC 3-238, Attributes, Admin 11-53
CC 3-248CC 3-251, CC 3-253CC 3-260 Command line parameters, Admin 11-49
Alarm Attributes Configuring, Admin 11-53
Cisco Alarm Logging options, Core 4-49Core 4-50
Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator, Admin 8-22 Alarm Manager, Core 3-1Core 3-86, Core
MWFM Switch, Admin 8-22 4-3Core 4-5, Core 4-8Core 4-23, Core
PDSN and AAA, Admin 8-17 4-39, Core 4-43, Core 9-5Core 9-6, Core
Tier2 Switch, Admin 8-20 9-94, Core 12-1Core 12-2, Core
WAN Router, Admin 8-18 12-13Core 12-14, Core 13-1, Core
Compaq HLR-41/MR, Admin 8-12 13-11Core 13-13, CC 3-13, CC 3-32, CC
IMACS, Admin 8-10 3-51, CC 3-55, CC 3-248, CC 3-293, CC
IWU, Admin 8-8 3-302, CC 4-90, TT 5-4TT 5-5, TT 6-13, TT
MOSCAD, Admin 8-5 6-78, Admin 8-6Admin 8-7
Alarm Browser, Core 4-3, Core 4-5, Core Alarm Browser display, Core 3-12
4-49Core 4-50, Core 6-1Core 6-65, Core Alarm List, Core 3-1, Core 3-9
13-1, Core 13-11, Core 13-13, CC 3-32, CC Display modes, Core 3-26
3-51, CC 3-55, CC 3-293, CC 3-303, CC Sorting alarms, Core 3-20Core 3-23
4-1, CC 4-90, TT 5-4TT 5-5, TT 6-13, TT Alarm Notification, Core 3-63
6-78, Admin 8-7 Colors, CC 3-32
Alarm List, Core 6-3 Configuration management. See Layout, Alarm
Display modes, Core 6-29 Manager
Displaying alarms, Core 6-28 Display Format, CC 3-51, CC 3-55
Sorting alarms, Core 6-23Core 6-26 External applications, integrating, Core
Alarm Manager Comparison, Core 6-2 3-67Core 3-72, Core 6-46Core 6-51
Alarms. See Alarms, Alarm Browser Filter selection, Core 3-24
Colors, CC 3-32 Interface, Core 3-1
Configuration management. See Layout, Alarm Invoking. See Invoking, Alarm Manager
Browser Layout. See Layout, Alarm Manager
Display Format, CC 3-51, CC 3-55 Main Dialog Box, Core 3-8
Historical Alarm Log, Core 6-59 Modes, Core 3-26
Master Index-2 Master Index March 1, 2004

A-A Master Index
Fault Management, Core 3-26 Resends, setup, Admin 6-24

Performance Management, Core 3-26 Setup, invoking from menu, Admin 6-21
New Display, Core 3-11, Core 6-14 Global configuration, setup, Admin 6-21Ad-
Operation modes, Core 3-5 min 6-27
Printing. See Printing, Alarm Manager Invoking, Admin 6-14
Saving, Core 3-12 Notifications
Summary Table, Core 3-1, Core 3-8 History reports, Admin 6-55
Updates List, Core 3-1, Core 3-9 Manual setup, Admin 6-64
Alarm Manager. See also Large Scale Alarm Man- Sending, Admin 6-53
ager, UNO Core Features Printing
Alarm Monitor. See Web Monitor, Alarm Manage- Reports, Admin 6-63
ment Tab Rules table, Admin 6-19
Alarm Notification, Admin 6-1Admin 6-63, Reports
Admin 8-7 Detailed view, Admin 6-61
Concepts, general, Admin 6-5 Invoking from menu, Admin 6-55
Acknowledge types, Admin 6-12 Printing history details, Admin 6-63
Administrative states, Admin 6-13 Printing selected histories, Admin 6-63
Destination types, Admin 6-6 Report Details dialog box, description, Admin
Escalation parameters, Admin 6-6 6-62
Filter, Admin 6-11 Report dialog box, description, Admin 6-59
Filter weight, rule priority, Admin 6-11 Setup dialog box, description, Admin 6-56
Global configuration, Admin 6-8 Reports, setup
Life cycle, Admin 6-5 Generating, Admin 6-59
Notification History, Admin 6-12 Parameters, Admin 6-58
Rule, Admin 6-10 Requirements, Admin 6-14
Contact groups Rules
Adding new group, Admin 6-37 Dialog box, description, Admin 6-43
Dialog box, description, Admin 6-35 General description, Admin 6-10
Modifying and deleting, Admin 6-39Admin Invoking from menu, Admin 6-42
6-41 Rules, setup
Setup dialog box, Admin 6-33 Activating, Admin 6-52
Setup, invoking from menu, Admin 6-33 Adding, Admin 6-45
Testing, Admin 6-41 Adding new filter, Admin 6-48
Viewing group members list, Admin 6-37 Modifying, deleting, Admin 6-50
Contacts Alarm Notification e-mail, Admin 4-13
Adding new contact, Admin 6-29 Alarm Notification, general
Dialog box, description, Admin 6-28 Display, saving, Admin 6-18
General description, Admin 6-6 Alarm pressure, Core 4-1
Modifying and deleting, Admin 6-30Admin Alarm quality, Core 4-1Core 4-2
6-39 Alarm quantity, Core 4-2
Setup, invoking from menu, Admin 6-28 Alarm State parameters, Core 12-4, Core 12-6
Testing, Admin 6-32 Alarm text, Default correlation rules, Core
Destinations, setup, Admin 6-27Admin 6-41 4-5Core 4-7
Global configuration Alarms
Dialog box, description, Admin 6-22 Acknowledge, Core 3-57
General description, Admin 6-8 Acknowledgement of, CC 3-293
Initial Delay, setup, Admin 6-26 Alarm Browser

Master Index A-A
Display, Core 6-28Core 6-38 Unacknowledged, CC 3-9CC 3-12, CC

Selecting, Core 6-39 3-31, CC 3-56, CC 3-293, CC 4-90
Alarm Documentation, Core 3-61 Unacknowledgement of, CC 3-300
Alarm filters, Core 11-2 Uncleared, CC 3-9CC 3-12, CC 3-31, CC
Attributes 3-56
Reports, Core 3-60, Core 3-64, Core 6-40, alarms_rate, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-43
Core 6-43 album, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-7
Search, Core 3-48Core 3-53, Core album_async, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-8
6-30Core 6-36 All Cells
Clear, Core 3-56, CC 3-294CC 3-298 Cell Navigator, CC 3-47CC 3-48
Cleared, CC 3-9, CC 3-31, CC 3-33, CC Device Severity Indications, CC 3-143
3-35, CC 3-56, CC 3-121, CC 3-143, CC Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-25
3-171 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-142, CC 3-168
CMIP, CC 3-30, CC 3-168 Status Screen, CC 3-142
Correlation Input Alarms Details, Core 3-64, All EMXs
Core 6-43 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-146
Databases, Core 6-4 Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-25
Default Colors, CC 3-33 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-145
Devices, Core 3-58Core 3-59 Status Screen, CC 3-145
Devices not in Topo Database, CC 3-35 Summary EMX Icon, CC 3-147
Displaying alarms in the Alarm List, Core 6-28 All FEPs
Displaying in Alarm List, Core 3-24Core Device Severity Indications, CC 3-150
3-26 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-149, CC 3-174
Fault Management Mode, CC 3-21 Shortcut Menu, CC 3-150
Historical Alarm Log, Core 3-80, Core 6-59 Status Screen, CC 3-149, CC 3-151
ID, Core 3-61, Core 6-41 All IWUs
IWU TCM, CC 3-305 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-205
Life cycle, Core 3-3, Core 6-4 Invoking IWU Total Control Manager, CC
Number of, CC 3-9 3-205, CC 3-305
Performance Management, Core 9-4, Core 9-6 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-115, CC 3-204
Performance Management Mode, CC 3-21 Link to IWU Chassis Status Screen, CC 3-206
Rules Details, Core 3-65, Core 6-44 Shortcut Menu, CC 3-205
Select, Core 3-55 Status Screen, CC 3-204CC 3-205
Sending Notification, Core 3-63 All MOSCADs
Severity of, CC 3-9, CC 3-143, CC 3-157, Device Severity Indications, CC 3-214
CC 3-168, CC 3-205, CC 3-294CC Invoking
3-298 MOSCAD MCP-S Toolbox from, CC 3-304
Status Screen Indication of, CC 3-1 Network Element Status Screen from, CC
Successive Period, Core 9-6 3-214CC 3-215
Summary Square, CC 3-10CC 3-11, CC Status Screen, CC 3-115, CC 3-213
3-302 Shortcut Menu, CC 3-214
SwitchMate, CC 3-30, CC 3-168 Status Screen, CC 3-213
Troubleshooting. See Troubleshooting, Alarms All MSCSPANs
Type to Display, CC 3-51, CC 3-55 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-154
Types, Core 3-2, Core 6-3 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-153
Unacknowledge, Core 3-57 Link to Terrestrial Circuits, CC 3-154
Status Screen, CC 3-153

B-B Master Index
All OMCRs Analog, CC 3-30, CC 3-69, CC 3-74, CC

Device Severity Indications, CC 3-157 3-166CC 3-167, CC 3-169
Invoking Analysis, fault, Core 4-1
Software Download Manager from, CC 3-303 Application Launcher, CC 3-2, CC 4-5, CC
Status Screen, CC 3-156, CC 3-168 4-29, CC 5-2
Links Application Launcher, menus, Core 2-24, CC
CBSC Equipment, CC 3-162 2-24, TT 2-24, PM 2-24, Admin 2-24
MM, CC 3-164 Application Launcher, UNO, Core 2-18, CC
MSCSPAN, CC 3-161 2-18, TT 2-18, PM 2-18, Admin 2-18
Shortcut Menu, CC 3-294CC 3-298 Application Launcher. See also Invoking UNO ap-
Status Screen, CC 3-156 plications, Core 2-18, CC 2-18, TT 2-18, PM
All Processors Utilization, CC 3-294CC 3-298 2-18, Admin 2-18
All SDUs Apply rules, BTS Relays, TT 5-2TT 5-3, TT
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-181 5-29TT 5-32, TT 5-34, TT 5-36
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-180 ArcView, CC 3-27, CC 3-85, CC 4-3, CC
OMCR, Parent, CC 3-183 4-5CC 4-7, CC 5-3CC 5-4, CC 5-11, CC
Status Screen, CC 3-180 5-18, CC 5-23, CC 5-25CC 5-26, CC 5-28
All SPANs ASCII, Core 4-4
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-169 ASU, Core 4-5, Core 4-8Core 4-9
EMX, Parent, CC 3-169 Attribute, Core 4-39, Core 4-43Core 4-45,
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-169 Core 4-47, Core 4-49Core 4-53
List, CC 3-110 Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
Status Screen, CC 3-169 (AAA), Admin 8-16
All TRKGRPs. See All Trunk Groups Available colors, CC 3-93CC 3-94, CC 3-98,
All Trunk Groups CC 3-101, CC 4-43
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-171 Available Software Versions, TT 6-13, TT 6-20,
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-170 TT 6-31TT 6-33, TT 6-71
Link to Trunk Circuits, CC 3-171 Average Value, Core 9-11
Status Screen, CC 3-170 Average-Based Value, Core 9-9Core 9-13
All VPUs
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-192
B
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-192
Backhaul, Core 9-84, PM 4-31
OMCR, Parent, CC 3-194
Backing up UNO, Admin 4-1
Backup
All XCs
Full, Admin 4-3
Informix, Admin 4-6
Tape Preparations, Admin 4-1
Status Screen, CC 3-173CC 3-174
Tape Capacity & Type, Admin 4-2
Allocated space, PM 4-2PM 4-3, PM 4-16
Tape Commands, Admin 4-2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
Base Station, CC 3-61
Admin 8-11
Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Admin 8-5
AMR, Core 4-5Core 4-8, Core 4-16, Core
Base Value, Core 9-9Core 9-13, Core
4-18, Core 4-21Core 4-22
9-38Core 9-41, Core 9-50Core 9-51
AN, Core 4-21, CC 3-220CC 3-265
BBX, Core 4-5Core 4-6, Core 4-9Core
OMCR, Parent, CC 3-221, CC 3-224
4-14, Core 9-86, TT 6-8, PM 4-33
Summary Device, CC 3-221
BDC, TT 6-8

Master Index B-B
BPP, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC 3-194CC Invoking

3-196, CC 3-202 PM Statistics Graph Generation from, CC
BPP Device Function indicator, CC 3-183, CC 3-287
3-194 Site Information Generation from, CC 3-287
BSC, Core 9-89 Software Download Manager from, CC 3-303
BSLK, CC 3-117CC 3-120, CC 3-148 Statistics Report Generation from, CC 3-287,
BTS, Core 9-9, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core CC 3-289CC 3-290
9-56, Core 9-76, Core 9-82, Core Limitations, CC 3-70
9-84Core 9-86, CC 3-120CC 3-141, CC List, CC 3-289CC 3-290
4-16, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM 4-15, PM 4-26, Severity Indication, CC 3-11, CC 3-34, CC
PM 4-29, PM 4-31PM 4-33, Admin 3-168
8-3Admin 8-5 BTS icon, TT 6-4, TT 6-78
cBTS, TT 6-1, TT 6-7TT 6-10, TT 6-25, TT BTS Name, TT 6-7, TT 6-13, TT 6-21TT 6-22,
6-31TT 6-32, TT 6-68TT 6-70, TT TT 6-26, TT 6-39, TT 6-46, TT 6-51, TT
6-72TT 6-73, TT 6-75 6-80TT 6-81
Component Status Report, TT 6-49TT 6-54, BTS Neighbors, CC 3-278CC 3-279
TT 6-66, TT 6-81 BTS Relay rules, Conflicts, TT 5-3
Download BTS Relay rules, Current list, TT 5-17
History, TT 6-34 BTS Relays, TT 5-1TT 5-39
Information, TT 6-6TT 6-8, TT 6-46, TT Apply rules, TT 5-2TT 5-3, TT 5-29TT
6-51, TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT 6-61 5-32, TT 5-34, TT 5-36
Non-standard versions, TT 6-1, TT 6-8, TT Rules Table, TT 5-1, TT 5-6TT 5-7, TT
6-13TT 6-14, TT 6-29TT 6-30, TT 6-39, 5-9TT 5-18, TT 5-24TT 5-27, TT 5-29,
TT 6-44TT 6-45, TT 6-76 TT 5-37TT 5-39
pBTS, TT 6-1, TT 6-7TT 6-10, TT 6-25, TT Selecting a BTS, TT 5-17
6-31TT 6-32, TT 6-68TT 6-70, TT 6-72, BTS Router cluster, CC 3-130, CC 3-135
TT 6-74TT 6-76 BTS Router group, CC 3-130, CC 3-135CC
Post-Download operational state, TT 6-11 3-138, CC 3-251, CC 3-253, CC 3-257
Redundancy, TT 6-1, TT 6-6TT 6-7, TT 6-68 BTS routers, Admin 8-22
Non-redundant cBTSs, TT 6-68, TT 6-75 BTS sectors, CC 3-95, CC 3-139, CC 3-287,
Non-redundant pBTSs, TT 6-68TT 6-69, CC 3-292CC 3-293, CC 4-4, CC 4-18CC
TT 6-72, TT 6-74 4-19, CC 4-70, CC 4-78, CC 4-87CC 4-89,
Software download constraints, TT 6-68TT CC 4-91
6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-74 BTSCPS, Core 4-7
View, TT 6-68 BTSFAN, Core 4-6
State, TT 6-7 BTSFPS, Core 4-6
Traffic, TT 6-69, TT 6-72 BTSLINK, CC 3-33, CC 3-131, CC 3-139, CC
BTS Group, CC 3-69CC 3-70, CC 3-168, CC 3-179
4-17CC 4-18, TT 6-7, TT 6-13, TT BTSMM link, CC 3-139
6-21TT 6-22, TT 6-39, TT 6-79TT 6-80 BTS-RA, CC 3-139
Carrier of in Statistics Reports, CC 3-289CC BTSRALINK, CC 3-139
3-290, CC 3-292 BTSRTRLINK, CC 3-136CC 3-137
Display BTSSPAN, CC 3-130CC 3-131, CC
All BTSs Status Screen, CC 3-121 3-136CC 3-138, CC 3-179, CC 3-248, CC
Site Status Screen, CC 3-166CC 3-168 3-253CC 3-255, CC 3-257CC 3-260
Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-25 Burst, PM 4-29PM 4-31
Icon, CC 3-24, CC 3-27, CC 3-30

C-C Master Index
C MSIP, CC 3-178
Cage Controller indicator, CC 3-175 OMCR, Parent, CC 3-121, CC 3-153, CC
Calculator, PM 4-2PM 4-3, PM 4-8PM 4-9, 3-156CC 3-158, CC 3-163, CC 3-278,
PM 4-14PM 4-16, PM 4-19PM 4-22 CC 3-282, CC 3-286, CC 3-292
Calendar, Core 9-69Core 9-73, Core 9-96 Quality of Service, CC 3-157
Carrier, Core 4-6, Core 4-10, Core 4-17Core Terrestrial Circuits, CC 3-153CC 3-155, CC
4-18, Core 9-4Core 9-6, Core 9-30, Core 3-162, CC 3-179
9-38, Core 9-56, Core 9-76, Core 9-82, Trunk Groups, CC 3-158CC 3-161, CC
Core 9-85Core 9-87, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM 3-179
4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-29, PM 4-32PM Utilization, CC 3-294CC 3-298
4-33 CBSC Processor Utilization
Carrier List, CC 3-36, CC 3-273, CC Designer, PM 5-33
3-280CC 3-283 displaying data using Reload function, PM 5-38
Carriers, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC 3-121, CC Displaying SAR Data, PM 5-31
3-126, CC 3-131, CC 3-139CC 3-140, CC Edit menu
3-274CC 3-275, CC 3-280CC 3-287, CC Setup, PM 5-24
3-289CC 3-290, CC 3-292, CC 4-3CC File menu
4-4, CC 4-10, CC 4-12CC 4-14, CC Clone, PM 5-10
4-18CC 4-19, CC 4-51, CC 4-54, CC Close, PM 5-12
4-70CC 4-71, CC 4-79, CC 4-81, CC Print, PM 5-12
4-87CC 4-88, CC 4-91 Save, PM 5-11
CAT, Core 13-1 Interfaces, PM 5-1
Catalyst 6509 Switch, Admin 8-20 Historical Display, PM 5-2
Categories, Information, TT 6-5, TT 6-54TT SAR Monitor, PM 5-1
6-56, TT 6-58, TT 6-60TT 6-61 Invoking. See Invoking, CBSC Processor Utili-
CBSC, Core 9-6, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core zation
9-56, Core 9-58, Core 9-76, Core Launching from the Command Line, PM 6-4
9-82Core 9-83, Core 9-85, Core Tooltips, showing, PM 5-35
9-87Core 9-88, TT 6-1, TT 6-6TT 6-7, TT View menu
6-13, TT 6-21TT 6-22, TT 6-31TT 6-32, Reload, PM 5-18, PM 5-30
TT 6-46, TT 6-81, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM Zoom function, PM 5-37
4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-29PM 4-30, PM CBSC Utilization
4-32, Admin 8-3Admin 8-4, Admin 8-6, Selecting multiple items on the System Tree,
Admin 8-9 PM 5-36
BTS, Daughter, CC 3-121, CC 3-157, CC cbsc_data, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-32
3-278, CC 3-282, CC 3-286, CC 3-292 cBTS, Core 9-84Core 9-86, CC 3-122CC
Carriers of Parent OMCR, CC 3-292 3-123, CC 3-127, CC 3-130CC 3-131, CC
Device Icon, CC 3-30 3-133, CC 3-139, CC 3-179, CC 3-253, CC
Device Severity Indication, CC 3-168 3-257, CC 3-294CC 3-298, TT 6-1, TT
Equipment, CC 3-157, CC 3-162CC 3-163 6-7TT 6-10, TT 6-25, TT 6-31TT 6-32, TT
Invoking 6-68TT 6-70, TT 6-72TT 6-73, TT 6-75,
All OMCRs Status Screen from, CC 3-168 PM 4-31PM 4-33
CFC Monitor from, CC 3-294CC 3-298 CCA, CC 3-184, CC 3-191, CC 3-194, CC
MM, Daughter, CC 3-158, CC 3-164CC 3-196, CC 3-204
3-165 CCD, Core 4-6, Core 4-13
MSCSPAN, Daughter, CC 3-153, CC 3-155, CDL, Core 9-2Core 9-3, Core 9-17, PM
CC 3-158, CC 3-161CC 3-162 4-2PM 4-4

Master Index C-C
CDL-based data, PM 4-2PM 4-4 Carrier List, CC 3-280

CDMA, PM 4-30PM 4-31 Neighbors List, CC 3-274
CDMA2000, Admin 8-16 PN Offset List, CC 3-283
CD-ROM, Admin 4-8 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-34
CE, PM 4-31 Summary Device, CC 3-61
Cell, CC 3-142CC 3-144 Type, CC 3-51, CC 3-54
Cell Navigator, CC 3-46 Name
Button Activation of, CC 3-5 Cell Configuration, CC 3-36, CC 3-61
Cell Name Format, CC 3-51, CC 3-54CC Cell Names Table, CC 3-67
3-55 Changing, CC 3-65CC 3-67
Generate Statistics Report from, CC 3-47CC Formats
3-48 Character, CC 3-67
Invoke Status Screen from, CC 3-47
Display, CC 3-51, CC 3-53
cell_report, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-32
Global Definition from File, CC 3-68CC
Cells, CC 4-16, PM 4-23
3-69
Devices
Types, CC 3-36, CC 3-61
All Cells Status Screen Display of, CC 3-142
Changing, CC 3-62CC 3-63
Assign to Cell Groups, CC 3-69, CC 3-75
Default, CC 3-61
Cell Devices Status Screen, CC 3-144
Reports Display of, CC 3-273
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-11, CC
Source, CC 3-61, CC 3-63CC 3-65
3-144
View, CC 3-47
EMX, Parent, CC 3-142
Cellular System
Invoking Cell Devices Status Screen, CC
Modes. See Management Modes
3-143, CC 3-168
Monitoring
Groups, CC 3-36, CC 3-69
Alarms, Core 1-8, CC 1-8, TT 1-8, PM 1-8,
Assign Devices to, CC 3-75CC 3-77, CC
Admin 1-8
4-20, CC 4-34CC 4-36
State, Core 1-5, CC 1-5, TT 1-5, PM 1-5,
Create, CC 3-70, CC 4-2, CC 4-20, CC
Admin 1-5
4-32CC 4-33 Central Alarm Ack Handling
Create from Command Line, CC 3-74
Capabilities
Delete, CC 3-70, CC 3-73, CC 4-33
Communicating with Remote UNO Systems,
Display
Core 3-87
Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-25 Synchronizing Alarms, Core 3-87
Site Status Screen, CC 3-166CC 3-168 Invoking. See Invoking, Central Alarm Ack Han-
Summary Square, CC 3-69, CC 3-88 dling
Icon, CC 3-30 Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC), Ad-
Limitations, CC 3-70 min 8-6
List, CC 3-71 CFC, Core 9-2Core 9-3, Core 9-9, Core
Location on Map, CC 3-71 9-81, Core 9-86, Core 9-88Core 9-89, PM
Remove Devices from, CC 3-75CC 3-77, 4-33
CC 4-36 CFC Monitoring Tool, CC 3-294CC 3-298
Rename, CC 3-70 Analytical Functional Area, PM 6-2
Severity Indication, CC 3-11, CC 3-34, CC Cloning, PM 6-8
3-168 Closing, PM 6-9
Type, CC 3-71, CC 3-76 Invoking. See Invoking,CFC Monitoring
Icon Japanese language support, Admin 7-7
BTS Monitoring Functional Area, PM 6-2

C-C Master Index
Reloading, PM 6-17 CLI command

Saving, PM 6-8 Refresh, CC 4-92
cfc_statistics, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-34 Server, CC 4-92
cfc_status, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-34 Start, CC 4-92
CGM, CC 3-117CC 3-119, CC 3-148 Stat, CC 4-92
BSLKs, Daughter, CC 3-118CC 3-120 Stop, CC 4-92
EMX, Parent, CC 3-118 Client ID, CC 3-44, CC 3-51
Invoke All BSLKs Status Screen from, CC Clone, Core 9-17Core 9-19, Core 9-21, Core
3-117, CC 3-148 9-26, Core 9-34, Core 9-36, Core 9-46,
Channel, PM 4-30PM 4-33 Core 9-54Core 9-58, Core 9-61
Channel Elements, Core 4-20 Cluster ID, CC 3-44CC 3-45, CC 3-135, CC
Chassis, CC 3-112, CC 3-114, CC 3-179, CC 3-266CC 3-269, CC 3-299
3-205CC 3-209, CC 3-212, CC 3-266, CC Cluster Manager, CC 3-267CC 3-268
3-268CC 3-271 Cluster Manager indicator, CC 3-268
check_device.sh, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-21 Clusters, CC 3-44CC 3-45, CC 3-130, CC
check_wrong_cbsc, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-22 3-135, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC 3-189CC
Circuit, TT 6-1, TT 6-6TT 6-7, TT 6-32, TT 3-190, CC 3-265CC 3-270, CC 3-272, CC
6-69, TT 6-72 3-299
Circuit data, CC 3-212 CMIP, Admin 8-1, Admin 8-6
Circuit Data Card, CC 3-112, CC 3-205CC Collect data, PM 4-1, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM
3-206, CC 3-208CC 3-210 4-21, PM 4-29
Circuit Data Entity, CC 3-208CC 3-209 Collection interval, Core 9-3, Core 9-6
Circuit IWUs, CC 3-109 Collocated Devices. See Devices, Proximity
Cisco, CC 3-139, CC 3-222, CC 3-227, CC Color
3-230, CC 3-250, CC 3-254, CC 3-262, CC Command Center
3-265, CC 3-267CC 3-268, CC 3-294CC State, CC 3-36, CC 3-92
3-298 Current, CC 3-94
Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator, Admin 8-21 Defaults, CC 3-32CC 3-33
PDSN and AAA, Admin 8-16 Indications
Tier2 Switch, Admin 8-20 Device Icon, CC 3-28, CC 3-30, CC
WAN Router, Admin 8-18 3-32
Cisco 7206VXR WAN Router Traps, Admin Status Screen, CC 3-6, CC 3-24, CC
10-58 3-27
Cisco AAA Traps, Admin 10-64 Summary Square, CC 3-9, CC 3-302
Cisco HA Traps, Admin 10-94, Admin 10-99 List, CC 3-94
Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS), Ad- LPAs, CC 3-34
min 8-16 Palettes, CC 3-94
Cisco Mobile Wireless Home Agent (HA), Admin
ISO, CC 3-92
8-16
IWU Proprietary, CC 3-92
Cisco PDSN Traps, Admin 10-50
Telephone Proprietary, CC 3-92
Cisco View Utility for LAN. See CV
Relays, CC 3-34
Cisco WAN Manager. See CWM
Cisco Works 2000 for LAN. See CW2000 Set Colors, CC 3-93
CiscoTier2 6509 Switch Traps, Admin 10-72 Severities, CC 3-92
Cleared alarms, CC 3-9, CC 3-31, CC 3-33, CC Statistics, CC 3-36, CC 3-92, CC 3-95CC
3-35, CC 3-56, CC 3-121, CC 3-143, CC 3-96
3-171 BTS Sector, CC 3-287, CC 3-292

Master Index C-C
Color Assignment, CC 3-95, CC Description, Core 2-35, CC 2-35, TT 2-35,

3-97CC 3-99, CC 3-101 PM 2-35, Admin 2-35
Palettes, CC 3-95CC 3-97 Invoking, Core 2-34, CC 2-34, TT 2-34,
Create, CC 3-97 PM 2-34, Admin 2-34
Default, CC 3-36, CC 3-92, CC Selecting file, Core 2-35, CC 2-35, TT 2-35,
3-103CC 3-104 PM 2-35, Admin 2-35
Delete, CC 3-100, CC 3-102 Print dialog box, Core 2-31, CC 2-31, TT
List, CC 3-99 2-31, PM 2-31, Admin 2-31
Modify, CC 3-99 Description, Core 2-32, CC 2-32, TT 2-32,
Save, CC 3-102 PM 2-32, Admin 2-32
Reports Invoking, Core 2-31, CC 2-31, TT 2-31,
Icons, CC 3-273 PM 2-31, Admin 2-31
Values, CC 3-287 Printing, Core 2-33, CC 2-33, TT 2-33, PM
Value Ranges, CC 3-95, CC 3-97, CC 2-33, Admin 2-33
Common UNO Features
3-99CC 3-101
Selecting items
GIS
Contiguous, Core 2-42, CC 2-42, TT 2-42,
Labels, CC 4-23CC 4-24
PM 2-42, Admin 2-42
State, CC 4-3CC 4-4, CC 4-20, CC
Non-contiguous, Core 2-42, CC 2-42, TT
4-42CC 4-43, CC 4-66
Statistics
2-42, PM 2-42, Admin 2-42
Single, Core 2-42, CC 2-42, TT 2-42, PM
Color Assignment, CC 4-46CC 4-47
2-42, Admin 2-42
Palettes, CC 4-20, CC 4-44, CC 4-46 Tables
Color table, CC 3-93CC 3-94 Adjusting columns and rows, Core 2-41, CC
Colors, Administration Table, TT 6-11TT 6-12 2-41, TT 2-41, PM 2-41, Admin 2-41
Colors, PM status. See Performance Management Adjusting field order, Core 2-42, CC 2-42,
(PM) Reports TT 2-42, PM 2-42, Admin 2-42
Status colors Adjusting rows, Core 2-40, CC 2-40, TT
Column headings, TT 6-5TT 6-7, TT 6-20TT 2-40, PM 2-40, Admin 2-40
6-22, TT 6-24, TT 6-26, TT 6-46, TT 6-51, Changing columns, Core 2-39, CC 2-39, TT
TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT 6-58, TT 6-60TT 2-39, PM 2-39, Admin 2-39
6-64, TT 6-74 Sorting fields, Core 2-38, CC 2-38, TT
Command Application Terminal. See CAT 2-38, PM 2-38, Admin 2-38
Command Center, Core 13-1, Core 13-11, Core Sorting order, Core 2-37, CC 2-37, TT 2-37,
13-13, CC 3-1CC 3-305, TT 6-2, TT 6-4, PM 2-37, Admin 2-37
TT 6-13, TT 6-78, Admin 8-3, Admin Common UNO Menus and Buttons
8-5Admin 8-7 Action buttons, list of, Core 2-36, CC 2-36, TT
Command Line 2-36, PM 2-36, Admin 2-36
Create Groups, CC 3-74 Close, Core 2-37, CC 2-37, TT 2-37, PM
Invoking. See Invoking, Command Center 2-37, Admin 2-37
Japanese language support, Admin 7-4 Communication, Core 12-5, Core 12-9, Core
Layout. See Layout, Command Center 12-21Core 12-22
Unknown Indicator, Admin 12-4 Compaq HLR-41/MR, Admin 8-11
Command Line, CC 3-2CC 3-3, CC 3-68, CC Compaq Traps, Admin 10-57
3-70, CC 3-74, CC 4-5CC 4-6, CC 4-29, Compare
CC 4-92, CC 5-2CC 5-3 Historical and recent values for weighting, Core
Common UNO dialog boxes 9-11
Browse Destination dialog box

D-D Master Index
Monitored values and thresholds, Core 9-2, CPU, PM 4-2

Core 9-7, Core 9-9Core 9-10, Core 9-12 Create Rule, TT 5-29TT 5-30, TT 5-32TT
PM Statistics, Core 9-2, Core 9-66 5-34
Compare rules, Core 4-32Core 4-33 CSM, Core 4-6, Core 4-9Core 4-10, Core
Compare versions, TT 6-1, TT 6-42TT 6-43, 4-14Core 4-15, Core 4-63, Core 9-30,
TT 6-46 Core 9-38, Core 9-76, Core 9-82, Core
Component Summary Status, TT 6-8, TT 6-12 9-85, TT 6-8, PM 4-3, PM 4-15, PM 4-26,
CON Object, CC 3-164CC 3-165, CC PM 4-29, PM 4-32
3-227CC 3-229, CC 3-231, CC 3-235CC Current Load information, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT
3-236, CC 3-242, CC 3-261, CC 3-264 6-9, TT 6-14, TT 6-54TT 6-56
Concepts, Performance Management Threshold- Customize table, TT 6-54TT 6-58, TT 6-60
ing, Core 9-2Core 9-14 CV, Core 13-1
Conditions, Core 4-44Core 4-47 CW2000, Core 13-1, CC 3-224
Configuration Files, CC 3-34 CWM, Core 13-1
Configuration Reports, CC 3-273CC 3-274, CWN, CC 3-224
CC 3-280, CC 3-284
Configuration Tables. See Devices, Location
Configuration, UNO, PM 4-2PM 4-3, PM 4-20
D
DACS, CC 3-137CC 3-138
Conflicts, Alarm ID, Core 4-32
DACS Router Span. See DACSRTRSPAN
Conflicts, BTS Relay rules, TT 5-3
DACSRTRSPAN, CC 3-136CC 3-137
Conflicts, Rule name, Core 4-32
Daisy Chain, CC 3-122, CC 3-124CC 3-125,
Connection configuration, CC 3-136
CC 3-294CC 3-298
Constraints, Software download, TT 6-68TT
DAT tape, Admin 4-1
6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-74
Data, CC 3-109, CC 3-112, CC 3-122, CC
Contacts, contact groups. See Alarm Notification
3-130, CC 3-136, CC 3-205CC 3-206, CC
Contact groups, setting up
Contacts, setting up
3-208CC 3-209, CC 3-212, CC 3-219, CC
3-225, CC 3-253, CC 3-257, CC 3-263, CC
Destination, Contact, Contact Group
3-265, CC 3-294CC 3-298, CC 3-300
Control Actions, CC 3-28
Data Carrier indicator, CC 3-130, CC 3-253, CC
Coordinates, CC 3-27, CC 3-77CC 3-80, CC
3-257
4-2CC 4-4, CC 4-14, CC 4-40, CC
Data collection, PM 4-1, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM
4-59CC 4-60, CC 4-86CC 4-87, CC 5-27
Correlated alarms, Core 4-1, Core 4-3Core 4-4
4-21, PM 4-29
Data Loaded download phase, TT 6-10
Correlation filters, Core 4-2Core 4-4, Core
Data overflow, PM 4-20
4-10Core 4-12, Core 4-21, Core
Data purge, PM 4-19
4-38Core 4-40, Core 4-42Core 4-45,
Data Resource, Core 9-88
Core 4-47, Core 4-63Core 4-64
Data, CDL-based, PM 4-2PM 4-4
count_cdl, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-35
Data, PM-based, PM 4-2PM 4-4
count_pm, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-35
Database, Core 4-3, Core 4-5, Core 9-1, Core
count_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-14
9-3, Core 9-13, Core 9-30, Core 9-95Core
counter_id, Core 9-3, Core 9-6, Core 9-13,
Core 9-86, Core 9-88, Core 9-94 9-96, Core 12-3, Core 12-5, PM 4-1, PM
4-7, PM 4-15, PM 4-19
Counters
Topo, CC 3-35
Severity, CC 3-8CC 3-9
Database, BTS Relays, TT 5-2, TT 5-8TT 5-10,
Coverage Area, CC 3-61
TT 5-17, TT 5-27, TT 5-31, TT 5-35, TT
CP, Core 9-88
5-37TT 5-38
CPP, CC 3-152, CC 3-176

Master Index D-D
Date, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-24, TT 6-26TT device_extract, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-22
6-28, TT 6-36TT 6-37, TT 6-70, TT Device-dependent thresholds, Core 9-10, Core
6-73TT 6-74, TT 6-76, PM 4-8PM 4-9, 9-46Core 9-60
PM 4-21, PM 4-23PM 4-24 Device-independent rules, Core 4-31, Core
Date/Time setup, Core 9-69, Core 9-72, Core 4-34Core 4-35
9-74 Device-independent thresholds, Core 9-10, Core
Deactivate, Core 4-31, Core 4-55, Core 4-61, 9-35Core 9-45
TT 5-7, TT 5-24, TT 5-26TT 5-27, TT 5-31, Devices
TT 5-35 Assign Aliases to, CC 4-37CC 4-38
Default correlation rules Attributes, CC 4-83
Alarm ID, Core 4-5Core 4-7 Cancel selection, CC 4-65
Alarm text, Core 4-5Core 4-7 Coordinates, CC 4-40
Device type, Core 4-5Core 4-7 e-mail, Admin 4-12
Rule name, Core 4-5Core 4-7 High Level (Summary) Device. See Web Moni-
Default tape location, Admin 4-4 tor, State Monitor
del_device.sh, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-22 List, CC 3-50, CC 3-76CC 3-77
Denominator, Core 9-8Core 9-9, Core 9-28, Locating on map, CC 4-39
Core 9-30Core 9-31 Location, CC 3-77, CC 4-60CC 4-61
Details BTS, CC 3-278, CC 3-300
Print, TT 5-39 Configuration Tables, CC 3-77
View, TT 5-1, TT 5-39 Device Locations Table, CC 3-36, CC
Deviation Direction, Core 9-41, Core 9-51 3-77CC 3-79
Device Dependent, PM 4-14, PM 4-23, PM Map
4-25 Dragged Locations Table, CC 3-82CC
Device groups, CC 3-24CC 3-27, CC 3-83
3-29CC 3-30, CC 3-33CC 3-34, CC 3-36, Locate, CC 3-79
CC 3-60, CC 3-69CC 3-74, CC 3-76CC Relocate, CC 3-79, CC 3-81
3-79, CC 3-88, CC 3-121, CC 3-166CC Remove, CC 3-80
3-168, CC 3-287, CC 3-289CC 3-290, CC
Save Dragged Locations, CC 3-36, CC
3-292, CC 3-303, CC 4-2CC 4-3, CC 4-10,
CC 4-12CC 4-14, CC 4-16CC 4-18, CC 3-77, CC 3-80CC 3-83
4-20, CC 4-29, CC 4-31CC 4-36, CC 4-51, OMCR, CC 3-156
CC 4-54, CC 4-65CC 4-66, CC 4-70CC Status Screen Indication of, CC 3-24
4-71, CC 4-90, CC 5-25 Low Level Device. See Web Monitor, Cli-
EMX devices, CC 3-31 ent/Server Functions, Device Details
Location, CC 3-72 Proximity
Device Independent, PM 4-25 Cell Groups, CC 3-69
Device Independent rules, TT 5-7TT 5-8, TT Collocated Devices Icon, CC 3-31, CC 3-80
5-10TT 5-12 Collocating Devices, CC 3-80
Device information, TT 6-46, TT 6-51 Select, CC 4-62
Device Information Database, Core 12-3, Core remote network printer, Admin 5-3
12-5 Removing from map, CC 4-39, CC 4-41
Device instance, Core 9-3, Core 9-10, Core Select, CC 4-62CC 4-63
9-13 State, CC 3-1
Device Locations Table, CC 3-60, CC 3-77CC Access Node, CC 3-221
3-80 Agent Reporting of, CC 3-44
Device types, Core 9-96 BSLK, CC 3-118CC 3-120

D-D Master Index
BTS, CC 3-121, CC 3-131, CC 3-226, CC Devices Prepared download phase, TT 6-10

3-229, CC 3-232, CC 3-234, CC 3-236, Devices Upgrading download phase, TT 6-10
CC 3-238, CC 3-240, CC 3-242, CC Devices, integration See SNMP based devices, in-
3-247, CC 3-249, CC 3-254, CC 3-257, tegration, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9,
CC 3-260, CC 3-262, CC 3-264, CC Admin 2-9
3-271CC 3-272 DHCP, Admin 8-16
CBSC Equipment, CC 3-163 Diagnosis, Core 4-2, Core 4-21
Cell, CC 3-69, CC 3-73, CC 3-144 Digital, CC 3-166CC 3-167
Colors Disable, CC 3-28, CC 3-184, CC 3-190, CC
Assign, CC 4-43 3-294CC 3-298
Changing, CC 3-92, CC 4-42 Disable alarm, Core 9-17, Core 9-20Core
Default, CC 3-33, CC 4-42 9-21, Core 9-60Core 9-65
EMX, CC 3-142CC 3-143, CC Disk, PM 4-2PM 4-4, PM 4-16, PM
3-145CC 3-146, CC 3-148 4-19PM 4-22
FEP, CC 3-151CC 3-152 Disk, allocated space, PM 4-2PM 4-3, PM
Force, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, CC 3-207, CC 4-16
3-210, CC 3-299 Display, TT 6-13, TT 6-20, TT 6-29TT 6-31,
IC Trunk Groups, CC 3-159, CC 3-161 TT 6-39TT 6-41, TT 6-46TT 6-48, TT
Indications 6-51TT 6-56, TT 6-58, TT 6-60TT 6-62
Geographical Mode, CC 3-27 Display alarms, TT 6-78
Display Modes, CC 3-23, CC 3-57, CC 3-115
Icon, CC 3-6, CC 3-28, CC 3-32
Cloned Display, CC 3-37
Logical Mode, CC 3-24
Device Icons, CC 3-31
Management Modes, CC 3-21, CC 3-92 Geographical, CC 3-25CC 3-26, CC 3-36,
Status Screen, CC 3-1 CC 3-39, CC 3-57CC 3-59, CC 3-71, CC
Unknown indicator, CC 3-9, CC 3-77, CC 3-80CC 3-81, CC 3-83CC
3-30CC 3-31 3-84
IWU, CC 3-210, CC 3-212 GIS and, CC 3-23, CC 3-57, CC 3-59CC
LPAs, CC 3-132CC 3-133, CC 3-60
3-140CC 3-141 Information Bar, CC 3-6
Managed Objects, CC 3-219 Logical, CC 3-23CC 3-25, CC 3-36, CC
MM of CBSC, CC 3-165 3-57CC 3-59
MSCSPAN, CC 3-154 Map Setup, CC 3-83CC 3-84
MSIP, CC 3-179 Parameters, CC 3-51
OMCR, CC 3-157 Report Generation, CC 3-273
Relays, CC 3-124 Status Screen Descriptions, CC 3-23CC 3-25,
Save in Layout, CC 3-39 CC 3-115, CC 3-276, CC 3-281, CC 3-285
SDU, CC 3-183 Display software versions, TT 6-31
SDU link, CC 3-185 Distributing Software download phase, TT 6-10
SPAN, CC 3-169 DMM, CC 3-224
Trunk Circuits, CC 3-155, CC 3-173 DNS, Admin 4-12Admin 4-13, Admin 8-16,
VPU, CC 3-195 Admin 8-22
VPU link, CC 3-198 DOC3, CC 3-195CC 3-196, CC 3-202CC
XC, CC 3-174, CC 3-177 3-203
Statistics, CC 4-82 Documentation Suite, UNO. See UNO Documen-
Devices not under OMCR Management, CC tation Suite
3-234 Domain Name System (DNS), Admin 8-16

Master Index E-F
Download EDGERTR, CC 3-137CC 3-138, CC

Error Message, TT 6-33, TT 6-71 3-225CC 3-227, CC 3-233, CC 3-237CC
Failure, TT 6-6, TT 6-9TT 6-12 3-238, CC 3-248CC 3-255, CC 3-258CC
History, TT 6-34 3-260, CC 3-299
Information, TT 6-6, TT 6-22, TT 6-34, TT Electronic ID, CC 3-132, CC 3-299
6-46 Element Manager, Core 13-1Core 13-13
Method, TT 6-9, TT 6-25, TT 6-69, TT 6-72, Invoking. See Invoking, Element Manager
TT 6-80 Element Manager (EM). See Licenses
Phase information, TT 6-10 ELPA, Core 4-6, Core 4-15
Progress, TT 6-1, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT 6-78 E-mail, Admin 4-12Admin 4-13
Scheduling, TT 6-67TT 6-74 E-mail systems, configuring, Admin 4-12
Status, TT 6-1, TT 6-6, TT 6-9TT 6-13, TT EMX, CC 3-145CC 3-148, CC 4-15
6-21TT 6-22, TT 6-39, TT 6-54, TT 6-56, 2500, CC 3-145
TT 6-70, TT 6-74, TT 6-76, TT 6-79TT Cellular Switching System, CC 3-145
6-80 Processor
Success, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT 6-9, TT 6-11TT Device Icon, CC 3-30
6-12, TT 6-49 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-10, CC
System message, TT 6-2, TT 6-18TT 6-19, 3-148, CC 3-168
TT 6-33, TT 6-61TT 6-64, TT 6-71TT Invoke All BSLKs Status Screen from, CC
6-72, TT 6-74TT 6-75 3-117
Download History. See Historical Table Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-146, CC
Download Manager. See Software Download Man- 3-168
ager Status Screen, CC 3-147
Download Phases Trunk Groups, CC 3-170CC 3-172
Activating, TT 6-10 Enable, CC 3-28, CC 3-184, CC 3-190, CC
Data Loaded, TT 6-10 3-299
Devices Prepared, TT 6-10 End Time, TT 6-10, TT 6-24, TT 6-26TT 6-27,
Devices Upgrading, TT 6-10 TT 6-35TT 6-36
Distributing Software, TT 6-10 Environmental Icon, CC 3-131
Loading Data, TT 6-10 EQUIPPED, TT 6-12
Loading Software, TT 6-10 Error Message, TT 6-33, TT 6-71
Preparing Devices, TT 6-10 Error Rate, Core 9-12Core 9-13, Core 9-38,
Software Loaded, TT 6-10 Core 9-40Core 9-41, Core 9-50Core 9-51
Download Pre-check, TT 6-2 Ethernet, CC 3-109, CC 3-271
Download Request, TT 6-13, TT 6-65, TT Ethernet cards, CC 3-109
6-67TT 6-68, TT 6-74, TT 6-80 event_listener, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-44
Downloadable device, TT 6-8, TT 6-11TT 6-12 event_rate, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-46
Drag and Drop, CC 3-80CC 3-82 Export Rules, TT 5-1, TT 5-7TT 5-8, TT
Dragged Locations Table, CC 3-82CC 3-83 5-10TT 5-12
dump_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-19 Export rules, Core 4-34Core 4-35
Duration, TT 6-10, PM 4-29PM 4-31 ext_attr, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-23
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP),
Admin 8-16
F
Failure, TT 6-6, TT 6-9TT 6-12
E Failure download status, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT
Edge Router. See EDGERTR 6-11TT 6-12
Edge Server, CC 3-210

F-F Master Index
Fan, Core 4-6Core 4-7, Core 4-16Core Large scale filter. See Large Scale Filter Build-
4-17, Core 4-22 er
Fast option, TT 6-9, TT 6-25, TT 6-69, TT 6-72 Modifying. See Adding
Fault analysis, Core 4-1 Name, Core 11-3
Fault Management, TT 6-7, TT 6-12 Properties, Core 11-3
Alarm Browser, Core 6-29 Type, Core 11-4
Alarm Manager, Core 3-5 Invoking. See Invoking, Filter Builder
Command Center Large Scale Mode. See Large Scale Filter Build-
ISO. See Management Modes er
Proprietary. See Management Modes Layout, Core 11-48Core 11-53
Fault management, Core 4-1Core 4-2 Labels, Core 11-51Core 11-53
Fault recovery, Core 4-1 Showing fields, Core 11-49
Fault source, Core 4-2Core 4-3 Main dialog box, Core 11-7
FEP, CC 3-131, CC 3-149CC 3-152, CC Saving, Core 11-11
3-161, CC 3-174, CC 3-176CC 3-177, CC Filter Builder configuration. See Filter Builder,
3-179 Layout
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-152 Filter Selection, Core 3-24
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-150, CC 3-161, Filter, OMCR Relay, Core 12-1, Core
CC 3-177, CC 3-179 12-13Core 12-18
Links, CC 3-151 Filters
OMCR, Parent, CC 3-149 Adding
Status Screen, CC 3-36, CC 3-151 Agents, Core 11-17
Status Screen Shortcut Menu, CC 3-152 Alarm states, Core 11-39Core 11-41
XC, Parent, CC 3-149 Device types, Core 11-30Core 11-31
File restore, Admin 4-8Admin 4-9 Devices, Core 11-19Core 11-30
File system, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-5, Admin Event and event date, Core 11-43Core
4-7Admin 4-10 11-45
Files Problem descriptions, Core 11-41Core
/etc/hosts, Alarm Notification, Admin 4-13 11-43
Configuration, Admin 11-67 Alarm Notification filters, Admin 6-11, Admin
Dump, Admin 11-67 6-48
log, Admin 11-67 Correlation, Core 4-2Core 4-4, Core
Filter Builder, Core 4-3, Core 4-39, Core 4-42, 4-10Core 4-12, Core 4-21, Core
Core 11-1Core 11-63, Core 12-1Core 4-38Core 4-40, Core 4-42Core 4-45,
12-2, Core 12-4, Core 12-7, Core 12-9, Core 4-47, Core 4-63Core 4-64
Core 12-16Core 12-17, TT 5-4, Admin 8-7 Description, Core 11-2
Applying a filter, Core 11-12 Find, CC 3-44, CC 3-49CC 3-50
Filter List, Core 11-1 find_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-19
Description, Core 11-8 Force, TT 6-9, TT 6-70, TT 6-72
Refreshing, Core 11-53 Force Device State, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, CC
Filters 3-207, CC 3-210, CC 3-299
Adding, Core 11-13Core 11-45 Force Software Reset, CC 3-210
Complex Filter, Core 11-45 Formats, CC 3-51, CC 3-53
Default filter, Core 11-4 Cell Name, CC 3-51, CC 3-53
Deleting, Core 11-48 Cell Navigator Cell Name, CC 3-51, CC
Filter applications, Core 11-3 3-54CC 3-55
ISO Device State Names, CC 3-21

Master Index G-H
Map, CC 3-27 Groups, CC 3-24CC 3-27, CC 3-29CC

Frame Relay Service Module. See FRSM 3-30, CC 3-33CC 3-34, CC 3-36, CC 3-39,
Frame Type, TT 5-1TT 5-3, TT 5-10, TT 5-12, CC 3-60, CC 3-69CC 3-74, CC 3-76CC
TT 5-29TT 5-32, TT 5-34, TT 5-36 3-79, CC 3-88, CC 3-121, CC 3-166CC
FRSM, CC 3-248CC 3-249 3-168, CC 3-287, CC 3-289CC 3-290, CC
Full backup, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-3, Admin 3-292, CC 3-303, CC 4-2CC 4-3, CC 4-10,
4-5Admin 4-6, Admin 4-8Admin 4-10 CC 4-12CC 4-14, CC 4-16CC 4-18, CC
Full Restore, Admin 4-7 4-20, CC 4-29, CC 4-31CC 4-36, CC 4-51,
Func RADIUS Traps, Admin 10-78 CC 4-54, CC 4-65CC 4-66, CC 4-70CC
Functionality, Core 12-2 4-71, CC 4-90, CC 5-25
BTS Router group, CC 3-130, CC 3-135CC
3-138, CC 3-251, CC 3-253, CC 3-257
G EMX devices, CC 3-31
Gateway Router/Home network element (GRHA),
Location, CC 3-72
Admin 8-14 Members. See Cells, Groups
Geocoding, CC 4-58CC 4-59
Resource, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC
Geographical
3-194CC 3-196
BTS Location, CC 3-300
Setup. See Cells, Groups
Device Proximity and Group Formation, CC
GUI Snapshot, Admin 12-54
3-69
Display Mode. See Display Modes
Status Screen Location, CC 3-86 H
Geographical Display Mode. See Display Modes HA, Admin 8-16
GIS, CC 4-1CC 5-33 Handoff, Core 9-87, Core 9-89, CC 3-274
Command Center HHO, Core 9-88
Connect, CC 3-51 Hide, TT 6-5, TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT 6-58, TT
Connect to, CC 4-29CC 4-30 6-60TT 6-62
Display Modes, CC 3-23, CC 3-25, CC Hierarchy, CC 3-1, CC 3-6, CC 3-14, CC
3-57, CC 3-59 3-16CC 3-20, CC 3-23CC 3-24, CC 3-28,
Invoke from. See Invoking, GIS, Command CC 3-39, CC 3-116
Center High Speed Packet Data. See HSPD
Status Screens, CC 4-12 Hiragana in UNO, Admin 7-1
Dedicated PC Historical Alarm Reports
Invoke from. See Invoking, GIS, Dedicated PC Agent Types, Core 7-4
Invoke Status Screens from, CC 3-51 Alarms
Maps, CC 3-27 IDs, Core 7-5
Troubleshooting. See Troubleshooting, GIS on Severity Description, Core 7-12
Workstation not working Defaults
GLI, Core 4-5Core 4-9, Core 4-18, Core Relative Time Tab, Core 7-4
4-21, Core 4-23, CC 3-33, TT 6-8, TT 6-12, Spin Button Field, Core 7-4
TT 6-68, TT 6-75 Error Messages, Core 7-8
GPROC, CC 3-152, CC 3-176, CC 3-212 Invoking. See Invoking, Historical Alarm Re-
GRHA, Admin 8-14 ports
Group By, Core 9-8, Core 9-28, Core Main Dialog Box, Core 7-4
9-30Core 9-31, Core 9-82 Historical alarms
Group Reports. See Performance Management Alarm Documentation, Core 6-41
(PM) Reports, Group mode Attributes, Core 6-40
group_devs, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-24 ID, Core 6-41

I-I Master Index
Searching, Core 6-30Core 6-36 Indicators, CC 3-8

Historical data, Core 9-11 BPP Device Function, CC 3-183, CC 3-194
Historical information, TT 6-34 Cage Controller, CC 3-175
Historical Log, TT 6-1, TT 6-13, TT 6-17, TT Cluster Manager (Cisco PDSN), CC 3-268
6-20, TT 6-34TT 6-42 Data Carrier, CC 3-130, CC 3-253, CC 3-257
Historical Table, TT 6-6TT 6-8, TT 6-10TT NAK, CC 3-8CC 3-12, CC 3-31, CC 3-51,
6-11, TT 6-17TT 6-18, TT 6-34, TT CC 3-56
6-38TT 6-42, TT 6-56TT 6-61, TT 6-66, Non-Redundant, CC 3-121
TT 6-80 Packet, CC 3-156, CC 3-158, CC 3-160, CC
Historical Value, Core 9-11 3-163
HO, PM 4-30PM 4-33 PKTIF TER Function, CC 3-175
HO Detection, Core 9-83 Progress, CC 3-5
HO-Anchor, Core 9-86 Severity, CC 3-8CC 3-9
HO-Detection, Core 9-85 Split Mode, CC 3-157, CC 3-164
HO-Src, Core 9-83, Core 9-85 Unknown, CC 3-8CC 3-9, CC 3-11CC
HO-Tgt, Core 9-84Core 9-86 3-13, CC 3-30CC 3-31
HSPD, CC 3-109, CC 3-112, CC 3-205CC info_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-19
3-206, CC 3-208CC 3-209 Information
HSPD Card, CC 3-205, CC 3-210 BTS, TT 6-6TT 6-8, TT 6-46, TT 6-51, TT
HSPD Entity, CC 3-208CC 3-209 6-54TT 6-56
HSPD IWUs, CC 3-109 Categories, TT 6-5, TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT
Http, Core 13-1, Core 13-5, CC 3-227, CC 6-58, TT 6-60TT 6-61
3-250, CC 3-255, CC 3-262, CC 3-265, CC Current Load, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT 6-9, TT
3-299 6-14, TT 6-54TT 6-56
Device, TT 6-46, TT 6-51
Download, TT 6-6, TT 6-22, TT 6-34, TT
I
6-46
IC, PM 4-30
Download Phase, TT 6-10
IC Trunk, Core 9-83
Historical, TT 6-34
IC Trunk Groups
Monitored, TT 6-6, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-14,
TT 6-54TT 6-56
Icon, CC 3-158
Next/Last Load, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT 6-14, TT
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-159, CC 3-179
6-54TT 6-56
Scheduling, TT 6-34
ICBSC, Core 9-83Core 9-84, Core 9-86, PM
Information Bar, CC 3-4CC 3-5
4-30PM 4-31, PM 4-33 Informative Actions, CC 3-28
ICLINK, CC 3-160CC 3-161, CC 3-179
Informix, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-3, Admin
Icon, BTS, TT 6-4, TT 6-78
4-5Admin 4-7, Admin 4-9Admin 4-11
ICTRKGRP, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76,
Informix backup, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-3, Admin
Core 9-83, CC 3-158CC 3-161, CC 3-179,
4-5Admin 4-6, Admin 4-11
PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM 4-15, PM 4-26, PM
informix-top, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-15
4-30 INS, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, CC 3-194, CC
IMACS, Admin 8-9
3-207, CC 3-210, CC 3-299, TT 6-7, TT
Import Rules, TT 5-1, TT 5-7TT 5-10
6-12, TT 6-49
Import rules, Core 4-30Core 4-31
Integrated Multiple Access Communications Serv-
Conflicts, Core 4-32Core 4-34
er (IMACS), Core 2-7, CC 2-7, TT 2-7, PM
In Service, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, CC 3-194,
2-7, Admin 2-7
CC 3-207, CC 3-210, CC 3-299, TT 6-7

Master Index I-I
INTER_AN_CON, CC 3-221, CC 3-224, CC Multiple Alarm Manager Applications, Core

3-226CC 3-230, CC 3-235 3-5, Core 3-11
International Telecommunication Union (ITU). Other applications, Core 3-7
See also Standards, TMN, Core 2-1, CC 2-1, PM Statistics Graphs, Core 3-83
TT 2-1, PM 2-1, Admin 2-1 RFDS, Core 3-78
Interval, data collection. See Performance Man- Software Download Manager, Core 3-73
agement (PM) Reports, Core 10-95 Telnet Agent Access, Core 3-75
Invoking Alarm Notification, Admin 6-14
Alarm Browser Applications
Application Launcher, Core 6-5 From Application Launcher, Core 2-18, CC
BTS Relays, Core 6-53, Core 6-59 2-18, TT 2-18, PM 2-18, Admin 2-18
Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor, Core From command line, Core 2-26, CC 2-26,
6-61 TT 2-26, PM 2-26, Admin 2-26
CFC, Core 6-58 BTS Relays
Command Center, Core 6-51 Application Launcher, TT 5-4
Command Line, Core 6-5 Command Line, TT 5-4
Device alarm History, Core 6-53 Other applications, TT 5-5
Element Manager, Core 6-54 CBSC Processor Utilization
Filter Builder, Core 6-26 Application Launcher, PM 5-3
Historical Alarm Reports, Core 6-56 Command Line, PM 5-3
Large Scale Configuration, Core 6-61 Central Alarm Ack Handling
Multiple Alarm Browser Applications, Core Alarm Manager/Browser, Core 3-90
6-7, Core 6-53 Application Launcher, Core 3-88
PM Statistics Graphs, Core 6-62 CFC Monitoring Tool
RFDS, Core 6-57 Application Launcher, PM 6-3
Software Download Manager, Core 6-52 Command Center
Workstation, Core 6-8 Application Launcher, CC 3-2
Alarm Correlation, Core 4-24 Command Line, CC 3-2
Alarm Manager Element Manager
Alarm Browser, Core 3-74 Application Launcher, Core 13-2
Alarm Notification, Core 3-76, Core 6-55 Command Line, Core 13-2
Application Launcher, Core 3-5 Filter Builder
BTS Relays, Core 3-74 Alarm Browser, Core 11-55
Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor, Core Alarm Manager, Core 11-54
3-82 Application Launcher, Core 11-5
CFC, Core 3-79 Command Line, Core 11-5
Cisco Applications, Core 3-80 Historical Alarm Reports, Core 11-56
Command Center, Core 3-72Core 3-73, Large Scale Alarm Browser, Core 11-63
Core 6-52, CC 3-293, CC 3-302 Large Scale Alarm Manager, Core 11-63
Command Line, Core 3-5 OMCR Relays, Core 11-55
Element Manager, Core 3-75 Other applications, Core 11-6
Filter Builder, Core 3-23 GIS
from other applications, Core 3-7 Application Launcher, CC 4-5, CC 5-2
Historical Alarm Log, Core 3-80 Command Center, CC 3-57CC 3-58, CC
Historical Alarm Reports, Core 3-77 3-60, CC 4-5, CC 5-2
Large Scale Configuration, Core 3-82, Core Command Line, CC 4-6, CC 5-3
6-63

I-I Master Index
Historical Alarm Reports IOS, Admin 8-16

Application Launcher, Core 7-2 IP, Admin 8-12Admin 8-14, Admin 8-16, Ad-
Large ScaleAlarm Manager min 8-20Admin 8-22
Application Launcher, Core 5-7 IP Address, CC 3-247, CC 3-266CC 3-267
Long Term PM Storage IP address, Admin 4-7, Admin 4-12Admin
Application Launcher, PM 4-5 4-13
Command Line, PM 4-5 IP Address Change, Admin 12-20
MCC Channel Certification IP addresses, Core 13-3, Core 13-6, Core 13-9,
Application Launcher, TT 7-3 Core 13-11Core 13-13
Command Line, TT 7-3 IP communication path, Core 4-20
OMCR Relays ISB, CC 3-184, CC 3-194, CC 3-196
Application Launcher, Core 12-7 ISDN, CC 3-109
Command Line, Core 12-7 ISDN cards, CC 3-109
Online Help ISO
From Application Launcher, Core 2-29, CC Color Palette, CC 3-92, CC 3-94
2-29, TT 2-29, PM 2-29, Admin 2-29 Device State Attributes, CC 3-21, CC 3-92
From browser, Core 2-30, CC 2-30, TT Fault Management. See Management Modes
2-30, PM 2-30, Admin 2-30 ISO State
From dialog box, Core 2-29, CC 2-29, TT Administrative State, Core 11-35
2-29, PM 2-29, Admin 2-29 Availability, Core 11-38
From menu bar, Core 2-30, CC 2-30, TT Operational State, Core 11-36
2-30, PM 2-30, Admin 2-30 Standby Status, Core 11-37
PM Measurements & Alarms Usage State, Core 11-37
Application Launcher, Core 9-15 IWU, Core 2-7, Core 2-9, Core 9-30, Core
Command Line, Core 9-15 9-38, Core 9-76, Core 9-83, Core 13-1,
PM Statistics Graphs Core 13-11Core 13-12, CC 2-7, CC 2-9,
Application launcher, PM 3-3 CC 3-204, TT 2-7, TT 2-9, PM 2-7, PM 2-9,
Command line, PM 3-3 PM 4-3, PM 4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-31, Ad-
Other UNO applications, PM 3-28 min 2-7, Admin 2-9, Admin 8-6
RFDS Chassis
Application Launcher, TT 3-9 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-207
RFDS Reports Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-179, CC
Application Launcher, TT 4-2 3-205
Command Line, TT 4-2 Link to IWU Circuit Data Entity Status Screen,
from RFDS, TT 4-2 CC 3-112, CC 3-208
Other Applications, TT 4-2 Logical IWU Numbers of Circuit Data Cards,
Software Download Manager CC 3-112
Application Launcher, TT 6-2 Shortcut Menu, CC 3-207
Command Center, TT 6-4 Status Screen, CC 3-206
Command Line, TT 6-3 Circuit Data Entity
UNO Device Severity Indications, CC 3-210
From a dedicated terminal, Core 2-14, CC Force Software Reset, CC 3-210
2-14, TT 2-14, PM 2-14, Admin 2-14 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-112, CC
From a remote terminal, Core 2-16, CC 3-208
2-16, TT 2-16, PM 2-16, Admin 2-16 Shortcut Menu, CC 3-210
Web-based applications, Core 2-25, CC 2-25, Status Screen, CC 3-208CC 3-209
TT 2-25, PM 2-25, Admin 2-25

Master Index J-L
Connections K
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-36, CC 3-108 Kanji in UNO, Admin 7-1
IWU-Span Relationship, CC 3-108CC
3-111
SNMP, CC 3-105 L
HSPD Chassis Label, TT 6-58, TT 6-60, TT 6-62TT 6-64
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-207 Cell Name Display Format, CC 3-53
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-205 Device Type, CC 3-24, CC 3-27
Link to IWUHSPD Entity Status Screen, CC Location, CC 3-51
3-112, CC 3-208 MOSCAD-BTS Relationship, CC 3-107
Logical IWU Numbers of HSPD Cards, CC Summary Square, CC 3-5
3-112 Label Override, TT 6-58, TT 6-60, TT 6-64
Shortcut Menu, CC 3-207 Labeling, CC 4-20CC 4-25, CC 4-70, CC
Status Screen, CC 3-206 4-78, CC 4-80
HSPD Entity Labelling tapes, Admin 4-5Admin 4-6, Admin
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-210 4-10
Force Software Reset, CC 3-210 LAN, CC 3-135, CC 3-163, CC 3-221CC
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-112, CC 3-222, CC 3-224, CC 3-227, CC 3-230, CC
3-208 3-250, CC 3-254, CC 3-262, CC 3-265, CC
Shortcut Menu, CC 3-210 3-294CC 3-298, Admin 8-4, Admin 8-9
Status Screen, CC 3-208CC 3-209 LAN/WAN Router. See LWRTR
Link to XC, CC 3-211 Languages
Modems, CC 3-108, CC 3-112, CC Japanese, Admin 7-1
3-208CC 3-210 Hiragana, Admin 7-1
Ports, CC 3-109, CC 3-211 Kanji, Admin 7-1
Terminus of IWUSPAN, CC 3-212 Large Scale Alarm Browser, Core 6-63
Total Control Manager (TCM), CC 3-205, CC Large Scale Alarm Manager
3-269, CC 3-271, CC 3-300, CC 3-305 Alarm suite use, Core 5-1Core 5-3
IWU Circuit Data Traps, Admin 10-2 Configuration
IWU High Speed Packet Data Traps, Admin 10-2 General description, Core 5-2
IWU Total Control Manager (TCM), Core 13-12 Stages, Core 5-2
IWUHSPD, CC 3-212 Connection recovery, Core 5-18
IWUMDM, PM 4-3 Functions, Core 5-3
IWUSPAN, CC 3-108CC 3-111, CC Shortcut menus, Core 5-19
3-210CC 3-212 System configuration
IWUSPANS Adding hosts, Core 5-9
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-212 Administrators setup, Core 5-2
Connecting hosts, Core 5-4
Copying, Core 5-11
J Dialog box, Core 5-8
Japanese language support, Admin 7-1 Invoking, Core 5-6
CFC Monitoring Tool, Admin 7-7 Removing hosts, Core 5-10
Command Center, Admin 7-4 User configuration
User Defined Alarms, Admin 7-2 Adding hosts, Core 5-14
Web Monitor, Admin 7-7 Copying, Core 5-17
Dialog box, Core 5-14
Invoking, Core 5-13

L-L Master Index
Large Scale Filter Builder, Core 11-56Core Summary Bar, CC 3-8, CC 3-39, CC
11-63 3-89CC 3-90
Copying, Core 11-58 Layout Components, TT 6-5, TT 6-14, TT 6-17,
Large scale filters, Core 11-59Core 11-62 TT 6-20, TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT 6-61
Setting up, Core 11-56 LCI, TT 6-8
Large ScaleAlarm Manager Legacy BTS, CC 3-127CC 3-128, CC 3-254,
System configuration CC 3-258, CC 3-260
Setup, Core 5-4 Legend, CC 3-87
Last Load information, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT 6-14, License requirements, PM 4-5, PM 4-23
TT 6-54TT 6-56 Japanese, Admin 7-1
Latitude, CC 3-27, CC 3-71CC 3-72, CC PM Statistics Graphs, PM 3-2
3-77CC 3-79, CC 3-86, CC 3-300, CC Licenses, UNO
4-2CC 4-4, CC 4-40, CC 4-59CC 4-60, Description, Core 2-7, CC 2-7, TT 2-7, PM
CC 4-84CC 4-87 2-7, Admin 2-7
Launching, UNO applications, Core 2-25, CC List of licensed features, Core 2-8, CC 2-8, TT
2-25, TT 2-25, PM 2-25, Admin 2-25 2-8, PM 2-8, Admin 2-8
Layout Element Manager
Alarm Browser. See also Layout, Alarm Manag- Market Manager
er Option 2
Components, general, Core 6-37 Option 3
Configuration, Core 6-18Core 6-19 Option 4
Properties, Core 6-30 Option 5
Alarm Manager, Core 3-14, Core 3-27Core Option 7
3-48 Option 8
Alarm Browser, Core 3-44Core 3-48 LINK
Alarm List, Core 3-32Core 3-35 BTS, CC 3-33, CC 3-179
Components, general, Core 3-53Core 3-54 IC, CC 3-160CC 3-161, CC 3-179
Configuration, Core 3-14Core 3-17 XC, CC 3-33
Properties, Core 3-28Core 3-31 Link configuration, CC 3-136
Updates List, Core 3-36Core 3-43 Link Object, CC 3-163, CC 3-165CC 3-166,
Command Center CC 3-178, CC 3-187, CC 3-189CC 3-190,
Cabinet, CC 3-144 CC 3-201, CC 3-227CC 3-229, CC 3-231,
Delete, CC 3-41 CC 3-234CC 3-236, CC 3-238, CC 3-240,
Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-39 CC 3-242, CC 3-244CC 3-247, CC 3-253,
Information Bar, CC 3-6 CC 3-261, CC 3-264CC 3-265
List, CC 3-40CC 3-42 Link, MOSCAD Device-MOSCAD Site, CC 3-13
Logical, CC 3-144, CC 3-176 Link, UNO-OMCR, CC 3-13
Name, CC 3-40CC 3-41 Link, XC Device-OMCR, CC 3-13
Options, CC 3-39 Load, CC 3-68, CC 3-150, CC 3-299, CC
Restore, CC 3-36CC 3-37, CC 3-42CC 3-304, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT
3-43 6-14, TT 6-54TT 6-56, TT 6-61
Save, CC 3-36CC 3-37, CC 3-39CC load_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-19
3-40 Loading Data download phase, TT 6-10
Status Screen, CC 3-39 Loading download status, TT 6-8TT 6-11, TT
6-75TT 6-76
Loading Software download phase, TT 6-10

Master Index M-M
Location, CC 3-1, CC 3-24, CC 3-36, CC 3-60, Management Information Base (MIB), Admin
CC 3-71CC 3-72, CC 3-77CC 3-78, CC 8-5, Admin 8-7, Admin 8-14
3-156, CC 3-164, CC 3-224, CC 3-278, CC Management Information System. See Solstice
3-300, CC 4-1, CC 4-3, CC 4-10, CC 4-20, MIS
CC 4-39CC 4-41, CC 4-52, CC 4-57CC Management Modes, CC 3-10, CC 3-21, CC
4-61, CC 4-66, CC 4-71CC 4-72, CC 4-81, 3-37, CC 3-57CC 3-58, CC 3-115
CC 4-83, CC 4-85CC 4-87, CC 5-23, CC Alarm Browser, Core 6-8, Core 6-29
5-26CC 5-28, CC 5-33 Alarm Manager, Core 3-5
Cell Groups. See Cells, Groups Cloned Display, CC 3-37
Device. See Devices, Location Fault Management, CC 3-9, CC 3-21
Label. See Label Fault Management ISO, CC 3-21, CC 3-36,
Lock, CC 3-28, CC 3-243, CC 3-294CC CC 3-57CC 3-58, CC 3-92
3-299 Fault Management Proprietary, CC 3-21, CC
Logical 3-36, CC 3-57CC 3-58
Device Entity, CC 3-47, CC 3-61 Information Bar, CC 3-6
Display Mode. See Display Modes Performance Management, CC 3-9, CC 3-21,
IWU, CC 3-36, CC 3-105, CC 3-110, CC CC 3-57CC 3-58
3-112CC 3-114 Set default in GIS, CC 4-2, CC 4-14, CC
Status Screen Layout, CC 3-144, CC 3-176 4-27CC 4-28
Logical IWU Number, CC 3-207 Unknown indicator, CC 3-31
Long Term PM Storage, PM 4-1PM 4-33 Map
Long Term Storage, Activation, PM 4-14PM Add, CC 4-20, CC 4-22CC 4-25
4-15 Assign
Long Term Storage. See also PM Statistics Graphs, Report, CC 3-83
Source types Status Screen, CC 3-83, CC 3-86
Longitude, CC 3-27, CC 3-71CC 3-72, CC Customize Views of, CC 3-83
3-77CC 3-79, CC 3-86, CC 3-300, CC Default, CC 4-20CC 4-23, CC 4-26
4-2CC 4-4, CC 4-40, CC 4-59CC 4-60, Delete, CC 4-20, CC 4-23, CC 4-25
CC 4-84CC 4-87 Devices
LPA, Core 4-6Core 4-7, CC 3-33CC 3-34, Locating, CC 3-26, CC 3-77
CC 3-131, CC 3-133, CC 3-143 Relocating, CC 3-80
LPAC, Core 4-7, Core 4-17Core 4-18 Removing, CC 3-80
lt_store, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-36 Geographical Display Mode, CC 3-25, CC
LWRTR, CC 3-221, CC 3-225CC 3-227, CC 3-115
3-233, CC 3-235, CC 3-260CC 3-262 Labeling, CC 4-20CC 4-25
Legend, CC 3-83, CC 3-87
Locating on
M
Devices, CC 3-26, CC 3-77
Main Display Area, CC 3-4CC 3-6, CC 3-14,
Groups, CC 3-71CC 3-72
CC 3-37, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC 3-50, CC
Modify, CC 4-20, CC 4-22CC 4-23, CC
3-116
4-25
Main Menu Bar, Core 6-10
Name, CC 3-83, CC 3-85
Managed Objects
Parameters, CC 3-84
Region, CC 4-52, CC 4-66CC 4-69, CC
Icons, CC 3-216CC 3-217
4-71CC 4-72, CC 4-79
Relocating Devices on, CC 3-80CC 3-81
Shortcut Menu, CC 3-219
Removing Devices from, CC 3-80

M-M Master Index
Setup, CC 3-36CC 3-37, CC 3-60, CC Monitor window, TT 7-4

3-83CC 3-84 Actions menu, TT 7-15
Status Screen Hierarchy, CC 3-28 Applications menu, TT 7-19
Type, CC 3-27, CC 3-83CC 3-85 File menu, TT 7-6
View Information, CC 4-20CC 4-21, CC Menu Bar, TT 7-4
4-23 Menu map, TT 7-5
Viewing Area, CC 3-83, CC 3-86 Moving items to History window, TT 7-16
MapDefault, CC 4-21, CC 4-23 Opening a new monitor window, TT 7-21
MapDocs, CC 4-21, CC 4-24 Selecting all items in the table, TT 7-15
Mapping, PM 4-30 Setting up the Monitor window, TT 7-6
MapProj, CC 4-21, CC 4-24 Setting up the table properties, TT 7-13
MapStScale, CC 4-21, CC 4-24 Sorting data in the table, TT 7-12
MapView, CC 4-21, CC 4-24 Unselecting all items table, TT 7-15
MARC Card, CC 3-112 View menu, TT 7-9
Market Manager (MM). See Licenses Opening the History window, TT 7-9
MAWI, Core 4-6Core 4-7, Core 4-10Core Operations, TT 7-23
4-12, Core 4-19Core 4-20, CC 3-124, CC Right mouse button shortcuts, TT 7-23
3-251, CC 3-253CC 3-254, CC 3-257CC Viewing details of a certificate licensing manag-
3-258, TT 6-8, TT 6-12 er request, TT 7-18
MAWI1x, CC 3-130, CC 3-248, CC 3-253, CC Workflow, TT 7-2
3-255, CC 3-257 MCC1X, PM 4-32
Maximum Value, Core 9-39Core 9-40, Core MCC1x, CC 3-130, CC 3-248, CC 3-253, CC
9-50 3-255, CC 3-257, CC 3-259
MCC, Core 4-5, Core 4-7, Core 4-9, Core MCCCE, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76,
4-14, Core 4-20, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-84Core 9-85
Core 9-76, Core 9-82, Core 9-84Core MCCce, PM 4-3PM 4-4, PM 4-15, PM 4-26,
9-85, Core 9-87, CC 3-130CC 3-131, CC PM 4-29, PM 4-31PM 4-32
3-251, CC 3-253CC 3-254, CC 3-257CC MCP, Core 4-6
3-258, TT 6-8, PM 4-3, PM 4-15, PM 4-26, MCP Card, CC 3-112
PM 4-29, PM 4-31PM 4-32 MCP-S Toolbox, Core 13-1, Core 13-5, Core
MCC Channel Certification 13-13, CC 3-214, CC 3-299, CC 3-304
Adding new Container file, TT 7-17 MDM, Core 4-23, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core
Capabilities, TT 7-1 9-56, Core 9-76, Core 9-82, Core 9-85, PM
Cloning a window, TT 7-6 4-4, PM 4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-29, PM 4-32
History window MDMXC, PM 4-3
Actions menu, TT 7-22 Mean Error Rate, Core 9-38
Applications menu, TT 7-22 Measure, CC 4-81
File menu, TT 7-21 Measurement, PM 4-1PM 4-3, PM 4-7, PM
Filtering data, TT 7-10 4-14PM 4-16, PM 4-21, PM 4-25PM
Help menu, TT 7-22 4-27
View menu, TT 7-21 Measurement types, Core 9-2, Core 9-7
Installing new licenses, TT 7-16 Measurements Table, PM 4-6PM 4-7
Interfaces, TT 7-4 Message Register (MR), Admin 8-11
Invoking Message, Download System, TT 6-2, TT
Application Launcher, TT 7-3 6-18TT 6-19, TT 6-33, TT 6-61TT 6-64,
Command Line, TT 7-3 TT 6-71TT 6-72, TT 6-74TT 6-75
Launching PM Reports, TT 7-19

Master Index M-M
MIB, Admin 8-5, Admin 8-7Admin 8-9, Ad- MM, Link to BTS, CC 3-139
min 8-14, Admin 8-17, Admin 8-21 MO Data, CC 3-219, CC 3-300
Minimize Service Impact option, TT 6-9, TT Mobile Status Information, Core 9-88
6-25, TT 6-69, TT 6-72 Mobile Wireless Fault Mediator, Admin 8-21
Minimum Value, Core 9-10, Core 9-39Core Mode, Schedule, TT 6-9, TT 6-70, TT 6-73TT
9-40, Core 9-50 6-74, TT 6-80
MinMax, Core 9-9Core 9-10 model_daily_avg, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-36
MLPPPBUNDLE, CC 3-137, CC 3-253 model_res, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-37
MLS, Core 4-7, Core 4-21, CC 3-221, CC model_status, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-38
3-224CC 3-225, CC 3-227, CC 3-232CC Modem Frame, CC 3-33
3-236, CC 3-238CC 3-239, CC 3-244CC Modem Ports, CC 3-108, CC 3-112
3-247, CC 3-260, CC 3-262 Modem Shelf, CC 3-33, CC 3-135
MLS Links, CC 3-225, CC 3-234CC 3-235 Modems, IWU, CC 3-108, CC 3-112, CC
Devices not under OMCR Management, CC 3-208CC 3-210
3-225, CC 3-233 Monitored information, TT 6-6, TT 6-9TT
EDGERTR, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC 6-10, TT 6-14, TT 6-54TT 6-56
3-237CC 3-238, CC 3-248CC 3-249, Monitored values, Compare with thresholds, Core
CC 3-251, CC 3-253CC 3-254 9-2, Core 9-7, Core 9-9Core 9-10, Core
General, CC 3-166, CC 3-226, CC 3-229, 9-12
CC 3-232CC 3-235, CC 3-262 Monitoring
LWRTR, CC 3-225, CC 3-233, CC 3-235, Remote. See WAP for UNO, Chapter 13, Core
CC 3-260CC 3-262 Features
MLS Trunks, CC 3-225, CC 3-233CC Remote. See Web Monitor, Chapter 7, Core Fea-
3-234 tures
MM, CC 3-164, CC 3-225, CC 3-233 MOSCAD, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, CC 3-213CC
OMCIP, CC 3-225, CC 3-231CC 3-233 3-219, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, Admin 2-9, Admin
OMCR, CC 3-225, CC 3-233, CC 3-236 8-4
PDSN, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC 3-246CC MOSCAD Relationships, CC 3-36, CC
3-247, CC 3-263CC 3-265 3-105CC 3-106
PSI, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC 3-239CC Breaking, CC 3-107CC 3-108
3-242 Establishing, CC 3-107
SDU, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC 3-187CC MOSCAD Site, CC 3-13, CC 3-31, CC
3-188, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC 3-105CC 3-108, CC 3-213CC 3-215, CC
3-243CC 3-244 3-299
VPU, CC 3-195CC 3-196, CC 3-200CC MOSCAD-BTS Relationship, CC 3-213
3-201, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC MOSCAD-MOSCAD Site Link, CC 3-13
3-245CC 3-246 Mouse Shortcuts, Core 11-64
MLS_PDSN_LINK, Core 4-7 Moving Average, Core 9-48, Core 9-52Core
MLS_PSI_LINK, Core 4-7 9-53, Core 9-67
MM, Core 9-83, Core 9-85, Core 9-87, Core MR, Admin 8-1, Admin 8-11Admin 8-12
9-89, PM 4-2, PM 4-30, PM 4-32 MS, Core 9-88
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-165 MSC, Core 9-88Core 9-89, CC 3-178
Icon, CC 3-30, CC 3-164, CC 3-216 MSCSPAN, CC 3-153CC 3-155, CC 3-158,
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-158 CC 3-161CC 3-162, CC 3-179
Status, CC 3-300 CBSC, Parent, CC 3-153, CC 3-155
Status Screen, CC 3-164 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-11
Utilization, CC 3-294CC 3-298 Icon, CC 3-158

N-O Master Index
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-158 Non-Redundant Indicator, CC 3-121

Link to Terrestrial Circuits, CC 3-155, CC Non-redundant pBTSs, TT 6-68TT 6-69, TT
3-162, CC 3-179 6-72, TT 6-74
Status Screen, CC 3-161CC 3-162 Non-standard version BTS, TT 6-1, TT 6-8, TT
MSCVPUSPAN, CC 3-165CC 3-166, CC 6-13TT 6-14, TT 6-29TT 6-30, TT 6-39,
3-195, CC 3-197CC 3-200 TT 6-44TT 6-45, TT 6-76
MSIP, CC 3-131, CC 3-138, CC 3-152, CC Not Available download status, TT 6-9, TT 6-11
3-177CC 3-179, CC 3-212, CC 3-258, CC NOT_EQUIPPED, TT 6-7, TT 6-12
3-260 Notifications, manual. See also Alarm Notification,
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-179 Alarm Manager
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-152, CC 3-177, Numerator, Core 9-8Core 9-9, Core 9-28,
CC 3-212 Core 9-30Core 9-31
Links to Other Status Screens, CC 3-179
O
XC, Parent, CC 3-177CC 3-178
OC-3, CC 3-202
Multicoupler, Core 4-7, Core 4-23
OC-3 Interface, CC 3-195, CC 3-202
Multi-Layer Switch. See MLS
OC-3 interfaces, CC 3-195
MWC, CC 3-222, CC 3-224, CC 3-227, CC
OCBANK, CC 3-195CC 3-196, CC
3-294CC 3-298
3-202CC 3-203
MWFM, Admin 8-21
OCPORT, CC 3-195, CC 3-202
OMC, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, Ad-
N min 2-9
NAK indicator, CC 3-8CC 3-12, CC 3-31, CC OMCIP, CC 3-139, CC 3-222, CC 3-224CC
3-51, CC 3-56 3-227, CC 3-230CC 3-233, CC 3-250, CC
Neighbor List, CC 3-25, CC 3-273CC 3-279, 3-254, CC 3-262, CC 3-265, CC 3-294CC
CC 3-283, CC 3-287, CC 3-293, CC 4-1, 3-298
CC 4-91 OMC-R, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, CC 3-156CC
Neighbors, BTS, CC 3-278CC 3-279 3-166, TT 2-9, TT 6-1, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT
NetPlan, CC 5-1 6-31TT 6-32, TT 6-78TT 6-79, PM 2-9,
Network, CC 4-13CC 4-15 Admin 2-9, Admin 8-3
Network Elements OMCR PLAT, CC 3-78CC 3-79, CC
Device Severity Indications, CC 3-216 3-156CC 3-158, CC 3-235CC 3-236
Environmental Icon, CC 3-131 OMCR Relay
Icons, CC 3-216 Acknowledged alarm, Core 12-6
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-131, CC 3-214 Filter, Core 12-1, Core 12-13Core 12-18
Link to Managed Objects, CC 3-216, CC Off, Undo, Core 12-19
3-218 Operational state, Core 12-5, Core 12-9, Core
MOSCAD Site, CC 3-214CC 3-215 12-17, Core 12-19Core 12-22
Status Screen, CC 3-215 Parameters, Core 12-8Core 12-9
Version, CC 3-219 Unacknowledged alarm, Core 12-6
Network interface, Admin 4-7 OMCR Relay Engine, Core 12-2Core 12-3,
Network Management, CC 3-44, CC 3-69 Core 12-5Core 12-6
Next/Last Load information, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT OMCR Relays, Core 12-1Core 12-22
6-14, TT 6-54TT 6-56 Online Help
NIS, Admin 4-12Admin 4-13 Invoking. See Invoking, Online Help
NMC, CC 3-266, CC 3-271 onstatall, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-16
Non-redundant cBTSs, TT 6-68, TT 6-75

Master Index P-P
OOS, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, CC 3-207, CC Packet Pipe, CC 3-225, CC 3-248CC 3-249,

3-210, CC 3-299, TT 6-7TT 6-8, TT 6-12, CC 3-254CC 3-255, CC 3-258CC 3-260
TT 6-69, TT 6-72 Packet Selector Interface. See PSI
OOS_AUTOMATIC, TT 6-7TT 6-8, TT 6-12, Palettes, CC 3-36, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC
TT 6-49 3-92CC 3-97, CC 3-99CC 3-100, CC
Open New Window view option, TT 6-36TT 3-102CC 3-104, CC 3-287, CC 3-290, CC
6-37 4-10, CC 4-20, CC 4-43CC 4-50, CC 4-70,
Operational state, OMCR Relay, Core 12-5, Core CC 4-72
12-9, Core 12-17, Core 12-19Core 12-22 Palettes. See Color, Command Center
Operations and Management Center for IP devices. Pan map, CC 4-55CC 4-56, CC 4-80, CC
See OMCIP 4-89
Operator, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-13, TT 6-39, Parameters, Core 4-5, Core 4-40Core 4-42,
TT 6-76, TT 6-79TT 6-80 Core 4-48
Options Alarm State, Core 12-4, Core 12-6
Fast, TT 6-9, TT 6-25, TT 6-69, TT 6-72 OMCR Relay, Core 12-8Core 12-9
Minimize Service Impact, TT 6-9, TT 6-25, TT Parity, Core 4-20
6-69, TT 6-72 pBTS, Core 9-85Core 9-86, CC 3-123, CC
Planned, TT 6-9, TT 6-69, TT 6-71 3-127, CC 3-129CC 3-132, CC 3-139CC
Preactivate, TT 6-8TT 6-10, TT 6-25, TT 3-141, CC 3-179, CC 3-253, CC 3-257, CC
6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76 3-294CC 3-298, TT 6-1, TT 6-7TT 6-10,
Quick Reboot, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-25, TT TT 6-25, TT 6-31TT 6-32, TT 6-68TT
6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76 6-70, TT 6-72, TT 6-74TT 6-76, PM
Rolling Upgrade, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-25, 4-32PM 4-33
TT 6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76 PCF, CC 3-165, CC 3-176, CC 3-183CC
Ordered sequence, Core 4-40Core 4-41 3-185, CC 3-240, CC 3-242, PM 4-29PM
OTA, Admin 8-11 4-31
Out Of Service, CC 3-32, CC 3-150, CC 3-163, PDSN, Core 4-7, Core 4-21, Core 9-82, Core
CC 3-207, CC 3-210, CC 3-299 9-84, Core 13-1, CC 3-45, CC 3-183CC
Out of Service, TT 6-7 3-184, CC 3-189CC 3-190, CC 3-225CC
Overall Statistics Report, Core 4-27, Core 3-226, CC 3-233, CC 3-246CC 3-247, CC
4-55Core 4-58, Core 4-61 3-263CC 3-273, CC 3-299CC 3-300
Overflow, Core 9-87, Core 9-93Core 9-94 Chassis, CC 3-266, CC 3-268CC 3-271
Overflow, Data, PM 4-20 PDSN cluster, CC 3-189CC 3-190, CC
Over-the-Air (OTA), Admin 8-11 3-265CC 3-267, CC 3-269CC 3-270, CC
3-272
Peg, Core 9-7, Core 9-37Core 9-40, Core
P 9-49, Core 9-55, Core 9-62Core 9-64,
PAC, PM 4-30, PM 4-33
Core 9-68, Core 9-75, Core 9-77, Core
PAC HO, Core 9-83
9-80, Core 9-86, Core 9-88, PM 4-1PM
Packet, TT 6-6TT 6-7, TT 6-32, TT 6-69, TT
4-4, PM 4-7, PM 4-14PM 4-16, PM
6-72
4-19PM 4-21, PM 4-25PM 4-27
packet, TT 6-1
peg_count, Core 9-8Core 9-9, Core 9-87
Packet Control Function. See PCF
Pending download status, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT
Packet Data, Core 9-82Core 9-84, PM
6-75TT 6-76
4-29PM 4-31 Percentage measurement type, Core 9-7Core
Packet Data Service Node. See PDSN
9-8, Core 9-28, Core 9-30, Core 9-87Core
Packet indicator, CC 3-156, CC 3-158, CC
9-89
3-160, CC 3-163

P-P Master Index
Performance Management JClass Chart output

Alarm Browser, Core 6-29 Chart View, Core 10-97
Alarm Manager, Core 3-5 Printing, Core 10-106
Troubleshooting. See Troubleshooting, PM, Di- Properties, Core 10-101
rectories and files Saving, Core 10-104
Performance Management (PM) Reports Spreadsheet, Core 10-103
Access requirements, Core 10-3 Zooming, Core 10-102
Categories, Core 10-111 Main window, description, Core 10-9Core
Collection Status Monitor 10-13
Change setup, Core 10-88 Monitoring, Core 10-83Core 10-94
Description, Core 10-85 Data transfer, Core 10-84
Layout, define, Core 10-88 Historical reports, Core 10-89Core 10-94
Description tables, Core 10-111Core 10-127 Setting up monitors, Core 10-84
Basic Reports, Core 10-112 Output, Core 10-49Core 10-52
CFC/CDL Reports, Core 10-120 Default format, Core 10-50
Event Summary Reports, Core 10-121 Defining, Core 10-47
Exception Reports, Core 10-122 File formats, Core 10-50
Graphical Reports, Core 10-123 Graphical. See JClass Chart, Core 10-51
Quality of Service Reports, Core 10-127 Viewing, Core 10-51
Utilization Reports, Core 10-125 Viewing, methods, Core 10-49
Descriptions and parameters, Core Viewing, procedure, Core 10-50
10-111Core 10-127 Removing reports from schedule, Core 10-55
Categories list, Core 10-111 Report Instances
Introduction, Core 10-111 Dialog, description, Core 10-61
Filters and mode, setting, Core 10-28 Retrying all failed, Core 10-62
Group mode, Core 10-65Core 10-82 Retrying execution by instance, Core 10-62
Group mode, setting, Core 10-65 Viewing output, Core 10-64
Group reports Report instances, Core 10-60Core 10-64
Adding to group, Core 10-74 Report parameters, Core 10-12, Core
Defining, reports in group, Core 10-73 10-31Core 10-32, Core 10-35, Core
Deleting groups, Core 10-75 10-53, Core 10-56, Core 10-61, Core
Group items, deleting, Core 10-82 10-64, Core 10-72Core 10-73, Core
Group items, editing, Core 10-71 10-91, Core 10-93, Core 10-95, Core
Group name, editing, Core 10-77 10-111
Schedule parameters, editing, Core 10-81 Reports Calendar
Schedule, editing, Core 10-78 Comparing reports, Core 10-95Core 10-96
Scheduling, Core 10-73 Invoking, Core 10-89
Viewing, Core 10-71, Core 10-76 Viewing by date, Core 10-91
Historical reports, viewing. See Monitoring, His- Viewing output, Core 10-94
torical reports, Core 10-91 Viewing report parameters, Core 10-93
Interval, data collection, Core 10-95 Window, description, Core 10-89
Invoking, local Shortcut menus, Core 10-108Core 10-110
Application Launcher, Core 10-8 Single mode, setting, Core 10-28
Command Line, Core 10-8 Single reports
Invoking, remote Executing, Core 10-48
Command Line, Core 10-7 Retrying, Core 10-59
Web Browser, Core 10-5

Master Index P-P
Schedule Report Execution dialog box, Core PM statistics, PM 4-23PM 4-24

10-30Core 10-33 PM Statistics Graphs, Core 9-2, Core 9-14,
Stopping, Core 10-58 Core 9-18, Core 9-20, Core 9-26, Core
Viewing schedule setup, Core 10-56 9-54, Core 9-66Core 9-67, CC 3-274, CC
Single reports mode, Core 10-29Core 10-64 3-276, CC 3-279CC 3-281, CC 3-283, CC
Single reports, scheduling, Core 10-34 3-285, CC 3-287, CC 3-293, PM 4-2, PM
Output/destination, Core 10-47 4-8PM 4-9, PM 4-23PM 4-24
Report parameters, Core 10-35 24HourClock. See PM Statistics Graphs, Graph-
Schedule mode, Core 10-40 ical display, configuring view
Selecting report, Core 10-33 General description, purposes, PM 3-2
Time period, Core 10-39 Graphical display, configuring, PM 3-22PM
Status colors, Core 10-4 3-26
Summary tables Legend, PM 3-24
Default properties, setup, Core 10-26 Grid. See Graphical display configuring,View
Defining properties, Core 10-21Core Invoking
10-27 Application launcher, PM 3-3
Table properties dialog, description, Core Command line, PM 3-3
10-21 Other UNO applications, PM 3-28
Performance Management alarms, Core 9-4, Legend
Core 9-6 Description, PM 3-24
Performance Management Thresholding concepts, Graph show/hide options, PM 3-25
Core 9-2Core 9-14 License requirements. See License requirements
Performance Management. See Management Main window
Modes Description, PM 3-6
Phase information, TT 6-10 Menu options, PM 3-7
PKTBTSCON, CC 3-136CC 3-138, CC 3-253 Main window, description, PM 3-4
PKTIF, CC 3-152, CC 3-175CC 3-176, CC Menu shortcuts, PM 3-26
3-240, CC 3-242 Multiple graphs, viewing, PM 3-25
PKTIF TER Function indicator, CC 3-175 Printing, PM 3-27
PKTPCF, CC 3-176, CC 3-240, CC 3-242 Sampling period setup
PKTPIPE, CC 3-131, CC 3-253CC 3-254, Date Setup dialog box, description, PM 3-14
CC 3-257CC 3-260, CC 3-299 Date Setup dialog box, invoking, PM 3-13
PKTSEL, CC 3-176, CC 3-240, CC 3-242 Date, selecting, changing, PM 3-16
Planned download status, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT N Days back from... tab, PM 3-17
6-69, TT 6-71, TT 6-76 Selected Dates tab, PM 3-15
Planned option, TT 6-9, TT 6-69, TT 6-71 Selected Weekdays tab, PM 3-19
Platform ID, CC 3-44CC 3-45 Saving, PM 3-27
PM Exception Data. See also PM Statistics Source
Graphs, Source types Default, PM 3-9, PM 3-28, PM 3-30, PM
PM Measurements & Alarms, Core 9-1Core 3-32
9-97, PM 4-5PM 4-11, PM 4-13, PM Error messages, PM 3-12
4-24PM 4-25 Measurements, PM 3-6, PM 3-10, PM 3-22,
Invoking PM Statistics Graphs from, Core 9-67 PM 3-24
Invoking. See Invoking, PM Measurements & Menu shortcuts, PM 3-26
Alarms Setup, PM 3-10PM 3-12
PM Measurements. See also PM Statistics Graphs, Types, PM 3-6, PM 3-9
Source

P-P Master Index
Tooltip. See PM Statistics Graphs, Graphical Print, Core 4-26Core 4-29, Core 4-58Core
display configuring 4-59, TT 6-13TT 6-17, TT 6-31TT 6-32,
View menu TT 6-39, TT 6-46TT 6-47, TT 6-51TT
Description, PM 3-23 6-52
Options, use, PM 3-22 Print details, TT 5-39
Statistical values, PM 3-8, PM 3-23 Print Dialog Box
Viewing, in other UNO applications, PM 3-3 RFDS Reports, TT 4-15
Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser, PM 3-28 Printer
Command Center, PM 3-32 local
PM Measurements & Alarms and Long Term connecting, Admin 5-1, Admin 5-4
Storage, PM 3-30 disconnecting, Admin 5-8
XAxis labels. See PM Statistics Graphs, Graph- recommended hardware, Admin 5-2
ical display, configuring view remote
PM Thresholding. See also PM Statistics Graphs, connecting, Admin 5-3
Source types disconnecting, Admin 5-8
PM-based data, PM 4-2PM 4-4 requirements, Admin 5-2
pmt_alarm, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-39 Printing
pmt_counter, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-40 Alarm Browser
pmt_device, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-41 Alarm Summary, Core 6-21
pmt_history, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-42 Selected alarms, Core 6-20
PN Offsets Alarm Manager
List, CC 3-283CC 3-285 Alarm Details, Core 3-99
Status Screen, CC 3-285CC 3-287 Alarm Summary, Core 3-18
Invoking, CC 3-285 Selected alarms, Core 3-17
PM Statistics Graphs from, CC 3-287 Filter Builder
Site Information from, CC 3-287 All Filters, Core 11-11
Ports, IWU, CC 3-109, CC 3-211 Selected filters, Core 11-10
Power, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-12 Historical Alarm Reports, Core 7-13
Power Amplifier, CC 3-133, CC 3-140 OMCR Relays, Core 12-11
Power Distribution Cage, Core 4-16, Core Progress indicator, CC 3-5
4-21Core 4-22 Progress, Software download, TT 6-1, TT 6-9, TT
Power Distribution Shelf, Core 4-16, Core 6-11, TT 6-78
4-21Core 4-22 Propagation image, CC 5-1CC 5-2, CC 5-4,
Powerdown Procedure, Admin 4-12 CC 5-13, CC 5-23CC 5-25, CC 5-28CC
PPP, Core 4-7, Core 4-20 5-33
Preactivate option, TT 6-8TT 6-10, TT 6-25, Proprietary
TT 6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76 Device State Attributes, CC 3-21, CC 3-219,
Pre-check, Download, TT 6-2 CC 3-299
Pre-Download Version, TT 6-8, TT 6-39, TT Fault Management. See Management Modes
6-80 IWU Color Palette, CC 3-92, CC 3-94
Preparing Devices download phase, TT 6-10 Telephone Color Palette, CC 3-92, CC 3-94
Preselector, Core 4-7, Core 4-21Core 4-22 Protocols, Admin 8-1, Admin 8-5, Admin 8-16
Pressure, alarm, Core 4-1 Proximity. See Devices, Proximity
Preview rules, TT 5-6, TT 5-39 prt_attr, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20, Admin
11-24
prt_children, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20, Admin
11-24

Master Index Q-R
prt_ids, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-25 Redundancy. See BTS, Redundancy

prt_moc, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-27 Redundant devices, CC 3-33, CC 3-112, CC
prt_parent, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20, Admin 3-135, CC 3-194, CC 3-300
11-28 Refresh, Core 4-26, Core 4-61, CC 3-61, CC
prt_tn, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20, Admin 3-176, CC 3-219
11-29 Software versions, TT 6-31TT 6-33, TT
prt_topo_store, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-29 6-70TT 6-71
pseudo real-time, PM 6-2 Topo, TT 6-2
PSI, Core 4-7, Core 4-21, CC 3-152, CC Refresh, CLI command, CC 4-92
3-175CC 3-177, CC 3-225CC 3-226, CC Relay Number, TT 5-3, TT 5-29TT 5-31, TT
3-233, CC 3-239CC 3-243, CC 3-266CC 5-33TT 5-36
3-267, CC 3-299 Relay/Sensor, TT 5-7, TT 5-15TT 5-16
PSI card, CC 3-152, CC 3-175CC 3-177 Relay_Mode variable, Core 12-4
PSTN, Admin 8-6 Relays
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Ad- BTS Device, CC 3-123, CC 3-294CC 3-298
min 8-6 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-34, CC
Purge, PM 4-19 3-124
Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-115, CC 3-131
OMCR, CC 3-32
Q Status Screen, CC 3-123CC 3-124
Quality of Service, Core 9-3Core 9-6
Reload, CC 3-304, TT 6-1, TT 6-14, TT 6-65,
Quality, alarm, Core 4-1Core 4-2
TT 6-76TT 6-77, TT 6-80
Quantity, alarm, Core 4-2
Remote host, Core 13-1, Core 13-4Core 13-5,
Queries, CC 4-2, CC 4-52, CC 4-57, CC
Core 13-10Core 13-13
4-62CC 4-63, CC 4-71CC 4-74, CC 4-78,
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Admin 8-4
CC 5-33
Report, TT 6-14, TT 6-20, TT 6-42TT 6-54,
Quick Reboot option, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-25,
TT 6-66, TT 6-81
TT 6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76
Report sources, Core 9-75Core 9-79
Report types, Core 9-77
R Reports, Core 4-55Core 4-57, Core
RA, Core 9-83Core 9-84, PM 4-30PM 4-31 4-59Core 4-61, Core 9-75Core 9-80, CC
Radio Access Network (RAN), Admin 8-16 3-273CC 3-293, PM 4-2, PM 4-8PM 4-9,
Radio Frequency Diagnostics System. See RFDS PM 4-15PM 4-16, PM 4-20PM 4-28
Radio Interface, Core 9-88 Alarm Browser
Radio Resource, Core 9-88 Alarm Details report, Core 6-40
RAN, Admin 8-16 Alarm Reports, Core 6-55
Random sequence, Core 4-40Core 4-41 Alarm Manager
Range table, CC 3-96CC 3-99, CC 3-101CC Alarm Details, Core 3-60, Core 3-64Core
3-102 3-65, Core 6-43Core 6-44
RBTSSPAN, CC 3-130, CC 3-136CC 3-138 Alarms, Core 3-76
Rebooting UNO Manager, Admin 4-11 Command Center
Record types, Core 9-2, Core 9-81 Assign Maps to, CC 3-83
Recovery, fault, Core 4-1 Configuration, CC 3-36
Redundancy, CC 3-121, CC 3-135, CC 3-224, Carrier List, CC 3-36, CC 3-273
CC 3-230 Neighbor List, CC 3-36, CC 3-273
Non-Redundant indicator, CC 3-121 PN Offset List, CC 3-36, CC 3-273
Severity, CC 3-294CC 3-298

R-R Master Index
Statistics, CC 3-36 Resource Allocation, CC 3-139, CC 3-165, CC

BTSs 3-183, CC 3-185, CC 3-194CC 3-195, CC
Groups, CC 3-287, CC 3-289CC 3-197
3-290, CC 3-292 Resource group, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC
Sectors, CC 3-287, CC 3-292 3-194CC 3-196
Carriers, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC Restore setup, Admin 4-7Admin 4-8
3-289CC 3-290, CC 3-292 Restoring a Full Backup
CBSC, CC 3-292 setup, Admin 4-8
Cell Navigator Generation of, CC Restoring Informix Data, Admin 4-11
Restoring UNO, Admin 4-7
3-46CC 3-48
Resulting action, Core 4-38, Core 4-40, Core
Colors, CC 3-92, CC 3-95, CC 3-273
4-48, Core 4-52Core 4-53
Example, CC 3-292 RF, Core 4-15, Core 4-22, Core 9-87Core
Generate, CC 3-288CC 3-291 9-89, CC 3-61, CC 3-288
List, CC 3-104, CC 3-289 RFDS, Core 4-9, Core 4-22Core 4-23, CC
OMCR, CC 3-292 3-122, CC 3-125CC 3-126, CC 3-131CC
Palettes, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC 3-95, 3-132, CC 3-299
CC 3-97, CC 3-103CC 3-104, CC Activity Log, Displaying, TT 3-24
3-287, CC 3-290 Agents
Percentage, CC 3-292 Analog, TT 3-1
PM Statistics Graphs Generation from, Digital, TT 3-1
Carrier, TT 3-48
CC 3-293
CDMA
Site Information, CC 3-293
Tests, TT 3-8
Type, CC 3-47CC 3-48, CC 3-104, CDMA, Tests, TT 3-8
CC 3-288CC 3-290 Displaying
GIS Activity Log, TT 3-24
Palettes, CC 4-10, CC 4-20, CC 4-44, CC Main Dialog Box Layout Components, TT
4-49CC 4-50, CC 4-70, CC 4-72 3-26
Statistics, CC 4-10, CC 4-44, CC 4-48CC Test Execution Summary Table, TT 3-26
4-49, CC 4-70, CC 4-72 Exclusion Time Periods
Output. See Performance Management (PM) Re- Analog, Defining, TT 3-60
ports, output Defining
Request Name, TT 6-9, TT 6-13, TT 6-39, TT Non-Working Day, TT 3-61
6-69TT 6-70, TT 6-79TT 6-80 Working Day, TT 3-62
Request Specification, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT
Fault Management, TT 3-9
6-68, TT 6-70TT 6-72, TT 6-74, TT 6-77
Fault Management Mode, TT 3-9
Requirements
Invoking. See Invoking, RFDS
Hardware, Core 2-12, CC 2-12, TT 2-12, PM
Labels
2-12, Admin 2-12
Default, TT 3-22
Software, Core 2-12, CC 2-12, TT 2-12, PM
User Defined, TT 3-22
2-12, Admin 2-12
Linearity testing, Core 4-23
Reset, CC 3-28, CC 3-184, CC 3-196
Main Dialog Box, TT 3-11
Reset rule statistics, Core 4-27, Core 4-56
Layout Components, TT 3-26
Reset Software, CC 3-210
Test Execution Summary, TT 3-12
Test Schedule, TT 3-11

Master Index R-R
Modifying RFDS Reports

Test Request, TT 3-42 Agents
Test Schedule, TT 3-30 Analog, SwitchMATE, TT 4-1
Printing, TT 3-15 Digital (CDMA), TT 4-1
Receive Accuracy, Core 4-23 Generating, TT 4-14
Restriction of testing to a defined period of time, Invoking. See Invoking, RFDS Reports
TT 3-3 Layout Sort Criteria, TT 4-9
Sector, TT 3-47 RFDS Tests, CC 3-125CC 3-126, CC 3-299
Sorting Test Schedules, Core 3-87 RGLI, Core 4-5, Core 4-7Core 4-9, Core
Synchronizing, Agents, TT 3-59 4-23
Test Rolling Upgrade option, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT
Creation, Resuming, TT 3-58 6-25, TT 6-69, TT 6-72, TT 6-75TT 6-76
Cycle, TT 3-7 Router, CC 3-134CC 3-138, CC 3-221, CC
Execution Summary 3-225, CC 3-251, CC 3-253, CC 3-257
Completed Test, TT 3-38 Router BTS Span. See RBTSSPAN
Main Dialog Box, TT 3-12 Router cluster, CC 3-130, CC 3-135
Execution, Terminating, TT 3-39 Router group, CC 3-130, CC 3-136CC 3-138,
Measurements, TT 3-7 CC 3-251, CC 3-253, CC 3-257
Power Levels, Defining, TT 3-63 Routine Administration, Admin 4-1Admin 4-12
Result Reports, TT 3-3 Row colors, Administration Table, TT 6-11TT
Schedule 6-12, TT 6-67
Main Dialog Box, TT 3-11 RPM, Core 4-16, Core 4-20, Core 4-22
Modifying, TT 3-30 RTU, Admin 8-4
Suspension, TT 3-3 Rule Activity Report, Core 4-27, Core
Target, TT 3-7 4-55Core 4-56, Core 4-59Core 4-61
Test Request Rule definition, Core 4-3, Core 4-27Core
Definition, TT 3-3 4-29, Core 4-33, Core 4-38, Core 4-40,
Name Field, TT 3-28, TT 3-35, TT 3-44 Core 4-42, Core 4-45, Core 4-48, Core
Processing, TT 3-3 4-51, Core 4-53
Scheduling, TT 3-3 Rule element, Core 4-38Core 4-53
Selection, TT 3-28 Add element, Core 4-45
Setting Up, TT 3-40 Additional conditions, Core 4-43
Types, TT 3-35, TT 3-44 Advanced options, Core 4-42
Unscheduling, TT 3-3 Alarm number, Core 4-42
Viewing, TT 3-32 Define filter, Core 4-42
Test Types, TT 3-8 Forward alarms, Core 4-43
Tests Response to "Clear", Core 4-43
Scheduling, TT 3-53 Sequence, Core 4-40Core 4-41
Unscheduling, TT 3-31 Rule name, Default correlation rules, Core
Viewing, TT 3-50 4-5Core 4-7
Thresholds Rule parameters, Core 4-40Core 4-41
Analog Measurement, TT 3-62 Rule Preview, Core 4-26, Core 4-29
Monitoring, Analog Measurement, TT 3-60 Print, Core 4-26, Core 4-29
Turnkey pass/failure determination, TT 3-3 Rule statistics, reset, Core 4-27, Core 4-56
Rules
Alarm Notification rules, Admin 6-10, Admin
6-42

S-S Master Index
Rules Table, Core 4-5, Core 4-26, Core 4-28, SDU, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76, Core
Core 4-30Core 4-31, Core 4-33Core 9-82Core 9-83, CC 3-157, CC 3-165CC
4-37, Core 4-53Core 4-56, Core 4-59, 3-166, CC 3-180CC 3-191, CC 3-225CC
Core 4-61 3-226, CC 3-243CC 3-244, CC 3-266, CC
Configuration, Core 4-28 3-269, CC 3-272CC 3-273, PM 4-3, PM
Delete rule, Core 4-54 4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-29PM 4-30
Export from, Core 4-34Core 4-35 SDU-MM link, CC 3-185
Import to, Core 4-30Core 4-31, Core 4-33 SDU-PDSN cluster, CC 3-183CC 3-184
Print, Core 4-28 Search, TT 5-19TT 5-20, TT 5-22TT 5-23,
Refresh, Core 4-26 TT 5-33TT 5-34, TT 5-36, TT 6-13, TT
Shortcuts, Core 4-37, Core 4-55, Core 4-61 6-20, TT 6-22TT 6-30, TT 6-39TT 6-40,
Rules Table, BTS Relays, TT 5-1, TT 5-6TT TT 6-46TT 6-47, TT 6-51TT 6-52
5-7, TT 5-9TT 5-18, TT 5-24TT 5-27, TT SECTOR, PM 4-3
5-29, TT 5-37TT 5-39 Sector, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76, Core
Rules type, Core 4-31, Core 4-35 9-82, Core 9-85Core 9-87, PM 4-3PM
Rules, Alarm ID of default correlation, Core 4-4, PM 4-15, PM 4-23, PM 4-26, PM 4-29,
4-5Core 4-7 PM 4-32PM 4-33
Rules, Alarm text of default correlation, Core Sectors, BTS, CC 3-29, CC 3-95, CC 3-139,
4-5Core 4-7 CC 3-274CC 3-276, CC 3-278, CC
Rules, Current list of BTS Relay, TT 5-17 3-280CC 3-281, CC 3-283, CC 3-285, CC
Rules, Device type of default correlation, Core 3-287, CC 3-292CC 3-293, CC 4-4, CC
4-5Core 4-7 4-18CC 4-19, CC 4-70, CC 4-78, CC
Rules, device-independent, TT 5-7TT 5-8, TT 4-87CC 4-89, CC 4-91
5-10TT 5-12 Security switch, Tape drive, Admin 4-2
Rules, Rule name of default correlation, Core Select Agent, TT 6-33
4-5Core 4-7 Select Match, TT 6-13, TT 6-39, TT 6-41TT
run_all.sh, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-11 6-42, TT 6-46, TT 6-48TT 6-49, TT 6-51,
TT 6-53TT 6-54, TT 6-65TT 6-67, TT
S 6-79TT 6-81
Select Matches, TT 6-24, TT 6-28, TT 6-30
SC, Core 13-1
Selection and Distribution Function. See SDF
SCADA, Admin 8-4
Selection and Distribution Unit. See SDU
SCCP, Core 9-88
Sensor, TT 5-7, TT 5-15TT 5-16
SCH, PM 4-32
Sensors, CC 3-122CC 3-124, CC 3-131, CC
Schedule Mode, TT 6-9, TT 6-70TT 6-71, TT
3-179, CC 3-184, CC 3-191, CC 3-196, CC
6-73TT 6-74, TT 6-80 3-203CC 3-204
Scheduled download status, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT
Server, CLI command, CC 4-92
6-76
Setup, Restore, Admin 4-7Admin 4-8
Scheduling downloads, TT 6-67TT 6-74
Severity, Core 4-39, Core 4-44Core 4-45,
Scheduling information, TT 6-34
Core 4-47, Core 4-51, Core 9-5Core 9-7,
Scroll, CC 3-4, CC 3-7CC 3-8, CC 3-98, CC
Core 9-37, Core 9-39, Core 9-41, Core
3-101, CC 3-121, CC 3-175, CC 3-221 9-43Core 9-44, Core 9-51, Core 9-97, TT
SDF, CC 3-165, CC 3-183CC 3-185
5-1TT 5-3, TT 5-29TT 5-30, TT 5-33TT
SDM. See Software Download Manager
5-34, TT 5-36
Severity Counter, CC 3-8CC 3-9
Severity Indicator, CC 3-8CC 3-9

Master Index S-S
Short Message Service Center (SMSC), Admin Cell Names, CC 3-65

8-11 Invoking from the Command Center, CC 3-303
Shortcuts, Core 6-64Core 6-65 Invoking. See Invoking, Software Download
Alarm Browser, Core 6-36, Core 6-42 Manager
Alarm Manager, Core 3-62, Core 3-64Core Scheduling downloads, TT 6-67TT 6-74
3-65, Core 3-84Core 3-85, Core Software Download Manager Pre-checks, Admin
6-43Core 6-44 12-13
CBSC Software Loaded download phase, TT 6-10
Spreadsheet Software Reset, Force, CC 3-210
Historical Display, PM 5-34 Software Version, CC 3-45, CC 3-304
SAR Monitor, PM 5-34 Software Version Table, TT 6-31TT 6-33, TT
CFC 6-71
System Monitor Statistic Screen, PM 6-54 Software versions. See Versions
Filter Builder, Core 11-64 Solaris, Admin 4-8
GIS, CC 4-89 Solstice MIS, CC 3-274
Carrier Screen, CC 4-91 SONET Processing Function. See SPF
Device Screen, CC 4-90 Sort, TT 6-13, TT 6-20TT 6-22, TT 6-39TT
Map Screen, CC 4-89 6-40
Sector Screen, CC 4-91 Source, fault, Core 4-2Core 4-3
MCC Channel Certification SPAN, CC 3-169
Right mouse button shortcuts, TT 7-23 Device Severity Indications, CC 3-10CC
RFDS 3-11
Test Execution Summary, TT 3-67 IC, CC 3-160, CC 3-179
Test Schedule, TT 3-67 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-36, CC 3-169
Software Download Manager MSC, CC 3-11, CC 3-36, CC 3-153, CC
Administration Table, TT 6-79 3-179
History Table, TT 6-80 Spectrum, CC 4-46CC 4-47
Shortcuts. See Menu shortcuts, PM Statistics SPF, CC 3-194
Graphs Split Mode indicator, CC 3-157, CC 3-164
SIF, Core 4-7, Core 4-22Core 4-23 SPROC, CC 3-183CC 3-184, CC 3-194, CC
Since (Load Info), TT 6-9, TT 6-24, TT 6-26TT 3-196
6-27 SQL, Core 9-1, Core 9-7Core 9-8, Core
Site, CC 3-166CC 3-168 9-28, Core 9-30Core 9-31, Core 9-94
Sleeping cell, Core 9-87 Standard Deviation, Core 9-10Core 9-13,
SMSC, Admin 8-11 Core 9-48, Core 9-52Core 9-53
SNMP, Core 13-11, Core 13-13, CC 3-1, CC Standards, TMN, Core 2-1, CC 2-1, TT 2-1, PM
3-34, CC 3-60, CC 3-105, CC 3-108, CC 2-1, Admin 2-1
3-112, CC 3-205, CC 3-265, Admin 8-1, Ad- Start Time, TT 6-9, TT 6-13, TT 6-24, TT
min 8-5Admin 8-7, Admin 8-12, Admin 6-26TT 6-27, TT 6-35TT 6-36, TT 6-70,
8-18 TT 6-73TT 6-74, TT 6-80
SNMP architecture, Admin 9-1Admin 9-4 Start, CLI command, CC 4-92
SNMP based devices, integration, Core 2-9, CC Stat, CLI command, CC 4-92
2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, Admin 2-9 State colors, CC 3-36, CC 3-92CC 3-94, CC
Software Download Manager, CC 3-65, CC 3-120, CC 3-131CC 3-133, CC 3-138, CC
3-69, CC 3-299, CC 3-303CC 3-304, CC 3-140CC 3-141, CC 3-144, CC 3-152, CC
4-90, TT 6-1TT 6-81 3-154CC 3-155, CC 3-157, CC 3-159, CC
Cell Groups, CC 3-69 3-161, CC 3-163, CC 3-165, CC 3-169, CC

S-S Master Index
State colors, cont., 3-173CC 3-174, CC 3-179, Cell, CC 3-142CC 3-144

CC 3-181, CC 3-188, CC 3-192, CC 3-199, Cell Group, CC 5-25
CC 3-201CC 3-202, CC 3-210, CC 3-212, Cell Sites, CC 5-25
CC 3-219, CC 3-221, CC 3-226, CC 3-229, Cells, CC 4-16
EMX, CC 3-145CC 3-148, CC 4-15
CC 3-232, CC 3-234, CC 3-236, CC 3-238,
FEP, CC 3-149CC 3-152
CC 3-240, CC 3-242, CC 3-244, CC
IWU, CC 3-204
3-246CC 3-247, CC 3-249, CC 3-254, CC MOSCAD, CC 3-213CC 3-219
3-257, CC 3-260, CC 3-262, CC 3-264, CC MSCSPAN, CC 3-153CC 3-155
3-269, CC 3-271CC 3-272, CC 4-42 Network, CC 4-13CC 4-15, CC 5-25
State Monitor. See Web Monitor, State Manage- OMC-R, CC 3-156CC 3-166
ment Tab PDSN, CC 3-265CC 3-273
State, OMCR Relay, Core 12-1, Core 12-3, SDU, CC 3-180CC 3-191
Core 12-9, Core 12-17, Core 12-19Core Site, CC 3-166CC 3-168
12-22 SPAN, CC 3-169
Statistical alarming, PM 4-25 TRKGRP, CC 3-170CC 3-173
Statistical method, PM 4-1 VPU, CC 3-192CC 3-204
Statistical Record, Core 9-17, Core 9-20, Core XC, CC 3-173CC 3-179
9-29Core 9-31, Core 9-33, Core Status, Component Summary, TT 6-8, TT 6-12
9-36Core 9-40, Core 9-47, Core 9-49, Status, Software Download, TT 6-1, TT 6-6, TT
Core 9-55, Core 9-62Core 9-64, Core 6-9TT 6-13, TT 6-21TT 6-22, TT 6-39, TT
9-75, Core 9-77, Core 9-79Core 9-82 6-54, TT 6-56, TT 6-70, TT 6-74, TT 6-76,
Statistical record, PM 4-9, PM 4-14PM 4-16, TT 6-79TT 6-80
PM 4-25PM 4-27, PM 4-29 Failure, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT 6-11TT 6-12
Statistical value types, Core 9-67 Loading, TT 6-8TT 6-11, TT 6-75TT 6-76
Statistics, Core 4-27, Core 4-55Core 4-61, Not Available, TT 6-9, TT 6-11
PM 4-1PM 4-2, PM 4-24, PM 4-29 Pending, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT 6-75TT 6-76
Statistics Report, CC 3-46CC 3-48, CC 3-95, Planned, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT 6-69, TT 6-71,
CC 3-103CC 3-104, CC 3-287CC 3-293, TT 6-76
CC 4-91 Scheduled, TT 6-9, TT 6-11, TT 6-76
Statistics, PM, PM 4-23PM 4-24 Success, TT 6-6, TT 6-9, TT 6-11TT 6-12
Status ADD, CC 3-300 Stop, CLI command, CC 4-92
Status MM, CC 3-196, CC 3-300 STRAU, Core 9-88
Status NE, CC 3-177, CC 3-184, CC 3-186, Subdevices, CC 3-51, CC 3-55
CC 3-190, CC 3-196, CC 3-198CC 3-199, Success download status, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT
CC 3-203, CC 3-300 6-9, TT 6-11TT 6-12, TT 6-49
Status PHY, CC 3-300 Summary Bar, CC 3-6
Status Screen Hierarchy, CC 3-1, CC 3-6, CC Cell Groups, CC 3-69
3-14, CC 3-16CC 3-20, CC 3-23CC 3-24, Device State, CC 3-7, CC 3-32
CC 3-28, CC 3-39, CC 3-116 Invoke Status Screens from, CC 3-115CC
Status screens 3-116, CC 3-174
AN, CC 3-220CC 3-265 Save Layout, CC 3-8, CC 3-89CC 3-90
BSLK, CC 3-117CC 3-120 Setup, CC 3-8, CC 3-36, CC 3-60, CC 3-83,
BTS, CC 3-120CC 3-141, CC 4-16 CC 3-87CC 3-90
BTS Group, CC 4-17CC 4-18, CC 5-25 Summary Bar Area, CC 3-5, CC 3-7CC 3-8
BTS Sites, CC 5-25 Summary Squares in, CC 3-10
Carriers, CC 4-18CC 4-19 View, CC 3-37, CC 3-44, CC 3-57

Master Index T-T
Summary Squares, CC 3-6, CC 3-8, CC 3-10 Tape location, Admin 4-4, Admin 4-6, Admin
Cell Groups Display in, CC 3-69 4-9Admin 4-11
Configuration in Summary Bar, CC 3-8, CC Default, Admin 4-4
3-87, CC 3-89CC 3-91 Tapes, Supported
Device State Indication in, CC 3-34, CC 3-302 Capacity, Admin 4-2
Display of, CC 3-4CC 3-5, CC 3-7CC 3-8 Types, Admin 4-2
Invoking TCH, Core 9-88
Alarm Browser from, CC 3-303 TCM, Core 13-1, Core 13-11Core 13-13
Alarm Manager from, CC 3-302 TCM, IWU, Core 13-12, CC 3-205, CC 3-269,
MOSCAD MCP-S Toolbox from, CC 3-304 CC 3-271, CC 3-300, CC 3-305
Shortcuts from, CC 3-293CC 3-298 TCP/IP, Admin 8-12Admin 8-13
Software Download Manager from, CC Telecommunication Management Network
3-303CC 3-304 (TMN). See also Standards, TMN
Status Screens from, CC 3-5, CC 3-14, CC Telnet, Core 13-1, Core 13-7, Core 13-12, CC
3-115CC 3-116 3-227, CC 3-250, CC 3-255, CC 3-262, CC
Link Failure Mechanism, CC 3-13 3-265, CC 3-300, TT 6-13, TT 6-78TT 6-79
List, CC 3-88 TERCKTS. See Terrestrial Circuits
Shortcut Menu, CC 3-9 Terminus, CC 3-211CC 3-212
Summary Bar Terminus, BTS, CC 3-131, CC 3-254, CC
Add to, CC 3-8, CC 3-87, CC 3-89 3-258CC 3-260
Remove from, CC 3-8, CC 3-87, CC Terminus, EDGERTR, CC 3-258CC 3-259
3-89CC 3-90 Terminus, IWU, CC 3-212
Unknown indicator, CC 3-13 Terminus, MCC Card, CC 3-253
SuperCell, Admin 8-5, Admin 8-10, Admin Terminus, MCC or MAWI Card, CC 3-253, CC
8-22 3-257
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCA- Terminus, MLS, CC 3-244, CC 3-246
DA), Admin 8-4 Terminus, MM, CC 3-185, CC 3-197
Supported Tapes. See Tapes, Supported Terminus, Packet Pipe, CC 3-131, CC 3-260
Swap, CC 3-28, CC 3-300 Terminus, SDU, CC 3-165CC 3-166, CC
SwitchMATE, Admin 8-3 3-244
SwitchMate, Core 2-9, Core 13-1, Core 13-13, Terminus, VPU, CC 3-165CC 3-166, CC
CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM 2-9, Admin 2-9 3-246
System message, TT 6-2, TT 6-18TT 6-19, TT Terminus, XC, CC 3-211
6-33, TT 6-61TT 6-64, TT 6-71TT 6-72, Terrestrial Circuit, Core 9-88
TT 6-74TT 6-75 Terrestrial circuits, CC 3-153CC 3-156, CC
3-162, CC 3-179, CC 3-195
Terrestrial Resource, Core 9-88
T Test Subscriber Unit. See TSU
Table layout, TT 6-18, TT 6-54
Threshold scope, Core 9-9Core 9-10
Table Properties, TT 6-14, TT 6-17, TT 6-20, TT
Threshold types, Core 9-10, Core 9-12, Core
6-55TT 6-64
9-38
Tape Commands, Admin 4-2
Thresholds, Core 4-5Core 4-6, Core
Tape drive, Admin 4-2Admin 4-5, Admin
4-11Core 4-14, Core 4-16Core 4-18,
4-7Admin 4-11
Core 4-21Core 4-22, Core 4-39Core
Default, Admin 4-4
4-43, Core 4-45, Core 9-1Core 9-2, Core
Security switch, Admin 4-2
9-7, Core 9-9Core 9-12, Core 9-14, Core
Tape label, Admin 4-5Admin 4-6, Admin 4-10
9-18, Core 9-21, Core 9-35Core 9-38,

T-T Master Index
Thresholds, cont., Core 9-40Core 9-41, Core CiscoTier2 6509 Switch, Admin 10-72
9-43, Core 9-45Core 9-47, Core Compaq, Admin 10-57
9-50Core 9-51, Core 9-54, Core 9-56, Func RADIUS, Admin 10-78
Core 9-58Core 9-60, Core 9-69, Core IWU Circuit Data, Admin 10-2
IWU High Speed Packet Data, Admin 10-26
9-72, Core 9-76, Core 9-78, Core 9-81,
TRKCKTS. See Trunk Circuits
Core 9-90Core 9-93, Core 9-95, Core
TRKGRP, CC 3-170CC 3-173
9-97, PM 4-2, PM 4-7, PM 4-23PM 4-25 Troubleshooting
Average-Based Value, Core 9-12 Agents
Base Value, Core 9-12 Communication, Admin 12-32
Compare with Monitored values, Core 9-2 Devices not deleted, Admin 12-39
Compare with monitored values, Core 9-7, ID, Admin 12-36
Core 9-9Core 9-10, Core 9-12 Logs, Admin 12-37
Tier1, Admin 8-18, Admin 8-20 Not created, Admin 12-19
Tier2, Admin 8-18, Admin 8-20 Not deleted, Admin 12-21
Time, TT 6-9TT 6-10, TT 6-13, TT 6-24TT Processing, Admin 12-38
6-28, TT 6-35TT 6-41, TT 6-47, TT 6-52, Alarm Transfer, Admin 12-54
TT 6-70, TT 6-73TT 6-74, TT 6-76, TT Alarms
6-80, PM 4-1, PM 4-8PM 4-9, PM 4-21, Do not arrive, Admin 12-4Admin 12-5
PM 4-23PM 4-24, PM 4-30PM 4-31 On agents, Admin 12-32
Time limit, PM 4-1 Table, Admin 12-31
Time Threshold, Core 4-39Core 4-40, Core UNO DBSPACE, Admin 12-8
4-42Core 4-43 UNO DISK, Admin 12-7
Timeout, Core 9-88Core 9-89 UNO PROCESS, Admin 12-6
Toolbox, Core 13-1, Core 13-5, Core 13-13, BTSs do not appear, Admin 12-12
CC 3-214, CC 3-299, CC 3-304 CDL reports not generated, Admin 12-11
Toolbox, MOSCAD MCP-S, CC 3-214, CC Check BTS, Admin 12-13, Admin 12-15
3-299, CC 3-304 CMIP
Topo Database, CC 3-35 Configuration, Admin 12-35
Topo Refresh Configuration on manager, Admin 12-35
automatic topo_refresh Halt, Admin 12-47 Verification, Admin 12-33
run topo_refresh manually, Admin 12-47 Command Center
Topo refresh, TT 6-2 trace, Admin 12-30
topo_dict, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-30 unknown indicator, Admin 12-4
Total Control Manager, IWU, CC 3-205, CC cron jobs, Admin 12-13, Admin 12-18
3-269, CC 3-271, CC 3-300, CC 3-305 Date comparisons, Admin 12-30
Total Control Manager. See TCM Disk space available, Admin 12-43
Traffic, BTS, TT 6-69, TT 6-72 DISPLAY definition, Admin 12-30
Transcoder. See XC DLM trace, Admin 12-13, Admin 12-17
Translation, TT 5-1, TT 5-3, TT 5-30, TT 5-34, EFD configuration, Admin 12-35
TT 5-36 GIS on Workstation not working, Admin 12-3
Traps, Admin 8-5Admin 8-6, Admin 8-8Ad- GUI snapshot, Admin 12-54
min 8-10, Admin 8-12Admin 8-15, Admin Hardware
8-17Admin 8-20, Admin 8-22Admin 8-23 arch -k (system configuration), Admin 12-51,
Cisco 7206VXR WAN Router, Admin 10-58 Admin 12-53
Cisco AAA, Admin 10-64, Admin 10-94, Ad- dmesg (cpu), Admin 12-51Admin 12-52
min 10-99 iostat (disks), Admin 12-51Admin 12-52
Cisco PDSN Traps, Admin 10-50

Master Index U-U
prtconf, Admin 12-51 Threshold, Core 9-9Core 9-10, Core 9-12,

Hardware Verification Scripts, Admin 12-51 Core 9-38
Informix, Admin 12-24
IP address duplication, Admin 12-13, Admin
12-16
U
Unacknowledged alarm, OMCR Relay, Core 12-6
OMC release, Admin 12-54
Unacknowledged alarms, CC 3-9CC 3-12, CC
OMCR relay, Admin 12-57
3-31, CC 3-56, CC 3-293, CC 4-90
PM
Unassigned relays, TT 5-7, TT 5-15, TT
DBs, Admin 12-46
5-21TT 5-23
Directories and files, Admin 12-45
Uncleared alarms, CC 3-9CC 3-12, CC 3-31,
Logs, Admin 12-46
Reports do not arrive, Admin 12-9
CC 3-56
Undo OMCR Relay Off, Core 12-19
Setup, Admin 12-41
UNIX, CC 3-2
SNMP device problems, Admin 12-22
Unknown indicator, CC 3-8CC 3-9, CC
Software Download Manager Pre-checks, Ad-
3-11CC 3-13, CC 3-30CC 3-31
min 12-13
Unlock, CC 3-28, CC 3-243, CC 3-299CC
SUN Solaris, Admin 12-23
SwitchMATE, shutdown and restart, Admin
3-300
UNO Agents, Core 2-9, CC 2-9, TT 2-9, PM
12-38
2-9, Admin 2-9
Topo related tables, Admin 12-49
UNO Alarm Notification, Admin 6-1Admin
Topology, Admin 12-47
6-63
UNO
UNO Application Launcher, PM 6-3
Launcher and terminal configuration, Admin
UNO Application Launcher, menu, Core 2-24,
12-2
CC 2-24, TT 2-24, PM 2-24, Admin 2-24
Licenses, Admin 12-29
UNO Applications
Processes running, Admin 12-28
Applications not on Launcher, Core 2-22, CC
Restart, Admin 12-29
2-22, TT 2-22, PM 2-22, Admin 2-22
Verify topo_refresh, Admin 12-13Admin
Applications on Launcher, Core 2-18Core
12-14
WRT password, Admin 12-55
2-21, CC 2-18CC 2-21, TT 2-18TT
2-21, PM 2-18PM 2-21, Admin 2-18Ad-
WRT reports, Admin 12-9
min 2-21
Trunk Circuits
Applications on Solstice Enterprise Manager,
Core 2-23, CC 2-23, TT 2-23, PM 2-23,
3-173
Admin 2-23
EMX, Parent, CC 3-172
Invoking from Command Line, commands,
Core 2-27Core 2-28, CC 2-27CC 2-28,
Status Screen, CC 3-171CC 3-172
TT 2-27TT 2-28, PM 2-27PM 2-28, Ad-
Trunk Group, Core 9-83, PM 4-30
Trunk Groups, CC 3-10
min 2-27Admin 2-28
UNO configuration, PM 4-2PM 4-3, PM 4-20
TSU, Core 4-5, Core 4-8Core 4-9
UNO Documentation Suite, description, Core
Types
Device, Core 9-96
2-2Core 2-7, CC 2-2CC 2-7, TT 2-2TT
2-7, PM 2-2PM 2-7, Admin 2-2Admin 2-7
Measurement, Core 9-2, Core 9-7, Core 9-28
UNO Licenses. See Licenses, UNO
Record, Core 9-2, Core 9-81
UNO Manager, Core 12-1Core 12-5, Core
Report, Core 9-77
12-8Core 12-9, Core 12-16, Core
Statistical values, Core 9-67
12-21Core 12-22, CC 3-10, CC 3-44, CC
3-80, Admin 8-2Admin 8-3, Admin 8-5

V-V Master Index
Cells Performance Management, Admin 11-4, Ad-

Cell Name File, CC 3-65, CC 3-68 min 11-32
Name, CC 3-65, CC 3-68 System Checks, Admin 11-67
Type, CC 3-61, CC 3-63 Table Record Counting, Admin 11-2, Admin
Default State Colors, CC 3-92 11-14
Map Loading from, CC 3-27 Time Synchronization, Admin 11-4, Admin
UNO. See Troubleshooting, UNO 11-66
uno_alarm_doc.sh, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-47 Topo, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-20
uno_alarm_listener, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-49 Upgrade Hardware Configuration, Admin
uno_check_license, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-12 11-65
uno_cleanup, Admin 11-68 Utilities, help, Admin 11-5
uno_dlm_cli, Admin 11-2
uno_me_count.sh, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-13
V
uno_mis_sanity, Admin 11-67
Value measurement type, Core 9-7Core 9-8,
uno_print_app, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-13
Core 9-28, Core 9-30, Core 9-87, Core 9-89
uno_time_sync, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-66
Value Ranges. See Color, Command Center, Statis-
UNOcheckCron, Admin 11-68
tics
UNOcheckSwap, Admin 11-67
Version, CC 3-45, CC 3-184, CC 3-196, CC
UNO-OMCR Link, CC 3-13
3-219, CC 3-300
update_tbl, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-19
Reload, CC 3-304
Upgradable BTS, CC 3-127, CC 3-129CC
Version Report, TT 6-14, TT 6-20, TT 6-42TT
3-130
6-49, TT 6-66, TT 6-81
upgradeHardwareConfig, Admin 11-2
Version, UNO
Use Opened Window view option, TT 6-36TT
Retrieving information, Core 2-28, CC 2-28,
6-37
TT 2-28, PM 2-28, Admin 2-28
User
Versions, TT 6-1, TT 6-6, TT 6-8TT 6-9, TT
configuration tool, Admin 3-3
6-13TT 6-14, TT 6-21, TT 6-27, TT
create new user, Admin 3-4
6-30TT 6-33, TT 6-39, TT 6-43, TT 6-51,
delete user, Admin 3-4
quitting, Admin 3-9
TT 6-54, TT 6-56, TT 6-69TT 6-73, TT
6-76TT 6-77, TT 6-79TT 6-81, Admin
existing
8-2, Admin 8-4
deleting, Admin 3-7
Compare, TT 6-1, TT 6-42TT 6-43, TT 6-46
new
Non-standard, BTS, TT 6-1, TT 6-8, TT
adding to UNO, Admin 3-1
6-13TT 6-14, TT 6-29TT 6-30, TT 6-39,
defining, Admin 3-4
web server password, defining, Admin 3-6
TT 6-44TT 6-45, TT 6-76
Refresh, TT 6-31TT 6-33, TT 6-70TT 6-71
UNIX password, defining, Admin 3-5
Scheduling downloads, TT 6-67TT 6-74
User Defined Alarms
vi text editor, Admin 4-13
Japanese language support, Admin 7-2
commands, Admin 4-13
User mode, Admin 4-8
using, Admin 4-13
user_attr, Admin 11-3, Admin 11-30
View cells, CC 3-47
Utilities, Core 4-1, Core 9-90Core 9-93
View details, TT 5-1, TT 5-39
Alarms, Admin 11-4, Admin 11-43
View Matches Only, TT 6-24, TT 6-28TT 6-29
Common, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-6
View Options, TT 6-36TT 6-37
Informix, Admin 11-2, Admin 11-15
Open New Window, TT 6-36TT 6-37
Informix Tables, Admin 11-19
Use Opened Window, TT 6-36TT 6-37
Log, Dump, Configuration Files, Admin 11-67
View rules, Core 4-32Core 4-33

Master Index W-W
Viewer Navigating, Core 14-16

Menu bar, CC 3-38 Preferences, setting, Core 14-32Core 14-37
Viewers, CC 3-14, CC 3-37CC 3-38, CC Alarm filters, Core 14-33
3-43, CC 3-299 Detailed device severity, Core 14-36
Vocoder Processing Function. See VPF Summary device severity, Core 14-35
Vocoder Processing Unit. See VPU Security
Voice, CC 3-130, CC 3-136, CC 3-253, CC Procedures. See SSL Certificate
3-257 Protocols, Core 14-7
Volume Manager, Admin 4-1, Admin 4-7, Ad- SSL Certificate
min 4-9 Activating SSL mode, Core 14-9
VPF, Core 9-83, CC 3-165, CC 3-194CC Creating and installing, Core 14-8
3-197 Restarting server, Core 14-9
VPU, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core 9-76, Core State and Alarm Management interaction, Core
9-82Core 9-83, CC 3-157, CC 3-165CC 14-5
3-166, CC 3-192CC 3-204, CC 3-225CC System Requirements
3-226, CC 3-245CC 3-246, PM 4-3, PM Environment, Core 14-6
4-15, PM 4-26, PM 4-29PM 4-30 Security, Core 14-7
Links, CC 3-245CC 3-246 User, Core 14-7
VPULINK, CC 3-166, CC 3-198CC 3-199 Web applications, invoking, Core 2-25, CC
2-25, TT 2-25, PM 2-25, Admin 2-25
From browser, Core 2-25, CC 2-25, TT 2-25,
W PM 2-25, Admin 2-25
WAN, CC 3-139, CC 3-221CC 3-222, CC
Web Monitor
3-224, CC 3-227, CC 3-230, CC 3-250, CC Alarm
3-294CC 3-298
Details window, description, Core 8-28
WAP, Admin 8-16
Management tab, description, Core 8-23
WAP2UNO, Core 14-2
Monitor, invoking methods, Core 8-24
Alarms, monitoring, Core 14-29Core 14-31
Monitor, menu, Core 8-26
Alarm data, Core 14-29
Monitor, table sorting options, Core 8-27
Alarm details, Core 14-30
Monitor, viewing alarm details, Core 8-27
Devices, monitoring
Monitor, viewing alarms, Core 8-24
Detailed device alarms, Core 14-28
Client-server
Detailed devices, Core 14-27
Client, Core 8-3
Summary device alarms, Core 14-25
Client to server, requests, Core 8-3
Summary devices, Core 14-20
Server, Core 8-2
Display
Colors
Action buttons, functions, Core 14-15
Status colors, definitions, Core 8-5
Context, Core 14-13
Data sources, Core 8-4
Data display limit, Core 14-13
Device, Core 8-2Core 8-3, Core 8-13
Data refresh, Core 14-13
Details, Core 8-2Core 8-3, Core 8-17
Handset buttons, functions, Core 14-14
Details, viewing alarms from, Core 8-20
Navigating, Core 14-14
Details, window description, Core 8-18
Exiting, Core 14-19
Scope attributes, reference table, Core 8-38
General description, Core 14-2Core 14-5
Display limit, Core 8-5
Help
Filter, Default. See also Search Filter, Core 8-5
Access, use, Core 14-17
Invoking. See Invoking, Web Monitor
Invoking, Core 14-10
Japanese language support, Admin 7-7
Main Menu, Core 14-18

X-Z Master Index
Main function tabs. See state management, Icon, CC 3-30, CC 3-217

alarm management, Core 8-9 Invoking Status Screen, CC 3-36, CC 3-158,
Search CC 3-174
Alarm, narrow scope, Core 8-36 IWUSPAN, CC 3-108, CC 3-211
Alarm, wide scope, Core 8-37 Links
Dialog, description, Core 8-29 FEP, CC 3-149, CC 3-151CC 3-152, CC
Filter, Core 8-34 3-174, CC 3-177
Parameters, reference table, Core 8-40 IWU, CC 3-212
Types, Core 8-29 MSIP, CC 3-177CC 3-178
Use in alarm management, Core 8-34Core Logical Layout Display, CC 3-176
8-37 Network Element
Use in state management, Core 8-31 Physical Status, CC 3-177
State Status, CC 3-177
Management tab, description, Core 8-12 OMCR, Parent, CC 3-174CC 3-175
Management, defining scope of data, Core Shortcut Menu, CC 3-177
8-12 Status Screen, CC 3-175
Monitor, menu, Core 8-16 Terminus of IWUSPAN, CC 3-211
Monitor, viewing alarms, Core 8-21 XC Device-OMCR Link, CC 3-13
Monitor, viewing device details, Core 8-17 XCDR, Core 9-88
State and Alarm Management interaction, Core
8-3, Core 8-20
Z
Table display shortcuts, Core 8-10
Zoom, CC 3-27, CC 3-177, CC 3-179, CC
Weighting, Compare historical and recent values,
Core 9-11 3-268, CC 3-300
Window, CC 3-37CC 3-39
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), Admin
8-16
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). See
WAP2UNO
Wireless Gateway, CC 3-210
Workday, Core 9-13, Core 9-40Core 9-41,
Core 9-50, Core 9-52Core 9-53, Core
9-69Core 9-74, Core 9-96Core 9-97
Working Environment, CC 3-2
X
XC, Core 4-21, Core 9-30, Core 9-38, Core
9-76, Core 9-83Core 9-84, Core 9-89, CC
3-173CC 3-179, PM 4-3, PM 4-15, PM
4-26, PM 4-30PM 4-31
Cage, CC 3-175
Cards, CC 3-175
Connection to IWUSPAN, CC 3-212
3-33, CC 3-177
Devices, CC 3-175
Frames, CC 3-175

MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office.
All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright 2004 Motorola, Inc.
Java Technology and/or J2ME : Java and all other Javabased marks are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX : UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
*68P09257A19-A*
68P09257A19-A

Uno

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Uno

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical

U NIVERSAL N ETWORK O PERATIONS (UNO)

SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.3

The body pages of this manual are printed on recycled paper.

UNO Core Features

Chapter 1: Monitoring the Cellular Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

Chapter 2: UNO Basic Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features i

Invoking UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Chapter 3: Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

ii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features iii

Actions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

iv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

Chapter 4: Alarm Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features v

LPAC: Controller Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Chapter 5: Large Scale Alarm Manager Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

vi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Removing Hosts from a User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Chapter 6: Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features vii

Displaying All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

viii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Central Alarm Acknowledge Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

Chapter 7: Historical Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Chapter 8: Web Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features ix

Monitoring Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Chapter 9: PM Measurements & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

x UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Right Mouse Button Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xi

Multiple Item Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75

Chapter 10: PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

xii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Scheduling PM Reports in Single Reports Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xiii

Using JClass Charts to View Graphical Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Chapter 11: Filter Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

xiv UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Chapter 12: OMCR Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xv

Chapter 13: Element Manager Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Chapter 14: WAP for UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

xvi UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Interaction with Other UNO Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xvii

UNO Core Features

Figure No. Figure Title Page No.

1-1 Connectivity of UNO over the Cellular Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xix

Figure No. Figure Title Page No.

3-22 UNO Configuration Drop-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

xx UNO Core Features March 1, 2004

Figure No. Figure Title Page No.

5-6 Large Scale User Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

March 1, 2004 UNO Core Features xxi

Figure No. Figure Title Page No.

8-12 State Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

xxii UNO Core Features March 1, 2004